OUINITO EN AMERICA
COPYRIGHT, 1940,
BY
HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY, INC.
74P1
PRINTED IN THE
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
PREFACE
Quinito en America is designed for use with second year classes
in Junior and Senior High Schools. A companion volume for
the work of the first year, Quinito en Espana, was published six
months prior to the appearance of this volume.
Plan
Quinito en America follows the plan of Quinito en Espana in
its presentation of cultural material against a background of
travel and adventure Here, however, the setting for the travels
is Spanish America and those parts of the United States most
affected by Spanish influence. Quinito and his family come for
a visit to relatives in the new world, they land in New York,
set out for California where an uncle has resided for many years.
Their trip is arranged to allow for stopovers at points of par-
ticular interest to them — New Orleans, Saint Augustine, San
Antonio, Albuquerque, Los Angeles, San Francisco, and other
cities of the east and west. The group goes on to visit relatives
in Mexico and South America, travelling by air, boat, and rail.
There is, in each of the chapters of the text, a great deal of ma-
terial dealing with the historical background of the Spanish
settlements in the United States, and of the Hispanic American
countries. Additional information is given in English on the
subject matter treated in the Spanish texts.
Arrangement
Quinito en America is divided into sixty chapters, each with
a set of reading and a set of grammar exercises. The major
points of grammar not treated in Quinito en Espana are intro-
duced in the book and studied in detail in the grammar sections.
ill
iv PREFACE
The vocabulary is limited to as low a number of words of prac-
tical value as possible, and the maximum number of new entries
per chapter is set at twenty.
In this book a departure is made from the usual type of illus-
trations employed in elementary texts. Dealing as it docs with
many scenes from our own country, with many others from the
neighboring South American republics, it is highly advisable to
make the subject matter as real and attractive as possible to
the student. Consequently thirty-two pages of fine photographs
are placed in groups of four pages each throughout the volume.
Each group of pictures has a story to tell in itself, the first for
example deals with Hispanic background in the eastern part of
the United States, the second and third treat the southwest and
California, the remaining sections portray Mexico and Central
America, Colombia, and Peru, Chile, and the Argentine.
A detailed treatment of the aim and scope of this basal series
and suggestions for its most advantageous use will be found in
the preface to Quinito en Espana.
Acknowledgments
To Sefiora Ana L. de Oiler the author is indebted for careful
reading of the proofs of this book. Proper acknowledgment is
made in the illustrations to the various private, governmental,
and commercial organizations which have allowed use to be made
of them. L A w
August, 1940.
CONTENTS
1. A LAS PUERTAS DE UN MUNDO NUEVO I
2. LA SALIDA DEL MUELLE ... 8
3. LOS II1SPANOS DE NUEVA YORK 13
4. HEROES ENCANTADOS . . . . 2O
5. PLATOS Y PALABRAS 26
6. COMJENDO A LA ESPANOLA EN NUEVA YORK ... 32
PRIMERA LECCION DE REPASO ... 40
7. VlSITANDO LA CIUDAD . . 44
8. LOS TURISTAS SE DESPIDEN DE NUEVA YORK ... 51
9. EN LA HERMOSA CAPITAL DE WASHINGTON .... 57
10. CON RUMBO A LA FLORIDA ... 64
11. TlERRA DE SOL Y ALEGR1A . . ... 71
12. UNA PUERTA ABIERTA EN LOS C1ELOS AMERICANOS . 79
SEGUNDA LECCION DE REPASO 86
13. EL PANAMERICANISMO 90
14. LA ODISEA DE HERNANDO DE SOTO . . .98
15. LOS ANIMALES DOM^STICOS EN AMERICA . 105
16. NUEVA ORLEANS, ESPANOLA Y FRANCESA . m
17. OTRA ODISEA MEMORABLE, LA DE CABEZA DE VACA. 121
1 8. EN SAN ANTONIO DE BE JAR . . 130
TERCERA LECCION DE REPASO 137
19. LAS MISIONES DE TEJAS .... . . . . 142
20. PALABRAS ESPANOLAS EN EL VOCABULARIO NORTE-
AMEBICANO 148
21. DE SANTA FE A SANTA FE 155
22. INDIOS E HISPANOAMERICANOS 163
23. LA SANTA FE MODERNA 170
24. FRAY MARCOS DE NIZA 178
CUARTA LECCI6N DE REPASO 185
25. EL GRAN CANON 190
26. CUENTOS ACERCA DE LOS MISIONEROS 198
v
vi CONTENTS
27. REUNION EN Los ANGELES 206
28. EL CAPITAN PORTOLA Y EL PADRE JuNfpERO SERRA 214
29. EN LOS ESTUD10S CINEMATOGRAFICOS . . . 222
30. Los GOMEZ SE DESPIDEN DE CALIFORNIA LA BELLA 229
QUINTA LECCION DE REPASO ... . 238
31. DE Los ANGELES A MKJICO .... . 243
32. EN LA CAPITAL DE MEJ1CO . 251
33. UN POCO DE msTORiA 259
34. VAGANDO POR LA CAPITAL .268
35. UNA EXCURSION A XOCIIIMILCO 276
36. ASUNTOS DE LENGUA 284
SEXTA LECCION DE REPASO 290
37. CHARROS Y CHINAS POBLANAS 294
38. EXCURSION A PUEBLA 301
39. CUERNAVACA, TAXCO, AcAPULCO 308
40. PlRAMIDES Y CARRETERAS . ... 315
41. TOROS Y MINAS DE PLATA 325
42. EMPERADORES MEJICANOS . . 333
SEPTIMA LECCION DE REPASO . . . .342
43. ALAS SOBRE CENTROAMERICA . . . 346
44. EL ISTMO DE PANAMA ... ^5
45. EN LA CIUDAD DE LOS REYES . . . . 364
46. CUZCO INCAICO Y ESP\NOL . . . 372
47. POR EL LAGO TITICACA II\STA LA PAZ . . . 380
48. BOLIVIA VIVE CON LA CABEZA EN LAS NUBES 388
OCTAVA LECCION DE REPASO ... 397
49. POR TIERRAS CHILENAS .... 401
50. MENDOZA Y sus RECUERDOS DE SAN MARTIN . . . 409
51. EN LA SEGUNDA CIUDAD DE LAS AMERICAS 417
52. POR LAS TIENDAS PORTENAS ... 426
53. LA FUNDACION DE BUENOS AlRES 434
54. MAS MARAVILLAS DE LA CAPITAL PORTENA .... 442
NO VENA LECCI6N DE REPASO 451
55. LA ARGENTINA, TIERRA DE pROMisi6N 455
56. CON RUMBO A LA ESTANCIA 464
CONTENTS vii
57. « Los TRES OMBUES » 472
58. LOS GAUCHOS DE OTROS TIEMPOS 478
SPANISH-AMERICAN NOVELS THAT HAVE BEEN TRANS-
LATED INTO ENGLISH 487
5Q. VlDA EN LA ESTANCIA . . 489
60. TERMINA LA ODISEA AMERICANA DE LOS GOMEZ . . 496
DECIMA LECCION DE REPASO . . 506
SURVEY OF GRAMMAR . 511
A. PUNCTUATION . . . 513
B. PRONUNCIATION 515
C. WORD ORDER . . . 521
D. SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
I. VERBS ... . 522
II. SUBSTANTIVES . ... 530
III. ADJECTIVES ... 537
IV. ADVERBS . . . 544
V. PREPOSITIONS 545
E. IDIOMATIC USAGE . 549
F. LIST OF GIVEN NXMES . 556
G. CL \SSROOM EXPRESSIONS . 558
VERB APPENDIX . 563
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 593
VOCABULARY i
INDEX Ixvii
200 400 600 MO 1000
CAPlTULO I
A LAS PUERTAS DE UN MUNDO NUEVO
For la tarde de un dia de sol en el mes de octubre, entra
en la bahia de Nueva York un gran barco trasatlantico
espanol.
En la cubierta del barco se ve un pequeno grupo de
viajeros que miran, maravillados y alegres, la gran ciudad 5
a la que se acercan.
En este grupo se encuentran una seriora, una seiiorita
y dos jovenes. Es la familia Gomez: dona Ana y sus
hijos Ouinito, Pepe y Rosa. Los conocimos cuando vivian
en Astorga, Espana, y cuando los dos muchachos de la 10
familia hacian un viaje a Madrid acompanados de su
burro y de su perro.
Han pasado los anos. Casi son hombres ya Quinito y
Pepe, y siguen deseando ver el mundo. Han viajado
mucho por todas partes de Esparia y conocen bien aquel 15
pais. Ahora vienen a visitar a los Estados Unidos y
otros paises del Nucvo Mundo.
Gracias a los hermanos de la senora de Gomez, la fa-
milia ha venido a America. Uno de estos hermanos, don
Ramon Segre y Loja, vive en California. Otro, Felipe 20
de nombre, vive en la ciudad capital de Mejico. El ter-
cero, don Tomas, tiene una gran estancia en la Repiiblica
Argentina. Hace anos que estos senores son ciudadanos
de los paises en que residen y trabajan, y todos han
prosperado mucho. 25
2 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Estos hermanos escribieron a dona Ana pidiendole que
viniera con sus hijos a visitarlos en America. Movida
por los deseos de los ninos de viajar y queriendo volver
a ver a sus parientes, la buena mujer acepto esta in-
30 vitacion y el dinero que le enviaron los hermanos con que
hacer el viaje.
— j Que maravillosa ciudad ! — exclama Pepe mientras
el barco pasa lentamente por las aguas de la bahia y los
enormes edificios de Nueva York se presentan a los ojos
35 maravillados del grupo.
— i Y alii a la izquierda se levanta la estatua de la
Libertad ! — dice Rosa. — \ Que grande es ! Es una
estatua magnifica que promete la libertad y la felicidad
a todos los que vienen a este pais. Vamos a visitar con
40 gusto a los Estados Unidos y a su primera ciudad, Nueva
York.
Todos estan muy ocupados en mirar los altos edificios
y los muchos barcos de la bahia. De pronto ven que el
barco se encuentra al lado del muelle.
VOCABULARIO
In the lesson vocabularies are given only words and expressions
which did not occur in the first book of the series, Quinito en Es-
pana.
bahia f . bay izquierdo, -a left, left-hand
ciudadano m. citizen maravillado, -a amazed, aston-
cubierta f . deck (of a ship) ished
deseo m. desire, wish muelle m. dock, pier
estancia f . stock farm (in Argen- presentar to present; presentarse
tina) to present oneself, appear
estatua f . statue prosperar to prosper
felicidad f . happiness residir to reside
invitation f . invitation trasatlantico, -a transatlantic
A LAS PUERTAS DE UN MUNDO NUEVO 3
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
Idioms which were used in the preceding book are sometimes in-
cluded in the "Modismos y expresiones" of the present volume.
a la izquierda at the left to come (asking her that she
de nombre by name come)
hace anos que son ciudadanos seguir deseando to keep on wish-
they have been citizens for ing
years se ve is seen
pidiendole que viniera asking her se encuentra is found, is
volver a ver to see again
NOMBRES GEOGRAFICOS
America f. America Republica Argentina f. Argentine
Mejico m. Mexico Republic
Nueva York f. New York
NOMBRES Y APELLIDOS
(Names and family names)
Don Ramon Segre y Loja. Don is the courtesy title used only
before the given or baptismal name, here, Ramon. (For example,
this gentleman might be referred to as: don Ramon, don Ramon
Segre y Loja, or as senor Segre y Loja.) Before a woman's given
name dona is similarly used. Neither don nor dona has an exact
equivalent in English, nor may either stand alone, or be used im-
mediately before the family name. Senor and senora may be used
before the family name, or before don and dona, followed by the
given and family names: senor don Ramon Segre y Loja. Fre-
quently, a man or woman has several baptismal names: Ramon
Alfonso Vicente (Segre y Loja), Raymond Alphonso Vincent; Ana
Maria de los Dolores (Segre y Loja), Anna Mary of the Sorrows.
Segre is the family name (apellido) inherited from this man's
father. It continues down through the generations of the family.
Loja is the name of his mother's family, her "maiden name" in-
herited from her father. The man's mother's family name follows
4 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
his father's family name and is usually (not always) connected with
it by y. Sometimes a Spaniard or Spanish American, on going to
live in an English-speaking country, where the complexities of Span-
ish names are not understood (and where the last name, his mother's,
which appears on his calling or business card, would cause him to
be addressed by his mother's name), either suppresses entirely the
family name of his mother or uses a one-letter abbreviation of it:
Alfredo Martinez Z., where Z stands, say, for Zdrate.
Dona Ana's full name, since she is a sister of don Ramon, was,
before marriage, Ana Segre y Loja. When she married senor Gomez,
her name became Ana Segre de Gomez, Gomez's Ana Segre, and
she dropped Loja, her mother's family name. While her husband
was living, she was usually called la senora de Gomez. Since she
is a widow, she would be properly spoken of as dona Ana Segre
viuda (widow) de Gomez, or simply, la senora de Gomez.
Dona Ana's children, to give them their full names, are Joaquin
(nicknamed Quinito) Gomez y Segre, Rosa Gomez y Segre, and
Jose (nicknamed Pepe) Gomez y Segre.
If Rosa should marry senor don Rafael Prieto y Llano, what
would then be her full name ? And if she had a son called Juan,
John, what would be his complete name ?
If Quinito were to marry Maria Silva y Pla, what would be his
wife's complete name ? And if they had a son called Pedro, Peter,
what would his full name be ?
Los Gomez, the Gomez family. Los Segre, the Segres. In Spanish
the family name is never pluralized.
EJERCTCIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions :
i . <; Cuando entra el barco trasatlantico en la bahia de Nueva
York? 2. £ Quien se ve en la cubierta del barco ? 3. <; Que
hacian los muchachos cuando los conocimos en Espana?
4. £ Que siguen deseando los hermanos? 5. £ Donde residen
los hermanos de dona Ana ? 6. ± Que enviaron ellos a la
senora de Gomez? 7. i Que se presenta a los ojos mara-
A LAS PUERTAS DE UN MUNDO NUEVO 5
villados de la familia ? 8. Mientras pasa el barco por la
bahia, £ que ven los viajeros a la izquierda ? 9. <i Que pro-
mete la estatua de la Libertad a los que vienen a los Estados
Unidos? 10. £ En que estan ocupados estos cspafioles mien-
tras el barco se acerca al rnuelle ?
II. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. Vemos a la izquierda la i. We see the statue — .
estatua.
2. El scgundo hermano, Fe- 2. The second brother, — , re-
lipe de nombrc, reside en sides in Mexico.
Mejico.
3. Volvemos a ver el barco. 3. We — the ship.
4. Ellos se acercan al muelle. 4. They — the dock.
5. Hace afios que deseamos 5. We — for years,
viajar.
6. El barco se encuentra en la 6. The ship — in the bay.
bahia.
7. Sigo queriendo verlos. 7. I — to see them.
8. Los muchachos se ven en 8. The boys — on the deck,
la cubierta.
III. Divide into syllables the following words; underline
in each word the syllable that is stressed:
espafiol; maravillado; familia; paises; izquierda; edificios
IV. Write your name in full in Spanish fashion.
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
(Grammar review)
i. Gender of nouns.
All Spanish nouns are either masculine or feminine. Those
denoting male beings are masculine : el padre; those denoting
6 QUINITO EN AMERICA
female beings are feminine: la madre. Those denoting in-
animate things are usually masculine if they end in -o: el
barco; but la mono, the hand. They are usually feminine if
they end in ~a: la estatua; but el dia, the day. The gender
of those ending in other vowels or in consonants must be
learned: la parte, the part; el viaje, the journey; el arbol, the
tree. Usually those that end in -d, -ion or -z are feminine:
la ciudad; la invitation, the invitation; la luz, the light. Those
that end in ~ma> -ta or -pa are usually masculine: el pro-
grama, the program; el poeta, the poet; el mapa, the map.
2. Plural of nouns.
Nouns that end in a vowel usually add s to form the
plural: barco, barcos; familia, familias; pariente, parientes.
Those that end in a consonant add es: ciudad, ciudades;
senor, senores. Those that end in -z change z to c before
adding es: luz, luces; lapiz, lapices, pencil, pencils. Days
of the week ending in -es are unchanged in the plural: el
lunes, los lunes.
3. Synopsis of a regular verb of the first conjugation, first
person singular.
Infinitive: visitor, to visit. Gerund: visitando, visiting.
Past Participle: visitado, visited.
SIMPLE TENSES COMPOUND TENSES
Present: visito Present Perfect : he visitado
Imperfect: visitaba Pluperfect: habia visitado
Preterite: visite POLITE IMPERATIVE
Future: visitor e 0. 7 . ., T7,
Singular: visite Vd.
Post-preterite: visitana D7 7 ... T7,
v Plural: visiten Yds.
Give the meaning in English of the above verb forms.
Give the conjugation in full of each of the five simple tenses
and of the two compound tenses.
A LAS PUERTAS DE UN MUNDO NUEVO 7
I. Use the proper form of the definite article (el or Id) be-
fore each of the following nouns:
i. — ano. 2. — bahia. 3. — ciudad. 4. — sefiorita.
5. — joven (m.). 6. — viaje. 7. — hombre. 8. — parte.
9. — familia. 10. — luz. n. — libertad. 12. — leccion.
13. — viernes.
II. Make plural the nouns of I and use the form of the
definite article which is then required before each.
III. Use the proper form of the indefinite article (un or
und) before each noun of I.
IV. Give a synopsis in the third person singular of the verb
mirar, to look at; in the first person plural of major, to travel.
V. Say and write in Spanish the following short sentences,
expressing also in Spanish the subject pronouns (yo, I; tu, you,
thou; el, he; ellaf she; usted, you; nosotros, -as, we; vos-
otros,-as, you; ellos,they; ellas,they; ustedes, you).
i. We pass. 2. We passed. 3. We were passing. 4. They
exclaim. 5. They have exclaimed. 6. She has looked at.
7. You (Vd.) prospered. 8. You (Yds.) are prospering. 9. He
will accept. 10. We had accepted, n. I sent. 12. I would
send. 13. Look at (Vd.). 14. Don't look at (Yds.). 15. They
were entering. 16. Had they entered? 17. We shall visit.
1 8. She was travelling. 19. They worked. 20. Have you
(Vd.) worked?
CAPlTULO II
LA SALIDA DEL MUELLE
Dona Ana mira a la mucha gente que hay en el muelle,
buscando a su hermano don Ramon, que habia prometido
venir de California a recibirlos a su llegada a Nueva
York. For fin lo ve y muy excitada le grita :
5 — j Aqui estamos, Ramon ! Ramon, <: no nos ves ?
En aquel momento su hermano ve a la buena senora
y empieza a agitar locamente la mano. Toda la familia
le responde de la misma manera.
For fin los Gomez abandonan el barco en que cruzaron
10 el Atlantico y al que subieron en el puerto de Vigo,
Espana. Les saluda don Ramon con alegria. £l y sus
sobrinos, Quinito, Rosa y Pepe, se conocen aqui por
primera vez, pues don Ramon salio de Espana hace
aiios, antes de nacer los ninos.
15 Primero tienen que pasar por la aduana. Don Ramon
sabe bien lo que hay que hacer y lo arregla todo. Mien-
tras tanto, los ninos miran bien a su tio. Dice Rosa:
— Me gusta nuestro tio. Me gusta su manera de
hablar y de sonreir.
20 — Si — responde Pepe. — Se ve que es todo un
hombre. Me es muy simpatico.
— Y sabe ingles — dice Quinito. — Eso tiene impor-
tancia, porque nosotros no sabemos casi nada de la len-
gua de este pais.
25 En este momento se acerca don Ramon diciendo:
8
LA SALIDA DEL MUELLE 9
— Bueno. Todo esta arreglado. «i Estais preparados
para salir ? Iremos al hotel donde vamos a pasar bastante
tiempo.
Salio el grupo a la calle. Alii todos subieron a un
taximetro y pronto estaban pasando por la famosa Quinta 30
Avenida, calle arriba, en direction a su hotel. Quedaron
sorprendidos los nifios al ver en las calles los numerosos
automoviles, las grandes multitudes de gente que andaban
tan de prisa, y las muchas y enormes tiendas ricas.
— <; Que os parece Nueva York ? — pregunto don Ra- 35
num.
— Maravilloso — contesto Quinito. — Hay mas ani-
mation que en Madrid o Barcelona, y mas gente. Pero
para mi todas las grandes ciudades son iguales.
— No digas eso — dijo Rosa. — Ni Barcelona ni 40
Madrid tiene la gran riqueza que aqui se ve.
— Pero son ciudades bellas y en ellas no hay tanto
ruido — dijo dona Ana.
— Here you arc ! — dijo en este momento el conductor
del taxi al detenerse a las puertas del Hotel Plaza. 45
— Dice que ya hemos llegado — explico don Ramon.
Y los viajeros bajaron.
VOCABULARIO
aduana f . customs-house multitud f. multitude, crowd
agitar to wave , puerto m. port, harbor
animation f. animation, movement riqueza f. wealth, riches
arriba up, upward salida f. departure
avenida f. avenue simpdtico, -a congenial, likeable,
conductor m driver nice, sympathetic
direction f. direction sorprender to surprise
igual dike, equal, same taximetro (o taxi) m. taxicab, taxi
10 QUINITO EN AMERICA
MODISMOS Y EXPRESTONES
al ver on seeing; al detenerse on mientras tanto meanwhile
stopping no dig as eso don't say thai
antes de nacer los ninos before por fin at last, finally
the children were born i que os parece ? what do you
calle arriba up the street think of?
de la misma man era in the same se conocen aqui por primer a vez
way make each other's acquaintance
en direction a in the direction of here for the first time
hay que hacer must be done todo un hombre all of a man;
me gusta I like quite a man
NOMBRES GEOGRAFICOS
Atldntico m. Atlantic. Vigo, a city on the northwestern coast of
Spain. Its harbor is one of the most important in the Peninsula,
and one of the European ports nearest to the United States.
EJERCTCIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. Don Ramon habia prometido — . 2. El senor ve a su
hermana y empieza a — . 3. Los Gomez abandonan el barco
en que — . 4. Don Ramon habia salido de Espana antes — .
5. Los viajeros tienen que — . 6. Rosa dice que le gusta — .
7. Pepe dice que su tio le — . 8. Los Gomez no saben nada
— . 9. En la Quint a Avenida vieron — .
II. Try to give in Spanish synonyms or definitions of the
following words: multitud; avenida; sobrino; tio; hotel;
tienda; viajero.
III. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. I am going up street. i. Voy — .
2. On seeing the crowd, he 2. — la multitud, se detuvo.
stopped.
3. They speak in the same way. 3. Hablan — .
LA SALIDA DEL MUELLE 11
4. At last they left the boat. 4. — abandonaron el barco.
5. They set out in the direction 5. Salen — muelle.
of the dock.
6. I don't know what must be 6. No se lo que — .
done.
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
1. Agreement of adjectives.
Adjectives must agree in gender and number with the nouns
they modify. Those that end in -o in the masculine singular
change -o to -a to make the feminine singular form: bueno,
buena. Those that end in any other letter than -o remain un-
changed in the feminine: un libro facil; una leccion facil.
Adjectives of nationality ending in a consonant add -a to
form the feminine: un barco espanol; una ciudad espanola.
2. Plural of adjectives.
Adjectives arc made plural in the same ways as nouns:
bueno, buenos; grande, grandes; igual, iguales; espanol,
espanoles; feroz, feroces.
3. Position of adjectives.
Descriptive adjectives usually follow the noun they modify
and then have literal and matter-of-fact meaning: los nifios
alegres; las senoras simpaticas. If they precede their nouns,
descriptive adjectives usually then have subjective, figurative
or emotional meaning: la buena senora, the good lady; el
magnifico barco, the fine ship.
Demonstrative adjectives and those denoting quantity,
possession or number usually precede their nouns: este barco,
this ship; muchas tiendas, many shops; mis parientes, my
relatives; ires calles, three streets.
4. Use of the preposition a before a noun object.
When the direct object of a verb is a proper noun or one de-
noting a specific, definite person it is preceded by the prepo-
12 QUINITO EN AMERICA
sition a, untranslatable in English: visitan a Nueva York,
they visit New York; conocen al hombre, they know the man.
5. Synopsis of a regular verb of the second conjugation, in the
third person singular:
Infinitive: responder, to answer. Gerund: respondiendo,
answering. Past Participle: respondido, answered.
SIMPLE TENSES COMPOUND TENSES
Present: responde Present Perfect: ha respondido
Imperfect: respondia Pluperfect: habia respondido
Preterite: respondio pOLITE IMPERATIVE
Future: responder a c. 7 . , ...
_. . Singular: responda Vd.
Post-preterite: respondena ni 7 * . ...
r Plural: respondan Yds.
Give the meanings in English of the above verb forms.
Give the conjugation in full of each of the five simple tenses
and of the two compound tenses.
I. Place properly, before or after the noun, the Spanish
equivalent of the English adjectives :
i. (wonderful) la — ciudad — . 2. (beautiful) la — sefiora
— . 3. (so mucK) — ruido — . 4. (high) el — edificio — .
5. (nice) el — tio — . 6. (this) — hotel — . 7. (our) — calle.
II. Make plural the phrases of I.
III. Make singular the following phrases:
i. los jovenes altos. 2. las muchachas espanolas. 3. las
luces blancas. 4. los barcos ingleses. 5. las lecciones dificiles.
IV. Give a synopsis in the third person plural of vender,
to sell; in the first person singular of prometer, to promise.
V. Express entirely in Spanish the following sentences:
i. Conocemos the gentlemen. 2. <;No conoce Vd. New York?
3. Vamos a visitar our uncle. 4. Saludaron their friends.
CAPfTULO III
LOS HISPANOS DE NUEVA YORK
Don Ramon conocia bien la vida norteamericana, pero
para el era interesante ver cuanto gozaban sus parientes
de todo lo que veian y hacian en Nueva York.
Las senoras, dona Ana y Rosa, pasaban muchas horas
en las tiendas y en los cines. Don Ramon y los muchachos 5
recorrieron la ciudad en autobus y en taxi. Fueron a
ver varios partidos de futbol y el tio explico como era
diferente este juego norteamericano del futbol espanol.
Todos visitaron el Museo Metropolitano de Arte y el
Museo de la Sociedad Hispanica, donde gozaron enor- 10
memente de las cosas de arte espanol que les recordaban
a su querida Espana.
Quedaron bastante sorprendidos al poder comprar y
leer periodicos en espanol. Supieron que en los barrios
de Harlem y Washington Heights, en Manhattan, y en 15
ciertos barrios de Brooklyn habia mucha gente de raza
espanola, que gozaban en los cines de peliculas habladas
en espanol. Estas peliculas venian de Mejico o de la
Argentina.
En estos barrios hispanos visitaron tiendas en que oye- 20
ron hablar solo el espanol. En las grandes tiendas de
la ciudad habia casi siempre un departamento para gente
hispana, con guias e interpretes muy atentos.
— Parece que aqui hay muchos que hablan espanol —
dijo Quinito un dia. 25
13
14 QUINITO EN AMERICA
— Si — respondio el tio. — Se dice que hay mas de
doscientos mil hispanos en Nueva York.
— <j De donde vienen ? — pregunto Pepe.
— De todas partes de la America Espanola: de Mejico,
30 Cuba, Puerto Rico, la Repiiblica Dominicana, Centro
America, Colombia, Venezuela. Pocos son los espanoles
de Espana. Existen aqui numerosas sociedades de gente
hispana, las que sirven de centros para los de raza es-
panola. A la verdad, un hispano puede vivir en Nueva
35 York largos anos sin saber mucho ingles, estando siempre
entre amigos de su raza.
— Asi parecc — contesto Quinito. — Pero yo no es-
taria contento viviendo asi. Yo aprenderia bien la lengua
inglesa, para poder gozar de lleno de la vida de este mara-
40 villoso pais.
— Tienes razon — dijo don Ramon a su sobrino.
— Fue por eso que al venir a los Estados Unidos lo
primero que hice fue aprender el ingles y vivir con gente
que no sabfa espafiol.
VOCABULARIO
atento, -a attentive thing) from Spain or Spanish
barrio m. ward, section America
centra m. center, headquarters interprete m. and f. interpreter
cierto, -a certain, a certain juego m. game, play
departamento m. department metropolitano, -a metropolitan
gozar (ce) lo enjoy periodico m. newspaper
guia m. and f. guide raza L race (of people)
hispdnico, -a Hispanic recordar (ue) to recall; lo re-
hispano Hispanic person (or member; to remind
sociedad f . society
LOS HISPANOS DE NUEVA YORK 15
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a la verdad in truth, indeed oir hablar to hear spoken
de lleno fully se dice it is said
de todas paries from everywhere servir (i) de to serve as
gozar de to enjoy supieron they learned (from
habia there was, there were saber)
lo primer o the first thing tener razon to be right
NOTAS
Centra America (o la America Central), Central America. Re-
publica Dominicana, Dominican Republic.
The Metropolitan Museum of Art, New York, contains several
fine masterpieces of Spanish painting. There are pictures by
Velazquez, Murillo, Zurbaran, El Greco, Goya, Sorolla and other
Spanish artists. On exhibition also are the examples of Spanish
sculpture, ceramics, textiles and metal work from the Romanesque
through the Renaissance periods. (See pages 350-1 of Quinito en Es-
pana.)
The building of the Hispanic Society of America, situated at
1 56th Street and Broadway, is both a museum and a library. The
museum possesses a valuable collection of works by Spanish masters
from early days to the present. In one hall are shown superb murals
of Joaquin Sorolla (1863-1923), representing the different regions of
Spain. See "Castilla," which is reproduced on the outside cover
of Quinito en Espana. They were painted by the artist for the
museum. Others by Goya and different Catalonian and Spanish-
American painters represent the rich and varied contributions of
Spain and Spanish America to world art.
The library contains many rare books in Spanish and is one of the
most valuable collections that exist outside of Spain.
The founder of the Hispanic Society, Mr. Archer M. Huntington,
has supplied copious funds from his personal fortune to make of the
museum and library, inaugurated in 1904, a great monument to
Hispanic culture. He also restored the house of Cervantes in
Valladolid, Spain, and helped to make of it a museum in which are
16 QUINITO EN AMERICA
preserved things connected with the life and times of Cervantes
(see Quinito en Espana, pages 223-5). Mrs. Huntington (Anna
Hyatt) is a sculptress known throughout the Hispanic world for her
statue of the Cid, which is on the grounds of the Museum and copies
of which are found in Buenos Aires, Sevilla, San Diego and San
Francisco.
The Cid (el Cid), Rodrigo Ruy Diaz de Bivar (io3o?-io9p), a
partly legendary but an undoubtedly great and doughty warrior
who served the kings of Castile in wars against the Moorish invaders
and later, as a free lance, fought against both Christian kings and
Moorish rulers. He is the national hero of Spain and about him
were woven tales and poems which are among the first monuments
of Spanish literature.
EJERCTCIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. Los parientcs de don Ramon gozaron dc lo que veian.
2. Dona Ana y Rosa fueron a ver varios partidos de futbol.
3. El juego norteamericano de futbol es cl mismo que se ve en
Espafia. 4. En ciertos barrios de Nueva York hay mucha
gente de raza espanola. 5. En el Museo de la Sociedad
Hispanica se encuentran muchas cosas de arte frances. 6. En
los cines de los barrios hispanos se pueden ver peliculas
habladas en espanol. 7. Todos los hispanos de Nueva York
vienen de Espana. 8. Las sociedades hispanas de Nueva York
son pocas. 9. Un hispano no puede vivir en Nueva York sin
saber ingles. 10. Si un hispano aprende ingles puede gozar de
lleno dc la vida norteamericana. 1 1 . Lo primero que hizo don
Ramon al vcnir a los Estados Unidos fue aprender el espanol.
II. Match the name of the country with the adjective that
indicates a person or thing of that country. Give the English
meaning of the adjective.
LOS HISPANOS DE NUEVA YORK 17
Norte America colombiano
Mejico portorriqueno
Cuba centroamericano
Puerto Rico mejicano
Republica Dominicana norteamcricano
Centro America venezolano
Colombia dominicano
Venezuela cubano
III. Make the Spanish sentence equivalent to the English:
1. They learned that you i. — que Vd. estaba aqui.
were here.
2. You heard Spanish spoken 2. Vds. — aqui el espafiol.
here.
3. In truth he is a good in- 3. — el es un buen interprete.
terprcter.
4. He was right. 4. El — .
5. This museum serves as an 5. Este museo — centro de
art center. arte.
6. There were many people in 6. — mucha gente en la
the shop. tienda.
REPASO DE GRAMATTCA
1. Los de raza espanola. Those of Spanish race. El que
dice eso. He who says that.
The definite articles are used as demonstrative pronouns
before de or que.
2. £ No nos ves? Don't you see us? Lo arregla. He ar-
ranges it. Va a arreglarlo. He is going to arrange it. Esta
arreglandolo. He is arranging it. Arreglelo Vd. Arrange it.
Direct object pronouns immediately precede the verb of
which they are the object.
However, they follow and are attached to the verb, if the
18 QUINITO EN AMERICA
verb is an infinitive, a gerund or an affirmative imperative.
When used with a negative imperative it precedes: No lo
arregle Vd. Don't arrange it.
Notice that when an object pronoun is postfixed to a gerund
or an affirmative imperative, it is necessary to place a written
accent on the vowel of the syllable of the gerund or impera-
tive which would be stressed were the pronoun not postfixed.
Otherwise the stress of voice would have to fall on the final
vowel of the gerund or imperative.
CORRESPONDING OBJECT
SUBJECT PRONOUNS PRONOUNS
Singular
yo I me me
id you, thou te you, thee
el he lo or le him, it
ella she la her, it
usted you le or lo (m.) la (f.) you
Plural
nosotros, -as we nos us
vosotros, -as you, ye os you
ellos they los or les them
ellas they las them
ustedes you los or les (m.) las (f .) them
3. Synopsis of a regular verb of the third conjugation.
Infinitive : vivir, to live. Gerund : viviendo, living.
Past Participle : vivido, lived.
SIMPLE TENSES COMPOUND TENSES
Present: viven Present Perfect: han vivido
Imperfect: vivian Pluperfect: habian vivido
Preterite: vivieron pQLITE mpERATIVE
Future: viviran c. 7
_ A . ... Singular: viva Vd.
Post-preterite: vivinan r>7 , . ¥,,
r Plural: vivan Yds.
LOS HISPANOS DE NUEVA YORK 19
Give the meanings in English of the above verb forms.
Give the conjugation in full of each of the five simple tenses
and of the two compound tenses.
I. Replace the English words with suitable Spanish words:
i. Those (m.) que trabajan. 2. Those (/) de esta tienda.
3. He que me ve. 4. She de los ojos negros.
II. Study the following sentences involving the use of the
verb escribir and direct object pronouns. Translate these sen-
tences into English. Remember that the past participle of
escribir is irregular: escrito, written.
i. Lo escribieron. 2. No las escribimos. 3. £ No los ha
escrito Vd.? 4. Escribalo Vd. (Why does the i bear a written
accent?) 5. No lo escriba Vd. 6. ^ Los escribian? 7. No
la escribiremos. 8. <; Quien no la ha escrito ? 9. No las
escriban Yds. 10. Estoy cscribiendolo. (Why the written
accent?) n. No quiere ella escribirlo. 12. ^ No quiere ella
escribirlo? 13. Sigue escribiendolas.
III. Say and write in Spanish the following sentences:
i. They were living. 2. She has resided here. 3. Have
they lived in New York? 4. I lived there years ago (hace
anos). 5. Who has written it? (It refers to a letter, una
car to). 6. I shall not write it (a letter). 7. We wrote them
(letters). 8. I am going to write them (letters).
IV. In the following sentences make plural every word that
can be pluralized.
i. Yo la he escrito. 2. £ No lo ha arreglado Vd. ? 3. £ Me
saludo ella? 4. Comprelo Vd. (Why the written accent?).
5. No la visite Vd. 6. Yo deseo venderlo. 7. £l te miraba.
8. Ella estaba mirandome. 9. Ella la saludaria a Vd. (Re-
member that a Vd. is used simply to clarify the meaning
of la.) 10. Yo le busco a Vd.
CAPiTULO IV
HfiROES ENCANTADOS
Un dia, cuando Quinito y Pepe estaban andando por
la calle, vieron a un muchacho que se acerco a un puesto
de periodicos y pregunto al vendedor:
— Have you « La Prcnsa » ?
5 — Of course. I sell it here every day. Here you are.
Cuando el muchacho empezaba a leer el periodico,
Pepe y Quinito se acercaron adonde estaba y le pregunto
Quinito :
— Perdone, pero ± habla usted espanol ? He visto que
10 usted pedia un periodico en espanol.
— Si, senor; hablo espanol un poco. Hace dos anos
que lo estudio en la escuela y me gustaria saber hablarlo
perfectamente bien. <; Son ustedes espafioles ?
— Si, senor. Mi hermano y yo nacimos en Espana
15 y acabamos de llegar a Nueva York.
— Tengo mucho gusto en conocerles — contesto el
muchacho. — Me llamo Robert Chandler y soy alumno
de la DeWitt Clinton High School.
— Me llamo Joaquin Gomez, para servir a usted, y
20 este muchacho es mi hermano Jose. Nuestros amigos
nos llaman Quinito y Pepe.
— No saben ustedes cuanto me alegro de conocerles.
Hace mucho tiempo que deseo tener amigos espafioles
de mi edad. £ Quieren ustedes que seamos amigos ?
25 Me son ustedes muy simpaticos.
20
HfiROES ENCANTADOS 21
— Estarlamos encantados de ser amigos de usted. SI
que lo queremos.
Dicho y hecho. Al poco tiempo la amistad entre los
tres muchachos, el norteamericano y los dos espanoles,
era cosa notable. Se visitaban todos los dias e iban 30
juntos a todas partes. Roberto ensenaba el ingles a
Pepe y Quinito y los chicos espanoles hablaban casi
siempre en espafiol con Roberto, lo que le gustaba mucho
al joven neoyorquino.
Un dia Pepe y Quinito acompanaron a Roberto a la 35
escuela superior y con el asistieron a todas sus clases.
En la clase de espafiol Roberto presento al profesor a
sus amigos espanoles. El profesor los recibio muy cor-
dialmente y luego los presento a los ninos de la clase.
Muy excitado, uno de los ninos les pregunto a los 40
jovenes espanoles:
— Pero, digannos, <; no son ustedes Quinito y Pepe,
heroes del libro Quinito en Espana, libro que estudiamos
en el primer afio de espafiol en esta escuela ?
— Si, somos esos mismos chicos — contesto Quinito. 45
— Y por eso nos gusta mucho estar con ustedes y cono-
cerles en persona.
Grande fue la animation de la clase al oir las palabras
de Quinito. Todos los alumnos les dieron la mano a
los espanoles saludandoles con carino. 50
Luego el profesor les invito a Quinito y Pepe a hablar
a la clase. Esto lo hicieron con sumo gusto y contestaron
a las muchas preguntas que les hicieron los norteameri-
canos acerca de su vida en Espana.
Aquel dia fu6 memorable tan to para los chicos espanoles 55
como para sus amigos los norteamericanos.
22
QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
VOCABULARIO
acabar to finish, end
alegrar to make cheerful; ale-
grarse (de) to be glad (of}
amistad f . friendship
asistir (a) to attend
carino m. affection
cordialmente cordially
chico m. boy
encantar to delight, charm
memorable memorable
neoyorquino, -a of New York
notable notable, noteworthy
persona f . person
puesto m. stand, post
significar (que) to mean, signify
sumo, -a greatest, highest
superior superior; escuela su-
perior high school
vendedor m. vender, seller
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
acabar de llegar to have just
arrived; acabar de + infinitive
to have just + past participle
al poco tiempo in a short time
dicho y hecho no sooner said
than done
digannos (Yds.) tell us
para servir a Vd. at your service
que seamos that we be
si que indeed, yes indeed
tanto . . . como both . . . and
tener gusto en to take pleasure in,
be pleased to
EJERCTCIOS DE LECTURA
I. Write at dictation a passage from this chapter which
your teacher will read to you.
II. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <i Por donde iban Quinito y Pepe un dia ? 2. <i Que hizo
el muchacho y que vieron ? 3. £ Que compro este joven?
4. Al acercarse al joven, ^ que le pregunto Quinito ? 5. <: Que
lengua estudiaba el muchacho neoyorquino en la escuela?
6. <; Que deseaba saber hacer? 7. <i Como se llamaba este
chico ? 8. <i De que se alegraba ? 9. £ Que ensenaba Roberto
a los dos chicos espafioles ? 10. <i A donde fueron Pepe y
Quinito con Roberto? n. En la clase de espanol <; que les
preguntaron los alumnos? 12. £ Que hicieron los hermanos?
HfiROES ENCANTADOS 23
III. Make these English sentences equivalent to the
Spanish :
1. Acaban de recibirlo. i. They — it.
2. Al poco tiempo llego mi 2. — my friend arrived,
amigo.
3. Si que me alegro de verle 3. — I am glad to see you.
aVd.
4. Tengo mucho gusto en 4. — to know you.
conocerle a Vd.
5. Diganos Vd. como se llama. 5. — what your name is.
6. Me llamo Jose, para servir 6. — Joseph, — .
aVd.
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
1. Hace dos anos que lo e studio. I have studied it for two
years.
Hace mucho tiempo que deseo ... I have been wishing for
a long time . . .
An action which began in the past and continues into the
present is expressed in Spanish by using hace + the amount
of time + que + the present tense of the verb. In English
the present perfect tense (have studied, have been wishing) is
used, and for introduces the time expression (for two years, for
a long time) .
Hace un ano que le conoci. I met him a year ago.
If the action occurred in a definite time in the past without
continuing into the present, the same formula applies, except
that the verb is in the preterite tense. In English the past
tense is used and ago follows the time expression.
2. Les dieron la mano. They shook hands with them.
No me dan nada. They give me nothing. Van a darnos el
periodico. They are going to give us the newspaper. Estoy
hablandole. I am speaking to him. Dig anno s Vds. Tell us.
24 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Indirect object pronouns, like direct object pronouns, im-
mediately precede the verb of which they are the object.
However, they, too, follow and are attached to the verb, if
the verb is an infinitive, a gerund or an affirmative imperative.
When used with a negative imperative the indirect or direct
object precedes the verb: No me hable Vd. Dont speak to me.
SUBJECT CORRESPONDING INDIRECT
PRONOUNS OBJECT PRONOUNS
Singular
yo me to or for me
id te to or for you, thee
el le to or for him, it
ella le to or for her, it
usted le to or for you
Plural
nosotros, -as nos to or for us
vosotros, -as os to or for you
ellos les to or for them
ellas les to or for them
ustedes les to or for you
3. Gustar, to be pleasing, is a verb which is always used with
an indirect object noun or pronoun. Such a noun or pronoun
is the subject of the verb to like in the equivalent English sen-
tence, and the thing or person liked is, in English, the object
of the sentence: / like the building.
In expressing such a sentence in Spanish the thing or person
liked becomes the subject and the person who does the liking
becomes the indirect object: El edificio me gusta, or, me gusta
el edificio. The building is pleasing to me, that is, / like the
building.
Study and translate into English: Las tiendas gustan a las
se floras. Les gustan las tiendas. No nos gusta aquel chico.
Me gustaria conocerla.
HfiROES ENCANTADOS 25
4. Synopsis in the first person singular of the irregular verb
dar, to give.
Infinitive: dar, to give. Gerund: dando, giving.
Past Participle: dado, given.
SIMPLE TENSES COMPOUND TENSES
Present: doy Present Perfect: he dado
Imperfect: daba Pluperfect: habia dado
Preterite: di POLITE IMPERATIVE
Future: dare Singular: de Vd.
Post-preterite: daria Plural: den Yds.
Give the English meanings of the above verb forms.
Give the conjugation in full of each of the above tenses.
I. Translate into English the following sentences:
i. Hace un mes que estoy aqui. 2. Hace poco tiempo que
Vd. me conoce. 3. Hace dos dias que me hablo. 4. Hace
tres horas que me saludaron.
II. Place properly in the following sentences the Spanish
indirect object pronoun expressed in English in parentheses:
i. (To him) Nosotros dimos la mano. 2. (To you) Ellos
dieron la mano. 3. (To you, polite sing.) Yo no dare nada.
4. (To you, familiar sing.) Ellas quieren dar el periodico.
5. (To me) i Esta Vd. dando la invitacion? 6. (To us) No
de Vd. el dinero. 7. (To us) Den Vds. el libro.
III. Replace the indirect object nouns with indirect object
pronouns in the following sentences :
i. Presente Vd. la carta al chico. 2. No diga Vd. nada a la
sefiora. 3. Hemos dado la mano a los muchachos.
IV. Say and write in Spanish the following sentences:
i. We were giving the money to him. 2. What did you
(Vds.) give us? 3. Don't give (Vd.) her the invitation.
CAPlTULO V
PLATOS Y PALABRAS
— <J Os gustan los platos norteamericanos ? — pregunto
don Ramon un dia a sus parientes mientras comian en
el hotel.
— i Si que me gustan ! — respondio dona Ana. — Las
5 comidas son ricas y variadas. Aqui saben preparar bien
la carne y las legumbres. Las frutas son numerosas y
buenas. Me gustan sobre todo las frutas.
— Y a mi me gustan los pasteles — dijo Pepe.
— Prefiero los helados norteamericanos — dijo Rosa.
10 — Yo podria pasar todo el santo dia comi&idolos. Antes
no sabia que existia en el mundo cosa tan buena como
los helados de aqui.
— Para mi el « pie » norteamericano es el plato mas
maravilloso que conozco — dijo Quinito. — Un « apple
15 pie, » o pastel de manzana, es la ultima palabra de la
cocina de este pais. Y es interesante saber que « pie »
se escribe de la misma manera que pie en espanol. Y
hablando de « pie » y pie y de nuestros deseos de aprender
el ingles, quiero deciros que Roberto Chandler y yo
20 hemos escrito algo que puede pareceros divertido.
i Saco Quinito del bolsillo un papel y leyo en voz alta
lo que estaba escrito en el, que era como sigue:
Los norteamericanos llaman —
Al pastel pie, y al pie foot
25 Al padre dad, y a dad give
Alhijo son, yalson noise
26
PLATOS Y PALABRAS 27
Al papa papa, y a la papa potato
A los diez centavos dime, y a dime tell me
A la dama dame, y a dame give me
Alrojo red, y a la red net 3o
A la venta sale, y a sale comes out
Todos miraron esta lista de palabras que se escriben de
la misma manera en ingles y espanol, pero que se pronun-
cian de una manera diferente y significan cosas muy dis-
tintas. 35
Se divertian mucho estos espafioles preparando otras
listas y aprendiendo asi varias palabras inglesas que se
parecen a otras en espanol.
VOCABULARIO
centavo m. cent pastel m. pastry, pie
cocina f . cooking, cuisine plato m. dish
dama f . lady pronunciar to pronounce
distinto, -a distinct, different red f . net
helado m. ice cream rojo, -a red
legumbre f . vegetable santo, -a blessed, holy
lista f . list son m. sound, noise
manzana f . apple variado, -a varied
papa f . potato venta f . sale
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
dad give (familiar imperative parecerse a to resemble
plural of dar) ; si que me gustan ! (i.e. los
dame give me (familiar impera- platos norteamericanos) In-
tive sing, of dar + me) deed I do like them!
de la misma manera in the same sobre todo especially, above all
way todo el santo dia the whole blessed
dime tell me (familiar imperative day
sing, of decir + me)
28 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Following the plan used in the text of this chapter make
a series of words spelled alike in Spanish and English, but
which mean entirely different things and are, of course, pro-
nounced differently. The following words may be used:
te, tea; tea, torch; dados, dice; dice, says; jarron, vase;
vase, goes away; diez,ten; ten, hold, have; como,as; as, ace;
tapa, lid; lid, conflict; sarten, pan; pan, bread. Perhaps you
can prolong the list. , ^ <
II. Make a list in Spanish of seven fruits and seven vegeta-
bles. Do this with the help of your teacher or with the aid of
a dictionary.
III. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish:
i. No le gustan a dona Ana los platos norteamericanos.
2. En la cocina del hotel saben preparar bien la carne y las
legumbres. 3. A usted no le gustan las frutas. 4. Le gustan
a Rosa los helados norteamericanos. 5. A Quinito no le gusta
un pastel de manzanas. 6. Se escriben ciertas palabras de la
misma manera en espanol y en ingles. 7. Estas palabras
siempre significan la misma cosa. 8. Estas palabras se pro-
nuncian de la misma manera en las dos lenguas. 9. Quinito
saco del bolsillo una lista de palabras que Pepe y el habian
escrito. 10. Todos se divirtieron estudiando esta lista y
preparando otras listas de la misma clase. n. A casi todos
los chicos norteamericanos no les gustan los helados.
IV. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. This boy resembles his i. Este nino — su hermano.
brother.
2. We resemble our parents. 2. Nosotros — nuestros
padres.
3. I spent the whole blessed
day studying.
4. This word is pronounced
in the same way.
5. He wishes especially to
learn Spanish.
PLATOS Y PALABRAS
3. Pase — estudiando.
29
4. Esta palabra se pronun-
cia — .
5. El desea — aprender el
espafiol.
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
i. A mi, me gustan las frutas. / like fruits. Escrito en el.
Written on it. Para mi. For me.
The pronouns which are used after prepositions are called
terminal or prepositional pronouns.
SUBJECT PRONOUNS
CORRESPONDING TERMINAL
PRONOUNS
yo
I
tu
you, thou
el
he, it
ella
she, it
usted
you
nosotros, -as
we
vosotros, -as
you
ellos
they
ellas
they
ustedes
you
Singular
Plural
mi
me
ti
you, thee
el
him, it
ella
her, it
usted
you
nosotros, -as
us
vosotros, -as
you
ellos
them
ellas
them
ustedes
you
Note that the terminal pronouns are identical in form with
the subject pronouns, except in the first and second persons
singular, ml and ft".
With the preposition con these two pronouns have these
forms: conmigo, with me; contigo, with you, with thee.
30 QUINITO EN AMERICA
2. The terminal forms with the preposition a are used to
clarify or emphasize an indirect object pronoun (also, at times,
a direct object pronoun). Examples: A mi me gustan los
platos, or me gustan los platos a mi. I (emphatic) like the
dishes. Le gustan a el las frutas. He likes the fruits. (Clari-
fication.) Le gusta a ella el pan. She likes the bread. (Clari-
fication.) Le gusta a Vd. la palabra. You like the word.
(Clarification.) Nos gusta a nosotros la manzana. We like
the apple. (Emphasis.) Les gusta a ellos la carne. They (m.)
like the meat. (Clarification.) Les gustan a ellas los helados.
They (/.) like ice cream. (Clarification.) Les gustan a Yds.
las legumbres. You like vegetables. (Clarification.)
3. An indirect object noun is often duplicated by an in-
direct object pronoun, untranslatable in English, which, of
course, takes its usual place with regard to the verb. Ex-
amples: A Rosa le gustan los helados, or, Le gustan a Rosa
los helados, Rosa likes ice cream.
4. Synopsis in the third person singular of two irregular
verbs, decir, to say, tell and hacer, to make, do.
T ^ -^ (decir ~ , (diciendo ^ , _. ,. . , (dicho
Infinitive < , Gerund < . . , Past Participle < . _
\hacer \haciendo (hecho
SIMPLE TENSES COMPOUND TENSES
Present: dice, hace Present Perfect: ha dicho, ha
Imperfect: decia, hacia hecho
Preterite: dijo9 hizo Pluperfect: habia dicho, habia
Future: dire, hare hecho
Post-preterite: diria, haria pOLITE ^ERA^E
Singular: diga Vd., haga Vd.
Plural: digan Vds., hagan Yds.
Give the English meanings of the above verb forms.
Give the conjugation in full of each of the above tenses.
PLATOS Y PALABRAS 31
I. Replace the English pronouns with the proper forms of
the Spanish pronouns :
i. Este plato es para him. 2. No es para her. 3. Voy con
you (pol. sing.). 4- Vd. va con me. 5. Nosotros vamos con
you (fam. sing.). 6. Ellas estudian con us. 7. La fruta esta
en it (referring to mesa, table). 8. La palabra se encuentra
en it (referring to a book).
II. Replace the nouns in italics with pronouns:
i. La carne es para la senorita. 2. Este plato es para los
chicos. 3. No es para las damas. 4. Voy con el padre. 5. An-
damos por la calle. 6. Entramos en el edificio. 7. Subimos
a la torre. 8. Salen despues de los parientes.
III. Make emphatic or clear the indirect object pronouns
of the following sentences:
i. Me gusta la carne. 2. Nos gustan las legumbres. 3. (To
her) Le damos la mano. 4. (To you, pol. sing.) Le escribimos.
5. (To them, m.) Les dieron el plato. 6. (To them, f.) Les he
dado mi palabra. 7. (To you, pol. pi.) No les hemos escrito.
8. (To you, pol. sing.) Quiero darle algo. 9. Estoy escri-
biendoos una carta. 10. Digame Vd. la palabra.
IV. Say and write in Spanish:
i. They made it (the house}. 2. I said it (the word}. 3. Say
(Vd.} them (the words}. 4. She was telling me. 5. I have
done it. 6. Do not do (Yds.) it. 7. What had he done? 8.1
did not do it. 9. I shall not say it. 10. What is he saying ?
ii. What would you (Vd.) say? 12. What has she said?
13. Do it (Vds.) now. 14. We would not make it (the ship).
CAPlTULO VI
COMIENDO A LA ESPANOLA EN
NUEVA YORK
Pero a veces el senor Segre y los Gomez deseaban gozar
de los platos de su patria. Entonces iban a comer en
uno de los restaurantes espanoles de la ciudad, con prefe-
rencia en el de Fornos, famoso por sus comidas espanolas.
5 Una noche, al mirar la lista de platos en este restau-
rante, don Ramon sonrio de contento y exclamo:
— Aqui nos sentiremos como en casa, porque veo que
nos ofrecen todo lo que pueda desear cualquier espanol:
arroz con polio, bacalao a la vizcaina, chuletas de carnero,
10 polio asado, carne de vaca . . .
— Es verdad — dijo dona Ana. — Es dificil saber que
tomar. La cocina espanola es muy rica. Creo que me
gustaria un arroz con polio.
— Y yo voy a tomar bacalao a la vizcaina — dijo
15 Rosa.
— Y yo chuletas de cordero — dijo Pepe.
Don Ramon y Quinito no pudieron decidir que plato
principal preferian, pero por fin el tio tomo bacalao y su
sobrino polio asado.
20 Despues de una buena sopa, se sirvio a cada uno el
plato principal de su preferencia, con legumbres. Luego
vinieron frutas y un queso y cafe negro. Al terminar la
comida todos suspiraron de contento y empezaron a mirar
a los otros que comian en el restaurante. Entre ellos se
25 encontraban bellas senoritas de raza hispana. Por todas
32
COMIENDO A LA ESPANOLA 33
partes se hablaba espanol, con esa animation tan natural
en los hispanos. Se oia el acento mejicano, centro-
americano, cubano o colombiano. Tambien se oian pala-
bras y expresiones que se emplean en la Republica
Dominicana, Argentina o Chile, y la mezcla de espanol e 30
ingles que se oye entre algunos hispanos neoyorquinos.
— Es muy nuevo para nosotros — dijo Quinito — oir
hablar nuestro idioma a los hispanoamericanos. Los
entendemos a todos, pero algunos pronuncian el espanol
con un ritmo diferente del que se oye en Espaiia. Este 35
restaurante es un buen centro en que observar como se
habla la lengua de nuestra patria en el Nuevo Mundo.
— Si • — contesto don Ramon, — pero el espanol es uno
en todas partes del mundo hispano. Estoy acostumbrado
a oir hablar a los mejicanos de California y me es facil 40
imitarlos. Y cuando vosotros vayais a Mejico, Chile o
Argentina oireis otro acento y otras palabras y expresiones.
— j Que interesante es eso ! — exclamo Quinito.
— Siempre me gustan estas cosas del idioma espanol.
Yo no pienso poder aprender aqui mucho ingles. Solo 45
deseo hablarlo lo bastante bien para hacerme entender.
Pero durante nuestros viajes siempre voy a observar
como se habla espanol en America.
La animation de los clientes era cada vez mas notable.
Todos se divertian enormemente hablando. 50
— Esta noche me parece que estoy otra vez en un
restaurante o cafe de Espana — dijo don Ramon. — j Y
hace tantos aiios que vivo lejos de mi patria !
Suspiro don Ramon. Suspiraron dona Ana y Rosa.
Pero Quinito y Pepe pensaban solo en lo que veian y 55
oian en el restaurante.
34
QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
acento m. accent
arroz m. rice
asado, -a roasted, roast
bacalao m. codfish
comida f . meal, dinner
cordero m. mutton, lamb
chuleta f . chop
emplear to use, employ
hispanoamericano, -a Spanish-
American
idioma m. language
imitar to imitate
mejicano, -a Mexican
mezcla f. mixture
natural natural
observar to observe
patria f . native land
polio m. chicken
preferencia f. preference, choice
restaurante m. restaurant
ritmo m. rhythm, cadence, pace
sopa f . soup
suspirar to sigh
vaca f. cow; came de vaca beef
Vizcaino, -a Biscayan, of Viz-
caya, a Basque province oj
northern Spain
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a la espahola Spanish style
a la vizcaina Biscayan style
cada uno each, each one
cada vez mas more and more
cuando vosotros vaydis when you
go
de contento with satisfaction
el espanol es uno Spanish is a
unit, is a whole, is uniform
hacerme entender to make myself
understood
lo bastante bien well enough
oir hablar a los mejicanos to hear
Mexicans speak
sentirse (ie, i) to feel, feel oneself
SPANISH FOOD
In Spanish meals, especially those at midday and evening, many
dishes, of rather heavy foods, are served. Beef, mutton, fish, veal,
pork, eggs, and chicken provide the main courses. Fish of many
varieties and prepared in many ways, is a favorite dish. Chicken
and eggs are common items of fare and are well prepared. Stews
of meat or fish, mixed with vegetables, constitute the chief diet in
country districts. Many kinds of sausages and bolognas are found
COMIENDO A LA ESPANOLA 35
in the markets and also a wide range of vegetables. Cheese and
wines from different parts of Spain abound. The hams of Estre-
madura (a section of the country adjoining Portugal) are among the
best in the world.
Spanish cooking is characterized by a great variety of regional
dishes. For instance, Valencia is famous for its paella, a dish of
baked rice into which are mixed pieces of chicken, fish, peppers and
bacon or ham, all prepared in olive oil, which is used almost ex-
clusively instead of animal fats such as lard. Arroz con polio, served
widely in all parts of Spain, is similar to the paella valenciana, but
chicken is the meat served with the rice.
The puchero or stew of Castile (a rich soup of chickpeas, potatoes,
sausage, ham and chicken) is similar to, yet different from, the pote
g allege (Galician stew) of northwestern Spain or the olla podrida
served in Central Spain.
Another of the regional dishes is the bacalao a la vizcaina, men-
tioned in the text, a favorite of the northern Basque provinces.
The gazpacho andaluz is a cold soup made of olive oil, vinegar, garlic,
bread, lettuce and onions. It is served in Andalusia in southern
Spain. The pisto manchego, eggs fried in olive oil and mixed with
peppers, is much liked in the region of La Mancha in the south
central district.
Spanish cooking is very different from that of Mexico. It is
never so highly seasoned with peppers and pepper as are Mexican
dishes.
The Spanish people are usually "heavy eaters," and meals in
hotels generally consist of from five to seven courses at midday and
more at the evening meal, which is served at nine or ten o'clock.
Breakfast, on the other hand, is scanty, and consists of coffee or
thick chocolate and rolls, without butter.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. A veces los Gomez y el senor Segre deseaban — . 2. Para
comer a la espaiiola iban a — . 3. Al mirar la lista de platos
36 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
don Ramon — . 4. La lista les ofrecia arroz con polio, — .
5. Dona Ana decidio tomar — . 6. Rosa prefirio — . 7. A
cada uno se sirvio — . 8. Para terminar la comida todos
tomaron — . 9. En el restaurante todos hablaban espafiol con
— . 10. Se oian palabras y — . n. Algunos de los hispanos
neoyorquinos hablaban — . 12. Era nuevo para los Gomez
oir — . 13. El restaurante era un buen ccntro para — .
14. Don Ramon dijo que el espanol — . 15. Le era facil
imitar el acento de — . 16. Quinito dijo que no pensaba — .
17. A don Ramon le parecia que — . 18. Mientras don
Ramon, dona Ana y Rosa suspiraban, Quinito y Pepe pen-
saban solo en — .
II. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <; Ha comido Vd. alguna vez en un restaurante espanol ?
2. <; Cuales son algunos platos espanoles? 3. £ Le gusta a
Vd. cl bacalao ? 4. <J Conoce Vd. a algunos hispanoameri-
canos? 5. <J Ha observado Vd. el acento mejicano ? 6. <i Se
divierte Vd. mucho hablando ? 7. <J En que piensa Vd. ?
III. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. Vamos a comer a la es- i. We are going to dine — .
panola.
2. Ella no sabe hacerse en- 2. She does not know how — .
tender en espanol.
3. A cada uno le gustaba el 3. — the dish,
plato.
4. Nosotros suspiramos de 4. We sighed — .
contento.
5. La animacion es cada vez 5. The animation is — .
mas notable.
6. He oido hablar espanol a 6. I have heard — .
los cubanos.
7. Me siento como en casa. 7. I feel — .
COMIENDO A LA ESPANOLA 37
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
i . Ella se llama Rosa. Her name is Rose. Me alegro de
verte. I am glad to see you. 2. Nos acercamos a la puerta.
We approach the door.
The above are reflexive verbs, in which the action is de-
noted as reflected back upon the subject. Many verbs that
are reflexive in Spanish are not so in English.
i . Example of a reflexive verb in the different persons and in
the present tense. Notice particularly the forms of the re-
flexive pronouns. They are, you see, the same as the direct
object pronouns except in the third person singular and plural,
which is se.
Infinitive: llamarse, to call oneself, be named. Gerund:
llamandose, calling oneself.
PRESENT TENSE
yo me llamo I am named
tu te llamas you are named
el se llama he is named
ella se llama she is named
Vd. se llama you are named
nosotros (-as) nos llamamos we are named
vosotros (-as) os llamais you are named
ellos se llaman they are named
ellas se llaman they are named
Yds. se llaman you are named
The reflexive pronouns, like direct and indirect object pro-
nouns, usually are placed immediately before the verb, but,
like them, they follow and are attached to the verb, if the
latter is the infinitive, the gerund or the affirmative impera-
tive: Voy a llamarme. I am going to call myself. Ella esta
llamandose. She is calling herself. Llamese Vd. Call yourself.
38
QUINITO EN AMERICA
Of course, reflexive verbs may be used in all tenses: Me
llamaba Juan. I used to call myself John. £l se habia
llamado Arturo. He had called himself Arthur.
Remember, too, that reflexive verbs may also be vowel-
changing verbs: Me divierto. I amuse myself. £l se sienta.
He sits down. Ella se siente como en casa. She feels at
home. £l se encuentra aqui. He is here.
Reflexive verbs are often used in Spanish where in English
a verb in the passive voice is used: Se ven aqui muchas
flares. Many flowers are seen here. Me llamo Pedro. I am
called Peter. Los barcos se encuentran en la bahia. The
ships are found in the bay. Estas expresiones se emplean en
Cuba. These expressions are used in Cuba.
2. Vowel-changing verbs of Class I. This class includes
certain verbs of the first and second conjugations. In the
present tense, in all forms of the singular and the third person
plural, the stem vowel e becomes ie and o becomes ue. This
is true also of the two forms of the polite imperative. Notice
that these changes occur when the stress of voice falls on the
syllable containing the stem vowel.
ist conj., pensar, to think, intend: pienso, piensas,
piensa; pensamos, pensais, piensan
piense Vd., piensen Yds.
encontrar, to find: encuentro, encuen-
tras, encuentra; encontramos, en-
CLASS I contrais, encuentran
e to ie < encuentre Vd., encuentren Yds.
o to ue
2nd conj., entender, to understand: entiendo, en-
tiendes, entiende; entendemos, en-
tendeis, entienden
mover, to move: mueve, mueves, mueve;
movemos, moveis, mueven
mueva Vd., muevan Vds.
COMIENDO A LA ESPANOLA 39
I. Use the proper form of the present tense of the follow-
ing reflexive verbs after the subjects given below: llamarse,
to be named; acercarse, to approach; alegrarse, to be glad,
rejoice.
ellos — Rosa y Pepe —
tu — ellas —
yo — vosotros —
nosotros — el y yo —
tu y el —
II. After the subjects indicated in I, use the future tense
of the same verbs.
III. After the same subjects use the present tense of: en-
contrar, mover, pensar, entender.
IV. After the same subjects use the present tense of:
volverse (ue), to turn around; sentarse (ie), to sit down, seat
oneself.
V. Say and write in Spanish :
i. I had approached. 2. They were glad (imperfect).
3. She was glad (preterite). 4. Our names are John and
Arthur. 5. They sat down. 6. You (pol. sing.) turn around.
7. They will not rejoice. 8. Has he not approached? 9. I
want to sit down. 10. Sit down (Yds.), n. Don't approach
(Vd.). 12. They are seating themselves.
VI. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <iLo entiende Vd. ? 2. <i Me entiende Vd. ? 3. <J Que
encuentran ellos? 4. <J Piensa Vd. en eso? 5. <i Vuelve Vd.
a la clase? 6. ^ Quien se encuentra aqui? 7. £ Como se
llama Vd. ? 8. <i Como te llamas tu ? 9. £ No quiere Vd.
sentarse ? 10. £ Esta Vd. sentandose ?
PRIMERA LECCION DE REPASO
VOCABULARTO
I. Give the English for the following Spanish words:
la felicidad trasatlantico el muellc
izquierdo la estancia el ciudadano
agitar arriba el conductor
cierto el barrio el periodico
acabar el interprete el carino
neoyorquino la amistad el chico
el son el helado sumo
santo rojo la venta
la manzana la cocina la lista
el pastel el centavo emplear
el arroz el carnero la chuleta
la mezcla vizcaino suspirar
el polio el ritmo
maravillado
la aduana
el taximetro
la raza
recordar
hispano
encantar
superior
la red
la dama
el idioma
la preferencia
hispanoamericano
II. Give the
to reside
to prosper
to present
the statue
the deck
likeable
the multitude
to mean
the dish
to imitate
the restaurant
the bay
Spanish for the following English words :
to surprise
the departure
equal
the avenue
attentive
metropolitan
the center
memorable
the vegetable
natural
the accent
the native land
40
the desire
the direction
the port
the society
the guide
to enjoy
to attend
the seller
varied
to pronounce
the codfish
the soup
the animation
the wealth
Hispanic
the game
to be glad
cordially
the stand
the person
notable
the potato
to observe
the cow
LECCION DE REPASO
41
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
I. Use in complete Spanish sentences the following expres-
sions :
cada vez mas; a la espafiola; lo bastante bien; hacerse
entender; oir hablar a uno; sentirse; sobre todo; todo el
santo dia; si que; al poco ticmpo; para servir a Vd.
II. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. You — my father.
2. — ; we began to work.
3. We — to know her.
4. — went there.
5. They — me.
6 They — what was going
on.
7. Ella servia de guia. 7. She — guide.
8. Lo primero que dijo me 8. — made me laugh,
hizo rcir.
III. Make the following sentences equivalent to the English:
1. Vd. se parece a mi padre.
2. Dicho y hecho; empeza-
mos a trabajar.
3. Tenemos mucho gusto en
conocerla.
4. Tan to el como ella fueron
alia.
5. Acaban de verme.
6. Supieron lo que pasaba.
1. It is said that he is
coming.
2. They enjoy the meal.
3. She was right.
4. At last he has arrived.
5. Meanwhile we shall go.
6. I don't know what must
be done.
7. She goes in the direction
of the dock.
1. — que el viene.
2. — la comida.
3. Ella -.
4. — ha llegado.
5. — nos iremos.
6. No se que — .
7. Ella va — muelle.
42 QUINITO EN AMERICA
8. They walked up street. 8. Andaban — .
9. I like this avenue. 9. — esta avenida.
10. What do you think of 10. <i Que le — este puerto ?
this harbor ?
11. At the left is the statue. n. — esta la estatua.
12. I keep on wishing to see 12. — verla.
her.
13. Here is (is found) the bay. 13. Aqui — la bahia.
14. We have been working 14. — trabajamos.
many years.
15. They tell us again. 15. — decirnos.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
I. Make plural every word possible in the following sen-
tences :
i. Yo no visito la bella ciudad norteamericana donde reside
el buen pariente del muchacho espanol. 2. Vd. parece mara-
villado al ver la luz que tiene el sefior en la mano. 3. El joven
me pronuncia la palabra dificil. 4. El que le lee a Vd. el
telegrama no conoce al sefior alto que acaba de entrar.
II. Replace the direct object noun of the following sentences
with pronouns:
i. Miramos el barco. 2. Deseamos ver el barco. 3. Estoy
mirando el barco. 4. Mire Vd. el barco. 5. No mire Vd. el
barco. 6. Come las legumbres. 7. No quiere comer las
legumbres. 8. Estaban comiendo las legumbres. 9. Coma
Vd. la fruta. 10. No coma Vd. la fruta.
III. Replace the Spanish indirect object nouns or English
pronouns with Spanish pronouns:
i. Hablaron al senor. 2. He escrito a la madre. 3. No
escriba Vd. al interprete. 4. Escriba Vd. al muchacho.
5. Estaban hablando a los parientes. 6. <i Quiere Vd. res-
LECCION DE REPASO 43
ponder a la muchacha? 7. Ella no escribio to us. 8. Vd.
hablara to them. 9. Respondan Yds. to me.
IV. Replace the nouns in italics or English pronouns with
Spanish terminal pronouns:
i. Entraban en el restaurante. 2. Salieron de la casa.
3. Iremos con los ninos. 4. Piensan en los senores. 5. La
comida cs para las madres. 6. No es para me. 7. <[ Era para
you (familiar singular) el bacalao ? 8. Me hablo acerca de
los barcos. g. Tenemos algo para you (polite plural). 10. El
libro estara sobre la mesa.
V. Say and write in Spanish:
i. They present themselves. 2. I rise. 3. You (tu) ap-
proach. 4. Don't rise (Vd.). 5. She wishes to sit down.
6. His name is John. 7. What is your name ? 8. I was very
glad. 9. We are approaching. 10. She was (found herself)
here.
VI. Insert a suitable preposition in each of the following
sentences:
i. Vd. entra — la casa. 2. Conocemos — dona Ana.
3. Pensamos — Vds. 4. Conozco — Madrid. 5. Le gusta —
ella el plato. 6. Tengo mucho gusto — conocerlos. 7. Aca-
bamos — verlos. 8. Gozan — el plato.
VII. Use the proper definite article before each of the
following nouns:
viaje; multitud; legumbre; amistad; mano; dia; agua;
telegrama; vez; pastel; preferencia.
VIII. Make plural the nouns of VII, using before each
the proper definite article.
IX. Make a synopsis in the 3rd pers. plural of the follow-
ing verbs: prosperar; comer; permitir; sentarse; volver.
CAPfTULO VII
VISITANDO LA CIUDAD
La estatua de la Libertad, los rascacielos llamados
Empire State y Chrysler, los del centre Rockefeller y
otros fueron visitados por nuestro grupo hispano. Desde
lo mas alto de estos edificios cogieron magnificas vistas
5 de la enorme ciudad, de los barcos en los muelles, de la
isla de Manhattan, los rios Hudson y Este y una gran
parte de Long Island (la Isla Larga) con los barrios de
Brooklyn y Long Island City, y, hacia el oeste, varias
ciudades del estado de Nueva Jersey.
10 En un barco de turismo navegaron por los rios pasando
por debajo de los grandes puentes que los cruzan: el
puente Brooklyn, el mas viejo de todos, el Manhattan,
el Queensborough, el Triborough y el George Washing-
ton. En un taxi dieron un paseo por algunos de los
15 tiineles construidos debajo de los rios. Gozaban de dar
largos paseos por el Parque Central.
Les encantaron mucho la gran universidad de Colum-
bia y la Casa de las Espaiias, centro neoyorquino de la
cultura espanola e hispanoamericana.
20 Como era natural, les gustaba especialmente asistir a
los teatros en que se daban funciones en espanol. Vieron
bailar a la famosa Argentinita, y oyeron tocar al gran
guitarrista espanol Andres Segovia. En uno de los teatros
quedaron encantados con las funciones que daba una
25 compania argentina y con las peliculas habladas en es-
panol que veian en varios cines de los barrios hispanos.
Dijo un dia don Ramon :
44
VISITANDO LA CIUDAD 45
— Dicen que en esta metropoli se oyen hablar todas
las lenguas del mundo, y eso parece ser verdad.
— Pepe y yo hemos observado que el espanol se oye 30
en todas partes — dijo Quinito — : en las calles, en las
tiendas, en los autobuses y en el ferrocarril subterraneo.
— No digas nada de esos « subways » — dijo Pepe.
— Son terribles con sus multitudes de personas que se
atropellan unas a otras. Prefiero los « subways » de 35
Madrid o Barcelona. Son mucho mas comodos.
— Sera porque no viaja tanta gente en ellos — res-
pondio Quinito.
— Y tambien porque los tiineles son mas grandes y
con mas aire fresco — dijo Rosa. — Ni en la hora de 40
la aglomeracion hay tanta gente en Madrid o Barcelona
como aqui.
— Pero despues de todo, me parece Nueva York mara-
villoso — dijo Pepe.
— Puede ser, hi jo — contesto dona Ana — pero yo pre- 45
fiero una vida mas tranquila.
— Yo tambien — dijo don Ramon. — Pero la vida
de Los Angeles y Hollywood es casi tan intensa como
la de Nueva York. El ritmo de la vida norteamericana
es, sin duda, mucho mas rapido que el de Espana. 50
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
atropellarse (uno a otro) to no digas nada say nothing (2nd
trample on each other pers. sing, negative imperative
barco de turismo sight-seeing boat of decir)
dar un paseo to take a walk or por debajo de under
drive puede ser it may be, it is possible
hora de la aglomeracion rush hour sera it must be (future used to
lo mds alto the top express probability)
46 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
aglomeracion f . crowding funcion f . performance, function
argentine, -a Argentine, Argen- guitarrista m. and f . guitar player
tinian intense, -a intense
atropellar to trample, knock down isla f . island
central central metropolii. metropolis
comodo,-a comfortable rdpido,-a rapid, fast
compania f. company rascacielos m. skyscraper
cultura f. culture tunel m. tunnel
debajo under; debajo de prep, turismo m. touring, tourism
under vista f . view, sight
este m. east
NOTAS
La Casa de las Espanas f 535 West nyth Street, New York City,
is the home of the Institute de las Espanas, under the auspices of
Columbia University and the department of Hispanic Languages
of that institution. It has a library, lecture rooms, and office and
is much used by students and members of the Institute. Frequent
lectures and social meetings are held here throughout the year. The
Institute publishes a series of books concerning Spanish and Spanish-
American literature and a magazine, Revista Hispdnica. It provides
services for Spanish-language clubs and a medal (for which charge is
made) as a reward for excellence in the study of Spanish. Las Es-
panas is a term which centuries ago was used to indicate all Spanish-
speaking countries and colonies of Spain, and this historical term
is revived in the name of this Institute.
La Argentinita (the young lady of the Argentine) is the stage name
of Carmen Lopez, at present one of the most famous interpreters of
Spanish and Spanish-American dances. She gives recitals every
winter in New York and has appeared in most of the large cities of
this country, Europe and South America.
Andres Segovia is likewise well known in the three continents. He
is one of the greatest artists of the guitar who has ever specialized
in that instrument.
VISITANDO LA CIUDAD 47
The sights of New York City, briefly mentioned in this chapter,
are so well known to most North Americans, either from their own
visits to that city or from reading about them, that no attempt is
made to describe them here in detail.
Rascacielos, skyscraper. Rascar means to scratch; cielos, skies,
heavens.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
T . <J Cuales son algunos de los rascacielos mas altos dc
Nueva York? 2. <i Que vista cogieron los Gomez desdc lo
mas alto de estos edificios? 3. £ En que navcgaron por los
rios? 4. <[ Por dcbajo de cuales pucntes pasaron? 5. <; Por
dcmde dieron un paseo en taxi ? 6. <i Que es la Casa dc las
Espanas? 7. £ A que funciones asistian en los teatros?
8. <; A quicn vieron bailar ? 9. <j Adonde iban a ver peliculas
habladas en espanol ? 10. £ Que lenguas se oycn hablar en
la metropoli ? 1 1 . <; Por que le parecian terribles a Pepe los
ferrocarriles subterraneos neoyorquinos ? 12. ^ Por que son
mas comodos los " subways " de Madrid o Barcelona?
T3- i Que preferia dona Ana? 14. <: Como es el ritmo de la
vida nortcamericana ?
II. Express entirely in Spanish the following sentences:
i. Hemos estado en the top del edificio. 2. Las multitudes
neoyorquinas trample on each other. 3. Vamos a dar un paseo
en automovil por un tunel que pasa under the river. 4. In
the rush hour hay mucha gente en las calles. 5. Subimos a
la cubierta del sight-seeing boat. 6. <; Por que no viaja el
mas ? It must be porque no le gusta viajar.
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
i. Vd. no prefiere comer ahora. You do not prefer to dine
now. i Se siente Vd. bien hoy ? Do you feel well today ?
i Durmid Vd. bien anoche ? Did you sleep well last night ?
48
QUINITO EN AMERICA
CLASS II
e to ie or i
o to ue or u
Vowel-changing verbs of Class II. This class includes cer-
tain verbs of the third conjugation. In the present tense of
such verbs, in all forms of the singular and the third person
plural and in the polite imperatives, the stem vowel e becomes
ie, and o becomes ue. In the gerund and the third person
singular and plural of the preterite this e becomes i and the
o becomes u.
sentir, Present : siento, sientes, siente; sen-
to feel timos, sentis, sienten
Polite imperative: sienta Vd.; sien-
tan Yds.
Preterite: senti, sentiste, sintio, sen-
timos, sentisteis, sintieron
Gerund: sintiendo
dormir, Present: duermo, duermes, duerme;
to sleep dormimos, dormis, duermen
Polite imperative: duerma Vd.;
duerman Vds.
Preterite: dormi, dormiste, durmio;
dormimos, dormisteis, durmieron
Gerund: durmiendo
2. Se atropellan unos a otros. They trample on each other.
Nos hablamos. We speak to each other. Ellos se dan la mano.
They shake hands with each other.
The above sentences illustrate reciprocal verbs, that is,
those that represent the action as being exchanged between
two or more persons who are the subject. Such verbs are,
of course, found only in the plural and are conjugated in that
number like reflexive verbs. Uno a otro (unos a otros) and
the corresponding feminine forms may be added to make
clear that the verb is reciprocal and not reflexive.
VISITANDO LA CIUDAD 49
Example : darse la mono to shake hands with each other
nos damos la mano we shake hands
os dais la mano you shake hands
, , ( they shake hands
se dan la mano < , T 7
^ you shake hands
3. No digas nada. Don't say anything. No voy nunca. I
never go. No hay nadie aqui. There is no one here. No lee
ni escribe. He neither reads nor writes. No compro ningiin
libro. I buy no book.
The most common negative word, no, stands before the
verb in Spanish. If another negative (adverb, pronoun, or
adjective) is used in the sentence, it follows the verb. See
above sentences. This second negative may be placed before
the verb, in which case no then disappears: Nunca voy. I
never go. Nadie hay aqui. There is no one here. Ningun libro
tengo. I have no book. Nada veo. I see nothing.
Negative words may stand alone and then have negative
force: i No ve Vd. nada? Don't you see anything? Nada.
Nothing. iCuando trabaja? When does he work? Nunca.
Never.
When nadie is the object of the verb it is preceded by the
preposition a: No veo a nadie, or, A nadie veo. I see no one.
The more common negatives are: no, no, not; nadie, no
one; nada, nothing; nunca, never; ninguno, no, none; ni . . . ni,
neither . . . nor; tampoco, neither.
4. Gozaban de dar paseos. They enjoyed taking drives.
After prepositions the only form of the verb that may be
used in Spanish is the infinitive (not the gerund, as in English).
Translate into English : Despues de llegar. Sin decir nada.
(Sin is a negative preposition and so a negative, not affirma-
tive, pronoun follows the infinitive.) Antes de saludarnos.
Sin hablar nunca. Al acercarse.
50 QUINITO EN AMERICA
I. Say and write in Spanish:
i. He says nothing. 2. He doesn't say anything. 3. He
has never spoken to me. 4. Do (Vd.) nothing. 5. They
neither speak nor write to each other. 6. They were trampling
on each other. 7. Don't shake hands (Vds.) with each other.
8. Before answering. 9. After entering. 10. Without ever
seeing me.
II. Use the proper form of the present tense of the follow-
ing verbs after the subjects given below: preferir (ie, i), to
prefer; morir (lie, u), to die.
ella — Vd. —
Yds. — vosotros —
tu — nosotros —
yo — ellos —
os —
III. After the subjects indicated in II, use the preterite
tense of the same verbs.
IV. Give the English for the following sentences:
i. No durmieron. 2. No se sintio bien. 3. Esta dur-
miendo. 4. Lo preferimos (present). 5. Lo preferimos (pret-
erite). 6. No muera Vd. 7. Sigue prefiriendolo. 8. <i Se
sienten Vds. como en casa ?
V. Read and translate into English :
i. A nadie miramos. 2. Nunca se siente bien. 3. No corro
ni juego. 4. No nos atropellamos nunca. 5. Nadie entra.
6. £l no me dara nada. 7. Despues de saludarla a usted, el
senor salio. 8. Antes de entrar en la casa, dio un paseo por
la calle. 9. Sientese Vd. y digame la verdad. 10. i No van
Vds. a darse la mano ?
CAPlTULO VIII
LOS TURISTAS SE DESPIDEN DE
NUEVA YORK
For fin decidieron nuestros amigos que ya era hora de
empezar su viaje hacia el oeste. Sentian tener que
abandonar la ciudad maravillosa, las luces de Broadway,
las tiendas tan interesantes, los museos, teatros y cines,
la animation de las calles. Sobre todo sentian despedirse 5
de sus muchos amigos hispanos y norteamericanos.
Don Ramon queria volver a su casa en California a
estar otra vez con su familia, su esposa dona Dolores y
su hijo Pedro. Creyo que seria mejor hacer el viaje por
el sur del pais. Asi podrian sus parientes visitar las 10
regiones que los espanoles de los tiempos lejanos habian
descubierto y explorado en nombre del rey de Espaiia.
A estas regiones los espanoles de los tiempos lejanos habian
traido la civilization europea mucho antes de existir las
colonias inglesas en el norte del continente. Por eso, 15
pensaba don Ramon ir primero a la Florida, pasando por
Filadelfia y Washington, luego a Luisiana, Tejas, Nuevo
M£jico y California.
— j Adios a Broadway y a la Quinta Avenida ! — sus-
piro Rosa mientras el taximetro los llevaba a la gran 20
estacion del ferrocarril Pensilvania.
— Nos hemos divertido mucho aqui — dijo Quinito.
— Pero me gusta saber que hoy empiezan nuestras ex-
ploraciones de otras partes de este gran pais.
— A mi tambi£n — contesto don Ramon. — Las ciu- 25
dades pueden dar al viajero poca idea de lo que es la
51
52 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
vida de un pais. Esto es verdad sobre todo al hablar
de los Estados Unidos, un pais de gran extension y de
recursos tan ricos y variados. Aunque tiene mas de
30 130 millones de habitantes, una poblacion cinco veces
mas grande que la de Espafia, por su gran extension
solo tiene unos 42 habitantes por milla cuadrada, mientras
en Espana hay 1 20 por milla cuadrada. El rico suelo de
las llanuras del pais sirven para producir enormes ri-
35 quezas agricolas. Los bosques dan madera para construir
casas. Las minas y los pozos de petroleo son grandes
fuentes de riqueza. En las muchas fabricas se hacen
cosas que se venden por todo el mundo. Los Estados
Unidos son una de las naciones mas ricas que han existido.
40 No piden nada a nadie.
— Y la gente es muy simpatica — dijo Pepe.
En Filadelfia pasaron los espanoles un dia visitando la
ciudad y el antiguo « Independence Hall » con su campana
de la Libertad.
45 — j La libertad ! — exclamo dona Ana. — Si, la libertad
personal y politica es lo que aman mas los norteameri-
canos. Es lo que hace famosa a esta nation en todo el
mundo.
— Y es lo que mas vale, lo que mas me atrae y hace
50 que me quede en los Estados Unidos de Norte America
— respondio don Ramon. Estoy muy con ten to de ser
ciudadano norteamericano.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
antes de existir las colonias be- despedirse de to take leave of, say
fore the colonies existed good-bye to
descubierto discovered; past par- hace que me quede causes me to
ticiple of descubrir, to discover stay
LOS TURISTAS SE DESPIDEN 53
VOCABULARIO
agricola agricultural idea f . idea
amar to love madera f . wood
campana f . bell milla f . mile
civilization i. civilization mina f . mine
colonia f . colony personal personal
continent e m. continent petroleo m. petroleum
cuadrado, -a square poblacion f . population
despedir (i) to send away; des- politico, -a political
pedirse to take leave, say pozo m. well
good-bye producir (zco) to produce
estacion f . station recurso m. resource
europeo, -a European region f . region
extension f . extent
NOMBRES GEOGRAFICOS
Filadelfia, Philadelphia. La Florida, Florida (a Spanish word
meaning flowery; we have changed the stress to the first syllable).
Luisiana, Louisiana. Nuevo Mejico, New Mexico. Pensilvania,
Pennsylvania. Tejas, Texas.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish:
i . Los Gomez sentian tencr que abandonar a Nueva York.
2. Pero querian empezar su viaje hacia el este. 3. Don Ramon
queria estar otra vez con su tio en California. 4. Pensaba
hacer el viaje por el norte del pais. 5. A las regiones del
sur los espanoles de otros tiempos habian traido la civiliza-
tion europea. 6. Las colonias inglesas existieron en America
antes de venir los espanoles. 7. Los Gomez y don Ramon
se habian divertido en Nueva York. 8. La vida de la ciudad
es muy diferente de la de otras partes de un pais. 9. Los
Estados Unidos tienen mas habitantes por milla cuadrada
54 QUINITO EN AMERICA
que Espana. 10. La poblacion de Espana es cinco veces mas
grande que la de los Estados Unidos. n. Los bosques, las
llanuras y las minas de Norte America son fuentes de enormes
riquezas. 12. Hay pozos que producen mucho petroleo.
13. La campana de la Libertad se encuentra en la ciudad de
Washington. 14. La libertad personal y politica es lo que
hace que don Ramon se quede en los Estados Unidos. 15. Un
bosque sirve para producir madera.
II. Associate in thought each word of the first column with
one of the second column :
libertad cuadrada
petroleo viaje
bosque este
milla pozo
estacion funcion
teatro campana
viajero sur
norte madera
oeste ferrocarril
torre barco
rascacielos debajo de
cubierta subir
tunel alto
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
i. Sirve para producir. Serves to produce. No piden nada
a nadie. They ask nothing of anyone.
Servir, pedir and despedirse are examples of vowel-changing
verbs of Class III. Such verbs, all of the 3rd conjugation,
show a change from e to i in the three forms of the singular
and the third person plural of the present, in the third per-
son singular and plural of the preterite, in the gerund, and the
singular and plural of the polite imperative.
CLASS III
e to i
LOS TURISTAS SE DESPIDEN 55
servir, Present: sirvo, sirves, sirve; servimos,
to serve servis, sirven
Preterite: servi, serviste, sirvio; ser-
vimos, servisteis, sirvieron
Polite Imperative: sirva Vd., sirvan
Yds.
Gerund: sirviendo
2. Descubrir, to discover; descubier to, discovered. Escribir,
to write; escrito, written.
A number of verbs, all of the 2nd or 3rd conjugation, have
irregular past participles. The following, in addition to the
above, are the most common such verbs:
abrir, to open; abierto, opened
cubrir, to cover; cubierto, covered
morir (ue, u), to die; muerto, died
romper, to break; roto or rompido, broken
volver (ue), to return; vuelto, returned
Compounds of the above verbs also have irregular past
participles: descubrir; devolver (ue), to give back; entreabrir,
to open part way; and others.
3. A number of irregular verbs are irregular in the past
participle form. The most common of such verbs are:
decir, to say; dicho, said poner, to put; puesto, put
hacer, to do; hecho, done ver, to see; visto, seen
4. Traer, to bring; traido, brought. Leer, to read; leido,
read.
Verbs whose infinitives end in -er or -ir preceded by a strong
vowel (a, e, o) require a written accent on the weak vowel i
of the past participle in order to prevent the formation of a
diphthong and to maintain the stress of voice on that vowel,
which must always be stressed. Traido would be pronounced
trai-do; but traido gives tra-i-do.
56 QUINITO EN AMERICA
I. Say and write the past participles of caer, to fall; oir,
to hear; atraer, to attract.
II. Give a synopsis in the 3rd person singular in the usual
form, of pedir (i) to ask for, request. (Note that pedir requires
an indirect object noun or pronoun indicating the person from
whom the request is made: no pido nada a nadie. I ask
nothing of anyone; me pidio un favor. He asked a favor of me.)
III. Give the English for the following sentences:
i. No nos sirvio nada. 2. Les sirvo un buen plato. 3. Ellos
estan sirviendome la sopa. 4. No me pida Vd. nada. 5. Si-
guen pidiendole a ella el pan. 6. Pidanle a el un poco de
dinero. 7. Nolohemosleido. 8. £ Lohaoido Vd. ? 9. £ Que
le ha escrito a el su amigo ? 10. La ciudad nos ha atraido.
IV. Say and write in Spanish:
i. Have you (Vds.) not seen them? 2. He is not asking
me for anything. 3. What did they serve you (pol. sing.) ?
4. They have never served me anything. 5. Have you (tu)
told me the truth ? 6. He has never fallen. 7. What had he
put in the automobile ? 8. We have not discovered anything.
9. My friends have returned to the city.
V. Replace the indirect object nouns with indirect object
pronouns, making clear the meaning of the pronouns by adding
the right terminal form preceded by a. Model: Sirven el
plato al nino. Le sirven a el el plato.
i. Han escrito la carta al senor. 2. Pidan Vds. dinero a
las senoras. 3. Estan sirviendo frutas a la senorita. 4. No
podemos traer el papel a los profesores. 5. No ban dicho las
palabras al senor.
VI. In the sentences of V replace the direct object nouns
with direct object pronouns. Model: Sirven el plato al nino.
Lo sirven al nino.
CAPlTULO IX
EN LA HERMOSA CAPITAL
DE WASHINGTON
No cesaron los Gomez de admirar los Irenes en que
viajaban. Todo en ellos era muy moderno y comodo.
En el viaje de Filadelfia a Washington observaron
atentos los campos por donde pasaban, los arboles y
las haciendas con sus casas de madera bien cuidadas. 5
Era el otono y en los campos los hombres recogian, a la
luz del sol, las ultimas frutas y legumbres. Era un paisaje
lleno de paz.
Quedaron encantados los viajeros con la bella capital
de la nacion norteamericana. El Capitolio, la Casa 10
Blanca, donde reside el presidente, los diferentes de-
partamentos del gobierno, las grandes avenidas y los
bellos parques les ofrecieron mucho que admirar.
Tan encantados estaban los viajeros que decidieron
pasar varies dias recorriendo la ciudad y sus alrededores. 15
Desde lo mas alto del monumento a Washington, un
gran rascacielos, cogieron una vista magnifica de la her-
mosa ciudad. Ante la soberbia estatua de Lincoln se
detuvieron en silencio. Leyeron emocionados las palabras
del amado Libertador, grabadas en la piedra al lado de 20
su estatua: « Este gobierno del pueblo, por el pueblo,
para el pueblo, no ha de perecer de la faz de la tierra. »
Por no estar reunido el Congreso no pudieron asistir
a una de sus sesiones, pero recorrieron el Capitolio y
admiraron las estatuas de hombres famosos en la his- 25
toria de la nacion.
57
58 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Fueron recibidos casi con carino por el embajador de
Espana, porque era antiguo amigo del buen padre de
dona Ana, el que vivia en Madrid y al que visitaron
30 Quinito y Pepe en su primer viaje a pie a la capital
espanola. El senor embajador hablo con ellos por algiin
tiempo, y luego los condujo por los salones y los jardines
de la embajada.
En el bello edificio de la Union Panamericana pasaron
35 horas agradables viendo los salones y los jardines. En
este centro uno puede aprender mucho acerca de los
paises hispanoamericanos.
Hicieron los espaiioles una visita a Mount Vernon,
antigua hacienda de Jorge Washington. La soberbia
40 casa y los jardines les gustaron mucho. Ante la tumba
del primer presidente se detuvieron emocionados.
Volviendo a Washington visitaron el cementerio na-
tional de Arlington y en la tumba del soldado descono-
cido pusieron una corona de flores.
45 Una vez mas en el tren, expreso Quinito lo que pensaban
y sentian sus parientes, diciendo:
— Nunca olvidare estos dlas pasados en la capital de
esta nation. Creo haber visto algo de la grandeza de
la Union norteamericana. Ya se por qu6 aman tanto
50 a su patria los ciudadanos de este pais.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a la luz del sol in the sunlight no ha de perecer de la faz de
cesar de + infinitive to cease + la tierra shall not perish from
infinitive the face of the earth
creo haber visto I think I have por no estar reunido el Congreso
seen because Congress was not as-
sembled
EN LA CAPITAL DE WASHINGTON 59
VOCABULARIO
alrededores m. pi. surroundings, historic f . history
suburbs libertador m. liberator
ante before, in the presence of olvidar to forget
capitoliom. capitol otonom. autumn, fall
cementerio m. cemetery panamericano, -a Pan American
cesar to cease paz f . peace
congreso m. congress perecer (zco) to perish
corona f . garland; crown recoger (jo) to gather, pick up
desconocido, -a unknown reunir to assemble
embajada L embassy saldn m. hall, salon
emocionado, -a moved (with emo- sesion f . session
tion), touched, thrilled sober bio, -a fine, superb
faz f . (poetic) face soldado m. soldier
gobierno m. government tierra f . earth, land
grabar to engrave, cut tumba f . tomb
grandeza f . greatness, grandeur union f . union
NOTAS
La Union Panamericana, the Pan American Union, was founded
in Washington, April 14, 1890. Its present headquarters, a gift of
Andrew Carnegie, is one of the most beautiful buildings in the
capital. The Union is a semi-official agency of all the Latin- American
Republics and the United States, all of which twenty-one nations
contribute to its support. The board of governors is composed of
the ambassadors and ministers of the Latin-American countries who
reside in Washington, and of the Secretary of State of the United
States, who acts as chairman of the board. This board elects a
director who is a citizen of the United States, and an assistant
director who is a Latin-American.
The purpose of the Pan American Union is to promote peace,
friendship and cultural relations among all American nations. It
has charge of organizing the different Pan American Conferences.
It publishes a monthly Bulletin in English, Spanish and Portuguese,
and issues many pamphlets on different topics related to the history,
60 QUINITO EN AMERICA
geography and commerce of the Americas. In the Columbus Me-
morial Library of the Union are found some ten thousand useful
volumes. Students and teachers seeking information on Latin-
American countries will find the services of the Union invaluable.
Under the leadership of James G. Elaine, Secretary of State in
the administration of President Harrison, a meeting attended by
some sixty delegates from Latin America was held in Washington.
As a result of that conference was formed the Commercial Bureau
of the American Republics (April 14, 1890). In 1910 the name was
changed to the Pan American Union.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer the following questions in Spanish:
i . £ Que observaron los espafioles en el viaje a Washington ?
2. <j Que vieron en los campos ? 3. ^ Que edificios admiraron
en la capital ? 4. <; Que decidieron hacer ? 5. <: Que cogieron
desde lo mas alto del monumento a Washington ? 6. <j Cuales
son las palabras de Lincoln que se encuentran grabadas al
lado de su estatua? 7. £ For que no asistieron los turistas a
una sesion del Congreso ? 8. <j Como los recibio el embajador
de Espafia ? 9. <; Por donde los condujo el scnor embajador ?
10. £ Que hicieron en el edificio de la Union Panamericana ?
11. <: Que vieron en Mount Washington? 12. <J Donde se
detuvieron al volver a la capital? 13. £ Que hicieron ante la
tumba del Soldado Desconocido ? 14. £ Que creyo haber
visto Quinito en Washington ?
II. Use in complete Spanish sentences the following words
or expressions:
capital, capitolio; a la luz del sol; por no poder asistir;
haber de asistir; alrededores; recoger las frutas; ccsar de
+ infinitive; creer haber leido; poner una corona en la tumba;
por estar cansado; ser recibido por el embajador; cesar de
hablar.
EN LA CAPITAL DE WASHINGTON 61
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
1. algiin tiempo, some time; el buen padre, the good father.
Here are examples of how some adjectives are shortened in
form when they occur before a masculine singular noun. The
complete list of adjectives which have this peculiarity follows:
algunoy algun, some ninguno, ningun, no, not any
bueno, buen, good primero, primer, first
grande, gran, great tercero, tercer, third
malo, mal, bad uno, un, one, a
2. No ha de perecer, is not to perish, shall not perish.
The verb haber (most frequently used as auxiliary to form
the compound tenses) is followed at times by de + infinitive,
to express futurity or a mild form of obligation.
Examples: Han de partir. They are to leave, must leave,
shall leave. No has de venir. You are not to come, you don't
have to come.
This use of haber de is found in all the simple tenses: Yo
habia de llegar. I was to arrive. Habrian de saber. They
would have to know.
Review the verb haber. See page 578 of the Appendix.
3. No cesaron de admirar. They did not cease to admire.
a. Many verbs require no preposition before a following
infinitive. The most common of such verbs are the following:
deber to be obliged to, ought poder to be able
decidir to decide preferir to prefer
desear to desire querer to wish
pensar to intend saber to know how
b. Verbs meaning to learn, teach or begin and those showing
motion to or toward, are followed by the preposition a before
a following infinitive. The most common of such verbs are:
62 QUINITO EN AMERICA
aprender to learn ensenar to teach
comenzar to begin ir to go, be going
empezar to begin venir to come
c. Verbs denoting cessation usually have the preposition de
before a following infinitive. The most common of such verbs
are:
cesar to cease dejar to cease, fail
d. In other cases one simply must learn by observation
what preposition, if any, is used between the verb and a fol-
lowing infinitive :
Tratan de contestar. They try to answer. Insisten en
hablar. They insist on speaking.
4. Aman a su patria. They love their native land.
Here the direct object is preceded by the preposition a, even
though that object does not denote a specific person nor is it
a proper name of a person or place. But patria is here con-
sidered a kind of personified noun and as such must be pre-
ceded by a.
This a is also necessary at times to make clear which noun
is the object of the sentence: La paz sigue a la guerra, or, A
la guerra sigue la paz. Peace follows war. A la paz sigue
la guerra, or, La guerra sigue a la paz. War follows peace.
5. Par no estar reunido el Congreso. Because of (on ac-
count of] Congress not being assembled. Because Congress was
not assembled.
For used before an infinitive usually expresses on account
of or because of, and the infinitive is then equivalent to the
gerund in English; or the whole phrase is equivalent to a
clause introduced by because. (See last translation above.)
EN LA CAPITAL DE WASHINGTON 63
I. Make singular the following phrases:
i. los buenos sefiores. 2. ningunos soldados. 3. las
grandes ciudades. 4. algunos dias. 5. los malos chicos.
6. los primeros habitantes. 7. unos (some, a few) hombres
desconocidos.
II. Insert the proper preposition, if any is necessary, before
the dependent verb in each of the following sentences:
i. Empieza — recoger las frutas. 2. Prefiero — ir con el.
3. He cesado — trabajar. 4. <i Que piensa Vd. — hacer?
5. No sabemos — preparar el plato. 6. Me ensena — leer.
7. No podran — decidir. 8. Deciden — quedarse. 9. Dejan
— hablar. 10. Empezamos — escribir. n. Viene — vernos.
12. Van — comer. 13. Debemos — ir.
III. Using the proper form of haber de + infinitive, express
in Spanish the following sentences:
i. She is to forget it. 2. He shall (is to) accompany me.
3. Must you (Vd.) do that (eso)? 4. We are to learn it.
5. We were to learn it.
IV. Replace the English words in the following sentences
with the proper Spanish words :
i. Because of being en la ciudad, el nos visito. 2. On ac-
count of traveling en el tren, dejaron su automovil en casa.
3. Because of knowing how conducir un automovil, Quinito era
el conductor. 4. Because of not telling la verdad, no le per-
mitieron al nino acompanarles.
V. Replace the verb form given in English with the correct
Spanish equivalent:
i. Despues de harvesting las legumbres. 2. Salio sin saying
nada. 3. Yo creo to have visto. 4. Han put una corona en la
tumba. 5. Seguimos looking at el capitolio. 6. Est&n asking
for dinero. 7. Antes de leaving, nos salud6 el muchacho.
CAPlTULO X
CON RUMBO A LA FLORIDA
Por primera vez tuvieron los Gomez que pasar una
noche en un tren norteamericano. Estuvieron muy bien
en el coche dormitorio Pullman, aunque les parecio a
Quinito y Pepe bastante dificil la manera de arreglar las
s camas. En Espana los coches dormitories tienen de-
partamentos que se parecen a pequenas habitaciones,
pero en este Pullman los departamentos formados por
cortinas les parecian un poco estrechos.
Pero todos durmieron bien y a la manana siguiente se
10 desayunaron encantados en el coche comedor. Al volver
a su Pullman vieron que el mozo negro del coche habia
arreglado las camas de manera que ya eran asientos muy
comodos.
— Este estado de la Florida, que los norteamericanos
15 llaman Florida, y al que nos acercamos, <; que sabeis de
el ? — pregunto don Ramon a sus sobrinos.
— Muy poco — contesto Pepe. — Pero queremos que
tu nos cuentes algo de su historia.
— Bueno. Oid vosotros. Juan Ponce de Leon, primer
20 gobernador de la isla de Puerto Rico, anos de 1510 a 1521,
fue nombrado por el rey de Espana para buscar en el
mar Caribe la llamada « fuente de la juventud » de la
que hablaban los indios caribes. Con tres barcos salio
de Puerto Rico en 1513. No encontro la famosa fuente,
25 pero si que descubrio las costas de lo que es hoy la Florida,
nombre que 61 dio a esta tierra por haberla descubierto
64
CON RUMBO A LA FLORIDA 65
el dia de Pascua Florida. Mas tarde, en una lucha con los
indios fue herido tan gravemente que murio poco despues,
en la isla de Cuba.
Desde aquellos tiempos hasta muchos afios despues, 30
casi toda la region sur de lo que son hoy los Estados
Unidos se llamaba la Florida, y fue el campo de mucha
actividad por parte de varios exploradores y conquista-
dores espanoles.
En 1565, Pedro Menendez de Aviles, gobernador de 35
Cuba y la Florida, formo en Espaiia una expedition para
ir a conquistar y poblar a la Florida. Salio de Cadiz con
19 barcos y 1.500 hombres. Llego a la costa de la Florida
con solo siete de sus barcos. Fundo el 5 de septiembre
la poblacion de San Agustin, que fue la primera ciudad 40
europea cstablecida en las tierras que son hoy de los
Estados Unidos.
— <; Y sigue existiendo hoy esa poblacion ? — pregunto
Pepe.
— Ya lo creo, y la veremos dentro de una hora. 45
A las once de aquella manana los viajeros bajaron del
tren en la estacion de San Agustin. En Washington hacia
frio cuando salieron para el sur, pero aqui en la Florida
hacia sol y calor.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
arreglar una cama to make up a oid (vosotros) hear, listen (famil-
bed iar imperative plural of oir)
con rumbo a in the direction of, queremos que tu nos cuentes we
bound for want you to tell us
de manera que in such a way that ya lo creo I should say so (indeed
hacerfrio to be cold (weather) / believe it)
llamado so-called
66 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
actividad f . activity formar to form
asiento m. seat frio adj. and noun m. cold
caribe Caribbean fundar to found
cortina f . curtain gobernador m. governor
costa f . coast gravemente gravely
comedor m. dining room; coche herir (ie, z") to wound
comedor dining car indio m. Indian
conquistador m. conqueror juventud f . youth
conquistar to conquer mar m. sea
dentro adv. inside; dentro de mozo m. porter
prep, within, inside of nombrar to name, appoint
dormitorio m. bedroom; coche poblar (ue) to settle, populate
dormitorio sleeping car rumbo m. direction, course
establecer (zco) to establish Notice that poblacion in this
expedition expedition chapter means town
NOTAS
Juan Ponce de Le6n (born about 1460) was one of the earliest
conquistadores, and the Island of Puerto Rico was one of the first
territories settled by Spain. The island, which was discovered by
Columbus in 1493, was first called San Juan. Ponce de Leon began
its conquest in 1510 and was its first governor. He built the town
of Caparra, which in 1521 was transferred to the other side of the
bay and was called San Juan. Later the whole island was given the
name of the bay or harbor on which the city was located — Puerto
Rico, Rich Port.
The indios caribes, Caribbean Indians, who were the inhabitants
of the island when the Spaniards arrived, became extinct in the
Mar Caribe, Caribbean Sea, by the end of the first half of the i6th
century.
On Pascua Florida, Flowery Easter (also called Pascua de Resurrec-
cidri) in the year 1513, Ponce de Leon is said to have first sighted the
eastern shore of the Florida Peninsula. On a second expedition in
1521 he was wounded while fighting the Indians of Florida.
CON RUMBO A LA FLORIDA 67
Notice how we have changed the syllabic stress on the word
Florida. Pascua is a term applied to any of the chief church holy
periods; for example, Pascua de Navidad, Christmas.
La Fuente de la Juventud, the Fountain of Youth, was reported
by the Indians to exist on the island of Bimini, somewhere to the
north of Puerto Rico, and the explorer, commissioned by the king
of Spain, was seeking this probably fabulous island when he dis-
covered the coast of the North American continent. On early maps
the Indian name Bimini was given to the whole peninsula of
Florida.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. Los Gomez tuvieron que — . 2. Los coches dormitories
espanoles tienen — . 3. En el Pullman los departamentos son
formados por — . 4. Despues de dormir bien, los viajeros — .
5. Mientras tanto el mozo negro — . 6. Don Ramon conto a
sus parientes algo — . 7. Ponce de Leon fue nombrado para
— . 8. Descubrio la costa sur del continente el dia de — , ano
de 1513. 9. Por eso dio a estas tierras — . 10. Sicte anos
mas tarde volvio a la Florida y entonces — . n. Durante
muchos anos se daba el nombre de la Florida a una gran parte
de — . 12. Esta region fue el campo — . 13. Pedro Menen-
dez de Aviles, el 5 de septiembre de 1565, fundo — . 14. Fue
la primera ciudad establecida en — . 1 5. En Washington hacia
— , pero en la Florida hacia — ,
II. Use in complete Spanish sentences in the present or im-
perfect tense, the following " weather expressions":
Hacer frio. To be cold. Hacer sol. To be sunny. Hacer
buen tiempo. To be good weather. Hacer color. To be warm.
Hacer fresco. To be cool. Hacer mal tiempo. To be bad
weather.
68 QUINITO EN AMERICA
III. Select for each word of the first column a word of the
second column that is related in meaning and derivation:
joven comer
nombre poblar
conquistar nombrar
dormir gobernador
comedor juventud
asiento dormitorio
explorador conquistador
poblacion explorar
gobierno sentarse
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
i. Lo busque. I looked for it. Busquelo Vd. Look for it.
Saque el dinero. I took out the money. Saquelo Vd. Take
it out. Llegue tarde. I arrived late. No llegue Vd. tarde.
Don't arrive late. Goce macho del viaje. I enjoyed the trip
greatly. Goce Vd. de la vida. Enjoy life.
We have here examples of changes of spelling in certain
forms of consonant-changing (also called orthographical-
changing verbs) . Retention of the consonant sound in which
the stem of the verb ends requires a change in the spelling of
that sound. The k sound represented by c in the infinitive
(before a) is spelled with qu before the ending e\ the hard g
sound represented by g (before a) becomes gu before e\ the
th sound represented by z (before a) becomes c before e.
Changes in -ar verbs
a. Verbs in -car change c to qu before -e in endings. This
happens in the first person singular of the preterite indicative
and in the polite imperative forms: buscar, to seek; busque,
I sought; busque Vd., busquen Vds., seek.
English sound: k as in kick; spelled ca, co, que.
CON RUMBO A LA FLORIDA 69
b. Verbs in -gar change gtogu before -e, in the same forms
as in (a): pagar, to pay, pay for; pague, I paid; pague Vd.,
paguen Yds., pay.
English sound : g as in go; spelled ga, go, gue.
c. Verbs in -zar change z to c before -e, in the same forms:
empezar, to begin; empece, I began; empiece Vd., empiecen
Vds., begin. (Notice that, as here, a consonant-changing verb
may also be vowel-changing.)
English sound: th as in thin; spelled za, zo, ce.
d. Verbs in -guar change gu to gu before -e, in the same
forms: apaciguar, to pacify; apacigue, I pacified; apacigue
Vd., apacigilen Vds., pacify. (This type is not frequent. No
verb of this type is used in this book.)
2. Establezco, I establish. Perezco, I perish. Me parezco
a el, I resemble him. Establezca Vd., Establish. Recojo, I
gather. Recoja Vd., Gather. Le sigo, I follow him. Sigale
Vd., Follow him.
Changes in -er and -ir verbs
Similar changes to retain the consonant sound in which the
stem ends are found in -er and -ir verbs.
a. Verbs in -guir change gu to g before -o or -a, in the
first person singular of the present indicative and in the two
polite imperative forms: seguir, to follow; sigo, I follow;
siga Vd., sigan Vds., follow. (Notice again that a consonant-
changing verb may also be vowel-changing.)
b. Verbs in -ger or -gir change g to j before -o or -a in
the first person singular of the present indicative and in the
two polite imperative forms: recoger, to gather; recojo, I
gather; recoja Vd., recojan Vds., gather.
c. Verbs in -cer or -cir preceded by a consonant change
c to z before the endings -o or -a: veneer, to vanquish, over-
come; venzo, I vanquish; venza Vd., venzan Vds., vanquish.
70 QUINITO EN AMERICA
d. Verbs in -cer or -cir preceded by a vowel change c to
zc before the endings -o or -a: conocer, to know; conozco, I
know; conozca Vd., conozcan Yds., know.
e. Verbs in -quir change -qu to -c before -o or -a: delinquir,
to transgress; delinco, I transgress; delinca Vd., delincan Vds.,
transgress. (This type is not frequent.)
3. Es tamos hablando. We are speaking. Seguian co-
rriendo. They kept on running.
"Progressive" verb forms are found in Spanish as in Eng-
lish. The gerund (present participle) is used in such forms
most frequently after the auxiliary verb estar. But other
verbs are also at times used as auxiliaries, among them:
seguir, to keep on, continue; ir, to go, go on; venir, to come;
quedar, to remain, be.
Examples: sigue pensando, he keeps on thinking; van sa-
liendo, they go on coming out; viene llorando, he comes weeping;
quedan durmiendo, they continue sleeping.
I. Say and write in Spanish:
i. I seek, I sought. 2. Seek (Vd., Vds.}. 3. Don't seek
it. 4. I paid for (not translated) it. 5. Pay for it (Vd.).
6. I began it. 7. Begin it (Vds.). 8. Don't begin it (Vd.).
9. I gather it. 10. I gathered it. n. Don't gather it (Vd.).
12. Seize (coger) it (Vds.). 13. I seize it. 14. I offer (ofrecer)
it. 15. Do not offer it (Vd.). 16. I establish it.
II. Place properly the direct object pronoun las, them, in
the following sentences. (Be sure to note whether a written
accent is required on the verb forms.)
i. Estamos ofreciendo. 2. Siguieron poniendo. 3. Van
viendo. 4. Vienen saludando. 5. Establezca Vd. 6. No es-
tablezca Vd. 7. Venzan Vds. 8. Saquen Vds. 9. Ofrezca
Vd. 10. Yo pague. n. Yo saque. 12. Estaban pagando.
CAPlTULO XI
TIERRA DE SOL Y ALEGRlA
— La Florida de hoy parece un paraiso de los norte-
americanos durante el invierno, <j verdad ? — dijo Pepe.
— Si, aunque todavia en los primeros dias de diciembre
no ha empezado la temporada de los turistas — respondio
el senor Segre. — Dicen que en enero y febrero todos 5
los hoteles de aqui estan llenos de los que se han escapado
del tiempo frio y las nieves del norte. Pero no olvideis
vosotros que yo soy de California, que es la gran rival
de la Florida, no solo como paraiso de invierno, sino
tambien como tierra que produce naranjas y limones. Y 10
como ciudadano de California no puedo dar a la Florida
importancia alguna en el mundo.
— Tal vez no como ciudadano de California — con-
testo Quinito riendo, — pero si como espanol. Porque
tanto la Florida como California debe mucho a los pri- 15
meros pobladores espanoles.
— Es verdad. A los espanoles les deben las dos regiones
otras cosas de importancia; por ejemplo, la naranja, que
fue traida de Valencia al Nuevo Mundo por ellos. <; Y
no te gusta el estilo de arquitectura que se encuentra 20
aqui, y tambien en California — la casa andaluza con
patio y con tejado de azulejos ?
— Si que me gusta. Es una arquitectura que va muy
bien a las tierras de calor. Estas casas me recuerdan las
71
72 QUINITO EN AMERICA
25 de Sevilla, Granada y Cordoba. Me siento aqui tan
contento como en Andalucia, que amo muchisimo.
Los turistas visitaron en San Agustin la antigua casa
espanola, construida en 1599, que es la mas vieja de los
Estados Unidos; y la fortaleza espanola de San Marco
3o (llamada hoy Fort Marion). Miraron emocionados estas
huellas de la civilization espanola que en un tiempo era
muy fuerte aqui. Recordaron como los primeros pobla-
dores defendieron la colonia en sus luchas con Drake,
conquistador ingles, en 1586. Desde el ano 1763 hasta
35 1783, la poblacion era de los ingleses, quienes en este
ultimo ano la pasaron a Espana y luego, en 1819, los
espanoles vendieron la Florida a los Estados Unidos.
En un automovil viajaron los turistas de San Agustin
a Ormond, Daytona Beach, Palm Beach y Miami, pasando
4o por carreteras soberbias. Pasaron una noche en un cam-
pamento para turistas, y les gusto mucho la pequena
casa en que dormian, la que tenia todas las comodidades
que se pueden desear.
Con frecuencia veian bellas casas de estilo espanol, en
45 medio de palmeras y otros arboles verdes.
En Miami Beach se quedaron varios dias banandose en
las aguas azules de la bahia y dando paseos por las playas.
— <: Que dirian Ponce de Leon y Menendez de Aviles
si pudieran ver hoy a la Florida moderna ? — pregunto
50 Pepe.
— Si en un momento de vida la pudiesen ver, sin duda
volverian a caer muertos por estar tan sorprendidos —
contesto Quinito.
TIERRA DE SOL Y ALEGRlA 73
VOCABULARIO
andaluz, -uza Andalusian invierno m. winter
arquitectura f. architecture limon m. lemon
azul blue naranja f . orange
azulejo m. tile nieve f. snow
banar to bathe palmera f . palm tree
campamento m. camp paraiso m. paradise
carretera f. highway playa f . beach
comodidad f . comfort, convenience poblador m. settler
defender (ie) to defend refugio m. refuge
ejemplo m. example rival m. and f . rival
estilo m. s/y/e *e/ac/o m. roof
fortaleza f . fortress temporada f . season
huella f. /race, wrfige turista m. and f .
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
ir ft/en fl /o Z>c suitable to, become si pudieran (si pudiesen) if they
muchisimo very much could
no olvideis (vosotros) don't forget tal vez perhaps
no solo . . . sino tambien not only volver a caer to fall again
. . . but also
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Andalucia, Andalusia, is a large region of southern Spain (chief
cities, Sevilla, Granada, Cordoba), a district whose climate is quite
warm and whose architecture, very different from that of central
and northern Spain, is of open, attractive style, planned for and
admirably suited to the climate. Red tile roofs, beautiful patios
in which abound flowers and fountains, artistic iron grill-work
and much use of well-designed tiles are the chief characteristics
of the architecture, which has been copied in warm climes of the
United States. This style of architecture was originated by the
Moors, who occupied Andalusia for 780 years. The adjective an-
daluz becomes andaluza in the feminine singular. Why?
San Agustin, Saint Augustine, displays proudly the oldest Spanish
(for that matter, oldest European) house in the United States. A
74 QUINITO EN AMERICA
festival, called "A Day in Old Spain," is held in that city in February.
St. Augustine has, in the course of its history, changed hands thirteen
times. It has flown at different times the flag of Spain, England,
France, the Southern Confederacy and the United States.
The fortress or Castillo de San Marco, known today as Fort
Marion, was built by the Spanish in 1672, to protect St. Augustine.
It is an excellent example of construction of this kind and is still
today in a fine state of preservation. It is built of coquina, a cement-
like composition of sea shells, which seems to endure forever.
Sir Francis Drake (1540-1596) was an English filibusterer and
pirate who preyed upon the Spanish colonies in the Caribbean
region, on the Pacific coast of South America and on the coasts of
Spain, from 1573 to 1596. In that period the Spanish galleons
carried gold and silver from the New World colonies to Spain and
were considered fair targets for attack by pirates from many coun-
tries of Europe. The " Spanish Main" saw hundreds of naval
battles between Spanish ships and piratical enemies and many early
Spanish settlements were subjected to attack. Drake ravaged the
coast of Florida in the year 1586. He was knighted by Queen
Elizabeth for his success in raiding Spanish ships and settlements.
Sir John Hawkins (1532-1595) was an associate of Drake in these
depredations. Both Hawkins and Drake commanded ships in the
battle against the Spanish Armada, in 1588, and the former was
knighted for his prowess on that occasion. Sir Henry Morgan
(1635-1688) was the most famous and most cruel of the English
buccaneers. After a battle with 3000 defenders, he destroyed in 1671
the original city of Panama, founded by Pedro Arias de Avila in
1519. The city was afterwards rebuilt on another site.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no, whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. Durante el invierno, el estado de la Florida es un pa-
raiso para muchos norteamericanos. 2. Muchos van al sur
a escaparse del calor que hace en el norte. 3. La principal
TIERRA DE SOL Y ALEGRlA 75
temporada de los turistas que visitan a la Florida cae en los
meses de octubre y noviembre. 4. Don Ramon dijo que
California es la gran rival de la Florida. 5. Producen tan to
la Florida como California limones y naranjas. 6. Los dos
estados deben a los pobladores espanoles muchas cosas de
importancia. 7. Le gusto a Quinito el estilo andaluz de
muchas casas de la Florida. 8. La casa mas vieja de los
Estados Unidos se encuentra en Miami. 9. Los turistas mi-
raron emocionados las huellas de la civilizacion francesa en
San Agustin. 10. Los primeros pobladores de la ciudad
tuvieron que defender la poblacion cuando los ingleses la
atacaron. n. La Florida fue tierra espariola cuando los Es-
tados Unidos la compraron. 12. En la Florida existen muchos
campamentos para turistas. 13. La pequena casa en que
nuestros turistas pasaron la noche tenia pocas comodidades.
14. Los Gomez y don Ramon se banaron en las aguas rojas
de la play a de Miami Beach. 15. Ponce de Leon y Menendez
de Aviles quedarian muy sorprendidos al ver a la Florida
moderna.
II. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English.
1. I see them again. T. Yo — verlos.
2. This land is not only a 2. Esta tierra no solo es un
refuge but also a paradise. refugio — .
3. Both Florida and Cali- 3. — la Florida — California
fornia have palm trees. tienen palmeras.
4. This style of architecture 4. Este estilo de arquitectura
is suitable to a warm land. — una tierra de calor.
5. Yesterday it was quite 5. Ayer — bastante — .
warm.
6. Tomorrow it will be cold. 6. Mariana — .
7. He starts out bound for 7. Sale — .
Florida.
76
QUINITO EN AMERICA
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
i. Sus luchas. Their fights. Nuestros viajeros. Our trav-
elers.
Sus and nuestros are forms of the possessive adjectives,
all of which are shown in the following table :
SUBJECT PRONOUNS
yo I
tu you, thou
el he
ella she
listed you
nosotros, -as we
vosotros, -as you
ellos they
ellas they
ustedes you
CORRESPONDING POSSESSIVE
ADJECTIVES
Singular
mi, mis my
tu, tus your, thy
su, sus his, its
su, sus her, its
su, sus your
Plural
nuestro (-a, -os, -as) our
vuestro (-a, -os, -as) your
su, sus their
su, sus their
su, sus your
Possessive adjectives, like any other adjectives, agree in
gender and number with the nouns they modify.
The longer forms of these possessive adjectives are used
after the nouns they modify or after the verb ser, to be. These
forms are :
mio (-a, -os, -as) my, mine,
of mine
tuyo (-a, -os, -as) your,
yours, of yours
suyo (-a, -os, -as) his, of his;
our,
hers, of hers; your, yours, of
yours
nuestro (-a, -os, -as)
ours, of ours
vuestro (-a, -os, -as) your
yours, of yours
suyo (-a, -os, -as) their
theirs, of theirs; your, yours
of yours
TIERRA DE SOL Y ALEGRlA 77
Examples: un amigo mio, a friend of mine; esta casa
nuestra, this house of ours; aquellos barcos suyos, those ships
of His, of hers, of yours, of theirs; este refugio tuyo, this refuge
of yours. Aquellas naranjas son nuestras, those oranges are
ours. Este paratso es mio, this paradise is mine.
The meanings of su and suyo evidently are not always
clear; hence it becomes necessary at times to clarify these
forms, and this is done by using the preposition de followed
by the appropriate terminal pronoun, thus:
de el his house
de ella her house Instead of su the definite
de usted your house article (here Za) may be
de ellos their house used: la casa de el, la casa
de ellas their house de ella, etc.
de ustedes your house
2. Hable Vd. Speak. Venda Vd. Sell. Escriba Vd.
Write. Piense Vd. Think. Vuelva Vd. Return. Establezca
Vd. Establish. Busque Vd. Seek. Pague Vd. Pay. Siga
Vd. Follow, go on. Recoja Vd. Gather. Recuerde Vd. Re-
member.
The polite imperative is formed, in regular and vowel-
changing verbs, by changing the ending of the third personal
singular of the present indicative, from a to e (first conjuga-
tion), or from e to a (second and third conjugations).
In consonant-changing verbs of the first conjugation the
polite imperative is the same as the first person singular,
preterite indicative, except that the ending -e bears no ac-
cent: pague, I paid; pague Vd., paguen Vds., pay; busque,
I sought; busque Vd., busquen Vds., seek.
In consonant-changing verbs of the second and third con-
jugations and in irregular verbs the ending -o of the first
person singular, present indicative, is changed to -a.
78 QUINITO EN AMERICA
See above examples. And the following (irregular verbs) :
digo, I say, diga Vd., say; vengo, I come, venga Vd., come;
salgo, I go out, saiga Vd., go out.
The plural of the polite imperative is formed by adding -n
to the singular: dig an Vds., vengan Yds., salgan Yds., hablen
Yds., etc.
I. Make clear that the meaning of the possessive adjective
is that shown by the English word at the beginning of the
sentence.
i. (His) Su naranja. 2. (Her) Sus naranjas. 3. ( Your,
pol. sing.) Su campamento. 4. ( Your, pol. pi.) Sus amigas.
5. (Their, m.) Su patio. 6. (Their, f.) Sus palmeras.
II. Say and write in Spanish:
i. My blue tile. 2. Our good friend. 3. Thy rich uncle.
4. His green lemons. 5. Her Andalusian house. 6. Your
(pol. pi.) new roof.
III. Make plural the phrases in II.
IV. Change to the polite imperative singular the following
infinitive phrases:
i. Saludarme. 2. Aprenderlo. 3. Recibirlos. 4. Ofre-
cerla. 5. Seguirnos. 6. No decirlo. 7. No venir conmigo.
8. No buscarlas. 9. No salir con el. 10. No vencerle.
ii. Empezarlo. 12. Hablarle.
V. Express in the polite imperative plural the commands
formed in IV.
CAPlTULO XII
UNA PUERTA ABIERTA EN LOS
CIELOS AMERICANOS
Sin duda los primeros espanoles de la Florida quedarian
sorprendidos si pudieran ver hoy el gran centro de avia-
tion de Miami. Desde alii salen los enormes aeroplanos
de la Pan American Airways, para las islas del Caribe
y para todos los paises latinoamericanos. En uno de 5
estos grandes pajaros mecanicos se puede volar a Buenos
Aires, pasando por la costa oriental de Sud America, en
tres dias y medio, una distancia de 7.400 millas. O por
la linea Panagra es posible volar a Centro America e ir
mas alia, pasando por la costa occidental de la America 10
del Sur y visitando a Colombia, Ecuador, Peru, Bolivia
y Chile. En unas seis horas se va de Santiago de Chile
a Buenos Aires, una distancia de 900 millas.
— j Que aeroplanos mas maravillosos ! — exclamo Rosa
mientras observaban ella y los otros como iban llegando 15
y partiendo estos grandes pajaros.
— Ya lo creo — contesto su tio. — Hoy el Nuevo
Mundo es de extension pequena, gracias a la aviation
tan bien desarrollada en este pais. Esta puerta abierta
en los cielos significa relaciones muy estrechas entre todas 20
las Americas. Aunque se hablan diferentes lenguas en
la America hispana y en la anglosajona, todos los pafses
del hemisferio occidental ya se conocen mucho mejor,
porque abundan ahora medios rdpidos de transporte y
comunicacion. 2s
79
80 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Fueron los turistas en automovil a Tampa, en la costa
occidental de la Florida, donde pensaban tomar otra
vez el tren para seguir su viaje. En Tampa conocieron
a dos senores simpaticos, uno cubano y el otro portorri-
30 queno. Era la primera vez que habian hablado los
espanoles con un portorriqueno. Les dijo este caballero:
— i Que lastima que ustedes no puedan ir a recorrer
la « Isla del Encanto » ! Podrian conocer la vida medio
espafiola y medio norteamericana que se ha desarrollado
35 alii. Es una vida muy espafiola, pero tiene al mismo
tiempo ciertos elementos buenos de la civilizacion anglosa-
jona, por ejemplo, progreso material y altas ideas de
education.
— Y todavia se emplea alii el idioma espanol, <; verdad ?
40 — pregunto don Ramon.
— Si, claro; siempre se ha hablado bien en la Isla la
lengua de nuestros padres — contesto el serior. — Tam-
bien se habla ingles en las principales ciudades y se estudia
esa lengua en las escuelas.
45 — Me parece que Puerto Rico, posesion de los Estados
Unidos desde la guerra de 1898 con Espana, puede ser el
eslabon que sirva para unir las dos razas de mas impor-
tancia en las Americas.
— Usted tiene razon y mucha. En Puerto Rico se ve
50 que los anglosajones y los hispanos pueden comprenderse
y trabajar los unos al lado de los otros. Los portorri-
quenos, ciudadanos de la gran Union del norte, creemos
que nuestra Isla debe ser no solo una fortaleza para pro-
teger los intereses de los Estados Unidos en el Caribe,
55 sino tambien y sobre todo un centro panamericano, un
centro de la cultura de todas las Americas.
UNA PUERTA ABIERTA EN LOS CIELOS 81
VOCABULARIO
aereo, -a aerial
aeroplano m. airplane
anglosajon, -ona Anglo-Saxon
aviacidn f . aviation
claro, -a clear; adv. of course
comunicacion f . communication
desarrollar to develop
distancia f . distance
education f . education
elemento m. element
encanto m. charm, enchantment
eslabon m. link
guerra f . war
hemisferio m. hemisphere
interes m. interest
Idstima f . pity
latinoamericano, -a Latin-Amer-
ican
linea f . line
material material
mecdnico, -a mechanical
occidental western
pdjaro m. bird
portorriqueno, -a Puerto Rican
posesion f. possession
progreso m. progress
relacion f . relation
transporte m. transportation
volar (ue) to fly
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
conocieron they met
mas alia farther, farther on
; que aeroplanos mas maravi-
llosos ! what wonderful air-
planes!
I que Idstima ! what a pity!
se va one goes
sirva may serve
si vieran if they saw
us ted tiene razon y mucha you
are absolutely right
NOTAS
The airports near Miami, for both land planes and hydroplanes,
form one of the greatest and best developed aviation centers of the
world. From there take off the great airships of the Pan American
Airways and of the Panagra, an associated line (Pan American-
Grace Company from which name Panagra is derived), which, as
related in the Spanish text of this chapter, serve both the eastern
and western coasts of South America. Connecting with these
services are different lines of land planes that serve all parts of the
United States.
82 QUINITO EN AMERICA
From Los Angeles and from Brownsville, Texas, these and as-
sociated lines carry passengers (also, of course, mail and express)
down through Mexico and Central America to France Field at
Cristobal, at the Atlantic end of the Panama Canal, where connec-
tions are made with planes that continue the trip southward.
Such air service, constantly being increased and improved, has
made possible very rapid travel over great distances and has done
very much to draw the American nations closer to each other.
La Isla del Encanto, The Isle of Enchantment, is a name fre-
quently applied to Puerto Rico, an island of great natural beauty
and rich in the production of sugar, tobacco, coffee and tropical
fruits. It is the most densely populated section of the New World,
having a population of 2,198,400 inhabitants (including adjacent
islands) in an area of 3,435 square miles, or 640 to the square mile.
Puerto Rico was acquired from Spain in 1898, under the Paris
treaty of December 10 of that year, which brought to an end the
war of the United States against Spain, which was declared April 25,
1898, after the battleship "Maine" was blown up in the harbor of
Havana, February 15, with the loss of 260 lives. Admiral Dewey
destroyed the Spanish fleet in Manila Bay on May i. On July i to
3 occurred the battles of San Juan and El Caney, in Puerto Rico.
On July 3 the fleet of Admiral Cervera was destroyed by United
States ships off the harbor of Santiago, Cuba. A peace protocol
was signed August 12.
Cuba was given freedom and the United States paid Spain
$20,000,000 to relinquish all claims to Puerto Rico, the Philip-
pine Islands and the island of Guam in the Pacific.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. ^ De que es Miami un gran centre ? 2. <; Adonde vuelan
los aeroplanes que salen de Miami? 3. <i Cuanto tiempo se
necesita para volar de Miami a Buenos Aires ? 4. <i Que
exclamo Rosa al ver estos grandes pajaros mecanicos?
5. i Que significa esta puerta abierta en los cielos ? 6. <j Cua-
UNA PUERTA ABIERTA EN LOS CIELOS 83
les son las dos razas de mas importancia en el hemisferio
occidental? 7. <i Donde se encuentra la ciudad de Tampa?
8. £ A quienes conocieron los espanoles en Tampa ? 9. £ Que
verian los Gomez y don Ramon si pudieran recorren la « Isla
del Encanto » ? 10. <J Que idiomas se hablan en la Isla ?
ii. £ Que podria ser Puerto Rico ? 12. <i Se comprenden bien
puertorriquefios y los norteamericanos ?
II. Associate in thought each word of the first column with
one of the second column:
pajaro este
aviacion anglosajones
oriental unir
occidental volar
norteamericanos aeroplano
puertorriquenos continente
eslabon hispanos
isla oeste
III. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. He met me in Tampa. i. Me — en Tampa.
2. We intend to fly on farther. 2. Pensamos volar — .
3. What a pity ! 3. j Que — !
4. What a wonderful view ! 4. j Que vista — !
5. One goes there in an hour. 5. — alia en una hora.
6. You are absolutely right. 6. Vd. tiene — .
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
i. Se va en seis horas. One goes (people, they go) in six
hours. Se puede volar. One can (people can, they can) fly.
Verbs may be used reflexively in the third person singular
(in any tense) to express an action as performed by no par-
ticular person or thing as subject of the verb. This is some-
84 QUINITO EN AMERICA
times called the impersonal reflexive, and in English the
equivalent expression has as subject the indefinite words one,
they, people.
More examples: Se come bien aqul. The food is good here,
people eat (one eats) well here. Se puede ver. One can see,
people can see. Aqui no se entra. No admission here, one
does not enter here.
2. De Vd. Give. Vaya Vd. Go.
The following irregular verbs have irregular forms in the
polite imperative, not obtained in the ways described on
page 77.
dar: de Vd. den Yds. give
ir: vaya Vd. vayan Vds. go
saber: sepa Vd. sepan Vds. know
ser: sea Vd. sean Vds. be
3. Irregular verbs. Study the following forms of irregular
verbs:
dar, to give; dando, giving; dado, given; doy, I give;
dieron, they gave
ir, to go; yendo, going; ido, gone; voy, I go; fueron, they
went
saber, to know; sabiendo, knowing; sabido, known; se, I
know; supieron, they knew, found out
4. Le conozco. I know him. El sabe la lection. He knows
the lesson.
Conocer is to know in the sense to be acquainted with, be
familiar with, a person or a thing. In the preterite tense it
means met, got acquainted with: Le conocieron en Miami.
They met him in Miami.
Saber is to know as the result of study or learning. Its ob-
ject is always a thing. It also means to know how, and it is
followed then by the infinitive: Pepe sabe conducir. Pepe
UNA PUERTA ABIERTA EN LOS CIELOS 85
knows how to drive. In the preterite sense this verb means
found out, learned: Supe que el habia venido. I found out
that he had come.
I. Say and write in Spanish the following sentences:
i. One studies much in this class. 2. They (people, one)
dance in Tampa. 3. One can learn. 4. One does no writing
here. 5. The eating is very poor (mat) in this restaurant.
II. Change the following infinitive phrases to the singular
of the affirmative polite imperative.
i. Darloalnino. 2. Ir con ella. 3. Saberlo. 4. Conocer-
las. 5. Observarlo. 6. Volar rapidamente. 7. Seguirlos.
8. Establecerlo. 9. Empezarla. 10. Abrirlo.
III. Express in the negative the commands formed in II.
IV. Now express in the affirmative plural the commands
formed in II.
V. Give a synopsis in the usual form, in the first person
singular, of dar, ir, saber, conocer.
VI. Say and write in Spanish:
i. I found it out. 2. They met me. 3. I give the orange
to him. 4. I gave him the orange. 5. We were going with
her. 6. I went with him. 7. They went with me. 8. The
bird knows how to fly. 9. I know the chapter. 10. I know
my uncle.
SEGUNDA LECCION DE REPASO
VOCABULARIO
I. Give the English for the
la funcion la metropoli
atropellar cuadrado
intense el pozo
el recurso politico
la campana recoger
los alrededores emocionado
la corona el libertador
grabar la grandeza
la tumba el asiento
caribe el mozo
el coche comedor conquistar
la arquitectura el rival
el paraiso la fortaleza
el tejado el limon
el azulejo desarrollar
el interes el turismo
la aglomeracion el guitarrista
following Spanish words:
el petroleo el eslabon
la extension el este
el continente la cultura
el salon la mina
el cementerio agricola
el capitolio perecer
herir la sesion
fundar la embajada
nombrar el congreso
el coche dormitorio la juventud
la palmera gravemente
la huella el rumbo
la temporada la cortina
la comunicacion el refugio
el transporte el poblador
aereo anglosajon
el hemisferio claro
despedir mecanico
II. Give the Spanish for the following English words:
the view
the tunnel
Argentine
to take leave of
central
under
the company
the island
the west
rapid
comfortable
the mile
the colony
the station
European
the population
the region
to produce
the wood
the civilization
to love
the idea
to assemble
personal
the peace
superb
the soldier
unknown
86
LECCION
DE REPASO
87
the earth
the government
the autumn
to forget
before
the union
to cease
the history
the sea
the activity
the governor
Pan American
the dining
the Indian
the conqueror
the coast
room
the bedroom
the cold
to settle
inside of
to form
the expedition
to establish
blue
the courtyard
to bathe
Andalusian
the highway
the orange
the snow
the tourist
the comfort
to defend
the style
the beach
the airplane
the bird
the example
the winter
to fly
the line
Latin-American
material
the education
the pity
the aviation
the war
the charm
Puerto Rican
the distance
the element
the progress
the possession
the skyscraper
the relation
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
I. Replace the English words with Spanish words:
i. En Nueva York ellos nos met. 2. One goes facilmente
por esta carretera. 3. What a pity! 4. Farther on vimos el
capitolio. 5. What wonderful architecture! 6. Este estilo de
casas is suitable a la Florida. 7. Nos gustan very much las
naranjas. 8. El tren parece not only comodo but also muy
rapido. 9. lie fell again al agua. 10. Both las naranjas and
los limones se producen aqui. n. £ Es rico este sefior? /
should say so. 12. Salio bound for la capital. 13. El mozo
sabe how to make up a bed. 14. Hoy it is not cold. 15. Lo ha
arreglado in such a way that esta muy comodo.
II. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. Liberty shall not perish. i. La libertad — .
2. We are to leave soon. 2. — partir pronto.
3. He has ceased to speak 3. — hablarnos.
(has stopped speaking)
to us.
88 QUINITO EN AMERICA
4. We think we have seen 4. Creemos — al mozo.
the porter.
5. Before I lived here I knew 5. Antes — yo aqui, lo
him. conoci.
6. The soldiers trample on 6. Los soldados — .
each other.
7. We are taking a walk. 7. Nosotros — .
8. I do not like the rush 8. No me gusta — .
hour.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
I. In the following sentences replace the infinitive with the
correct form of the verb :
i. Ella dormir bien anoche. 2. Yo dormir bien ahora.
3. £l estaba dormir tranquilamente. 4. Servirnos Vd. el
plato (command). 5. Ella lo servir (preterite) bien. 6. No lo
seruir Yds. ahora (command). 7. En este momento el lo pedir.
8. Yo lo sentir mucho ahora.
II. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words:
i. No lo han seen. 2. <; Que ha discovered Vd. ? 3. No he
said eso nunca. 4. <; Quien ha returned? 5. ± Ha opened ella
la puerta? 6. El pobre ha died. 7. No lo ha put aqui.
8. <i Que han read ellos ? 9. No hemos heard nada.
10. <j Quien lo ha brought? n. Vd. ha fallen. 12. Nosotros
look at each other. 13. Vosotros no trample on each other.
14. Vds. shake hands. 15. Salio despues de greeting us.
III. Make singular the following phrases:
i. Los buenos mozos. 2. Algunos dias. 3. Ningunos tu-
neles. 4. Los primeros eslabones. 5. Unos arboles. 6. Los
malos indios. 7. Los primeros pajaros.
r<w*» Courtesy
"The Cid Campeador",
National Hero of Sj
Sculpture by Anna V.
Huntington.
Hispanic Society of An
Courtesy Wi if World Photos
City, One of the Great Architectural Achievements of Americans of
Courtesy S/ Augustine
Fort Marion Monument near St. Augustine, Florida, One of the
tectural Achievements of early Spanish- American Settlers.
Courtesy New Orleans Association of Co
merica's First Apartment Building, New Orleans. Constructed by the Bar-
Pontalba, daughter of Don Andres Almonester y Roxas. Note the iron
on the balconies which is characteristic of the architecture developed by
French and Spanish colonists.
LECClCN DE REPASO 89
IV. Use, if necessary, a preposition (the proper one) in the
following sentences:
i. Empiezan — hablar. 2. Ceso — andar. 3. Quiero —
viajar. 4. Me alegro — verlo. 5. Aprenden — leer. 6. Me
ensenan — escribir. 7. Tratare — venir.
V. Say and write in Spanish :
i. They have nothing. 2. She never sings. 3. She neither
sings nor works. 4. We have seen no airplanes. 5. You
have never said anything. 6. No one is coming.
VI. Replace the English possessive adjective with the cor-
rect Spanish possessive. Clarify any ambiguous situations.
i. Our casa. 2. My amigos. 3. Your (you = tu) idea.
4. Your (vosotros) naranjas. 5. Your (Vd.} islas. 6. Your
(Vd.) mina. 7. His rivales. 8. Her patria.
VII. Give the polite commands, singular, of the following
verbs. Use the object pronoun los, them, in each command:
i. buscar, to look for. 2. alcanzar, to overtake. 3. pagar,
to pay for. 4. veneer, to vanquish, overcome. 5. seguir, to
follow. 6. coger, to seize. 7. conocer, to know. 8. establecer,
to establish. 9. distinguir, to distinguish. 10. dirigir, to direct.
VIII. Say and write in Spanish :
i. One dines well here. 2. No admission here (one does
not enter here). 3. People (they) study much. 4. People
travel in automobiles. 5. One learns to work here.
IX. Use the correct form of the present tense of saber or
conocer, as the case demands, in the blanks of the following
sentences:
i. Nosotrosnolo — . 2. <J — Vd. a esta senorita ? 3. Ellos
— defender su ciudad. 4. Vds. no — la leccion. 5. <j —
ellos quien viene ? 6. Ella no — a mi padre.
CAPlTULO XIII
EL PANAMERICANISMO
El seiior cubano de Tampa empezo luego a hablar de
las relaciones entre las Americas y de las Conferencias
Panamericanas celebradas en estos ultimos afios. Dijo :
— La amistad y la buena voluntad entre las Americas
5 crecen de dia en dla. Ahora los 100 millones de americanos
de raza espanola y portuguesa y los 135 millones de
norteamericanos empiezan a conocerse unos a otros mucho
mejor. La vieja Europa parece decidida a destruirse
con sus luchas y sus guerras. Los paises americanos
10 estdn dedicados a la paz y a la libertad. Todos ellos, en
su busca de libertad, consiguieron hace muchos anos su
independencia de las madres patrias de Europa. Todos
ellos quieren ser ahora « buenos vecinos, » y lo son.
— Pero, <; no temen ya los latinoamericanos al « Coloso
15 del Norte » ? — pregunto don Ramon.
— Ahora no; porque el Tio Sam ha cambiado mucho
— contest6 don Ram6n. — Ya no interviene en la vida
nacional de la Republica Dominicana, de Nicaragua,
Cuba o Haiti. Los latinoamericanos parece que han
20 olvidado o perdonado lo que hizo Teodoro Roosevelt,
cuando fu6 establecida la Republica de Panam£ en 1904,
en tierras antes colombianas.
— Pero despues de todo, la construction del canal de
PanamS, trajo grandes beneficios a todas las Americas,
25 <j verdad ? — anadio Pepe.
— Si, sin duda — respondio el seiior cubano. — Pero
lo que tiene mas importancia hoy es el deseo por parte
90
EL PANAMERICANISMO 91
de los norteamericanos de ser amigos de sus vecinos
hispanos. Los « yanquis » ya saben que los latinoameri-
canos tienen una rica cultura bien desarrollada, que vale
muchisimo.
— Me parece — dijo Quinito — que los hispanoameri-
canos deben aprender ing!6s y que los norteamericanos
deben estudiar espanol, en todas las escuelas y universi-
dades. Saber bien la lengua del vecino es la base de una
amistad segura.
— Entonces debe estudiarse tambi&i el portugues en
Norte America — dijo Quinito. — Porque ese idioma
es la lengua nacional del Brasil, el pais m<is grande de
Sud America, y que tiene 40 millones de habitantes.
— En Nueva York — anadio Pepe — vimos que hay
miles de alumnos de las escuelas superiores que aprenden
con gusto el espanol, y que estos jovenes y estas senoritas
cambian cartas con sus contemporineos en las escuelas
de Hispanoam6rica, especialmente con los alumnos de
Buenos Aires.
— No olviden ustedes que se estudia mucho el ing!6s
en las escuelas de Cuba, Puerto Rico, Mejico, Centro
America, Colombia, Chile y la Republica Argentina. En
ellas el ingles es el idioma extranjero que mis se estudia.
— Asi dijo el cubano, y don Ramon anadio:
— La literatura, el arte y la historia de las Americas
hispanoparlantes se estudian cada vez mas en Norte
America. La musica hispana es popular en todas partes
de los Estados Unidos. Creo que Teodoro Roosevelt
tenia razon cuando decia hace afios que el siglo XX seria
el de la America espanola.
92 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
anadir to add hispanoparlante Spanish-speak-
arte m. and f . art ing
base f . base, basis intervenir to intervene (conju-
beneficio m. benefit gated like venir)
canal m. canal musica f. music
colombiano, -a Colombian panamericanismo m. Pan Amer-
coloso m. colossus icanism
conferencia f . conference popular popular
conseguir (i, go) to obtain, get portugues, -esa Portuguese; noun
construction f . construction m. Portuguese (man or lan-
contempordneo, -a contemporary guage)
crecer (zco) to grow relation f . relation
dedicar (que) to devote, dedicate seguro, -a sure, secure; safe
destruir (uyo) to destroy vecino m. neighbor
extranjero, -a foreign; noun m. voluntad f . will
foreigner yanqui Yankee
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
de dia en dia from day to day madre patria mother country
NOTAS
PAN AMERICAN CONFERENCES
The need for solidarity between all American countries was first ex-
pressed by Simon Bolivar (1783-1830), the Liberator of the northern
part of South America. The first Pan American Congress of Panama
was called by him in 1826. The United States delegates to the
Panama meeting did not succeed in reaching this conference in
time, and our country was not represented in any such gathering
until the one held in Washington in 1889. Henry Clay (1777-1852)
was our first strong advocate of what we call today Pan American-
ism. James G. Elaine was also an ardent supporter of close relations
between the Americas. (See page 60.) In conferences of the Ameri-
can States held after 1890, at intervals of five years, gradual progress
EL PANAMERICANISMO 93
was made in building up the community of interests among the
Americas. The Seventh Conference, held in Montevideo, Uruguay,
in 1933, marked the beginning of a more hearty and effective co-
operation and resulted in more definite plans for inter-American
collaboration. The Inter- American Conference for the Maintenance
of Peace, held in Buenos Aires in 1936, addressed by President
F. D. Roosevelt, and the Eighth Pan American Conference of Lima,
Peru, in 1938, advanced rapidly this collaboration. The "Declara-
tion of Lima" gave notice to the world of the intention of the Ameri-
can States to reject unitedly any aggression by European powers
and all attempts by them to influence the Americas by propaganda
subversive of American principles of democracy. At the same time
was set forth strongly the purpose of American States to respect the
integrity of each nation and to ban all use of force in the settlement
of inter-American controversies. The special consultive conference
held in Panama in September, 1939, after the outbreak of war in
Europe, took steps to insure the neutrality of the American States
in the face of that conflict and to protect themselves against the
disastrous effects thereof. The " good neighbor " policy of the United
States government has done much to remove in recent years distrust
of us by the Latin- American nations. Pan American Day, also called
"el Dia de las Americas," is celebrated on April 14 in all the twenty-
one nations of the New World.
Latinoamericano, Latin-American. This term is not very satis-
factory, but it has become pretty well established in referring to
Americans living in New World countries of Spanish, Portuguese
and French origin. Latino (Latin) indicates, in this usage, one whose
language is descended from Latin, as is true of Spanish, Portuguese
and French. Hispanoamerica, Spanish America, and hispanoameri-
cano, Spanish American , refer to the New World countries and
persons of Spanish speech, that is, who are hispanoparlantes. In a
wider sense, these two terms (as well as Iberoamerica and ibero-
americano) could properly include Brazil (el Brasif) and Brazilians
(brasilenos), since the language and the people of that country have
their origin chiefly in Portugal, a part of Hispania, as the Romans
called the Hispanic or Iberian Peninsula. But in view of the fact
94 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
that Haiti is a country of French speech, it is necessary to use Latin
America and Latin-American to include that Republic.
Neither in English nor in Spanish have we a suitable adjective to
indicate a person or thing of the United States. We have somewhat
high-handedly appropriated the terms "America" and "Americans,"
when all the Latin-Americans have as much claim to those terms
as we have; with more, but not sufficient, exactness we should call
ourselves "North Americans"; but are not the Canadians (and
the Mexicans) also North Americans ?
In some Latin- American countries we are called yanquis, Yankees,
but that, too, is not accurate, for in the United States that term is
applied to the people of New England. The word gringo is also used,
in somewhat uncomplimentary manner, to denote a citizen of the
U.S.A. The quite awkward adjective estadounidense has also some
circulation in Spanish America. This word, in speaking of a person,
might be translated into English by "United Stateser."
NOTE: For a brief statement of how the United States has in the
past intervened in the affairs of Nicaragua, the Dominican Republic
and Haiti, and how Theodore Roosevelt encouraged the secession of
Panama from Colombia in order to secure the right to construct
the Panama Canal, see the booklet "A Primer of Pan Americanism,"
published by the Pan American Union, Washington, D.C.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. Crecen de dia en dia — . 2. Los paises americanos estan
dedicados a — . 3. Estos paises, que en un tiempo fueron co-
lonias de Espana e Inglaterra, consiguieron — . 4. El Tio
Sam ya no interviene — . 5. La construction del canal de
Panama — . 6. Los "yanquis" ya saben que — . 7. Se debe
estudiar el idioma espanol en — . 8. Se estudia mucho el
ing!6s en — . 9. Muchos alumnos norteamericanos cambian
— . 10. Cada vez mas se estudian en Norte America — .
ii. La mfisica hispana — . 12. La lengua nacional del Brasil
EL PANAMERICANISMO 95
es — , y la de Haiti es — . 13. Hace anos decia Teodoro
Roosevelt que — .
II. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <J Que lengua se habla en Haiti ? 2. ^ Le gusta a Vd. la
mfisica hispana ? 3. <i Quieren ser los yanquis buenos vecinos
de las Americas hispanoparlantes ? 4. £ Que lengua extran-
jera sabe Vd. hablar? 5. <i Ha estudiado Vd. la historia
de los estados hispanomericanos ? 6. <i Gambia Vd. cartas
con jovenes contemporaneos en Hispanoamerica ? 7. £ Hay
muchos entranjeros en los Estados Unidos ? 8. En la escuela
de Vd. <J se dedican muchos alumnos al estudio (study) del
espanol ?
III. Use in complete sentences the following expressions:
i. conseguir la independencia. 2. estar seguro de saberlo.
3. intervenir en una nacion extranjera. 4. no crecer rapida-
mente.
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
1. Quieren ser buenos vecinos y lo son. They wish to be
good neighbors and are so. Quieren ser buenos y lo son. They
wish to be good and are so.
The neuter pronoun lo is used to reproduce a predicate
noun (here, vecinos) or adjective used with ser (here, buenos),
estar or parecer. Lo is used regardless of the gender or
number of such words.
2. Empezo a hablar. He began to speak. Empezaba a
hablar. He was beginning to speak.
Empezo is in the preterite indicative, and empezaba is in
the imperfect indicative of the verb empezar, to begin.
The preterite tense denotes that an action or state occurred
in the past without any reference to its continuity, frequency
or customariness. It denotes an absolute past.
96 QUINITO EN AMERICA
The imperfect tense denotes a past action or state which
used to happen, customarily happened, or was going on while
another act happened or was happening. The imperfect " sets
the stage" or " paints the background" against which another
action or state (usually in the preterite) took place.
Examples :
£l estudiaba todos los dias. He used to study every day.
Estudiaba cuando yo entre. He was studying when I entered.
Estudiaba mientras yo escribia. He studied while I wrote.
Hacia frio cuando sali de casa. It was cold when I left home.
The endings of the imperfect indicative are, in the first
conjugation: -aba, -abas, -aba; -abamos,-abais,-aban. In
the second and third conjugations they are: -ia, -ias, -ia;
-iamos, -iais, -ian.
No vowel or consonant changes ever occur in the imperfect
tense.
The only verbs that are irregular in the imperfect are ser,
ir and ver: era, I was; iba, I was going; veia, I saw, was
seeing.
3. Study in the Verb Appendix, pp. 579, 581, 583, the con-
jugation in all forms of the indicative and the polite impera-
tive of these irregular verbs : ser, ir, ver.
I. Replace the predicate nouns and adjectives of the fol-
lowing sentences with lo:
i. Ella es rica. 2. Nosotros no somos vecinos. 3. <; Son
Yds. alumnos? 4. <j Quiere Vd. ser ciudadano? 5. Estamos
cansados. 6. Parecen hermanos. 7. <; No parezco contento?
8. Ella esta contenta.
II. Replace the English verbs with the proper form of the
corresponding Spanish verbs:
EL PANAMERICANISMO 97
i. Ella used to celebrate este dia. 2. Nosotros were obtain-
ing lo que we were seeking. 3. El consiguio lo que he was
seeking. 4. He was en Colombia cuando Vd. me escribio,
5. // was warm cuando me bane en las aguas de la play a.
6. They came a verme todos los dias. 7. £ Que me were saying
Vd. ? 8. Ella was going por la calle cuando la vimos. 9. No-
sotros used to see a nuestro tio con frecuencia. 10. Yo me
alegre de saber que Pepe was learning el ingles.
III. Change to the preterite the verbs of the following
sentences:
i. <J Quien era? 2. No lo veian. 3. No me decian nada.
4. <: Con quien iban Vds. ? 5. Yo empezaba a destruirlo.
6. Yo los sacaba. 7. Yo me acercaba. 8. El seguia acer-
candose. 9. No lo pagaba yo. 10. <J Quien lo decia ?
IV. Say and write in Spanish the following sentences, using
the progressive forms of the verbs, with estar or seguir as
the auxiliary:
i. We are speaking. 2. You (Vd.) are seeing it. 3. They
were saying it. 4. We were giving it. 5. She keeps on writing
it. 6. She kept on looking at me. 7. Keep on (Vd.) flying.
8. You are not obtaining them.
CAPlTULO XIV
LA ODISEA DE HERNANDO DE SOTO
— Aqui en Tampa y sus alrededores empezo uno de
los sucesos de mas importancia en la historia de Norte
America — observe el senor cubano.
— Cu&l fu6 ? — pregunto Quinito.
5 — Fue el asombroso viaje de exploration que hizo el
gran capitan espanol Hernando de Soto.
— Haga el favor de contirnoslo — le pidio Pepe.
— Pues, alld por el ano de 1537, el rey Carlos Quinto
de Espana nombro gobernador de Cuba y la Florida a
10 Hernando de Soto, que habia conseguido fama y riquezas
como conquistador en el Peru, al lado de Francisco Pizarro.
Al ano siguiente Soto salio de Espana con cuatro barcos
y 620 soldados a explorar la vasta region de la Florida,
en una mision que el rey le habia dado.
15 Despues de organizar bien la expedicion en la Habana,
la flota partio el 19 de mayo de 1589 con rumbo al norte.
Acompafiaban a Soto en nueve barcos 570 hombres y
muchos caballos. El dia 25 del mismo mes llego la ex-
pedicion a la bahia Espiritu Santo, llamada hoy Tampa
20 Bay.
Durante tres anos marchaba la expedicion por aqui y
por alii. Paso por partes de los hoy estados de la Florida,
Georgia, las dos Carolinas, Alabama, Misisipi, Luisiana,
Arkansas y Tejas. Muchos de estos hombres valientes
25 cayeron enfermos y otros murieron en sus luchas con los
indios.
LA ODISEA DE HERNANDO DE SOTO 99
For fin, en 1541, vieron el rio Misisipi y fueron los
primeros en viajar largas distancias por sus orillas. Parece
que llegaron hasta el rio Misuri y luego volvieron hacia
el sur, rio abajo. Cerca del rio Rojo (Red River) cay6 30
enfermo Hernando de Soto y murio. Pusieron los otros
su cuerpo en un ataud hecho del tronco de un irbol, y
lo echaron al rio. Asi los indios no podrian hacer dano
a los restos del explorador.
Habian muerto mas de 250 hombres de la expedition. 35
Los sobrevivientes hicieron barcos con troncos de arboles
y navegando hacia el sur y el oeste llegaron por fin a
Panuco, en la costa de M6jico.
— Dicen que Soto no fue, a la verdad, el descubridor
del Misisipi — observe Quinito. 40
— No, no lo fue. Pero fu6 el primero en explorar el rio
y en dar a conocer cuan grande era. En 1519, otro
explorador espanol, Alonso de Pineda, habia visto el lu-
gar donde desembocaba en el golfo de Mejico. Cabeza de
Vaca cruzo el rio en su parte baja en 1528. 45
— Pero esa hazafia era tan notable que debemos a
Hernando de Soto, aventurero sin ventura, los m£s gran-
des honores — dijo Pepe.
— Hernando de Soto — contesto el cubano — y otros
famosos exploradores y conquistadores espafioles hicieron 50
milagros en sus deseos de conocer bien el mundo que
Espafia descubrio, y establecer en 61 la civilization. A
todos ellos les debemos los americanos de hoy nuestra
gratitud. En honor de Hernando de Soto se celebro en
la Habana, en 1939, el cuarto centenario de sus explora- ss
ciones. Asistieron a este congreso delegados de los Estados
Unidos y de las islas y continentes del mar Caribe.
100
QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
abajo dawn
ataud m. coffin
aventurerom. adventurer
centenariom. centenary
cudn how
cuerpo m. body
delegado m. delegate
descubridor m. discoverer
desembocar (que) to empty, de-
bouch
fama f . fame, reputation
flota f . fleet
golfo m. gulf
gratitud f . gratitude
hazana f. deed, exploit
honor m. honor
marchar to march, go
milagro m. miracle
mision f . mission
odisea f. odyssey, wandering
journey
organizar (ce) to organize
orilla f . shore, bank
sobreviviente m. and f . survivor
suceso m. event, happening, in-
cident
tronco m. trunk
vasto, -a vast
venture f . luck, fortune
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
al ano siguiente the next year
alld por back in
contdrnoslo to tell it to us
hacer dano a to harm, injure
haga Vd. el favor de 4- infinitive
please + infinitive
los hoy estados the present-day
states
por aqui y por alld here and there
rio abajo downstream
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Carlos Quint o, Charles the Fifth (1500-1558), was the grandson
of the Reyes Catdlicos, Fernando e Isabel, and the son of Felipe el
Hermoso, Philip the Fair, archduke of Austria, and Juana la Loca,
Jane the Mad, daughter of the Catholic Sovereigns. He was Charles
the First of Spain, but Charles the Fifth as emperor of the Holy
German Empire. He became king of Spain in 1516 and emperor of
Germany in 1519. He abdicated the throne of Spain in 1555, in
favor of his son Philip (Philip II) and in 1556 he abdicated the
emperorship of Germany in favor of his brother Ferdinand.
Hernando de Soto (1499-1542) was with Pedro Arias de Avila in
LA ODISEA DE HERNANDO DE SOTO 101
Darien, Panama, in 1514, and with Francisco Hernandez de Cordoba
in Nicaragua in 1 5 24. In April, 1 53 2 , he joined, in Guayaquil harbor,
the expedition of Francisco Pizarro to Peru, and shared in the great
riches obtained from the Incas in the conquest of their empire. In
1536 he returned to Spain a very rich man. His end came, as
described in the text, in 1542.
La Habana, Havana. Espiritu Santo, Holy Spirit. Alvar Nunez
Cabeza de Vaca is discussed in Chapter XVII. Misuri, Missouri.
Misisipi, Mississippi.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. << Que suceso de importancia empezo en Tampa y sus
alrededores? 2. <i Quien nombro a Hernando de So to para
explorar a la Florida? 3. <J Que habia conseguido Soto en el
Peru ? 4. (i A quien habia acompanado en la conquista del
Peru? 5. <[ Cuantos soldados acompanaron a Soto en su
expedition ? 6. £ Que paso a algunos de estos hombres va-
lientes? 7. <i En que ano vieron el rio Misisipi? 8. d Por
donde viajaron ? 9. i Donde estaba Soto cuando cayo en-
fermo ? 10. Al morir el capitan, <i que hicieron los sobre-
vivientes con su cuerpo ? 1 1 . <J Como pudieron los sobre-
vivientes llegar a Panuco? 12. i Que otros exploradores
espanoles vieron antes el gran rio? 13. £ Que le debemos a
Hernando de Soto y a otros famosos exploradores espanoles ?
14. i Que hicieron para establecer en America la civilization ?
15. <J En que ano se celebro en la Habana el cuarto centenario
de la hazana de Hernando de Soto ?
II. What word in each of the following lines does not be-
long there ?
1. viajar, marchar, andar, organizar, correr
2. rio, canal, musica, mar, bahia, golfo
3. explorador, arbol, conquistador, descubridor, aventurero
4. portugues, espanol, centenario, cubano, colombiano, indio
102 QUINITO EN AMERICA
III. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. Please tell me about the incident, i. — del suceso.
2. Back in the year 1537 he was 2. — fue nombrado go-
appointed governor. bernador.
3. The next year he left for Cuba. 3. — partio para Cuba.
4. They marched here and there. 4. Marcharon — .
5. Don't harm the boy. 5. No — al muchacho.
6. They sailed downstream. 6. Navegaron — .
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
1. Lo pusieron en el barco. They put it on the ship. No
pudieron hacer dano. They could do no harm.
The above verbs are in the preterite tense of, respectively,
poner, to put, and poder, to be able. Notice that the stem
vowel in these preterite forms is u.
Irregular verbs that have the stem vowel u in the preterite
are:
andar, to walk; anduve, I walked
caber, to be contained; cape, I was contained
conducir, to lead, drive; conduje, I led
estar, to be; estuve, I was
haber, to have; hube, I had
poder, to be able; pude, I was able
poner, to put; puse, I put
saber, to know; supe, I knew, found out
tener, to have; tuve, I had
2. Lo hicieron. They did it. No lo dieron. They did not
give it.
Notice that i is the stem vowel in the preterite of hacer,
to do, and dar, to give.
Irregular verbs which have the stem vowel i in the preterite
tense are:
LA ODISEA DE HERNANDO DE SOTO 103
dar, to give; dl, I gave
decir, to say; dije, I said
hacer, to do; hice, I did
querer, to want; quise, I wanted, tried
venir, to come; vine, I came
3. Cayeron. They fell. Ley 6. He read. Oyendo. Hear-
ing. Creyendo. Believing.
Verbs whose stems end in a strong vowel (ca-er, le-er,
o-ir) change the usual i to y in the third person singular and
plural of the preterite and in the gerund. Give these three
forms of each of the above verbs.
4. Ser and estar, both meaning to be.
Ser is used :
With a predicate noun or pronoun : Es explorador. He is
an explorer. Es el. It is he. Soy yo. It is I.
With a predicate adjective that expresses age or financial
condition: Era viejo. He was old. No era rico. He was
not rich.
With predicate adjectives denoting fundamental, essential
or characteristic qualities of the subject: El nino es bueno
(malo). The boy is good (bad). El agua es buenapara beber.
Water is good to drink.
With a past participle to form the passive voice: Fue
nombrado. He was appointed. Son muy amados. They are
much loved.
Estar is used :
To express location or position of the subject: Est&n en el
barco. They are on the ship.
To form the progressive tenses: Es tamos estudiando. We
are sttidying. Estibamos estudiando. We were studying.
With predicate adjectives indicating non-essential, acci-
dental qualities of the subject or the condition of the subject:
104 QUINITO EN AMERICA
El agua esta fria. The water is cold. No estoy enfermo. I
am not ill. i For que esta Vd. triste ? Why are you sad ?
With a past participle to show the condition of the subject
as the result of previous action upon it: Estamos perdidos.
We are lost. Las puertas estan abiertas. The doors are open
(opened).
I. Give the conjugation of the preterite tense of the fol-
lowing verbs:
andar, conducir, estar, haber, poder, poner, saber, tener,
dar, decir, hacer, querer, venir.
II. Say and write in Spanish:
i. They conducted me. 2. He was there. 3. You (Vd.)
wanted to go. 4. She did not come today. 5. What did he
say? 6. We found it out. 7. They walked rapidly. 8. They
were right. 9. He fell into the (at) river. 10. He is reading
it. ii. They heard me. 12. She was falling.
III. Use the proper form of the present tense of ser or
estar, whichever is correct, in the following sentences:
i. Yo — en la habitacion. 2. Ellos — muy buenos.
3. <i Quien — enfermo? 4. Nadie — trabajando. 5. Los
senores — presentados a las senoras. 6. Este edificio — muy
antiguo. 7. Ella no — famosa. 8. El golfo — enorme.
9. Este delegado no — popular. 10. <; — fresca el agua ?
n. <; — escrita la carta ? 12. La comida no — preparada.
IV. Express in the preterite the sentences formed in III.
CAPlTULO XV
LOS ANIMALES DOMfiSTICOS
EN AMfiRICA
Nuestros viajeros salieron de Tampa en el tren, con
rumbo al oeste. Mientras miraban el paisaje pensaban
en Soto y en lo mucho que habia cambiado esta region
desde los tiempos cuando la vieron por primera vez los
descubridores. Dijo Quinito: 5
— Lei una vez una cosa muy interesante acerca de
las exploraciones de don Hernando de Soto.
— t Que leiste ? — pregunto Rosa.
— Fue algo acerca de los cerdos que acompanaban la
expedition. Parece que al llegar a la bahia de Tampa se 10
encontraron a bordo de los barcos trece cerdos, traidos
de la Habana. Durante el largo viaje que se hizo despues,
estos animales iban andando siempre cerca de los soldados,
pasando con ellos por los pantanos, bosques y llanuras.
Al morir Soto, el niimero de estos cerdos habia crecido 15
hasta que habia entonces 700 de ellos. A los sobrevi-
vientes les faltaban alimentos. Antes de empezar a
navegar rio abajo, pusieron a bordo estos cerdos. Vivieron
de la carne de estos animales mientras buscaban la costa
de Mejico. 20
— Entonces la odisea de los cerdos de Hernando de
Soto merece fama — dijo dona Ana — , tanta fama como
la de los elefantes que acompaiiaron a Anibal cuando
march6 contra Roma, su gran rival.
— Es verdad — observo don Ramon. — Y debemos 25
recordar tambi&i que Francisco Pizarro era porquero
105
106 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
cuando niiio. Aunque fu6 de humilde origen, llego a ser
el mis grande de todos los conquistadores del Nuevo
Mundo.
30 — <: Mas grande que CortSs ? — pregunto Pepe.
— Creo que si — contesto el tlo. — Pero es dificil
estar seguro de eso. Mas tarde hablaremos de estos
valientes conquistadores: Cortfe, que tomo a Mejico, y
Pizarro, que conquisto al Peru. Ambos eran extremenos,
35 y lo eran tambien otros numerosos exploradores.
— Y estos cerdos que trajo Soto a la Florida fueron los
primeros en marchar sobre el suelo norteamericano, £ ver-
dad ? — pregunto Pepe.
— Si, sin duda — respondio don Ram6n. — Y los
40 espaiioles trajeron al Nuevo Mundo otros muchos animales
dom6sticos, que antes no existlan alii: el caballo, la vaca,
el burro, la mula y la oveja.
— Pero, <[ no tenian animales dom6sticos los caribes,
los aztecas de M6jico, los incas del Peru, los araucanos de
45 Chile, ni las otras muchas tribus de Norte, Centro y Sud
America ? — pregunto Rosa.
— Ningunos, excepto las llamas que empleaban como
bestias de carga las tribus del imperio de los incas en los
Andes, y los perros que poseian algunos indios en diferentes
50 regiones americanas. Los animales domesticos traidos
de Espana eran elementos muy utiles en el trabajo de
conquistar, explorar y poblar los continentes del Nuevo
Mundo.
— Es verdad — exclamo Pepe. — \ Honor al humilde
55 burro espanol !
Y el muchacho suspir6, estando muy triste al pensar en
Coco, su buen burro que ya no existia.
LOS ANIMALES DOMfiSTICOS 107
VOCABULARIO
alimento m. food imperio m. empire
ambos, -as both inca m. Inca
araucano, -a Araucanian llama f. llama
azteca Aztec merecer (zco) to deserve, merit
bestia f . beast; bestia de cargo mula f . mule
beast of burden numero m. number
carga f . load, burden, cargo oveja f . sheep, ewe
cerdo m. pig, hog paisaje m. landscape
domestico, -a domestic pantano m. swamp
elefante m. elephant porquero m. swineherd
extremeno, -a Estremenian poseer to possess
f altar to be lacking tribu f . tribe
humilde humble util useful
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
al morir Soto when Soto died hasta que until, to the point that
creo que si I think so lo mucho que how much
cuando nino when a boy llegar a ser to become, get to be
f altar a uno to be lacking to one, for one to be without, need
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Anibal, Hannibal (247 B.c.-i83 B.C.), a Carthaginian general who,
in 219 B.C., besieged and took Sagunto, in eastern Spain, a fortress-
city that was an ally of Rome, the hated rival of Carthage, in Africa.
From Sagunto he marched north through Spain, east through
southern France, and, crossing the Alps, he was at first successful
in his battles with the Romans. He was recalled to Africa in 203
and was defeated by Scipio Africanus Major at Zama, in 202. In
his invasion of Italy many elephants formed part of his army.
Extremeno, Estremenian, from Extremadura, a region of western
Spain, now one of the least prosperous sections of the country, but
the birthplace, in the i5th and i6th centuries, of many of the Spanish
conquistadores: Hernando de Soto, Hernan Cortes, Francisco Pi-
zarro, Vasco Nunez de Balboa, discoverer of the Pacific Ocean,
Pedro de Alvarado, a valiant companion of Cortes, and many others.
108 QUINITO EN AMERICA
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish:
i. A bordo de los barcos que llegaron a la bahia de Tampa
iban trece elef antes. 2. Los animates que acompanaron la
expedition pasaron por montanas y rios. 3. El numero de
estos animales credo mucho. 4. A los sobrevivientes no les
faltaba nada. 5. Cuando empezaron su viaje rio abajo, pu-
sieron a bordo de sus barcos un gran numero de indios. 6. Los
sobrevivientes vivieron de la carne de cerdos. 7. Estos cerdos
merecen tanta fama como los elefantes de Anibal. 8. Fran-
cisco Pizarro fue extremeno y porquero cuando nino. 9. Pi-
zarro llego a ser profesor de espanol. 10. Los espanoles
trajeron a America la llama y el perro. n. Los aztecas em-
pleaban burros como bestias de carga.
II. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. Me faltaba una mula. i. I — a mule.
2. Vd. no sabe lo mucho que 2. You don't know — .
viajaron.
3. El porquero llegara a ser 3. The swineherd — rich,
rico.
4. Siguio marchando hasta 4. He kept on marching — .
que cay 6.
5. Al llegar el soldado, yo le 5. — I greeted him.
salude.
6. <i Han venido ? Creo que 6. Have they come ? I — .
si.
III. What word in each of the following lines should be
excluded ?
1. oveja, llama, carga, mula, cerdo.
2. alimentos, pan, plato, imperio, comida.
3. pantano, llanura, bosque, montana, tribu.
LOS ANIMALES DOMESTICOS 109
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
1. Los caballos y las mulas son animales utiles. Horses
and mules are useful animals.
When a noun, singular or plural, is used as subject or after
a preposition to denote a whole class of objects it is preceded
in Spanish by the definite article.
2. Habia entonces setecientos cerdos. There were then seven
hundred pigs.
Haber is here used as an impersonal verb in the imperfect
tense (habid). When used impersonally, no matter in what
tense, haber is always in the third person singular. Notice
that in the present it has the irregular form hay, there is,
there are.
Hay, there is, there are. Habia, there was, there were. Hubo,
there was, there were. Habra, there will be. Habria, there
would be. Ha habido, there has been, there have been. Habia
habido, there had been.
In the two compound tenses just given, it is seen that the
impersonal verb haber has in such tenses haber as its auxiliary
verb.
Haber is also used impersonally in expressing visible phe-
nomena of the weather: Hay luna, the moon is shining. Hay
sol, the sun is shining. (One may also use hacer in this ex-
pression : hace sol.) Hay nieve, it is snowy, snow is falling.
Haber is also used to express impersonal obligation in the
idiom haber que + infinitive: Hay que decir, one must say,
it must be said. Habia que ver, it was necessary to see, one had
to see.
For hacer in impersonal weather expressions, see page 550.
3. Estos animales, these animals. Esa tribu, that tribe.
Aquel soldado, that soldier.
110 QUINITO EN AMERICA
The demonstrative adjectives in Spanish are:
este, m., esta,f., this; estos, m. pi., estas,f. pi., these. De-
noting what is close to the speaker.
ese, m., esa, /., that; esos, m. pi., esas,f. />/., those. De-
noting what is close to the person spoken to.
aquel, m., aquella,f., that; aquellos, m. pi., aquellas,f. pi.,
those. Denoting what is distant from the speaker and the
person spoken to.
4. esto, this; eso, that; aquello, that.
The above are the three forms of the Spanish neuter demon-
strative pronouns. They have no plurals. They refer to ideas
or statements, never to persons or things.
I. Say and write in Spanish:
i. Donkeys are not large. 2. I like elephants. 3. Bread
is not a food for animals. 4. Empires have existed. 5. Do-
mestic animals are useful. 6. Llamas are beasts of burden.
II. Give in English the meaning of the following sentences:
i. No hay nadie aqui. 2. Hay sol y hace calor. 3. Hay
que hacer algo. 4. Hay que creer esto. 5. Hay soldados en
el barco. 6. Hace buen tiempo. 7. No hace sol.
III. Express in the imperfect the sentences of II.
IV. Replace the English with the proper Spanish words:
i. These senoras. 2. That animal (near you). 3. That
animal (yonder). 4. Those tribus (yonder). 5. This paisaje.
6. Those pan tanos (near you) . 7. Both ovejas. 8. No mula.
9. Some alimento. 10. There will be muchos.
V. Say and write entirely in Spanish :
i. That no es verdad. 2. <J Quien cree this? 3. Yo crei
that (referring to what a third party said). 4. Vienen por that
(for that reason, idea). 5. Yo pensaba en that (idea).
CAPlTULO XVI
NUEVA ORLEANS, ESPAftOLA Y
FRANCESA
— Aqui en Nueva Orleans — dijo don Ramon — se en-
cuentran huellas de dos civilizaciones no anglosajonas, la
espanola y la francesa.
— <[ Como francesa ? — pregunto Pepe. — Crei que
toda esta region sur de los Estados Unidos fu6 poblada 5
por espanoles.
— La mayor parte, si — respondio el tio — , pero es
muy interesante saber que despu6s de ser descubierto el
Misisipi por Alvarez de Pineda, Cabeza de Vaca y Her-
nando de Soto, los franceses entraron, un siglo mas tarde, 10
en el valle del gran rio, llegando de sus poblaciones en el
norte. El jefe de esta expedicion francesa fu6 Roberto
Cavalier de la Salle, quien habla ido al Canada en el afio
de 1666. Desde alii hizo exploraciones en la region de los
Grandes Lagos y en 1681, con treinta franceses y un grupo 15
de indios, siguio por el rio Misisipi hasta llegar a su
desembocadura el 9 de abril de 1682. Alii levanto una
cruz y proclamo que la region era territorio del rey
francos, Luis XIV.
En otra expedicion organizada en Francia, La Salle, 20
buscando otra vez la desembocadura, llego, en 1684, a
la costa de Tejas. No pudiendo encontrar el rio, £1 y
sus hombres empezaron un viaje a pie en direccion al
Canad&. Murio La Salle en este viaje, asesinado por uno
de sus hombres. 2s
in
112 QUINITO EN AMERICA
En 1699, °tra flota francesa, bajo Pierre Le Moyne,
subio el rio. Los franceses desembarcaron y establecieron
una pequena poblacion. Mas tarde, en 1718, bajo la
direction de Jean Baptiste Le Moyne, Nueva Orleans fue
30 fundada en el lugar donde se encuentra hoy.
— Y <J que hacian los espanoles durante ese siglo y
medio ? — pregunto Pepe. — <; No trataron de poblar
el territorio que habian sido los primeros en explorar ?
— No, nada — contesto don Ramon. — Parece que
35 estaban tan ocupados en sus conquistas de otras partes
del Nuevo Mundo que casi olvidaron el gran rio y las
tierras por donde corria. Pues, bajo los franceses crecio
y prospero Luisiana con Nueva Orleans como su capital.
A la mitad del siglo XVIII la ciudad fue el centro de un
40 gran comercio. La Luisiana de entonces representaba
lo que seria hoy la tercera parte de los Estados Unidos.
Luego, en 1763, al terminar la guerra entre Inglaterra
de un lado y Francia, Espana y Portugal del otro lado,
Luisiana fue cedida a Espana, pero no fue hasta el ano
45 1766 que llego el gobernador espanol, don Antonio de
Ulloa, a tomar posesion de la colonia. Despufe de algunos
meses los habitantes se levantaron contra Ulloa y 61 se
retiro. Luego vino el general espanol, Alejandro O'Reilly,
en 1769, con un ejercito que establecio rdpidamente el
50 gobierno de Espana. Hasta el fin del siglo siguio pros-
perando Nueva Orleans bajo sus nuevos amos.
En 1801 Espana cedio Luisiana a Francia, y tres anos
m&s tarde los Estados Unidos compraron a Francia, por
15 millones de dolares, el vasto territorio, que comprendla
55 la region entre el Misisipf y las Montanas Rocallosas y
entre el golfo de Mejico y el Canada.
NUEVA ORLEANS 113
— Muy variada ha sido la historia de Luisiana y Nueva
Orleans — observe Quinito. — Pero vamos a recorrer la
ciudad a ver lo que queda de los tiempos pasados.
Saliendo del Hotel Monteleone, fueron a pie por la 60
calle Royal hasta el Vieux Carre o Plaza Vieja, que es
el centro del antiguo barrio frances, donde nacio la ciudad.
Admiraron las numerosas casas viejas de esta calle, con
sus balcones tipicos y sus rejas artisticas. Entraron en
algunos de los patios pintorescos y llenos de flores. 65
En el Vieux Carre les gustaron el Cabildo, construido
por los espanoles, la Catedral de San Luis, y las casas
Pontalba y Le Prete. En un automovil dieron un paseo
por muchas calles y quedaron encantados al ver las muy
bellas casas modernas, los jardines y los parques. Llegaron 70
a las orillas del extenso lago Pontchartrain al norte de la
ciudad, uno de los numerosos lagos de la region. Despues
de visitar las ruinas de la Fortaleza Espafiola, no lejos de
este lago, volvieron al hotel.
Siendo famosos los restaurantes de Nueva Orleans, los 75
turistas fueron a comer en el de Antoine, donde les fue
servida una comida muy sabrosa.
— j Que bueno seria vivir en Nueva Orleans ! — ex-
clamo Rosa. — Vida tranquila, casas pintorescas, tiempo
muy agradable en el invierno, y comidas insuperables. 80
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a la mitad in the middle la mayor parte the greater part,
fcc/oprep. under majority
114 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
artistico, -a artistic jefe m. chief
asesinar to murder, assassinate logo m. lake
balcdn m. balcony ocupar to occupy
ceder to cede, yield pintoresco, -a picturesque
comercio m. commerce posesion f. possession
comprender to comprise, (usually) proclamar to proclaim
to understand representar to represent
cruz f . cross retirar(se) to retire, withdraw
desembarcar (que) to disembark ruina f . ruin
desembocadura f. mouth (river) sabroso, -a tasty, delicious
ddlar m. dollar territorio m. territory
ejercito m. army tipico, -a typical
extenso, -a extensive voile m. valley
insuperable unsurpassable vasto, -a vast, huge
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Montahas Rocallosas, Rocky Mountains; el Canadd, Canada;
Cabildo, town hall, the building in which, especially in the Spanish
colonies, the City Council met. San Luis, Saint Louis.
Sieur Robert Cavalier de la Salle (1642-1687) was one of the
most active of the French explorers of America. Setting out from
the French settlements of Canada in 1669, he discovered the Ohio
River and explored the upper part of the Illinois River. Near the
present location of Peoria he established Fort Crevecceur in 1679.
A year later he returned to it from Canada to find that the Indians
had destroyed the fort, though the men of the garrison had escaped.
He reached the Mississippi in 1680 and came to its mouth in 1682.
Two years later he brought from France colonists to found a settle-
ment on the Mississippi, but he missed the mouth of the big river,
and landed at Matagorda Bay on the coast of Texas.
Antonio de Ulloa (1716-1795) was a Spanish naval officer and a
scientist of much ability, but he was quite unfitted to govern a
colony. The French citizens of New Orleans were strongly opposed
to the transfer of their town from French to Spanish control. For
NUEVA ORLEANS 115
three years (1763-1766) after the city was abandoned by France,
Spain did nothing to assume possession. When Ulloa appeared
finally to take over the governorship, the French showed open re-
sentment toward him and on October 28, 1768, the Council of the
city ordered his expulsion. Ulloa was on board a ship anchored in
the river; in the night, his rebellious subjects set the vessel adrift
and in the morning Ulloa ordered its departure for Havana. Thus
began the first rebellion of an American colony against a European
power.
But Charles III of Spain acted to crush the revolt by sending
Alexander O'Reilly (1722-1794), an Irishman in the military service
of Spain, to assume command in New Orleans. He arrived with
24 warships and 2600 soldiers in August, 1769, and raised the flag
of Spain over the city. Spanish laws were put in force and the
government was entirely reorganized. He left in 1770. Under
Luis de Unzaga, governor in 1772, commerce greatly increased.
During the Revolution of the British colonies in the north, Spanish
colony officers gave support to them in the struggle against England.
Spain at the time contributed a million dollars to the support of
that Revolution, more because she wished to harm her old enemy,
Great Britain, than because she really sympathized with a revolt
of those colonies against their mother country; for Spain, possessor
of great colonies in America, could not very consistently encourage
colonial aspirations for freedom. The then governor of Louisiana,
Bernardo de Galvez, made raids on nearby British settlements, as a
result of which Great Britain declared war on Spain in 1779.
In 1801, by the treaty of San Ildefonso, Spain ceded Louisiana
back to France. Pierre Laussat, appointed by Napoleon to take
charge in Louisiana, arrived in March, 1803, and he was as unwelcome
to the colonists as Ulloa had been a generation earlier. But in
August came the news that on April 30, 1803, the United States
had purchased from Napoleon the extensive territory known as
Louisiana. The transfer to France was effected in the Place d'Armes
(now Jackson Square) of New Orleans on November 3. On Novem-
ber 23 in the same place was carried out the ceremony by which
the United States took possession. The citizens of New Orleans
116 QUINITO EN AMERICA
were as displeased with this latest change as they had been with
the prospect of becoming subjects of France. Governor Claiborne
and the United States soldiers had their hands full in attempting
to pacify and satisfy the inhabitants. But gradually their attitude
changed. In 1804 the Territory of Orleans (later the State of
Louisiana) was established and Louisiana became a state of the
Union in 1812. It seceded in 1861 and was readmitted in 1868.
In the War of 1812 with Great Britain, the British attempted to
invade the Mississippi Valley, after Washington had been sacked.
General Andrew Jackson successfully defended New Orleans (De-
cember, i8i4-January, 1815) and was aided by Pierre and Jean
Lafitte, famous buccaneers, whose followers fought side by side with
Kentucky and Tennessee riflemen.
Antoine (in Spanish, Antonio), Anthony, refers to Antoine Alcia-
tore. He came from Marseilles to New Orleans in 1840, and by 1876
the restaurant founded by him became famous, and it is still today
considered the best of the many fine restaurants of the city. In it
have been originated many French dishes that are now known
to epicures in many parts of the United States. It is located at
713 St. Louis Street.
EJERCICTOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. £ Cuales son las dos civilizaciones cuyas (whose) huellas
se encuentran en Nueva Orleans ? 2. £ En que anos cntraron
los franceses en el valle del Misisipi? 3. <; Quien fue el des-
cubridor frances que llego el primcro a la desembocadura del
rio ? 4. £ Que levanto el alii ? 5. En su segunda expedicion
<; donde desembarco La Salle ? 6. <; En que ano fue fundada
Nueva Orleans? 7. ^ For que no poblaron los espanoles esta
region despues de descubrirla ? 8. <; En que ano cedio Francia
la primera vez este territorio a Espana ? 9. £ Quien fue nom-
brado primer gobernador espanol de la colonia ? 10. Despues
de retirarse Ulloa, ^ quien vino a establecer el gobierno
espanol? n. <>Que ocurrio en el ano de 1801? 12. d Que
NUEVA ORLEANS 117
comprendia la Luisiana de entonces ? 13. <J Cual es el centre
del antiguo barrio frances de Nueva Orleans? 14. <; Adonde
fueron nuestros turistas a comer ? 15. <i Que les fue servido ?
II. Associate in derivation and meaning the words of the
first column with those of the second:
cruz centro
central descubrir
comida posesion
poblar gobernador
descubridor poblacion
gobierno comer
poseer cruzar
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
i. Les/ue servida una comida. A meal was sewed to them.
Pepe es muy amado. Pepe is much loved.
The verbs of the above sentences are in the passive voice;
that is, the subjects (comida, Pepe) are shown not as acting,
but as being acted upon.
The auxiliary in the passive voice is the verb ser. (See
Page 573-)
The past participle (servida, amado) agrees in gender and
number with the subject (comida, Pepe}.
All the tenses may be expressed in the passive voice. Fue
servido is in the preterite tense. In what tenses are the fol-
lowing forms ? es servido; sera servido; era servido; seria
servido; ha sido servido.
A verb in the reflexive form is often used in Spanish instead
of the passive voice (see page 38). This is true when the sub-
ject is a thing, not a person. For example: se sirvid una
comida, a meal was served. But, Pepe se ama would mean
Pepe loves himself, not, Pepe is loved.
118 QUINITO EN AMERICA
2. La Salle, quien habia ido. La Salle, who had gone.
Quien is here used as a relative pronoun, its antecedent
being La Salle, a person.
The relative pronouns in Spanish are :
que which, who, that; the antecedent may be a person or a
thing;
quien (quienes), who; a quien (a quienes), whom, to whom;
only a person may be the antecedent;
el que (la que, los que, las que), who, which, that; either a
person (persons) or a thing (things) may be the antecedent;
el cual (la cual, los cuales, las cuales), who, which, that; a
person (persons) or a thing (things) may be the antecedent.
Que may never have a person as antecedent if que follows
a preposition : el senor que viene, the gentleman who is coming.
But, el senor de quien hablo, the gentleman of whom I speak.
El senor a quien veo, the gentleman whom I see.
Cuyo (cuyos, cuya, cuyas), whose, of which; the antecedent
is usually a person, though it may be a thing.
Example: £ste es el nino cuyos parientes acaban de llegar.
This is the boy whose relatives have just arrived.
3. There are two kinds of relative clauses: specifying and
explanatory (sometimes called restrictive and non-restrictive).
The sentences given above are specifying clauses.
El jefe fue La Salle, quien habia ido, the chief was La Salle,
who had gone. This relative clause (quien habia ido) explains
about La Salle, gives additional information about him, but
does not specify him. Explanatory clauses are separated by
a comma from their antecedents.
Que, el que and el cual may be used to introduce specifying
clauses.
Quien, el que and el cual may be used to introduce explana-
tory clauses.
NUEVA ORLEANS 119
Cuyo may be used to introduce specifying or explanatory
clauses.
Notice how a specifying clause may, at times, be changed
into an explanatory clause, merely by a pause (shown by a
comma) after the antecedent:
Los muchachos que estaban cansados se sentaron. The
boys who were tired sat down. Who sat down ? The boys who
were tired. It is specified that only those who were tired sat
down. Who were tired (que estaban cansados) is a specifying
clause.
Los muchachos, que (or quienes or Zos que or los cuales)
estaban cansados, se sentaron. The boys, who were tired, sat
down. Who sat down? All the boys. Here que estaban
cansados is explanatory, gives additional information, is par-
enthetical.
Lo que and Zo oiaZ are neuter forms, used only to introduce
an explanatory clause and to refer to the whole preceding
clause as antecedent: Me did un ddlar, Zo cual (or Zo que) me
sorprendid, he gave me a dollar, which (which fact) surprised me.
After a long preposition the longer relative pronouns are
used : el libro acerca del cual le escribi, the book about which
I wrote him.
I. Replace the English relative pronoun with a correct
Spanish pronoun:
i. Conozco al jefe who condujo la expedicion. 2. Compre
la casa which me gustaba. 3. Compre la casa, which era
blanca y pequena. 4. Compre la casa, which (which fact) no
le gustaba a mi amigo. 5. Las ninas who habian venido tarde
no pudieron entrar. 6. Las ninas, who habian venido tarde,
no pudieron entrar. 7. El puente debajo de which pasamos
es largo. 8. La senora de whom hablamos no ha llegado.
9. Juan es el muchacho whom veremos. 10. La catedral en
120 QUINITO EN AMERICA
which entramos es antigua. n. Hable al profesor who en-
traba. 12. Hable al profesor, who no respondio nada.
II. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words in these sentences (which are expressed in the passive
voice) :
i. La ciudad was ceded a los franceses. 2. El ejerdto will
be disembarked. 3. La ciudad has been founded. 4. Este valle
was occupied hace muchos afios. 5. La libertad was proclaimed.
6. El dinero has not been found. 7. La isla will be discovered.
III. Replace in the sentences of II the passive verb forms
by reflexive verbs. The meaning will not be changed. (Ex-
ample: la comida fue servida; se sirvid la comida.)
IV. In the following sentences the subjects are persons.
Translate the sentences into English.
i. El explorador no fue asesinado. 2. Los jefes eran salu-
dados. 3. La seiiorita es muy respetada (respected). 4. Mi
amigo ha sido aceptado. 5. Mi madre era amada.
V. Make reflexive the sentences of IV and then translate
them into English. Notice how they are changed in meaning
by this substitution.
The Mission of San Jose
Aguayo, One of Four such
Missions in the Vicinity of
the City of San Antonio.
Courtesy
San Antonto Chamber of Commerce
Courtesy Neu Mexico State Tourist Bureau
Mission of San Antonio de Isleta, near Al-
uerque, New Mexico.
CAPlTULO XVII
OTRA ODISEA MEMORABLE, LA DE
CABEZA DE VACA
Siguiendo su viaje hacia el oeste, nuestros turistas
partieron de Nueva Orleans en el tren, con rumbo a San
Antonio, Tejas. For las extensas llanuras del vasto estado
de Tejas, donde en un tiempo iban a pie o montados a
caballo los exploradores espanoles, andaba rapidamente 5
el tren. Los Gomez y don Ramon se divertian hablando
de la primera historia de la Florida, que comprendia en-
tonces este territorio. Dijo don Ramon :
— Hernando de Soto y Ponce de Leon no eran los unices
exploradores espanoles del sur del continente. Hay que 10
recordar tambien a Panfilo de Narvaez y Alvar Nunez
Cabeza de Vaca. El primero fue un capitan espanol,
jefe de una expedition organizada en Espana y en la
Habana, y Cabeza de Vaca fue uno de sus tenientes.
En el mes de marzo de 1528 los 400 hombres de la expedi- 15
cion desembarcaron en la bahia de Appalachee. Al entrar
en el interior del pafs, los indios cayeron sobre ellos y
mataron la mitad del grupo. Los sobrevivientes volvieron
a la costa, donde Narv&ez no pudo encontrar ni uno de
sus cinco barcos. For eso, hizo construir una pequena 20
flota de barcos con troncos de drboles. Iba a buscar a
Pinuco en la costa de Nueva Espana.
Un mes despufis de salir la flota, se levanto una gran
122 QUINITO EN AMERICA
tempestad que destruyo los barcos. Perecieron Narvaez
25 y todos sus hombres menos cuatro. Uno de los sobre-
vivientes fu6 Cabeza de Vaca, quien se hizo jefe del
grupo, el cual empezo a marchar hacia el oeste. Sufrieron
mil penalidades, casi muriendo de hambre y enfermedades.
A veces vivieron varies meses como esclavos de alguna
30 tribu de indios. Lentamente atravesaron milla tras milla
de desiertos, bosques, montanas, pantanos y llanuras.
For fin, despu£s de una peregrination que duro desde
abril de 1528 hasta julio de 1536, llegaron a la ciudad de
MSjico, capital de Nueva Espaiia.
35 — Aquel viaje fue a la verdad una odisea maravillosa,
un milagro — dijo Quinito. — Pocos hombres hubieran
podido resistir tantas penalidades. j Ocho anos para atra-
vesar el continente !
— Uno de los cuatro — aiiadio el tio — se llamaba
40 Estebanico. Era moro y el esclavo de Dorantes, uno de
los sobrevivientes. Estebanico era un personaje raro y
de 61 volveremos a hablar m£s tarde.
— Pero, i qu6 nombre m&s raro, Cabeza de Vaca ! —
exclam6 Pepe.
45 — Si — contesto el tfo. — Era el nombre de la familia
de su madre, uno de cuyos antecesores era un pastor que
se distinguio en Espafia unos tres siglos antes de nacer
este aventurero.
El rey Sancho de Navarra atacaba, en Las Navas de
50 Tolosa, ano de 1212, un ej6rcito moro. Este pastor,
queriendo ayudar a los soldados cristianos, puso el crfineo
de una vaca a la entrada a un paso en las montanas para
indicar que podia pasar por aqui el ejfrcito espanol y
sorprender a los moros. Gracias a 61, vencieron de esta
ODISEA DE CABEZA DE VACA 123
manera los espanoles a sus enemigos, y para honrar al 55
pastor el rey le dio el nombre de Cabeza de Vaca.
— Y este otro Cabeza de Vaca hizo grandes hazaflas
despues en la America del Sur, <; verdad ? — dijo Rosa.
— Si. Despues de volver a Espana fue nombrado
gobernador del Paraguay. Otra vez marcho con 400 horn- 60
bres de la costa del Brasil a Asuncion, un viaje que duro
un ano. Tambien exploro el rio Paraguay. En Espana
escribio el libro « Naufragios, peregrinaciones y milagros, »
en el que conto la historia de como atraveso el continente
norteamericano. 65
— Parece que le gustaba andar y sufrir penalidades —
dijo Quinito.
— Hubiera sido un gran atleta en tiempos modernos —
anadio Pepe.
VOCABULARIO
antecesor m. ancestor interior m. interior
atleta m. and f . athlete naufragio m. shipwreck
atravesar (ie) to cross paso m. pass
ayudar to aid, help pastor m. shepherd
crdneo m. skull, cranium penalidad f . hardship
cristiano m. Christian peregrinacidn f . wandering, ptt-
desierto m. desert grimage
distinguir (go) to distinguish raw, -a odd, queer; rare
durar to last resistir to endure, resist
enfermedad f . illness, disease sufrir to suffer, endure
entrada f . entrance tempestad f . storm, tempest
esclavo m. slave teniente m. lieutenant
honrar to honor tras after, behind
indicar (que) to indicate veneer (zo) to vanquish, defeat
124 QUINITO EN AMERICA
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
hacer construir to have built, ni uno not even one, not a single
cause to be built one
hacerse to become / que nombre mds raro ! what an
hubieran podido would have been odd name!
able; hubiera sido would have volver a hablar to speak again;
been volver a + infinitive to do
again the act of the infinitive
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Pdnfilo de Narvdez (1478-1528) took part in the conquest of
Cuba in 1511. He was sent (1520) by Diego Velasquez, governor of
Cuba, to stop the expedition of Cortes in Mexico and to arrest
Cortes, but the latter defeated him and later released him. Narvaez,
a huge man with red hair, lost an eye in this encounter with his
fellow-adventurer. He went back to Spain where he secured appoint-
ment to conquer and govern Florida. It is supposed that he started
his land expedition from what is known today as Appalachee Bay,
and went north in search of a fabled Appalachen, where he hoped
to find gold.
Alvar Nunez Cabeza de Vaca (1490-1560), as related in the text,
experienced plenty of adventure in his lifetime. After his eight-year
trek across the southern part of North America, which indeed was
an odyssey of unequalled privation and suffering, he was ready
apparently for more hardship in the New World. Returning to
Spain in 1537, he was commissioned in 1540 to explore and govern
the region known as Paraguay, which Juan de Ayolas had already
entered (in 1536) and where he founded the settlement of Asuncion.
With 400 men Cabeza de Vaca landed on the southern coast of
Brazil and marched overland to Asuncion, a journey of nearly a
year. In 1544 he was accused of treating his fellow colonists badly
and was returned to Spain a prisoner. He was tried by the Council
of the Indies, found guilty, and banished to Africa. Later he was
pardoned and appointed judge in the Supreme Court of Seville.
While waiting for trial after his return from America, he wrote the
ODISEA DE CABEZA DE VACA 125
book mentioned in the text and another one, Comentarios, which re-
lated his experiences in Brazil and Paraguay. These two books are
valuable sources for the history of the Spanish conquests in the
Americas.
It is notable that many of the conquistadores were active at
different periods in their lives in more than one of the several regions
of the New World — North America, the West Indies, Central
America or South America.
Nueva Espana, New Spain, was the name which was first given
to Mexico when, after its conquest by Cortes, it became a part of
the colonial empire of Spain.
Navas de Tolosa, a place in south central Spain, in the province of
Jaen. There on July 16, 1212, occurred a great battle between the
Spanish Christians, led by the kings of Navarre and Castile, against
the Moors commanded by the caliph Mahoma. The victory gained
there by the Spaniards marked the beginning of the downfall of
the Moorish rule in southern Spain, which had commenced with the
invasion of the Peninsula by way of the Strait of Gibraltar in 711.
The Reconquest began in 718 and did not terminate until the Reyes
Catolicos took Granada in January, 1492.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish:
i. For las llanuras de Tejas marchaban en un tiempo los
primeros exploradores ingleses. 2. Nuestros turistas atra-
vesaron el mismo territorio en un aeroplane. 3. Panfilo de
Narvaez fue teniente en la expedicion de Cabeza de Vaca.
4. Cuando Narvaez no pudo encontrar sus barcos hizo cons-
truir una ciudad en la costa. 5. Perecio Narvaez en el
naufragio de su pequena flota. 6. Tres de los cuatro sobrevi-
vientes eran Cabeza de Vaca, Dorantes, y Estebanico. (El
otro era cierto Castillo.) 7. A veces ellos tenian que ser es-
clavos de los indios. 8. Duro la peregrination de los cuatro
126 QUINITO EN AMERICA
hombres dos anos. 9. Sufrieron grandes penalidades durante
su largo viaje. 10. Un antecesor de Cabeza de Vaca ayudo
al ejercito del rey Sancho de Navarra. n. Gracias a este
pastor, pudieron los moros veneer a los cristianos. 12. Para
honrar al pastor el rey Sancho le dio el nombre de Craneo de
Vaca. 13. El pastor habia puesto un craneo a la entrada de
un paso para indicar que no era posible pasar por alii. 14. En
la America del Sur, Cabeza de Vaca escribio un libro. 15. En
un libro que escribio Cabeza de Vaca se conto la historia de
su viaje por el sur del continente norteamericano.
II. Use in complete Spanish sentences the following idioms:
i. hacerse. 2. volver a + infinitive. 3. hacer construir.
4. creer que si. 5. llegar a ser. 6. f altar a.
III. For each of the following Spanish words give an Eng-
lish cognate, that is, a word related in derivation and mean-
ing:
enfermedad; tempestad; raro; pastor; peregrinacion;
sufrir; unico; durar; merecer; primero; teniente; barco; cons-
truir; libro; contar; craneo; vecino; alumno; destruir; in-
tervenir; establecer; deseo.
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
i. 1528, mil quinientos veinte y ocho; 400, cuatrocientos
Cardinal numerals in Spanish:
One to ten Eleven to twenty
1 uno 6 seis n once 16 diez y seis
2 dos 7 siete 12 doce 17 diez y siete
3 ires 8 ocho 13 trece 18 diez y ocho
4 cuatro g nueve 14 catorce 19 diez y nueve
5 cinco 10 diez 15 quince 20 veinte
ODISEA DE CABEZA DE VACA 127
Ten to one hundred One hundred to one thousand
10 diez 100 ciento
20 veinte 200 doscientos, -as
30 treinta 300 trescientos, -as
40 cuarenta 400 cuatrocientos, -as
50 cincuenta 500 quinientos, -as
60 sesenta 600 seiscientos, -as
70 setenta 700 setecientos, -as
So ochenta 800 ochocientos, -as
90 nouenta goo novecientos, -as
100 ciento 1000 mi7
Between 20 and 30, 30 and 40, and so on, numbers are
expressed simply by adding after y the unit designation:
27, veinte y siete; 42, cuarenta y dos.
Ciento becomes cien before a noun or another numeral
which it multiplies: cien casas, a hundred houses; cien mil,
a hundred thousand. It remains unchanged when a hundred
is added to a following number: ciento veinte, one hundred
twenty. Y is not used between ciento or any number of hun-
dreds and a following number: doscientos siete, 207.
From two hundred to nine hundred inclusive, -os is changed
to -as before a feminine plural noun : trescientas casas.
A period, not a comma, is used in Spanish to point off the
periods of a number: 323.405, trescientos veinte y tres mil
cuatrocientos cinco.
Millon is followed by de before a following noun : un millon
de hombres, a million men; dos millones de personas, two
million persons.
2. La tempestad destruyd. The storm destroyed. Elsoldado
destruye. The soldier destroys.
Verbs ending in -uir (except those ending in -guir) have
the peculiarities given on the following page:
128 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
In the present indicative a y is found before the endings of
the three forms of the singular and in the third person plural:
construyo, construyes, construye; construimos, construis,
construyen. Likewise in the polite imperative: construya
Vd., construyan Yds., build.
In the third person singular and plural of the preterite and
in the gerund i becomes y (as in the case of verbs whose
stems end in a strong vowel; see page 103): construyd (not
construio), construyeron; cons truy end o.
Verbs ending in -guir are consonant-changing verbs and
as such undergo the changes in spelling shown for distinguir,
page 587; distingo, I distinguish; di sting a Vd., di sting an Vd.,
distinguish.
3. Study in the Verb Appendix, pages 579-580, the irregu-
lar verbs poder, to be able; poner, to put, place; and querer, to
want, wish, love. Make synopses of these verbs in the cus-
tomary manner, in the first person singular.
4. A new point of grammar: el Brasil, Brazil; el Canada,
Canada; la Habana, Havana.
Names of several countries and cities are usually preceded
by the suitable definite article. Among the more common of
these names are:
la Argentina la Habana
el Brasil el Paraguay
el Canada el Peru
el Ecuador el Uruguay
los Estados Unidos
The definite article is necessary before the name of any
country or city if it is modified by an adjective or adjectival
phrase: la Espana pintoresca, picturesque Spain; la Nueva
York del siglo pasado, New York of the last century.
ODISEA DE CABEZA DE VACA 129
I. Write at dictation, in figures, (i) five numbers between
one and a hundred which your teacher will read to you in
Spanish; (2) five numbers between a hundred and a thousand;
(3) five numbers between a thousand and ten thousand.
II. Read aloud in Spanish the following numbers:
89 516 1.244
127 953 5-033
460 674 8.413
731 888 10.712
III. Write in Spanish words the numbers given in II.
IV. Say and write entirely in Spanish words:
i. 200 soldiers. 2. 300 mules. 3. 500 sheep. 4. 1,000,000
dollars. 5. 2,000,000 persons. 6. 107 elephants. 7. 209
animals.
V. Replace the English words with the suitable Spanish
words :
i. Yo lo build. 2. Ella lo destroys. 3. No los destroy Vd.
4. Build them Yds. 5. Yds. estan building them. 6. Ellos la
destroyed. 7. Vd. lo built. 8. <i Quien lo destroyed ?
VI. Translate into English the following sentences:
i. No quisieron ayudarme. 2. Querrian verlo. 3. Querian
verlo. 4. No pudieron distinguirlo. 5. No pudo distinguirse.
6. Lo pondre aqui. 7. Podre acompanarle al Peru. 8. Pon-
galos Vd. en la mesa. 9. No podran quedarse en el Ecuador.
10. £ Las pusieron Vds. aqui? n. Lo han hecho construir.
VII. Say and write in Spanish:
i. Not being able to see well, he reads little. 2. Don't
put (Vds.) that thing here. 3. What an odd name! 4. He
becomes chief of the expedition. 5. Speak to me again. 6. I
couldn't (was not able to) come. 7. Shall you be able to
distinguish it ?
CAPlTULO XVIII
EN SAN ANTONIO DE BfijAR
Cuando Martin de Alarcon, gobernador de las provin-
cias mejicanas de Coahuila y Tejas, fundo a San Antonio,
le dio el nombre de San Antonio de Bejar.
A los turistas les gusto mucho el ambiente espanol y
5 mejicano de la ciudad, y su historia. Oyeron hablar el
espanol en las calles y en ciertos barrios era la lengua
principal. . Cerca del hotel de los viajeros se encontraba
un viejo edificio que les llamaba la atencion. Era el
Alamo, que es altamente venerado por los tejanos. Pre-
10 gun to Rosa a su tio :
— Dinos, tio, £ por qu6 es el Alamo un lugar tan santo
para los tejanos ?
— Porque para ellos es el simbolo muy amado de su
libertad, ganada en una terrible lucha.
15 — Una lucha contra quiln, <: contra Espana ?
— No, senorita. Los tejanos se rebelaron contra M£jico,
que en el ano 1821, bajo Agustin de Iturbide, habia
declarado su independencia de Espana. En la nueva
constitution mejicana de 1824, se permitio a Tejas y Coa-
20 huila formar un estado de M6jico. En este nuevo estado
Mois6s Austin quiso establecer colonias de pobladores
venidos de los Estados Unidos. El gobierno mejicano,
dominado por el general Antonio Lopez de Santa Ana,
no permitio la fundacion de m£s colonias norteamericanas
25 en Tejas. Con esto, los tejanos se rebelaron y los ej6rcitos
del enemigo marcharon contra ellos.
Los mejicanos, vencidos en la primera batalla, el 2 de
130
EN SAN ANTONIO DE BfijAR 131
octubre de 1835, ocuparon a San Antonio. Bajo el mando
de Ben Milam, los tejanos tomaron despu6s la ciudad.
El general Santa Ana, en enero de 1836, ataco a San 30
Antonio con 6.000 soldados. El Alamo, que era una
capilla de la mision de San Antonio de Valero, era de-
fendido por solo 180 tejanos, cuyos jefes eran William
Travis, James Bowen, Davy Crockett y otros. El 6 de
marzo los numerosos soldados de Santa Ana atacaron el 35
edificio y en una feroz batalla, que duro poco tiempo,
dieron muerte a todos los defensores.
Pero los tejanos se vengaron de este desastre cuando, el
21 de abril, bajo el mando del general Houston, cayeron
sobre el ej6rcito mejicano a orillas del rlo San Jacinto, no 40
muy lejos de la hoy ciudad de Houston y lo vencio facil-
mente. Tejas quedo una repiiblica libre e independiente.
— £ Republica, Tejas ? — dijo Pepe.
— Si, senor, una repiiblica que fue reconocida por
M6jico, Inglaterra y Francia y finalmente por los Estados 45
Unidos. Su bandera era una sola estrella blanca en un
campo azul. Duro la Republica unos nueve aiios y luego,
el 16 de febrero de 1846, entro como estado en la Union
norteamericana.
— Y esto fu6 por qu6 se declaro la guerra entre Mfijico 50
y los Estados Unidos, £ verdad ?
— Si, una guerra que siguio por dos anos y que termino
cuando la capital de M6jico fue tomada por el ej£rcito
del general Winfield Scott en 1847. En el tratado de
paz de Guadalupe-Hidalgo, M6jico cedio a los Estados 55
Unidos la region que comprende hoy a California, Nevada,
Utah, Arizona y partes de Nuevo MSjico, Colorado y
Wyoming.
132 QUINITO EN.AMfiRICA
VOCABULARIO
ambiente m. atmosphere general m. general
atencidn f . attention independencia f . independence
bandera f. flag, banner independiente independent
batalla f . battle libre free
capilla f . chapel mando m. command
constitution f . constitution muerte f . deo/A
declarer to declare rebelarse to rebel
defensor m. defender reconocer (zco) to recognize
desastre m. disaster simbolo m. symbol
dominar to dominate tejano, -a Texan
emperador m. emperor tratado m. treaty
estrella f . s/ar venerar to venerate, revere
fundacion founding vengar (gue) to avenge
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a orillas de on the shores of llamar la atencion a uno to attract
con esto hereupon one's attention
dar muerte a to kill, put to death vengar se de to avenge oneself for
dinos tell us (familiar imperative
singular of decir + nos)
NOMBRES PROPIOS
The Alamo (the word means poplar tree) is the name of the chapel
of the old mission of San Antonio de Valero, which was once in the
center of the city of San Antonio. The reason why these remains of
the mission are so revered by Texans is given in the Spanish text.
Agustin de Iturbide (1783-1824) was a soldier of the Spanish
army in Mexico to whom was entrusted the effort to crush the revo-
lutionists against Spain. He proposed his " Iguala Plan " (1821) pro-
viding that Mexico should become an independent monarchy under
a Bourbon prince. The revolutionists accepted the plan and the
viceroy resigned. Ferdinand VII of Spain refused to accept the plan.
Then the Mexican Congress declared Mexico an empire and made
Iturbide emperor (May 1 8, 1822). But Antonio Lopez de Santa Ana
EN SAN ANTONIO DE BfijAR 133
proclaimed a republic in Vera Cruz and marched on the capital.
Iturbide resigned and was allowed to go to Europe after promising
not to return to Mexico. But in July, 1824, he attempted to enter
the country, was made prisoner and put to death.
Coahuila, adjoining Texas, in northeastern Mexico, is a large state
of that country. Saltillo was the capital of the combined state of
Coahuila-Texas and is still the capital of Coahuila.
Moses Austin (1764-1821) received permission to establish in
Mexican-owned Texas a colony of 300 North American families,
but he died before he could carry out the project. His son, Stephen F.
Austin (1793-1836), established the colony his father planned.
Then he went to Mexico City in 1833 to seek the establishment of
Texas as a separate state of Mexico, but he was thrown into prison
and stayed there from February to June, 1834. In 1835, after the
battle of San Jacinto, he was commissioned by the new Republic
of Texas to secure its admission as a state of the Union. He has
been called "the father of Texas," and the present capital of the
State bears his name.
Dear to the memory of Texans are Ben Milam, William Travis,
James Bowen, Davy Crockett, and Sam Houston, who so valiantly
led their companions in the struggle for independence from Mexico.
Houston was president of the Republic from 1836 to 1838 and from
1841 to 1844. He was United States senator from Texas from 1846
to 1859 and governor of the state from 1859 to 1861. He was born
in Virginia in 1793 and died in Texas in 1863. After him is named the
city of Houston.
The flag of the Republic of Texas was a white star in a blue back-
ground near the upper end of the flag. Two wide stripes, running
at right angles to the blue section, one white and the other red,
made up the lower two-thirds of the flag. This is still the state
flag of Texas, which is often called the "Lone Star State."
Winfield Scott (1786-1866) was a captain in the U. S. Army in
1808 and distinguished himself in the War of 1812 with Great
Britain. By 1841 he had become major general and commander-in-
chief of the army. He took command in 1847 of the campaign
against Mexico and occupied the capital September 14, 1847.
134 QUINITO EN AMERICA
In Guadalupe- Hidalgo, a town in the northern part of the Federal
District of Mexico, was signed a treaty between the United States
and Mexico (February 2, 1848), which ceded to the former the
territory mentioned in the text. Guadalupe is famous for its church
built over the spot where the Virgin is said to have appeared to a
shepherd, a shrine greatly venerated by many Mexicans.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. El ambiente espanol y mejicano les — . 2. Los turistas
oyeron hablar espanol — . 3. Les llamaba la atencion un —
que se llamaba — . 4. Esta antigua capilla es, para los te-
janos, el simbolo — . 5. Agustin de Iturbide quiso establecer
en Mejico un imperio y fue declarado — . 6. En el nuevo
estado mejicano formado por Tejas y Coahuila Moises Austin
— . 7. Pero el gobierno mejicano no permitio — . 8. Poreso
los tejanos — . 9. San Antonio fue ocupado por — y mas
tarde, bajo el mando de Milam, — . 10. Los pocos defensores
del Alamo fueron atacados por — . n. Los mejicanos dieron
muerte a — . 12. El 21 de abril de 1836, los tejanos, bajo el
mando de Sam Houston, — . 13. La libre Republica de Tejas
fue reconocida — . 14. Se declare la guerra entre los Estados
Unidos y Mejico porque Tejas habia — . 15. En el tratado
de paz de Guadalupe-Hidalgo, Mejico — .
II. Make the Spanish sentences equal to the English:
1. He put no one to death. i. No — a nadie.
2. The building attracted the atten- 2. El edificio les — a
tion of the tourists. los turistas.
3. The battle occurred on the shores 3. La batalla ocurrio —
of the river. rio.
4. I had a house built. 4. Hice — una casa.
5. He helped me again. 5. £l — .
6. He will not become a slave. 6. £l no — esclavo.
EN SAN ANTONIO DE BEJAR 135
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
1. Altamente, highly. Rapid amente, rapidly.
Many adverbs ending in -ly in English have Spanish equiva-
lents which end in -mente, which is added to the feminine
singular of the corresponding Spanish adjective: r6pido,fast,
rapid; r&pidamente, rapidly.
Remember that Spanish adjectives that do not end in ~o
in the masculine singular remain unchanged in the feminine;
hence, facil, easy; f&cilmente, easily. If the adjective bears
a written accent, it is retained in the adverb, though the prin-
cipal stress then rests on -men of -mente.
2. Este senor es general. This gentleman is a general. Mi
amigo es capitan. My friend is a captain.
When used with the verb ser, an unmodified predicate noun,
denoting occupation, rank or nationality, is not preceded by
the indefinite article, though the article is usually necessary
in English.
But if that noun is modified, then the indefinite article is
used: este senor es un general famoso, this gentleman is a
famous general.
3. Yo voy a quedarme aqui, / am going to remain here.
Ellos estan vengandose, they are avenging themselves.
When a reflexive verb depends upon another (or main)
verb, the reflexive pronoun must be of the same person and
number as the subject of the verb upon which the reflexive
depends. If the reflexive verb is in the infinitive or the
gerund, the reflexive pronoun usually follows and is affixed
to the infinitive or gerund. See above examples.
Note that it is also possible and correct to place the reflexive
pronoun before the main verb: Yo me voy a quedar aqui.
Ellos se estan vengando.
136 QUINITO EN AMERICA
4. Study in the Verb Appendix the irregular verbs saber, to
know, know how, and salir, to go out, come out. Make a synopsis
of these verbs in the third person singular, in the usual form.
I. Form adverbs based on the following adjectives. Give
the English equivalents of these adjectives and adverbs:
raro; artistico; libre; humilde; vasto; unico; dificil;
grande; feliz (happy); util; extenso; alegre.
II. Continue the conjugation of:
i. quiero sentarme. 2. tengo que retirarme. 3. estaba
distinguiendome. 4. seguia quedandome. 5. me voy a le-
vantar.
III. Say and write in Spanish:
i. They used to know. 2. I shall know it. 3. Know it
(Vd.). 4. Did you know it? 5. They would not know it.
6. I know how to write. 7. What do you know? 8. He has
never known it. 9. Don't go out (Vd.). 10. They were
leaving, n. I never go out. 12. We shall go out. 13. He
would not go out. 14. Why did you leave ?
IV. Supply for the predicate noun of each of the following
sentences a modifying adjective or adjectival phrase, and then
make any changes necessary in the sentence:
i. Aquel muchacho es alumno. 2. <: Era general el sol-
dado? 3. Estebanicoeramoro. 4. <J Es Vd. profesor ? 5. Mi
padre fue explorador.
V. Read in Spanish the following numbers:
243 I5-3oi 666.666
324 21. 211 IOI.IOI
999 19.019 444-444
2.002 77-777 303-303
VI. Write in Spanish words the numbers in V.
TERCERA LECCI6N DE REPASO
the music
the conference
the neighbor
the construction
the mission
the fleet
notable
the body
the Aztec
the elephant
useful
to murder
to occupy
the valley
to represent
the shepherd
the Christian
the attention
the disaster
the canal
the art
the Portuguese
to devote
to march
the fame
vast
to deserve
VOCABULARIO
the number
the tribe
the sheep
picturesque
the dollar
the lake
to aid
the storm
free
the death
the general
foreign
to obtain
to intervene
the base
the shore
the gulf
the discoverer
the adventurer
the flood
domestic
to possess
the empire
the territory
the army
the miracle
after
137
to suffer
the desert
both
the battle
the flag
to declare
the independence
to celebrate
popular
to destroy
to grow
the event
the honor
the trunk
the llama
the pig
the mule
humble
the beast
to retire
the cross
the chief
the commerce
to distinguish
to honor
the illness
to recognize
138
QUINITO EN AMERICA
II. Give the English
el panamericanismo
el coloso
seguro
el ataud
la gratitud
la odisea
extremefio
araucano
artistico
extenso
ceder
balcon
el naufragio
atravesar
la penalidad
el simbolo
el ambiente
el defensor
el mando
la voluntad
el yanqui
colombiano
el centenario
la hazana
cuan
el paisaje
for the following
faltar
proclamar
tipico
comprender
el paso
el teniente
resistir
durar
rebelarse
tejano
la constitution
venerar
anadir
el beneficio
abajo
desembocar
la ventura
el delegado
el pantano
el porquero
la ruina
desembarcar
el antecesor
tinico
raro
Spanish words:
el esclavo
el craneo
el tratado
la capilla
el emperador
dominar
el extranjero
el contemporaneo
hispanoparlante
el sobreviviente
organizar
el inca
la carga
la posesion
sabroso
la desembocadura
insuperable
veneer
la peregrinacion
indicar
el atleta
el interior
vengar
la fundacion
independiente
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
I. Translate into English:
i. Me vengue de su muerte. 2. La ciudad esta a orillas
de un lago. 3. Con esto, hablaron ellos. 4. Dieron muerte
al emperador. 5. Eso no llamo la atencion a nadie. 6. Hice
LECClON DE REPASO 139
fundar una colonia. 7. £l se hizo gobernador. 8. j Que
persona mas rara ! 9. No habia alii ni una casa. 10. Vol-
veran a construirlo. n. Llegaron a la mi tad del siglo.
12. Estuvieron bajo el mando del general. 13. La mayor
parte de los jefes no lo comprenden.
II. Make the Spanish sentences
1. We lack the money.
2. You don't know how
much I work.
3. Has he come? I think so.
4. He lived here until he
died.
5. She will become a teacher.
6. Please write me.
7. He travelled here and
there.
8. Back in the year 1910 I
met him.
9. They sailed downstream.
10. He will not harm you.
11. The next year they ar-
rived.
12. The tree grows from day
to day.
i.
2.
3-
4-
5-
6.
7-
8.
9-
10.
ii.
equivalent to the English:
Nos — el dinero.
Vd. no sabe — trabajo.
,1 Ha venido ? <[ — ?
Vivio aqui — murio.
— profesora.
— escribirme.
Viajo — .
— el ano de 1910 le
conoci.
Navegaron — .
£l no le — a Vd.
— llegaron.
12. El arbol crece — .
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
I. Answer the following questions affirmatively or nega-
tively, using lo in the answer to represent the omitted predi-
cate noun or adjective:
i. £ Esta Vd. cansado? 2. <J Parece ella muy rica?
3. i Fue Vd. esclavo? 4. ^ Seri 61 pastor? 5. ^ Estuvieron
ellas seguras ? 6. £ Parecio sabrosa la comida ?
140 QUINITO EN AMERICA
II. Say and write in Spanish, using the verb in the imper-
fect or preterite tense as the case demands:
i. I used to see her. 2. We were looking at her when she
spoke to us. 3. We were looking at her while (mientras) she
was speaking to us. 4. When we were in the city we attended
school every day. 5. It was raining (Hover) when we left.
6. She was a pupil when I met her. 7. They used to go to
Florida when it was cold. 8. They used to know it; they
found it out. 9. We put it there. 10. We were putting it
there when he saw us. n. They fell into (aZ) water.
III. Change to the preterite tense the verbs of the following
sentences:
i. Vd. lo lee. 2. Ella no cae. 3. Lo sabemos. 4. No lo
tienen. 5. Andaban lentamente. 6. No podian venir. 7. No
ira alia. 8. No son soldados. 9. £ Quien lo decia ? 10. Ha
de partir. n. Hay que hacerlo. 12. No ha venido. 13. No
los pongo en la mesa. 14. No estan aqui. 15. No lo quieren.
16. <: Lo oye Vd. ? 17. Estaba leyendolo. 18. No sigue
trayendolo.
IV. Use the imperfect tense of the verb ser or estar, as the
case demands, in the blanks of the following sentences:
i. £l no — tejano. 2. La nieve — blanca. 3. Las puertas
— cerradas. 4. Vds. — siempre alegres. 5. <i — contentos
los nifios? 6. £ Donde — Vd. ? 7. El elefante — muy
fuerte. 8. La mula — cansada. 9. Las montanas — altas.
10. Vd. — leyendo la carta. n. La casa — construida por
estos hombres. 12. <i Quien — atleta ?
V. Insert, when and where necessary, the definite article
before the nouns of the following sentences:
i. Pan es bueno para ninos. 2. Mulas son mas fuertes que
perros. 3. Nieve es mas blanca que ovejas. 4. Felicidad es
para hombres libres. 5. Diner o no es para animates.
LECClON DE REPASO 141
VI. Change the present tense of impersonal haber to:
(i) the imperfect, (2) the future.
i. No hay nada aqui. 2. Hay que verlo. 3. Nunca hay
nadie en el desierto. 4. Hay sol en los campos. 5. <i Que
hay ? (What is going on?) 6. Hay que serlo.
VII. Using the reflexive for the passive, express in Spanish
the following sentences :
i. The house was built. 2. The music was heard. 3. The
territory will be ceded. 4. The fleet is seen. 5. The gulf has
been discovered.
VIII. Use instead of the English relative pronoun the cor-
rect Spanish relative:
i. La casa acerca de which hablamos es blanca. 2. El
sefior who vino muy cansado quiere dormir. 3. El senor, who
vino muy cansado, quiere dormir. 4. El aventurero de whom
le escribi a Vd. perecio. 5. Me dio el dinero, which me sor-
prendio. 6. La iglesia delante de which se encuentra una
estatua es antigua. 7. El libro por which Vd. pago tan to no
vale nada. 8. Los atletas who habian corrido mucho estaban
cansados.
IX. Replace the English words with proper Spanish words:
i. That (idea or statement) me parece una buena idea.
2. Ellos no creen this (idea or statement). 3. That (what a
third person said) no parece posible. 4. Havana es mas
agradable que Nueva York. 5. Peru esta mas lejos que
Ecuador. 6. Ellas han viajado extensively.
X. Continue the synopsis in the third person singular of
the following verbal expressions:
i. se esta sentando. 2. no los construye. 3. no distingue
nada. 4. no lo entiende.
CAPlTULO XIX
LAS MISIONES DE TEJAS
Dona Ana y Rosa se divirtieron mucho en San Antonio
visitando los barrios mejicanos y hablando con las mu-
jeres en su propia lengua. En las casas de estas familias
humildes oyeron cantar canciones antiguas que habian
s venido, hace siglos, de Espafia. Probaron algunos platos
mejicanos, por ejemplo, tamales y tortillas, y les gustaron.
En un buen coche don Ramon y sus parientes fueron a
visitar las varias misiones que fundaron los primeros
espaiioles en Tejas. Dijo don Ramon que los misioneros,
10 especialmente los franciscanos, despues de la conquista
de Mejico por Herndn Cortes en 1521, construyeron mi-
siones desde Centro America hasta Tejas, y en los alre-
dedores de San Antonio se encuentran cuatro misiones,
tres de las cuales siguen us&ndose.
15 — £ Para qu6 Servian las misiones ? — pregunt6 Rosa.
— Eran centros de religion y civilization — respondio
el tio. — Los frailes ensenaban a los indios no solo la
religion, sino tambien el cultivo y el riego de sus campos,
artes y oficios litiles, y la cria de animales. En una
20 palabra, trataban de hacer de ellos ciudadanos litiles.
— Entonces la conquista del Nuevo Mundo por los
espaiioles no era acompanada de una cruel matanza de
los primeros habitantes, los indios de las muchas diferentes
tribus — observo Quinito.
142
LAS MISIONES DE TEJAS 143
— Todo al contrario — dijo don Ramon. — Los mi- 25
sioneros acompanaban siempre a los ejercitos que con-
dujeron los conquistadores. La cruz iba al lado de la
bandera y la espada. Esos buenos misioneros sabian
proteger y ayudar a los indios. La America debe a estos
frailes espafioles su gratitud por la obra que realizaron. 30
— En muchos palses hispanoamericanos existen hoy
millones de indios — dijo Pepe, — lo que indica, <j ver-
dad ? que los primeros espanoles no eran crueles con ellos.
t Y donde estan hoy los millones de indios que vivian
antes en Norte America ? Son muy pocos. <; Por qu6 ? 35
— Pero ya estamos a las puertas de una mision — dijo
dona Ana.
Los turistas bajaron ante la mision llamada de San Jos6
de Aguayo, que se empezo a construir en 1720.
— i Qu6 iglesia mas hermosa ! — exclamo Quinito. Se 40
parece a una de las muchas iglesias que conocemos en
Espana. Hay que admirar estas bellas ventanas. Estas
pinturas son, sin duda, muy antiguas. Ya comprendo
por qu6 se llama esta iglesia « la reina de las misiones. »
— En el sudoeste de los Estados Unidos — respondio 45
don Ramon — se encuentra un buen mimero de bellas
iglesias construidas por los misioneros espanoles, como
veis aqui y como ver£is m£s tarde. Y las magnificas
catedrales, iglesias y edificios publicos de M6jico, Centro
America y la America del Sur son, en su mayor parte, so
obra de los primeros pobladores espanoles.
La mision de San Francisco de la Espada, del aiio 1730,
que todavia se usa, y la de San Juan tambi&i encantaron
a nuestros turistas y les trajeron recuerdos de su madre
patria Espana. ss
144 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
contrario, -a contrary propio, -a own; proper
cria f. raising publico, -a public
cruel cruel realizar (ce) to effect, carry out
cultivo m. cultivation recuerdo m. remembrance, re-
fraile m. friar minder
franciscano m. Franciscan religion f . religion
matanza f . killing riego m. irrigation
misionero m. missionary sudoeste m. southwest
obra f . work tamal m. tamale (see below)
oficio m. crafty occupation tortilla f . pancake (of cornmeal)
probar (ue) to sample, taste, test, usar to use
try out vent ana f . window
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
al contrario on the contrary and meat seasoned with red
artes y oficios arts and crafts peppers; they are strained and
cruel con cruel to served in a wrapping of corn
madre patria mother country husk ; tortillas are likewise of
servir para to be good for, useful corn, which is ground in a
for primitive hand mill of stones
tamales are made of Indian corn
LAS MISIONES Y LOS MISIONEROS
The Mission Churches of our Hispanic Southwest (in Texas,
New Mexico, Arizona and California), some of which are partially
in ruins, are eloquent reminders of the great civilizing work of the
early Spanish settlers of that region. The conquistadores, bent on
conquest of lands and aborigines, on the discovery of precious metals
and the extension of the territorial possessions of the Spanish crown,
usually gave little thought or care to the human beings who were
found in the conquered regions. To offset this situation, royal
measures granting rights to explore, conquer and govern, also pro-
vided that representatives of the Church should accompany these
expeditions of conquest. From the monasteries of Spain, and later
LAS MISIONES DE TEJAS 145
from those established in the New World, went forth members of
different religious orders to accompany the conquerors. It was their
purpose to act as buffers between the Spanish soldiers and the
natives and to protect, instruct and convert to Christianity these
natives. A system of missions was developed first in Florida, Georgia
and the Carolinas and put into effect later in the regions farther to
the west.
The Jesuits and the Franciscans were the religious workers most
active in this missionary work in what are now the southern and
southwestern parts of the United States.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i . Dona Ana y Rosa se divirtieron en San Antonio ensenan-
doles espanol a las mujeres mejicanas. 2. Visitaron los barrios
mejicanos y probaron los platos preparados por esas mujeres.
3. No les gustaron las tortillas y los tamales que probaron.
4. Los turistas fueron a pie a visitar las misiones cerca de San
Antonio. 5. Despues de conquistar a Mejico, Hernan Cortes
construyo muchas misiones. 6. Las misiones Servian para
ensenar a los indios cosas utiles. 7. Aprendieron los indios
artes y oficios y el cultivo de los campos. 8. Los misioneros
acompanaban siempre a los conquistadores. 9. La cruz iba
al lado de la bandera y la espada. 10. Estos frailes realizaron
una obra de gran importancia. 1 1 . Hay hoy mas indios en la
America anglosajona que en la America espanola. 12. Los
turistas visitaron tres misiones en los alrededores de San
Antonio. 13. Las iglesias de estas misiones se parecian a
iglesias espanolas. 14. Un gran numero de las iglesias y
edificios publicos en Hispanoamerica fueron construidos por
pobladores espanoles. 15. Estas visitas les trajeron a los
turistas recuerdos de Nueva York.
146 QUINITO EN AMERICA
II. Read aloud the following questions and then answer
each in Spanish.
i. <i Quiere Vd. probar unas tortillas? 2. £ Para que sirve
un aeroplane ? 3. d A quien se parece Vd. ? 4. £ Le gustan
a Vd. los tamales? 5. ^ Cual es la madre patria de Vd. ?
6. <j Sabe Vd. hablar perfectamente su propia lengua ?
7. <j Que obra util realiza Vd. ? 8. <J Ha estado Vd. alguna
vez en el sudoeste de los Estados Unidos ?
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
1. Unas tortillas. Some tortillas. Unos ojos negros. A
pair of black eyes.
The plural of uno or una is equivalent in English to some,
a few, several, a pair of. Thus used, it is somewhat more in-
definite than algunos, -as.
2. i Que iglesia m&s hermosa! What a (most) beautiful
church!
To express in Spanish an exclamation over the exceptional
quality of a thing or person, one uses que + adjective + noun
(/ que hermosa iglesia!) or, more emphatically, que + noun
+ mas + adjective: / que iglesia mas hermosa!
3. Sabian proteger. They knew how to protect, were able to
protect. Podian proteger. They were able to protect.
Saber is used to express ability as a result of skill or knowl-
edge. Poder expresses ability as a result of power or circum-
stances.
Another example: Se construir una casa, pero no puedo
construir una por no tener el dinero. / can (know how to)
build a house, but I can't build one for lack of money.
4. Los conquistadores condujeron . . . The conquerors led . . .
Verbs ending in -ducir (for example, conducir, to lead, drive;
traducir, to translate) have the following peculiarities:
LAS MISIONES DE TEJAS 147
(a) In the present indicative and polite imperative, such
verbs have -zc before -o or -a, like conocer, a consonant-
changing verb. See page 70.
(b) In the preterite indicative the endings are -duje, -du-
jiste, -dujo; -dujimos, -dujisteis, -dujeron.
I. Replace the word in English with the proper Spanish
words :
i. Llegaron a few frailes a la mision. 2. <; Quien quiere
some tamales sabrosos? 3. /What a wonderful aeroplano!
4. / What cruel indios ! 5. Ellos can construir la casa si can
conseguir el dinero necesario. 6. i Can you traducir esta
carta ? 7. We could not ver nada en la noche obscura.
II. Say and write in Spanish:
i. I conduct them. 2. Conduct (Vd.) me. 3. Do not lead
(Yds.) her. 4. I translated it. 5. Did you (Vd.) translate
them ? 6. They drove us to the station. 7. I can drive a car.
8. They could not see because they were blind (ciegd).
III. Translate into English the following sentences:
i. RealicelaVd. 2. Lo realice. 3. No lo protejo. 4. Pro-
tejame Vd. 5. Indiqueme Vd. el camino. 6. Ella prueba el
plato. 7. No lo distingo. 8. Atravieso el desierto. 9. Cruce
el rio. 10. Crucelo Vd.
IV. Make plural every word possible in the sentences of III.
V. Make a synopsis in the first person singular of:
traducir, to translate; poder, to be able; and saber, to know,
know how.
CAPlTULO XX
PALABRAS ESPANOLAS EN EL VOCA-
BULARIO NORTEAMERICANO
Se detuvieron los viajeros dos dias en El Paso, Tejas,
para descansar y para informarse acerca de las huellas
que dejaron los pobladores espanoles de esta region.
El Paso (El Paso del Norte) fue en un tiempo una
5 poblacion de Nuevo Mejico y un gran centro de los
misioneros espanoles. En los valles de los rfos Grande
y Pecos hubo hasta veinte y cinco misiones. Hoy se
ven en ruinas la mayor parte de ellas.
Al otro lado del rio Grande est& Ciudad Juarez, situada
10 en territorio mejicano, y nuestros turistas cruzaron el
puente y gozaron de un paseo por las calles de la ciudad.
— j Cuantos nombres de lugar de origen espanol se
encuentran aqui en el sudoeste de los Estados Unidos!
— exclamo Pepe. Y don Ramon le respondio :
15 — j Ya lo creo ! — Al mirar un mapa de Tejas, Nuevo
Mejico, Arizona, Colorado o California se ve que son
muy numerosos los nombres geogriificos espanoles: El
Paso, el rio Grande, los rios Colorado, Brazos, Nueces;
las mon tanas Guadalupe, Santiago y Sangre de Cristo;
20 los pueblos nuevomejicanos de Espanola, Santa Clara,
San Ildefonso y otros; Santa Fe, Albuquerque, Trinidad,
Los Angeles; el parque nacional de Mesa Verde; el
Llano Estacado. . . .
— Esto es natural, sin duda, por ser espanol este vasto
25 territorio durante casi tres siglos — observo dona Ana.
— Y no olvidemos — dijo don Ramon — las muchas
PALABRAS ESPAtfOLAS 149
palabras espanolas que ban pasado al ingles norteameri-
cano. Por ejemplo : « pickaninny, » que viene de pe-
queno nino; « calaboose, » de calabozo; « canyon » de
canon; « lariat, » de la reata; « lasso, » de lazo; « la- 30
goon, » de laguna; « ranch » y « rancher, » de rancho y
ranchero; « vamoose, » de vamos, y otros mas. Luego
hay palabras espanolas que con poco o ningun cambio en
la pronunciation se usan en ingles: patio, rodeo, arroyo,
pueblo, coyote, bronco. 35
— Hablamos de este asunto en Nueva York con nues-
tro amigo Robert Chandler — anadio Quinito. — Estoy
interesado mas que nunca en estas cosas. Esta claro que
la mayoria de tales palabras estan relacionadas con la
vida de las haciendas o ranchos del oeste. 40
— Si, porque vienen de los dias cuando los primeros
espanoles estaban ocupados en el cultivo de la tierra y
en la cria de vacas, caballos y ovejas.
— Me ha interesado mucho la palabra « hoosegow, »
usado en lenguaje popular en este pais — dijo Quinito. 45
— Significa, como « calaboose, » calabozo o carcel. Se
deriva de juzgado, <i verdad ?
— Si, contesto don Ramon. — Un juzgado es un tri-
bunal con la carcel que lo acompafia. Y « hoosegow »
imita la pronunciation espanola de la palabra. En Nuevo 50
M6jico ver&s como los descendientes de los pobladores
espanoles han tornado palabras inglesas y las usan en
una mezcla con otras espanolas, precisamente como mucha
gente hispana de Nueva York hablan de tomar un « ticket »
y de viajar en el « subway » o en un « bus. » Oi decir una 55
vez a un nuevomejicano que 61 iba a « baquear el troque, »
es decir, mover hacia atris el camion.
150 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
arroyo m. rivulet, bed of rivulet laguna f . lagoon
asunto m. matter, affair lazo m. lasso, lariat
atrds adv. back, backward lenguaje m. language, lingo
bronco, -a rough, wild nuevomejicano, -a New Mexican
calabozo m. calaboose, jail origen m. origin
cambio m. change precisamente exactly
canon m. canyon (also, cannon) pronunciation f . pronunciation
cdrcel f . prison ranchero m. rancher
derivar to derive rancho m. cattle ranch
descansar to rest reata f . rope
descendiente m. and f . descendant rodeo m. round-up, rodeo
juzgado m. court (of justice) tribunal m. tribunal, court
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
hacia atrds backwards, toward the oir decir a un nuevomejicano to
back hear a New Mexican say
no olvidemos let us not forget vamos let's go (from ir)
NOTAS
Bronco means rough, rude, harsh. As used in the western part of
the United States it is a noun denoting a wild, untamed horse, a
bronco. Coyote is a dog-like or wolf-like animal common in the
West and in Mexico. Tawny yellow in color and exceedingly shrewd,
it preys on fowl and smaller animals. Rancho is used in Spain to
indicate a sparsely inhabited region or a camp of workmen estab-
lished therein (besides meaning mess, food served to a number of
people). In America it came to mean cattle ranch and ranchero gave
us rancher. Reata is a rope used to tie together a number of horses,
usually when they are led or driven in single file. Rodear means to
go around, also, to surround. The noun rodeo (pronounced in Spanish
ro-de-o and sometimes in English rod-eo) is the action of rounding
up or corralling cattle. Nowadays it is most frequently applied to
an exhibition of skill by cowboys in riding horses and roping cattle.
Baquear and troque are corruptions of English to back and truck.
PALABRAS ESPANOLAS 151
NOMBRES GEOGRAFICOS
Concerning the different place names in the text of this chapter,
the following comments are in place: Colorado means red, colored,
a name given to the state of that title because of the many reddish
rocks seen in different parts of that region. Brazos, arms. Nueces,
mtis. The Guadalupe mountains are probably so named after a
certain range in west-central Spain. Santiago, St. James, the patron
saint of Spain. Sangre de Cristo, Blood of Christ, a range of southern
Colorado. Los Angeles, The Angels. Trinidad, Trinity. Mesa
Verde, Green Tableland, a national park. Llano Estacado, Staked
Plain, in northwestern Texas.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. Los turistas se detuvieron en El Paso para — . 2. En
un tiempo hubo — . 3. Ciudad Juarez esta — . 4. En esta
ciudad mejicana los viajeros — . 5. En un mapa del sudoeste
de los Estados Unidos se ven — . 6. — son nombres espanoles
de pueblos nuevomejicanos. 7. Trinidad es una ciudad del
estado de — . 8. — es el nombre espanol de un parque na-
cional. 9. Esta region del sudoeste fue en un tiempo — .
10. En espanol « calabozo » significa la misma cosa que « — .»
11. En la Argentina « estancia » es lo que se llama « — » en
Mejico. 12. Un « bronco » es un — no domado (tamed).
13. Los rancheros viven en un — . 14. Un coyote es un
animal que se parece a — . 15. « Vamoose, » una expresion
de nuestro lenguaje popular, se deriva de — , que significa en
ingles — . 1 6. « Hoosegow, » una palabra del lenguaje popular
norteamericano, se deriva de — y significa — .
II. Try to add to the list of Spanish words in the text
others that have been adopted into North American English.
III. Study a map of the southwestern states and find ten
place names of Spanish origin not mentioned in the text.
152 QUINITO EN AMERICA
IV. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. They heard a Mexican i. Oyeron — un mejicano.
speak Spanish.
2. He is backing the truck. 2. Mueve — el camion.
3. She is not poor; on the 3. Ella no es pobre; — , es
contrary she is quite rich. bastante rica.
4. A " lagoon " is a small lake. 4. Una « laguna » es — .
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
i. / Cudntos nombres! How many names! i Cuantos
nombres ? How many names? j Que hermoso dia ! What a
beautiful day! i Que dia es hoy ? What day is today?
From the above sentences it is evident that many interroga-
tives (pronouns or adjectives) may also be used as exclamatory
words. In either case, in writing such words an accent must
be placed over the vowel of the syllable that is stressed.
This accent is retained in an indirect question: No se que
le pasa, / don't know what is the matter with him.
The most common interrogatives are :
PRONOUNS: quien (quienes), who; a quien (a quienes), whom,
to whom; que, whaty which; cual (cuales), which, what;
de quien, whose.
Examples: i Quien viene? Who is coming? i Que es
esto? What is this?
i Cu6l es la leccion de hoy ? What is today's
lesson ?
ADJECTIVES: que , what; cual (cuales), what, which; cu&nto,-a,
how much; cuantos, -as, how many.
ADVERBS: addnde, where to; como, how; cuando, when;
cuan, how; ddnde, where; por que, why.
When what is a predicate pronoun in English, it is expressed
by que, if a definition is sought, i Qweeslavida? What is life?
PALABRAS ESPAftOLAS 153
If selection or choice is indicated, cual (cu&les) is necessary:
I Cual es el dia mas largo del afio ? What (which) is the long-
est day of the year ?
2. Interrogative and exclamatory words usually have their
counterparts in unaccented words which are relative pro-
nouns or adverbs:
quien, as relative pronoun; see page 118: Es Pedro, quien
viene ahora.
cual (preceded by the definite article): see page 118: Es
Pedro, el cual viene ahora.
que (with or without preceding article): see page 118: Es
Pedro, (el} que viene ahora.
cuanto, as relative pronoun, meaning all that: le doy a Vd.
cuanto tengo. / give you all that I have.
adonde, as relative adverb : el estado adonde voy, the state
to which I am going.
como, as relative adverb: la manera como lo hace, the way
(in which) he does it.
cuando, as relative adverb: el dia cuando le conoci, the day
when I met him.
donde, as relative adverb : la casa donde vive, the house in
which he lives.
porque, as causal adverb: porque estaba cansado, because
he was tired.
3. Mas que nunca, more than ever.
In expressing comparison, negative adverbs, adjectives and
pronouns are used in Spanish after such expressions as mas
que, more than, menos que, less than, mejor que, better than,
peor que, worse than.
Further examples: Es mas rico que nadie, he is richer than
anyone. Estoy menos interesado que nunca, I am less inter-
ested than ever. Este pueblo es mejor que ningun otro, this
town is better than any other.
154 QUINITO EN AMERICA
4. In the Verb Appendix study the irregular verbs tener,
to have; ver, to see; and valer, to be worth.
I. Make exclamatory the following interrogative sentences:
i. i Quien lo cree? 2. <; Cuantos indios hay aqui?
3. <; Como ha crecido el nino? 4. <; Que buenos libros tiene
Vd. ? 5. <: Cuanto dinero encontro Vd. en la calle ?
II. Replace the English words with proper Spanish equiva-
lents:
i. No sabemos what dicen Yds. 2. No me escriben who
vendra. 3. Quiero saber why ella no dice nada. 4. No me
ban dicho when vendran. 5. j What is el nombre de la ciudad ?
6. i What son las horas de trabajo ? 7. Trinidad es la ciudad
where reside. 8. Las senoras wlw son nuestras amigas no
vendran. Q. Las senoras, who son nuestras amigas, no ven-
dran. 10 Estoy mas cansado que ever. 1 1. Pepc sabe menos
que anyone. 12. Esta montana es mas alta que any other.
III. In the blanks of the following sentences supply proper
forms of ver, to sec '
i Salimos sin — quien venia. 2. Ellos no nos han — . 3. —
a los turistas, Jose no queria entrar. 4. Al — quien se acer-
caba, yo sali de la casa. 5. Ayer (yesterday') ellos lo — .
6. Mariana nosotros los — . 7. Despues de — la hora, de-
cidimos volver a casa. 8. Antes de — al fraile, entramos en
la iglesia. 9. Yo las — ahora. 10. Estan — lo que pasa.
IV. Say and write in Spanish :
i. I am worth nothing. 2. He will be worth nothing
3. What was it worth ? 4. They used to have a dog. 5. Yes-
terday he had to work. 6. Who has my money ? 7. We shall
have time to (para) write it. 8. They would not have time
to study. 9. Had you (Vd.) had time to rest? 10. We have
had many illnesses.
CAPlTULO XXI
DE SANTA FE A SANTA FE
Llegaron por fin los turistas a Santa Fe, capital del
estado de Nuevo Mejico y en un tiempo capital de la
vasta region espanola del sudoeste de la hoy Union
norteamericana.
— ; Santa Fe ! — exclamo Quinito. — El nombre me <
recuerda a Santa Fe en Espana, cerca de Granada. Estu-
vimos alii una vez Pepe y yo. En esa historica poblacion
se rindio Boabdil, ultimo rey moro de Granada, a los
Reyes Catolicos, Fernando e Isabel, terminando asi la
Reconquista que habia durado mas de siete siglos y K
medio. En enero de 1492 tomaron los Reyes Catolicos
posesion de Granada.
— Y la Santa Fe espanola es tambien famosa por ser
el lugar en que se firmo un documento de la mayor im-
portancia, el que nombro a Cristobal Colon para hacer i«
el viaje que resulto en el descubrimiento de America.
Por eso se puede decir que esa Santa Fe andaluza es la
cuna de America y que la reina Isabel, que se intereso
tan to en el proyecto de Colon, es la madre del Nuevo
Mundo. — Asi dijo Pepe, y anadio don Ramon: 2c
— Y en esta Santa Fe nuevomejicana continuaron los
espanoles el trabajo de Colon que empezo en la Santa Fe
espanola. Os dire como ocurrio eso.
En el ano de 1 539 el virrey de Mejico trato de persuadir
a Cabeza de Vaca a formar una expedition para ir a 25
explorar en el norte una region en que se decia existian
156 QUINITO EN AMERICA
las « Siete Ciudades de Cfbola, » que segiin los indios
poseian una riqueza fabulosa. Pero Cabeza de Vaca
querla volver a Espana y se excuse de esta mision.
30 Entonces Fray Marcos de Niza, organize la expedition
y despues de mucho viajar, descubrio, en el oeste del
Nuevo M&jico de hoy, las famosas « ciudades, » que no
eran m£s que pobres pueblos de los indios zuni, con casas
de adobe. Fray Marcos volvio desilusionado a Mejico.
35 Mas tarde hablaremos de este buen fraile.
Luego, en 1540, Francisco Vazquez de Coronado, nom-
brado por el virrey, salio a la cabeza de una expedition
mucho mayor, para hacer, si fuera posible, lo que no
habia hecho Fray Marcos: explorar bien toda la region
4o desconocida y encontrar las riquezas que los espafioles
creian se encontraban alii. Visito los pueblos de los
zuni y vencio a esta tribu feroz. Hizo su campamento
de invierno donde esta hoy Bernalillo, al sudoeste de la
futura Santa Fe. Viajo por Nuevo Mejico y Tejas y
45 llego al sur del hoy estado de Kansas. Pero nada de
riquezas. Solo indios pobres, montanas y llanuras inter-
minables y penalidades sin fin. Volvio a Mejico con solo
la mitad de sus hombres.
En 1598, Juan de Onate, nacido en Mejico (o Nueva
so Espana), vino con otra expedition, preparada a sus pro-
pias expensas, y entro en esta region siguiendo por las
orillas del rio Grande. Fundo la primera poblaci6n es-
panola al norte de la actual Santa Fe. Llamola San Juan
de los Caballeros. En 1609 vino a reemplazar a Onate
55 el nuevo gobernador, Pedro de Peralta, quien traslado
la poblacion al lugar que ocupa hoy Santa Fe, llamada
entonces la Villa Real de Santa Fe de Francisco de Asis.
DE SANTA FE A SANTA FE 157
Florecio la nueva Santa Fe y credo el numero de sus
habitantes. Los padres franciscanos fundaron varias
misiones en el territorio y todo marchaba bien. 60
— i Que interesante ! — exclamo Rosa. — Y sigue
siendo Santa Fe de Nuevo Mejico muy espanola, me
parece. He oido hablar espanol en las calles y las tiendas.
Y se publica aqui un periodico en espanol. Compre hoy
un ejemplar de este periodico y os lo ensenare mas tarde. 65
— Damelo ahora — pidio Quinito a su hermana.
— Tio Ramon — dijo Rosa — nos gustarla visitar los
pueblos indios que se encuentran en esta region. £ Quieres
ensenarnoslos manana ?
— Con mucho gusto. Saldremos manana a recorrerlos. 70
VOCABULARIO
actual present, present-day futuro, -a future
adobe m. adobe, unburnt brick histdrico, -a historic
continuar (uo) to continue interminable interminable
cuna i. cradle persuadir to persuade
desilusionado, -a disappointed, proyecto m. project, plan
disillusioned publicar (que) to publish
documento m. document reconquista L reconquest
excusar to excuse reemplazar (ce) to replace
expensas f . pi. expenses, costs rendir (i) to surrender; render
fabuloso, -a fabulous resultar to result; prove to be
firmar to sign trasladar to transfer, move
florecer (zco) to flourish virrey m. viceroy
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
aqui cerca near here nada de riquezas no riches
ddmelo give it to me (familiar sifuera if it were
imperative of dar + melo) seguir siendo to continue to be
ensenar in this chapter means to show
158 QUINITO EN AMERICA
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Cristobal Colon, Christopher Columbus. Francisco Vdzquez de
Coronado (1500-1543) was born in Salamanca. He accompanied the
first viceroy of Mexico, Antonio de Mendoza (1485-1552), when
the latter went in 1537 to assume his position in New Spain (or
Mexico). In 1539 Mendoza appointed Coronado to the governorship
of Nueva Galicia, a large section of western Mexico. Coronado's
chief accomplishment was his exploration, described in the text, of
a part of the large and little known region to the north of Mexico.
Las Siete Ciudades de Cibola, sought first by Fray Marcos de Niza
(see Chapter XXIV), like the island of Bimini, where was supposed
to exist the Fountain of Youth that Ponce de Leon tried to find,
was either a figment of the mind of untutored Indians or was pur-
posely exaggerated in importance by them in order to play up to
the evident desire of the Spaniards to seek wealth in unknown regions.
These so-called cities of wealth were only adobe villages of the
Zufii Indians and possessed no wealth of any kind. The great wealth
of the Aztecs whom Cortes conquered led explorers to hope to
discover similar treasure in territories now a part of the United
States. It is noteworthy that those territories never produced any
easily acquired wealth for these adventurers, though Viceroy Men-
doza constantly encouraged expeditions into the unknown north.
Juan de Onate (1555-1612) was a Spaniard born in Mexico, at
Guadalajara, a city founded by his father. He married Isabel
Tolosa Cortes Moctezuma, a descendant of Hernan Cortes and of
Moctezuma II. He sought and received in 1595 a commission to ex-
plore and govern New Mexico, and he and other wealthy men formed
the expedition at their own expense. They set out from Zacatecas
in January, 1598. There were 130 soldiers in the retinue, a number
of Franciscan friars, 7,000 animals, Negro and Indian slaves, and
83 wagons for the transportation of goods and supplies. In April
1598, they arrived opposite El Paso and Onate took possession
"of all the kingdoms and provinces of New Mexico," in the name
of King Philip II. On May 4, he crossed the Rio Grande at El Paso.
In July he set up his government in the Indian pueblo of Caypa,
DE SANTA FE A SANTA FE 159
whose name he changed to San Juan. By August the others of his
train had arrived and steps were taken to colonize and cultivate
the region. Ofiate made several exploratory expeditions in sur-
rounding territories, but found the Indians very hostile. He treated
them badly and the Franciscan missionaries opposed him strongly.
The town was transferred to San Gabriel. Dissatisfaction and dis-
sension arose in the colony and it became almost a complete failure.
Ofiate was replaced as governor in 1609 by Pedro de Peralta, who
transferred the colony to a new site, on which Santa Fe now stands.
Onate returned to Mexico a poor man and under charges formulated
against him for ill-treatment of his companions.
Santa Fe, Spain, is a few miles to the north of Granada. The town
was built by the Catholic Sovereigns as headquarters for their army,
which sought the surrender of Granada, the last stronghold of the
Moors in Spain. On January 2, 1492, Boabdil, the last of the Moorish
kings, surrendered to the Christian monarchs the keys of the city
of Granada, thus bringing to an end the long Reconquista, 718-1492.
Columbus gained his first hearing from the sovereigns while they
were in Santa Fe, but not until after the taking of Granada were any
steps taken to aid him. Queen Isabel did not pawn her jewels, as
the story goes, to secure funds for Columbus. The secretary of
King Ferdinand assured her, from the resources of the crown of
Aragon (Ferdinand was King of Aragon, in northwestern Spain),
the monies that were needed.
Many of the Indian pueblos of New Mexico and Arizona exist
today in the same sites they had occupied many years before the
arrival of the Spanish conquerors. These non-nomadic Indians have
preserved in many instances their ancient pagan customs along with
the Christianity the Spaniards taught them.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. La Santa Fe nuevomejicana fue en un tiempo capital
de Mejico. 2. La Santa Fe andaluza ha sido llamada la cuna
160 QUINITO EN AMERICA
de America. 3. Cabeza de Vaca fue el primero en ir a buscar
las « Siete Ciudades de Cibola. » 4. Fray Marcos de Niza
supo que estas « ciudades » no eran mas que pueblos de adobe.
5. Coronado atraveso el territorio del actual estado de Ca-
lifornia. 6. Juan de Onate fundo la actual ciudad de Santa
Fe. 7. Los padres franciscanos fundaron misiones en el actual
estado de Nuevo Mejico. 8. Existen todavia muchos pueblos
indios en Nuevo Mejico.
II. Select from the second column words that are antonyms
(opposites) of the words in the first column :
desconocido pasado
rendir dejar
futuro conocido
actual bueno
trasladar historico
descendiente tomar
cruel antecesor
III. What Spanish nouns could well be used as objects of
the following verbs ?
firmar; publicar; rendir; persuadir; reemplazar; realizar;
probar; usar; trasladar.
IV. Use in complete Spanish sentences the following idioms:
i. seguir siendo. 2. aqui cerca. 3. nada de riquezas.
4. ya lo creo. 5. servir para.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
(Up to this point grammar sections have been devoted to
a review of most of the grammar topics treated in the beginning
book, Quinito en Espana. From here on new topics will be
gradually developed with occasional and incidental review
of previously studied matters.)
DE SANTA FE A SANTA FE 161
1. Os lo ensenare. / shall show it to you. <i Quieres en-
sendrnoslos ? Will you show them to us ?
In the above sentences are found examples of the use of
two object pronouns with a verb, an indirect object pronoun
and a direct object pronoun.
In such cases the indirect object (os and nos in the above
sentences) precedes the direct object (lo and los).
Two object pronouns occupy the same relative position
with regard to the verb that one such pronoun assumes; that
is, they usually precede the verb. However, if the verb is
in the infinitive, the gerund, or the affirmative imperative,
the object pronouns follow and are attached to the verb, and
a written accent is necessary over the vowel of the syllable
of the verb which is stressed. Examples:
Me lo dan, they give it to me.
Nos la escriben, they write it to us.
Te las presento, I present them to you.
Os los enseno, I show it to you.
But: Quiere darmelo, he wished to give it to me.
Esta dandomelo, he is giving it to me.
Demelo Vd., give it lo me.
2. i Quieres ensenarnoslos ? Will you show them to us?
Querer, to wish, want, love, be willing, is often used as the
Spanish equivalent of will in English, when will means to be
willing.
Further examples: No quieren contestarme. i Quiere Vd.
of recermelo ? <i Quien quiere visitar conmigo los pueblos ?
3. Llamola (= la llamo) San Juan. He catted it San Juan.
At the beginning of a sentence or clause an object pro-
noun may follow and be attached to the verb. This construc-
tion is not frequent, but it will be found in one's reading
162 QUINITO EN AMERICA
of Spanish. It is a literary usage never heard in speech.
4. Continue hablando. He continues to speak.
Verbs ending in -uar bear a written accent over the u in
the singular of the present tense, in the third person plural,
and in the polite imperative. Otherwise, a diphthong would
be formed and the stress of voice would fall on the preceding
syllable: continue (con-ti-nu-o) , I continue; continuo (con-
ti-nuo) would be an adjective meaning continuous.
Present indicative : continuo, continues, continua; continua-
mos, continuais, continuan
Polite imperative : continue Vd., continuen Yds.
I. Insert at the proper place in each of the following sen-
tences the two object pronouns nos lo, it to (of) us.
i. Ellos ofrecen. 2. Vd. dice. 3. Ella pide. 4. Vds. estan
dando. 5. Tu no quieres dar. 6. £ For que no siguen ofre-
ciendo? 7. No digan Vds. 8. Diga Vd. 9. Ofrezcan Vds.
II. Replace the direct object nouns of the following sen-
tences with the proper corresponding pronouns. Model : ella
me dio el libro = ella me lo dio.
i. Ellos me dieron la cuna. 2. Los indios nos rindieron el
pueblo. 3. <; Quien me presento los documentos ? 4. Rindame
Vd. el dinero. 5. Continuen Vds. escribiendonos las cartas.
6. No nos escriba Vd. la carta. 7. Deme Vd. las tortillas.
III. Say and write in the usual order the following sen-
tences:
i. Firmanlo. 2. Escribieronme. 3. Reemplazaronlos.
4. Llamabase Juan. 5. Dicenlo. 6. Conocieronlas.
IV. Make negative the following sentences:
i. Demelo Vd. 2. Ofrezcannoslos Vds. 3. Pidamelas Vd.
4. Diganmelo Vds. 5. Abranmela Vds.
CAPfTULO XXII
INDIOS E HISPANOAMERICANOS
Para los viajeros resultaron encantadores los pueblos
indios: San Ildefonso, Santa Clara, Santo Domingo, San
Felipe, Chimayo, Taos y otros lugares. Era la primera
vez que habian visto indios norteamericanos, de los que
habian leido Pepe y Quinito tantas veces. 5
Estos pueblos son muy antiguos, siendo fundados antes
de la llegada de los conquistadores espanoles. Los indios
se ocupan del cultivo de los campos, la manufactura de
objetos de arte en plata, ceramica pintoresca y bellos
tejidos de lana. Parecen contentos y sus casas de adobe 10
estan bien construidas.
Un dia en Santa Clara hablaron en espanol con el viejo
jefe del pueblo, que se expreso facilmente en este idioma.
Sabia tambien ingles y la lengua india de su tribu. En-
tonces los turistas recordaron que estos indios habian 15
conservado, lo mismo que los descendientes de los pobla-
dores espanoles, la lengua de los conquistadores.
Gozaron enormemente los muchachos de sus visitas a
estos pueblos, pero sintieron mucho no poder ver los
bailes indios que se celebran en ellos durante el verano y 20
el otono. Compraron mantas, jarros, anillos y pulseras
de plata, obra de los indios, quienes se los vendieron con
gusto. Dijo don Ramon :
— Los antecesores de estos indios fueron los que se
rebelaron contra los pobladores de Santa Fe en 1680. 25
163
164 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Mataronlos o los hicieron huir a Mejico. No fue hasta
1698, bajo el mando del capitan Diego de Vargas, que
los espanoles pudieron veneer a los rebeldes y establecer
una vez mas el gobierno espanol en Santa Fe. Despues
30 hubo paz y la colonia prospero mucho.
— He leido — dijo Pepe — que don Diego de Vargas
proclamo que la colonia celebrase una gran fiesta en
honor de la reconquista de Santa Fe, y que en 1712, el
entonces gobernador, Jose Chacon Medina Salazar, pro-
35 clamo que en los primeros dias de cada mes de septiembre,
se observase esta fiesta. Todavia hoy asi se hace, con
tres dias de procesiones, bailes de la region y comedias
historicas y tradicionales. En las procesiones van per-
sonas vestidas al modo de los conquistadores del ano
40 1693.
— Es interesante oir cantar aqui las viejas canciones
espanolas que han sido conservadas, asi como ver los
bailes de origen espanol — dijo dona Ana.
— Es verdad — contesto don Ramon. — Las antiguas
45 costumbres espanolas siguen viviendo aqui, asi como el
idioma espanol. El cincuenta por ciento de los habitantes
tienen nombres espanoles y hablan la lengua de Espana.
Estos habitantes quieren ser llamados hispanoamericanos
y no mejicanos.
50 El « Palacio de los Gobernadores, » construido primero
en 1 6 10, es el edificio dedicado a las cosas de gobierno,
mas viejo de los Estados Unidos. La mision de San
Miguel, construida en 1605, es la mas antigua del pais.
Los turistas visitaron estos edificios y otros muchos en
55 la ciudad y sus alrededores.
— En el Palacio de los Gobernadores — dijo don Ramon
INDIOS E HISPANOAMERICANOS 165
— escribio el general norteamericano Lew Wallace, siendo
gobernador entonces, su famosa novela « Ben Hur. »
— La he leido en espafiol — dijo Rosa — y tambien
su « El dios rubio, » que trata de la vida de los aztecas 60
en Mejico.
VOCABULARIO
anillo m. ring lana f . wool
baile m. dance manufactura f . manufacture
cerdmica f . ceramics, pottery modo m. manner, mode
(things made of clay) novela f . novel
comedia f . play, drama objeto m. object
conservar to preserve, conserve plata f . silver
costumbre f . custom pulsera f. bracelet
dios m. god; Dios God rebelde m. rebel
encantador, -ora charming, de- rubio, -a blond, fair
lightful tejido m. textile, fabric
huh (huyo) to flee tradicional traditional
jarro m. vase, jar vestir (i) to dress, clothe
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
al modo de in the manner of por ciento per cent
asi como as well as que celebrase that it should cele-
celebrarse to be held, take place brate
lo mismo que the same as, just as que se observase that there should
ocuparse de (or en) to engage in, be observed
be busy at
NOMBRES PROPIOS
San Ildefonso; this and the other Indian pueblos mentioned are
within a radius of 75 miles of Santa Fe.
Diego de Vargas Zapata Lujdn Ponce de Leon, leader of the recon-
quest of Santa Fe, was a doughty general who set forth from Mexico
in 1692 to recapture the region from which the Spanish settlers had
been driven in 1680 by the Indians under the leadership of Pope of
the Tewa tribe. At that time about 2500 of the white settlers had
166 QUINITO EN AMERICA
escaped to El Paso. Vargas was accompanied by some 800 colonists
when he succeeded in retaking Santa Fe. Not until the close of
1694 was Vargas able to reduce to submission Taos and other pueblos
in the north.
The fiesta which is annually celebrated in Santa Fe at the end
of August or in the first days of September is a most colorful and
interesting celebration commemorating the success of the Vargas
expedition. Throughout the summer of 1940 there was held in all
New Mexico a series of fiestas in honor of the 4ooth anniversary
of the Coronado exploratory expedition and on that occasion were
given in Albuquerque, Santa Fe and all the smaller cities, towns
and Indian pueblos, very interesting programs in which were revived
the songs, religious plays and traditional dances and costumes of
the Spanish colonial times.
In the "Palace of the Governors" at Santa Fe, today a highly
interesting museum of olden days, resided a long line of Spanish,
Mexican and United States governors. Of the latter, probably the
best known was General Lewis Wallace (1827-1905), who took part
in the war with Mexico, and was a general of the Northern army
during the Civil War. He was minister to Turkey and governor of
New Mexico, and obtained his chief fame as author of "Ben Hur, a
Tale of the Christ" (1880), a "best seller" of his times, and of "The
Fair God" (1873), a tale of the Aztecs of Mexico.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions :
i. <i Cuales fueron algunos de los pueblos indios que vi-
sitaron los turistas ? 2 . ^ Cuando fueron f undados estos
pueblos ? 3. £ De que se ocupan los indios ? 4. <J Que idioma
hablaron los turistas con el jefe del pueblo de Santa Clara ?
5. <i Que otras lenguas sabia hablar este jefe ? 6. £ Que habian
conservado estos indios ? 7. <; Que sintieron no poder ver los
turistas ? 8. <; Que compraron en los pueblos ? 9. <J Contra
quienes se rebelaron en 1680 los antecesores de estos indios?
10. <j Quien fue el jefe espanol de la reconquista de Santa Fe ?
INDIOS E HISPANOAMERICANOS 167
ii. t Como celebraron los pobladores espanoles la recon-
quista? 12. <J Como se celebra todavia hoy esta fiesta?
13. <: Como van vestidas las personas que toman parte en
estas procesiones? 14. ^ Que oyeron cantar los turistas?
!S- i Que idioma habla el cincuenta por ciento de los nuevo-
mejicanos? 16. <; Que general norteamericano escribio una
novela mientras era gobernador de Nuevo Mejico ? 17. <i Ha
leido Vd. «BenHur»?
II. Associate in thought each of the nouns of the first
column with one in the second column.
lana campos
pulsera agua
novela oveja
tejido fraile
cria gobierno
cultivo libro
religion casa
riego plata
ranchero manta
cuna rancho
adobe animates
virrey nino
turista idioma
fiesta viaje
hablar celebrar
III. Replace the English words with suitable Spanish words:
i. El diez per cent de los objetos son de plata. 2. Yo no
engage in la manufactura de ceramica. 3. Ella esta vestida,
in the manner of las indias. 4. Mis antecesores, just as yo,
se interesaron en estos asuntos. 5. Es interesante verlo as
well as oirlo. 6. Una fiesta va a take place aqui. 7. Near here
se encuentran dos pueblos. 8. £l continues to be nuestro amigo.
168 QUINITO EN AMERICA
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Se los vendieron. They sold them to them.
The direct object is los, them. The indirect object is se,
standing here for les, to them.
When both the direct and indirect object pronouns are of
the third person (in which case they both begin with Z), the
indirect object (le or les) becomes se. This se should not be
confused with the reflexive pronoun se, himself, herself, etc.
Notice below the English equivalents of the indirect object
pronoun se. Notice also how these meanings may be made
clear by adding the terminal pronouns of the third person,
preceded by the preposition a.
(lo doy a el I give it to him
lo doy a ella I give it to her
lo doy a Vd. I give it to you (sing.)
{lo doy a ellos I give it to them (m.)
lo doy a ellas I give it to them (f .)
lo doy a Yds. I give it to you (pi.)
Further examples: Nosotros se los damos (a Yds.), we
give them to you. Yds. se la ofrecen (a ellos), you offer it to
them. Tu se las dices (a ellas), you say them to them. Ofrez-
caselo Vd. (a ella), offer it to her. Desela Vd. a el, give it to
him. Estoy escribiendoselo (a ella), I am writing it to her.
2. Una pulsera de plata. A silver bracelet. Una casa de
adobe. An adobe house.
In English a noun may be used as an adjective: a silver
bracelet. This usage is not possible in Spanish. Instead, the
noun (usually one of material) is used after the preposition
de, forming an adjective phrase.
3. Huir, to flee, is conjugated like construir (see page 128).
Make a synopsis in the first person singular of huir.
INDIOS E HISPANOAMERICANOS 169
I. Place se las (las referring to objects of feminine gender)
at the proper place in the following sentences. Make clear
in each case, as shown in the table on page 168, some definite
meaning which you ascribe to se.
i. Yo escribia. 2. No dimos. 3. Yds. ofrecieron.
4. i Quien dijo? 5. Estamos presentando. 6. No que-
riamos dar. 7. De Yd. 8. No den Yds. 9. Ofrezca Yd.
10. No ofrezcan Yds.
II. Replace both the object nouns and the indirect object
nouns of the following sentences with the proper correspond-
ing pronouns. Model : doy el dinero al nino = se lo doy.
i. Abren la puerta a los indios. 2. Traeremos la lana al
capitan. 3. Vendimos la ceramica a los turistas. 4. Pre-
sentan el anillo a la senorita. 5. Traje las pulseras a las
senoras. 6. Diga Yd. la palabra al muchacho. 7. No escriba
Yd. las cartas al profesor. 8. Estaban pidiendo la novela
al vendedor. 9. No vamos a pedir la manta al ranchero.
10. Desearon ellos dar las naranjas al nino.
III. Say and write in Spanish :
i. A gold bracelet. 2. A woolen blanket. 3. An adobe
building. 4. A wooden ship. 5. A silver statue. 6. A stone
seat (stone = piedrd).
IV. An exercise in the use of huir, to flee, construir, to build,
and destruir, to destroy. Replace the English words with the
proper Spanish words.
i. ]ua.n flees. 2. Juan^M. 3. Ellos estan fleeing. 4. Yds.
han fled. 5. No flee Yd. (command). 6. No lo destroy Yds.
7. Yds. estaban building it. 8. Yo los build. 9. <: Quien las
was destroying? 10. Antes de fleeing, ellos built una casa.
n. Ellos fled sin destroying nada. 12. Nadie ha destroyed
nada.
CAPlTULO XXIII
LA SANTA FE MODERNA
Sentados a la luz de la luna en el bello patio espanol
de « La Fonda, » en Santa Fe, les encantaba a nuestros
amigos ofr la musica de la orquesta y las canciones
espanolas que cantaba una senorita vestida al modo de
5 las espanolas de hace muchos anos.
— Esta fonda es un rincon de Espana — dijo dona Ana,
suspirando de nostalgia, — de la Espana tradicional,
pintoresca y muy querida. Y quedo encantada con la
Santa Fe de Nuevo Mejico, donde sigue el ambiente
10 espanol. Las humildes iglesias de las muchas misiones
me recuerdan los igualmente humildes templos que se
encuentran en los pequenos pueblos de Espana. Las cos-
tumbres, la musica tradicional y popular, la lengua que
se usa, una interesante mezcla del idioma antiguo de
15 Espana y de expresiones modernas inglesas, y hasta el
clima y el cielo alto y azul — todo me habla de la madre
patria. — Y la buena senora volvio a suspirar.
— Despues de los tiempos de Diego de Vargas, <j que
le paso a la colonia de Santa Fe ? — pregunto Pepe a
20 don Ramon.
— Pues, esta region siguio siendo posesion espanola
por mas de un siglo. Luego, cuando Mejico consiguio
su independencia de la madre patria en 1821 continuo
floreciendo Santa Fe, entonces como posesion mejicana.
170
LA SANTA FE MODERNA 171
En 1846, durante la guerra con Mejico, el general Kearney 25
ocupo la ciudad.
Cuando en 1848, por el tratado de Guadalupe-Hidalgo,
Mejico cedio este inmenso territorio a los Estados Unidos,
cambio rapidamente el estado de las cosas. Penetro en
el sudoeste el comercio yanqui. San Luis de Misuri era 30
entonces el centro de donde venia la mayor parte de los
articulos usados en esta region. El « Camino de Santa
Fe, » es decir, el « Santa Fe Trail, » que terminaba en la
plaza central de esta ciudad, credo en importancia.
Durante la guerra civil en Norte America, ocurrieron 35
batallas en Nuevo Mejico entre los soldados del norte
y los del sur. Salieron victoriosos los del norte. Aumen-
taronse la fama y los negocios de Santa Fe. Con la
llegada del ferrocarril a la region en 1880, no paso la
linea principal por Santa Fe, siendo la estacion mas cer- 40
cana la de Lamy. Un ramal se construyo que terminaba
en la ciudad, pero esta ahora casi abandonado. Por eso,
vinimos de Lamy en un autobus de ferrocarril, como
vosotros recordais.
En el siglo XX el mundo empezo a darse cuenta de 45
los aspectos pintorescos de Santa Fe, de su bello clima
y su interns historico. Tiene importancia ahora por ser
un centro para turistas y para los que quieren y pueden
llevar una vida tranquila. Aqui residen pintores, escri-
tores y estudiantes de la historia del hombre primitivo, 50
cuyas casas prehistoricas, cortadas en las rocas, pueden
estudiarse en varias partes de esta region.
— SI, aqui existen cosas sumamente pintorescas para
el pintor y el escritor — dijo Rosa. — Y eso lo sabemos
por los hermosos cuadros que vimos en Taos, donde hay 55
172 QUINITO EN AMERICA
toda una colonia de pintores famosos. Y sin duda las
fiestas de septiembre en Santa Fe son encantadoras, tam-
bien los bailes de los indios en sus pueblos.
— En 1940 — dijo don Ramon — se celebro en todo el
60 estado de Nuevo Mejico el Cuarto Centenario de Coro-
nado, el cual atrajo a miles de turistas. For primera vez
supo entonces un gran niimero de norteamericanos la
importancia que habia tenido esta region espanola del
sudoeste en la historia y desarrollo de los Estados Unidos.
VOCABULARIO
aspecto m. aspect nostalgia f . homesickness
aumentar(se) to increase orquesta f . orchestra
cercano, -a near by, near penetrar (en) to penetrate
clima m. climate pintor m. painter
cortar to cut prehistorico, -a prehistoric
cuadro m. picture primitive, -a primitive
cuenta f. account ramal m. branch line
desarrollo m. development rincon m. corner
escritor m, writer roca f . rock
estudiante m. and f. student sumamente highly
fonda f. inn templo m. temple
igualmente likewise, equally victorioso, ~a victorious
negocio m. business; business
house
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a la luz de la luna in the moon- darse cuenta de to realize, take
light into account
llevar una vida to lead a life
La Fonda of Santa Fe is a hotel built in Mexican-Spanish style;
it is the center of tourist life in the little city. It is also a meeting-
place for the many artists and writers who live in or near Santa Fe.
The hotel is the property of the Atchison, Topeka and Santa Fe
LA SANTA FE MODERNA 173
Railway, whose nearest station is Lamy, some twenty miles to the
south. Motor buses of the railway company bring passengers from
Lamy to Santa Fe over an excellent highway.
El Camino de Santa Fe, the Santa Fe Trail, was a rough but much
used road that extended into the southwest from Kansas, and over
it passed in the early days caravans of wagons loaded with goods
used in commerce with a scantily-populated but fast-developing
area. These caravans were often accompanied by armed men to
protect them against Indian raids. When New Mexico became
United States territory, Santa Fe, the end of the Trail, underwent
great changes, for commerce with the East was now unrestricted,
whereas before most of the trading had to be done with Mexico.
The old plaza in the center of Santa Fe, still the heart of the city,
was an exceedingly busy spot. Here met Spanish and Mexican
settlers, Indians, u Yankee" traders and cattlemen. The sleepy old
city quickly took on an aspect of activity hitherto quite unknown
to it. Parts of U S. highways 85 and 87 pass over or near the old
Trail and there are places where still may be seen the deep ruts
made in the prairie by the old wagon wheels.
Santa Fe has become a tourist center of much interest, especially
for those who follow the "Indian Detour" or trip organized by the
Santa Fe Railway, which includes visits to the Indian Pueblos and
to cave dwellings of prehistoric man. In or near Santa Fe reside
cr have resided numerous writers, such as Ernest Thompson Seton,
Witter Bynner, Mary Austin, Eugene Manlove Rhodes, Oliver
Lafarge, Charles F. Lummis, Stanley Vestal, Ruth Laughlin and
Alice Corbin — all of whom have written of the attractions of the
land of "sun, silence and adobe." There are also many artists who
make their homes, at least for part of the year, in or near the city.
The New Mexico State Museum of Art, located near the old Palace
of the Governors, has an interesting collection of paintings by artists
resident in or near Santa Fe.
In Taos, the small city built for white people near the ancient
Indian pueblo of Taos (today an Indian reservation), many artists of
considerable renown reside or have resided: Ernest Blumenschein,
Herbert Dunton, Leon Gaspard, J. H. Sharp, Bert Phillips, Walter
174 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Ufer and many others. Here also lives the writer Mabel Dodge
Luhan (Lujan), who has produced many books on New Mexican life
and whose husband is one of the chief Indians of the Taos reservation.
The English writer, David H. Lawrence, author of "The Plumed
Serpent," visited at the home of Mrs. Luhan some years ago.
The Indian dances held in the various pueblos are still held at
different periods of the year, mostly in the spring, summer and early
fall. For instance, corn dances are held at San Felipe in May,
at Taos in June, at Cochiti, Santa Clara and Santo Domingo in July.
Corn dances, buffalo dances and those of other types, as well as
other pagan rites, are performed as they were 500 or more years ago.
Prehistoric cave dwellings cut in the side of cliffs are found in
the canyon of Rito de los Frijoles (Little River of the Beans) and in
other canyons. The Rockefeller Laboratory of Anthropology, in
the outskirts of Santa Fe, contains a remarkable collection of pre-
historic pottery, jewelry and other objects, and is a center for gradu-
ate students of archeology.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. En el patio de « La Fonda » nuestros viajeros se sentaban
a — . 2. Les gustaba oir alii — . 3. Dona Ana dijo que este
hotel era — . 4. Ella quedaba — con el ambiente espanol de
esta fonda. 5. Hasta el cielo azul le recordaba — . 6. Des-
pues de ser una posesion mejicana, Santa Fe continue — .
7. Al ser cedido NuevoMejico a los Estados Unidos, cambio — .
8. El comercio yanqui — . 9. Durante la guerra civil de los
Estados Unidos, salieron victoriosos en Nuevo Mejico — .
10. Se llama — la estacion mas cercana del ferrocarril. 1 1. Se
va de esta estacion a Santa Fe en — . 12. En el siglo XX el
mundo empezo a — . 13. Aqui residen hoy — . 14. Cerca
de Santa Fe pueden estudiarse — . 15. En Taos existe una
colonia de — . 16. Los bailes indios que se celebran en los
pueblos — .
LA SANTA FE MODERNA 175
II. Replace the English words of the following sentences
with suitable Spanish words :
i. i What happened a la colonia de Santa Fe ? 2. 7 realize
that (de que) los aspectos de la vida nuevomejicana son in-
teresantes. 3. Estamos seated in the moonlight. 4. You have
led siempre una vida tranquila. 5. Estas misiones recall los
humildes templos espanoles. 6. La senora sighed again from
homesickness. 7. Mejico obtained su independencia. 8. We
like las canciones de Espaiia.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Quedo encantado. 7 am delighted. Siguen bien con-
servadas las iglesias. The churches continue to be (are stilt)
well preserved. Estoy olvidado de todos. 7 am forgotten by all.
The past participle (which agrees like an adjective with
the subject of the sentence) may be used with the same aux-
iliaries that are employed with the gerund (see page 70) to
form what is sometimes called the " apparent passive.'7 (The
real passive is formed with ser + past participle. See page
117.) In such constructions the past participle indicates the
condition or state of the subject as the result of action pre-
viously exerted upon it, and is in effect an adjective. (See
page 104.)
Estar, quedar, seguir, andar, venir and ir are the verbs
which are most frequently used this way with past participles.
2. El cuarto centenario. The fourth centenary.
Let us review the ordinal numerals. From first to tenth
they are :
primero (primer) first sexto sixth
segundo second septimo seventh
tercero (tercer) third octavo eighth
cuarto fourth noveno ninth
quinto fifth decimo tenth
176 QUINITO EN AMERICA
These ordinals, like any other adjective, must agree in
gender and number with the noun they modify and usually
precede that noun.
When do primero and tercero drop the final o?
For eleventh to twentieth, the ordinal numerals may be
found on pages 540-541.
But ordinals above decimo are little used. Instead, it is
a common practice to use a cardinal numeral after the noun :
Capitulo veinte y tres, chapter twenty-three; pagina treinta y
siete, page thirty-seven; el siglo XX (veinte), tlic twentieth
century.
In the titles of kings, queens, popes and the like, ordinals
are used up to and (usually) including tenth. After that,
cardinals are used as for chapters and pages.
Alfonso 1° or I (primero), Alphonso the First; Carlos Quinto
or V (quinto), Charles the Fifth; Isabel lla or II (segundd),
Isabel the Second; Alfonso XII (doce), Alphonso the Twelfth.
3. Review. Pregunto Pepe a don Ramon, Pepe asked don
Ramon.
Certain verbs use the preposition a before a noun denoting
a definite person from whom a question is asked or a thing
is requested, taken or bought. The noun, or its corresponding
pronoun, is an indirect object. The most frequently used
of such verbs are preguntar, to ask; pedir (i), to ask for, re-
quest, beg, entreat; guitar, to remove, take from; comprar, to
buy.
Further examples: Pido un dolar a mi tio, I request a dollar
from my uncle. Quitamos el sombrero al muchacho, we take
the hat of the boy, we take of the boy's hat. Pregunta el profesor
la leccion a Pedro, the teacher questions Peter on the lesson.
Compramos la manta al vendedor, we buy the blanket from
the seller.
Naturally, an indirect object pronoun replaces the indirect
LA SANTA FE MODERNA 177
object noun in such sentences: Le pido un dolar. Le quitamos
el sombrero.
I. Translate into English the following sentences:
i. Las senoras quedaron sorprendidas. 2. Estan muy ad-
mirados. 3. Los indios siguen vencidos. 4. Yo ando muy
ocupado. 5. Vienen bastante atropellados. 6. Vamos un
poco desilusionados.
II. El domingo es el primer dia de la semana. Give similar
sentences for the remaining days of the week.
III. Say and write out entirely in Spanish words the follow-
ing phrases :
i. Peter III. 2. Joseph X. 3. Anna II. 4. Charles VIII.
5. John XV. 6. Mary XII. 7. En el siglo XVI. 8. On the
forty-ninth page. 9. In the seventy-fifth chapter. 10. In
the sixteenth line.
IV. Replace the nouns of the following sentences with suit-
able pronouns:
i. Pedimos el dinero al viajero. 2. No estoy pidiendo el
libro al nino. 3. Quiten Vds. las flores al indio. 4. Vamos
a comprar el cuadro al pin tor. 5. Me preguntan la hora.
6. No queremos pedir el burro al ranchero. 7. Compren Vds.
las ovejas al senor.
V. Say and write in Spanish:
i. They take off John's hat. 2. They take off his hat.
3. She asked me what time it was (la hord). 4. She asked
me for a book. 5. I have asked Pedro for a picture. 6. I
have asked him for a picture. 7. Don't ask anything from
anyone. 8. Ask him what he says. 9. They bought it from
me. 10. Buy (Vd.) it from her.
CAPlTULO XXIV
FRAY MARCOS DE NIZA
Otra vez en el tren, con rumbo a Arizona, pasaron
nuestros viajeros por la ciudad de Albuquerque, y Rosa
pregunto a su tio:
— <; De donde viene el nombre de esta ciudad ? Me
5 suena muy espanol.
— Y lo es — respondio don Ramon. — Fue fundada
la poblacion en 1706 y el nombre honra al duque de
Albuquerque, uno de los virreyes de Mejico. Es una
ciudad llena de recuerdos de sus fundadores espanoles.
10 — Ahora, <i no quieres contarnos mas acerca de Fray
Marcos de Niza y sus esfuerzos por descubrir las « Siete
Ciudades de Cibola » ? — dijo Pepe.
— Con gusto, si vosotros me lo pedis — con test 6 el
tio. — Pues, cuando Cabeza de Vaca y Andres Dorantes
15 se excusaron de ir en busca de las fabulosas riquezas de
esas « ciudades, » el virrey, Antonio de Mendoza, pidio
a los franciscanos que organizasen tal expedition. Fray
Marcos de Niza, uno de los jefes de la orden, consintio
en hacer lo que deseaba el virrey. En el mes de marzo
20 de 1539 salio de la capital el grupo de exploradores.
Con ellos iba de guia el famoso Estebanico el Moro,
que habia sido esclavo de Dorantes y uno de los sobrevi-
vientes de la odisea de Cabeza de Vaca. Estebanico
sabia hablar varios idiomas indios e iba ataviado con
25 plumas en los brazos y en las piernas. En la mano llevaba
178
FRAY MARCOS DE NIZA 179
una calabaza que hacfa sonar para atraer e impresionar
a los indios. Fingia poder curarles sus enfermedades solo
con tocarles con la mano. Los salvajes le tenian por un
dios.
A los pocos dias de andar, Fray Marcos envio a Este- 30
banico a reconocer el terreno por donde iban a pasar.
Esto fue precisamente lo que deseaba el moro. Nunca
despues le vio el fraile, que no podia alcanzarle.
Le gustaba mucho a Estebanico presentarse ante los
indios, que quedaban asombrados al verle y le daban 35
cualquier cosa que les pidiera: sus anillos y pulseras de
plata y las turquesas y otras piedras que poseian.
Todos los dias Estebanico enviaba un mensajero a Fray
Marcos para decirle que era cierto que hacia adelante se
encontraba la tierra que buscaban. Por fin, despues de 40
haber recorrido el hoy estado de Arizona, llego el moro a
los pueblos de los indios zuiii. Pero ellos, en vez de
recibirle como a un dios, mataron a Estebanico y a casi
todos los 300 indios amigos que le acompafiaban. Se
escaparon tres de estos y volvieron adonde estaba Fray 45
Marcos y le contaron lo que habia ocurrido.
El fraile llego cerca del pueblo, y desde lo mas alto de
un cerro miro abajo a la muy deseada ciudad de Cibola,
un pueblo populoso en que hubiera sido peligroso entrar,
porque estos salvajes eran muy feroces. 50
Por eso el buen fraile decidio volver de prisa a Mejico,
« con mas miedo que alimentos. » Conto a don Antonio
de Mendoza el fracaso de su viaje.
Murio Fray Marcos en la capital de Mejico en 1558.
Antes de venir a Mejico habia trabajado en las misiones 55
del Peru y Nicaragua.
180 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
adelante on, ahead, forward fundador m. founder
asombrar to astonish, amaze impresionar to impress
ataviar to dress up, deck out, adorn mensajero m. messenger
calabaza f . gourd, squash miedo m. fear
cerro m. hill orden f . order, brotherhood; m.
consentir (fe, i) to consent order, command
curar to cure peligroso, -a dangerous
duque m. duke pluma f . feather
esfuerzo m. effort populoso, -a populous
fingir (jo) to feign, pretend terreno m. land, terrain
fracaso m. failure turquesa f . turquoise
NOTES: The following words have in this chapter English equiva-
lents slightly different from those previously learned: cierto, -a,
true, as well as certain; reconocer, to reconnoitre, scout, as well as to
recognize; salvaje, m. savage, as well as the adjective wild; tocar, to
touch, as well as to play (a musical instrument).
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a los pocos dias de andar after a que les pidiera that he asked of
few days' journeying them
consentir en to consent to que organizasen that they should
de guia as guide organize
hacia adelante on ahead tener por to regard as
hubiera sido would have been
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. El nombre de Albuquerque le sono a Rosa muy f ranees.
2. El nombre de esta ciudad no honra a nadie. 3. Albu-
querque no tiene recuerdos de sus fundadores. 4. Cabeza de
Vaca y Dorantes consintieron en organizar una expedicion.
5. Fray Marcos de Niza salio en busca de las ciudades fabu-
FRAY MARCOS DE NIZA 181
losas. 6. Iba de guia en la expedition el famoso Estebanico.
7. Este moro iba ataviado con plumas en la cabeza. 8. Hacia
sonar una calabaza para dar miedo a los indios. 9. Fingia
curar las enfermedades con tocar a los indios con la calabaza.
10. Despues de salir Estebanico a reconocer el terreno, no
volvio el fraile a verle. n. Los indios le daban al moro
mantas y jarros. 12. Los indios zuni dieron muerte a Este-
banico. 13. Fray Marcos de Niza creyo que era peligroso
entrar en el pueblo zuni. 14. Volvio de prisa a Mejico con
miedo. 15. Conto al virrey el exito de la expedition.
II. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1 . Ella no consiente en dar- i . She does not — .
noslo.
2. Me tenian por un esclavo. 2. They — slave.
3. El mensajero siguio hacia 3. The messenger continued
adelante. — .
4. El moro nos sirvio de guia. 4. The Moor — .
5. Hubiera sido dificil con- 5. — hard to go on.
tinuar.
6. A un mes de viajar me 6. — I felt tired,
senti cansado.
7. Llevabamos en la mano 7. We carried — .
una pluma.
III. What word in each of the following lines does not be-
long there ?
1. duque, capitdn, mensajero, virrey, gobernador.
2. fundador, calabaza, descubridor, explorador, poblador.
3. tierra, terreno, territorio, campo, religion, region.
4. anillo, lengua, lenguaje, idioma.
5. escribir, firmar, cortar, leer, traducir.
6. documento, libro, periodico, orquesta, carta, novela.
7. huir, honrar, correr, escaparse, andar, marchar.
182 QUINITO EN AMERICA
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Me envia un documento. He sends me a document.
Many verbs ending in -far stress and accent the i in those
forms in which vowel-changing verbs of the first conjugation
change the stem vowel (four forms in the present indicative
and two in the polite imperative). Some verbs in -iar do
not do this: estudiar, to study; pronunciar, to pronounce;
cambiar, to change.
For verbs ending in -uar, see page 162.
2. Tres de estos. Three of these, three of the latter.
£stos is a demonstrative pronoun. The demonstrative
pronouns have the same forms as the demonstrative adjec-
tives (see page no), except that the former bear a written
accent over the vowel of the stressed syllables.
As pronouns they replace and represent nouns, but cannot
modify nouns as do the demonstrative adjectives.
For the neuter demonstrative pronouns, referring to an idea
or statement, never to a thing or person, see page no.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
este (estd), this one, this one near me, the latter; estos (estas),
these, the ones near me, the latter.
ese (esa), that one, the one near you; esos (esas), those,
the ones near you.
aquel (aquella), that one, the one yonder, the former; aquellos
(aquellas), those, the ones yonder, the former.
In expressing former and latter, the English order is AB AB ;
but in Spanish it is ABBA, that is, latter is referred to before
former: Juan y Pedro son dos amigos mios. £ste es pintor
y aquel es escritor. The latter (Pedro) is a painter, and the
former (Juan) is a writer.
FRAY MARCOS DE NIZA 183
3. Llevaba en la mano. He carried in his hand.
The definite article, instead of the possessive adjective, is
used in Spanish before the name of a part of the body or cloth-
ing when there is no doubt as to who is its possessor.
The possessor is usually made clear, when necessary, by using
the corresponding indirect object noun or pronoun (or both)
to indicate the possessor. For example: me corto la mano,
he cut my hand; le corte a Juan la mono, I cut John's hand;
le corte a el la mano, I cut his hand; les corte a ellas la mano,
I cut their hands.
Nouns so used are in the singular or plural according to
whether the part of the body or clothing is usually possessed
or used in the singular or plural: le quite el sombrero, I took
of his hat; les quite el sombrero, I took off their hats.
In reflexive verbs, especially those referring to donning and
removing an article of wearing apparel, such as ponerse, to
put on (to oneself) and quitarse, to take off (of oneself), the re-
flexive pronoun is an indirect object pronoun. This reflexive
indirect object pronoun and the definite article preceding the
noun are together equivalent to a possessive adjective in Eng-
lish. Examples:
Me pongo el sombrero, I put on (to myself) my hat. Ellos
se ponen el sombrero, they put on their hats. Vd. se quita
los guantes, you take off (from yourself) your gloves.
I. Translate into English the following sentences:
i. No nos las envian. 2. Enviemelo Vd. 3. ^ Se lo envian
Yds. a ella? 4. No nos la envien Yds. 5. Aqui tiene Vd.
dos ninas; esta es mas bella que esa. 6. Una senorita y
su madre han llegado. Esta nacio en Espana; aquella nacio
en los Estados Unidos. 7. Estas son casas de adobe, pero
aquellas son de madera. 8. Esto parece verdad. 9. For eso
yo lo creo. 10. Ellos me tocaron con la mano. n. Me
184 QUINITO EN AMERICA
pondre la chaqueta. 12. Pongase Vd. el sombrero. 13. Me
quitaron el anillo. 14. Me quite la pulsera. 15. Nomedieron
la mano. 16. Aqui hay dos grupos de sefiores. £stos son
espanoles, aquellos son mejicanos.
II. Say and write in Spanish:
i. Don't send (Vd.) us these flowers. 2. Send us those
(yonder). 3. I send you (pol. sing.) these (referring to flowers).
4. They study those (near you; referring to books). 5. This
one (a hill) is higher than that one (yonder). 6. Maria and
Josefina are sisters; the latter is as tall as the former. 7. Shake
(Vd.) hands with me. 8. Don't shake hands with her. 9. He
is putting on his jacket. 10. They were putting on their
hats. ii. Do not take off (Vd.) your gloves. 12. He was
dressed up with feathers on his arms.
III. Make the following sentences negative:
i. Tienen algo en la mano. 2. Siempre me da Vd. la mano.
3. Leen algunos libros. 4. Pongase Vd. el anillo. 5. Quitense
Vds. la chaqueta. 6. Abra Vd. la boca. 7. Abrala Vd.
8. Cierre Vd. los ojos. 9. Cierrelos Vd. 10. Toquele Vd.
a ella la cabeza. n. Pongalo Vd. en el bolsillo. 12. Me puse
los guantes. 13. Me los puse. 14. Denme Vds. la mano.
15. Denmela Vds.
CUARTA LECCION DE REPASO
VOCABULARIO
I. Give the Spanish for the English words:
contrary
the prison
the pronuncia-
to effect
the religion
exactly
tion
the missionary
to sample
the ranch
the court
to derive
the matter
the change
to rest
the calaboose
the rancher
the lasso
the canyon
the origin
the round-up
to prove to be
to surrender
New Mexican
the descendant
unknown
disappointed
to excuse
future
to sign
to publish
to persuade
historic
the plan
to continue
the cradle
to flourish
the play
to dance
the document
interminable
the silver
the novel
the manner
the custom
to dress
blond
the rebel
charming
the god
the object
traditional
to preserve
the business
near
the aspect
the corner
the painter
likewise
highly
the inn
the hill
the orchestra
to increase
to cut
the order
the feather
to dress up
the fear
to consent
the illness
to impress
dangerous
to use
to cure
to amaze
own
public
the window
to touch
the example
the southwest
cruel
II. Give the English for the Spanish words:
el tamal la cria el cultivo el recuerdo
la tortilla el oficio el f raile la obra
la matanza el coyote el riego franciscano
185
186
QUINITO EN AMERICA
bronco
el arroyo
la laguna
la reata
la reconquista
actual
el lenguaje
el juzgado
las expensas
fabuloso
trasladar
el virrey
el adobe
la ceramica
reemplazar
la manufactura
huir
la pulsera
la lana
el jarro
el tejido
el anillo
primitivo
la procesion
la cuenta
el cuadro
penetrar
el ramal
el clima
el templo
el desarrollo
la nostalgia
el estudiante
la roca
victorioso
el escritor
el terreno
el f racaso
el mensajero
prehistoric©
el fundador
populoso
el esfuerzo
el orden
la turquesa
el duque
adelante
fingir
cierto
reconocer
el salvaje
la calabaza
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
I. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. Llegue a los pocos meses i. I arrived — traveling,
de viajar.
2. Le tenemos por nuestro 2. We — our friend,
amigo.
3. Consintieron en condu- 3. — lead me.
cirme.
4. Marcho siempre hacia 4. He always marched — .
adelante.
5. No servira de guia. 5. He will not — .
6. Ella llevaba una vida 6. She — .
tranquila.
7. Vd. no se da cuenta de lo 7. You do not — what this
que significa esto.
8. Lo vimos a la luz de la
means.
8. We saw it — .
luna.
9 Vd. se viste al modo de 9. You — .
los ingleses.
LECCI6N DE REPASO 187
10. Se ocupaba en la manu- 10. He — the manufacture of
factura de anillos. rings.
11. Se celebro aqui cerca la n. The meeting — .
reunion.
12. Ellos siguen siendo peli- 12. They — dangerous,
grosos.
II. Use in complete Spanish sentences the following idioms:
i. nada de riquezas. 2. cruel con. 3. servir para. 4. al
contrario. 5. hacia atras. 6. vamos (let's go). 7. oir decir
a una persona.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
I. In the following sentences replace all direct and indirect
object nouns with pronouns. Make clear the meaning of se
when it occurs.
i. Me dieron la lana. 2. Nos ofrecio los jarros. 3. Te
escribi la carta. 4. Os prometen el lazo. 5. Presentaron el
documento al virrey. 6. Dijeron la palabra a los escritores.
7. Han pedido el favor al duque. 8. Vamos a dar los cuadros
al ranchero. 9. Sigue ofreciendome los anillos. 10. Estaban
comprando las pulseras a los viajeros. 1 1 . No podemos quitar
la carne a los perros. 12. Abrame Vd. la puerta. 13. No
ofrezcan Yds. las tortillas a los mensajeros. 14. No nos de
Vd. la ceramica.
II. Use the present tense of saber or poder, as the case
demands, in the blanks of the following sentences:
i. Este pequeno nino no — leer. 2. Un hombre ciego no
— leer un periodico. 3. <i No — Vds. acompaiiarme ? 4. £ —
Vd. conducir el automovil ? 5. Si, pero hoy no — conducirlo,
porque estoy enfermo.
188 QUINITO EN AMERICA
III. Use, in the tense indicated, the proper form of the
verbs in italics :
i. Vd. continuar (present) leyendolo. 2. Ella nos lo enviar
(present). 3. Ellos no lo estudiar (present). 4. Yo no lo
cambiar (present). 5. Yo lo conducir (present). 6. Yo lo
conducir (preterite). 7. Ellos me conducir (preterite).
IV. Say and write entirely in Spanish:
i. Seguimos charmed. 2. La carta estaba signed. 3. El
venia muy impressed. 4. El numero queda increased. 5. Ella
viene mas cansada que ever. 6. Es mas rico que anyone.
7. Esta turquesa es mas bella que any otra. 8. i What es
la leccion para hoy ? 9. i What es un coyote ? 10. / How
much ceramica tiene Vd. ! n. / How much plata tiene Vd. !
12. Le ofrezco a Vd. all the oro que tengo. 13. Y all the
libros que Vd. ha visto. 14. i Where (to) van ellos? 15. El
pais where (to where) vamos es nuevo para nosotros. 16. La
manera in which lo hace me sorprende.
V. Replace the English words with proper Spanish words:
i. Yo no am worth nothing. 2. Este anillo de oro will be
worth mucho. 3. Los conquistadores fled. 4. Vd. ha sido
muy cruel to them. 5. ^ Que did you have en la mano ? 6. Me
dieron a silver ring. 7. El profesor put on his sombrero y his
gloves (guantes). 8. Dijo que nosotros no lo would have,
g. i What dia es este ?
VI. Answer the following questions, using in the answer
the relative adverb or pronoun which is used as an interroga-
tive adverb in the question :
i. <; Adonde va Vd. ? 2. <j Cuando lo vera Vd. ? 3. <> Como
loharaVd. ? 4. i Donde vive Vd. ? 5. ± For que lo cree Vd. ?
6. i Cuanto me da Vd. ? 7. <> Cuantos libros hay aqui ?
LECCION DE REPASO 189
VII. Say and write in Spanish:
i. Alfonso the First. 2. Charles the Fifth. 3. John the
Tenth. 4. Peter the Third. 5. The twenty-third page (pa-
gina). 6. The fifteenth chapter. 7. The twentieth house.
VIII. Use in the blanks of the following sentences the
present tense in the correct forms of quitarse, to take off, and
ponerse, to put on:
i. Vd. — el sombrero. 2. Pedro — la chaqueta. 3. Los
ninos quieren — los guantes (gloves). 4. No — Vds. el som-
brero (command). 5. — Vds. la chaqueta (command).
IX. Replace the English words with proper Spanish words:
i. This vaca es mejor que that one (yonder). 2. That one
(near you) es mas grande que this one. 3. Aquel arbol es mas
alto que these. 4. El arbol es mas grande que la casa; the
latter es blanca, the former es verde. 5. These ninos son mas
rubios que those (yonder).
X. Put se lo at the proper place in each of the following
sentences. Make clear some special meaning of se in each
case.
i. Vds. ofrecen. 2. Ella presento. 3. Nosotros pedimos.
4. Vds. quitaron. 5. Envien Vds. 6. No envien Vds.
7. Vamos a presentar. 8. Quieren enviar.
CAPlTULO XXV
EL GRAN CANON
— Todo viajero que venga a los Estados Unidos debe
visitar el Gran Canon del Colorado — dijo don Ramon.
— Es una de las maravillas naturales mas estupendas del
mundo. Lo descubrio un espanol, el valiente explorador
s espanol Lopez de Cardenas.
— Y nosotros quisi£ramos mucho verlo — respondio
Quinito. — Serd para nosotros una satisfaction enorme
visitar el gran tajo natural que vieron ojos espanoles nada
menos que tres siglos antes de verlo los norteamericanos
10 blancos.
— En muchas cosas fueron los espanoles los primeros
en este continente — dijo don Ramon. — Bartolome
Colon fundo en 1496 a Santo Domingo en La Espanola
(hoy dia Haiti y la Repiiblica Dominicana), la primera
15 poblacion permanente de America. En 1509 Ponce de
Leon fundo a Caparra en la isla de Puerto Rico, poblacion
que fu6 abandonada en 1511 y trasladada a donde esta
hoy San Juan. Santiago de Cuba fu6 establecido por
Diego Velasquez en 1514. La Habana, fundada primero
20 en 1519, fu6 restablecida en 1538 por Fernando de Portola.
Cort£s salio de Cuba para conquistar a MSjico y fundo
en 1519 lo que es hoy Veracruz, primera poblacion europea
establecida en el continente americano, y en 1521 tomo
a Tenochtitldn y llamo a la gran ciudad azteca, M6jico.
190
EL GRAN CAfrON 191
Desde Santo Domingo, Santiago y la Habana, como 25
puntos de partida, salieron las muchas expediciones ex-
ploradoras y conquistadoras de los siglos XV y XVI,
las que extendieron los dominios de Espaiia por Mejico,
el sur de los Estados Unidos, Centre America y el norte
y oeste de Sud America. Luego, desde Mejico y Panama, 30
fundada en 1519 por Pedro Arias de Avila, iban partiendo
en el siglo XVII oleada tras oleada de descubridores y
pobladores espanoles. Nunca antes ni despues se vio en
la historia del mundo tanto espiritu emprendedor como el
que demostro la nation espanola en aquellos tiempos ya 35
lejanos.
— Y todo eso ocurrio mucho antes de llegar los Pere-
grinos ingleses, en 1620, a Plymouth en la costa nordeste
de Norte America — dijo Quinito.
Bajaron del tren casi al borde del Gran Canon y que- 40
daron profundamente emocionados y maravillados ante
lo que veian. Muy abajo vieron las aguas del rio Colo-
rado, que durante siglos prehistoricos habian cortado este
profundo tajo en las rocas coloradas. La belleza y la
grandeza de esta vista los dejaron sin palabras para ex- 4S
presarse.
Todos menos dona Ana bajaron, montados en mulas
fuertes, por la ladera del tajo y llegaron hasta las orillas
del rio. Luego subieron, cansados y muy impresionados.
Creyeron haber visto una gran maravilla. 50
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
que venga who comes, may come
quisieramos we would like, should like
192 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
belleza f . beauly oleada f . wave, surge
borde m. edge, verge partida f . departure
Colorado, -a red, colored peregrine m. pilgrim
demostrar (ue) to show, demon- permanente permanent
strate profundamente deeply, profoundly
dominio m. dominion profundo, -a deep, profound
emprendedor, -ora enterprising punto m. point
espiritu m. spirit restablecer (zco) to re-establish
estupendo, -a stupendous satisfaction f . satisfaction
lad era f . side, slope tajo m. gorge, cut
maravilla f . wonder, marvel vista f . view
nordeste m. northeast
NOTES: explorador, -ora and conquistador, -ora are used in this
chapter as adjectives, exploring and conquering. Menos is used as a
preposition, except.
NOMBRES PROPIOS
El Gran Candn del Colorado may well be called one of the wonders
of the world. Its walls are from 4000 to 6500 feet high. The canyon
was first surveyed by John Wesley Powell, beginning with his expe-
dition of 1869. The first white man to look upon this great chasm,
worn so deep in the earth's surface by ages of eroding action by the
Colorado River, was Lopez de Cardenas, one of Coronado's lieu-
tenants. (See Chapter XXI.) He discovered the canyon in the fall
of 1540, shortly before the Coronado expedition went into winter
quarters near the present site of Bernalillo, north of Albuquerque.
An account of the discovery was written by Castaneda, historian
of the expedition.
Bartolome Coldn (1445-1515), Bartholomew Columbus, was an
older brother of Christopher. He was in England trying to secure
for his brother aid from Henry VII when the discoverer sailed on
his first trip on August 3, 1492. Bartholomew returned to Spain in
1493 a^ter his brother had left on his second voyage. He followed
with a supply fleet and reached Isabel, on the northern shore of
EL GRAN CANON 193
La Espanola, or the island of Haiti, in June, 1493. Christopher made
him governor of the island. He held that post from 1496 to 1498.
He founded Santo Domingo, on the southern coast, in 1496 and
accompanied his more famous brother on the fourth voyage (1502-
1504), and in 1509 he went with Diego, Christopher's son, again
to La Espanola and there he died. He was of much help to his
brother, for he was an able leader.
La Espanola (or Hispaniola) was the name given by Columbus to
the island which today contains the Dominican Republic and Haiti.
It was discovered by him in 1492, and on it he founded this first
European city of the New World, calling it Isabel in honor of Queen
Isabel. This little colony was removed by Bartholomew to Santo
Domingo in 1496.
Diego Velasquez (1465-1524) went to La Espanola with Chris-
topher Columbus in 1493. There he was one of the leaders of the
colony. In 1511 he was sent by Diego Colon, son of the admiral and
heir to the privileges of his father's contract with the Catholic
Sovereigns, to conquer and govern Cuba. He was in charge of
granting permission to explorers who wished to set forth from Cuba
on expeditions. It was he who sanctioned the expedition of Cortes
to Mexico and then later sent Panfilo de Narvaez (see page 124) to
arrest and bring back Cortes because of disobedience to orders.
He is said to have died of disappointment over his failure to share
in the conquest of Mexico.
Pedro Arias de Avila (or Pedrarias, 1442-1531), after serving in
the wars against the Moors in Spain and Africa, was sent in 1514
with a large squadron and 1500 men to Darien on the Isthmus of
Panama to be governor of Castilla del Oro. Vasco Nunez de Balboa,
who had been elected head of the colony, was engaged in exploration
of the region. He yielded leadership to Pedrarias, but the latter
soon imprisoned Balboa, had him tried, condemned and executed.
In 1519 he founded the city of Panama and from that place en-
couraged the expeditions of Pizarro and Almagro. In 1526, after
many complaints had been made of his cruelty, he was sent to be
the first governor of Nicaragua. There he died a few years later.
Veracruz is usually written Vera Cruz in English. Near its present
194 QUINITO EN AMERICA
site on the eastern coast of Mexico Cortes founded the town of
Villa Rica, which later was transferred to the place where Veracruz
has stood ever since. Thus was founded, in April, 1519, the first
European town in continental America.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <i Que es el Gran Canon del Colorado? 2. £ Que ojos
vieron primero este gran tajo natural? 3. <[ Cual fue la pri-
mera poblacion permanente del Nuevo Mundo ? 4. ^ Quien
la fundo? 5. <; Como se llamo la primera poblacion que se
fundo ? 6. ^ Quien establccio a Santiago de Cuba ? 7. <i Quien
fue el fundador de Veracruz ? 8. <J Como se llamaba la capital
de los aztecas al llegar Cortes ante la ciudad ? 9. d Cuales
fueron algunos de los puntos de partida de donde salieron ex-
pediciones exploradoras ? 10. £ Que espiritu demostraron los
espanoles de los siglos XV y XVI ? 1 1. <[ En que afio llegaron
los Peregrines ingleses al Nuevo Mundo? 12. £ Como que-
daron los turistas al mirar abajo en el Canon? 13. d Que
corto este tajo en las rocas coloradas ? 14. £ Quienes del
grupo bajaron a las orillas del rio Colorado ?
II. Select from the second column words which are an-
tonyms of the words in the first column :
partida acercarse
nordeste llegada
tajo quitarse
continuar seguro
conservar montafia
huir diferente
ponerse sudoeste
igual cesar
peligroso destmir
EL GRAN CANON 195
III. For each one of the following words give a Spanish
verb related in derivation and meaning:
partida; recuerdo; pronunciation; interminable; con-
quista; baile; encantador; desarrollo; cuenta; escritor;
estudiante; honor; fundador.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Antes de verlo los norteamericanos. Before the North
Americans' seeing it. Before the North Americans saw it.
Antes de lie gar los Peregrines. Before the Pilgrims' arrival.
Before the Pilgrims arrived.
We see in the above sentences how in Spanish an infinitive
phrase may have a subject. The English equivalent is usually
a finite verb with a subject.
More examples: Al verlo yo, on my seeing it, when I saw
it. Sin decir nada el muchacho, without the boy's saying any-
thing.
2. Creyeron haber visto una mara villa. They thought they
had seen a wonder.
After verbs of saying and believing, an infinitive, instead of
a finite verb, may be used, if and when both verbs have the
same subject.
Haber visto is the compound infinitive of the verb whose
infinitive is ver. Notice that it is formed by the infinitive
of the usual auxiliary verb haber, to have, followed by the
past participle. Haber hablado, to have spoken. Haber vivido,
to have lived. Haber dicho, to have said.
If a compound infinitive has a direct or indirect object
pronoun (or both), the latter follows and is affixed to haber:
Haberlo visto, to have seen it. Habernoslo dado, to have given
it to us.
196 QUINITO EN AMERICA
3. Una de las maravillas mas estupendas. One of the most
stupendous wonders.
In the above sentence we have an example of an adjective
in the superlative degree : Zas mas estupendas.
The comparative degree of an adjective is usually formed
by adding mas, more, for superiority, and menos, less, for
inferiority. The definite article is added to the comparative
to form the superlative.
rico, mas (menos) rico, el mas (menos) rico
rica, mas (menos) rica, la mas (menos) rica . , . 7 . ,
^ . \ * / N nch, richer, rich-
ncos, mas (menos) ncos, los mas (menos) I , . , ,
ricos -77 A • 7\
^ / x . ^ / x rich, least rich)
ncas, mas (menos) ncas, las mas (menos)
ricas
The noun modified by the superlative is usually placed be-
tween the definite article and mas (menos) ; la maravilla mas
estupenda del mundo, the most stupendous wonder in the world.
Usually the preposition de is used after a superlative to
express in. See example in the preceding paragraph.
A possessive adjective may replace the definite article in
forming the superlative : mi tio mas rico, my richest uncle.
If the superlative is in the predicate and refers only to the
subject, the definite article is omitted: Yo estaba mas con-
tento entonces, / was most content then.
Notice the following common irregular gradations:
bueno, mejor, el mejor, good, better, best
malo, peor, el peor, bad, worse, worst
( larger, largest
grande, mayor, el mayor, large i older, oldest
( greater, greatest
pequefio, menor, el menor, small ( smaller> smalkst
\ younger, youngest
EL GRAN CANON 197
Mejor, peor, mayor and menor usually precede the noun
they modify: el mejor estudiante de la close, the best student
in the class.
When grande and pequeno refer only to size, they are
usually regular in their gradations.
grande, mas grande, el mas grande, large, larger, largest
pequeno, mas pequeno, el mas pequeno, small, smaller,
smallest
I. Translate into English the following phrases and sen-
tences :
i. Despues de llegar mi sobrino. 2. Al salir mi hermano.
3. Antes de saberlo nadie. 4. Al decirnoslo, Juan quedo sen-
tado. 5. Sin ofrecernos el muchacho nada. 6. Partieron sin
haberme visto. 7. Creo haberlo leido antes. 8. Creimos ha-
berlas recibido. 9. Dicen ser mis amigos. 10. For haberlo
comprado el, no deseabamos pedirselo.
II. Use in the following sentences and in the superlative
degree the Spanish equivalent of the English adjective given
in parentheses:
i. (enormous) Este es canon del mundo. 2. (rich) Esta
senora es mujer del estado. 3. (easy) Nos gusta leccion del
libro. 4. (famous) Pedro tiene una de estatuas. 5. (good) El
fraile ha venido. 6. (bad) Aquella fue la tempestad que
vimos. 7. (large) Nueva York es ciudad de los Estados
Unidos.
III. Say and write in Spanish:
i. This tree is higher than that one (yonder). 2. You
seem sadder than she. 3. The gorge is deeper than the
valley. 4. This pueblo is nearer than the other. 5. This
journey is less dangerous than the first (one). 6. That young
lady is less charming than my sister.
CAPlTULO XXVI
CUENTOS ACERCA DE LOS MISIONEROS
En el tren los Gomez y el senor Segre volvieron a hablar
de las maravillas naturales de Norte America, de sus
grandes parques nacionales (que sentian no tener el tiempo
de visitar), de la enorme extension del pais y su riqueza
s natural, industrial y agricola.
— ; Qu6 pals m&s pequefio parece ser mi patria Espaiia,
comparada con los Estados Unidos ! — exclamo Dona
Ana. Y suspirando de nostalgia afiadio :
— j Y qu6 lejos estd Espana ahora !
10 — Si, madre — dijo Quinito, — pero debemos recordar
que gracias a Espana y a su espiritu emprendedor, una
gran parte de America fu6 descubierta, explorada y
poblada.
— En California — dijo don Ramon — ver6is m£s hue-
is lias interesantes de la ocupacion espanola en el oeste de
esta tierra, obra sobre todo de los misioneros. Y se me
ocurre que os puede interesar lo que se relata de uno de
ellos, cierto fraile llamado Jos6 Maria Zalvidea, de la
mision de San Juan Capistrano, situada entre San Diego
20 y Los Angeles.
— Si, te pedimos que nos lo relates — dijo Pepe.
— Pues, este buen padre se paseaba un dia en los cam-
pos de la mision cuando se le acerc6 un toro bravo. Le
grito uno de los indios de la misi6n :
25 — ; Cuidado, padre, que ese toro es un animal muy
feroz ! No lo provoque Vd.
108
LOS MISIONEROS 199
— No has de preocuparte ni asustarte, hijo — con-
testo el fraile. — Dios me protegera. — Y le grito al
bravo animal, que ya estaba muy cerca de el :
— i Paz, espiritu malo ! Vete. Vete a pasear a otra 30
parte. No quiero que te quedes aqui. Mando que te
vayas.
El toro, muy asombrado, le miro al fraile por algunos
momentos, luego se volvio y desaparecio corriendo.
— <j No te dije que Dios me protegeria ? — exclamo 35
tranquilamente el padre.
Otro fraile, Urbano de nombre, de la mision de San
Diego, pidio a Mejico un parasol, ropa interior, calce-
tines y un gorro de dormir. Al fin de algunos meses llego
el paquete en que estaban las cosas pedidas. Uno de 40
los indios abrio el paquete y al ver los articulos, le gusta-
ron tanto que decidio apropiarselos.
Sobre sus pocos vestidos se puso la ropa interior y los
calcetines. En la cabeza se puso el gorro de dormir.
Abrio el parasol, que era amarillo y muy grande. Ata- 45
viado asi, y con el parasol en la mano, se fue a visitar un
pueblo indio en que vivian algunos amigos suyos. Pero
al presentarse en el pueblo, asusto tanto a sus com-
patriotas que ninguno queria recibirle ni darle de comer.
£l tuvo que ir vagando por los campos y desiertos y 50
estaba a punto de morir de hambre cuando finalmente
el padre Urbano, que le estaba buscando, se encontro
con 61.
El indio parecia tan ridlculo que el fraile tuvo que reirse
mucho. Pero el padre le dio de comer y beber y luego 55
le dijo:
200 QUINITO EN AMERICA
— Mando que de aqui en adelante me acompanes en
mis viajes y que lleves sobre mi el parasol abierto. £sta
sera la penitencia que has de hacer.
VOCABULARIO
amarillo, -a yellow
apropiarse to appropriate to one-
self
asustar to frighten; asustarse to
be frightened
bravo, -a wild, fierce, untamed
calcetin m. sock
comprar to compare
compatriota m. and f. fellow,
fellow countryman
cuento m. story, tale
gorro m. cap; gorro de dormir
nightcap
industrial industrial
mandar to order, command
ocupacion f . occupation
paquete m. package
parasol m. parasol
pasearse to walk, stroll, take a
walk
penitencia f . penance
provocar (que) to provoke
relatar to relate, tell
ridiculo, -a ridiculous
ropa f. clothing; ropa interior
underclothes
vagar (que) to wander
vestido m. dress, garb, clothing
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a otra parte elsewhere, somewhere
else
dar de beber a to give a drink to
de aqui en adelante from now on,
henceforth
encontrarse con to come upon
estar a punto de to be about to
que for
se me ocurre it occurs to me
se fue went away
vete go away (familiar imperative
singular of irse)
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Use in complete Spanish sentences any six of the above
idioms.
II. Relate in Spanish the incident of Father Urbano and
the Indian who appropriated the articles the missionary had
ordered from Mexico.
LOS MISIONEROS 201
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Que es muy feroz. For he is very fierce.
Que, in the sense of for, since, often is used to introduce a
clause in Spanish.
2. Le estaba buscando. He was looking for him. Te
quiero dar. I wish to give you.
We have previously seen (see page 24) that pronouns used
as direct or indirect objects of an infinitive or a gerund usually
follow and are attached to the infinitive or the gerund. But
above we see that they may also precede the auxiliary used
with a gerund, or the main verb upon which the infinitive
depends.
3. Review. Se fue. He went away. Vete. Go away. (Ve
is the familiar imperative of z'r.)
There are in Spanish a number of verbs which, though in-
transitive (i.e. do not usually take an object), may neverthe-
less be used as reflexive verbs. Levantarse, to rise, and
sentarse, to sit, are transitive verbs (usually have an object),
and mean, literally, to raise oneself and to seat oneself. But
quedar, to remain, and ir, to go, are distinctly intransitive
verbs, and nevertheless may be used reflexively in Spanish.
Sometimes when so used such verbs indicate deliberate and
intentional action or effort on the part of the subject. At
other times, there is little difference in meaning between the
reflexive and the non-reflexive forms: reir or reirse, to laugh.
Some of the most frequently employed of these intransitive
reflexive verbs are :
caerse to tumble down llegarse to come up, approach
dormirse to fall asleep morirse to be dying
entrarse to force one's way in quedar se to remain
estarse to stay reirse to laugh
irse to go away venirse to come along
202 QUINITO EN AMERICA
4. Te pedimos que nos lo relates, we beg you to relate it to us
(that you relate it to us). No quiero que te quedes aqui, I
don't want you to stay here (that you stay here). Mando que
te vayas, I order you to go away (that you go away) . Mando
que me acompanes y que lleves, I order you to accompany
me (that you accompany me) and to carry (that you carry) .
In the above sentences the dependent verbs are in the
present tense of the subjunctive mood.
Let us examine the question of moods. They are:
A. The INFINITIVE MOOD, simple and compound forms: ver,
to see; haber visto, to have seen. The infinitive mood
is not limited by tense, person and number as are finite
forms of verbs.
B. The INDICATIVE MOOD, the most common of all, which
is used to make statements and ask questions. Tense,
person and number are expressed in all forms of the in-
dicative mood: Yo veo, I see. £l habia visto. He had
seen, i No ve Vd. ? Don't you see ?
C. The IMPERATIVE MOOD, used in giving commands. There
are both polite and familiar imperative forms, singular
and plural for each. We have studied so far only po-
lite commands. Provdquele Vd., provoke him. Polite
imperative, singular. Provdcale tu, provoke him. Famil-
iar imperative singular.
D. The SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, which is used to express an ac-
tion or state as dependent upon the will, desire or feel-
ings of another person (who is the subject of the main
verb); or as indefinite, uncertain, or contingent upon
circumstances.
5. In the sentences first given above (in paragraph 4), we
notice that all the main verbs (pedimos, quiero, mando) ex-
press the will or volition of the subject in the form of wish,
LOS MISIONEROS 203
desire or command. In such cases the verb of the dependent
or object noun clause must be expressed in the subjunctive
mood, if the subjects of the main verb and the dependent verb are
different.
If the two verbs have the same subject, the dependent verb
is expressed in the infinitive: Quiero quedarme aqui, I want
to stay here. But, quiero que te quedes aqui, I want you to
stay here (that you stay here).
All the dependent clauses in the sentences of paragraph 4
are noun clauses used as objects of the main verb. We beg
you what ? That you relate it to us. Te pedimos que nos
lo relates.
So Our FIRST CASE of the USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD is
found in :
Noun clauses as objects of (and so dependent upon) verbs
of volition.
Such verbs of volition are:
consentir, decir (as a command), desear, mandar, pedir,
permitir, prohibir (to prohibit), querer, and others.
6. The present subjunctive in Spanish is translatable into
English in a number of ways, depending upon circumstances:
deseo que el hable, I want him to speak, I wish that he speak,
I wish that he may speak.
7. Formation of the present subjunctive.
A. Verbs ending in -or (first conjugation) have the fol-
lowing endings:
-e -emos ( hable hablemos
-es -eis j hables hableis
-e -en ( hable hablen
It will be noted that these endings are similar to those of
the present indicative of -er (second conjugation) verbs.
204 QUINITO EN AMERICA
B. Verbs ending in -er or -ir (second and third conjuga-
tions) have the following endings:
-a -amos ( lea leamos escriba escribamos
-as -ais s leas leais escribas escribais
-a -an { lea lean escriba escriban
These are similar to the endings of the present indicative
of -ar (first conjugation) verbs.
C. The present subjunctive of irregular verbs is usually,
not always, formed by changing the ending -o of the
first person singular of the present indicative to -a, -as,
-a; -amos, -ais, -an.
decir, to say; digo, I say
Present subjunctive : diga, digas, dig a; digamos, digais,
digan
D. The present subjunctive of some irregular verbs must
be learned separately; for example, the forms of ir, to
go, are:
vaya, vayas, vaya; vayamos, vayais, vayan
And of ser, to be, they are :
sea, seas, sea; seamos, sedis, sean
I. Place the object pronouns of each sentence in the other
position that is possible:
i. Estan dandomelo. 2. Se los queremos dar. 3. Van a
darmela. 4. Van buscandolo. 5. Me las esta quitando.
6. Estoy poniendomelo.
II. Translate into English the following sentences:
i. No nos vamos. 2. El nino no se muere. 3. Vd. se
caera. 4. Ella se ha dormido. 5. Quedese Vd. aqui. 6. No
se ria Vd. 7. El toro se estuvo en el campo. 8. Vengase
Vd. conmigo. 9. Van llegandose a la puerta. 10. Ellos se
fueron. n. Se ban dormido. 12. Vayase Vd. ahora.
LOS MISIONEROS 205
III. Recite the present subjunctive of:
relatar; sentarse; vender; residir; venir (vengo, ist pers.
singular, present indicative) ; dar (de, des, de, etc.) ; ir; ser;
tener.
IV. Translate into English the following sentences in which
the present subjunctive is used in noun clauses as objects of
verbs of volition. In all cases the subject of the dependent
verb is different from that of the main verb.
i. Queremos que Vd. nos hable. 2. Desean que yo quede
aqui. 3. Piden que Vd. se la escriba. 4. Mando que ella
lo lea. 5. Prohibo que ellos lo digan. 6. Consiento en que
el vaya conmigo. (Notice how the preposition en, which
usually follows consentir, is also retained before a dependent
clause.) 7. Digale Vd. a Juan que aprenda la leccion. 8. No
me pida Vd. que yo les acompane.
V. In the following sentences the dependent verb is in the
infinitive because its subject is the same as that of the main
verb. Translate the sentence into English. Then make Vd.
or el or ella the subject of the dependent verb, which must
then be in the subjunctive mood.
i. Quiero verlo. 2. Deseamos acompanarlos. 3. Consen-
timos en hablar. 4. Ellos quieren saludarnos. 5. £ No desea
Vd. leerlo? 6. Ella no desea escribirmelo. 7. No quiero
via jar por el desierto.
VI. Say and write in Spanish:
i. We permit him to relate it (that he relate it). 2. She
asks me to tell it (that I tell it). 3. I tell her to write to me
(that she write to me). 4. She wants us to read it (that we
read it). 5. I beg him to go away (that he go away = se
vaya).
CAPlTULO XXVII
REUNION EN LOS ANGELES
Finalmente termino en Los Angeles el largo viaje de
nuestros turistas a la costa del Pacifico. Una vez mas
se encontraban en medio de la vida intensa de una gran
ciudad norteamericana.
5 Al bajar el grupo en la estacion, vino a saludarles dona
Dolores, esposa de don Ramon, acompaiiada de su unico
hijo Pedro, un simpatico muchacho de quince aiios de
edad. Los abrazo don Ramon con carino y luego los
presento a sus parientes.
10 Dona Dolores, norteamericana, sabia expresarse bien
en espanol, lengua que habia aprendido, pero Pedro,
aunque lo estudiaba en la escuela, no se aventuraba a
emplearlo al saludar a su tia, su prima y sus primos. Les
sonrio y quedo callado.
15 — j Cuanto me alegro de que finalmente llegu£is ! —
exclamo dona Dolores. — Hace muchos dias que os
esperamos Pedro y yo.
Subieron todos al gran automovil de lujo que dona
Dolores habia conducido a la estacion y don Ramon,
20 haciendo de conductor, los llevo a su casa en los suburbios.
Al pasar por las calles de Los Angeles, no vieron dngeles
algunos, pero si mucha gente que andaba de prisa por
las aceras abarrotadas y un numero infinito de coches.
Exclamo dona Ana:
25 — ; Otra vez la misma historia ! Temo que Los Angeles
tenga tantos habitantes como Nueva York. Siento que
206
REUNION EN LOS ANGELES 207
las grandes ciudades est6n todas llenas de gente. Pero,
despu£s de todo, sin mucha gente no habria ciudades.
For fin llegaron a una hermosa casa grande situada en
Beverly Hills y bajaron a su puerta. Observe Rosa : 30
— i Que palacio mas magnlfico ! Es encantador, y de
estilo espaiiol. Tii no nos dijiste, querido tlo, que eres
millonario.
— Y no lo soy, hija, — contesto don Ramon; — niego
que esta casa sea un palacio. Al mismo tiempo no vivimos 35
precisamente en una casucha.
— Si, bien se puede dudar que sea una casucha.
Fueron todos a dar un paseo por el extenso cesped que
rodeaba la casa, admirando las flores y los arboles. Era
una magnifica tarde de sol de enero y uno podia creer 40
facilmente que habia llegado la primavera o los primeros
dias de verano.
Luego dieron con una gran piscina construida con azule-
jos espanoles. Con alegria exclamo Pepe:
— j Qu6 hermoso lugar para banarse ! Tio Ramon, tia 45
Dolores, <i permitis que vayamos a banarnos en la piscina ?
— Claro — respondio la tia; y volviendose a Pedro
le dijo : Why don't you boys all take a swim before dinner ?
Dicho y hecho. Pedro busco trajes de bano para sus
primos. Los tres muchachos sabian nadar bien y se 50
divirtieron enormemente en el agua.
Para ver si Pedro entendia bien el espaiiol, Quinito le
pregunto, senalando a Pepe, que estaba nadando como
un pez:
— <j Qu£ hace Pepe ahora ? ss
Sin vacilar ni un momento, contesto Pedro:
— Nada. — Y los dos se rieron mucho. Despu6s
208
QUINITO EN AMERICA
Pedro no vacilaba en expresarse en espanol y lo hablaba
bastante bien.
60 Aquella noche, en medio de mucha animation y alegria,
comieron las dos familias en el gran comedor de la casa.
VOCABULARIO
abarratado, -a crowded, packed
abrazar (ce) to embrace
acera f . sidewalk
dngel m. angel
aventurarse to venture, dare
bano m. bath
callado, -a silent, quiet
casucha f . hut, hovel
cesped m. lawn, turf
dudar to doubt
infinite, -a infinite, countless
lujo m. luxury
millonario m. millionaire
nadar to swim
negar (ie, gue) to deny; refuse
pez m. fish
piscina f . swimming pool
primavera f . spring (of year)
primo m., prima f. cousin
reunidn f . meeting, reunion
rod ear to surround
senator to point out, point at
temer to fear
traje m. suit, dress; traje de
bano bathing suit
NOTES: coche is much used in Spanish-speaking countries as
meaning automdvil; nada, as pronoun, means nothing; as a verb it
means he is swimming; Pacifico = Oceano Pacifico, Pacific Ocean.
MODISMOS Y
dor con to come upon
de lujo de luxe
hacer de to act as
EXPRESIONES
la misma historia the same old
story
ni not even, even
no habria there wouldn't be
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. El viaje de nuestros turistas termino en Los Angeles.
2. Vinieron a saludarlos en la estacion la esposa y la hija de
REUNION EN LOS ANGELES 209
don Ramon. 3. Don Ramon abrazo a Pepe y le presento a
su esposa. 4. Dona Dolores sabia expresarse bien en espanol.
5. Pedro quedo callado y no se aventuraba a hablar es-
paiiol. 6. Dona Dolores se alegro de recibir a sus parientes.
7. Cuando todos salieron de la estacion en el coche de lujo,
Pedro hacia de conductor. 8. Las calles y avenidas de la
ciudad estaban abarratadas de angeles. 9. Dona Ana sentia
estar en una ciudad donde habia tanta gente. 10. Rosa creyo
que la casa de sus tios era un magnifico palacio. n. Don
Ramon nego ser millonario. 12. La casa no era precisamente
una casucha. 13. Uno podia creer que era un dia de invierno
y no un dia de primavera. 14. Los tres muchachos se pusieron
trajes de bano para ir a pasearse por las calles. 15. Pepe
sabia nadar como un pez. 16. Finalmente Pedro ya no va-
cilaba en expresarse en ingles.
II. Select the phrase or phrases that can be used to com-
plete suitably the following incomplete sentences:
1. Uno puede banarse en ...
(a) un coche, (b) una piscina, (c) un traje de bano, (d) un
parasol, (e) una playa del mar, (f) lo mas alto de un cerro.
2. Para conducir un coche es necesario . . .
(a) ponerse un sombrero azul, (b) saber conducir, (c) nadar
en un lago, (d) poseer un automovil de lujo, (e) poder ver
bien.
3. Para divertirme yo prefiero . . .
(a) sentarme a la luz del sol y dormir, (b) ir a nadar en la
calle, (c) ver una buena pelicula de cine, (d) pasearme cuando
hace frio, (e) cantar con los angeles.
4. En un hotel abarrotado de gente hay . . .
(a) muchas personas, (b) asientos para todos, (c) numerosas
aceras, (d) grandes arboles, (e) mucha animation.
210 QUINITO EN AMERICA
III. Say and write in Spanish:
i. He does not wish to act as governor. 2. I did not
hesitate even a moment. 3. We come upon a group of tourists.
4. There would not be a swimming pool in a hut.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Review. No vieron angeles algunos. They saw no angels.
In a negative sentence alguno in its different forms may
follow the noun object and be then equivalent to ninguno
before the noun : no vieron ningunos angeles.
2. Me alegro de que llegueis. I .am glad that you arrive.
(Notice the retention of the preposition de before the que.)
Temo que Los Angeles tenga. I fear Los Angeles has. Siento
que esten. I regret that they are. Niego que sea. I deny
that it is. Se puede dudar que sea. One may doubt that it is.
Notice that que, introducing a dependent noun clause in
the subjunctive, is practically never omitted in Spanish, while
the equivalent that in English is frequently omitted. Observe
the second sentence in paragraph 2 above.
SECOND CASE of the USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In the above examples it is seen that the verbs of the main
clauses (me alegro, temo, niego, dudar) are verbs which ex-
press emotion (joy, fear) or doubt or denial. Such verbs re-
quire the use of the subjunctive mood in the dependent or
object noun clause, if the subjects of the main verb and the de-
pendent verb are different.
The more common verbs of emotion, doubt or denial are:
alegrarse, to be glad; sentir, to regret; temer,tofear; dudar,
to doubt; negar, to deny.
If the two verbs have the same subject, the dependent verb
is expressed in the infinitive : Me alegro de estar aqui. I am
REUNION EN LOS ANGELES 211
glad to be here. Temo nadar en la piscina. I am afraid to
swim in the pool. Siento lie gar tarde. I regret to arrive late.
Niego ser millonario. I deny I am a millionaire. Dudamos
poder ir. We doubt we can go.
3. Formation of the present subjunctive.
A. Vowel-changing verbs of Class I (see page 38) have
vowel changes in the same forms as are found in the present
indicative with, of course, the same changes in endings as
are necessary for -ar and -er verbs (see page 38). Examples:
pensar, to think.
Present subjunctive : piense, pienses, piense; pensemos, pen-
seis, piensen
volver, to return
Present subjunctive: vuelva, vuelvas, vuelva; volvamos, vol-
vais, vuelvan
B. Consonant-changing verbs have the same changes in
spelling of consonant sounds as are found in the first person
singular of the preterite (for -ar verbs) or the first person
singular of the present indicative of -er or -ir verbs. (See
page 68.) Examples:
buscar, to seek; busque, I sought
Present subjunctive: busque, busques, busque; busquemos,
busqueis, busquen
cruzar, to cross; cruce, I crossed
Present subjunctive: cruce, cruces, cruce; crucemos, cruceis,
crucen
pagar, to pay; pague, I paid
Present subjunctive: pague, pague s, pague; paguemos, pa-
gueis, paguen
eager, to seize, take, catch; cojo, I catch
Present subjunctive: coja, cojas, coja; cojamos, cojais, cojan
212 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
distinguir, to distinguish; distingo, I distinguish
Present subjunctive: distinga, distingas, distinga; distin-
gamos, distingais, di sting an
conocer, to know; conozco, I know
Present subjunctive: conozca, conozcas, conozca; conoz-
camos, conozcais, conozcan
veneer, to vanquish, overcome; venzo, I vanquish
Present subjunctive: venza, venzas, venza; venzamos, ven-
zais, venzan
C. Certain irregular verbs have irregularities not ascertain-
able from examining the first person singular of the present
indicative. (See paragraphs C and D of section 4, Chapter
XXVI and pages 77-78.)
dar, to give: de, des, de; demos, deis, den
estar, to be: este, estes, este; estemos, esteis, esten
ir, to go: vaya, vayas, vaya; vayamos, vayais, vayan
saber, to know: sepa, sepas, sepa; sepamos, sepals, sepan
ser, to be: sea, seas, sea; seamos, seais, sean
D. It is now clear that the present subjunctive of all verbs
is identical in the 3rd pers. singular and plural with the singular
and plural of the polite imperative. For example: Sepa Vd.,
sepan Vds.t know. Temo que Vd. (el, elld) sepa, I fear you
(he, she) may know, will know. Temo que Yds. (ellos, ellas)
sepan, I fear you (they) may know, will know.
I. Study and translate into English the following sentences:
i. No poseo coche alguno. 2. No escriben cartas algunas.
3. Dudan que yo sea su amigo. 4. Dudo que ella me busque.
5. Negamos que esten aqui. 6. Se alegran de que yo lo sepa.
7. Temen que ella no les de la mano. 8. Niego que ellos me
conozcan. 9. Nos alegramos de que nos la paguen. 10. Sen-
timos que 61 vuelva a la ciudad. n. Siento que Vd. no lo
REUNION EN LOS ANGELES 213
cruce. 12. Temen que yo lo coja. 13. Ella se alegra de que
nosotros vayamos al pueblo.
II. Recite the present subjunctive of:
llegar; sacar; veneer; estableccr; recoger; mover; cerrar,
en tender; volar; saber; estar; dar; ir; ser.
III. In the following sentences the main verb and the de-
pendent infinitive have the same subject. Translate the sen-
tences into English. Then make Yds. or ellos the subjects
of the dependent verb, which must then be in the subjunc-
tive mood.
i. Negamos estar cansados. 2. Temen llegar tarde.
3. Dudo saberlo. 4. Niegan ser ricos. 5. Nos alegramos
de ser ciudadanos. 6. Temo cogerlo. 7. Me alegro de sa-
berlo. 8. Ella teme cerrarlos.
IV. Say and write in Spanish:
i. We fear (that) he does not know it. 2. She is glad that
you know us. 3. He doubts that you are my friend. 4. We
deny that he seeks us. 5. They regret that you give me
nothing. 6. I regret that you do not vanquish your fear
(miedo).
CAPlTULO XXVIII
EL CAPITAN PORTOLA Y EL PADRE
JUNlPERO SERRA
Aquella primera noche en Beverly Hills supieron por
primera vez dona Ana y sus hijos cual era la ocupacion
de don Ramon. Era director de comedias de cine en
Hollywood. Dirigfa el trabajo de una compania de ac-
5 trices y actores espanoles para una de las grandes em-
presas norteamericanas.
— j Que interesante, Ramon ! — exclamo dona Ana.
— Ahora comprendo como has podido poseer esta magni-
fica casa. Conviene que un director de cine no muera de
10 hambre. Es necesario sin duda que vista bien y viva
en una casa hermosa.
— <; Y no nos llevaras a ver rodar una pelicula ? — pre-
gunto Rosa.
— Claro, con gusto — respondio su tio. — Pero mas
15 tarde. Estos proximos dias voy a estar muy ocupado
en muchas cosas. Es preciso que yo dirija estos dias
una comedia que empieza a rodarse. Siento no poder
acompanaros mucho en las visitas que sin duda querr£is
hacer a los sitios interesantes del sur de este gran estado
20 de California. Pero m£s tarde sera posible que yo os
acompafie en algunos viajecitos.
Al dla siguiente, todos, menos don Ram6n, salieron en
el coche, conducido por el chofer de la familia, a recorrer
la region. Primero visitaron algunas de las play as de la
214
PORTOLA Y JUNlPERO SERRA 215
costa, donde vieron banarse en el mar a varias personas 25
celebres del cine. Fueron a Long Beach, Pasadena y
Alhambra, cuya bella mision les encantaba.
— <: Quieres contarnos algo de la mision de San Gabriel ?
— pregunto Rosa a dona Dolores.
— Pues, es una de las veinte y una misiones que fun- 30
daron en California los padres franciscanos en la ultima
mi tad del siglo XVIII y la primera mitad del XIX. fista
y la de Santa Barbara son dos de las misiones mejor
conservadas.
Saliendo de Velicata, Baja California, el capit&n Por- 35
tola y el fraile Junipero Serra, jefe de los misioneros fran-
ciscanos, llegaron en junio de 1769 a la bahia donde est£
hoy la ciudad de San Diego. Alii se reunieron con otros
dos grupos, uno de los cuales habia llegado en dos barcos,
y el otro que habia venido, como ellos, por tierra. Los 40
doscientos hombres construyeron alii con troncos de ar-
boles, una capilla. Mas tarde trasladaron la pequena
poblacion a las orillas del rlo San Diego. Florecio esta
primera mision hasta 1775, afio en que los indios se re-
belaron y quemaron la poblacion, la cual fue restablecida 45
poco despues.
El capitan Portola exploro la region al norte. Despues
de mil penalidades, sus hombres descubrieron la bahia
de San Francisco y luego volvieron a San Diego. Falta-
ban alimentos y sufrian mucho los pobladores. El capitan 50
y el misionero esperaban el regreso de un barco que habian
enviado a M£jico a traerles alimentos y refuerzos. El
capitdn dijo que si no regresaba el barco para el dia de
San Jos£ (19 de marzo), todos tendrian que volver a
M6jico. ss
216 QUINITO EN AMERICA
El padre Junipero Serra pasaba los dfas y las noches
pidiendole a Dios que llegara a tiempo el barco. For
fin, pasados nueve dias, aparecio, a la puesta del sol, el
barco deseado. La empresa de las misiones fue salvada.
60 De 1769 a 1823 trabajaron sin cesar el buen fraile y
los otros misioneros estableciendo misiones en California.
Murio el padre Junipero Serra en 1784 y sus restos quedan
hoy en la mision de San Carlos, cerca de Monterey.
VOCABULARIO
actor m. actor precise, -a necessary, indispen-
aparecer (zed) to appear sable
celebre celebrated puesta f . setting
convenir to be suitable, fitting quemar to burn, burn down
(conjugated like venir) refuerzo m. reinforcement
chdfer m. chauffeur regresar to return
director m. director regreso m. return
dirigir (jo) to direct rodar (ue) to roll; (here) to make
empresa f. enterprise, organiza- or " shoot " (a film)
tion saluar to save
estudio m. study; (here) studio sitio m. place, site, spot
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a la puesta del sol at sunset sin cesar unceasingly
al dia siguiente the next day si no regresaba if it did not return
a tiempo in time, on time viajecito little trip; diminutive
que llegara that it would arrive of viaje
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Caspar Portold was governor of Baja California (Lower California)
with headquarters at Loreto. This peninsula had been fairly well
conquered by the end of the iyth century, and numerous missions
had been established there by the Jesuits, who were expelled from
all Spanish domains in 1767. Their work in Mexico and California
Courtesy California™,
Monument to Fray Tunipero Serra in the Golden Gate Park, San Frani
iviibbiun near
The Mission of San Juan Cz
trano.
Courtesy H tdt World Photos
Courtesy Los Angtles County Chamber of Commerce
e Old Avila House in Los Angeles; One of the Oldest Spanish
ildings in the City.
PORTOLA Y JUNlPERO SERRA 217
was taken over by the Dominicans and the Franciscans, mostly
by the latter.
Miguel Jose Serra (1713-1784) took the name Junipero when he
received holy orders. He was born on the island of Mallorca in
the Mediterranean Sea and came to Mexico in 1749. Besides the
San Diego Mission, he founded San Carlos de Monterey (1770),
San Gabriel (1771), San Luis Obispo (1772), San Francisco (1776),
San Juan Capistrano (1776), Santa Clara (1777) and others. He
was the president of this California group of missionaries, a man
of great piety and industry.
For several years there has been given in the town of Alhambra,
near the San Gabriel Mission, a Mission Play by John T. Goarty
depicting the hardships of the Franciscans in their missionary work
and particularly the trials undergone in establishing the San Diego
Mission.
The Landmarks Club of California, the Catholic Church and other
organizations have done much to restore and preserve the old Spanish
Missions of California.
Los Angeles was founded September 4, 1781 by the third Spanish
governor of California, Felipe de Neve. It was originally called
"El Pueblo de Nuestra Senora la Reina de los Angeles."
The Bahia de Monterey (properly spelled in Spanish Monterrey)
was first discovered by Sebastian Vizcaino (died in Acapulco, Mexico,
about 161 5), a merchant engaged in trade with the Philippine Islands.
He was commissioned by the Mexican viceroy, the Count of Mon-
terrey, to colonize Baja California in order to counteract the activ-
ities of the British and Russians in the Pacific and in the west and
northwest of the North American continent. In November, 1602,
he discovered San Diego Bay. Sailing up along the California coast,
on December 16 he came upon Monterey Bay. He landed here
among friendly Indians, and Father Ascension, a member of the
party, celebrated religious services at a spot near which, 168 years
later, the San Carlos Mission was founded by Junipero Serra.
The Bahia de San Diego was discovered by Juan Rodriguez
Cabrillo on September 28, 1542, in a voyage from Mexico up the
coast of California.
218 QUINITO EN AMERICA
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <> Cual era la ocupacion de don Ramon ? 2. <i Que com-
prendio dona Ana al saber esto ? 3. <; Que queria ver Rosa ?
4. <i Cuando prometio don Ramon llevar a sus parientes a
visitar el estudio? 5. <J Que sintio don Ramon? 6. £ Quien
condujo el coche cuando salieron los otros a recorrer la re-
gion ? 7. <; Que vieron en las playas de la costa ? 8. £ Cuantas
misiones fundaron los franciscanos en California ? 9. <i Donde
se establecio la primera mision en California? 10. <J Que mi-
sionero acompafio al capitan Portola en la expedicion ?
ii. £ Que bahia descubrio en California la expedicion de Por-
tola cuando exploraba la region al norte? 12. Al volver
Portola a San Diego <J que pasaba en la colonia de San Diego ?
13. Si el barco que fue a Mejico no volviese, £ que tendrian
que hacer los pobladores ? 14. £ No aparecio el barco un dia
al salir el sol (at sunrise)? 15. ^ Donde se encuentran hoy
los restos de Junipero Serra ?
II. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. We arrived at sunset. i. Llegamos — .
2. He worked unceasingly. 2. Trabajo — .
3. Don't you want to take a little 3. <; No quiere Vd. ha-
trip ? cer — ?
4. The next day he came on time. 4. — vino — .
5. Give me a drink. 5. Deme Vd. — .
6. They fed the animals. 6. Dieron — animales.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. Pasados nueve dias. Nine days having passed. When
nine days had passed.
The above is an example of an absolute past participial
phrase, that is, one in which the verb form used is the past
PORTOLA Y JUNlPERO SERRA 219
participle. The whole phrase is absolute, that is, independent
of and detachable from the main sentence. In such phrases
the past participle always stands first.
Further examples: Rendida la ciudad, los soldados par-
tieron. The city having been surrendered, the soldiers left.
Llegado el dia, la expedicion empezo a marchar. When the
day arrived (the day having arrived), the expedition began to
march.
2. Conviene que no muera de hambre. It is fitting that he
should not die of hunger. Es necesario (es precise) que vista
bien. It is necessary that he dress well. Sera posible que yo
os acompane. It will be possible that I may accompany you.
THIRD CASE of the USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In the above sentences the main verb or verbal phrase
(conviene, es necesario, es preciso, sera posible) is impersonal
and expresses opinion. Such verbs are used only in the
3rd pers. singular. The subject in such cases is the noun
clause which follows the introductory que, and in that de-
pendent clause the verb must be in the subjunctive.
The more important impersonal verbs and phrases are con-
venir, to be suitable; importar, to be important; and many
phrases formed with ser and an adjective, such as ser ne-
cesario, ser preciso, ser posible, ser probable, ser bueno, ser
malo, ser lastima, and so forth.
If there is no subject indicated for the dependent verb, that
verb is in the infinitive: Conviene no pedir dinero, it is fitting
not to beg money. Es necesario trabajar, it is necessary to
work. Importa vestir bien, it is important to dress well.
3. Formation of the present subjunctive.
Vowel-changing verbs of Classes II and III (pages 48, 54)
have, in addition to those vowel changes found in the present
indicative, the changes of e to i and o to u in the ist person
220 QUINITO EN AMERICA
plural and 2nd person plural of the present subjunctive. The
endings are, of course, those necessary for -ir verbs (see page
573). Examples:
sentir, to feel, regret
Present subjunctive: sienta, sientas, sienta; sintamos, sin-
tais, sientan
morir, to die
Present subjunctive: muera, mueras, muera; muramos,
murais, mueran
pedir, to ask for
Present subjunctive: pida, pidas, pida; pidamos, pidais,
pidan
vestir, to dress
Present subjunctive: vista, vistas, vista; vis tamos, vistais,
vistan
4. Es posible que yo os acompane. It is possible that I may
accompany you. He querido que el me acompane. I have
wanted him to accompany me.
FIRST CASE Of the SEQUENCE OF TENSES
If the main verb is in the present, future, or present perfect
tense, the dependent verb is in the present subjunctive. (This
is true when the action of the dependent verb takes place
at the same time as or after the action of the main verb. Other
situations will be discussed later.)
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
I. Recite the present subjunctive of dormir, to sleep; con-
sentir, to consent; servir, to serve; and dirigir, to direct.
II. Study and translate into English the following sentences:
i. Conviene que Vd. no me lo pida. 2. Es preciso que
ella se duenna. 3. Es probable que el dirija la comedia.
PORTOLA Y JUNIPERO SERRA 221
4. Importa que el pueblo florezca. 5. Ha sido necesario que
Vd. nos sirva. 6. Convendra que Yds. vistan bien. 7. No
sera bueno que el nos lo de. 8. No conviene que Yds. vayan
conmigo.
III. In the following sentences the main verb or verbal ex-
pression is impersonal. Translate the sentences into English.
Then restate them in Spanish, making yo the subject of the
dependent verb, which must then be in the subjunctive.
i. Es necesario dormir mucho. 2. Conviene pedirselo.
3. Sera bueno establecer una empresa. 4. No ha sido pre-
ciso servir a nadic. 5. Temen llegar tarde. 6. Desean no
morir. 7. Convendra consentir en eso. 8. No es bueno ser
millonario.
IV. Say and write in Spanish:
i. It is possible (that) they are here. 2. It is fitting that
he know it. 3. It is important that you do not request it.
4. It will be necessary for her to sleep much (that she sleep
much). 5. It has been necessary for us to accompany them.
6. We shall command (mandar) you to give it to us (that
you give it to us). 7. He will ask us to be his friends (that
we be his friends). 8. She has been glad that we are here.
9. Tell him (Vd.) to go away (that he go away; use irse).
10. She begs us to save her (that we save her).
CAPlTULO XXIX
EN LOS ESTUDIOS CINEMATOGRAFICOS
— <j For que decayeron las misiones ? — pregunto Qui-
nito. Respondio su tia:
— Porque una ley mejicana las puso bajo el dominio
del gobierno y este les quito sus propiedades. En 1834
s el gobierno mando que los franciscanos fueran expulsados
y asi se dio un golpe mortal a las misiones. Cuando en
1848 la Alta California fue cedida a los Estados Unidos,
quedaron sin cuidar por mucho tiempo. Mas tarde al-
gunas fueron restablecidas por los que se interesaron en
10 conservarlas.
Por fin don Ramon pidio a sus parientes que le acom-
panasen en una visita a una de los estudios en que traba-
jaba de director. Al llegar las dos familias al estudio,
fueron recibidas con muchas atenciones por los empleados.
15 — j Pensar — exclamo Pepe — que vamos a conocer al-
gunos artistas de cine, tal vez hablar con ellos y ver como
se rueda una de esas peliculas que se exhiben en todas
partes del mundo hispanoparlante !
Los jovenes, sobre todo, estaban muy impresionados y
20 hasta excitados cuando don Ramon les dijo que era pro-
bable que les presentase a los artistas.
Don Ramon los condujo a un estudio donde estaban
reunidos los actores y actrices y les presento a sus parien-
tes. Los artistas parecfan tener gusto en saludar a sus
25 compatriotas y en hablar con ellos. Entonces todos
vieron que Quinito se quedaba al lado de la bella primera
actriz, sumamente interesado en su conversation con ella.
222
LOS ESTUDIOS CINEMATOGRAFICOS 223
Estos artistas eran, en su mayor parte, espanoles, pero
algunos eran hispanoamericanos.
Luego don Ramon explico que seria necesario que la 30
compania siguiese trabajando. Era preciso que todos se
callasen y que los visitantes se sentasen. El ultimo en ir
a sentarse fue Quinito. Grito don Ramon :
— j Todos preparados ! \ Cuidado ! Vamos a empezar
a rodar. \ Silencio ! j Luces ! j Camaras ! 3S
Los espectadores observaron con sumo interes la actua-
tion de los artistas. La primera actriz, joven y muy bella,
hizo muy bien su papel en la comedia. Su voz era en-
cantadora y su manera de hablar muy clara. La miraba
Quinito con la mayor atencion. Los otros actores tambien 40
estuvieron bien. Al terminar la escena, los visitantes
aplaudieron fuerte.
Al despedirse los visitantes de la compania, no aparecio
Quinito. Pepe tuvo que ir a buscarle y le encontro en un
rincon hablando con la bella actriz. 45
— Yen en seguida, Quinito, que te esperamos — dijo
Pepe. Y por fin se despidio su hermano de la encantadora
actriz. Dijo Rosa cuando Quinito salio:
— Recuerdo haber visto en Madrid una pelicula en que
actuaba esa senorita, quien me gusto mucho. Pero nunca 50
pense que la veria actuar en un estudio, ni que mi hermano
pareceria enamorado de ella. fiste si que ha sido un dia
de sorpresas.
Dona Dolores dijo que de estos estudios salian peliculas
que se exhibian en toda la America espanola y en Espana; 55
que era probable que esta primera actriz gozara de gran
fama en todas las Americas hispanoparlantes; que ahora se
ruedan en Mejico, tambien en la Argentina, buenos films.
224 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
— En Nueva York — dijo Pepe — vimos buenos films
60 mejicanos. Se tambien que los films hablados en ing!6s
y rodados en Hollywood les gustan a los hispanoameri-
canos.
— Ya lo creo — respondio dona Dolores. — Y en His-
panoamerica son conocidos casi tan bien como en los
65 Estados Unidos muchos actores de cine norteamericanos,
algunos de los cuales han viajado por Sud America, donde
los aficionados al cine los han recibido con entusiasmo.
VOCABULARIO
actuation f . performance, acting escena f . scene
actuar (uo) to act exhibir to exhibit, show
aficionado m. enthusiast, "fan"; expulsar to expel
aficionado a devoted to, fond of film m. film (from the English)
collars e to keep still, be silent ley f . law
cdmara f . camera mortal mortal
cinematografico, -a cinemato- probable probable
graphic, of the "movies" propiedad f. property; ownership
decaer to decline, decay (like caer) seguida: en seguida at once
empleado m. employee sorpresa f . surprise
entusiasmo m. enthusiasm visitante m. and f . visitor
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
estar bien to be good (in a per- sin cuidar uncaredfor
formance) ven come (familiar imperative
hacer un papel to play a part singular of venir)
hasta even
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. Las misiones de California decayeron porque — .
2. Cuando fueron expulsados los franciscanos, las misiones
recibieron — . 3. Don Ramon pidio a sus parientes —
LOS ESTUDIOS CINEMATOGRAFICOS 225
4. Los empleados del estudio recibieron — . 5. Los jovenes
estaban — . 6. Iban a ver como — . 7. Quinito se puso al
lado — . 8. Algunos de los actores eran — , otros eran — .
9. Era necesario que la compania — . 10. Y era preciso que
los visitantes — . n. — hizo bien su papel. 12. Cuando
termino la escena, — . 13. Cuando se despidieron los visi-
tantes, Quinito — . 14. Pepe le encontro — . 15. Rosa habia
visto en Madrid — . 16. Rosa no penso nunca que Quinito
— . 17. A los hispanoamericanos les gustan — . 18. Algunos
actores de cine norteamericanos — .
II. Say and write in Spanish:
i. The actors were good. 2. They played their parts well.
3. The visitors are going to talk perhaps with the actors.
4. Even the actors were excited. 5. The missions remained
uncared for.
III. Give Spanish verbs related in derivation and meaning
with the following nouns:
gobierno; cuidado; compania; visitante; estudio; llegada;
empleado; sorpresa; reunion; interes; actor
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. Mando que fueran expulsados. Ordered that they be
(should be) expelled. Pidio que le acompanasen. Asked that
they should accompany him (asked them to accompany him).
Era probable que los presentara. It was probable that he
would present them. Seria necesario que la compania siguiese
trabajando. It would be necessary that the company continue
(should continue) working. Era preciso que todos se callasen.
It was necessary that all should be quiet (for all to be quiet).
Era probable que esta actriz gozara. It was likely that this
actress enjoyed.
226 QUINITO EN AMERICA
In the sentences in the last paragraph on page 225 the
main verb or verbal phrase in each case is one that requires
that the dependent verb be in the subjunctive mood.
But it is at once seen that the dependent verbs (fueran,
acompanasen, presentara, siguiese, callasen, gozara) are not
in the present subjunctive. They are in the imperfect tense
of the subjunctive.
SECOND CASE of the SEQUENCE OF TENSES
When the main verb is in the preterite (mando), imperfect
(era probable), or post-preterite tense (seria necesario), and
is such as requires that the dependent verb be in the sub-
junctive, that dependent verb is in the imperfect subjunctive.
(This is true when the action of the dependent verb takes
place at the same time as or after the action of the main
verb. Other situations will be discussed later.)
2. Formation of the imperfect subjunctive.
The imperfect subjunctive has two sets of endings. One
set, known as the s-forms, has the following endings:
a. For -ar verbs: -ase, -ases, -ase; -asemos, -aseis, -asen
b. For -er or -ir verbs: -iese, -ieses, -iese; -iesemos,
-ieseis, -iesen
The other set, known as the r-forms, is:
a. For -or verbs: -araf-arasf-ara; -aramos,-arais,-aran
b. For -er or -ir verbs: -iera, -ieras, -iera; -ieramos,
-ierais, -ieran
For all verbs, regular, irregular, vowel-changing, consonant-
changing, and so forth, the stem to which these endings are
added is found by dropping the ending of the 3rd pers. plural
of the preterite indicative. Thus:
LOS ESTUDIOS CINEMATOGRAFICOS 227
hablar — habl-aron: hablase, hablase s, hablase; hablase-
mos, hablaseis, hablasen
hablar a, hablar as, hablar a; hablar amos, hablar ais, hablaran
vender — vend-ieron: vendiese, vendieses, vendiese; ven-
diesemos, vendieseis, vendiesen
vendiera, vendieras, vendiera; vendieramos, vendierais,
vendieran
leer — le-yeron: leyese, etc.; leyera, etc.
decir — dij-eron: dijese, etc.; dijera, etc.
ser — fu-eron: fuese, etc.; fuera, etc.
ir — fu-eron: fuese, etc.; fuera, etc.
seguir — sigu-ieron: siguiese, etc.; siguiera, etc.
poner — pus-ieron: pusiese, etc. ; pusiera, etc.
dar — d-ieron: diese, etc.; diera, etc.
dormir — durm-ieron: durmiese, etc. ; durmiera, etc.
3. The imperfect subjunctive, like the present subjunctive,
is translatable into English in different ways, depending upon
circumstances. (See page 203 of Chapter XXVI.) Might,
would, should are often the auxiliaries used in English; or
the infinitive can be used at times in English. Examples:
Yo pedi que me acompanase (acompanara) , I asked that he
(might) accompany me, I asked him to accompany me. Con-
vendria que Vd. no se durmiese, it would be fitting for you
not to fall asleep, that you should not fall asleep.
4. In most uses of the imperfect subjunctive the s-forms
and the r-forms are interchangeable. Such differences as
exist in usage will be noted later.
I. Recite the s-forms of the imperfect subjunctive of:
quemar, aplaudir, venir, poder, saber
II. Recite the r-forms of the verbs in I.
III. Study and translate into English the following sen-
228 QUINITO EN AMERICA
tences. Tell why in each sentence the subjunctive mood is
used in the dependent clause and why the imperfect tense of
that mood is necessary.
i. Mi padre mandaba que lo aprendiesemos. 2. Fue pre-
ciso que yo se lo relatara a ella. 3. Dudarian que eso fuera
verdad. 4. Temi que alguien me siguiese. 5. Quisimos que
ellos nos lo dijesen. 6. Era necesario que Yds. lo pusieran
en la mesa. 7. No deseaban que yo se lo diera a nadie.
8. Nego que nadie viniera a vernos. 9. Ella dudo que yo pu-
diera hacerlo. 10. Quise que el me hablara.
IV. Express in the present tense the verb of the main clause
in the sentences of III and make at the same time the changes
then necessary in the dependent verb.
V. In each of the following sentences make el or Vd. the
subject of the dependent verb, now in the infinitive:
i. Era posible saberlo. 2. Yo queria leerlo. 3. Convendria
exhibir la pelicula. 4. Ellos desearon seguirme. 5. Yo sentia
mucho estar enfermo. 6. Me alegre de verla. 7. Consin-
tieron en ir con nosotros. 8. Era necesario decfrselo a el.
9. Fue preciso venir con ella. 10. Importaba saberlo.
ii. Ella se alegro de vernos. 12. Quisieron aplaudirles.
CAPlTULO XXX
LOS GOMEZ SE DESPIDEN DE
CALIFORNIA LA BELLA
Se divirtio mucho la familia Gomez durante su visita
de im mes a California. Recorrieron casi todo el estado,
visitando muchos sitios: el parque nacional Yosemite,
Santa Barbara y su magnifica mision, Monterey y la
esplendida ciudad de San Francisco con su estupenda bahia 5
y su Puerta de Oro. Desde los altos cerros de la ciudad
vieron numerosos barcos y los dos maravillosos puentes
que cruzan las aguas de uno de los puertos mas grandes
que existen.
En todas partes vieron huellas de la antigua ocupacion 10
espanola. En el valle del Sacramento conocieron algunas
familias que eran descendientes de los pobladores es-
panoles. En San Francisco, ciudad construlda primero
alrededor de la mision de San Francisco (fundada en 1776
y llamada hoy la mision Dolores), gozaron de dias muy 15
felices. En el parque llamado de la Puerta de Oro se
detuvieron emocionados ante la estatua erigida a Cervan-
tes, que representa a don Quijote y Sancho Panza arro-
dillados al pie de la estatua y mirando hacia arriba la
cara benevola de su creador. 20
Cerca de este grupo en bronce, se encontraba otra
estatua hispanica, la del buen fraile Junipero Serra, creador
de tantas misiones californianas.
229
230 QUINITO EN AMERICA
— A la verdad — dijo dona Ana, — aquf est&n repre-
25 sentadas dos de las glorias de Espana, Cervantes y un
gran misionero espanol, de quienes podemos estar muy
orgullosos.
En Berkeley y en Palo Alto les atrajeron dos de las
grandes universidades californianas, la de California y
30 la de Stanford.
For fin volvieron a Beverly Hills para estar algiin
tiempo con sus queridos parientes antes de tener que
partir con rumbo a Mejico, donde iban a visitar a don
Felipe, otro hermano de dona Ana.
35 Otra vez recorrieron la ciudad de Los Angeles, que
nunca ceso de interesarles. En el barrio mejicano gozaron
de charlar en espanol con los habitantes.
— <i Entonces tii crees que sea mejor que viajemos en
aeroplano al salir para Mejico ? — pregunto dona Ana
40 a su hermano Ramon.
— Claro — respondio este. — Asf podreis hacer el viaje
en poco tiempo y con toda comodidad. Yo lo arreglare
todo, si asl lo quieres.
— No se cual sea el mejor modo de continuar nuestro
45 viaje — contesto la sefiora. — <; Crees tu que no haya
peligro alguno en viajar por aeroplano ?
— ,; Peligro ? No, no lo hay — dijo su hermano. — El
aeroplano es hoy un modo seguro y rdpido de transporte.
Asl viajan miles de pasajeros todos los dias sin que les pase
50 nada de malo. No creo que debas preocuparte del peligro.
— Bueno — respondio dona Ana. — Entonces te pido
que arregles para el jueves proximo nuestro viaje a£reo a
M6jico. Y muchas gracias.
Llego el dia de la despedida. Don Ram6n, dona Do-
LOS G6MEZ SE DESPIDEN 231
lores y Pedro los llevaron en el coche al aeropuerto. En 55
el camino dijo Pedro a sus primos:
— Pero nunca hab&s hablado de sus antiguos amigos
Tito el perro y Coco el burro, que eran vuestros com-
paiieros mientras vagabais por Espafia. Me gusto mucho
leer de ellos en el libro « Quinito en Espafia. » <; Que ha 60
sido de ellos ?
— Pues, siento tener que decirte — respondio Quinito
tristemente — que los dos murieron de viejos hace cosa
de dos afios, \ pobrecitos ! Pero no habrian podido hacer
con nosotros este largo viaje. 65
Y Quinito y Pepe suspiraron profundamente.
Tan pronto como hubieron llegado al aeropuerto, su-
bieron al gran pajaro mecanico. Con mucho carino se
despidio la familia espanola de sus parientes, y pronto
iban volando por el aire hacia el sur. 70
VOCABULARIO
aeropuerto m. airport despedida f . leave-taking, farewell
alrededor de around esplendido, -a splendid
arrodillado, -a kneeling feliz happy
benevolo, -a kind, kindly gloria f . glory
bronce m. bronze orgulloso, -a proud
californiano, -a Cdifornian pasajero m. passenger
creador m. creator preocuparse to worry
charlar to chat, talk tristemente sadly
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
cosa de matter of, about preocuparse de to worry about
hacia arriba up, upwards pobrecito poor fellow (diminutive
mon'r de viejo to die of old age of pobre)
nada de malo nothing unfortunate ser de to become of
no lo hay there isn't any sin que without
232 QUINITO EN AMERICA
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Santa Barbara was founded in 1782. Around its Mission Church,
built by the Franciscans in 1786, there developed one of the most
beautiful cities of America. The old church was one of the few of
the missions that suffered no deterioration or neglect and it has been
continuously in the loving care of the Order which established it.
Puerto de Oro, Golden Gate, an appropriate name for the great
entrance to the magnificent harbor of San Francisco, and for the
park of that name which lies on the western heights of the city.
In that fine park, the two monuments mentioned in the text, one to
Cervantes and the other to Junipero Serra, are outstanding and
significant adornments of the extensive grounds of the park. The
Cervantes monument, made by the California sculptor, Jose Jacinto
Mora, was the gift of an eminent Spanish citizen of San Francisco,
Mr. Juan C. Cebrian.
San Francisco, like Santa Barbara, developed around a Mission
Church, that of San Francisco de Assisi (1776), name of the saint
who was the founder, in 1210, in Italy, of the Order which bears
his name. In the opinion of the Spanish authorities in Mexico,
San Francisco Bay, discovered in November, 1769, by men of the
Portola expedition, had to be protected and the region around the
bay developed promptly to offset English and Russian ambitions
in the west and northwest of the continent. Chosen to undertake
this colonization was Juan Bautista de Anza, then in command of
the outpost at Tubac, Arizona. In one of the most difficult and
dramatic odysseys of exploration that New World history records,
Anza and his small band of men, women, children and missionaries,
240 in all, succeeded in finding their way over desert and moun-
tainous terrain and, after unbelievable hardships, in reaching San
Gabriel Mission in January, 1776. From there they continued
to Monterey and San Francisco Bay, at which latter point they
arrived two months later. There a presidio, or garrison-fort, and the
San Francisco Mission were erected that fall. In 1835 the town of
Yerba Buena was built and to it was given the name of San Francisco
in 1847. The gold rush of 1848, and the great commerce that sub-
LOS GOMEZ SE DESPIDEN 233
sequently developed there because of its excellent harbor, made the
city the most important port of the entire Pacific Coast of North,
Central and South America.
The University of California, situated in Berkeley, on the eastern
shore of San Francisco Bay, has as its offspring and counterpart
the University of California at Los Angeles. Stanford University,
in Palo Alto, just south of San Francisco, was founded by Leland
Stanford, once governor of the state (1861-1863) and United States
senator (1885-1893). He endowed the university, in memory of his
son, Leland Stanford, Jr., with twenty million dollars. There are
many fine institutions of learning in California, besides those named,
one of them being the University of Southern California, in the city
of Los Angeles.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. San Francisco esta situada en las orillas de la bahia de
Monterey. 2. La mision de San Francisco se llama hoy la
mision Dolores. 3. La bahia de San Francisco es un puerto
de poca extension. 4. Los Gomez conocicron en el valle del
Sacramento algunos descendicntes de los primeros indios de
la region. 5. La estatua erigida a Cervantes en el parque
de la Pucrta de Oro representa a dos senoritas que estan arro-
dilladas. 6. Las figuras arrodilladas miran hacia arriba la cara
de Cervantes. 7. Cervantes fue el escritor mas celebre de
Espana. 8. Cervantes escribio una historia dc Nueva York.
9. Se encuentra cerca del monumento a Cervantes una es-
tatua dc Junipero Serra. 10. Este fraile fue el fundador de
una linea de transportes aereos. 1 1 . A los Gomez les gustaba
charlar en ingles con los habitantes del barrio mejicano de
Los Angeles. 12. Dona Ana dudaba que fuese el aeroplane un
modo seguro de viajar. 13. Ella no sabia que asi viajaban
todos los dias miles de pasajeros sin que no les pasara nada
234 QUINITO EN AMERICA
de malo. 14. For fin consintio ella en que don Ramon arre-
glase el viaje por aeroplano. 15. Tan pronto como hubieron
llegado al aeropuerto, los Gomez subieron al gran pajaro
mecanico. 16. En camino al aeropuerto Quinito dijo a Pedro
que Tito y Coco seguian viviendo en Espana.
II. For each of the following Spanish nouns give a Spanish
adjective related thereto in derivation and meaning:
felicidad; California; empresa; atencion; riqueza; centro;
alegria; encanto; comodidad; Europa; persona; grandeza;
juventud; interes; aire; Puerto Rico; fama; numero;
artista; enfermedad; libertad.
III. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1 . The poor fellow had died of i . — habia muerto — .
old age.
2. Nothing unfortunate hap- 2. No nos paso — .
pened to us.
3. What will become of her ? 3. <[ Que — ella ?
4. I go away without any- 4. Me voy sin que nadie — .
one's seeing me.
5. I went away without any- 5. Me fui sin que nadie — .
one's seeing me.
6. She looked up. 6. Ella miro — .
7. Don't worry about that. 7. No — Vd. de eso.
8. Is there danger ? There 8. £ Hay peligro ? No — .
isn't any.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. Tan pronto como hubieron llegado. As soon as they had
arrived.
Hubieron llegado is a form of the preterite perfect indica-
tive. This tense is formed with the preterite of the auxiliary
verb haber (hube, hubiste, hubo; hubimos, hubisteis, hu~
bier on) followed by the past participle of the verb.
LOS G6MEZ SE DESPIDEN 235
The preterite perfect is used only after conjunctions of time,
such as cuando, when; tan pronto como or luego que or asi
que, as soon as; despues que, after.
2. No habrian podido. They would not have been able.
Habrian podido is a form of the post-preterite perfect (some-
times called the conditional perfect) tense of the indicative.
This tense is formed with the post-preterite (or conditional)
of the auxiliary verb haber (habria, habrias, habria; ha-
briamos, habriais, habrian) followed by the past participle.
3. No se cual sea el mejor modo. I don't know which is
the best way. i Crees id que no haya peligro alguno? Do
you think there is no danger ? No creo que debas preocuparte.
I don't think you ought to worry. Asi viajan sin que les pase
nada de malo. They travel this way without anything un-
fortunate happening to them.
FOURTH CASE of the USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In the first three sentences above it is seen that the main
verbs (saber, creer), expressing knowledge or belief, are used
negatively or interrogatively; also that the dependent noun
clauses have their verbs in the subjunctive mood. Therefore,
we may say that such verbs as saber and creer, when used
in negative statements or in questions, and thus expressing
uncertainty or doubt on the part of the subject, require the
dependent verb to be in the subjunctive.
If uncertainty is not implied by negation or interrogation,
the dependent verb is in the indicative: Creo que no hay
peligro. I think there is no danger. Se cual es el mejor modo.
I know what is the best way.
In a clause introduced by the negative conjunction sin que,
the dependent verb is in the subjunctive : Sin que les pase
nada. Without anything happening to them.
236 QUINITO EN AMERICA
4. i Hay peligro ? Is there danger ? No lo hay. There
isn't any. i Cree Vd. que haya peligro ? Do you think there
is danger? No creo que lo haya. I don't think there is any.
No sabia yo que hubiera peligro. I didn't know there was
danger. No sabia que lo hubiera. I didn't think there was any.
The present subjunctive of haber (used here impersonally)
is haya.
The imperfect subjunctive is hubiese or hubiera.
Remember that impersonal haber is used only in the 3rd
pers. singular.
I. Translate into English the following clauses and sen-
tences:
i. Cuando yo hube salido. 2. Luego que lo hubieron visto.
3. Tan pronto como les hubimos saludado. 4. Vd. habria
venido. 5. Ellos no habrian podido. 6. Yo habria dicho.
7. Ella no habria residido alii. 8. Tu habrias reido. 9. Sin
que yo lo sepa. 10. Sin que lo supiesemos. n. <; Cree Vd.
que el nos conozca? 12. No crei que nos conociese (cono-
ciera). 13. No sabiamos que ella viniera (viniese) . 14. <J Cre-
yeron ellos que fuera peligroso viajar asi? 15. Saldremos sin
que Juan nos vea. 16. Saldriamos sin que Juan nos viera.
17. Dudamos que haya pasajeros en el aeroplane. 18. Du-
dabamos que hubiera pasajeros en el aeroplano.
II. In the following sentences replace the infinitive with
the correct form of the verb given in parentheses :
i. <i Sabe ella que eso (ser) probable? 2. No crei que
ellos (hablar) bien. 3. No sabemos que ella (venir) manana.
4. No sabiamos que ella (venir) el proximo dia. 5. Iran a
casa sin que nadie los (acompanar) . 6. Irian a casa sin que
nadie los (acompanar). 7. No creo que (haber) oro en la
mina. 8. No creimos que (haber) oro en la mina.
LOS GOMEZ SE DESPIDEN 237
III. In the following sentences the dependent verb is in
the infinitive, either because it has the same subject as the
main verb or because the main verb is impersonal. Reshape
each sentence by giving a (different) subject to the dependent
verb.
i. El no quiere morir de viejo. 2. £l no queria morir de
viejo. 3. £l no querria preocuparse de nada. 4. Ha sido
posible arreglarlo. 5. Seria posible arreglarlo. 6. Conviene
creerlo. 7. Convenia creerlo. 8. Ella no sabe nadar. 9. Ella
no sabia nadar. 10. Niega estar cansado.
IV. Recite the two forms of the imperfect subjunctive of
the following verbs. Remember that these forms are based
on the stem of the 3rd pers. plural of the preterite indicative.
Review also the present subjunctive of these verbs.
charlar; aplaudir; venir; hacer; caer; poder
V. Say and write in Spanish:
i. I doubt he is coming. 2. I doubted he was coming.
3. He wishes us not to applaud. 4. He wished us not to
applaud. 5. They want me to make it. 6. They wanted
me to make it. 7. He fears I will fall. 8. He feared I would
fall. 9. She is glad I can see well. 10. She was glad I could
see well.
QUINTA LECCI6N DE REPASO
VOCABULARIO
I. Give the English
la oleada
la satisfaction
restablecer
el nordeste
ridicule
abarrotado
rodear
el traje de bano
restablecer
la empresa
el chofer
la actuacion
exhibir
el aeropuerto
el creador
el borde
profimdamente
el espiritu
el calcetin
la penitencia
II. Give the Spanish for the English:
the wonder permanent the point
the departure to show stupendous
to frighten except the beauty
the parasol the package wild
for the Spanish:
la piscina
la ladera
la casucha
Colorado
el conductor
el compatriota
rodar
provocar
el peregrino
la ropa interior
el tajo
negar
el dominio
senalar
apropiarse
el cesped
vagar
celebre
el pez
el sitio
la reunion
actuar
aventurarse
el visitante
el lujo
cinematogrdfico
la puesta
arrodillado
el director
californiano
la propiedad
el refuerzo
el aficionado
el estudio
benevolo
la sorpresa
el bronce
el empleado
emprendedor
decaer
el gorro
the view
yellow
to compare
the clothing
LECCION DE REPASO
239
the dress
the desert
to swim
to relate
the story
industrial
to stroll
the occupation
to order
the nightcap
to embrace
to fear
the cousin
the bath
the actor
the spring
the angel
infinite
the suit
the sidewalk
to doubt
quiet
the millionaire
the return
to burn
next
mortal
to be suitable
necessary
the law
to appear
to save
to flourish
to direct
to expel
the enthusiasm
at once
the camera
splendid
sadly
the poor fellow
to be silent
the attention
to chat
to worry
profound
probable
the scene
even
around
the passenger
the artist
proud
the glory
perhaps
happy
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
3-
4-
I. Make the Spanish sentences
[. There are about twenty i.
here.
>. Money? There isn't any. 2.
What will become of her ? 3.
They will arrive without 4.
anyone's knowing it.
5. The dog died of old age. 5.
6. Don't worry about that. 6.
7. Nothing unfortunate will 7.
happen.
8. Look upwards. 8.
9. Henceforth, go elsewhere. 9.
10. Give the animal a drink. 10.
11. He was on the point of n.
speaking.
12. Nothing occurs to me. 12. No — nada.
equivalent to the English:
. Aqui hay — veinte.
. <; Dinero ? — .
i Que — ella ?
Llegaran — lo sepa.
El perro — .
— Vd. de eso.
No ocurrira — .
Mire Vd. — .
— vaya Vd. — .
De Vd. — animal.
Estaba — hablar.
240
QUINITO EN AMERICA
13. He went away, for he was 13. Se fue, — estaba enfenno.
ill.
14. We should like to see her. 14. — verla.
II. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. El actor estuvo bien en la i. The actor — in the play,
comedia.
2. Hizo el papel principal.
3. El animal quedo sin cui-
dar.
4. Al dia siguiente llego a
tiempo.
5. El barco aparecio a la
puesta del sol.
6. El trabaja sin cesar.
7. Ella hace un viajecito de
hi jo.
8. No vimos ni un arbol.
9. Pero dimos con mucha
gente.
10. Haga Vd. de conductor.
11. Siempre es la misma his-
toria.
12. Se encontro con un toro
bravo.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
I. Answer in English:
i. What is the function of each of the four moods men-
tioned in Chapter XXVI ? 2. When the subject of the main
verb and that of the dependent verb are identical, in what
mood is the dependent verb ? 3. If the subjects are different
and the main verb is one of volition, emotion, doubt, denial,
or is an impersonal verb expressing opinion, or is a verb of
2. He — the principal — .
3. The animal remained — .
4. — he arrived — .
5. The ship appeared — .
6. He works — .
7. She — .
8. We didn't see — .
9. But we — .
10. — driver.
11. It is always — .
12. He — a wild bull.
LECCION DE REPASO 241
knowing or believing used negatively or interrogatively, in
what mood is the dependent verb ? 4. In what tense of the
subjunctive is the dependent verb if the main verb is in the
present, future or present perfect, and the action of the de-
pendent verb is coincident with or subsequent to that of the
main verb ? 5. If the main verb is in the imperfect, preterite
or post-preterite ? 6. How is the present subjunctive of regu-
lar verbs formed? 7. Of irregular verbs? 8. Of consonant-
changing verbs ? 9. Of vowel-changing verbs ? 10. With what
forms are the 3rd singular and 3rd plural of the present sub-
junctive identical? n. How is the imperfect subjunctive
formed ?
II. Recite the present subjunctive of:
entrar; correr; permitir; decir; hacer; conocer; pro-
vocar; dormir; sentir; distinguir; coger; ir; ser; creer
III. Recite the imperfect subjunctive, both forms, of the
verbs in II.
IV. Translate into English the following sentences. State
what grammar construction is illustrated by each.
i. Despues de llegar mis amigos, fuimos todos a la ciu-
dad. 2. No creo haberlo visto. 3. No tengo dinero alguno.
4. Venga Vd. ahora, que nadie esta aqui. 5. Antes de ha-
bermelo ofrecido a mi, Pepe se lo ofrecio a Rosa. 6. No se
lo quiero ofrecer. 7. No se lo sigo ofreciendo. 8. Pasadas
tres semanas, fui a verle. 9. Cuando hubo llegado mi primo,
nos fuimos. 10. Dijo que se lo habria ofrecido.
V. Reshape the following sentences, making ellos the sub-
ject of the dependent verb:
i. Queremos buscarlo. 2. Dudan poder venir. 3. Me
alegro de verlos. 4. Sienten no estar aqui. 5. Es posible
ir alia. 6. No creo tener razon.
242 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VI. Reshape the sentences of V, using the main verb in
the imperfect indicative and making Yds. the subject of the
dependent verb.
VII. Give the gradation (positive, comparative and super-
lative degrees) of the following adjectives in (i) the masculine
singular, (2) the feminine plural:
prof undo; triste; grande; pequeno; bueno; malo
VIII. In the following sentences use the proper form of
the verb given in the infinitive:
i. Niego que eso ser una maravilla. 2. Convenia que Vd.
lo leer. 3. No sabemos que el lo decir. 4. No querian que
yo me dormir. 5. Es bueno que Vd. los seguir. 6. Digale
Vd. que ella lo poncr alii. 7. Desearon que Vds. lo poner en
el coche. 8. Es probable que haber toros en este campo.
9. Permitieron que el indio acercarse al pueblo. 10. Hay duda
de que ella ir con nosotros.
IX. Continue the main verb as a synopsis in the five simple
tenses of the indicative. Make at the same time the necessary
changes in the dependent verb.
i. Yo pido que Vd. me lo diga. 2. Ellos sienten que yo
me vaya.
CAPlTULO XXXI
DE LOS ANGELES A Mfijico
Fue la primera vez que la familia Gomez habia volado
en un aeroplane, y al despegar el gran pajaro mecanico,
dona Ana tenia miedo. Pero pronto se puso tranquila.
Sus hijos, un poco excitados, no tenian miedo alguno.
Al contrario, lo observaron todo con el mayor interes. s
Miraron hacia abajo por las ventanas y vieron a lo lejos
la extensa ciudad de Los Angeles, que poco a poco iba
desapareciendo. Vieron tambien como la tierra se parecia
a un gran mapa en colores, en que habia montafias, rios,
ciudades y aldeas. Parecia que lo que se movia era la 10
tierra y no el avion. Podian hablarse y oirse hablar sin
dificultad alguna.
Aterrizo primero el avion en Mexicali, de Baja Cali-
fornia. Bajaron los viajeros para poner pie por primera
vez en suelo mejicano. Miraron con interes a los meji- 15
canos que habian venido a observar la llegada y partida
del aeroplano. Dijo Pepe:
— Es claro que nos encontramos en un pais muy dife-
rente de los Estados Unidos, j y en cuan poco tiempo !
Y me gusta oir hablar aqui la lengua de mi patria. Para 20
mi no hay lengua alguna que sea tan hermosa como la
espanola.
Despues que hubieron subido algunos nuevos pasajeros
al aeroplano, siguieron volando hacia el sudoeste y siempre
243
244 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
25 a lo largo de la costa occidental de Mejico. For debajo
de ellos se deslizaba el paisaje montaiioso mejicano.
Hacia el oeste veian de vez en cuando un barco que nave-
gaba lentamente por el mar. En el aeropuerto de Hermo-
sillo, que es una ciudad interesante, se detuvo otra vez
30 el avion, pero solo por unos veinte minutos. Lo mismo
hizo en Mazatlan, situado en la misma orilla del mar, el
puerto de mas importancia en toda la extension de la
costa entre San Diego, California, y Panama. Lo que
habian podido ver de la ciudad desde el aire hizo que los
35 pasajeros la admirasen mucho, pero no tenian el tiempo
de visitarla.
De Mazatlan a Guadalajara volaron mas hacia tierra
adentro y por encima de lagunas y montanas y bosques,
que se extendian por todas partes. Dijo Rosa:
40 — Este es un viaje maravilloso, muy rapido y comodo.
No hay nada que me encante mas que ir volando por el
aire. Para mi es el mejor modo de viajar.
— Para mi lo es tambien — dijo Pepe. Pero la senora
de Gomez no decia nada.
45 — Me gustaria muchisimo poder pasar algunos dias en
Guadalajara — dijo Quinito. — Es la segunda ciudad de
Mejico y goza de mucha fama por sus muchos edificios
antiguos, segiin lo que he leido. Deriva su nombre de la
Guadalajara espanola y fu6 fundada en 1530. Pero s6
50 que nuestro tio Felipe nos esta esperando en la capital y
que por eso debemos continuar nuestro viaje. Ya habra
llegado el al aeropuerto.
Sentian todos los Gomez no poder detenerse en Guada-
lajara, que les parecia muy bella.
55 Hacia el fin del dia, cuando el sol iba bajando hacia las
DE LOS ANGELES A M£JICO 245
aguas del Oceano Pacifico, los viajeros cogieron una vista,
muy a lo lejos, de los dos grandes picos nevados que se
levantan al sudeste de la ciudad de Mejico, llamados
Popocatepetl e Ixtaccihuatl. Pronto despues iba bajando
el gran pajaro mecanico en direction al aeropuerto. 60
Al aterrizar el avion, los pasajeros salieron y la familia
Gomez fue a la estacion a buscar un sefior que se pareciera
a don Ramon. For fin dieron con don Felipe, quien vino
a saludarlos y abrazarlos. Les sonrio de una manera tan
encantadora que Pepe dijo a su hermana: 65
— Parece que nuestra madre ha sabido escoger a sus
hermanos con acierto. Nuestro tio Felipe es un hombre
de aire distinguido. <? Como es que ha podido quedar
soltero ?
El simpatico don Felipe los condujo a un buen coche, 70
cuyo chofer les saludo con una sonrisa de bienvenida.
Todos subieron y fueron conducidos por el centro de la
ciudad hasta la casa de su pariente, que se encontraba en
el barrio o « colonia » llamada Lomas de Chapultepec.
Esta casa de soltero era perfecta, aunque no tan grande 75
como la de don Ramon en Beverly Hills. Una alegre
ama, anciana y un poco gorda, salio a recibirlos y a con-
ducirlos a sus habitaciones.
Aquella noche los Gomez gozaron una vez m&s de una
verdadera comida espaiiola, preparada por la cocinera 80
espanola que servia a don Felipe. Despues, sentados en
la muy comoda y artistica sala, charlaban con animation
hasta una hora muy avanzada de la noche.
246 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
acierto m. success, skill escoger (jo) to choose, select
adentro inside, within loma f . (small) hill
ama f . housekeeper mapa m. map
anciano, -a elderly montanoso, -a mountainous
aterrizar (ce) to land nevado, -a snowy, snow-clad
avanzado, -a advanced, late perfecto, -a perfect
avion m. = aeroplano pico m. peak
cocinera f . cook sala f . living room
color m. color segun according to
deslizarse (ce) to glide, slide soltero m. bachelor
despegar (gue) to take of, take sonrisa f . smile
fligJit sudeste m. southeast
dificultad f . difficulty verdadero, -a real, true
encima above; por encima de over
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a lo largo de along la misma orilla the very shore
a lo lejos in the distance lo mismo the same thing
de vez en cuando from time to ponerse + adjective = to become
time + adjective
hacia abajo downward tierra adentro inland
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Mazatldn, on the western coast of Mexico, is situated on a pic-
turesque peninsula, which has fine beaches and a good harbor through
which there is considerable shipping. It is a port of call for the
steamers of the important Grace Line. The Southern Pacific Rail-
way also serves this city.
Guadalajara, the second city in size of Mexico (180,000 inhabit-
ants), is a flourishing, clean city in which are seen colorful Spanish
and Mexican buildings, dress and street scenes. It is more Spanish
in appearance and spirit than any other Mexican city. The cathedral
is very ancient (1571) and of varied styles of architecture. In it is
shown one of Murillo's paintings of the Virgin. Some 40 miles
DE LOS ANGELES A M£JICO 247
from the city is found Lake Chapala, the largest lake of the country,
much favored as a summer resort by well-to-do Mexicans, who are
fond of boating, fishing and bathing. Guadalajara was named after
Guadalajara, Spain, a most ancient city of the north-central part
of the mother country.
Mexico, D. F. (Distrito Federal), Mexico City, the capital of Los
Estados Unidos Mexicanos, has a population of over 1,400,000
inhabitants. It is growing rapidly and new suburbs are extending
the urban districts. More about the life of this city is found in
subsequent chapters. The capital, as well as the country, is called
simply Mexico (Mejico) by the inhabitants.
Notice that x, which here has the sound of Spanish j, is used
in the official spelling of the name of the country and city and
of the related adjective, mexicano.
The different sections of the capital are called colonies.
Popocatepetl is a volcano, now practically extinct, and is 17,550
feet high, one of the loftiest in North America. This peak and that
called Ixtaccihuatl (16,705 feet in height) dominate the view from
all parts of Mexico City. In the name of this mountain the x is
sounded like sh and cci is like Spanish si. Notice where the stress
is placed in these two words. The first name, frequently shortened
to Popo, is an Indian word meaning the "mountain that smokes."
The other name means " sleeping woman," which a configuration
on the peak's western slope resembles.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <; Habian volado antes los Gomez? 2. Cuando el avion
despegaba, <: que tcnia dona Ana? 3. ^ Que vieron los hijos
de la senora al mirar abajo por las ventanas ? 4. £ A que se
parecia la tierra? 5. i Que parecia moverse? 6. <J Donde
aterrizo primero el aeroplane? 7. <i Por que habian venido
los mejicanos al acropuerto de Mexicali? 8. Para Quinito
<J cual era la lengua mas hermosa ? 9. d Por donde siguio
volando el aeroplane ? 10. <i Que se deslizaba por debajo del
248 QUINITO EN AMERICA
avion? u. £ Que se veia de vez en cuando hacia el oeste?
12. <: Cual es el puerto mejicano de mas importancia en la
costa Pacifica? 13. <[ Que modo de viajar le gustaba mas a
Rosa ? 14. £ En que ano fue fundada Guadalajara, Mejico ?
II. In the following sentences replace the English words
with the proper Spanish words :
i. Veian la montana/r0w time to time. 2. Volaron along
la costa. 3. No miren Vds. downward. 4. El muchacho be-
comes muy triste. 5. Vamos a volar inland. 6. In the dis-
tance vimos dos picos nevados. 7. Haran the same thing.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Ya habrd llegado al aeropuerto. He will have already
reached the airport.
Habra llegado is in the future perfect indicative of llegar.
This tense is formed by the future of the auxiliary verb haber
(habre, habras, habra; habremos, habreis, habran) followed
by the past participle of the verb.
2. Hizo que los pasajeros la admirasen. Caused the pas-
sengers to admire it.
FIFTH CASE of the USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In the above sentence the main verb (hizo) expresses causa-
tion, and the dependent noun object clause has its verb in
the subjunctive mood.
Verbs of causation (such as hacer, to bring about, causar,
to cause, efectuar, to effect), when used as the verb of the main
clause, require that the dependent verb be in the subjunctive,
if the subjects of the two verbs are expressed and different.
If the subject of the dependent verb is not expressed, it
may then be in the infinitive: hizo construir una casa, he had
a house built.
The Cathedral and "Zocalo",
the Principal Square in Mex-
ico City.
Courtesy Gevaert
The Avenida Cinco de
Mayo, One of the busi-
est Streets in Mexico City.
Courtesy Mexican Government
Railway System
Mexican Indians Against
a Background of Maguey
Plants.
xtaccihuatl", or the "White
'oman" near Mexico City.
Sculptured Scene Depicting the Torture of Guatimozin and his Follower
' the Spaniards.
DE LOS ANGELES A M£JICO 249
3. No hay lengua que sea mas hermosa. There is no
language that is more beautiful. No hay nada que me encante
mas. There is nothing that delights me more. Buscaban un
senor que se pareciera a don Ramon. They sought a gentle-
man who resembled (might resemble) Don Ramon.
SIXTH CASE Of the USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In the above sentences the dependent adjective clauses
have their verbs in the subjunctive (sea, encante, se pa-
reciera). It will be noticed that the antecedent (the noun
or pronoun that is modified by the clause) is an indefinite
or non-existent person or thing.
We may then say that in adjective clauses that modify
an indefinite or non-existent antecedent, the verb must be
expressed in the subjunctive mood.
The usual rules concerning sequence of tenses apply, of
course, in this as in other cases requiring the use of the sub-
junctive.
I. Translate into English the following sentences:
i. Aqui no hay nadie que me conozca. 2. Busco un senor
que sea soltero. 3. Quiero comprar una novela que me pueda
interesar. 4. Hare que ellos nos traten bien. 5. No vemos
nada que nos guste. 6. Buscan una cocinera que sepa pre-
parar una comida espanola.
II. Change to the imperfect indicative the main verbs of
the sentences in I and make the other changes then necessary.
III. Recite the two forms of the imperfect subjunctive of
each of the following verbs: querer, oir, saber, salir, tener.
IV. Say and write in Spanish:
i. I make him speak (cause him to speak). 2. I made
him speak. 3. We know no one (a nadie) who hears us.
4. We knew no one who heard us. 5. She is looking for a
250 QUINITO EN AMERICA
cook who speaks Spanish. 6. She was looking for a cook
who spoke Spanish. 7. There is no one who knows that (eso).
8. There was no one who knew that. 9. Who is there who
has more time than John ? 10. Who was there who had more
time than John? n. I doubt that he wants to fly.
V. Say and write in Spanish :
i. We shall have gone out. 2. They will have spoken.
3. Shall I not have seen him? 4. She will have sat down.
5. You will not have given it to me.
CAPfTULO XXXII
EN LA CAPITAL DE MEJICO
i Mejico, en un tiempo ciudad bella y rica de los azte-
cas, llamada por ellos Tenochtitlan ! j Centre de la muy
desarrollada civilization azteca y de la magnifica corte
de Moctezuma ! Hoy es una ciudad moderna, con mas de
un millon y medio de habitantes. Crece y se extiende de 5
dia en dia, y se construyen suburbios de casas nuevas.
— fista es una ciudad que me encanta tan to que nunca
la olvidare — dijo Rosa, mientras todos daban un paseo
en automovil. — Aqui existe una vida muy pintoresca,
muy diferente de la norteamericana, tambien diferente de 10
la espanola.
— Si — respondio don Felipe; — despues de vivir aqul
muchos afios, todavia quedo maravillado de esta capital
y de todo el pais. Nunca me cansan sus aspectos pin-
torescos, pero los problemas de la vida industrial y 15
agricola son numerosos. Siendo yo gerente de una em-
presa de minas, conozco bien algunos de esos problemas.
Los obreros son casi todos ellos indios o mestizos, y su
modo de pensar y hacer es muy diferente del nuestro.
— El que tu digas eso me interesa muchisimo. Pero 20
el gobierno mejicano ha hecho mucho 'para el bien de los
pobres, <; verdad ? — pregunto Rosa.
— El gobierno de estos ultimos afios, si. Pero de 1877
a 1910, el presidente Porfirio Diaz, goberno el pais con
una mano fuerte, y los pobres, indios o blancos, eran casi 25
251
252 QUINITO EN AMERICA
esclavos. Luego siguieron anos de revolucion y de guerras
civiles. Pero parece que ahora esta Mejico en camino de
prosperar mucho. Quienquiera que venga a vivir a Mejico,
como yo, por ejemplo, quiere quedarse.
30 — Pero es un pais de enormes riquezas naturales,
<j verdad ? — siguio preguntando Rosa.
— Ya lo creo — respondio don Felipe. — Tiene un
gran niimero de pozos de petroleo, minas de plata, cobre,
plomo y oro. Su suelo es rico y variado y produce sober-
35 bias legumbres, maiz, cana de azucar, y henequen. Solo
hay que desarrollar bien los recursos naturales y humanos,
y con el tiempo eso se hara. Hay que traer tambien la
education a los habitantes de este vasto territorio. El
gobierno hace intensos esfuerzos por fundar escuelas y
40 Casas del Pueblo en cada aldea, en cada rincon. Mientras
esteis vosotros aqui, conviene que observeis con atencion
los diferentes aspectos de la vida mejicana. Cualquier
cosa que ocurra sin duda os interesara.
Estaba entrando el coche en las bellas avenidas del
45 Bosque de Chapultepec, el que con sus arboles, fuentes
y flores encanto a los turistas. Bajaron y se acercaron
adonde se veia el Palacio de Chapultepec, situado en un
cerro, un magnifico edificio erigido para ser palacio del
presidente, pero que desde los tiempos de Porfirio Diaz
50 no ha estado ocupado.
Volvieron al coche y luego fueron al centro de la ciudad.
La gran plaza o Zocalo les sorprendio y gusto mucho.
La magnifica Catedral (llamada la Santa Iglesia Metro-
politana), construlda dei573ai8n, ocupa el sitio donde
55 antes se encontraba un gran templo azteca. El interior,
ricamente adornado, les resulto muy interesante. Al
EN LA CAPITAL DE MfijICO 253
otro lado del Zocalo, el vasto Palacio National esta cons-
truido en el sitio que ocupaba el palacio de Moctezuma y
luego el de Cortes. Es la casa central del gobierno na-
tional. Cortes hizo destruir el antiguo templo y el palacio 60
del jefe azteca al tomar a Tenochtitlan en 1521.
Despues que hubieron visitado estos dos edificios los
turistas fueron a ver lo que pudieran ofrecerles los pin-
torescos mercados en las calles cercanas. Alii veian
canastos grandes y pequenos, enormes sombreros meji- 65
canos, sarapes, huaraches y numerosos articulos de vidrio
y de ceramica. Cualquier cosa que el turista pudiera
desear se encontraba en estos mercados. Los vivos colores
de los articulos que se vendian aqui daban a los mercados
un aspecto alegre. 70
— Estoy cansada — dijo dona Ana. — Creo que con-
vendria volver a casa.
— Si; vamos a casa en seguida — dijo don Felipe.
— El que vuestra madre se canse me preocupa.
VOCABULARIO
adornar to adorn mercado m. market, market place
canasto m. basket mestizo m. half-breed
cansar to lire obrero m. workman
cana f . cane; cana de azucar plomo m. lead
sugar cane problema m. problem
cobre m. copper quienquiera que whoever
corte L court revolution f . revolution
gerente m. manager sarape m. serape (blanket used
henequen m. sisal as shawl or cloak)
huarache m. sandal (of open templo m. temple
leather work) vidrio m. glass
humano, -a human vivo, -a showy, bright, vivid
maiz m. corn, maize
254 QUINITO EN AMERICA
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
el bien the welfare, good mientras esteis while you arc, as
en un tiempo at one time long as you are
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Casa del Pueblo, House of the People, Community House. In
recent years the Mexican educational authorities have made exten-
sive and effective efforts to improve the schools of the country,
which, prior to 1917, were woefully lacking, except in the larger cities.
Thousands of school buildings have since been erected, especially
in remote rural sections, and a social service has been gradually
built up centered chiefly about the Casa del Pueblo established in
each community. Devoted young men and women teachers and
supervisors, who are graduates of normal schools and universities,
render valiant service in helping to train the common people, from
children to aged citizens. The rural problem is complicated by the
sparseness of the population — 17 million people being scattered in
a rough, mountainous land having 764,000 square miles in area, or
about 28 inhabitants per square mile. Only 20% of the inhabitants
are whites; 43% are of mixed blood (mestizos), and 37% are of pure
Indian races.
In a country where for centuries the humble common people, most
of them Indians or mestizos, were sadly neglected, tremendous social
problems inevitably difficult of solution arose, and much time will
be required, as well as patience and continued effort, to raise the
level of education and the standards of living.
The Mexican government has (since 1915) confiscated properties
of wealthy landowners, both natives and foreigners (including
property of United States owners) and distributed them in parcels
to poor families. It has confiscated properties of the Church. It
has taken possession of oil-producing lands developed by foreign
capital and has nationalized them. Such steps have, of course,
aroused strong opposition from those affected thereby, and often
created serious international problems. Other problems have grown
out of agrarian, labor and religious situations.
EN LA CAPITAL DE MfijICO 255
It should be remembered that Mexico was the first focal point
of European civilization in the New World. Here was founded in
1551 the first university in America. The first printing presses in
America were set up here in 1534. Today Mexico City has some
of the best hospitals to be found in Spanish America, excellent
physicians and surgeons. The modern Universidad Obrera, Work-
men's University, is a model for the theoretical and practical training
of skilled workmen.
Porfirio Diaz (1830-1915) was president from 1877 to 1880 and
from 1884 to 1911, in which latter year he resigned and went to
France. He was a soldier in the war with the United States (1847),
and in 1858 he was a supporter of Benito Juarez in the latter's fight
against Maximilian and the French invaders. After Maximilian's
execution, Diaz sought the presidency, but was defeated by Juarez
and later by Lerdo. In 1876 he drove Lerdo from power and in May,
1877, became president.
Mexico had a long period of peace and prosperity during the Diaz
presidency, though little was done in that time for the welfare of
the lower classes. Foreign capitalists and native owners of great
estates exploited the common people.
With the resignation of Diaz began a long period of revolutions
and counter-revolutions which we need not discuss here in detail.
Suffice it to say that with the election of Plutarco Elias Calles in
1924, the stormy revolutionary period seemed to be ended, and since
then, especially under the presidency of Lazaro Cardenas (1934-
1940), much progress has been made in the solution of internal social
and economic difficulties.
Zocalo is a term used in Mexico to indicate the chief plaza of a
city. That of Mexico City is also called Plaza Mayor, Main Square,
or Plaza de la Constitution.
Moctezuma (II), Montezuma, was chief or emperor of the Aztecs
when Hernan Cortes appeared before the capital, Tenochtitldn.
He was born in 1446 and died in 1520.
Chapultepec is a rocky height about three miles southwest of the
center of Mexico City. In the latter part of the i8th century one
of the viceroys of Mexico began to build on this hill a palace-fort or
256 QUINITO EN AM&RICA
castle. It was not finished until after independence was secured
from Spain (1821). Emperor Maximilian developed the partly
finished structure into a summer palace. At the foot of the hill has
been created through the years a beautiful park, containing great
trees, walks and fountains. It is the favorite spot of the people
of the capital.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <J Como se llamaba la ciudad de Mejico al llegar los con-
quistadores espanoles? 2. £ Quien era cntonccs el jefe de los
aztecas? 3. <i Que dijo Rosa acerca de la vida mejicana?
4. <J Cual era la ocupacion de don Felipe ? 5. En estos ultimos
anos, £ que ha hecho el gobierno mejicano ? 6. <; Como go-
bcrno Porfirio Diaz el pais? 7. Segun don Felipe, <J quien
quiere quedarse en Mejico ? 8. <i Cuales son algunos de los
recursos naturales de Mejico ? 9. <J Que produce el suelo me-
jicano ? 10. Segun don Felipe, £ que convenia que hiciesen
sus parientes ? 1 1 . £ Donde esta situado el Palacio de Cha-
pultepec? 12. ^ Cuales son algunos de los edificios que se
encuentran en el Zocalo? 13. £ Que abundaba en los mer-
cados de la ciudad ? 14. <[ Quien se canso durante la visita
a los mercados ?
II. Answer in brief Spanish sentences the question, i Para
que sirve — ? applying the question to each of the following
nouns:
un sombrero; un canasto; un suburbio; un coche; una
mina; el suelo; un palacio; un mercado.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. Siendo yo gerente. /, being a manager; since I am a
manager. Habiendo sido yo gerente. 7, having been a
manager; since I have been a manager.
EN LA CAPITAL DE MfijICO 257
In these sentences we see how a gerund phrase may have a
subject (yo) just as may an infinitive phrase. (See page 195.)
Notice that such a subject follows the gerund; also that the
phrase is equivalent to a clause — a causal, temporal or other
kind of adverbial clause.
Siendo is a simple gerund, while habiendo sido is the com-
pound form.
An object pronoun which is object of a gerund is postfixed
thereto: Viendolo yo. I, seeing it. Such a pronoun is post-
fixed to the auxiliary habiendo of the compound gerund:
Habiendolo visto yo. I, having seen it.
2. El que tu dig as eso me inter esa. The fact that you say
that interests me. El que vuestra madre se canse me pre-
ocupa. The fact that your mother is getting tired troubles me.
SEVENTH CASE of the USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In the above sentences we notice that dependent noun
clauses (el que tu dig as eso and el que vuestra madre se
canse) are used as subjects of the main verbs (me interesa
and me preocupa). In such clauses the dependent verb is
expressed in the subjunctive.
Such clauses are usually, but not necessarily, preceded by
the definite article el, and el que is equivalent to the fact that.
3. Let us refer again to the use of the subjunctive in ad-
jective clauses having an indefinite antecedent (page 249) and
examine the following sentences.
Quienquiera que venga quiere quedarse. Whoever comes
wishes to stay. Cualquier cosa que ocurra os interesara. What-
ever happens will interest you. Cualquier cosa que el turista
pudiera desear se encontraba aqui. Anything whatsoever that
the tourist might want was found here.
Quienquiera (que), whoever, an indefinite pronoun, and cual-
quier or cualquiera, any, any whatsoever, an indefinite pronoun
258 QUINITO EN AMERICA
and adjective, when used as the antecedent of an adjective
clause necessitates, because of the indefiniteness implied, the
use of the subjunctive in that dependent adjective clause.
I. Translate into English the following sentences:
i. Habiendoselo dado nosotros a el, nos fuimos. 2. No
sabiendo yo nada de lo que ocurria, me excuse de contestar
a las preguntas del capitan. 3. Quicnquiera que sea, no le
diga Vd. nada. 4. Cualquier obrero que estudiase, podia
aprender. 5. El que Vd. crea eso me sorprende. 6. El que
prefiriera el un sarape de color azul nos hizo reir.
II. Recite the imperfect subjunctive, both forms, of the
following verbs :
traer, to bring; valer, to be worth; conducir, lo lead, drive;
pedir, to ask for.
At the same time review the present subjunctive of these
verbs.
III. Replace the English words with proper Spanish words:
i. Whoever drove me a la ciudad conocia bien el camino.
2. Whatever hat he saw queria comprarlo en seguida. 3. The
fact that he asked us for it, nos prcocupo mucho. 4. Whatever
thing he brought me no me gustaba. 5. The fact that that
basket was worth little era muy claro.
IV. Express in present time the sentences of III. (Who-
ever drives, whatever hat he sees, etc.) Make all changes
necessary in both main and dependent verbs.
V. Change the following simple gerund phrases into their
compound forms:
i. Adornandolo Vds. 2. Cansandome yo mucho. 3. Go-
bernandolo el muy mal. 4. Leyendolos ella. 5. No dicien-
dome Juan nada. 6. Pidiendonosla siempre. 7. Trayendoselo
a el.
CAPfTULO XXXIII
UN POCO DE HISTORIA
— La conquista de Mejico por Hernan Cortes es un
asunto que siempre me ha interesado — declare Quinito.
— Si — respondio don Felipe. — La historia de la ex-
pedition de Cortes es como una pagina de las Mil y Una
Nochcs, o de las cruzadas de la Edad Media. Salio 5
Cortes de Cuba en 1519 con una flota en que iban 400
soldados y muchos caballos. Cerca de donde esta hoy
Veracruz desembarco la expedition y fundo alii una pobla-
cion que fue la primera de origen europeo en el continente.
Alii Cortes quemo sus barcos haciendo que sus soldados 10
no pudieran retirarse de la empresa.
— No era facil penetrar en el interior del pais, <j ver-
dad ? — dijo Pepe. — He leido que Mejico estaba po-
blado entonces por muchas diferentes tribus de indios
teniendo cada una sus propias tierras. No diga nadie 15
que fuera facil abrir un camino por esa tierra. No olvi-
demos que Cortes solo tenia un ejercito pequefio.
— Algunas de estas tribus — dijo el tio — eran muy
hostiles a los aztecas, que habian tornado posesion del
centro del pals. Los toltecas, por ejemplo, que habian 20
ocupado la tierra mucho antes de venir los aztecas, eran
poderosos enemigos de ellos. Cortes, ayudado por dife-
rentes tribus, marcho contra Tenochtitlan con su pequeno
ejercito y seis mil indios. Venciendo a todos los que pe-
learon contra el, llego a la gran ciudad de 300.000 habi- 25
tantes. Todos los espanoles quedaron asombrados al ver
259
260 QUINITO EN AMERICA
los palacios, temples, jardines y canales construldos en
medio de un gran lago.
— Y los aztecas, £ que pensaron y que hicieron al ver
30 este ejercito de hombres blancos ? — pregunto Rosa.
— Quedaron muy impresionados al ver y olr los cafiones
y las armas de fuego, y al ver los caballos y la armadura
de los invasores. Al mirar al jefe Hernan Cortes, creyeron
que era un dios bianco. Moctezuma no queria recibirle,
35 pero al fin, despues de cambiar regalos con Cortes, per-
mitio que entrasen los espanoles en la ciudad y que el
conquistador se presentase ante el.
— Moctezuma creyo que Cortes pudiera ser el gran
dios Quetzalcoatl que, segun la tradition, era un hombre
40 bianco con barba rubia. Este dios de los indios pre-
historicos de Mejico, despues de ensenarles muchas artes
utiles, se habia ido hacia el este y habia desaparecido en
el aire. Pero habia prometido volver algun dia. Y era
natural que Moctezuma y sus subditos creyesen que
45 Cortes era Quetzalcoatl. — Asi dijo Quinito, y afiadio
don Felipe:
— Pero no tardo mucho Cortes en atacar la ciudad.
Los guerreros aztecas se levantaron contra los espanoles
y por muchos dias siguio la batalla en la ciudad. Quedo
50 herido Moctezuma y m£s tarde se murio, lo cual hizo
que peleasen m£s furiosamente los indios.
Decidio Cortes retirarse, lo que resulto muy dificil.
Escogio una noche obscura para la retirada, en la que
murieron un gran numero de espanoles y muchos indios
55 aliados, en las aguas de los canales. Esta retirada, que
duro seis dias con sus seis noches, se llama la Noche Triste
y es famosa en la historia de Mejico.
UN POCO DE HISTORIA 261
En la llanura de Otumba pelearon los espanoles con
mas de dos mil aztecas y esta vez ganaron la batalla.
Volvio Cortes a atacar la ciudad y finalmente la tomo. 60
Y tomo a Guatimozin, sobrino y sucesor de Moctezuma.
fiste se nego a decir donde habia escondido una gran
cantidad de oro que Cortes queria poseer. For eso el
conquistador espanol hizo poner a Guatimozin y a uno
de sus tenientes sobre un lecho de fuego. Sufrieron tanto 6$
que el teniente pidio a su jefe que dijera a Cortes donde
estaba el oro y asi no tendrian ellos que sufrir mas. Gua-
timozin contesto : « £ Y crees tu que yo este en un lecho
de rosas ? »
Tomo Cortes a Tenochtitlan en agosto de 1521. For 70
esta hazana Carlos V le nombro gobernador y capitan
general. Sabla conquistar, pero no gobernar. Ceso de
ser gobernador y fue a hacer exploraciones en Honduras
y la costa oeste de Mejico. Volvio a Espana en 1540 y
murio cerca de Sevilla en 1547, cuando estaba a punto 75
de volver a Mejico.
— j Ojala que me sea posible estudiar mas tarde con
atencion las hazanas de Cortes! — exclamo Quinito.
— Venga el dia en que yo tenga el tiempo de leer mds
acerca de la conquista de M6jico. 80
— Pero ya es hora de comer — dijo don Felipe. — Sen-
t&nonos a la mesa y gocemos de unos platos espanoles.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
canon is here used as cannon tacking: tardar en + infini-
negarse a to refuse to tive, to delay in + present
tardar en atacar to delay in at- participle
262 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
VOCABULARIO
aliado, -a allied lecho m. couch, bed
arma f . weapon; arma de fuego pdgina f . page
firearm pelear to fight, combat
armadura f. armor regalo m. gift
barba f . beard retirada f . retreat
canal m. canal rosa f. rose
cantidad f. quantity subdito m. subject (of a ruler)
cruzada f . crusade sucesor m. successor
esconder to hide tardar to delay, be slow, be late
fuego m. fire tolteca m. and f. Toltcc (one of a
guerrero m. warrior primitive Mexican tribe)
hostil hostile tradition f. tradition
invasor m. invader
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Herndn Cortes (1485-1547) was born in Estremadura, Spain. He
went to La Espanola (see page 193) in 1504 and to Cuba in 1511.
Juan de Grijalva (1489-1527), the nephew of Diego Velasquez,
governor of Cuba (page 193), discovered Mexico in 1518. Velasquez,
wishing to extend Grijalva's discoveries, appointed Cortes to lead a
new expedition into the interior of Mexico, where reports told of the
existence of great wealth in gold. Cortes set forth on the i8th of
February, 1519, and, as told in the text, reached, after many difficul-
ties, Tenochtitlan. He held Montezuma (Moctezuma II) as hostage
and aroused the enmity of the Aztecs. Velasquez, suspicious of the
loyalty of Cortes, sent Panfilo de Narvaez (see page 124) to arrest
him and bring him back to Cuba. Cortes left Pedro de Alvarado in
command at Tenochtitlan and marched to meet Narvaez, overcame
him in battle and enrolled most of Narvaez 's soldiers in his own
ranks. He hastened back to the Aztec capital and there followed the
events described in the text.
Cortes was a man of strong will and personality and after the
conquest of the city, complaints were made to Velasquez and to
Charles V of the way he and Alvarado, his chief lieutenant, treated
UN POCO DE HISTORIA 263
the Spanish soldiers of the conquering expedition. As a result,
Cortes, though he was at first highly honored by his king, was re-
moved from the governorship of the newly-founded colony in Mexico.
As a free lance, he continued exploring sections of the country, then
returned to Spain where he was publicly snubbed by Charles V.
Mil y Una Noches: thus is called in Spanish the collection of
oriental tales known in English as Arabian Nights or A Thousand
and One Nights.
Edad Media, Middle Ages. The Crusades of the Middle Ages
were undertaken by the Christians of Europe to recover the Holy
Land from the Mohammedans. There were seven such crusades
between the years 1096 and 1272.
Quetzalcoatl (an Indian name meaning Glowing Snake) was the
legendary god and hero of the Toltecs. He was said to be a blond
god who lived among his people for a time, taught them useful
occupations and then disappeared. He was worshipped as the god
of air and rain.
Guatimozin is also called Cuauhtemoc and Cuautemotzin. On
information that while being held captive he was conspiring with
others to cause the massacre of the Spaniards, Cortes had him hanged,
February 28, 1524.
EJERCTCIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. La expedition dc Cortes se parecio a un alegre viajc de
turistas. 2. Veracruz fue fundada por Panfilo de Narvaez.
3. Mejico estaba poblado en aqucllos tiempos por diferentes
tribus de indios. 4. Cortes busco aliados entre las tribus
hostiles a los aztecas. 5. Al llegar a Tenochtitlan los espanoles
estuvieron asombrados al ver los sombreros grandes de los
aztecas. 6. Los aztecas tenian armas de fuego y armaduras.
7. Moctezuma cambio regalos con Cortes. 8. Creyo Cortes
que Moctezuma era el dios Quetzalcoatl. 9. La muerte de
Moctezuma hizo que los aztecas peleasen mas furiosamente.
264 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
10. La Noche Triste ocurrio durante la retirada de los es-
panoles. n. Guatemozin se nego a decir a Cortes donde
habia escondido un anillo de plata. 12. El teniente de Guate-
mozin pidio a su jefe que dijese donde estaba escondida una
gran cantidad de oro. 13. Guatemozin contesto a su teniente
diciendo : « £ Crees tti que el oro haya sido descubierto ? »
14. Cortes no sabia gobernar bien la nueva colonia de Espafia.
15. Quinito deseaba saber mas acerca de la conquista de Hon-
duras.
II. In each of the following lines there is a word that does
not belong there. Which word is it ?
1. armas, canones, espadas, rosas, armaduras, guerreros.
2. lecho, cruzada, mesa, puerta, ventana, cama.
3. oro, plata, cobre, maiz, petroleo, vidrio.
4. correr, andar, seguir, penetrar, entrar, esconder.
III. From the second column select words which are an-
tonyms of those in the first column :
esconder agua
guerrero obrero
fuego salir
cansarse descubrir
rey subdito
gerente correr
tardar misionero
entrar descansar
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. No diga nadie (or, Nadie digd). Let no one say. Venga
el dia. Let the day come. / Ojala que me sea posible! I
hope it will be possible for me! Oh that it may be possible for
met
UN POCO DE HISTORIA 265
EIGHTH CASE of the USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In the sentences in paragraph i on page 264, the main verbs
are in the subjunctive because each sentence expresses a desire
or hope. This use of the subjunctive is called the optative
subjunctive, and it is found in the 3rd pers. singular or plural.
Such sentences may be introduced by que or ; ojala! One
may understand a verb of will (see page 202), unexpressed but
implied, as controlling such constructions. Thus: (Deseo)
que no diga nadie. (Deseo) que venga el dia. And the ex-
clamatory / ojala! is equivalent to a verb of desire or will.
The English equivalent of optative sentences is often in-
troduced by let or have: Que venga Juan. Have John come.
Que se vayan los muchachos. Have the boys go away. If que
is used, object pronouns, if there are any, precede the verb.
The optative subjunctive may in many cases be regarded
as an indirect command (a command given through a third
person).
2. It is evident that there is little difference between what
we have studied as the polite imperative and the optative
subjunctive, especially when one remembers that usted is
really third person, meaning your grace, your honor. And, as
remarked before (see page 212), the verb forms used in the
two cases are identical: hable Vd., speak; (que) hable el,
let him speak; demelo Vd., give it to me; (que) el me lo de,
have him give it to me.
3. No olvidemos. Let us not forget. Sentemonos a la
mesa. Let us sit down at the table. Gocemos de los platos.
Let us enjoy the dishes.
NINTH CASE of the USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In the above sentences we have examples of the use of the
hortatory subjunctive, used to exhort others and oneself, the
speaker, to perform an action in the present time.
266 QUINITO EN AMERICA
It is noticed that the verb is the main verb in the sentence
and that it is the first person plural of the present subjunctive.
Where the verb found in an affirmative exhortation is re-
flexive, notice that before the reflexive nos is postfixed to the
present subjunctive, the final -s of the verb ending is omitted:
sentemonos, not sentemosnos.
In affirmative exhortations all object pronouns (reflexive,
direct or indirect) are postfixed to the verb : demoslo a Juan,
let us give it to John. In negative exhortations such object
pronouns precede the verb: no nos sentemos, let us not sit
down; no lo demos, let us not give it.
When the pronoun combinations selo, sela, selos, selas (it
to him, etc., them to him, etc.; see page 168) are postfixed in
the affirmative exhortation, the final -5 of the verb ending
is omitted : demoselo, let us give it to him. But in the negative
we have: no se lo demos, let us not give it to him.
I. Read and translate into English:
i. Vcngan los ninos. 2. Cierre Juan la puerta. 3. Quc se
vayan los indios. 4. Que nadie me lo diga. 5. Quc llegue
pronto el dia. 6. Quc se lo ofrezca Ana a Maria. 7. Sepamos
la verdad. 8. Hagamoslos ahora. 9. Pongamonos los guan-
tes. 10. No nos los pongamos. n. Cojamosla. 12. No la
cojamos. 13. Presentemonos ante el capitan. 14. No nos
presentemos aqui. 15. Pidamoselo a el. 16. No se la pidamos
a ella.
II. Synopsis of the reflexive verb sentarse in the first person
singular. We now have ten tenses in the indicative mood and
two tenses in the subjunctive. As follows:
INDICATIVE MOOD
SIMPLE TENSES COMPOUND TENSES
Present: me siento Present perfect: me he sentado
Imperfect: me sentaba Pluperfect: me habia sentado
UN POCO DE HISTORIA 267
Preterite: me sente Preterite Perfect : me hube sentado
Future: me sentare Future Perfect: me habre sentado
Post-preterite : me senta- Post-preterite Perfect: me habria
ria sentado
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
SIMPLE TENSES COMPOUND TENSES
Present: me siente (To be studied later)
Imperfect : me sentase
me sentara
IMPERATIVE MOOD
POLITE FAMILIAR OR INTIMATE
Singular: sientese Vd. (To be studied later)
Plural: sientense Yds.
Hortatory Forms
Affirmative: sentemonos
Negative: no nos sentemos
Give the English meaning of each form in the above syn-
opsis.
Change the synopsis to the third person singular; then to
the third person plural. Of course the imperative and hor-
tatory forms can only be used in the persons shown above.
III. Following the above model, make a synopsis in the
third person plural of: darlo, to give it; decirselo, to say it
to him.
IV. Say and write in Spanish :
i. Let the boy speak. 2. Have the child eat. 3. Don't
let the girl write. 4. I hope that (/ Ojala!) he rests well.
5. Let us not tire ourselves (cansarse). 6. Let us offer (our-
selves) for work (para trabajar). 7. Let us not offer ourselves.
8. Let us say it to her. 9. Let us not say it to him. 10. Let
us give it to them (m.). n. Let us not give it to them (/.).
CAPlTULO XXXIV
VAGANDO FOR LA CAPITAL
— Sin duda el nombre de Cortes nunca ha sido muy
venerado en Mejico — declare Pepe.
— No, senor — contesto su tio. — Se dice que en todo
Mejico no existe estatua alguna del conquistador. Y
5 en Espafia el se acerco un dia al coche de Carlos V para
presentarle una solicitud. « <; Quien sois ? » pregunto
Carlos. « Soy el hombre que ha dado a Vuestra Majestad
mas provincias que os dejaron vuestros abuelos, » con-
testo el conquistador. Pero aunque fue famoso por sus
10 hazaiias, que le hicieron una de las grandes figuras de la
historia del Nuevo Mundo, murio muy desilusionado.
Pasando por las Calles del Puente de Alvarado, nuestros
turistas llegaron adonde se encuentra el famoso arbol
llamado de la Noche Triste. Se detuvieron para mirar con
15 atencion este arbol debajo del cual se sento Cortes (segun
la tradition) y lloro al ver pasar a los sobrevivientes de su
ejercito.
Lo que les intereso enormemente a los viajeros era el
gran Museo Nacional. Aqui se exhibe un verdadero
20 tesoro de arte indio, lo mejor de las riquezas artisticas
de los mayas, aztecas y toltecas que han sido descubiertas
en Chichen Itza, en el Monte Alban y en otros sitios.
Miraron con atencion la gran piedra llamada el Calen-
dario Azteca, que indica la alta cultura que poseian las
268
VAGANDO FOR LA CAPITAL 269
razas prehistoricas de Mejico. Esta piedra se encontro 25
hace anos en el sitio donde se construia la catedral. Para
que todo el mundo la viese, se puso en el Museo.
— i Que joyas mas preciosas ! — exclamo Rosa. — Mi-
rad esos objetos artisticos de plata y oro, de turquesas
y otras piedras preciosas. Me gustarla poseer algunas de 30
esas pulseras y anillos.
— Pero estos idolos de piedra tan feos me asustan — dijo
dona Ana. — Recuerdan a los dioses crueles a los que
los aztecas y toltecas ofrecian sacrificios humanos. Se
dice que las diferentes tribus se hacian la guerra con el fin 35
principal de tomar prisioneros que pudieran sacrificar a
sus dioses. Antes de que viniesen los espanoles los indios
rendian culto a ciertos dioses que representaban al sol,
al aire y al agua.
— Es verdad — contesto don Felipe. — Y sin duda 40
Cortes y sus hombres creyeron que eran terribles estos
crueles sacrificios y es probable que uno de los motives de
la conquista de Mejico fuera el de destruir la religion
cruel de los indios y reemplazarla con la religion cris-
tiana. 45
La Biblioteca Nacional, con un cuarto de millon de
libros, muchos de ellos muy antiguos y preciosos, les
impresiono a los turistas. En el Palacio Nacional ad-
miraron los cuadros murales del pintor Diego de Rivera.
El Palacio de Bellas Artes, llamado tambien el Teatro 50
Nacional, es uno de los edificios mas esplendidos de su
clase. Es un gran teatro y al mismo tiempo contiene
salones en que se exhiben cuadros, y otros en que se dan
conciertos de musica. Es, en una palabra, un gran centro
de las artes. Asistieron los viajeros a una funcion de 55
270
QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
miisica en que la orquesta del famoso artista y conductor
Carlos Chavez dio un soberbio concierto.
La capital parecia estar llena de flores bellisimas. En
los patios de las viejas casas, en las calles, en los parques
60 y en los mercados abundaban las flores. Dijo dona
Ana:
— Para mf este es un paraiso de flores. \ Mirad aqui
en este mercado las enormes violetas, las maravillosas
gardenias, las preciosas rosas y que cantidad de lirios !
65 — Si, y parece que tienes delirios, querida mama —
dijo Rosa riendosc. — Pero compremos algunos ramille-
tes. Vamos a ver lo que dice dona Marta.
For la friolera de dos pesos compraron las damas tantas
flores que apenas cabian en el coche. Y cuando llegaron
70 a casa, la buena ama dona Marta exclamo:
— Parece que ustedes han comprado una de las chinam-
pas de Xochimilco.
VOCABULARIO
abundar to abound
apenas scarcely
caber to be contained
calendario m. calendar
cuadro m. picture
chinampa f . flower bed (found on
small islands in Lake Xochi-
milco)
culto m. worship
delirio m. delirium, frenzy
feo, -a ugly
friolera f . trifle
gardenia f . gardenia
idolo m. idol
joya f . jewel
lirio m. lily
majestad f . majesty
may a m. and f. Maya; Mayan
motivo m. motive
mural mural
pesom. peso
precioso, -a precious; beautiful
provincia f. province
ramillete m. bouquet
sacrificio m. sacrifice
solicited f . petition
violeta f . violet
VAGANDO FOR LA CAPITAL 271
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
bellisimo most beautiful i quien sois ? who arc you ? (The
caber en to fit into, be contained in second person plural was used
lo mejor the best, best part in olden days as a polite way
rendir culto a to worship of speech, even to one person.)
NOMBRES PROP10S
Pedro de Alvarado, chief lieutenant to Cortes, in defending the
rear guard of the Spanish army as it retreated from Tenochtitlan,
is said to have found himself trapped by a great gap in the causeway
over which the soldiers were fleeing. He made a tremendous leap
across this gap, at a point called El salto de Alvarado, Alvarado's
Leap. In the suburbs reached by the Calles del Puente de Al-
varado is found the ancient ahuehuete (Mexican cypress) tree
called el Arbol de la Noche Triste, marking the route of the Span-
iards' flight the night of July 2, 1520.
Calendario Azteca, Aztec Calendar, is a circular stone of basalt
weighing 24 tons. It is twelve feet in diameter and three feet thick,
and is sometimes called the " Stone of the Sun." It is carved with
hieroglyphics and concentric circles which represent divisions of time,
and is a sort of calendar. It was probably made around the year
1500 and was discovered in the Zocalo the middle of the iyth century.
The year is represented as having eighteen months and one week,
with months of four weeks each, and weeks of five days. Small
reproductions of the stone are stamped on many souvenirs of leather,
stone and other materials sold in Mexico.
In the ruins of Chicken Itza, in the northern part of the peninsula
of Yucatan, and in Uxmal, are found some of the most interesting
relics of the prehistoric Mayan civilization which prevailed in
Yucatan, Guatemala and Honduras before the arrival of the Span-
iards. Great pyramids, temples and courts, strangely carved figures
of stone and inscriptions provide most interesting material for archae-
ologists. The Carnegie Institution, the University of Chicago, the
Mexican government and different societies are engaged in the study
of these impressive remains.
272 QUINITO EN AMERICA
In Monte Albdn, in the state of Oaxaca (Oajaca) there was dis-
covered in 1932, by Dr. Alfonso Caso, a great treasure of prehistoric
gold and silver vessels and ornaments, which is considered the most
valuable and the most beautiful that has so far been encountered in
America. After exhibition in the National Museum in Mexico, D. F.,
of part of this find, all articles are to be put on display in the Pro-
vincial Museum of Oaxaca.
The Palacio de Bellas Aries, Fine Arts Palace, of Mexico City
was begun in 1900 and completed in 1934. It cost more than
36 million pesos. In its beautiful auditorium are given excellent
musical performances, frequently under the direction of the emi-
nent Mexican composer and conductor, Carlos Chavez, who has
also acted as conductor of the Philadelphia Symphony Orchestra.
The great glass curtain of the stage was made by Tiffany of New
York.
Diego de Rivera is one of the most famous mural painters of the
present day. In many of the public buildings of Mexico are found
his pictures. He has also painted murals in the United States. His
radical political views cause him to satirize the Spanish Conquest,
capitalism and the machine age in his painting. Many of his pic-
tures in Mexico represent the exploitation of the Indians by the
Spaniards and the cruelty of the Conquest by Cortes. Rivera's
frescoes may be seen in the National Agricultural School of Chapingo,
in the stairway of the National Palace, in the Health Ministry and
in the Reforma Hotel of the capital, also in the Palace of Cortes
in Cuernavaca.
Maria, Martha. Xochimilco (the x is pronounced like s) will be
discussed in the next chapter. Peso, peso, the Mexican dollar or
standard coin, normally worth about 50 cents in U.S. currency,
has recently (1940) been as low in value as 1 6 or 17 cents.
FJERCICTOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. En Mejico Cortes — . 2. Cortes dijo a Carlos V quc
le habia dado — . 3. Muy — , Cortes murio — . 4. En el
VAGANDO FOR LA CAPITAL 273
Monte Alban fue descubierto un tesoro de — . 5. El Calen-
dario Azteca es — . 6. Se exhibe esta piedra en el Museo
Nacional para que — . 7. A Rosa le gustaria — . 8. Dona
Ana quedo asustada al mirar — . 9. Los guerreros indios se
hacian la guerra con el fin de — . 10. Los aztecas y otros
indios rendian culto a — . n. En el Palacio Nacional de
Bellas Artes se pueden oir — y se exhiben — . 12. En todas
partes de la capital abundan — . 13. Segun Rosa, los muchos
lirios hicieron que dona Ana tuviese — .
II. Use in sentences the following idioms. Use them in
the third person plural, any tense, where a verb is involved.
i. caber en. 2. rendir culto a. 3. lo mejor. 4. tardar en.
5. negarse a.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. Antes que viniesen los espanoles. Before the Spaniards
came. Para que todo el mundo la viese. So that (in order
that) everybody might see it. Cuando lleguemos a casa. When
we reach tiomc.
TENTH CASE of the USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In the dependent clauses of the above sentences (all ad-
verbial clauses), the verb is in the subjunctive mood.
An adverbial clause must express its verb in the subjunc-
tive, if and when there is implied indefiniteness, uncertainty,
future time or contingency with respect to the fulfilment of
the action expressed by the clause.
The more common adverbial conjunctions which introduce
such clauses are :
Those of time: antes (de) que, before; cuando, when; des-
pues que, after; hasta que, until; luego que or asi que, as
soon as.
274 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
Of purpose: para que or a fin de que, in order that, so that.
Of concession: aunque, though, although; aun cuando, even
if-
Of proviso: con tal que or siempre que, provided that; a
menos que, unless.
Of result: de manera que or de modo que, so that, in such
a way that; of negative result: sin que, without.
Of supposition: en caso (de) que, in case that; como si,
as if.
Notice, however, that if the action of the dependent verb
is represented as an accomplished or unquestioned fact, that
verb is then in the indicative (unless introduced by antes que,
which is always followed by the subjunctive): cuando lie-
gar on a casa, when they reached home.
I. Read and translate into English the following sentences:
i. No ire aunque tenga el tiempo. 2. No fui aunque tenia
el tiempo. 3. Voy a quedarme aqui hasta que lleguen mis
padres. 4. Me quede aqui hasta que llegaron. 5. Dijo que
lo haria para que no tuviesemos nosotros que hacerlo. 6. No
querian vendermelo a menos que yo tuviera el dinero para
pagarlo. 7. Lo dire de manera que Vd. me crea. 8. Lo dije
de manera que Vd. me creyo. 9. En caso que ellos descubran
el tesoro van a darme la mi tad.
II. Explain why the subjunctive is or is not used in each
of the adverbial clauses of I.
III. Using the plan outlined on page 266, give a synopsis
in the 3rd pers. plural of: escribirmelo, to write it to me;
ponerselo, to put it on (to oneself).
IV. Replace the English words of the following sentences
with the suitable Spanish words:
i. No saldremos until he puts it on. 2. No queriamos salir
until he put it on. 3. When he sees me me saludara. 4. No
VAGANDO FOR LA CAPITAL 275
queria saludarme whenever (when) he saw me. 5. When you
write it to me yo estare muy lejos de aqui. 6. Yo estaba lejos
de aqui when he wrote it to me. 7. Although you may put it
on, Vd. no estara bien ataviado.
V. Make negative the following sentences:
i. Escribanmelo Yds. 2. Pongaselo Vd. 3. Pongamoselo
a el. 4. Escribamoselo a ella. 5. Levantemonos. 6. Bus-
quemosla. 7. Conduzcamosle al hotel. 8. Cojamosle por el
brazo. 9. Denselos Vds. a ellas. 10. Digannoslas Yds.
CAPlTULO XXXV
UNA EXCURSION A XOCHIMILCO
Durante la comida de aquella noche don Felipe les
explico a sus parientes lo que significa Xochimilco. Dijo:
— Esa aldea esta a orillas de uno de los numerosos
lagos que antes existian en los alrededores de Tenochtit-
5 Ian. Hoy ese lago, mucho mas pequeno que antes, es
un laberinto casi interminable de canales, por donde
pasan numerosas piraguas o canoas llenas de gente, sobre
todo los domingos y dlas de fiesta. Es un lugar suma-
mente pintoresco y si quereis iremos alia mafiana, que
10 es domingo.
— Seria interesante visitar a Xochimilco — dijo dona
Ana. — Y prometo no comprar alii mas flores.
Al dia siguiente subieron todos a un tren (asi se llama
en Mejico un tranvia) que estaba abarrotado de gente.
15 Al bajar en Xochimilco se encontraban rodeados de ex-
cursionistas y vendedores. Estos vendedores insistian en
venderles frutas y flores, canastos y comestibles. Re-
cordando lo que habia prometido, dona Ana se nego a
comprar nada, pero Pepe y Quinito compraron un canasto
20 y unos ramilletes que metieron dentro y se lo ofrecieron
a su madre y a Rosa.
Escogieron una de las piraguas que llevaba el nombre
« Rosa » y pidieron al botero que los llevasen a dar un
paseo por los canales. El botero les sonrio y con un palo
25 largo empuj6 contra el fondo del canal. Movida asi, la
piragua paso lentamente por el agua. De vez en cuando
276
UNA EXCURSION A XOCHIMILCO 277
se les acercaron otras canoas en que iban pequenas or-
questas de musica que les hacia agradable la excursion.
— j Que encantador es este sitio ! — exclamo Rosa.
— Es un verdadero paraiso, insuperable, bellisimo. \ Ojala 30
que yo pudiera venir aca todos los dias !
Despu6s de vagar por entre chinampas floridas y ob-
servar con sumo interes cuanto se divertian los excursio-
nistas, volvieron en el tren a la capital. En camino pre-
gunto Pepe a su tio : 35
— <; Puedes decirnos cu&l es el origen de la palabra
« Mejico » ?
— Dicen que el sacerdote-jefe de los primeros pobla-
dores indios se llamaba Mexitl y que de este nombre
fueron derivadas varias palabras: Mexihco, el dios de la 40
guerra, Mexico (o Mejico) y mexicano (o mejicano), para
indicar el pais y sus habitantes. La antigua capital se
conocla por Tenochtitlan-Mexihco, en honor de Tenoch,
que la construyo, y de Mexihco. Los conquistadores
espanoles decian « Mejico » como nombre de la ciudad y, 45
mas tarde, del pals.
— Entonces la equis de Mexico se pronuncia como la
jota espanola. <J Por que es eso ?
— Porque en un tiempo, aun en Espaiia, se pronunciaba
asi la equis. Hoy en Espaiia se escribe « Mejico » y 50
« mejicano, » pero en este pais se escriben oficialmente
estas palabras con la equis. Los « Estados Unidos Mexi-
canos » es el nombre oficial del pals.
— <: Aprendieron los pobladores espanoles la lengua
mejicana ? — pregunto Quinito. 55
— Los sacerdotes y misioneros si aprendieron varios
dialectos mejicanos para emplearlos en sus trabajos entre
278 QUINITO EN AMERICA
los indios. Los otros espanoles casi nunca aprendieron
bien ningiin idioma mejicano y pronunciaban mal los
60 nombres indios. For ejemplo, de Aulizapan hicieron Ori-
zaba; de Huitsilopochco, Churubusco; de Cuauhnahuac,
Cuernavaca. Hoy dia, aunque 400.000 habitantes de
Mejico no hablan otro idioma mas que el mejicano (o el
nahuatle), que es el mas antiguo de todos los dialectos, la
65 mayor parte de los mejicanos saben poco de estos idiomas.
— Me parece sumamente dificil aprender estos lenguajes
indios. Y me es dificil pronunciar muchos nombres meji-
canos: Teotihuacan, Popocatepetl, Ixtaccihuatl, Quetzal-
coatl y otros muchos mas.
70 — Y eran dificiles tambien para los primeros espanoles
de Mejico — contesto don Felipe.
VOCABULARIO
acd here florido, -a flowery, in flower
aim or aun even, still, yet fondo m. bottom
botero m. boatman insistir to insist
canoa f . canoe jota f . j (name of the letter)
comestible m. eatable; pi. pro- meter to put
visions, food nahuatle m. Nahuatl (oldest In-
dialecto m. dialect dian language of Mexico)
dondequiera (que) wherever oficial official
empujar to push palo m. pole, stick
equis f. x (name of the letter) piragua f . pirogue (canoe hoi-
excursion f . excursion lowed out of a tree)
excursionista m. and f . excur- sacerdote m. priest
sionist tranvia m. street car, tramway
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
hoy dia nowadays sacerdote-jefe priest-leader
insistir en to insist upon
UNA EXCURSION A XOCHIMILCO 279
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Xochimilco means Place of the Flowers, Flowery Spot. In remote
times the great valley in which Mexico City lies was a series of
lakes. These were connected by canals. On the many islands of
these lakes the prehistoric settlers built their towns. (It is believed
that these early inhabitants came originally from Asia, crossed
Behring Strait — then probably an isthmus — and in the course of
many centuries worked their way down into Mexico and Central
America.) When the Spaniards came to conquer the great city
that the Aztecs then possessed in this valley, they found it built
on an island threaded with canals. Under Spanish colonization the
canals were filled in. Even today trouble arises by the occasional
sinking of the land, as has happened in some degree to the Palacio
de Bellas Artes.
Through the four centuries that have passed since Cortes took
Tenochtitlan, the valley has become much drier and there is now
concern lest Lake Xochimilco, lying outside of and south of Mexico
City and once connected with it by the Canal de la Viga (part of
which may still be seen), may eventually be completely dried up.
The chinampas were originally floating rafts on which natives
built huts and planted trees and flowers. The roots of the trees
eventually grew to the lake bottom and thus permanently anchored
these rafts in their positions.
The boats or large flat-bottomed canoes which pass about in the
canals nearly all bear women's names, spelled out in flowers. They
are propelled by a pole pushed against the canal bottom by the
boatman. In smaller craft travel about sellers of flowers, food,
drinks and souvenirs, seeking customers among the holiday makers
aboard the piraguas.
Churubusco, a town about five miles south of Mexico City.
Cuernavaca, a city about 50 miles southwest of the capital. It was
captured by Cortes before he undertook the attack on Tenochtitlan,
and was his favorite place of residence. Emperor Maximilian had
here a beautiful country seat. Orizaba, a city about 65 miles south-
west of Vera Cruz; also the name of a beautiful pyramid-like peak,
280 QUINITO EN AMERICA
18,314 feet high, located 16 miles northwest of the city. Teotihuacdn,
meaning the "City of the Gods" (San Juan de Teotihuacdn), is
situated about 30 miles northeast of the capital. Near the town are
found two great pyramids, several smaller ones and a walled citadel,
all supposed to be the work of the Toltecs, who antedated the Aztecs.
The chief differences between Mexican speech (or, for that matter,
that of all Spanish America) and that of Castile, called Castilian
(castellano), lie in the pronunciation of certain consonants. These
are as follows: z in Spanish America has the value of Castilian s,
as also has c when found before e or i. Moreover, // is pronounced like
Castilian y by most Spanish Americans. In Argentina, // has be-
come very similar to the Italian g in giorno. These variations from
Castilian are heard also in different parts of Spain. There are also,
of course, other variations in pronunciation, found in different coun-
tries and sections of Spanish America, but none of them is sufficiently
important to make it impossible for a Spanish-speaking person, of
whatever origin, to understand or make himself understood in any
corner of the Spanish-speaking world.
The North American student of Spanish is usually taught Castilian
pronunciation because it is the most consistent and uniform. (Con-
fusion as to spelling — cazar and casar, meaning respectively to hunt
and to marry, callo and cayo, I am silent and shoal — is thus avoided.)
Moreover, Castilian is the only standardized pronunciation. The
North American who expects to speak Spanish to Spanish Americans
may, of course, use the way of speech heard in the country where
he finds himself. It is not difficult, if he first learned Castilian, to
switch to the use of the 5 sound for z, or c before e or i, which is
common to all Spanish America, or to use the y sound for //.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. i Que es Xochimilco ? 2. <; Como viajaron los Gomez y
don Felipe a Xochimilco? 3. <; En que insistian los vende-
dores ? 4. £ Que compraron los muchachos ? 5. <i Que nom-
bre llevaba la piragua que escogieron los turistas ? 6. <; Qu6
UNA EXCURSION A XOCHIMILCO 281
hacia el bolero para hacer mover la piragua ? 7. <J Que creyo
Rosa que era este sitio ? 8. <i Quien fue Mexitl ? 9. £ Cuales
nombres se derivaron del nombre de este sacerdote-jefe ?
10. <J Que nombre dieron los indios prehistoricos a su capital ?
1 1 . <: Como se pronuncia la equis del nombre del pais ?
12. <; Como se escribe en Espana este nombre? 13. <j Cual
es el nombre oficial del pais ? 14. <; For que aprendieron los
misioneros varios dialectos mejicanos ?
II. Associate in thought the words of the first column with
those of the second:
orilla comer
ciudad musica
chinampa tranvia
comestible palo
empujar lago
orquesta flores
misionero alrededores
abarrotado sacerdote
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i . Es un sitio belllsimo. It is a most beautiful, very beautiful,
place.
The ending -isimo, when added to the positive degree of
an adjective (after dropping the vowel ending), gives what
is called the absolute superlative form of the adjective. It
is so called because no comparison is in mind with any other
noun modified by the same adjective; the high degree of the
quality ascribed to the noun is absolute, not relative. More
examples: Facil: facilisimo, very easy. (Notice that the stress
and written accent on the syllable fa- disappears in the ab-
solute superlative form. Why ?) Grande: grandisimo, very
great, very large. Cansado: cansadisimo, most tired, very tired.
Mucho: muchisimo, very much.
282 QUINITO EN AMERICA
The consonantal sound in which the stem of the adjective
ends must be retained by proper spelling: rico, riquisimo;
largo, larguisimo; feliz, felicisimo. These spelling changes
are similar to those that occur in consonant-changing verbs
(see pages 68-70) .
The stem of some adjectives reverts to that of the original
Latin root: fuerte ( Latin, fortis), strong, for tisimo, very strong;
nuevo (Latin, novus), new, novisimo, very new; bueno (Latin,
bonus), good, bonisimo, very good; fiel (Latin, fidelis) , faithful ,
fidelisimo, highly faithful ; libre (Latin, liberus),free, liberrimo,
most free.
Adjectives ending in -ble usually change this syllable to
-bil before adding -isimo: notable, notabilisimo.
Some adjectives, especially those having irregular grada-
tion (see page 196), have two forms in the absolute superla-
tive, one regular and the other irregular, the latter being de-
rived directly from the Latin superlative :
bueno: bonisimo or Optimo (Latin, optimus)
malo: malisimo or pesimo (Latin, pessimus)
grande: grandisimo or maximo (Latin, maximus)
pequeno: pequenisimo or mlnimo (Latin, minimus)
alto: altisimo or supremo (Latin, supremus)
facil: fad lisimo or facilimo (Latin, facillimus)
Some adjectives, either because of their length or their
meaning, cannot well take the -isimo ending. Among such
would be: desagradable, disagreeable; cuadr ado f square; ter-
cero, third. Sumamente, muy and similar modifiers may be
used instead of the -isimo ending, especially with long ad-
jectives: sumamente desagradable, highly disagreeable.
2. Venir aca. To come here.
Aca, here, and alia, there, are usually used with verbs ex-
pressing motion toward a place. Aqui, here, and alii, there,
are used most frequently with verbs not denoting motion.
UNA EXCURSION A XOCHIMILCO 283
3. / Ojald (que) yopudiera venir! Would that I could come!
When the imperfect subjunctive is used in an optative or
desiderative clause, it expresses a wish or hope that cannot
be fulfilled. If the present subjunctive is used, it indicates
possibility that the hope may be fulfilled: / Ojala (que) pros-
per en mucho! I hope they will prosper greatly.
I. Form the absolute superlative of the following adjectives
and give the English equivalent thereof :
raro, hermoso, simpatico, alegre, natural, intense, claro,
libre, cruel, popular, notable, util, pintoresco, artistico, in-
superable, independiente.
II. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words:
i. Vengan Vds. here. 2. No vayan Vds. there. 3. Here
lo tiene Vd. 4. Ella trabaja there. 5. \ Ojala que ellos may
be able hacerlo ! 6. j Ojala que ellos might be able hacerlo !
7. Let us sing la cancion. 8. Que ella sing it.
III. Read and translate into English the following sen-
tences:
i. Es lastima que Vd. no la conozca. 2. Hare lo que Vd.
quiera. 3. Insistio en que se lo diesemos. 4. Que Pedro me
lo de. 5. Me alegre de que Vd. lo dijese. 6. Sentiriamos
mucho que ella no viniera. 7. Es probable que el nos lo
ofrezca. 8. Mandaron que llegasemos temprano para que
pudieramos hacer el trabajo antes de que ellos tuvieran que
partir. 9. Ofrezcamoselo a el. 10. Fue necesario que yo lo
buscara. n. No hay nada que les guste. 12. Quienquiera
que sea, que se vaya. 13. Buscaremos un botero que sea una
persona alegre.
IV. Give the reason for the use of the subjunctive wherever
it occurs in the sentences of III.
CAPlTULO XXXVI
ASUNTOS DE LENGUA
En casa siguio la conversacion acerca de las diferencias
de lengua en Mejico. Dijo dona Ana:
— Ya he notado que se emplean aqui muchas palabras
que antes no habia oido nunca. Se que el espanol es el
5 idioma oficial de M6jico y que es el que emplea la gente
educada. La rica literatura mejicana esta escrita en
espanol. Pero hay muchas palabras que son diferentes
de las que se usan en Espana. For ejemplo, aqui se dice
« chulo » por bonito; « tren » por Iran via; « chamaco »
o por muchacho; « camion » por autobus; « recamara » por
dormitorio; « recamarera » por camarera; y « nieve » por
helado.
— Y « mecate » por cuerda — dijo Quinito — ; « es-
cuintle » por perro callejero; « guajalote » por pavo;
5 « loncheria » por merendero; « elevador » por ascensor.
Creo que estas ultimas dos palabras se deben a la in-
fluencia norteamericana, que es bastante notable aqui en
ciertas cosas.
— Seria ficil aiiadir otras a la lista de palabras que os
o suenan nuevas — dijo don Felipe. — Tambien, hay
muchas palabras que se emplean solo en M6jico para
indicar cosas que se usan o se producen especialmente en
este pals: tequila y pulque, nombres de ciertas bebidas
alcoholicas derivadas de la planta que se llama maguey.
5 Muchos nombres de drboles y plantas os pareceran raros:
ahuehuete, una especie de cipres muy grande; henequ&i,
que es una especie del maguey.
284
ASUNTOS DE LENGUA 285
— Nosotros, castellanos, creemos que la pronunciation
mejicana se parece en algunos aspectos a la andaluza.
For ejemplo, la c delante de la i o la e, y la z se pronuncian 30
siempre como la s: « sinco » por cinco, « pas » por paz.
Y la // suena como la y : « tortiya » por tortilla. — Asl
observo Quinito y respondio su tio :
— No solo en Andalucia sino tambien en otras partes
de Espaiia se pronuncian asi esas letras. Y en toda la 35
America espanola se oye el mismo modo de pronunciarlas.
Habr£is notado que yo tambien empleo esa pronunciation.
Es facilisimo aprender a emplearla.
— Tambien es diferente el ritmo de la oration mejicana
— dijo Pepe. — Me parece a veces que los mejicanos 40
cantan sus oraciones en vez de decirlas de un modo sen-
cillo y claro. Y no mueven los labios con tanta actividad
como nosotros.
— Tienes razon — contesto don Felipe. — Pero aun
asi hablan espanol, y la gente educada lo escribe per- 45
fectamente. Hay que recordar que el espanol es uno,
aunque existan en cada pais hispano ciertas diferencias
de pronunciation y de vocabulario.
— Precisamente como el ingles de Norte America es un
poco diferente del que se habla en Inglaterra — anadio 50
dona Ana. — Pero es la misma lengua y los ingleses y
los norteamericanos se entienden sin gran dificultad. Don-
dequiera que se encuentre un ingles que viaje por los
Estados Unidos, entiende lo que se le dice.
— He leido que fu£ en M£jico donde se publicaron, en 55
espanol, en latin y en los dialectos mejicanos, los primeros
libros del Nuevo Mundo — dijo Quinito.
— Es verdad — respondio don Felipe. — La primera
286 QUINITO EN AMERICA
prensa fue traida a Mejico en 1534. En los afios siguientes
60 iban apareciendo muchos libros, mas de un siglo antes de
que se estableciera una prensa en Cambridge, Norte
America. Tambien conviene decir que la Universidad de
Mejico fue fundada en 1551, unos sesenta anos antes que
desembarcasen los Peregrinos en Plymouth.
VOCABULAR10
alcohdlico, -a alcoholic latin m. Latin
bebida f. drink letra f . letter (of the alphabet)
bonito, -a pretty maguey m. maguey
callejero, -a of the street merendero m. lunchroom
camarera f . chambermaid notar to notice, note
cipres m. cypress oration f . sentence
correcto, -a correct pavo m. turkey
cuerda f. cord, rope planta f . plant
diferencia f . difference prensa f . press
educar (que) to educate pulque m. pulque
especie f . species, kind sencillo, -a simple
influencia f. influence tequila f . tequila
labio m. lip
NOTE: For English meanings of Mexican words used in the text,
see the Spanish equivalents of those words in the above vocabulary.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
aun asi even so perro callejero street dog, mongrel,
en vez de instead of "mut"
NOTAS
Inglaterra, England.
The letters mentioned in the text are named in Spanish: c = ce;
II = elle; z = zeta; y = i griega (Greek i). All letters are of femi-
nine gender.
ASUNTOS DE LENGUA 287
The maguey, the agave, the henequen and the pita are some of the
various species of plants which abound on Mexican soil and which
are useful in different ways. For instance, the fibre of the henequen
cr sisal plant is made into strong cord which is much used in the
United States in binding sheaves of wheat and corn. The other
plants mentioned also produce useful fibre. From some species of
pita or maguey is extracted a sugary liquid (aguamiet) which when
fermented, produces an ill-smelling but mild alcoholic drink called
pulque. Tequila and mescal are drinks similarly derived from juices
of certain types of these plants, but they are distilled and much
stronger than pulque. The workman who gathers this juice of the
maguey is called a tlachiquero.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i . El dialecto nahuatle es la lengua oficial de Mejico. 2. La
literatura mejicana esta escrita en portugues. 3. En Mejico
chulo significa fco. 4. Chamaco significa muchacho. 5. Una
recamarera arregla las camas. 6. Un helado se llama nieve
en Mejico. 7. Un escuintle es un perro callejcro. 8. Un
guajalote es una cspecie de cipres. 9. El mecate es una bebida
alcoholica. 10. La tequila se deriva de una planta llamada
maguey, n. El henequen sirve para hacer cuerdas. 12. En
Mejico y otros paises hispanoamericanos se dice cabayo en
vcz de caballo; sierto en vez de cierto; rasa en vez de raza.
13. Esta pronunciation es tan correcta como la castellana.
14. Los mejicanos educados escriben perfectamente el es-
panol.
II. For each of the following words give a Spanish noun
related thereto in derivation and meaning:
beber; dormir; nevado; callejero; nombrar; pronunciar;
andaluz; diferente; can tar; educar; dificil; leer.
288 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Muchos nombres os pareceran raros. Many names will
doubtless seem odd to you. Habreis not ado. You must have
noticed.
The future and the future perfect tenses are often used to
express probability or likelihood in present time. More ex-
amples: Este senor sera su amigo, this gentleman must be
your friend, is probably your friend. Ellos me habran visto,
they must have seen me, they probably have seen me.
These same tenses may be used in questions to express
wonderment or conjecture: £ Quien sera el que viene ? Who
can be he who is coming ? £ Quien habra hecho esto ? Who
can have done this ?
2. Dondequiera que el se encuentre. Wherever he finds
himself.
We have here an adverbial clause of place introduced by
an adverbial conjunction (dondequiera que) that implies in-
definiteness or vagueness. Hence the verb of the clause is in
the subjunctive (se encuentre).
Other such indefinite adverbial conjunctions, all having as
their second component part quiera (one may wish, present
subjunctive of querer) and written as two or three words, are:
adondequiera que, to whatever place; en dondequiera que,
in whatever place; por dondequiera que, in or through what-
ever place; como quiera que, however, in whatever way; cuando
quiera que, whenever. In all such compound conjunctions the
final word is que, just as the indefinite pronoun quienquiera
is always followed by que.
I. Read and translate into English the following sentences:
i. Adondequiera que el viajase, no veia arboles algunos.
2. Por dondequiera que yo corra, el siempre me sigue.
ASUNTOS DE LENGUA 289
3. Cuando quiera que vengan, les daremos la bienvenida.
4. Como quiera que eso se hiciera, no resultaba bien.
5. Creemos que Vd. habra estado en Mejico. 6. <; Quien lo
tendra ? 7. <; Donde estara mi sombrero ? 8. Vd. lo habra
dejado en el comedor, <i verdad ? 9. <i Que habra sido de
ella ? 10. Ella se habra ido.
II. Following the plan given on page 266, prepare synopses
of the following verbs in the ist pers. singular:
educarse, to educate oneself; distinguirse, to distinguish one-
self; ir, to go
III. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words.
i. However he educates himself, sera un hombre interesan-
tisimo. 2. However he educated himself, es un hombre bo-
nisimo. 3. To whatever place he goes, todos le reciben con
carino. 4. To whatever place lie went, alguien le esperaba.
5. In whatever place he distinguishes himself, pocos le conoceran
en persona. 6. However he distinguished himself, seguia siendo
muy humilde.
IV. Answer in Spanish the following questions, making
your reply express probability:
i. <i Cuantos anos tendra Pepe? 2. ^ Que hora sera?
3. d Que habra sido de nuestro amigo? 4. <; Que le habra
pasado a Juan ? 5. <J Con quien habra salido ella?
V. Say and write in Spanish the following sentences. Use
the preposition a before the direct object to make clear that
what follows it is the object of the verb.
i. The 11 follows the 1. 2. The y follows the x. 3. The
z follows the y. 4. The c follows the b. 5. The n follows
the m.
SEXTA LECClON DE REPASO
VOCABULARTO
I. Give the English for the following Spanish words:
deslizarse
acierto
el soltero
nevado
adentro
aterrizar
montanoso
la caiia
el avion
avanzado
el ge rente
el canasto
el henequen
la corte
el mestizo
el huarache
el vidrio
el sarape
el lecho
la revolucion
aliado
el plomo
hostil
el arma de fucgo
el comestible
el subdito
la armadura
la cantidad
la cruzada
el tolteca
la friolera
el invasor
la majestad
el culto
el maya
el idolo
caber
mural
la solicitud
el peso
el excursionista
ape n as
el sacrificio
la chinampa
meter
el ramillete
la jota
la piragua
el dialecto
oficialmente
empujar
el fondo
la camarera
el botero
alcoholico
la equis
el merenclero
el cipres
la especie
aun
la loma
la oracion
el sudeste
callejero
por encima de
II. Give the Spanish for the following English words:
to choose
above
the map
the color
the market
whoever
the page
to hide
perfect
real
elderly
the cook
the corn
to adorn
the successor
to delay
the peak
the housekeeper
the difficulty
to tire
human
the problem
to fight
the rose
?90
according to
the smile
to take off
the sugar cane
the copper
bright
the workman
the weapon
LECCION DE REPASO
291
to abound
the retreat
the fire
the warrior
ugly
the jewel
the gift
the beard
the calendar
the motive
the gardenia
the lily
the province
the violet
the picture
the delirium
the excursion
the pole
the provisions
precious
the canoe
flowery
the street car
the priest
correct
the drink
official
to insist
the card
the difference
pretty
wherever
the lip
the Latin
to educate
there
the plant
the press
the turkey
the influence
the letter
to notice
simple
1. — fue obrero.
2. — se veia el pico.
I. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. At one time he was a workman.
2. The peak was seen in the distance.
3. We became proud.
4. We were on the shore itself.
5. They ran along the shore.
6. She looked downward.
7. They returned inland.
8. I would say the same thing.
9. She smiles from time to time.
II. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. Ellos se negaron a ir con- i. They — go with me.
migo.
2. Tardaremos dos horas en
llegar.
— orgullosos.
Estuvimos en — .
Corrieron — orilla.
6. Ella miro — .
7. Volvieron — .
8. Yo diria — .
9. Ella sonrie — .
2. We — in arriving.
3. No caben todos en el tran-
via.
4. Estos indios rindieron culto
al sol.
5. Compran lo mejor de los
comestibles.
3, There is not — in the street
car.
4, These Indians — the sun.
5, They buy — the provi-
sions. •
292 QUINITO EN AMERICA
6. Este cuadro es bellisimo. 6, This picture is — .
7. Insisten en darmelo. 7. They — .
8. Hoy dia muchos viajan por 8. — many travel by plane,
avion.
9. En vez de decirmelo, el se 9. — , he kept silent,
callo.
EJERCIC1OS DE GRAMATICA
I. Answer the following questions:
i . What tense is represented by clla habra llegado? 2. Give
two ways of translating into English ella habra llegado.
3. What use of the future is illustrated in the question:
I Que hora sera ? 4. Answer the preceding question in such
a way as to express probability that it is a certain hour of
the day. 5. Why is the subjunctive necessary in each of
the following sentences? (a) No hay nada que me guste.
(b) Hare que el me lo de. (c) El que Vd. este aqui me en-
canta. (d) No diga nadie eso. (e) Sentemonos. (f) Lo
terminare antes que el venga. (g) Dondequiera que el vaya
tiene amigos.
II. In the following sentences replace the infinitive with
the correct form of the verb :
i. Lo leera para que yo lo comprender. 2. Lo leyo para
que yo lo comprender. 3. Aunque yo tardar en llegar, voy a
partir en seguida. 4. Aunque yo partir tarde, llegue a tiempo.
5. Por dondequiera que ellos wajar, oiran hablar bien el es-
panol. 6. Adondequiera que Vd. mirar, veia mucha gente.
7. Como quiera que se hacer eso, resultara bien. 8. Como
quiera que se hacer eso, resultaba bien. 9. He hecho que ellos
me lo traer. 10. Hice que ellos me lo traer. n. Buscan una
camarera que saber arreglar bien las camas.
III. Express the following infinitive phrases in the horta-
tory form (let us) of the subjunctive:
LECCION DE REPASO 293
i. Decirlo. 2. No decirlo. 3. Decirselo a ella. 4. No
decirselo a ella. 5. Enviarselo. 6. No enviarselo. 7. Acor-
darse de el. 8. No acordarse de el. 9. Levantarse. 10. No
levantarse.
IV. Give the compound gerunds of the following simple
forms:
i. Hablandome. 2. Creyendolo. 3. Ofreciendonoslo.
4. Diciendoselo. 5. Dandomelos.
V. Give the absolute superlative of each of the following
adjectives:
scncillo; feo; alto; notable; largo; grandc; bueno; pe-
queiio, vivo; feliz; facil; fuerte; celebre.
VI Use jojala! to introduce optative (or desiderative)
sentences, first with the present subjunctive and then with
the imperfect subjunctive. Use the following infinitive phrases
in forming such sentences.
T. Saberlo. 2. Darmelo. 3. Traerselo. 4. Cerrarla.
5. Rcndirnoslo.
VII. Make negative the following sentences:
i. Que Rosa se vaya. 2. Vayase Vd. 3. Que los ninos
los compren. 4. Comprenlos Vds. 5. Aqui hay algo que me
encanta. 6. Hay alguien que quiere hablar con Vd. 7. Creo
que nadie viene.
VIII. Following the plan given on page 266, give a synopsis
of ponerlo aqui in the ist person singular: traerselo a el in
the 3rd pers. singular.
CAPtTULO XXXVII
CHARROS Y CHINAS POBLANAS
For vivir cerca del Bosque de Chapultepec podian los
Gomez y don Felipe visitar facilmente este sitio encanta-
dor. Un dia, despues de pasearse en coche por el esplen-
dido Paseo de la Reforma, una de las avenidas mas bellas
5 del mundo, entraron en el Bosque, bajaron del automovil
y echaron a andar bajo los grandes ahuehuetes. De
pronto exclamo Rosa :
— i Mirad ! <: Quienes son esos senores que vienen
montados a caballo ? j Que trajes mas bonitos llevan !
10 — Chica — contesto su tio, — aquellos caballeros son
charros, famosos jinetes mejicanos.
— <j Son vaqueros, entonces ? Saben montar a caballo
muy bien — dijo Rosa.
— Vaqueros, no; pero buenos jinetes, si. Son, muchos
15 de ellos, propietarios de haciendas; otros son hijos de
familias ricas a quienes les gusta manejar caballos.
Los charros llevaban chaquetas y pantalones de cuero
bordados con hilo de plata u oro, y grandes sombreros
adornados con figuras del aguila mejicana. Detras de
20 ellos venia un grupo de senoritas montadas tambien a
caballo. Vestian blusas de seda de vivos colores, faldas
bordadas y sombreros casi iguales a los que llevaban los
senores. Don Felipe explico que estas senoritas eran
chinas poblanas, tambien aficionadas a montar.
25 — Es la diversion favorita de charros y chinas poblanas
ir, ataviados asl, a dar paseos por la ciudad los domingos,
CHARROS Y CHINAS POBLANAS 295
sobre todo en el Bosque de Chapultepec. En los pueblos
mejicanos no es nada raro ver estos jinetes de ambos
sexos.
— <j De trajes regionales hay tantos en Mejico como 30
en Espana ? — pregunto Rosa.
— No tantos, pero hay algunos. For ejemplo, las te-
juanas de Tehuantepec son famosas por sus grandes re-
bocillos blancos.
— Y sin duda hay bailes tipicos mejicanos. 35
— Ya lo creo. El jarabe tapatio casi se puede llamar el
baile nacional de Mejico. Siento no poder demostraros
como se baila el jarabe tapatio, pero trataremos de verlo
bailar algun dia.
Mientras charlaban asi llegaron a una pequena plaza 40
en el Bosque en que se veian algunos bancos publicos.
Estando algo cansados iban los visitantes a sentarse
cuando Quinito exclamo bastante excitado:
— <; Quien lo crecria ? Estos bancos construidos con
azulejos son precisamente iguales a aquellos en que nos45
sentabamos con frecuencia Pepe y yo en el parque Maria
Luisa de Sevilla. <; No es verdad, Pepe ? Y esas pequenas
estatuas de don Quijote y Sancho Panza son como las
que se ven en Sevilla. Veis como en estos azulejos
estan representadas escenas tomadas del Quijote. Y esaso
fuente . . . Me parece un milagro encontrar reproducida
aqui esta cosa tan artistica de mi tierra.
Se rio don Felipe y contesto a su sobrino :
— Puede parecerte extrano eso, pero no lo es, porque
Mejico tiene muchisimas cosas de origen espaiiol. Esta 55
pequena plaza tan hermosa, con su fuente, sus figuras
de bronce y sus azulejos, se llama la « Fuente de don
296 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Quijote. » Es verdad que se parece mucho a la plaza
sevillana que dices, pero no es una copia; es obra de un
60 artista mejicano.
Quedaron Pepe y Quinito admirando por mucho tiempo
lo que habian descubierto, pero al fin exclamo Pepe:
— Bueno, bueno; sentemonos. Estoy muy cansado
de tanto andar.
65 — Yo lo estoy tambien — dijo su madre — y mucho.
Pero Quinito siguio mirando las pequenas estatuas de
don Quijote y Sancho Panza y los bancos de azulejos.
VOCABULARIO
dguila f. eagle jinete m. horseman, rider
banco m. bench manejar to handle, manage
blusa f. blouse, waist pantalones m. pi. trousers
bordar to embroider poblano, -a of a town (pueblo)
copia f. copy propietario m. proprietor
cuero m. leather rebocillo m. headdress (covering
charro m. horseman (in pictur- back of head and neck)
esque costume) regional regional
china f . maid, girl; china poblana reproducir (zco) to reproduce
horsewoman (in picturesque seda f . silk
costume) sevillano, -a Sevillan
diversion f. diversion , amusement sexo m. sex
extrano, -a strange tejuana f . woman of Tehuantepcc
falda f . skirt vaguer o m. cowboy
hilo m. thread
jarabe tapatio m. a Mexican
dance
MODISMOS
echar a andar to set out walking; montar a cabatto to ride a horse
echar a + infinitive to start,
begin + present participle
CHARROS Y CHINAS POBLANAS 297
NOTAS
Chapultepec means Grasshopper Hill. (See page 255 for brief dis-
cussion of the palace on this hill.) The Bosque contains many huge
ahuehuete trees and pleasant walks. The Paseo de la Reforma was
originally built to lead to the palace which Maximiliano and Carlota
built as their summer residence. It is the finest boulevard in all
Mexico.
The Parque de Maria Luisa in the outskirts of Seville in some
respects is like that of Chapultepec, with its thickly shaded walks
and plazoletas, in one of which is found an arrangement of benches
made of tiles on which are depicted scenes from the Quijote. At the
ends of the benches are found bronze figurines or small statues of
Don Quijote and Sancho Panza. In the center of the plazoleta is a
fountain. This adornment of a spot in Maria Luisa Park in Seville
was a part of the work done in preparing the park and neighboring
land for the delightful Ibero-American Exposition held there in 1929.
The similar plazoleta in Chapultepec Park was built in 1923 and is the
work of the Mexican sculptor A. Lopez.
The dguila mejicana is the national emblem of Mexico and appears
on its coat of arms. In the eagle's mouth is a serpent.
Tehuantepec, a city of 12,000 inhabitants, is some sixteen miles
from the Pacific Coast in the southern part of Mexico, on the Isthmus
of the same name. It is famous for the beauty of its women (te-
juanas) and their interesting regional dress, which consists of a short
red and yellow jacket with low neck and short sleeves, and a multi-
colored skirt with lace ruffles. The rebocillo, worn on festal oc-
casions, is white and forms a sort of halo about the back of the head
and covers the back of the neck.
The charros and chinas poblanas, as related in the text, are usually
people of well-to-do families who enjoy riding fine-bred horses and
like to "dress up" in striking costumes that have become traditional.
The charro costume is especially ornate. The tightly fitting trousers,
and the short jacket, often made of fine soft leather, are embellished
with heavy embroidery, usually in silver thread, and with silver
buttons. The large hat is likewise embroidered, and usually the
298 QUINITO EN AMERICA
underside of the brim has several designs containing the Mexican
eagle and serpent. The saddle and bridle are studded with silver
and the spurs are of the same metal. A lariat is carried on the pommel
of the saddle. The china poblana costume is similarly rich and strik-
ing. The short-sleeved silk blouse and the ample flannel skirt bear
fancy designs in embroidery in contrasting colors. A brightly
colored sash or rebozo serves as a belt. On the front of the skirt is
often a large design of the eagle. The china poblana's hat is similar
to the charro's.
These riders are usually seen in Chapultepec Park, in the capital,
on Sundays and festal occasions But they are also found in many
cities and towns throughout the country.
EJERCICTOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <i Que sabc hacer muy bien un charro ? 2. <; Como cs el
traje do un charro? 3. £ Con que estan bordados sus pan-
talones y su chaqueta? 4. £ Como es la falda do una china
poblana ? 5. <; Sabe Vd. montar a caballo ? 6. En la capital
de Mejico, <; cual es el lugar favorito de estos jinetes ? 7. <; For
que cosa son famosas las tejuanas de Tehuantepec?
8. <i Donde esta situado Tehuantepec ? 9 <i Que baile se
puede llamar el baile nacional de Mejico ? 10. <; Lo ha visto
Vd. bailar ? 1 1 . <J Adonde iban a sentarse los Gomez ?
II. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English.
1. We know how to ride horse- i. — caballo.
back.
2. She started running. 2. Ella — correr.
3. Instead of running I shall sit 3. — , me sentare aqui.
here.
4. She was not only rich, but also 4. Ella era — rica — .
very pretty.
5. There is no room for the flowers. 5. Las flores — .
CHARROS Y CHINAS POBLANAS 299
EJERCICTOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Estan algo cansados. They are somewhat (rather) tired.
No es nada raro vcrlos. It is not at all unusual to see them.
In the above sentences algo and nada, usually indefinite
pronouns meaning respectively something and nothing, are
used as adverbs in the sense of somewhat or rather, and not
at all.
2. Estoy cansado y mucho. I am tired, very much so.
<j Esta Vd. cansado? Si, mucho. Are you tired? Yes, very.
Lo estoy. I am (so). (See page 95.)
Muy, which is a short form of mucho, is only used when
it precedes an expressed adjective or adverb. If the word
it modifies is not expressed, mucho, not muy, must be used.
3. Vamos a ver bailor el jarabe tapatio. We are going to
sec the "jarabe tapatio " danced. Vamos a verlo bailor. We arc
going to sec it danced. Oigo cantor la cancion. I hear the
song sung. La oigo cantor. I hear it sing.
From the above sentences we see that after verbs of per-
ception (ver, oir) an infinitive is used in Spanish where a past
participle is used in English to express the action seen or
heard.
Notice the construction used when a person is expressed
as performing the action seen or heard: Vimos bailor el jarabe
tapatio a esta senorita, we saw the "jarabe tapatio" danced by
this young lady, or, we saw this young lady dance the "jarabe
tapatio." Oiremos cantor la cancion a mi hermana, we shall
hear the song sung by my sister, or we shall hear my sister sing
the song.
4. Con frecuencia. Frequently (with frequency). Concarino.
A/eclionatcly (with a/ection). Con mucha actividad. Very
actively (with much activity).
300 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Con + a noun often forms in Spanish (as it does sometimes
in English) a phrase equivalent to an adverb.
I. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words :
i. <; Eran los colores rather vivos? 2. Si, they were (so).
3. Ella no estaba at all cansada. 4. Eso parece extrafio,
(iverdad? Si, very. 5. Si, it seems so. 6. <J Se siente Vd.
somewhat enfermo ? 7. Not very. 8. <J Oyo Vd la musica
played? (tocar). 9. Si, I heard it played. TO. Oyen hablar
espanol by the Mexicans, n. <i Vieron Yds. la casa built?
12. Si, we saw it built. 13. Frequently vamos al bosque.
14. Nos saludaron ajfcctionatcly.
II. Use the proper definite article before each of the fol-
lowing nouns. Tell why the form you use is correct.
agua, aguila, ama, arte, mapa, problema, multitud, hambre,
mano, idioma, guia, artista, alrededores, tribu, cruz, equis,
tranvia, dia, cipres.
III. Before the plural of the nouns in II use the correct
forms of the definite article.
IV. Following the model on page 266, give synopses in the
3rd person singular of the following verbs:
abrirmelo, to open it to me; cerrarnosla, to close it on us.
V. Say and write in Spanish :
i. Do not open (Vd.) it to me. 2. Do not close (Yds.) it
on us. 3. I ask you to open it to me. 4. I asked you not to
close it on us. 5. When you open it to me, I shall be there.
6. Before closing it on us, he laughed. 7. Before he closes
it on us, he will laugh. 8. Before he closed it on us, he laughed.
9. Having opened it to me, he went away. 10. Without
opening it to me, he looked at me. n. Without the man's
opening it to me, it will not be possible for me to enter.
CAPlTULO XXXVIII
EXCURSION A PUEBLA
El Valle de Mejico es el nombre que se da a la inmensa
cuenca en que esta situada la capital del pais. Este valle
esta rodeado de un horde montanoso, el cual hay que
atravesar al salir de la cuenca.
Habia tantos lugares en los alrededores de la capital 5
que querian visitar los Gomez que era imposible que los
viesen todos. Y siendo don Felipe un hombre de nego-
cios, el no podia acompanarlos siempre, pero puso a la
disposition de sus parientes el coche y su chofer Arturo,
quien conocia bien a todo Mejico. Decidieron hacer 10
primero una excursion a Puebla, al sudeste de la capital.
A poco de salir de casa y mientras iba subiendo el coche
hacia lo mas alto del borde montanoso, cogieron una
magnifica vista de los dos volcanes famosos, Popocatepetl
e Ixtaccihuatl, elevados picos nevados de una belleza in- 15
decible. Estos nombres indios significan « montana de
humo » y « mujer dormida. » Parecen dominar toda la
region.
La muy buena carretera por las montanas parecia peli-
grosa, pero no lo era. Llegaron primero a Cholula y 20
Rosa exclamo :
— Aqui parece que solo hay iglesias esparcidas por los
campos. Miradlas por todas partes.
— Si — dijo Pepe; — dicen que aqui hay una iglesia
para cada dia del afio. Espero que nuestra buena madre, 25
que esta tan aficionada a visitar iglesias, no querra entrar
en todas ellas.
301
302 QUINITO EN AMERICA
— No, senor — contesto dona Ana. — Pero hay una
por aqui que Felipe dijo que debemos visitar. Creo que
30 es aquella que se ve alii lejos en lo mas alto de un cerro.
<; No es aquella, Arturo ?
— Si, senora — dijo el chofer. — Vamos alia. Creo
que les gustara.
Era una maravilla esta iglesia, que fue construida hace
35 siglos por los espafioles sobre una piramide prehistorica
que estaba alii al venir los aztecas en el siglo XII. Desde
lo mas alto de la piramide dominaban los turistas un
soberbio paisaje de campos verdes y haciendas prosperas.
Observe') Quinito:
4o — Cholula, decia Cortes, era una gran ciudad cuando
la vio por primer a vez. Hoy se ven aqui solo casuchas y
calles estrechas.
Siguieron los excursionistas su cam in o con rumbo a
Puebla, la llamada Roma mejicana. Deseaban ver alii la
45 famosa ceramica de Talavera, tambien la iglesia de San
Francisco. Quedaron encantados con la ceramica y con los
bellos azulejos que se hacen en Puebla. Exclamo Pepe:
— Pero, <; como es que se llama de Talavera ? Tala-
vera de la Reina, situada cerca de Toledo, Esparia, es
50 donde se hace la mejor ceramica espanola. <; Es esta
solo una imitacion de la espanola ?
— Si, se puede llamar imitacion de la ceramica espanola
— dijo Arturo; — pero esta industria fue establecida
hace arios y anos por frailes espanoles, que tal vez vinieran
55 de Toledo o sus alrededores. No sabria yo si es mejor o
no que la que se produce en Espana.
— Es sumamente hermosa y encantadora — observo
Rosa. — Mira este bonito jarro, mama. Miralo bien.
EXCURSION A PUEBLA 303
Estuvieron maravillados los espanoles al visitar la iglesia
de San Francisco, en que se dice se celebro la primera 60
misa en Mejico. La fachada, con sus azulejos de colores
vivos, mezclados con ladrillos rojos, les sorprendio y
encanto. El interior, tambien rico en colores, tenia escul-
turas maravillosas cubiertas con oro.
Aquella noche los viajeros se quedaron en un hotel de 65
Puebla y a la manana siguiente empezaron el viaje de
regreso a la capital.
VOCABULARIO
borde m. rim, edge imitation i imitation
carretera f. highway indecible inexpressible
cubrir to cover, cubierto covered industria f. industry
(past participle) inmenso, -a immense
cuenca f bowl, basin ladrillo m brick
disposition f . disposal mezclar to mix, mingle
elevado, -a high, lofty misa L (religions) mass
escultura f . sculpture pirdmide f. pyramid
esparcir (zo) to scatter prospero, -a prosperous
estrecho, -a narrow regreso m. return
fachada f . facade, front volcdn m. volcano
humo m. smoke
MODTSMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a la disposition de at the command hombre de negocios businessman
of, disposal of viaje de regreso return trip
a poco de salir soon after leaving
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Cholula, about sixty miles southeast of Mexico City and near the
practically extinct volcano of Popocatepetl, is some five miles west of
Puebla and in the midst of many small villages and a rich farming
region. It is famous for the near-by prehistoric pyramid or mound,
304 QUINITO EN AMERICA
about 170 feet high, on top of which is a church erected by the early
Spanish colonists. This pyramid was in existence when the Aztecs
arrived there in 1175. Before the conquest of Cholula (now a town
of 6,000 people) there existed here a city of some 30,000 Nahuatl
Indians. From the heights of the town, now in decay, one has a
magnificent view out over beautiful fields. Cholula is in the heart
of a section abounding in churches built in Spanish colonial times.
Puebla (the word is now an obsolete form of pueblo), founded in
1532, is the capital of the state of the same name and, in the opinion
of many, the most beautiful city of all Mexico. The population of
Puebla de los Angeles (its full name) is about 200,000, making it the
third city in size in the country. It has some sixty churches, and
that of San Francisco is famous for its extraordinary richness of
appearance. Its dome is of yellowish green tiles and in its facade
are set blue, green, yellow, and predominantly red tiles in a red
brick background. It is thus quite flamboyant, but exceedingly
interesting The two graceful towers are delightful. The interior
of the church is ornate with onyx pillars, carvings and sculptures
covered with gold leaf. The wood carvings and mosaics, the paintings
and hangings, give its interior the appearance of a museum.
The ceramic production of Puebla is colorful and interesting.
The industry was started years ago by monks whose home town in
Spain was Talavera de la Reina, near Toledo, where for centuries
have been made what are probably the best pottery and tiles of
Spain. The pottery made in Puebla is called Talavera ware.
The markets of the city are exceptionally attractive.
EJERCICTOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. La capital de Mejico esta situada en el borde montanoso
que rodea un gran valle. 2. No era posible que los Gomez
visitasen todos los sitios que querian ver. 3. Don Felipe no
podia acompanarlos por estar enfermo. 4. Puso don Felipe
a la disposition de sus parientes el coche con su chofer. 5. A
EXCURSION A PUEBLA 305
poco de salir de la ciudad vieron dos iglesias que dominaban
el paisaje. 6. La carretera parecia peligrosa, pero no lo era.
7. Cholula esta situada en medio de muchas piramides. 8. Vi-
sitaron una iglesia situada al pie de una piramide antigua.
9. Las casas de Cholula todas eran ricos palacios. 10. Iban
los turistas a visitar en Puebla una mina de oro. n. La
ceramica de Puebla se llama ceramica de Talavera. 12. Tala-
vera de la Reina, en Espana, es famosa por su bella ceramica.
13. En la fachada de la iglesia de San Francisco se ven azulejos
de vivos colores. 14. El interior de la iglesia tiene esculturas
cubiertas con plata.
II. Select from the second column approximate synonyms
of the words of the first column :
inmenso alto
carretera lenguaje
elevado valle
cuenca cama
comestible vasto
idioma alimento
sacerdote camino
cuadro fraile
lecho pintura
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Tal vez vinieran. Perhaps they came.
The adverbial expression tal vez, perhaps, perchance, be-
cause it denotes uncertainty, usually causes the clause, main
or dependent, which follows it to be expressed in the sub-
junctive.
2. Vamos alld. Let's go there. Vamonos ahora. Let's go
(away) now.
The hortatory subjunctive of ir, to go, is vamos, not va-
yamos, as would be expected, since the latter is the first
306 QUINITO EN AMERICA
person plural of the present subjunctive. Ir is the only verb
that is irregular in the hortatory subjunctive. When used
reflexively (irse, to go away), the form becomes vamonos,
dropping the terminal 5.
3. Miralo. Look at it. Miradlos. Look at them.
Mira and mirad are the familiar or intimate forms of the
imperative mood, 2nd person singular and 2nd person plural.
The imperative forms that we have studied up to the present
have been the polite forms, which, as we know, are expressed
in the present subjunctive, 3rd person singular and 3rd person
plural: mirelo Vd., look at it; mirenlos Vds., look at them.
(See pages 77 and 212.)
The real imperative, called also the intimate or familiar
imperative, is formed in the following ways:
The singular is, in regular verbs, identical with the 3rd
person singular of the present indicative, and its subject when
expressed (it may be omitted) is tit. Examples:
habla (tu), speak; cone (tu), run; escribe (tu), write.
The plural is formed by dropping the terminal -r of the
infinitive and adding -d. The subject when expressed is
vosotros, -as. Examples:
hablad (vosotros), speak; corred (vosotros), run; escribid
(vosotros), write.
Note that all the above commands are affirmative. Other
forms, necessary in giving intimate negative commands, will
be studied later.
Pronoun objects, direct, indirect, or reflexive, are postfixed
to all affirmative intimate imperatives. Examples:
hdblame (tu), speak to me; escribemelo (tu), write it to
me; sientate (tu), seat yourself, sit down; cierralo (tu), open
it; abridmelo (vosotros), open it for me; dadselo (vosotros),
give it to him; cerradnosla (vosotros), close it on us.
EXCURSION A PUEBLA 307
Notice: sentaos (vosotros), seat yourselves, sit down. The
final -d of the intimate imperative plural disappears before
the reflexive pronoun os. This happens in all cases except
with the verb irse, to go away, when the -d is retained: idos
(vosotros), go away.
In reflexive verbs of the third conjugation a written accent
over the i must be used in this form: rendios (vosotros),
surrender yourselves.
I. Read and translate into Spanish:
i. Mirame (tu) bien. 2. Miradle (vosotros) ahora. 3. Es-
cribidme una carta. 4. Escribidmela. 5. Aprende (tu) la
leccion. 6. Aprendela. 7. Preocupate de eso. 8. Preocupaos
de eso. 9. Distinguete (tu). 10. Distinguios (vosotros).
ii. Establecete en el pueblo. 12. Estableceos alii. 13. Ale-
grate dc eso. 14. Alegraos de eso.
II. Express in the polite form the commands in I.
III. Say and write in the intimate form singular the fol-
lowing affirmative commands:
i. Withdraw (or retreat) (retirarse). 2. Present yourself.
3. Get up (levantarse). 4. Know it. 5. Learn it. 6. Reside
here. 7. Return soon. 8. Pronounce it. 9. Tell it to me
(contar). 10. Serve it to him. 11. Catch it. 12. Offer it to
us. 13. Offer yourself.
IV. Express the commands of III in the intimate form
plural.
V. Make negative the following exhortations.
i. vamonos. 2. sentemonos. 3. alegremonos. 4. diga-
moselo. 5. escribamoselo. 6. paguemoselo. 7. distingamoslas.
8. empleemoslos. 9. busquemosla. 10. desaparezcamos.
n. sirvamoselo. 12. cojamoslas.
CAPlTULO XXXIX
CUERNAVACA, TAXCO, ACAPULCO
Un dia don Felipe tenia que hacer un viaje de negocios
a Acapulco, situado en la costa del Pacifico. Les propuso
a sus parientes que le acompaiiasen y que todos se de-
tuviesen en Cuernavaca y Taxco. Los Gomez aceptaron
5 con gusto la invitation.
M6jico esta en una elevation de 7.400 pies sobre el
nivel del mar. En el viaje de Mejico a Cuernavaca, una
distancia de unas cincuenta millas, pasaron los viajeros
por una magnifica carretera y habian bajado mas de
10 3.000 pies al entrar en Cuernavaca.
Un afio antes de atacar a Tenochtitldn-Mexihco, Cortes
tomo a Cuernavaca (o Cuauhnahuac) , pueblo que le
habia gustado muchisimo, tanto que m&s tarde se hizo
construir alii un bello palacio, que todavia se conserva.
15 En este antiguo palacio admiraron los turistas los cuadros
murales del notable pintor Diego Rivera.
— Estas pinturas — dijo don Felipe — que representan
de un modo desfavorable la conquista de Mejico por
los soldados de Cortes, se encuentran aqui gracias al
20 embajador norteamericano de hace algunos afios, senor
Dwight Morrow, quien los pago.
— Pero dinos, tio, <j por que hizo esto el senor embaja-
dor ? — pregunto Quinito.
— Porque estaba tan encantado con Cuernavaca que
25 establecio aqui su residencia y queria contribuir al em-
bellecimiento de la ciudad ddndole estas pinturas.
308
CUERNAVACA, TAXCO, ACAPULCO 309
— <j No fue aqui donde el f amoso aviador Charles
Lindbergh visito a los senores de Morrow, con cuya
hija Anne se caso despues ? — pregunto Rosa.
— Si, senorita — dijo el tio. — Y otra pareja, muy 30
famosa en la historia de Mejico, gozo mucho de la vida
en Cuernavaca: el emperador Maximiliano y su esposa
dona Carlota. Vivieron en el palacio Borda, que ahora
es un hotel al que iremos a almorzar. Mas tarde quisiera
contaros unas cosas acerca de Maximiliano, Carlota y 35
el senor de la Borda. Despues de almorzar creo que de-
bieramos seguir nuestro camino a Taxco y pasar alii la
noche.
— Bueno — dijo dona Ana, — pero haz el favor, Felipe,
de conducir el coche con cuidado por esta carretera mon- 40
tanosa. Ten mucho cuidado.
— Si, claro — contesto 61. — No te preocupes de eso,
hermana mia.
Taxco les resulto encantador y sumamente pintoresco.
Las calles estrechas y tortuosas subian y bajaban por 45
entre los cerros en que esti situada la ciudad. Las casas
con tejados de azuelejos, los balcones y jardines llenos de
flores y la paz y tranquilidad que reinaban por todas
partes — todo les parecia insuperable. Supieron que
Taxco es el centro minero mas viejo del continente. 50
Pero lo que mas les gusto era la iglesia de la ciudad,
en la plaza principal. Le costo al senor de la Borda unos
seis millones de pesos al construirla en el siglo XVIII.
Es de estilo muy ornado. El color rosado de su fachada
y sus dos bellas torres son notables. En el interior se 55
encuentran esculturas en madera muy hermosas. Todo
esto gustaba tanto a dona Ana que solo con dificultad pu-
310 QUINITO EN AMERICA
dieron sus hijos persuadirla a que fuera con ellos al hotel
Taxqueno a pasar alii la noche.
60 El viaje de Taxco a Acapulco, cosa de 300 millas, canso
algo a los viajeros. Alii encontraron un clima caluroso
a orillas del oceano.
Desde tiempos remotos Acapulco ha sido un puerto
de importancia y por este puerto entran y salen muchas
65 mercancias y un buen numero de turistas. Desde los
balcones del Hotel Mirador cogieron nuestros viajeros
una magnifica vista del mar y de las buenas playas. Los
muchachos fueron a nadar a una de esas playas y volvieron
al hotel muertos de hambre. Mientras tanto don Felipe
70 y las damas habian ido a pasearse por la ciudad.
A la luz de la luna todos comieron bien en la gran
terraza del hotel. Se acostaron temprano y durmieron
todos hasta una hora avanzada de la manana siguiente,
por haberse cansado bastante en su viaje desde Taxco.
75 Se quedaron dos dias en Acapulco y mientras don Felipe
se ocupaba en sus cosas, Quinito y Pepe fueron a pescar
en las aguas del oceano y se divirtieron enormemente.
VOCABULARIO
aviador m. aviator oceano m. ocean
caluroso, -a warm, hot ornado, -a ornate
contribuir (uyo) to contribute pescar (que) to fish
costar (ue) to cost proponer to propose (like poner)
desfavorable unfavorable remote, -a remote
elevation f. elevation residencia f . residence
embellecer (zco) to embellish, rosado, -a rosy, rose-colored
beautify terraza f . terrace
mercancia f. merchandise, goods tortuoso, -a winding, tortuous
minero, -a mining tranquilidad f . tranquillity, calm
nivel m. level
CUERNAVACA, TAXCO, ACAPULCO 311
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
cosa de about, a matter of seguir su camino to continue on
mientras tanto meanwhile one's way
no te preocupes don't worry (neg- tener cuidado to be careful
ative imperative familiar of
preocuparse)
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Cuernavaca and Taxco, respectively 50 and 100 miles southwest
of Mexico, D. F., are two of the towns near the capital which are
most visited by travelers. The former (whose name is a corruption
of the Indian Cuauhnahuac meaning "Near the woods") is some
3,000 feet lower than the capital and is reached over a good moun-
tain highway patrolled by guards. It is the capital of the state
of Morelos.
Since the days of Cortes, and before, Cuernavaca has been con-
sidered one of the most delightful spots in which to live. The great
conquistador and Mr. Dwight W. Morrow, the United States Am-
bassador (1927-1930), though separated in time by four centuries,
showed their love of the place by making it their residence, as did
thousands in those intervening years, and as many government
officials do today. Emperor Maximilian (of Austrian nobility) and
his Belgian wife Carlota had a country estate here, the Borda
palace, with beautiful grounds and swimming pool. They spent
here some of their happiest days before tragedy engulfed them.
Jose de la Borda (Joseph le Borde) came to Mexico from France
in 1716 and exploited rich silver mines in the near-by Guerrero
Mountains. He made and lost several fortunes, but during his career
he spent money freely in Cuernavaca and Taxco, building in the
former the beautiful estate occupied later by Maximilian, and in the
latter the church which is one of the most unusual in a country of
unusual and striking ecclesiastical structures. (In one long period
of the Spanish domination, three churches were finished each week.)
Taxco (pronounced Tosco) is a dramatically beautiful mountain
town, with steep and narrow streets, white-walled and red-tile-
roofed houses. The Borda church, with its rose-colored facade and
312 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
well-balanced towers, is decidedly ornate and overloaded with sculp-
tural adornment in the style known as churrigueresco, after the
Spanish architect Jose Churriguera, who introduced this style into
Spain in the i8th century. The doors, heavily studded with great
nails, the wood carving of pulpit, confessionals and chests, the
brocaded vestments and rich hangings make a beautiful combina-
tion of different arts that is only excelled by that of some churches
in old Spain.
Acapulco (meaning "Place of abundant reeds") has been an
important port since early Spanish days. The sea fishing off the
coast is about the best that can be found anywhere in the world.
This coast city is a favorite of Mexicans at week-ends and especially
at Easter time.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. Don Felipe propuso a sus parientes que — . 2. Al ir
de Mejico a Cuernavaca los turistas bajaron — . 3. Cortes
tomo a Cuauhnahuac antes de — . 4. Hizo construir en esa
aldea — . 5. En el palacio de Cortes los viajeros vieron — .
6. Los cuadros de Rivera representan — . 7. El senor Morrow
pago — . 8. El senor de la Borda construyo en Cuernavaca
— y en Taxco — . 9. Dona Ana temia que don Felipe no — .
10. Don Felipe le contesto que ella — . n. Las calles de
Taxco suben — . 12. Los tej ados de las casas son — . 13. Rei-
nan en Taxco — . 14. La iglesia le gustaba tanto a dona Ana
que sus hijos la persuadieron con dificultad que — . 15. En-
tran y salen por el puerto de Acapulco — . 16. — fueron a
nadar en las play as. 17. Las damas y don Felipe fueron a — .
II. For each of the following nouns give a Spanish adjective
that might well be used to modify it:
distancia; palacio; cuadro; embajador; azulejos; calles;
catedral; estilo; clima; tiempos; play a; vista; oceano; fa-
chada; hotel; jardin; carretera.
Flower Sellers at Xochimilco.
Courtesy Gev
'• f A Mexican Pottery Shop.
-1 Courtesy Agfa
Dancing the "Jarabe Tapatio'
Courtesy Gevaert
Fntrqnrp tn thp ^hnrrh nf Sqn
The Aztec Calendar,
"Sun Stone".
Courtesy Gevaert
The Church on the Pyr
mid, Cholula.
CUERNAVACA, TAXCO, ACAPULCO 313
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Yo quisiera contaros. I should like to tell you. De-
bier amos seguir. We should continue. Vd. pudiera pescar.
You might (could) fish.
The r-form of the imperfect subjunctive of querer, deber,
and poder is often used in the main clause (as the main
verb) of a sentence, instead of the post-preterite (querria,
deberia, podria) that could be and would be used in the case
of other verbs.
This construction expresses in a polite or softened manner
a wish, an obligation or possibility (respectively). More
examples :
Quisieramos que Vd. nos acompanase, we should like you to
accompany us. Vds. no debieran decir eso, you should not
say that. Ella pudiera aprenderlo, she could learn it.
2. Dinos. Tell us. Haz el favor de conducir el coche.
Please drive the car. Ten mucho cuidado. Be very careful
(have much care).
The verb forms di, haz and ten are the intimate affirmative
imperatives singular of decir, hacer and tener, all irregular
verbs.
Only the following irregular verbs have irregular forms of
the intimate affirmative imperative singular. The plural of
such forms is made in the regular way (by replacing the -r
of the infinitive with -d).
decir: di (tu) decid (vosotros), tell, say
haber: he (tti) habed (vosotros), have (This verb is very
seldom used in the imperative.)
hacer: haz (tu) haced (vosotros), do, make
ir: ve (tu) id (vosotros), go
poner: pon (tu) poned (vosotros), put, place
314 QUINITO EN AMERICA
salir: sal (tu) solid (vosotros), go out, leave
ser: se (tu) sed (vosotros), be
tener: ten (tu) tened (vosotros), have
valer: val (tu) valed (vosotros), be worth
venir: ven (tu) venid (vosotros), come
I. Change the following polite commands to the intimate
forms:
i. Tenga Vd. cuidado. 2. Hagalo Vd. 3. Haganlo Vds.
4. Vaya Vd. alia. 5. Vayan Vds. alia. 6. Sea Vd. bueno.
7. Sean Vds. buenos. 8. Pongalo Vd. aqui. 9. PonganloVds.
aqui. 10. Venga Vd. ahora. u. Vengan Vds. en seguida.
12. Digamelo Vd. 13. Diganmelo Vds. 14. Salgan Vds.
II. Give the intimate imperative, singular and plural, of
the following verbal expressions:
i. Embellecerlos. 2. Darmelo. 3. Dormirse. 4. Gober-
narse. 5. Sentarse. 6. Levantarse. 7. Quedarse.
III. Replace the English words with proper Spanish words:
i. They would like que Vd. lo propusiese. 2. You should
decirnoslo. 3. He could seguir su camino. 4. We should like
que ella se pusiese un traje azul. 5. £ Would you not like que
el tuviese mucho cuidado al conducir el coche ?
IV. Make affirmative the following negative polite com-
mands, indirect commands and exhortations:
i. No se la lea Vd. a ella. 2. No me lo envie Vd. 3. No
lo continuen Vds. 4. Que Juan no lo haga. 5. Que los ninos
no lo sepan. 6. No nos sentemos aqui. 7. No se lo enviemos
aellos. 8. No se levanten Vds. 9. No se vayan ellos. 10. No
se queden ellas aqui.
CAPlTULO XL
PIRAMIDES Y CARRETERAS
Nunca cesaron nuestros turistas de gozar de su visita
a la capital de Mejico. La vida callejera siempre les
encantaba, por ser tan pintoresca. Se veian en todo
tiempo vendedores de objetos extraordinarios y extranos:
pajaros que cantaban, frutas y flores, sarapes, ceramica, 5
tortillas, objetos de plata, boletos de loteria, mosaicos
de pluma en vivos colores (arte inventado por los aztecas).
Habia varios tipos interesantisimos de indios, callados y
misteriosos. Al lado de grandes bueyes iban camiones
modernos. 10
— i Cuantos indios hay en Mejico ? — pregunto dona
Ana a su hermano. — Me parece a veces que en este
pais solo hay indios.
— Si que hay muchos — respondio don Felipe. — Pero
no creas que todos los mejicanos sean indios. En la 15
poblacion nacional de unos 1 7 millones es probable que el
20 por ciento sean de raza blanca. Los demas son indios
o mestizos, es decir, descendientes de las dos razas, la
india y la blanca. Es, a la verdad, una nacion en que el
elemento indio es fuerte y numeroso. 20
Para dar a sus parientes una idea de lo que era en un
tiempo la civilization de los primeros pobladores de Me-
jico, don Felipe los llevo a visitar a San Juan de Teoti-
huacan, no lejos de la capital. AquI se encuentran al-
gunas de las enormes piramides construidas por los indios 25
prehistoricos antes de venir los aztecas. Eran templos
315
316 QUINITO EN AMERICA
dedicados al Sol y a la Luna, dioses principales del hombre
prehistorico. La piramide del Sol tiene m&s de doscientos
pies de alto y cada lado de su base se extiende unos 750
30 pies. Los muchachos y don Felipe subieron por las
enormes gradas a lo mas alto de esta piramide. Desde
alii miraron abajo sobre otras piramides y el templo de
Quetzalcoatl, que es un inmenso cuadrado cuyas murallas
son una serie de pequenas piramides.
35 — Y aqui, sin duda, en esta cima se realizo el sacrificio
de miles de seres humanos — dijo Rosa.
— Pero no hables de esos terribles sacrificios — dijo dona
Ana. — No me gusta oir hablar de cosas tan crueles.
— Se dice — observo Quinito — que las ruinas de los
40 templos de los mayas que se encuentran en Yucatan,
sobre todo en Chichen Itz&, son aun mas estupendas.
— Es verdad — dijo don Felipe. — En los siglos IX y
X los mayas construyeron en Yucatan y en Guatemala
templos y piramides incontables, que estan todavia bien
45 conservados. Desde el ano 1923 los expertos de la Insti-
tution Carnegie de Washington trabajan alii sin cesar
en descubrir esas viejas construcciones, en hacer excava-
ciones y en restaurar los monumentos. Seria interesante
visitar aquellos sitios.
50 Mientras volvian a la capital por la carretera, exclamo
Pepe:
— A veces siento que vini6ramos a M6jico por aero-
piano y no en un coche. Entonces hubieramos podido
ver mejor el norte del pals. Desde San Antonio, Tejas,
55 hubiera sido facil ir a Laredo y tomar alii la nueva Carre-
tera Panamericana que va de Nuevo Laredo a Mejico.
Dicen que es una carretera maravillosa.
PIRAMIDES Y CARRETERAS 317
— Si, lo es — respondio don Felipe. — La conozco
bien. Es el primer trecho de una camino que unird
algun dia a todas las Americas. Se extender^ de Alaska 60
a Santiago de Chile y Buenos Aires, con ramales que
serviran para unir a todas las grandes ciudades del hemis-
ferio. Mejico ha construido el primer eslabon de esta
gran carretera. For ella vienen ya incontables turistas
norteamericanos a recorrer este pals. Asi aprenden ellos 65
y los mejicanos a conocerse mejor.
— Con la construction de los otros eslabones, el pan-
americanismo podra ser un verdadero hecho — anadio
Quinito. — Y los otros paises de Centro y Sud America,
<: que hacen ellos para realizar este plan ? 70
— Todos ellos hacen o haran su parte de este inmenso
trabajo — respondio don Felipe. — El Peru tiene ter-
minada ya una carretera central por los Andes que fue
uno de los eslabones mas dificiles de construir. En Cen-
troamerica muchos puentes han sido terminados y la 75
ruta esta marcada. Existe en la Argentina gran entu-
siasmo por la Carretera Panamericana.
VOCABULARIO
boleto m. ticket marcar (qu£) to mark, mark out
buey m. ox misterioso, -a mysterious
cima f . summit mosaico m. mosaic
demds: los — , las — , the others ramal m. branch road
excavacidn f. excavation restaurar to restore
experto, -a expert ruta f . route, way
grada f . step serie f. series
institucidn f . institution tipo m. type
inventor to invent trecho m. section, stretch
loteria f . lottery
318 QUINITO EN AMERICA
NOTES: The following words are used in new meanings: construc-
tion, building or construction; cuadrado, as noun, square; hecho, as
noun, fact; poblacion as population; ser, as noun, being.
Realizar does not usually mean to realize, which verb is expressed
in Spanish by darse cuenta de.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
de alto in height hubieramos podido we would
en todo tiempo constantly have been able
es decir that M (to say) inter esantisimo most interesting
hubiera sido it would have been
NOMBRES PROTIOS
Centroamerica = America Central; Sud America = la America
del Sur.
Laredo, Texas, 150 miles from San Antonio, is at the United
States end of the international bridge over the Rio Grande leading
into Nuevo Laredo, Mexico, from which starts the Carretera Pan-
americana, inaugurated in 1936, which leads to Mexico City. This
highway, which is the first section of a great international system of
roads given the name of Pan American Highway, is an excellent
road, a marvellous feat of engineering, especially in its last 250 miles
through the mountains. Total distance, Nuevo Laredo to Mexico
City, 769 miles. Principal cities going south, Monterrey, Ciudad
Victoria, Valles (at sea level), Tamazunchale, Zimapan. The highest
point of the road, eight miles from the capital, is at 8,600 feet eleva-
tion, about 1,200 feet higher than Mexico City.
This road through northeastern Mexico has its counterpart in
the northwest in a highway passing through Nogales, Arizona, and
leading down the west coast through the state of Sinaloa, then
through the mountains to Guadalajara and into the capital, a total
distance of 1,500 miles. This road is not yet as well improved as
is the other through Nuevo Laredo.
From Mexico City the Pan American Highway will strike south
to the Guatemalan border, then on through El Salvador and Costa
Courtesy: Pan American Highway Confederation
THE PAN ^MFBTCAN WTOTTWAV
320 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Rica to the Panama Canal — a total distance of 3,000 miles. It is
estimated that this Mexico-Panama section will cost 78 million
dollars. From Panama it will extend down through Colombia,
Ecuador, Peru, Bolivia and Chile to Santiago and across the Andes
to Buenos Aires.
In many places present roads will serve as a basis for the improved
highway. In others, especially from Panama southward, the route
is not fully determined and it is through that tremendously difficult
mountainous terrain that enormous engineering and construction
problems will arise and great costs be incurred.
Through the Highway and Finance Committees set up in recent
Pan American Conferences (those of Montevideo, Buenos Aires and
Lima, especially) the American nations are cooperating enthusias-
tically and effectively in solving the problems involved. Probably
by 1950, most of the main line of the proposed network will be
finished. Connecting lines, uniting all the capitals of Latin America,
are being planned.
Mexico and Argentina are the two countries that are most active
in formulating and executing plans for highway improvement, both
within their own confines and in international connections.
The map on the preceding page gives a general idea of the vast
ramifications of the Pan American Highway.
San Juan de Teotihuacdn (see page 280) contains prehistoric
pyramids, walls and temples within an area of about 500 acres,
which rival in interest the pyramids of Egypt. A detailed descrip-
tion cannot be attempted here. About the Pyramid of the Sun there
once existed a great city about four miles long and two miles wide.
Whence came those people who built these great structures and what
became of them, no one can say. They were ancient when Cortes
first looked upon them. They were undoubtedly devoted to pagan
worship of the manifestations of nature, in which worship was in-
volved the sacrifice of human beings to the gods of nature.
The Mayan ruins at Chicken Itzd on the Yucatan Peninsula are
intensely interesting to archaeologists and to travelers in general.
They are perhaps the most beautiful of any such ruins in all America.
Columns, great houses, sculptured idols, pyramids, engraved hiero-
PIRAMIDES Y CARRETERAS 321
glyphics, thick walls, mural paintings, pools and ornate doorways
are some of the things that hold the astonished attention of the
visitor. These ruins speak of a civilization superior to that of the
Toltecs and Aztecs, of a people highly skilled in architecture, paint-
ing and sculpture, and yet a superstitious and pagan people.
The Carnegie Institution's expert archaeologists, who have well-
constructed headquarters near the ruins, are constantly discovering
new aspects of the ancient city.
The Mayas supposedly settled here and in Guatemala some
400 years B.C. and seem to have abandoned all they built in about
1450 A.D., some 70 years before Cortes came to Mexico.
La loteria, the lottery. Mexico, like most of the Spanish-American
countries, conducts a national lottery, in which the government is
the only certain winner, since from it flows a considerable monthly
profit. Lottery tickets are, as in Spain, peddled on the streets on
a commission basis.
The mosaicos de pluma, or feather-work designs, are made of fine
bird feathers, often dyed in bright colors. They are frequently laid
so as to form pictures of birds, also of flowers and other objects.
Infinite patience and skill are necessary in doing this delicate feather
mosaic work.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. Los vendedores se ocupaban en la venta de burros y
caballos. 2. El arte de hacer mosaicos de pluma fue inven-
tado por los espanoles. 3. Algunos tipos de indios parecen
personas misteriosas. 4. Se ven en las calles de Mejico grandes
camiones al lado de una pareja de bueyes. 5. El noventa por
ciento de los mejicanos son de razas blancas. 6. Un mestizo
es de la raza negra. 7. El sol y la luna eran dioses de los
mejicanos prehistoricos. 8. Las gradas por donde se sube a
la cima de una piramide en Teotihuacan son bajas y pequefias.
Q. En estas gradas se realize la matanza de seres humanos.
322 QUINITO EN AMERICA
10. En Chichen Itza los Aztecas dejaron muchos temples.
11. Los expertos de la Institution Carnegie han descubierto
muchos animales extranos. 12. El primer trecho de la Ca-
rre tera Panamericana va de Nucvo Laredo a El Paso. 13. Van
muchos turistas por esta carretera a recorrer la Republica de
Mejico. 14. El Peru tiene terminado ya un buen trecho de
lo que sera la Carretera Panamericana.
II. Use in complete Spanish sentences the following idioms
and words:
i. es decir. 2. de alto. 3. ser (as noun). 4. hecho (as
noun). 5. interesantisimo. 6. en todo tiempo. 7. seguir su
camino. 8. cosa de.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Hubiera sido. It would have been. Hubieramos podido.
We would have been able.
The above are forms of the pluperfect subjunctive (of ser
and poder) which here is equivalent to the post-preterite
perfect (habriamos sido and habria sido). It is noticed that
the r-form of the imperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb
haber plus the past participle make up this pluperfect sub-
junctive tense. We shall study this tense later.
2. El Peru tiene terminada ya una carretera. Peru has a
highway already finished.
We know that the compound tenses are usually formed by
using tenses of the auxiliary verb haber followed by the past
participle: he terminado, I have finished; el Peru habia
terminado, Peru had finished.
But above we find tener used as auxiliary instead of haber.
How do we explain such a construction ?
When haber is used with the past participle, a completed
PIRAMIDES Y CARRETERAS 323
action is indicated: he escrito una carta, / have written a
letter.
When tener is so used, the result of the completed action
is indicated and stressed and the past participle then agrees
in gender and number with the noun or pronoun object of
the verb: tengo escrita una carta, I have a letter written; el
tiene terminadas dos mur alias, he has two walls finished;
tenemos comprados nuestros boletos, we have our tickets
bought.
3. No lo creas (tit). Dont believe it. No me hables (tu).
Dont speak to me. No lo creais (vosotros). Don't believe it.
No me hableis (vosotros). Don't speak to me.
ELEVENTH CASE of the USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In the above sentences we have intimate negative com-
mands. The verbs, it is noticed, are all in the present sub-
junctive, 2nd person singular or 2nd person plural.
All negative commands in the intimate form must be ex-
pressed in the present subjunctive.
We have already seen that all polite commands, affirmative
or negative, are expressed in the present subjunctive, 3rd
person singular or 3rd person plural: Crealo Vd., believe it.
No lo crea Vd. Dont believe it. No lo crean Yds. Don't be-
lieve it. Diganmelo Yds., tell it to me. No me lo digan Yds.,
don't tell it to me.
INTIMATE COMMANDS SINGULAR
Affirmative Negative
hdblame (tu) speak to me no me hables (tu) don't speak to me
aprendelo learn it no lo aprendas don't learn it
dimelo tell it to me no me lo digas don't tell it to me
ddselo give it to him no se lo des don't give it to him
ponlo put it no lo pongas don't put it
sientate sit down no te sientes don't sit down
324 QUINITO EN AMERICA
INTIMATE COMMANDS PLURAL
Affirmative Negative
habladme (vosotros) speak to me no me hableis (vosotros) don't
speak to me
aprendedlo learn it no lo aprenddis don't learn it
decidmelo tell it to me no me lo digdis don't tell it to me
dddselo give it to him no se lo deis don't give it to him
ponedlo put it no lo pongdis don't put it
sentaos sit down no os senteis don't sit down
I. Read and translate into English:
i. Yo no lo hubiera dicho. 2. <i Quien lo hubiera creido?
3. Nosotros no hubieramos sabido hacerlo. 4. Ven tu ma-
nana. 5. No vengas tu manana. 6. Hazlo en seguida. 7. No
lo hagas en seguida. 8. Hacedlo ahora. 9. No lo hagais
ahora. 10. Sal a la calle. n. No saigas a la calle. 12. Salid
pronto. 13. No salgais ahora. 14. Quedate tu aqui. 15. No
te quedes aqui. 16. Quedaos vosotros aqui. 17. No os que-
deis aqui. 18. Ve tu con el. 19. No vayas con el. 20. Id
conmigo. 21. No vayais con ella. 22. Vete tu. 23. No te
vayas tu. 24. Idos pronto. 25. No os vayais nunca.
II. Make plural the following commands:
i. Dilo tu. 2. Corre tu rapidamente. 3. Abrela. 4. Sal
con el. 5. Sacalos. 6. Cogelo. 7. Levantate. 8. Damelos.
III. Make negative the commands expressed in II.
IV. Make negative plural the commands in II.
V. Express in the polite form the commands in II.
VI. Express in the negative polite forms the commands
in II.
CAPlTULO XLI
TOROS Y MINAS DE PLATA
— £ Corridas de toros ? Si que las hay en la capital
— dijo don Felipe contestando a una pregunta de Pepe.
— Y son iguales a las que se ven en Espana. Algunos
de los mejores toreros que han actuado en Espana ban
sido mejicanos y varios matadores espanoles han logrado 5
gran exito en Mejico.
Los hermanos Gomez, que habian visto en su patria
varias corridas, acompanaron un dia a su tio en una visita
a la gran Plaza de Toros de Mejico. No faltaba ningun
elemento de una corrida emocionante : toros feroces, 10
famosos toreros espanoles y mejicanos y una plaza abarro-
tada de espectadores. Como espectaculo resultaba in-
superable esta corrida, pero don Felipe y los muchachos
salieron un poco tristes. Convino que las damas de la
familia no los hubiesen acompaiiado. 15
— Es la primera corrida que he visto en muchos anos —
observo el tio — y por alguna razon no me ha gustado
mucho. Me ha parecido cruel. Venga lo que venga, no
volvere nunca a asistir a una corrida de toros. Siento
que ese gran toro negro haya tenido que morir esta tarde. 20
— Nosotros, Pepe y yo, preferimos un buen partido
de futbol, con tal que sean buenos los jugadores — dijo
Quinito.
— O de jai-alai — aiiadio Pepe. — Supongo que hay
frontones aqui, <; verdad ? 25
325
326 QUINITO EN AMERICA
— Si, el jai-alai o pelota vasca se juega mucho aqui —
contesto don Felipe. — En el Fronton Mexico se pueden
ver notables partidos, con los mejores jugadores. Iremos
alia esta noche si quereis.
30 Y en dicho fronton les gustaron la habilidad y agilidad
de los vascos que tomaban parte en el juego.
Al dla siguiente le pidio Rosa a su tio que contase, como
les habia prometido, algo acerca de Jose de la Borda,
el que construyo la bella iglesia de Taxco.
35 — Ah, si — dijo don Felipe, — gracias por haberme
recordado mi promesa. Pues, Joseph le Borde, llamado
en Mejico Jose de la Borda, vino de Francia a este pais
en 1716, y se dedico a explotar las minas de plata en las
montanas Guerrero, cerca de Taxco. Logro gran exito
40 en sus empresas, sacando de las minas una inmensa for-
tuna, se dice del valor de unos cuarenta millones de
pesos. Una gran parte de esta riqueza la dedico a la
construction de la catedral de Taxco y de los magnificos
jardines que vimos en Cuernavaca. Tambien dio regalos
45 de dinero a la catedral de Mejico. Sin duda os acordais
del palacio de estilo italiano y de la hermosa piscina que
estan hoy parcialmente en ruinas en Cuernavaca.
— Ya lo creo — respondio Rosa. — Y pienso mucho
en cuan hermoso debio ser todo eso cuando residian alii
50 el emperador Maximiliano y su esposa Carlota. j Cuan
triste es aquella pagina de la historia de Mejico !
— Triste, si — contesto don Felipe, — pero inevitable,
en vista de las circunstancias. Todavia hoy hablan de
aquellos tiempos los mejicanos de edad avanzada. Pero
55 nunca han logrado quedarse los emperadores en Mejico,
como se ve por lo que ocurrio a cada uno de los senores
TOROS Y MINAS DE PLATA 327
que quisieron ser emperador en esta tierra. Dudo que
hay&is leido mucho acerca de ellos.
— Es verdad; pero cuentanoslo, cuentanoslo, tio —
pidio Rosa. 60
VOCABULARIO
acordarse (ue) to remember inevitable inevitable
agilidad f . agility jai-alai m. jai-alai (see Notas)
circunstancia f. circumstance lograr to obtain, get; succeed in
emocionante thrilling, moving parcialmente partially, partly
espectdculo m. spectacle, sight pelota f. ball
exito m. success promesa f. promise
explotar to develop, work; exploit suponer to suppose (like poner)
fortuna f. fortune valor m. value
fronton m. fronton (see Notas) vasco, -a Basque
habilidad f. skill, ability
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
acordarse de to remember lograr exito to succeed, attain
en vista de in view of success; lograr + infinitive to
succeed in + present participle
NOTE: Recordar means to remind, to recall, as well as to remember.
Acordarse de, reflexive and vowel-changing, means only to remember.
Exito is success, while suceso means event or happening.
NOTAS
The Plaza de Tows of Mexico City, in the Colonia Condesa, is
one of the largest in existence, seating 20,000 people. It is of steel
construction. The bulls used are, of course, bred for fierceness and
fighting qualities. Sometimes they are imported from Spain (a costly
procedure), but Mexican-bred animals are now mostly used and they
frequently show the belligerent strength and temper that is desired.
Whole haciendas, in Mexico as in Spain, are devoted especially to
raising fighting bulls.
328 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Jai-alai is the Basque name for the ball game (juego de pelota)
which originated centuries ago in the Basque provinces of northern
Spain. The best players are Basques. Some of the professional
players keep busy the year around, playing in Madrid, Mexico,
Cuba, Argentina and other Spanish-speaking countries of America.
It is a game of great intensity and requires extreme physical fitness
and long years of training. It is played in a fronton, or rectangular
court, measuring 1 50 by 43 feet, with high walls at the left side and
the two ends. The spectators sit in stands on the open right side.
The players (pelotaris) wear a cesta, or basket-like extension, about
two feet long, on the right hand. This cesta is shaped somewhat
like a long fingernail. The ball is hurled from the cesta against
the front end of the fronton, and, when properly served, strikes
above a line drawn about three feet from the ground. The ball
rebounds first to the wall to the left and then to the concrete floor,
whence it is returned to the front wall by an opposing player. The
ball, slightly larger than a tennis ball, has two covers of kid skin,
weighs four ounces and costs twelve times as much as a baseball.
It has a hard rubber center. There are usually four players, two on
each side, all dressed in white trousers. One team wears blue shirts
and the other red shirts, thus distinguishing the opponents as los
azules and los rojos (or color ados}. The counting of points (tantos)
and the technicalities of the game need not be explained here. One
phase of the game is the loud and sometimes frantic betting of the
spectators with the professional bettors who stand facing the audience.
The Frontdn Mexico, on the Plaza de la Republica, is a large
concrete building seating four thousand people and having several
courts (conchas). It is one of the most complete and largest fron tones
in existence. Here one may see some of the best professional Basque
players perform.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <jActuan in Mejico matadores espanoles? 2. ,; Qu6
han logrado en Esparia algunos de los toreros mejicanos?
3. <[ C6mo resulto la corrida a la que asistieron don Felipe
TOROS Y MINAS DE PLATA 329
y sus sobrinos ? 4. <; For que con vino que dona Ana y Rosa
no hubieran ido a la corrida ? 5. <i Como le parecio a don
Felipe la corrida ? 6. <: Que sentia el ? 7. <: Que hubieran
preferido ver los muchachos ? 8. <j Adonde fueron los mucha-
chos y su tio aquella noche ? 9. <; A quienes vieron jugar
al jai-alai en el Fronton Mexico ? 10. £ For que vino el
f ranees de la Borda a las mon tanas Guerrero? n. £ Que
logro sacar de las minas? 12. <; De que se acordo Rosa?
13. <; En que pensaba ella mucho? 14. £ Que dudaba don
Felipe ?
II. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. I shall remember her for- i. — ella para siempre.
ever.
2. He has attained much sue- 2. El — .
cess.
3. We succeed in carrying it 3. — realizarlo.
out (accomplishing it).
4. In view of what you say, I 4. — , lo creo.
believe it.
5. Remember me, dear 5. — , querido hermano mio.
brother.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. Venga lo que venga. Come what may.
The above sentence illustrates the use of what has been
called the subjunctive of "indifferent alternative." Or we
may explain the first venga as optative or indirect command
(see page 265) and the second as the dependent verb in an
adjectival clause having an indefinite antecedent. More ex-
amples:
Sea lo que sea, be it as it may. Qui&ranlo o no lo quieran,
whether they want it or not. Dlgase lo que se diga, no matter
what is said. Sea quien sea, no matter who it is.
330 QUINITO EN AMERICA
2. Siento que el toro haya tenido que morir. I regret that
the bull has had to die. Dudo que hayais leido. I doubt you
have read. Convino que las damas no los hubiesen acorn-
panado. It was fitting that the ladies had not accompanied them.
THIRD RULE of the SEQUENCE OF TENSES
We know that when the main verb is in the present, present
perfect or future, the dependent verb is usually in the present
subjunctive, whenever the subjunctive must be used in the
dependent clause (see page 220).
Thus: siento que tenga, I am sorry he has; sentia que
tuviese (or tuvierd), I was sorry that he had.
In such circumstances the time of the dependent verb is
coincident with or subsequent to that of the main verb.
Suppose we wanted to show that the tense of the dependent
verb is prior to that of the main verb. In such cases, if the
main verb is present, present perfect or future, we usually
have to employ in the dependent clause the present perfect
tense of the subjunctive, which in the first two sentences of
paragraph 2 are represented by haya tenido and hayais leido.
PRESENT PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE
haya 1 hayamos }
hayas \ leido hayais \ leido
haya } hayan }
I have ready may have read, etc.
The present perfect subjunctive of a verb is formed by the
present subjunctive of the auxiliary haber, followed by the
past participle of the verb being conjugated. We see that
those forms are : haya, hayas, haya; hayamos, hayais, hayan.
If the main verb is the imperfect, preterite or post-preterite
and the time of the dependent verb is prior to that of the
main verb, then we must use one of the two forms of the
pluperfect subjunctive in the dependent clause: convenia que
TOROS Y MINAS DE PLATA 331
las damas no los hubiesen acompanado, it was fitting that
the ladies had not accompanied them.
PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE
hubiese } hubiesemos }
hubieses > leido hubieseis f leido
hubiese } hubiesen }
or
hubiera } hubieramos )
hubieras \ leido hubierais > leido
hubiera j hubieran }
I might have read, should have read, etc.
The pluperfect subjunctive is formed by one of the im-
perfect subjunctives (s-form or r-form) of haber followed by
the past participle of the verb being conjugated.
Repeat the two sets of the imperfect subjunctive of haber.
Conjugate the pluperfect subjunctive, two sets, of ver, to
see.
I. Translate into English the following sentences:
i. Tememos que Vd. haya estado enfermo. 2. Temiamos
que Vd. hubiese (hubiera) estado enfermo. 3. Es bueno que
el haya logrado exito. 4. Era bueno que el hubiese (hubiera)
logrado exito. 5. Conviene que Vd. lo haya estudiado.
6. Convino que Vd. lo hubiese (hubiera) estudiado. 7. No
sabemos que ellos lo hayan visto. 8. No sabiamos que ellos
lo hubieran visto. 9. No hay nadie que haya logrado hacer
eso. 10. No hubo nadie que hubiese logrado hacer eso.
ii. i Ojala que no haya venido ella ! 12. j Ojala que no hu-
biera venido nadie !
II. Say and write the present perfect subjunctive of:
volver, to return; decir, to say
332 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
III. Say and write the two forms of the pluperfect sub-
junctive of the verbs in II.
IV. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words:
T. Temo que he has not returned. 2. Terni que he had not
returned. 3. Es posible que he has said it to me. 4. Eraposible
que he had said it to me. 5. Lo dire cuando he has returned.
6. Dije que lo diria cuando he had returned. 7. Le veremos
antes que he has seen us. 8. Le vimos antes que he had seen
us.
V. Read and translate into Spanish :
i. Haga el lo que haga. 2. Ocurra lo que ocurra. 3. Sea-
mos lo que seamos. 4. Logren lo que logren. 5. Acuerdese
ella o no se acuerde. 6. Corran o no corran.
VI. Say and write in Spanish:
i. No matter what comes. 2. Whether he reads it or not.
3. No matter who you are. 4. Believe it or not. 5. Do what
we may do. 6. Whether he goes out or not.
CAPlTULO XLII
EMPERADORES MEJICANOS
— Tomemos, por ejemplo — siguio diciendo don Felipe
— a Moctezuma, llamado por algunos escritores el primer
emperador mejicano. Cortes le hizo prisionero y el jefe
azteca murio poco despues. A Guatimozin (o Cuauh-
temoc), el sucesor de Moctezuma, Cortes mando que se 5
le diera muerte. La suerte de esos jefes era tal que no se
puede envidiar.
— <; Quien mas quiso ser emperador de Mejico ? — pre-
gunto Pepe.
— Creo que el proximo fue Agustin de Iturbide, nacido 10
en Morelia en 1783. Fue general del ejercito espanol en
Mejico que trato de suprimir la revolution contra la madre
patria, que empezo en el ano 1810. En 1821 Iturbide
presento el « Plan de Iguala, » segun el cual Mejico habia
de ser una monarquia independiente bajo un prfncipe 15
de la casa de Borbon. El virrey acepto el plan e Iturbide
tomo el poder. Pero Fernando VII, rey de Espafia, se
nego a consentir en este plan y declare que los mejicanos
eran rebeldes.
Iturbide fue proclamado emperador en 1822 por el 20
congreso mejicano. Pero los republicanos y el ejercito
se rebelaron contra el. El general Santa Anna marcho
con sus soldados contra la capital. Iturbide se retiro
en 1823 y se fu6 para Europa, despu6s de haber prometido
no volver nunca a Mejico. Pero el pr6ximo ano volvio 25
333
334 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
y al desembarcar en Mejico fue tornado y condenado a
la muerte.
— Maximiliano fue el ultimo emperador, <; verdad ? —
pregunto Quinito.
30 — Si; el ultimo y tal vez el mas desgraciado dc todos.
Fernando Maximiliano Jose, nacido en 18^2, era archi-
duque de Austria y amigo de Napoleon III de Francia.
Benito Juarez, de sangre india, era cntonces prcsidentc
de la Republica mejicana. Napoleon envio a Mejico, en
35 1 86 1, un ejercito frances para hacer que el gobierno meji-
cano pagase ciertas deudas. Consintieron en eso Espana
e Inglaterra. Los franceses tomaron la capital y ciertas
regiones del pais. Napoleon ofrecio a Maximiliano la
corona de este imperio. Despues de vacilar mucho, Maxi-
40 miliano, movido por los deseos de su csposa, Carlota
(hija del rev de Belgica), que queria ser emperatriz, la
acepto. En junio de 1864 llcgo a la capital dc Mejico.
El ejercito frances y mejicano del nuevo emperador
vencio a los soldados de Juarez, quicn se reliro hacia el
45 norte. Maximiliano ordeno cjue todo soldado cogido con
armas dirigidas contra el im{>erio, fuera tenido por bandido
y fusilado. Por este dccreto murieron nurncrosos republi-
canos, lo cual hizo que Maximiliano fuera muy odiado y
temido. Mientras tanto el gobierno de los Estados Unidos
50 se nego a reconocer el gobierno de Maximiliano y piclio
a Napoleon que retirase el ejercito frances de Mfjico.
Aunque habia prometido a Maximiliano ayudarle, Na-
poleon ordeno la retirada de sus soldados, dejando aban-
don ado al emperador,
55 Maximiliano hubiera podido escaparse del pafs, pero
prefirio quedarse. Fu6 con algunos dc sus generales a
EMPERADORES MEJICANOS 335
Queretaro, dondc los soldados de Juarez le hicieron pri-
sionero. Un tribunal mejicano le condeno a morir. Jua-
rez, recordando el decreto que habia dado Maximiliano,
se nego a perdonarle. El emperador, un caballero que 60
solo deseaba el bien de los mejicanos, aunque no sabia
conseguirlo, fue fusilado el 19 de junio de 1867. Asi
termino la vida del ultimo emperador de Mejico.
Carlota, que habia vuelto a Europa, pidio a Napoleon
que siguiese ayudando a su esposo, pero todo fue en vano. 65
Ella, al saber de la muerte tragica de Maximiliano, se
volvio loca, y en este triste estado vivio hasta morir en
Bclgica en enero de 1927.
— For mas interesante que sea el cuento, es al mismo
tiempo muy triste -- dijo Rosa. — For malo que fuera 70
el gobierno de Maximiliano, no debieron matar asi al
emperador. ; Que lastima ! Poco tiempo duraron los
dias felices de Maximiliano y Carlota en el castillo de
Chapultepec y en los belles jardines de Cuernavaca.
VOCAHTLARTO
archiduque m. archduke monarqula f. monarchy
bandido m. bandit odiar to hate
condenar to condemn ordenar to order
decreto m. dct rrr, edict principe m. prince
desgraciado, -a unfortunate republicano m. republican
deuda f. debt suerte f. fate, lot
emperatriz f . empress suprimir to suppress
envidiar to envy trdgico, -a tragic
fusilar to shoot vano, -a vain
NOTE: poder tos noun means power , command
MOD1SMOS V KXPRESIONES
en vano in vain morir quemado to be burned to death
336 QUINITO EN AMERICA
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Mexico, from 1535 to 1822, was governed by a long series of
viceroys. In the early part of the iQth century the smouldering
demand for independence flared into flame when Miguel Hidalgo
(1753-1811), a priest of Dolores in the province of Guanajuato, rang
the bell of his church (now preserved in the Palacio Nacional) the
night of September 15, 1810, to call a meeting of those who were
ready to revolt against Spain. From a balcony he cried: " j Viva
nuestra Sefiora Santfsima de Guadalupe ! j Viva America, muera el
mal gobierno ! " This " Grito de Dolores" is perpetuated each year
on the same date by the president of the Republic who repeats the
cry from a balcony of the Palacio Nacional. Hidalgo received the
support of Captain Allende, Jos6 Maria Morelos, also a priest, and
Francisco Javier Mina. These patriots, along with others and the
troops they had raised, were defeated by the viceregal forces, and
the leaders were executed. These men are still venerated as the
heroes of the struggle for independence.
Agustln de Iturbide (1783-1824), in his "Plan of Iguala," called
also the Three Guarantees (Las Tres Garantias), provided for (i) the
retention of the Roman Catholic Church in Mexico, (2) the inde-
pendence of the country as a monarchy to be headed by a Bourbon
prince, subject to the approval of Ferdinand VII, and (3) sacredly
pledged friendship between Mexicans and Spaniards. The viceroy
approved the plan. Iturbide entered Mexico City September 27,
1821, to take over control until the ruler to be chosen by Ferdinand
should appear. But the king refused the plan. Congress elected
Iturbide emperor and on July 21, 1822, he was crowned in the cathe-
dral. But the revolutionary republicans, led by Santa Anna, caused
the collapse of the short-lived empire (December, 1822). Iturbide
abdicated and went to Europe. When he returned in disguise he was
arrested (July 14, 1824) and shot ten days later. (See page 132.)
Uncertainty and confusion reigned for some years. Santa Anna's
defeat in Texas was followed by war with the United States, the
capture of Mexico City on September 14, 1847, and the treaty of
Guadalupe-Hidalgo, February 2, 1848. (See page 134.)
EMPERADORES MEJICANOS 337
Omitting details of the wars over the Reform Laws and continued
disturbances, we find that Benito Judrez (1806-1872) had become
president (1861). French, English and Spanish holders of Mexican
bonds, angered by a decree by Judrez which suspended payment on
these bonds (issued by Santa Anna), complained loudly to their
governments. France, England, Spain and the Southern Confeder-
acy (then at war with the North of the United States) desired a
stable government in Mexico. (The Confederacy was regarding
favorably a union with Mexico, but hastily turned from that idea
later.)
Napoleon III, ostensibly supported by England (seeking collec-
tion of 50 million dollars from Mexico) and by Spain (which sought
to regain control of Mexico), landed an army at Vera Cruz at the
end of 1861. After vain conferences with the Mexican authorities,
the French army reached Mexico City in July, 1863, and took con-
trol of surrounding regions. The English and the Spanish withdrew
their forces in April, 1862, because they were both suspicious of
Napoleon's intentions and fearful of the opposition of the Washing-
ton government to invasion of American soil.
Meanwhile, Napoleon III, wishing to gain a foothold in the New
World (despite the Monroe Doctrine announced in 1823), and at the
same time to appear to do a favor to Austria after having harmed her
by successful military operations against her in Italy, offered the
crown of emperor of Mexico to Ferdinand Maximilian Joseph (1832-
1864), archduke of Austria and brother of Francis Joseph I, who
had become emperor in 1848. Maximilian hesitated, but his am-
bitious young wife, Marie Carlota Amflie, daughter of Leopold I
of Belgium (Bttgica), urged him to accept Napoleon's offer. The
sad outcome of the venture is related in the text. Carlota never
regained her sanity, though she lived to be eighty-six years old.
She died January 16, 1927, at the Chftteau Bouchot in Belgium.
Maximilian's body was returned to Vienna.
Borbdn, Bourbon. The Bourbon line of Spanish kings began in
1701 with Philip IV, grandson of Louis XIV of France, and con-
tinued until the departure of Alphonso XIII from Madrid, April 14,
1931. The Spanish sovereigns from Charles V (1516) until the
338 QUINITO EN AMERICA
coming of the Bourbons were of the Austrian house of Hapsbuig,
as also was Maximilian.
QuerStaro, capital of the state of the same name and having
38,000 inhabitants, lies 167 miles north of Mexico City.
Morelia, capital of the state of the same name (37,000 popula-
tion), is called thus in honor of Morelos (see above). It was origi-
nally called Valladolid when founded in 1541 by Antonio de Men-
doza, first viceroy of Mexico.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by 5! or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement.
i. Guatimozin fue el primer emperador de Mejico. 2. £l
murio fusilado por los franceses. 3. Uno no puede envidiar
la suerte de los que han sido emperadores de MSjico. 4. Itur-
bide nacio en Morelia. 5. Segtin el « Plan de Iguala » Mejico
habfa de ser una repdblica. 6. Fernando VII acepto el « Plan
de Iguala. » 7. Iturbide fu6 prodamado emperador de Aus-
tria. 8. Cuando los republicanos se rebelaron contra Itur-
bide, 6ste se fu6 para los Estados Unidos. 9. Al volver a
M6jico 61 murio fusilado. 10. Maximiliano ofrecio a Napo-
Ie6n III la corona del nuevo imperio mejicano. u. Carlota,
esposa de Maximiliano, queria ser emperatriz. 12. El nuevo
emperador ordeno que fuese fusilado cualquier soldado que
dirigiera armas contra el imperio. 13. Los Estados Unidos
pidieron a Napole6n que retirase de Mejico el ejfircito ing!6s.
14. Maximiliano quedo abandonado por Napole6n. 15. Fue
condenado a la muerte y fusilado. 16. Carlota no logro 6xito
en la solicitud que presento a Napole6n.
II. Use in complete Spanish sentences the following words
or phrases:
i. Realizar. 2. Darse cuenta de. 3. Suceso. 4. fixito.
5. Poder (as noun). 6. Poder (as verb). 7. Envano. 8. Mo-
EMPERADORES MEJICANOS 339
rir quemado. 9. Tenerpor. 10. Nada (pronoun), n. Nada
(verb).
III. What word does not belong in the line ?
1. principe, emperador, bandido, rey, virrey, duque.
2. suponer, mandar, ordenar, pedir.
3. fusilar, matar, dar muerte, quitar la vida, perdonar.
4. feliz, desgraciado, contento, alegre.
EJERCICIO DE GRAMATICA
1. For m&s inter esante que sea el cuento. However in-
teresting (no matter how interesting) the story may be. For malo
que fuera el gobierno. However bad (no matter how bad) the
government may have been.
In the above sentences we see how par (or por mis) +
adjective + que may be used to introduce a dependent clause
and that the verb in that clause is in the subjunctive mood
when indefiniteness or contingency is implied. If, however,
there is implied certainty as to the action expressed by that
verb, then it is in the indicative : por malo que era el gobierno,
however bad the government was.
The use of the subjunctive here illustrated may be classified
under that of adjective clauses having an indefinite antecedent
(page 257).
The same construction may be used with an adverb as the
basic word in the above formula: por r&pidamente que corra,
however rapidly he may run; por m&s tranquilamente que
durmiera, no matter how peacefully he might have been sleeping.
2. We have now completed the study of the different tenses
of Spanish verbs which it is necessary to know. There are
two more, the future subjunctive and the future perfect sub-
junctive (hablare, hubiere hablado) which are so infrequently
used that we shall omit them.
340 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Let us, then, arrange in the form of a synopsis, the different
tenses, using as an example the verb phrase traerselo, to bring
it to him, in the ist person singular.
traerselo traytndoselo tratdo
INDICATIVE MOOD
SIMPLE TENSES COMPOUND TENSES
Present: selotraigo Present Perfect: se lo he tratdo
Imperfect: selotraia Pluperfect: se lo habla traido
Preterite : se lo traje Preterite Perfect : se lo hube traido
Future : se lo traere Future Perfect : se lo habre traido
Post-preterite: selo Post-preterite Perfect: selohabrta
traeria traido
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
Present: selotraiga Present Perfect: se lo hay a tratdo
T , , (selotrajese _. . A ( se lo hubiese traido
Imperfect < f , . Pluperfect < f . . . A f .
(selotrajera r \se lo hubiera tratdo
IMPERATIVE MOOD
Intimate Polite
Singular Singular
Affirmative: tr&eselo (til) Affirmative: tr&igaselo (Vd.)
Negative : no selo traigas (tit) Negative : no selo traiga ( Vd.)
Plural Plural
Affirmative: tratdselo (vos- Affirmative: tr&igaselo (Vd.)
otros)
Negative: no se lo tratgtis Negative: no se lo traigan
(vosotros) (Yds.)
Hortatory
Affirmative: traig&moselo
Negative: no se lo traigamos
EMPERADORES MEJICANOS 341
When we make a synopsis in a given person and number,
such a plan can apply only to the indicative and subjunctive
moods. The imperative mood, including the hortatory forms,
can only be in certain definite persons and numbers, as may
be readily seen by examining the above picture of that mood.
Translate into English all forms given in the above synopsis.
I. Translate into English the following sentences:
i. For m£s cansados que estemos, no podremos descansar.
2. For m£s cansados que hayamos estado, no hemos podido
descansar. 3. For m&s cansados que estuvteramos, no pudi-
mos descansar. 4. For mis cansados que hubieramos estado,
no hubieramos podido descansar. 5. For bonitas que sean,
tienen que trabajar. 6. For mucho que lo nieguen, es verdad.
7. For mal que me sirviese ella, yo no le diria nada.
II. Following the plan of page 340, make a synopsis in the
3rd person plural of:
construirlos, to build them; realizarlo, to execute it
III. Say and write in Spanish the following sentences:
i. However well you may build it, I shall not like it.
2. However rich she may have been, she is not so now.
3. However badly (mal) he spoke, we understood him.
4. Execute it (Vd.). 5. Do not execute it (Vd.). 6. Execute
it (tii). 7. Do not execute it (ffi). 8. Execute it (Yds.).
9. Do not execute it (Yds.). 10. Execute it (vosotros).
n. Do not execute it (vosotros). 12. Let us bring them to
them. 13. Let us not bring them to her.
IV. Make plural as many words as possible in each of the
following sentences:
i. Que 61 se lo traiga a ella. 2. No se la habrla traido yo
a ellos. 3. Se lo traje a 61. 4. No lo realic6. 5. No la realice
Vd. 6. No me lo construy6. 7. Qui6ralo o no lo quiera.
SfiPTIMA LECCI6N DE REPASO
VOCABULARIO
I. Give the
the horseman
the bench
the silk
to cover
the imitation
inexpressible
prosperous
the aviator
the calm
to mark
the route
the being
to remember
the fortune
to suppose
to shoot
vain
the leather
the return
Spanish for the
the eagle
the trousers
to reproduce
the highway
narrow
the brick
the pyramid
warm
the ocean
to fish
expert
mysterious
the population
the success
to obtain
the promise
the empress
the prince
tragic
English words:
the amusement
to manage
regional
the bowl
high
immense
unfavorable
the merchandise
remote
the ticket
the lottery
the series
thrilling
inevitable
the ball
the debt
to order
the republican
the skirt
to embroider
the sex
the cowboy
the fagade
the industry
the volcano
to cost
the elevation
ornate
the ox
the institution
to invent
square
the spectacle
the skill
the bandit
unfortunate
to hate
II. Give the English for the Spanish words:
extrafto el hilo el banco el charro
sevillano la copia la china poblana la blusa
el rebocillo el propietario el jarabe tapatfo poblano
la tejuana la disposici6n la escultura esparcir
el borde el humo mezclar la misa
elnivd minero proponer embellecer
342
LECClCN DE REPASO 343
la terraza rosado tortuoso la residencia
la excavaci6n los dem&s la grada la cima
el ramal el mosaico el trecho restaurar
explotar la agilidad el hecho el tipo
el valor el front6n el jai-alai la circunstancia
el decreto condenar el archiduque parcialmente
envidiar la monarqufa la suerte vasco
suprimir
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
I. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words:
i. Ese seiior was burned to death. 2. £l no murio in vain.
3. i Do you remember aquellos dias emocionantes ? 4. Mi
amigo has succeeded. 5. Creo que el has succeeded in veneer
esa dificultad. 6. In mew of lo que Vd. me dice, no voy a
hacer nada. 7. La montana tiene 10.000 pies in height.
8. Trabajaban constantly. 9. Este animal es un buey; that
is, es un animal domes tico.
II. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. They saw about a thou- i. Vieron — mil aeroplanos.
sand airplanes.
2. We shall continue on our 2. Nosotros — camino.
way.
3. One must be careful. 3. Hay que — .
4. We were sleeping; mean- 4. Nosotros dormiamos; —
while he was fishing in the 61 pescaba en el rio.
river.
5. We place ourselves at your 5. Nos ponemos — .
disposal.
6. We are beginning our re- 6. Empezamos nuestro — .
turn journey.
344 QUINITO EN AMERICA
7. Soon after our leaving he 7. — nosotros, 61 Ileg6.
arrived.
8. Do you like to ride a horse? 8. 4 Le gusta a Vd. — ?
9. They have set out running. 9. Han — .
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
I. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words:
i. i Se siente Vd. somewhat cansado ? 2. Si, estoy cansado;
very. 3. No es at all peligroso viajar por avi6n. 4. Vimos
constructed la casa. 5. Vimos gathered las flores by la senora.
6. Oimos played la musica. 7. Oimos played la musica by la
orquesta. 8. Vamos frequently al teatro. 9. Nos saludaron
affectionately. 10. Perhaps ellos vayan a partir pronto,
ii. Perhaps ellos no fueran a la escuela. 12. Lets go al
front6n. 13. Let's go away manana. 14. We should like salir
a la calle. 15. You ought decirnos la verdad. 16. She could
venir mafiana.
II. Give the intimate singular commands, affirmative, of
the following verb phrases:
i. Visitarla. 2. Cubrirlo. 3. Venderlos. 4. Levantarse.
5. Acordarse. 6. Establecerse. 7. Declrmelo. 8. Hacerlo.
9. Venir conmigo. 10. Ponerlos. n. D&rmelo. 12. Salir
pronto.
III. Express in the plural the commands formed in II.
IV. Express in the negative singular the commands formed
in II.
V. Express in the negative plural the commands formed
inH.
VI. Express in the polite form, affirmative singular, these
same commands.
Courtesy : Grace L
The Beautiful Twin-Towered Cathedral Dominates the Fame
Plaza de Armas in Lima, Peru.
Panoramic View of Ar
quipa, with "El Misti" '
the Background.
Courtesy : Grace Line
A Scene in the Inca Capital, Cuzco.
Courtesy: Grace Line
LECClCN DE REPASO 345
VII. Express in the polite form, negative singular, these
same commands.
VIII. Say and write in Spanish:
i. Come what may, we shall be here. 2. Whether he wishes
it or not, they will accompany him. 3. Be it as it may, I shall
continue working. 4. However pretty the blouse may be, I
do not like it. 5. However high the mountains were, he
crossed them. 6. However slowly he walks, he will arrive
on time.
IX. Say and write in Spanish:
i. She has embroidered the blouse. 2. She has the blouse
embroidered. 3. They had written the chapters. 4. They
had the chapters written. 5. We have opened the door for
you. 6. We have the door opened for you.
X. Recite the present perfect subjunctive of the following
verbs:
condenar; aplaudir; decir; ver
XI. Recite the pluperfect subjunctive, both forms, of the
verbs given in IX.
XII. Using the plan found on page 340, give synopses of
the following verb phrases:
ofrecirselo, in the ist pers. singular
decir melo, in the 3rd pers. plural
sentarse, in the 3rd pers. singular
CAPlTULO XLIII
ALAS SOBRE CENTROAMfiRICA
i M6jico el bello, el romdntico, el estupendo ! Tuvieron
los G6mez que despedirse por fin del pais que les habia
resultado tan encantador.
Don Felipe condujo a sus parientes al aeropuerto de
s donde ellos habian de partir en su viaje hacia el sur. Le
dieron la madre y sus hijos un millon de gracias a don
Felipe por su hospitalidad y sus muchas atenciones. Y
no olvidaron a Arturo, el chofer, que les habia conducido
por muchas carreteras. Subieron al avion, que despego
10 r&pidamente y salio con rumbo a Veracruz. En esta
ciudad y puerto hacia bastante calor. Al poco tiempo
dejaron atr&s la ciudad m£s vieja de M6jico y una vez
m&s se encontraban volando por el aire en direccion a
Guatemala.
15 j Alas sobre Centroam6rica I Muy aba jo, por donde-
quiera que mirasen, los pasajeros veian bosques inter-
minables, bosques de caoba y otras maderas preciosas.
Al acercarse a Guatemala, la capital, volaron por entre
los volcanes Agua y Fuego.
20 Les parecia tan interesante Guatemala que se quedaron
alii varies dias. Hicieron excursiones a Antigua (Guate-
mala la Antigua) y a Chichicastenango. En Antigua
admiraron las ruinas de las viejas iglesias y casas, que
fueron destmidas por el terremoto del afio 1773. Los
ALAS SOBRE CENTROAMERICA 347
indios de Antigua y de Chichicastenango, descendientes 25
de los mayas, les parecian muy simpdticos e inteligentes.
Los bordados en colores que hacen las indias guatemalte-
cas encantaron a dona Ana y a su hija.
La capital, Guatemala (la Nueva), era moderna, bella
y progresista. 3o
Despu6s de dejar atr£s a Guatemala, volaron los turis-
tas a San Salvador, capital de la Republica de El Salva-
dor, que es el pals m£s pequeno de Centroam£rica y el
unico que no tiene salida al Atlantico. En las haciendas
de esta republica, como en las de Guatemala, se producen 35
en gran cantidad cafe, tabaco, arroz, pl&tanos y caiia
de azucar. Las carreteras salvadorenas eran insuperables.
El volc&n Zalco, cerca de la capital, despedia humo, y
por la noche parecia un gran faro.
En el viaje aereo a Nicaragua vieron los Gomez muchos 40
cacaotales, -donde se produce el cacao, con cuyas semillas
se hace el chocolate usado en todas partes del mundo.
Por fin se acercaron a los picos nicaraguenses y luego
volaron sobre el lago de Managua. Antes de bajar
cogieron una vista del inmenso lago Nicaragua, que tiene 45
noventa millas de largo y cuarenta de ancho.
En Managua, la capital, descansaron dos dias y luego
volaron a San Jos6 de Costa Rica. Otro pals, otra capital,
pero con aire distinto, y sumamente encantador. Es-
tando situada k capital en una elevaci6n de cinco mil y>
pies, el clima era sumamente agradable. Los costarri-
censes eran hospitalarios y casi todos ellos eran de la
raza blanca. La Casa de Correos y el Teatro Nacional
despertaron el entusiasmo de los viajeros por su hennosa
arquitectura. 55
348 QUINITO EN AMERICA
— En nuestro pais — les dijo un costarricense — somos
orgullosos de nuestra civilizaci6n. Hemos conservado
aqui lo mejor de lo que nos dejaron nuestros antecesores
espanoles. <j Conocen ustedes la historia de Costa Rica
60 y de Centroam6rica en general ?
— No muy bien — le contesto Quinito, — mas sabe-
mos, que los primeros descubridores y pobladores eran
hombres valientes. Entre ellos se contaron Pedro de
Alvarado, teniente de Cort6s, que conquisto la actual
65 Guatemala en los anos de 1524 a 1526; Francisco Her-
ndndez de C6rdoba, Pedro Arias de Avila y Gil Gonzalez
de Avila, que en los anos de 1521 a 1526 conquistaron y
poblaron lo que es hoy Nicaragua y Costa Rica, y . . .
— Y no olvide usted a Colon, quien en 1502, en su
70 ultimo viaje, toc6 en la costa oriental de Centroam6rica
— dijo su amigo.
— Algun dia — respondi6 Quinito — voy a informarme
mejor acerca de la historia de Centroam6rica, que era,
en los anos de 1823 a 1839, una confederaci6n de re-
75 publicas.
En la costa oriental de Costa Rica, asi como en Nicara-
gua, Guatemala y Honduras, se encuentran los grandes
platanales en que varias compaiilas norteamericanas reco-
gen enormes cantidades de pl&tanos que transportan a
80 los Estados Unidos. Es la tierra de los pldtanos.
En San Jos6 no continuaron en seguida su viaje, sino
que se quedaron alii varies dias con algunos amigos
espafioles que habian venido de Espafia a vivir a una
pequena hacienda que habian comprado.
85 Unos pocos dias m£s tarde los turistas siguieron su
viaje afireo y aterrizaron en Panamd.
ALAS SOBRE CENTROAMfiRICA 349
VOCABULARIO
ala f . wing hospitalario, -a hospitable
ancho, -a wide hospitalidad f . hospitality
atrds behind, back mas but
bordado m. embroidery platanal m. banana plantation
cacao m. cacao pldtano m. banana
cacaotal m. cacao plantation progresista progressive
caoba f . mahogany semilla f . seed
confederacidn L confederation tabaco m. tobacco
chocolate m. chocolate terremoto m. earthquake
faro m. lighthouse
NOTES: despedir in this chapter means to send forth, discharge;
salida means outlet; pldtano is also called banana.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
de ancho in width por entre between
de largo in length por la noche at night
lo me/or the best part
NOMBRES GEOGRAFICOS
Country Inhabitant
Guatemala guatemalteco, --a Guatemalan
Costa Rica costarricense Costa Rican
Nicaragua nicaragUense Nicaraguan
Panamd panameno, -a Panamanian
El Salvador salvadorefto, ^a Salvadorean^
Agua y Fuego, Fire and Water, the names of two volcanic peaks
which have caused great destruction in the past. In 1541, a flood
of water from the volcano Agua destroyed Guatemala la Antigua.
The next year it was rebuilt and in 1773 it was wrecked by an earth-
quake. Then the capital, with the name of Guatemala la Nucva,
was moved to the present site twenty-four miles northeast of Guate-
mala la Antigua. The latter city still exists, though the fine buildings
of the old town are mostly badly ruined.
350 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Chichicastenango, to the north of the capital, is one of the most
interesting towns of Central America. Most of the inhabitants are
present-day Mayan Indians and an honest, pleasant and hardworking
people. The Guatemalan Indian women are especially adept at
embroidery and weaving.
Zalco, a volcano near San Salvador, is frequently active though
not especially destructive.
Managua, the capital of Nicaragua, is situated on Lake Managua
in the northwestern part of the country. This lake is some forty
miles long. Lake Nicaragua, in the southern section of the country,
is about ninety miles long and into it through a connecting river flow
the waters of Lake Managua. In 1916, by the terms of the Bryan-
Chamorro treaty, the United States obtained for 3,000,000 dollars
the right to construct a canal from the Atlantic to the Pacific,
utilizing Lake Nicaragua as a part of the route. That right has not
yet been exercised.
NOTAS
Pedro de Alvarado (1485-1541), Cortes's chief lieutenant (see
page 271), set forth from Mexico in December, 1523 with a large
force of Spaniards and Indians to conquer Guatemala, which he
accomplished after severe fighting with the Quich6 Indians. He
founded Guatemala la Antigua in 1524 and was made governor of
the region. In 1531 he led an expedition to take Quito in Ecuador,
which he claimed was not a part of the territory granted to Pizarro.
Many of his men perished on the journey. Emissaries of Pizarro
persuaded him to abandon the plan, which he did after receiving a
considerable sum in gold as a reward for doing so. He returned to
Guatemala, participated in the conquest of Honduras, and in 1540
was again in Mexico, where he died from a fall with his horse.
For Pedro Arias de Avila, see page 193. Francisco Hern&ndez
de Cdrdoba (1475-1526) was a lieutenant of Pedrarias, who sent him
to take possession of Nicaragua, in defiance of the claims to that
region made by its first explorer, Gil Gonzalez de Avila (1470-1528).
C6rdoba sent his assistant Hernando de Soto (page 100) against
Gonzdlez de Avila. When Cortfe came into Honduras, C6rdoba
ALAS SOBRE CENTROAMfiRICA 351
(after having founded several towns in Nicaragua) sought to ally
himself with Cortfe and, later, to set up an independent government
of his own. Pedrarias hastened to Nicaragua, arrested C6rdoba and
had him beheaded.
The first settlement was made in Costa Rica by Francisco Her-
nindez de Cordoba in 1523. San Jos6 was not founded until 1738.
During the colonial period, the present six Central American
countries of Costa Rica — El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras,
Nicaragua and Panamd — were provinces governed by the Audiencia
( High Court) de Guatemala; later they were controlled from Mexico.
These provinces corresponded roughly to the present republics. After
their independence in 1821, a Confederation of Central American
States was formed by them, in 1823. It lasted until 1839, when each
State resumed its sovereignty. Guatemala was for a brief period
(1821-22) a part of Iturbide's empire.
The coffee of the Central American countries is by some con-
sidered superior to that grown in any other part of the world. The
banana industry, largely in the hands of the United Fruit Company
and other North American companies, is a source of large income to
Central Americans. The refrigerated boats of these companies,
which transport the fruit to New Orleans, New York and other
ports, also have excellent passenger accommodations.
Besides the lines of the Pan American Airways System which
traverse Central America and provide first-class passenger and mail
transportation, forty lines of the TACA (Transportes A6reos Centro
Americanos) have developed a large freighting business that is
contributing greatly to the development of Central America in the
lack of an extensive modern highway system. It was founded a
few years ago by Lowell Yerex. In 1939 the planes of the TACA
carried 25,000,000 pounds of freight and 66,000 passengers.
Only Guatemala, Costa Rica and Panama have coast to coast
railways. The only countries connected northward and southward
by rail lines are Guatemala and El Salvador.
352 QUINITO EN AMERICA
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. A don Felipe le dieron los G6mez las gracias por — .
2. Al despegar el avi6n, vo!6 en direccion a — . 3. De Vera-
cruz salieron con rumbo a — . 4. Al pasar por encima de
Guatemala los pasajeros vieron — . 5. Guatemala la Antigua
fu6 fundada por — . 6. Los indios guatemaltecos son — .
7. La Antigua fu6 destruida en 1773 por — . 8. Las indias
guatemaltecas tienen fama por — . 9. El pais mds pequeno
de Centroam6rica es — . 10. Su capital se llama — . n. En
CentroamSrica se producen — . 1 2. En un cacaotal se produce
— . 13. Las semillas del cacao sirven para hacer — . 14. El
volcin Zalco parece ser por la noche — . 15. En San Jose son
notables los edificios — . 16. La Confederation de Estados
Centroamericanos duro de — a — . 17. En un platanal
crecen — .
II. If a cacao plantation is called a cacaotal and a banana
plantation is a platanal, what are the terms given in Spanish
to a field or plantation that produces the following ?
cafe; tabaco; trigo (wheat); cana (cafiaveral o cafiizat);
heno (hay) ; patata (potato) ; maiz.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. Volaron por entre los volcanes. They flew between the
vokanoes. Volaron por encima de los bosques. They flew
aver the forests.
When the verb expresses motion and is modified by a
phrase of place, the usual preposition of place is preceded by
por: por entre, between, through; por encima de, over; por
debajo de, under; por delante de, before, in front of; por
detr&s de, behind; and so forth.
ALAS SOBRE CENTROAMfiRICA 353
2. Prepositions in Spanish are often, as in English, com-
pounds of two or more words, the main word frequently being
an adverb. Simple prepositions are such as de, of, from; por,
for, on account of; sin, without; para, for, in order to; con,
with; contra, against; en, on, in; entre, between, among;
hasta, until, up to; and others.
Compound prepositions are numerous and are usually
based on adverbs: antes, formerly ; antes de, before (in time) ;
cerca,near; cercade,near; de spues, afterwards; despuesde,
after; delante, ahead; delante de, ahead of, before (in place) ;
detras, behind; detrds de, behind; dentro, inside; dentro de,
inside of.
Both simple and compound prepositions and adverbs, when
followed by que, become conjunctions introducing clauses:
antes (de) que, before; aunque, though (from aun, still, + que) ;
a menos que, unless; despues (de) que, after; para que, in
order that; porque, became; sin que, without; hasta que,
until; mientras (que), while; ya que, since; siempre que,
whenever, provided that; and others. More complicated con-
junctions are seen in such phrases as como quiera que, how-
ever; dondequiera que, wherever; cuando quiera que, when-
ever; por dondequiera que, wherever; sino que, but.
3. No continuaron su viaje, sino que se quedaron alii.
They did not continue their journey, but remained there. Mas
sabemos. But we know.
The Spanish equivalents of the conjunction "but." Pero is
the common restricting conjunction meaning but. It unites
elements between which there is some opposition, but which
do not completely exclude each other. Mas is equivalent to
pero, but less used. Sino joins to but completely excludes
from a preceding negative element a following affirmative
element: no es rico, sino muy pobre, he is not rich, but very
poor. Sino que is the form which sino usually takes when
354 QUINITO EN AMERICA
mutually exclusive negative and affirmative clauses are
joined: no lo tomo, sino que lo dejo para Vd., I do not take it,
but leave it for you. In short sentences sino alone may be
used to connect dauses: no llora sino rie, he is not weeping,
but laughing.
I. Read and translate into English:
i. Antes no existia aqui nada. 2. Antes de partir, nos
saludaron. 3. Antes (de) que llegue Vd. estare yo aqui.
4. Ella vino despues. 5. Ella vino despues de recibir mi
carta. 6. Ella vino despu6s (de) que yo le hube escrito.
7. Entro sin decir nada. 8. Entro sin que nadie lo viese.
9. Me callare, para que no lo sepa nadie. 10. Me callar6
para no asustarla. 1 1 . Vinieron detris de nosotros.
II. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words:
i. Ella habla, but nadie la oye. 2. Eso puede ser verdad,
but yo no lo creo. 3. No somos millonarios, but no moriremos
de hambre. 4. No somos millonarios, but gente pobre. 5. No
se sentaban nunca, but al contrario siempre iban por aqui y
por alii. 6. No corre but vuela.
III. Using the plan on page 340, make a synopsis in the ist
person singular of:
olrlo, to hear it; acercarse, to approach
TV. Say and write in Spanish:
i. I do not hear it, but I see it. 2. Before hearing it, he
will see it. 3. Before he heard it, we saw it. 4. I approached
the door to open it. 5. I approached the door so that he might
see me. 6. He orders me to approach. 7. He ordered me to
approach. 8. Without approaching the door, I cannot open
it. 9. Without Philip's hearing the music, the orchestra con-,
tinues to play.
CAPlTULO XLIV
EL ISTMO DE PANAMA
— <i Y ahora estamos una vez m£s en suelo norteameri-
cano, verdad ? — dijo Rosa.
— No, senorita — le contest6 Pepe. — Es verdad que
los Estados Unidos compraron a Panam£ una zona de
tierra de diez millas de ancho, pero la ciudad de Panamd, 5
aunque estd situada en el centro de la zona, sigue siendo
territorio panameno. Solo al salir de los limites de la
capital puedes decir que $st£s en suelo norteamericano.
Para los viajeros Panamd era una ciudad interesantl-
sima, con buenas y numerosas tiendas, gentes venidas de 10
todas partes del mundo y mucha animation en las calles.
Parecia el cruce de todos los paises del globo. Se vendian
a precios baratos mercanclas traidas de tierras lejanas. Si
uno busca una cosa, cualquiera que sea, aqui la encuentra.
Se oyen hablar aqui todos los idiomas imaginables. 15
— Se ve que Panamd es un gran centro de comercio
— observ6 dona Ana.
— Claro — respondi6 Quinito. — Porque el canal de
Panamd, que atraviesa el Istmo, atrae un gran numero
de barcos dedicados al transporte de mercancias de un 20
ocSano a otro y a todos los rincones del mundo. Por el
gran canal, por el ferrocarril de Panamd y por el aire
pasan sin cesar las corrientes de comercio.
— Aqui el Istmo es muy estrecho — dijo Pepe. — S61o
tiene cosa de cincuenta millas de ancho, lo que significa 25
un vuelo de veinte minutos de Panamd a Crist6bal por
aeroplano, una hora y media por tren y ocho horas para
355
356 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
un barco que pase por el canal. Si tuvi&emos el tiempo,
yo pasaria por el canal en un barco.
30 — d Qu6 pensaria el buen descubridor Vasco Nunez de
Balboa si viera hoy cu£n pronto se cruza el Istmo? —
dijo Rosa.
— Sin duda quedaria muy sorprendido — contest6 Qui-
nito. — Porque a 61 le cost6, en septiembre de 1513,
35 mucho trabajo hacer a pie, en 26 dias, el viaje de un
oc6ano a otro. Desde Castilla del Oro, una poblaci6n
establecida por los espanoles en la costa Caribe, sali6
en busca del mar grande que decian los indios se encon-
traba al oeste. Despu6s de varias batallas con los indi-
40 genas, 61 y sus hombres se acercaron a un pico alto.
Subio solo Balboa y con emoci6n profunda mir6 el « Mar
del Sur » o el Oc6ano Pacffico. M£s tarde 61 y sus com-
paneros, entre quienes estaba Francisco Pizarro, entraron
en las aguas del mar y tomaron posesi6n de ellas en nom-
45 bre del rey de Espafia.
Mientras tanto el rey Carlos V envi6 al Istmo a Pedro
Arias de Avila a ser gobernador. Lleg6 Arias (o Pedra-
rias) con 1.500 hombres y se mostr6 muy hostil para con
Balboa, a quien captur6 y ordeno que fuese decapitado.
50 — Pedrarias seria sin duda un hombre cruel — dijo
Rosa. — He leido en alguna parte que despu6s fund6,
en 1519, la ciudad de Panamd, la primera ciudad, no la
de hoy, y que esta poblaci6n Ileg6 a ser el centro de
donde partieron varias expediciones para explorar la
55 Am6rica del Sur y la del Centro.
— Es verdad — observ6 Pepe. — Y m&s tarde, por
su despotismo fu6 trasladado Pedrarias a Nicaragua,
donde muri6 en 1531 siendo gobernador alii.
EL ISTMO DE PANAMA 357
— Fueron los ingleses los que destruyeron la primera
ciudad de PanamS, — dijo dona Ana. — Eso ocurri6 en 60
el ano 1671, cuando la atac6 el pirata Henry Morgan.
Volvieron los espanoles a construirla, pero mds tarde se
erigio una poblaci6n nueva, donde est£ la ciudad de hoy.
— Lo que me interesa sobre todo — dijo Quinito — es
como se construy6 el canal de Panam&. El Istmo era 65
parte de la Republica de Colombia durante la mayor
parte del siglo XIX. El francos, Fernando de Lesseps,
empezo en 1882 la construcci6n de un canal por el Istmo,
pero fracasaron su esfuerzo y la compania francesa. Los
Estados Unidos querfan entonces encargarse de la obra, 70
pero Colombia no deseaba pasar a la Uni6n Norteameri-
cana las tierras necesarias. El pueblo del Istmo se rebe!6
contra Colombia y estableci6 la Republica de Panamd.
La nueva repiiblica cedi6 en 1903 al gobierno del norte,
en que Teodoro Roosevelt era presidente, el territorio 75
deseado, recibiendo por 61 diez millones de dolares y la
cantidad anual de 250.000 d61ares. A este presidente
norteamericano echaron los colombianos la culpa de la
rebeli6n en el Istmo. Por eso, aunque los Estados Unidos
pagaron a Colombia la cantidad de 25 millones de d61ares, 80
existlan por muchos aiios entre los hisparioamericanos
sospechas y mucho miedo del « Coloso del Norte. »
— Pero ya ha desaparecido en su mayor parte ese
miedo — dijo dona Ana.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
coster trabajo to cost effort, be para con toward (in expressing
difficult mental attitude toward or
treatment of)
358 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
anual annual globo m. globe
barato, -a cheap, law imaginable imaginable
capturar to capture indlgena m. and f . native; pi.
corriente f . current aborigines
cruce m. crossroads, junction istmo m. isthmus
culpa f . fault, blame Umite m. limit
decapitar to behead, decapitate mostrar (ue) to show
despotismo m. despotism precio m. price
emocitin f . emotion sospecha f . suspicion
erigir (jo) to erect zona f . zone
fracasar to fail
NOTE: pueblo in this chapter is used in the sense of peopk.
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Vasco Nunez de Balboa (1475-1517) went to La Espanola in
1500 and to Darien, Isthmus of Panama, in 1512, being commis-
sioned governor of Castilla del Oro by the king's treasurer of La Es-
panola. On September i, 1513, he led an expedition westward in
search of an unknown sea reported to exist by the natives. On
September 25, after a difficult trip through hostile territory, he saw
from a peak what he called the Mar del Sur, Southern Sea, which was
the Gulf of Panama, a part of the Pacific Ocean. He returned to
his starting point on January 29, 1514. In June of that year, Pedro
Arias de Avik (see page 193) arrived in Darien with his royal
commission as governor. He quarrelled with Balboa, later im-
prisoned him, tried him on a false charge of rebellion, and ordered
him beheaded. Both Balboa and Hernando de Soto were sons-in-
law of Pedrarias.
Pedrarias founded the original city of Panama in 1519. He en-
couraged Pizarro and Almagro in their expeditions to Peru. Because
of complaints frequently made against his despotism and cruelty,
he was transferred to be governor of Nicaragua and died there.
For Sir Henry Morgan, see page 74.
EL ISTMO DE PANAMA 359
For the manner in which the United States acquired the Panama
Canal Zone, see below and the booklet, "A Primer of Pan Ameri-
canism," issued by the Pan American Union.
Cristdbal, at the northern end of the Canal Zone, bears the first
name of Christopher Columbus, Cristdbal Coldn. It was once a part
of neighboring Coldn, and is the site of France Field, the most im-
portant air transportation center of the Caribbean region. This field
belongs to the United States army, but is also used by commercial
planes. Albrook Field, at Balboa, at the Pacific end of the canal,
is also a United States Army airport.
El Canal de Panamd, the Panama Canal. Ferdinand de Lesseps
(1805-1894) was a famous French engineer, who built the Suez
Canal (1859-1869). He formed a company to build a canal across
the Isthmus of Panama and work started thereon January 20, 1882.
The company failed. The United States, after acquiring in 1904,
from the new Republic of Panama, the right to build a canal along
practically the same route the French had worked, bought from the
successors of De Lesseps, for 40 million dollars, the unfinished project.
Work began in 1904 and the canal was opened to traffic August 15,
1914. The cost of construction was nearly 526 million dollars, while
Panama received 10 million dollars, Colombia 25 million and the
French company 40 million for rights involved. The United States
has complete jurisdiction in perpetuity over the Zone, which is ad-
ministered by a governor appointed by the President of the United
States. The canal runs from Col6n on the Caribbean shore in a
southeasterly direction to the Pacific end.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. En la cuidad de PanamS, uno se encuentra en suelo nor-
teamericano. 2. En esta ciudad los muchos articulos que se
venden cuestan mucho. 3. Aquf s61o se habla espafiol. 4. El
turista que vuele de Balboa a Crist6bal tarda cinco horas en
hacer el viaje a£reo. 5. For el Canal de Panamd pasan grandes
360 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
cantidades de mercandas. 6. Tarda un barco cosa de doce
horas en pasar de una extremidad a la otra del canal. 7. Si
Balboa pudiera ver hoy este canal, quedaria muy asombrado.
8. Balboa vio por primera vez las aguas del Pacifico desde lo
m&s alto de una pirimide. 9. Llamo «Mar del Sur» las
aguas que descubri6. 10. Pedrarias vino a reemplazar a
Balboa como gobernador. n. Se mostro muy hostil para
con Balboa. 12. Ordeno Pedrarias que Balboa fuese per-
donado. 13. Despues de fundar la primera ciudad de Pa-
namd, Pedrarias fue enviado a gobernar a Nicaragua. 14. La
compania francesa de Fernando de Lesseps logro construir el
canal. 15. El pueblo panameno se rebelo contra la Republica
de Colombia. 16. Entre los hispanoamericanos se despertaron
sospechas de los Estados Unidos cuando al « Coloso del Norte »
le cedio Panam£ la zona del canal.
II. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. Hacer eso me ha costado i. To do that has — .
trabajo.
2. Ellos fueron muy crueles 2. They were very — .
para conmigo.
3. El pueblo costarricense se 3. The — .
acordo de 61.
4. Ellas me tienen por su 4. They — their best friend,
mejor amigo.
5. No creo que el haya tar- 5. I don't think —
dado mucho en llegar.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. Pedrarias seria sin duda muy cruel. Pedrarias (doubt-
less) must have been very cruel.
Here we see that the post-preterite may be used (as may
the future and future perfect, see page 288) to express prob-
EL ISTMO DE PANAMA 361
ability, conjecture or wonderment. More examples: i Qu6
hora seria cuando Vd. llego? About what time was it when
you arrived? At about what time did you arrive? Sertan las
cuatro. It was probably around four o'clock.
The post-preterite perfect at times may be used in a similar
manner: Juan habria sido el que lo hizo. John must have
been the one who did it.
2. Si uno busca una cosa cualquiera, aqul la encuentra.
If one seeks anything whatsoever, he finds it here.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
A. The above is a conditional sentence. The dependent
if-clause, introduced by si", is called the hypothesis. The
main clause (la encuentra), called the apodosis or conclusion,
expresses what follows when the condition or hypothesis is
fulfilled.
This sentence expresses a "real" condition, in which nothing
is implied as to the truth or falsity of the hypothesis. In
such cases, the indicative mood, in any suitable tense, is used
in both clauses: si yo le hablaba, el me contestaba, if I spoke
to him he answered me; si le hable, sin duda me contestd, if
I spoke to him doubtless he answered me; si viene le hablare,
if he comes I shall speak to him.
B. Si tuviesemos el tiempo, yo pasaria por el canal. If we
had time I would pass through the canal.
Here we have a different situation, for it is implied that
we do not have time, that is, the if-clause or hypothesis is
represented as "contrary to fact." It expresses "implied
negation."
In conditions of implied negation, though the time is present
(or future) the verb of neither clause is in the present tense.
The verb of the hypothesis (tuvi&semos) is in the 5-form of
the imperfect subjunctive. It would also be correct to use
362 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
the r-form of the same tense (tuvieramos). In the apodosis
or conclusion, the post-preterite (pasarid) is used. It would
also be correct to use here the r-form of the imperfect sub-
junctive (pasara). Thus:
{tuviesemos ) ( iriamos }
o r el tiempo, \ o \ a Panami.
tuvieramos } ( fueramos J
// we had time, we would go to Panama.
C. Si lo viera (o viese), quedaria (o quedara) sorprendido.
If he should see (or saw) it, he would be surprised.
In this sentence we see the same constructions as are found
in paragraph B. But this is not a conditional sentence "con-
trary to fact," for it does not imply negation. It only tells
what would happen in the future, should the hypothesis be
fulfilled. This type of sentence is called, for lack of a better
name, a "future less vivid" conditional sentence. Note again
that it is formed the same way as a conditional sentence of
implied negation.
In B and C we see that the time involved is present or future.
Later we shall see how to express conditions "contrary to
fact" in past time.
I. Read and translate into English:
i. Si tiene dinero, lo gasta. 2. Si le veo, le saludar6. 3. Si
yo le vefa, le saludaba. 4. Si 61 tuviera (tuviese) dinero,
lo gastara (gastaria). 5. Si yo le viese (viera), le saludaria
(saludara). 6. Si la conocieramos (conoci6semos), le habla-
ramos (hablarfamos). 7. Si Vd. me lo dijese (dijera), yo lo
creeria (creyera). 8. Si fracasara (fracasase) el plan, me
echaran (echarian) la culpa. 9. Si ella lo deseara (desease),
lo compraria (comprara). 10. Si Vd. me lo dice, lo creerfi.
11. Si 61 vino, yo no lo sabfa.
EL ISTMO DE PANAMA 363
II. Tell what kind of conditional sentence each of the
above is called. Explain why the verb form found in each
dause is used.
III. Say and write in Spanish, using the post-preterite of
probability:
i. Who could it have been (who was it probably) ? 2. It
must have been my friend. 3. How old (tener anos) was
he probably? 4. He probably was ten years old. 5. He
doubtless believed me.
IV. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words:
i. Yo lo haria ahora if I could. 2. Partiriamos en seguida,
if you consented. 3. Si no fuera tan tarde, / would go today.
4. Si ella los conociera, she would speak to them. 5. If we
bought the ring, lo dariamos a la senorita. 6. // the flowers
were beautiful, se las enviaramos a ella. 7. Las compr&ramos,
if they were sold at low prices. 8. Si se muestran ben£volos
para con nosotros, we shall stay here. 9. // the price is low,
comprelo Vd. para mi. 10. // he puts it here, yo lo mirar6
con cuidado.
CAPlTULO XLV
EN LA CIUDAD DE LOS REYES
De Panamfi, volaron nuestros amigos a Crist6bal, situado
en la entrada Caribe del canal, que es el cruce de todas
las llneas a6reas del Mar Caribe. Desde el gran « France
Field, » aeropuerto del ej6rcito norteamericano, despego el
s avion volando con rumbo a Call, Colombia, adonde lle-
garon cuatro horas m&s tarde. Luego siguio volando en
direcci6n a Quito, capital del Ecuador, situada casi en el
mismo ecuador. Si hubiesen tenido los turistas el tiempo,
se habrian detenido en Quito. Sentian no poder visitar
10 la ciudad despu6s de coger una vista de ella desde el aire.
Una hora m£s tarde se encontraron en Guayaquil, im-
portante ciudad y puerto de la costa ecuatoriana, donde
habian de pasar la noche. Fueron los Gomez a dar un
paseo por las calles, donde vieron tiendas interesantfsimas.
15 Entraron en una de ellas a ver los sombreros de paja que
se exhibian alii.
— Son « sombreros de Panamd, » asi Uamados — dijo
Quinito. — Pero se fabrican en los pueblos del Ecuador.
Se emplea la « paja toquilla » que abunda en este pais.
20 Son sombreros magnificos, <; verdad ?
A la manana siguiente continuaron su vuelo hacia el
sur siguiendo a lo largo de la costa. Al fin de seis horas
aterriz6 el avi6n en el aeropuerto de Limatombo y pronto
despu6s se encontraron en Lima, Ciudad de los Reyes.
25 Aqul iban a quedarse dos dias.
Aquella misma tarde visitaron los turistas la gran
Plaza de Annas y en ella la gran catedral empezada en
364
EN LA CIUDAD DE LOS REYES 365
tiempos de Pizarro. Alii dentro miraron, muy impresio-
nados, la momia bien conservada del conquistador.
— i Pensar — dijo Quinito — que vemos los restos mor- ac
tales del que conquist6 para Espana la tercera parte de
un enonne continente ! Vi en Sevilla el sepulcro del in-
mortal Col6n, pero no con la emoci6n que siento al mirar
esta pobre momia. Le respeto mucho; casi le venero.
Cerca de la catedral visitaron la casa en que murio 35
Pizarro en 1541, asesinado por los amigos de Almagro.
— La odisea de Pizarro es para mi la mis estupenda de
todas las que se realizaron en el Nuevo Mundo — dijo
Quinito. — Pizarro estuvo con Balboa y Pedrarias en el
Istmo y en la nueva ciudad de PanamA. En 1522, 61, 40
Diego de Almagro, Pedrarias y cierto Hernando de Luque
formaron un plan para ir a explorar el territorio del sur,
en que, segiin los indios, existia un imperio de fabulosa
riqueza. En 1524 y otra vez en 1526 fracasaron las
expediciones formadas, y en este ultimo viaje qued6 45
Pizarro con diez y seis hombres en una pequena isla
de la costa, mientras los demds volvieron a Panamd en
busca de ayuda. Finalmente pudo Pizarro regresar a
Panama y luego fu6 a Espana.
En 1529 Iogr6 Pizarro ser nombrado para conquis- 50
tar y gobernar el Peril Otra vez sali6 de Panamd, en
enero de 1531, con tres barcos, 185 hombres y 26 caballos.
Le acompanaron sus hermanos Hernando y Gonzalo. En
el golfo de Guayaquil se reunieron con Hernando de Soto,
quien venia con refuerzos para la expedici6n. Todos lie- 55
garon a la costa peruana cerca de Tiimbez y empezaron
la marcha tierra adentro. En noviembre de 1532 se en-
contraron con el ej6rcito del Inca Atahualpa en Caja-
366 QUINITO EN AMERICA
marca. Capturaron a Atahualpa y le encerraron. Pizarro
60 prometi6 al Inca su libertad con tal que llenase con oro
el cuarto en que estaba.
— <j Es verdad lo que se cuenta de como el cuarto fu£
llenado por los indios con oro ? — pregunt6 Rosa.
— Parece que si — respondi6 Quinito. — Trajeron los
65 siibditos del Inca grandes cantidades de oro y plata,
tanto que valla el tesoro unos cuatro millones y medio
de ducados espanoles, que seria hoy cosa de quince millones
de d61ares norteamericanos.
Entonces Pizarro decidi6 no cumplir con la promesa
70 que habia dado a Atahualpa, por haber descubierto que
el Inca conspiraba contra 61. Orden6 la muerte de este
jefe.
Poco despu6s Ileg6 Almagro a Cajamarca con refuerzos.
Los espanoles continuaron hasta Cuzco, capital de los
75 Incas, teniendo que pelear sin cesar con los indlgenas.
En los templos y casas de Cuzco consiguieron los con-
quistadores mSs oro y plata, que valla unos veinte millones
de d61ares. Destruyeron la mayor parte de la ciudad y
construyeron en el sitio una poblacion espanola.
80 Carlos V di6 a Pizarro para ser su dominio lo que son
hoy el Ecuador, el Peru y Bolivia. A Diego de Almagro
le nombr6 para conquistar la vasta regi6n al sur. Al-
magro hizo una expedici6n a Chile, que result6 un fracaso.
Volvio y trat6 de tomar a Cuzco. Naturalmente se opuso
85 Pizarro al esfuerzo de Almagro y 6ste fu6 vencido final-
mente por Hernando Pizarro en abril de 1538 y con-
denado a la muerte. En Lima, tres anos m£s tarde, al-
gunos amigos de Almagro entraron en la casa de Francisco
Pizarro y le asesinaron.
EN LA CIUDAD DE LOS REYES 367
— <! C6mo sabes tti todo eso ? — pregunt6 dona Ana 90
ri&idose.
— Es que lo lei en un libro — contest6 Quinito. — Si
hubiera leido m£s, os habrfa dicho m£s cosas acerca de
la conquista del Perti. Siempre me ban interesado las
hazanas de Pizarro y Cort6s. 95
VOCABULARIO
ayuda f. help, assistance ttenar to fill
conspirar to conspire marcha f . march
cuarto m. room momia f . mummy
cumplir to fulfil, comply oponer to oppose
ducado m. ducat paja f . straw; paja toquilla hat
ecuadorm. equator straw
ecuatoriano, -a Ecuadorean peruano, -a Peruvian
encerrar (ie) to enclose, lock up regresar to return
fabricar (que) to make, manufac- respetar to respect
ture tesorom. treasure
importante important toquilla f. bonnet, hat (for
inmortal immortal women)
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
con tal que provided that oponerse a to oppose
cumplir con to fulfil, keep parece que si it seems so
es que the fact is that
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Lima was founded by Pizarro in 1535. It has 300,000 inhabitants.
It was first called the City of Kings, Ciudad de los Reyes. The Plaza
de Armas is the principal square of the city.
Francisco Pizarro (1471-1541). Diego de Almagro (1475-1538).
An account of the accomplishments of these conquistadores is given
in the Spanish text.
Guayaquil, Ecuador's only but very important port. Population,
about 125,000. From the harbor a railway ascends by a tortuous
368 QUINITO EN AMERICA
route to Quito (population, 110,000), the capital, situated on a high
plateau at an altitude of 9,500 feet, and about 200 miles north of
Guayaquil. Quito was the capital of the Quitus Indians and was
conquered by Pedro de Alvarado (see page 271) and Sebastian
de Benalcdzar in 1534. It is only a few miles south of the equator
(ecuador), which word is, of course, the origin of the name of the
Republic of Ecuador.
In Quito, the Inca Atahualpa at one time had his capital, where
he was ruler of the northern section of the Inca empire. He was
opposed by Huascar in Peru and forced the latter to retreat to Cuzco
in southern Peru where he captured him. Atahualpa was returning
to Quito at the time Pizarro was invading Peru and entering Caja-
marca, some hundred miles inland from the coast. In the battle
that occurred there, the Indian forces were routed and Atahualpa
imprisoned. Huascar was murdered then by Atahualpa's followers,
who believed that Pizarro had come to aid Huascar. Inca was the
title equivalent to king or ruler which the sun-worshipping tribes of
the Andes Indians gave to their head chieftain.
Call in southwestern Colombia, is a fine city of 123,000 population,
now quite important as an airport of the Panagra Lines. It was
founded by Benalcazar, as was also Guayaquil.
The paja toquilla, hat straw, used in making "Panama" hats, is a
strong fine rush-like grass that is found in various parts of South
America, but its best quality grows in the highlands of Ecuador.
Several towns of that country have as their principal industry the
weaving of these hats by hand, Jipijapa being one of the chief centers
of this business. Hence, these hats are called sombreros dejipijapa,
or sombreros de paja toquilla. In the United States they are called
" Panama ' ' hats because they were first (and still are) sold to travelers
in Panama.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. i Qu6 aeropuerto importante se encuentra en Crist6bal?
2. <i Cuil fu6 la ciudad en que aterriz6 el avi6n despu6s de
dejar atris a Cristobal? 3. <j Qu6 habrian hecho los Gomez
EN LA CIUDAD DE LOS REYES 369
si hubieran tenido el tiempo ? 4. i Qu6 hablan de hacer en
Guayaquil ? 5. <i D6nde se fabrican los llamados « sombreros
de Panam4 » ? 6. <> Que se emplea para fabricar estos som-
breros? 7. i Como se llama el aeropuerto de Lima?
8. <J Donde descansan los restos mortales de Francisco Pi-
zarro ? 9. i Que parientes y amigos acompanaron a Pizarro ?
10. <i Que ordeno Pizarro que hiciesen los sfibditos de Ata-
hualpa? ii. i Cuanto valia el tesoro con que llenaron un
cuarto? 12. i Por que no cumplio Pizarro la promesa que
habia hecho a Atahualpa ? 13. i En qu6 ciudad del sur del
Perti consiguieron los espanoles otro gran tesoro ? 14. £ Quien
fue nombrado por Carlos V para conquistar la regi6n al sur ?
15. £ Quien venci6 a Almagro? 16. <i Como y donde muri6
Pizarro ?
II. Give Spanish verbs related in meaning and derivation
to the following words:
ayuda; marcha; vuelo; f&brica; lleno; promesa; regreso;
valor; muerte; orden; bordado; salida; fracaso; cruce;
mostrar.
III. Use in complete Spanish sentences the following words
or phrases:
i. oponerse a. 2. cumplir con. 3. es que. 4. con tal que.
5. paja toquilla. 6. parece que no.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. El cuarto fu6 llenado con oro por los indfgenas. The
room was filled with gold by the natives.
Fu& llenado is the preterite, 3rd person singular, of the
passive voice of llenar, to fill. The auxiliary of the passive
voice is the verb ser (see page 117). In the passive the agent
of the action is usually preceded by por, by. However, if the
verb denotes mental rather than physical action the preposi-
370 QUINITO EN AMERICA
tion de, by, is usually employed: Juan es amado de todos,
John is beloved by all; las senoras fueron temidas de las
criadas, the ladies were feared by the servants. When in doubt,
use por.
2. Si hubiesen (hubieran) tenido el tiempo, se habrian
(hubieran) detenido alii. If they had had time, they would
have stopped there. Si yo hubiera leido mas, os habria dicho
mas cosas. If I had read more, I would have told you more
things.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES CONTRARY TO FACT IN
PAST TIME
The above are conditional sentences contrary to fact (or
expressing implied negation) in past time. Notice that the
same rules that govern the main verb and the dependent
hypothesis in present time are applied to the auxiliary in ex-
pressing past time. Thus:
(yo hubiese\ (habria }
o i- tenido el tiempo, -I o volado a CalL
yo hubiera) (hubiera)
If I had had time, I would have flown to Cali.
That is, the s-form or the r-form of the pluperfect subjunc-
tive is used in the hypothesis, and the post-preterite perfect
or the r-form of the pluperfect subjunctive is used in the con-
clusion or apodosis.
I. In the blanks of the following sentences in the passive
voice supply the proper preposition :
i. Los frailes eran respetados — muchos. 2. Mi padre es
amado — sus hijos. 3. La puerta sera abierta — el jefe.
4. Las flores ban sido recogidas — lasninas. 5. Los sombreros
fueron fabricados — los obreros. 6. El nombre de Cervantes
es venerado — incontables personas.
EN LA CIUDAD DE LOS REYES 371
II. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words:
i. Si me hubiesen creido, they would not have come. 2. Ella
no hubiera dicho eso, if she had told the truth. 3. Si Vd. hu-
biera vuelto a tiempo, you would have seen him. 4. No ha-
briamos llegado tarde, if the airplane had not delayed in taking
°ff- 5- Si la expedition de Almagro no hubiera fracasado, he
would not have attacked Cuzco. 6. // the natives had not filled
the room with gold, £ que habria hecho Pizarro ?
III. Make affirmative the following negative intimate com-
mands:
i. No la cumplas tu. 2. No la cumplais vosotros. 3. No
me lo traigas. 4. No me lo traigais. 5. No le encierres.
6. No lo encerreis. 7. No las pagues. 8. No las pagueis.
9. No te acuerdes. 10. No os acordeis.
IV. Express in the polite form, negative, the commands
in III.
V. Express in the polite form, affirmative, the commands
in III.
CAPfTULO XLVI
CUZCO INCAICO Y ESPANTOL
Gozaron los Gomez grandemente de los dias pasados en
Lima, fundada por Pizarro en el ano 1535. Estudiaron
en el Museo Nacional de Bellas Artes los restos de la
civilization incaica y preincaica: objetos de plata y oro,
5 articulos de ceramica, tejidos en vivos colores, todos
ellos hechos por las manos expertas de indios prehistoricos.
Habian sido encontrados en tumbas esparcidas por el pais.
Dijo dona Ana :
— Me parece que la vieja civilization del Peru debla de
10 ser tan progresista e interesante como la de los aztecas y
los mayas de M6jico y Guatemala.
— Si — afiadio Pepe; — me interesa tan to todo esto
que quisiera ver la capital del antiguo imperio de los
Incas. Siendo posible, quisiera ir a Cuzco.
15 — Yo tambi&i — exclamo Rosa. — <; Por que no nos
vamos todos a Cuzco ?
Asi es que al dia siguiente partio la familia para Cuzco,
situado en el sudeste del Peru. Pero no fueron por avion.
Decidieron ir por automovil para ver como era la nueva
20 Carretera Central que va de Lima a Puno, puerto del
gran lago Titicaca. Desde Juliaca, cerca de Puno, irian
por ferrocarril a Cuzco.
Saliendo de Lima hacia el este, subian sin cesar por la
carretera hasta llegar a La Oroya, en una altura de diez
25 y seis mil pies. Alii el camino se bifurcaba y un ramal
iba en direction nordeste. Siguieron los turistas por el
372
CUZCO INCAICO Y ESPANOL 373
otro ramal que se volvia hacia el sur, pasando por entre
algunos de los picos mas elevados de los Andes. Este
viaje por automovil les resulto muy emocionante a los
viajeros. Pero dona Ana no se sentia muy bien en esas 30
alturas.
— i Cuan dificil debia de ser el viaje que hicieron por
estas altas regiones montanosas Pizarro y su pequeno
ejercito ! — exclamo Pepe. — No habia caminos entonces,
nada mas que los senderos estrechos de los indios. £ Como 35
les era posible recorrer, por ejemplo, las 700 millas de
distancia entre Cajamarca y Cuzco ?
Nadie sabia contestar a esta pregunta.
En Juliaca tomaron el tren para Cuzco, que iba su-
biendo lentamente hasta llegar a Sicuani, aldea en que 40
tuvieron que bajar y pasar la noche. Al dia siguiente
llegaron a la capital de los Incas y se quedaron en el hotel
que es, a la vez, estacion del ferrocarril.
Montados en mulas, los Gomez fueron primero a visitar
a Sacsahuaman, situado al norte del pequeno valle en 45
que se encuentra la ciudad de Cuzco. Alii estaban en
medio de las ruinas de la gran fortaleza india. Las
inmensas murallas, de 1.800 pies de largo, habian sido
construidas con piedras inmensas cortadas y colocadas
en su sitio. Desde alii se dominaba un magnifico pano- 5°
rama de montafias y de Cuzco.
— Parece que los que construyeron estas murallas no
empleaban argamasa alguna — dijo Pepe. — <; Y como
podian traer a estas alturas piedras tan grandes ?
— i Qu6 Idstima que no podamos ir a Machupicchu a ss
ver las ruinas de los templos dedicados al Sol-Dios! —
dijo Quinito. — Pero quedan lejos esas ruinas y el ca-
374 QUINITO EN AMERICA
mino es malo. De ser bueno el camino, iriamos alld. Pero
debemos estar contentos con lo que nos ofrece Cuzco y
60 Sacsahuaman.
En Cuzco visitaron algunas de las numerosas bellas
iglesias que los primeros espanoles construyeron alii:
la catedral, Santa Clara, San Sebastian y otras. Ad-
miraron los ricos interferes y el estilo bastante ornado
65 con que adornaron los indios las fachadas.
La vida callejera era sumamente interesante. For to-
das partes se veian los pintorescos trajes de los indios, que
son quichuas y aimaraes, y que hablan sus propias len-
guas.
70 For fin volvieron los turistas sobre sus pasos y llegaron
otra vez a Juliaca. De alii fueron a Puno a tomar uno
de los pequenos vapores que cruzan el lago Titicaca.
— <; Vapores aqui ? — exclamo dona Ana.
— Si, madre — respondio Quinito. — Fueron trafdos
75 aqui hace anos, en secciones colocadas sobrc los lomos
de mulas y fueron montados en las orillas del lago.
VOCABULARIO
aimard m. and f . A imard (Indian) panorama m. panorama, new
altura f. height, elevation paso m. step
argamasa f. mortar preincaico, -a pre-Incan
bifurcarse to fork, bifurcate quichua m. and f. Quichua
colocar (que) to place, put seccidn f. section
incaico, -a Incan sendero m. path, trail
lomo m. back (of animal) vapor m. steamer
MODISMOS Y KXPRESIONES
a la vez at the same time volverse to turn
montar (here) to set up, erect, volvcr sobre sus pasos to retrace
mount one's steps
CUZCO INCAICO Y ESPANOL 375
NOMBRES PROPIOS
The Museo National de Bellas Aries of Lima has one of the most
interesting collections in the world of objects showing prehistoric
arts and crafts, especially of the different tribes of Indians ruled by
the Incas. These vessels and jewels of gold and silver, semi-
precious stones, and fabrics in artistic designs, were discovered in
burial mounds (huacas) and ancient ruins in many parts of the
Peruvian territory. Today any such relics must, when discovered,
be turned over to the government.
The new Carretera Central of Peru will be a part of the Pan
American Highway (see page 319).
Cuzco, until this central highway was opened, was accessible only
from the port of Mollendo in southern Peru, from which a railway
passes northeastward through Arequipa to Juliaca, then turns north-
west through Sicuani and ends at Cuzco. This is one of the highest
railways in the world. Trains run on it only in the daytime.
Cuzco was the seat of the Quichuan or Quechuan Indian empire,
ruled by an Inca. It is situated in a valley 12,000 feet in altitude
and is a veritable museum of the Inca civilization and of the early
Spanish colonial days. Pizarro, as did Cortes in Mexico, destroyed
most of the Indian city (where lived some 300,000 inhabitants) and
built on the site a Spanish city, in which abounded churches and
convents. In doing this, ancient walls of great stones skilfully
placed without mortar were often used as foundations for Spanish
houses. In Sacsahuaman, at the northern end of the valley, exist
remains of the great fortress built to guard the city. Here the walls
that still stand are exceedingly impressive. Beneath Cuzco exists a
vast labyrinth of Indian tunnels in which tradition says are still
stored treasures of the Incas.
In rebuilding Cuzco the Spaniards used, naturally, Indian work-
men. They were allowed, perhaps encouraged, to use their own ideas
in the decoration of the facades and interiors of the churches. The
result was highly interesting and resulted in a style called crespo or
curly ', which is rather ornate.
In Machupicchu, some forty miles from Cuzco, are found remains
376 QUINITO EN AMERICA
of gigantic temples erected to the Sun God. These ruins mark the
site of the once great religious center of the Inca empire.
Pi/no, on the northern shore of Lake Titicaca, is the Peruvian port
from which ply small steamers to the Bolivian port of Guaqui on the
southern shore. Most of these sailings leave Puno in the evening
and reach Guaqui the next morning.
The Aimara Indians were predecessors of the Quichuas. The
descendants of these two tribes predominate in southern Peru and
in Bolivia. They still speak their own languages. Of the great
pre-Incan civilization very little is known.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. Se exhiben en el Museo de Lima — . 2. Estos objetos
fueron encontrados — . 3. Dona Ana creyo que — . 4. Pepe
dijo que quisiera — si fuera — . 5. Decidio la familia — .
6. Esta vez fueron por — para — . 7. Al llegar a La Oroya,
tomaron el camino que — . 8. Pepe pregunto como era po-
sible que — . 9. El tren para Cuzco — . 10. El hotel en
que se quedaron en Cuzco es — . n. Fueron a visitar las
ruinas de Sacsahuaman — . 12. Las murallas de la fortaleza
— . 13. En su construction no se empleaba — . 14. Si el
camino de Machupicchu hubiera sido bueno, — . 15. Los in-
dios que se veian en las calles llevaban — .
II. Select from the second column words which are an-
tonyms of those in the first column :
olvidar esconder
odiar acordarse
valle estrecho
oponerse altura
mostrar entrada
salida amar
ancho aceptar
CUZCO INCAICO Y ESPANOL 377
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Siendo posible (si fuera posible), quisiera ir alia. // it
were possible I should like to go there.
A gerund phrase (see page 256) may be used as the hy-
pothesis of a conditional sentence. It is then equivalent to
an if -clause.
2. De ser bueno (si fuera bueno) el camino, iriamos alia.
// the road were good, we should go there.
Here we see that an infinitive phrase (see page 195), pre-
ceded by de, may be used as the hypothesis of a conditional
sentence. It is then equivalent to an if-clause.
3. El viaje debia de ser dificil. The journey must have been
difficult.
Here we see that deber de + infinitive denotes probability
or likelihood.
Debemos ser buenos ciudadanos. We should be (ought to
be) good citizens.
Here we see that deber + infinitive denotes obligation or
compulsion. The distinction between deber and deber de is
not always observed, but it should be.
WAYS OF EXPRESSING PROBABILITY
Deber de + infinitive: el debe de estar enfermo, he must
be ill.
The future tense: estard enfermo, he must be ill. (See
page 288.)
The post-preterite tense: estaria enfermo, he must have
been ill. (See page 360.)
Haber de + infinitive: ha de estar enfermo, he must be ill.
Es probable + subjunctive: es probable que est6 enfermo,
he is probably ill.
378 QUINITO EN AMERICA
WAYS OF EXPRESSING OBLIGATION
Deber + infinitive: debe trabajar, he ought to (must) work.
(Notice: debe estar enfermo, he ought to be sick.)
Tener que + infinitive: tiene que trabajar, he must work.
(Strong obligation.)
Haber de + infinitive: ha de trabajar, he is to work. (Mild
obligation with a touch of futurity implied.)
Es precise + subjunctive: es precise que trabaje, he must
work, it is necessary for him to work.
WAYS OF EXPRESSING IMPERSONAL OBLIGATION
Deberse + infinitive: se debe estudiar, one ought to study.
Tenerse + infinitive: se tiene que estudiar, one has to study.
Haber que + infinitive: hay que estudiar, one must study.
Es precise + infinitive: es precise estudiar, it is necessary
to work.
The above sentences are all expressed in present time.
They may, of course, be used in several different tenses.
For the use of debiera, see page 313.
I. Read and translate into English:
i. Hemos de partir. 2. Deben venir. 3. Debieran venir.
4. Deben de saberlo. 5. Habian de saberlo. 6. Habia que
saberlo. 7. Tenemos que salir. 8. Se tenia que salir. 9. Fue
preciso que lo dejasemos. 10. Fue preciso decirlo. n. De-
bieron de hablar. 12. Se ha debido hablar. 13. ^ Quien
habri de estudiar? 14. Era probable que se nos acercasen.
15. Habra que verlo. 16. Ella ha de ser actriz. 17. i Quien
sera? 18. <i Quien seria ? 19. Yds. deben saber eso. 20. Yds.
debian de saber eso.
II. Say and write in Spanish:
i. You must leave. 2. She must be ill. 3. She must have
been ill. 4. One must travel. 5. One had to travel. 6. You
CUZCO INCAICO Y ESPAfrOL 379
ought to write me. 7. You should have written me. 8. He
is probably tired. 9. He will probably be tired. 10. The
book must be new. u. The book must have been new.
12. They ought to study. 13. They must study. 14. They
must have studied.
III. Replace the gerund or infinitive of the apodosis with
an if-clause.
i. De conocerle bien, yo le habria hablado. 2. Estando
nosotros alii, visitariamos las ruinas. 3. Habiendola visto,
estariamos contentos. 4. Saliendo temprano, llegarian a la
hora indicada. 5. Habiendo salido temprano, habrian llegado
a tiempo. 6. De haberlo hecho yo, ella lo hubiera sabido.
7. De tener el tiempo, tu te quedarias aqui un mes. 8. De
haber tenido el tiempo, tu te hubieras quedado aqui varios
dias.
IV. The following conditional sentences are contrary to
fact in past time. Change them to apply to present time.
i. Si lo hubiesen estudiado, lo hubieran sabido. 2. No se
lo habriamos dado, si el no nos lo hubiera pedido. 3. Si ella
hubiera sido rica, me habria dado una fortuna. 4. £l se
hubiera acordado de mi, si yo le hubiese saludado. 5. De
haber tenido yo el dinero, lo hubiera comprado. 6. Habien-
doselo prometido, habriamos tenido que cumplir con la pro-
mesa. 7. Si Yds. se hubiesen ido, nosotros les hubieramos
acompafiado. 8. Ellos se hubieran acostado, si hubieran es-
tado cansados.
CAPlTULO XLVII
FOR EL LAGO TITICACA HASTA LA PAZ
El estupendo lago Titicaca, masa m£s grande de agua
que se encuentra en el mundo en alturas tan elevadas
(12.645 pies)> forma parte de la frontera entre el Peru y
Bolivia. Ocupa un area de m£s de tres mil millas cuadradas.
5 Era una noche de luna. El pequeno vapor navegaba
hacia el sur con rumbo al puerto boliviano de Guaqui.
Pasaba por entre varias islas, siendo una de ellas la del
Sol y otra la de la Luna. En las islas de este lago se cree
que nacio el imperio de los Incas, quienes, bajo Manco
10 Capac, trasladaron a Cuzco el centre de su civilization.
— j Mirad los pequenos barcos que pasan por las aguas !
— exclamo Rosa. — \ Qu6 extranos son !
— Son balsas indias — dijo un caballero boliviano que
estaba cerca de ellos en la cubierta. — Estas balsas las
15 fabrican los indios con ciertos juncos que crecen en las
orillas del lago. Son pintorescos, <: verdad ?
Observaron con interes una balsa que pasaba cerca, en
que iba toda una familia de indios, los padres y varios ninos.
Quinito estaba un poco distraido y su madre le pregunto :
20 — (J En qu£ estis pensando, hijo ?
— En lo que vimos en Cuzco — respondio Quinito, —
en los conquistadores indios que en un tiempo dominaron
tan vastas regiones de los Andes. Se dice que antes de
los Incas, hubo por aqui ciertas tribus que tenian, sobre
25 todo en la cuenca donde se extiende este lago, una civiliza-
tion bastante avanzada. Los Incas los vencieron y luego
380
FOR EL LAGO TITICACA HASTA LA PAZ 381
subyugaron a otras tribus en el norte y en el sur. En el
siglo XII, se dice que fundaron a Cuzco y desde alii
extendieron su dominio hasta la Colombia de hoy en el
norte y hasta Chile en el sur. Construyeron caminos y 30
cultivaron bien la tierra. j Que imperio m£s esplendido
era el suyo !
— Y luego vinieron otros conquistadores — dijo Pepe.
— Eran espanoles y vencieron, a su vez, a los conquista-
dores indios y se apropiaron sus enormes riquezas en oro 35
y plata.
— Estaba yo pensando en ese tesoro — aiiadio Quinito.
— He leido que los indios, al saber de la muerte de Ata-
hualpa y al ver la sed de oro de los espanoles, escondieron
debajo de la tierra fabulosas cantidades de oro en forma 40
de adornos y vasijas. Esto se hizo en todas partes del
imperio. For ejemplo, Manco Inca, jefe de Cuzco, habia
mandado hacer en honor de su primer hijo un cable de
oro. Pero al informarse de la marcha de los espanoles
contra Cuzco, mando echar este cable a las aguas de un 45
lago, para que no lo pudiera poseer Pizarro. <: Y cono-
c6is el cuento de las once mil llamas ? £ No ? Pues, una
caravana de once mil llamas, todas cargadas con oro en
polvo, estaba viajando en direccion a Cajamarca para
traer este tesoro al cuarto que Atahualpa habia prometido 50
llenar con oro. Pero cuando se supo que Pizarro habia
dado muerte al Inca, los indios enterraron en un lugar
todavia desconocido el oro en polvo junto con los animales
que lo transportaban.
— Se dice tambien — dijo Rosa — que durante muchos 55
siglos era costumbre de los indios enterrar con los muertos
objetos preciosos de oro.
382 QUINITO EN AMERICA
— Ademds — anadio dona Ana — durante muchos anos
despues de la primera conquista, los pobladores espanoles
60 tenian la costumbre de esconder en la tierra sus fortunas
en oro y plata porque no existian bancos en el pais.
— Entonces — observo Quinito — todo el Peru y partes
de Bolivia y Ecuador contienen muchos tesoros escondi-
dos. Y eso sin decir nada de las grandes cantidades de oro
65 y plata que todavia se encuentran en las ricas minas
andinas. Bueno; <i no debieramos quedarnos aqui a
buscar nuestras fortunas ?
— i Que idea mas ridicula ! — exclamo dona Ana.
— <j No sabes que tendrias que entregar al gobierno pe-
70 ruano el 90 por ciento de todo tesoro que pudieras descu-
brir?
Despues de una tranquila noche de dormir en el barco,
los turistas vieron que se acercaba el vapor al pequefio
muelle de Guaqui. Alii desembarcaron y tomaron el
75 tren para La Paz, capital de Bolivia.
VOCABULARIO
ademds moreover, besides enterrar (ie) to bury, inter
adorno m. ornament forma f . form
andinOf -a Andean frontera f. frontier, border
drea f . area junco m. reed
balsa f. raft; (here) Indian boat masa f. mass, body
boliviano, -a Bolivian polvo m. dust
cable m. cable subyugar (gue) to subjugate
caravana f. caravan suyo: el suyo his, hers, Us,
car g ado f -a loaded yours, theirs
distraidOf -a absent-minded transportar to transport
vasija f . vessel
NOTE: banco in this chapter means bank (for money).
FOR EL LAGO TITICACA HASTA LA PAZ 383
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a su vez in (their) turn oro en polvo gold dust
informarse de to learn about por aqui around here
junto con together with sed de oro thirst for gold
los muertos the dead se supo it was learned
mandar echar to order thrown tener la costumbre to be accus-
mandar hacer to have made tomed
NOMBRES PROPIOS
El lago Titicaca, partly in Peru and partly in Bolivia, is the
remnant of a once vast inland sea, and has a maximum length (north-
west to southeast) of 100 miles and an average width of 37 miles. It
has many small islands and is nearly cut in two by the Copacabana
Peninsula. Its greatest depth, along the eastern shore, is about
700 feet. The pre-Incan civilization that developed on the islands
and shores of the lake left traces, especially at Tiahuanacu at the
southern end, of a highly developed people, from whom the Aimara
Indians are probably descended. Monolithic gateways, pillars, large
human statues, and considerable carved stonework are seen in that
village, which has been continuously inhabited for many centuries.
Many legends exist concerning the prehistoric life on and about
the great lake.
Manco Capac, according to tradition, led his people northward
from the Titicaca basin, probably in the nth or i2th century A.D.,
and founded Cuzco. As Inca, he is supposed to have governed wisely
and well and under him and his successors, the Quichuas became the
most powerful of the six tribes that formed the so-called Inca
empire.
Manco Inca (1500-1544), ruler of Cuzco when Pizarro arrived
there, was recognized as such by the Spaniard, who caused him to be
crowned king in an elaborate ceremony. But he was virtually a
prisoner, with little power. He later escaped and fled to the moun-
tains, where he was killed by followers of the son of Diego Almagro.
384 QUINITO EN AMERICA
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish:
i. El lago Titicaca forma la frontera entre el Peru y el
Ecuador. 2. El vapor navegaba en direccion a Puno. 3. Se
cree que la civilization de los Incas nacio en Cuzco. 4. Las
balsas del lago son fabricadas con juncos por los indios.
5. Quinito estaba distraido porque pensaba en la actriz que
conocio en California. 6. Los Incas subyugaron a los es-
panoles. 7. Cuando vinieron los espanoles los indios ente-
rraron muchos tesoros suyos. 8. El cable de oro fabricado
para el hijo de Manco Inca fue echado a un lago. 9. Las
llamas cargadas con oro en polvo llegaron sin dificultad a
Cajamarca. 10. Los indios tenian la costumbre de enterrar
con los muertos un ramillete de rosas. n. Los pobladores
espanoles metieron en los bancos sus fortunas. 12. El que
descubra objetos de oro escondidos en la tierra debe entregar
el 90 por ciento del tesoro al gobierno peruano. 13. Una
balsa india es mas grande que uno de los vapores del lago
Titicaca. 14. Los Gomez volaron de Guaqui a La Paz en
un avion.
II. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. The Incas were conquered i. Los Incas fueron vencidos
in turn by the Spaniards. — por los espanoles.
2. The travelers were accus- 2. Los viajeros — comprar
tomed to buy things. cosas.
3. He ordered a cable made. 3. Mando — un cable.
4. We shall learn about that. 4. Nosotros — eso.
5. Their thirst for gold did not 5. Su — no nos gusto,
please us.
6. The dead were buried to- 6. — eran enterrados — sus
gether with their treasures. tesoros.
FOR EL LAGO TITICACA HASTA LA PAZ 385
7. There was much gold dust 7. Hubo mucho — .
around here.
8. I shall have those things 8. Mandare — de la casa esas
thrown out of the house. cosas.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Estas balsas las fabrican los indios. The Indians make
these balsas. These balsas are made by the Indians.
When the noun object (or an indefinite pronoun object like
todo) precedes the verb, as in the above sentence, that object
is repeated by the corresponding direct object pronoun, which
comes immediately before the verb. More examples:
Todo lo sabe, he knows it all. Estas vasijas las encontre
en una mina. I found these vessels in a mine.
2. Los padres ( = el padre y la madre). The parents.
Many masculine plural nouns may be used to include the
feminine of the same category. More examples: los reyes
(= el rey y la reina), the king and the queen; los hijos ( = el
hijo or los hijos + la hija or las hijas), the children; mis tios
(= mi tio y mi tid), my uncle and aunt; mis primos (= mi
primo or mis primos + mi prima or mis primas), my coitsins;
sus sobrinos ( = su sobrino or SMS sobrinos + su sobrina or
sus sobrinas), his nephew and niece, his nephews and nieces,
etc.
3. ; Que esplendido imperio era el suyo! What a splendid
empire was theirs!
El suyo is a possessive pronoun, used in the above sentence
for el imperio de ellos.
The possessive pronouns are identical with the longer forms
of the possessive adjectives (see page 76), except that they
are always preceded by the definite article.
386 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
el mio (la mia, los mios, las mias), mine
el tuyo (la tuya, los tuyos, las tuyas), thine, yours
el suyo (la suya, los suyos, las suyas), his, hers, its, yours
el nuestro (la nuestra, los nuestros, las nuestras), ours
el vuestro (la vuestra, los vuestros, las vuestras), yours
el suyo (la suya, los suyos t las suyas), theirs, yours
Possessive pronouns must, of course, have the same gender
and number as the nouns for which they stand: (casas) las
nuestras, ours; (libro) el mio, mine.
We notice that el suyo, just like su (see page 76), is quite
ambiguous. As in the case of su, it is often necessary to add
an additional clarifying phrase formed by the preposition de
and the suitable terminal pronoun: estas flores y las suyas
(de el, de ella, de Vd., de ellos, de ellas, de Yds.), these flowers
and his (hers, yours, theirs). In such cases the suyo forms may
be omitted altogether: estas flores y las de el (de ella, de Vd.,
and so forth) .
I. Say and write in Spanish:
i. Those houses our father built. 2. This temple the
tourists saw. 3. He believes it all. 4. This frontier we crossed
a year ago. 5. These ornaments my brother found.
II. Give all possible meanings in English of the following
words:
i. los abuelos. 2. mis amigos. 3. nuestros tios. 4. tus
primos. 5. los virreyes (feminine is virreind). 6. los chicos.
7. losindios. 8. losdioses(feminine,diosa). 9. losestudian-
tes. 10. los esclavos.
III. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words. Make dear ambiguous suyo, if used.
FOR EL LAGO TITICACA HASTA LA PAZ 387
i. Tus amigas y mine. 2. El adorno de Vd. y ours. 3. Los
adornos de Vd. y ours. 4. Nuestra tia y hers. 5. Nuestras
tias y hers. 6. Mi padre y yours. 7. Mis padres y yours.
8. Este cuarto y theirs. 9. Estos cuartos y theirs. 10. Vuestro
panorama y ours.
IV. Use the proper form of the definite article before each
of the following nouns. Then pluralize the article and noun:
ala; area; panorama; fronton; indigena; cruz; cruce;
emocion; cable; joven; capitan.
V. Say and write in Spanish:
i. I wish you to erect a house. 2. I wished you to erect a
house. 3. If you erected a house, I would buy it. 4. If you
had crossed the frontier, I should have followed you. 5. Make
(Vd.) a balsa. 6. It is necessary for him to make a balsa.
7. Come what may, I shall not hide the gold in the ground.
8. Bury (Vd.) the gold. 9. Do not bury it. 10. As soon as
you have buried the treasure, I shall look for it.
CAPlTULO XLVIII
BOLIVIA VIVE CON LA CABEZA
EN LAS NUBES
La Paz, ciudad de 200.000 habitantes, es la sede de
gobierno mis elevada del mundo. Esti escondida en una
cuenca que tiene una elevation de 12.700 pies y unas diez
millas de largo. Este valle se encuentra en medio de un
s vasto altiplano o meseta de 1.400 pies mis alto que la
ciudad. Desde el borde de la cuenca se mira abajo sobre
los tejados de azulejos de la capital.
Mientras bajaba el tren, exclamo Rosa:
— j Qu6 panorama mis maravilloso ! Y alii al este de
la cuenca se levantan los altisimos picos nevados de la
Cordillera Real. Mirad las casas pintadas con todos los
colores, verde, azul, color de rosa ... Yo no sabia lo
hermosa que es La Paz.
— Los dos picos mas elevados son el Illimani y el Sorata
5 — dijo Quinito. — Ambos tienen mis de 21 mil pies de
alto. Son majestuosos, <j verdad ?
Llamas en las calles al lado de automoviles y camiones
modernos, antiguos edificios construidos por los primeros
pobladores al lado de casas de estilo moderno y bello,
todo era una mezcla de lo antiguo y lo moderno. Las
bellas plazas, los buenos hoteles y varios mercados en
que vendian los indios frutas y legumbres muy variadas,
daban un aspecto sumamente pintoresco a la ciudad.
En el nuevo Alameda Hotel estaban muy c6modos
los Gomez y de alii salieron a recorrer la capital y sus
388
CON LA CABEZA EN LAS NUBES 389
alrededores. En la Plaza Murillo, centre de la ciudad,
admiraron el Capitolio, el Palacio del presidente y la
inmensa catedral. En la Avenida 16 de Julio (o Paseo
del Prado), una calle bellisima, se detuvieron ante la
estatua erigida a Simon Bolivar y m£s alld, Quinito paso 30
una media hora observando con atencion el gran monolito
traido de Tiahuanacu, poblacion prehistorica cuyas ruinas
se ven hoy en las orillas del lago Titicaca.
— Es claro que el nombre de Bolivia se deriva de Bolivar
— dijo Pepe, — Simon Bolivar, el gran Libertador. Fu6 35
el primer presidente del pais, en 1825, despues de haber
vencido a varies ej6rcitos espanoles en Venezuela, en
Colombia y el Peru; Boyadl en 1819, Carabobo en 1821,
Junln en 1824, y Ayacucho al fin del afio 1824, siendo
Antonio Sucre, ayudante de Bolivar, el general republican© 40
en esta ultima batalla.
— Sucre fu6 en verdad el primer presidente — contesto
Quinito — y era un caballero que mostro gran habilidad
en el gobierno de la nueva republica. Se le venera mucho
a Sucre en Bolivia. La ciudad de Sucre es la capital del 45
pais, aunque La Paz es la sede del gobierno. Otro h£roe
boliviano es Pedro Domingo Murillo, quien fu6 el primer
jefe republican© y declaro el 16 de julio de 1809 la inde-
pendencia del Alto Peru, es decir, Bolivia. En honor de
61 y de aquella fecha llevan esta avenida y la Plaza de 50
Murillo sus actuales nombres. Bolivar fu6 venezolano.
A 61 se le tiene por el h£roe supremo de la independencia.
— Si — observo Rosa; — Venezuela se declaro inde-
pendiente el 5 de julio de 1811 y Bolivar se hizo, poco a
poco, jefe de todos los republicanos del norte del con- 55
tinente. Venezuela, Colombia, Peni y Bolivia deben su
390 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
libertad a Bolivar. Jos6 de San Martin, argentine, hizo
tanto como Bolivar para dar la independencia al Peru.
Para mi San Martin tiene tanta importancia como el
60 venezolano en la historia del continente.
— A Bolivar se le ha llamado « el dguila » y a San
Martin « el zorro » de la revolucion — anadio dona Ana.
— Pero creo que hay bastante gloria para ambos. Se
les respeta a los dos en todas partes del mundo.
65 — Los dos nacieron en America — dijo Quinito, —
Bolivar en Caracas, el 24 de julio de 1783 y San Martin
en Yapeyii, el 25 de febrero de 1778. Los dos estudiaron
en Espana, y San Martin fue oficial del ej£rcito espanol.
Los dos regresaron a sus patrias respectivas, Bolivar en
70 1808, despues de visitar los Estados Unidos, y San Martfn
en 1812. Cada uno es muy venerado por todos los his-
panoamericanos.
— Pero hablemos de Bolivia — dijo Pepe. — Parece
que es un pais de enormes riquezas. Produce mds estano
75 que ningun otro pais del mundo. Las minas de plata de
Potosi y Oruro son famosas desde hace siglos.
— Y no olvidemos — anadi6 Quinito — que las dos
terceras partes de los habitantes viven en los altiplanos
que ocupan el 25 por ciento del pais. En las extensas
So regiones al este de la cordillera, en las tierras bajas, se
encuentran grandes bosques de caoba y palo santo. Se
dice que la patata que los espanoles trajeron a Europa
tenia su origen en Bolivia, donde existen unas veinte
especies de esta legumbre.
35 Podian los turistas ir por aire a la Argentina, por la ruta
< diagonal » o volar a Arica en la costa chilena y de alii
a Santiago de Chile. Decidieron ir por esta Ultima ruta.
CON LA CABEZA EN LAS NUBES 391
VOCABULARIO
altiplano m. high plateau nube f. cloud
ayudante m. assistant, aide patata f. potato
Cordillera f . mountain range pintar to paint
chileno, -a Chilean real royal
diagonal diagonal respectivo, -a respective
estano m. tin sede f. seat
fecha f . date venezolano, -a Venezuelan
majestuoso, -a majestic verde green
monolito m. monolith (stone in zorro m. fox
one piece)
NOTE: oficial is used in this chapter as a noun meaning officer;
patata is equivalent to papa.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
lo antiguo what is old palo santo lignum vitae (a hard
lo moderno what is modern wood used like mahogany in
cabinet-making)
NOMBRES PROPIOS
La Paz is the highest capital in the world. Its location, as de-
scribed in the text, makes it one of the most picturesque cities that
exist.
Illimani and Sorata (peaks respectively 21,181 and 21,286 feet
high) form the eastern skyline of La Paz.
The Avenida 16 de Julio or Paseo del Prado (meadow), commemo-
rates the date in 1809 when the patriot Pedro Domingo Murillo, an
early leader of the revolution, declared Bolivian independence, which
was not secured until the victory of Sucre over the Spanish in 1824.
It is a common practice in Spanish America to name streets after
historic dates.
Simdn Bolivar (1783-1830) was called the Liberator of Spanish
America, though the Argentinian Jose de San Martin (1778-1850)
was the Liberator of the southern part of the continent. Antonio
392 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Jost de Sucre (1793-1830) was, like Bolivar, a Venezuelan, and the
most able of the Liberator's generals. His name was given to the
old city of Chuquisaca or Charcas, founded in 1536 by Pedro Ansiirez.
Of the battles mentioned in the text, all victories for the republi-
cans, that of Boyadl took place in the department of this name in
present-day Colombia; that of Carabobo occurred in the present
state of that name in Venezuela; that of Junin took place in Peru,
as did also that of Ayacucho.
Alto Peru, Upper Peru, was the original name of Bolivia. It is
equal in area to Oregon, California, Nevada, New Mexico and
Arizona combined. It was a dependency of the viceroyship of Peru,
centered in Lima, until its independence.
Potosi, in southwestern Bolivia, is the center of an exceedingly
wealthy mining region. It is over 13,000 feet high. From the near-by
Cerro de Potosi great quantities of silver have been taken, since the
year 1546. Bolivia produces 15% of the world's annual supply of
tin, which comes from mines mostly in the southern part of the
country. Oruro, between Potosi and La Paz, is in the heart of the
silver and tin mining district.
On the lower plains to the east of the Cordillera Real are remark-
ably rich farming lands, only partly developed. In this region the
patata or papa is said to have originated. Of this tuber many
varieties were found. Different varieties of potatoes constitute today
an important element, along with maize, in the diet of Bolivians.
The Spaniards introduced into Europe the potato (1534) and tobacco;
also many other plants discovered in the New World. The Spanish
botanists of the i6th and ryth centuries were among the best trained
and most useful in Europe, largely because they were stimulated to
study the multitudinous new forms of plant life found in the vast
regions conquered and explored by their compatriots.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <J Qu6 ciudad es la sede del gobierno boliviano ? 2. <i Qu6
riudad es la capital? 3. <; Donde esta situada La Paz?
CON LA CABEZA EN LAS NUBES 393
4. i Cuales dos picos estdn al este de la capital? 5. ± Como
est&n pintadas las casas de La Paz ? 6. <i Que se ve en las
calles de la ciudad? 7. i Que admiraron los turistas en la
Plaza Murillo ? 8. <i Ante que cosa se detuvo Quinito ?
9. <i Qui6n goberno a Bolivia despues de darle su independen-
cia en la batalla de Ayacucho ? 10. <i Como se le ha llamado
a Bolivar? n. i Que nombre se le ha dado a San Martin?
12. <i Que se saca de las minas bolivianas ? 13. ^ Que maderas
preciosas se producen en la region oriental de Bolivia?
J4- i Que planta de mucha importancia se descubrio en el
Alto Peru? 15. <i Como decidieron los Gomez ir a Santiago
de Chile?
II. What word does not belong in the line ?
1. cobre, nube, plata, estano, oro.
2. perro, mula, zorro, llama, patata, buey.
3. verde, majestuoso, soberbio, esplendido, estupendo.
4. libertador, general, fecha, capitan, teniente.
5. drbol, pelota, palo santo, caoba, alamo.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Lo antiguo, what is old, the old; lo moderno, what is
modern, the modern; lo bello, what is beautiful, the beautiful;
lo me/or, the best, the best thing; lo mis mo, the same, the same
thing; lo escrito, what is written.
The neuter definite article lo is frequently used with the
masculine singular form of an adjective or past participle to
form an abstract noun.
2. Yo no sabfa lo hermosa que es La Paz. I didn't know
how beautiful La Paz is.
Lo is also used to express how before a variable adjective
(one changing its ending to agree with the noun modified),
which is then followed by que. Lo + adjective 4- que - cuin
+ adjective: yo no sabfa cuin hermosa es La Paz.
394 QUINITO EN AMERICA
More examples: Vimos lo ricos que eran esos senores, we
saw how rich those gentlemen were; no se cuan ricos son, I
don't know how rich they are.
3. Se le venera mucho a Sucre. Sucre is much revered. A
el se le tiene por un heroe. He is regarded as a hero. Se les
respeta a los dos. Both are respected. A el se le ha llamado
el dguila. He has been called "the eagle."
THE IMPERSONAL REFLEXIVE PASSIVE
In the above sentences we notice that:
(1) The verb is in the reflexive form.
(2) No person or thing is shown as the subject of the verb.
The only subject is the action itself.
(3) No agent of the action is, or can be, expressed.
(4) The verb is used only in the 3rd person singular.
(5) The person who is the object of the action is expressed
as the indirect object (noun or pronoun or both).
NOTE: When this indirect object is feminine, the pronouns
la and las are preferred: Se la respeta a Maria, Mary is re-
spected. A las senoras se las coloca aqui, the ladies are placed
here.
Such are the elements which constitute the so-called
"impersonal reflexive passive" construction.
DIFFERENT USES OF REFLEXIVE VERBS
Let us review the different ways reflexive verbs are used in
Spanish:
A. When a person is the subject and the verb is a transitive
verb: Yo me siento, I seat myself, sit down. Ella se levanta,
she rises. Este muchacho se llama Pedro. This boy is called
(calls himself) Peter. Here it would also be possible to use
the construction just discussed and say: A este muchacho se
le llama Pedro.
CON LA CABEZA EN LAS NUBES 395
In such constructions there can be expressed no agent of
the action. If it is desired to express the agent, one must
have recourse to the real passive : Este muchacho es llamado
Pedro por sus padres. This boy is called Peter by his parents.
The same thought may be expressed by using the active
voice : Sus padres llaman Pedro a este muchacho.
B. When a person is the subject and the verb is one that
can only be used reflexively or one that is intransitive: Yo me
acuerdo de eso9 1 remember that. Yo me voy ahora, I am going
away now. Yo me quedare aqui. I shall stay here. No me
atrevo a decirlo. I don't dare say it. (See page 201.)
C. When neither a person or thing is subject (that is, the
verb is impersonal) and the verb is transitive or intransitive:
Se come bien aqui, the food (the eating) is good here. Aqui se
baila toda la noche, people (one, they) dance here all night. Se
canta en la close, singing goes on in the class. Se mira abajo,
one looks down. Se va por aqui, one goes this way. (See page
83.)
D. When a thing is the subject and the verb is transitive:
el valle se encuentra aqui. The valley is (is found) here. Las
frutas se venden en el mercado. Fruits are sold in the market
place. El nombre se deriva de Bolivar, the name is derived from
Bolivar. (See page 117.)
In this construction the agent of the action can be expressed
with por: las frutas se venden por los indios. However, it is
better to use the real passive: las frutas son vendidas por los
indios.
E. In the impersonal reflexive passive described above under
that heading.
I. Read and translate into English the following sentences:
i. En La Paz se ven muchas llamas. 2. En Bolivia se le
honra mucho a Sucre. 3. A las madres se las respeta en todas
396 QUINITO EN AMERICA
partes. 4. Las madres son respetadas por sus hijos. 5. Fui-
mos nombrados por el gobernador. 6. A Pizarro se le nombr6
capitan general. 7. Aqui no se entra. 8. Creo que no se
estudia mucho en esta clase. 9. Se estudian bien las palabras.
10. No se debe escribir en la pared. 1 1. Se tiene que estudiar.
12. No se puede entrar. 13. Los arboles no deben cortarse.
14. Las flores se venderan. 15. Las flores seran vendidas por
los vendedores. 16. El idolo se venero mucho. 17. El idolo
fue venerado por los indios.
II. Explain the verb construction in each of the sentences
of I.
III. Say and write in Spanish:
i. We admire the beautiful. 2. We hate the bad. 3. She
gave me the best of the flowers. 4. We like what is pretty.
5. I said the same thing. 6. He is much loved around here.
7. He is loved by his friends. 8. The houses were built here.
9. The houses were built by the workmen. 10. The captain
will be respected, n. The president was honored by all.
12. People (one, they) do not drink here. 13. One does not
play in school. 14. One must study in school.
IV. Replace the English words with proper Spanish words:
i. No se how pretty the flowers are. 2. Ella vio how tired we
were. 3. No creeria Vd. how joyful the children were. 4. Me
han dicho how cruel he seems to be. 5. Los demas se quedaron
atrds para decirme how beautiful the cathedral was.
OCTAVA LECCI6N DE REPASO
VOCABULARIO
I. Give the Spanish for the following English words:
the earthquake
the banana
the outlet
to send forth
behind
wide
the confedera-
the cacao
the chocolate
cheap
tion
the embroidery
to erect
the emotion
the seed
the lighthouse
the fault
the isthmus
annual
to capture
to fail
the zone
imaginable
the globe
to fulfil
to lock up
the price
to show
to manufacture
to fill
the help
the room
the march
the straw
important
immortal
to respect
the treasure
to oppose
to return
the slip
the trail
Peruvian
the height
moreover
the ornament
to place
the panorama
Bolivian
to bury
the steamer
the cable
the frontier
the bank
the area
to transport
the date
the cloud
the form
Chilean
II. Give the
English for the following Spanish words:
la caoba
el cacaotal
hospitalario
progresista
la hospitalidad
mas
el platanal
la corriente
decapitar
el cruce
el indigena
el despotismo
el ducado
el limite
conspirar
la sospecha
la toquilla
la momia
la paja toquilla
ecuatoriano
bifurcarse
el aimara
el quichua
la argamasa
el lomo
incaico
la balsa
preincaico
el junco
la caravana
distraido
cargado
la masa
la vasija
subyugar
el altiplano
el monolito
la cordillera
diagonal
el ayudante
la sede
respectivo
el zorro
397
398
QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
I. Replace the English with the proper Spanish words:
i. No nos gusta what is modern. 2. Preferimos what is old.
3. Around here se ven picos majestuosos. 4. Gold dust es muy
precioso. 5. Vamos a learn about lo que paso aqui hace siglos.
6. Los indios buried the dead en huacas. 7. They are accus-
tomed de hacer lo que se les manda. 8. Nos escribieron in
their turn. 9. / shall order el dinero thrown al agua. 10. lie
had made un traje negro. 1 1 . El oro together with la plata valio
mucho. 12. His thirst for gold le volvio loco.
II. Make the Spanish sentences
1 . It is difficult for me to do i
that.
2. Don't show yourself (be)
cruel to her.
3. This road is forty feet 3.
wide.
4. And it is ten miles long. 4.
5. The best part of the plan 5.
has failed.
6. They flew between the 6.
peaks.
7. It always rained at night. 7.
8. He saw at the same time 8.
the two peaks.
9. They set up the steamer 9.
on the shores of the lake.
10. They will begin to retrace 10.
their steps.
11. I shall go provided you n.
accompany me.
12. He has kept his promise. 12,
equivalent to the English:
1. Me — hacer eso.
2. No se muestre Vd. cruel
3. Este camino tiene cua-
renta pies — .
Y tiene diez millas — .
— del proyecto ha fraca-
sado.
Volaron — los picos.
Siempre llovia — .
Vio — los dos picos.
— el vapor en las orillas
del lago.
Empezar£n a — .
Ire — Vd. me acompafie.
£l — su promesa.
LECCION DE REPASO 399
13. I opposed doing that. 13. — a hacer eso.
14. The fact is that he is not 14. — no viene.
coming.
REPASO DE GRAMATICA
I. Make compound prepositions based on the following
adverbs:
cerca; lejos; detras; delante; despues; antes; debajo;
encima.
II. Use in sentences the compound prepositions, each pre-
ceded bypor, which are based on the adverbs debajo, encima,
delante; also preceded by par, the simple preposition entre.
III. Form conjunctions based on the following adverbs,
and give their meanings in English:
antes; aun; para; por; sin; hasta; despues.
IV. Explain and illustrate the uses of the different con-
junctions meaning but: pero, mas, sino que.
V. Illustrate the use of the post-preterite to show proba-
bility or conjecture as applied to past time.
VI. Give all possible meanings of the following plural
nouns: los tlos; los nines; los emper adores; los reyes; los
hermanos; los hijos; los indios; los abuelos.
VII. Express probability in as many ways as you can as
applied to the following sentences.
i. He must be rich. 2. They must have been brothers.
3. She is probably my relative (parientd).
VIII. Express obligation in as many ways as you can as
applied to the following sentences:
i. He must work. 2. They had to go. 3. They will be
obliged to sing. 4. One must work. 5. People have to (one
has to) study.
400 QUINITO EN AMERICA
IX. Say and write in Spanish:
i. If he has time, he visits the library. 2. If he has time,
he will visit the library. 3. If he had time, he visited the
library. 4. If he had time, he would visit the library. 5. If
he should have time, he would visit the library.
X. Change the gerund or infinitive phrase of the following
conditional sentences to an if-dause :
i. De saber eso, yo no contestaria la carta. 2. Creyendo
eso, Vd. no podria aceptar mi solicitud. 3. De haberle msto,
yo le hubiera saludado. 4. Habiendo tenido el dinero, ella lo
hubiera comprado.
XI. Read and translate into English:
i. No se me odia. 2. £ Se les honro a estos descubridores ?
3. A Juan se le respeta. 4. Se la respeta a esta senora. 5. A
estas damas se las teme.
XII. Say and write in Spanish:
i. I remember them. 2. I shall go away from here. 3. The
boy sits down. 4. The trees are cut. 5. The trees are cut
by the workmen. 6. The food (eating) is good here.
XIII. Replace the English possessive pronouns with cor-
rect Spanish possessives. Make clear any ambiguity that may
occur.
i. Ese sombrero y mine son anchos. 2. Mis trajes son
menos pintorescos que yours. 3. Las minas de el son m&s
ricas que ours. 4. Nuestras casas son m£s nuevas que theirs.
5. Mis hermanas y his nos acompafiaron.
XIV. Say and write in Spanish:
i. These houses the Indians built. 2. He looks at every-
thing. 3. She likes what is new. 4. You prefer what is
modern. 5. You do not know how rich these ladies are.
CAPlTULO XLIX
FOR TIERRAS CHILENAS
En el vuelo de La Paz a Arica, una distancia de
200 millas, los pasajeros cogieron una buena vista del
gran lago Poopo. Pasaron la noche en Arica y a la maiiana
siguiente el gran pajaro mecinico los llevo rdpidamente
hacia Santiago. 5
Chile tiene 2.600 millas de largo y unas no millas de
ancho, siendo un pais largo y estrecho. Los Andes forman
la frontera oriental con la Argentina. Todo el norte es una
region irida en que casi nunca llueve. La parte del sur
es fria y cuenta con numerosos lagos de gran belleza. La 10
zona central es un valle de suelo rico que tiene 600 millas
de largo y en que se producen frutas, cereales y legumbres
de todas las especies imaginables, sobre todo uvas in-
superables, de las cuales se hacen buenos vinos.
— Todos menos yo saben si un desierto vale algo, pero 15
creo que este que vemos vale poco — dijo Rosa, mientras
volaban sobre el norte de Chile.
— Perdona, hermana, pero en eso est£s un poco equi-
vocada — le contest6 Quinito. — fista es la tierra del
salitre, que durante anos ha sido la fuente de enormes 20
riquezas para Chile, porque el salitre se usaba para hacer
la p61vora y para abonar los campos del mundo. Pero
ya que se consigue del aire el nitr6geno, que es el elemento
principal del salitre, este mineral ya no se emplea tanto.
— Hay que decir tambi&i — dijo Pepe — que por aqui 25
se encuentran enormes cantidades de cobre. La mina de
401
402 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
cobre mds grande que existe estS, en Chuquicamata, en
esta region.
Despu6s de detenerse brevemente en Antofagasta, ate-
30 rrizo el avion en el aeropuerto de Santiago a media tarde.
Todos estaban muy contentos de descansar unos dfas
en la capital de Chile. Pero, como siempre, no des-
cansaban mucho. Se echaron a recorrer las bellas aveni-
das y calles de la ciudad. Visitaron la antigua universidad,
35 el magnifico parque llamado el Cerro de Santa Lucia, y
las buenas tiendas.
Les llamo a nuestros viajeros la atencion el modo de
hablar de los chilenos, que era un poco distinto del que se
oia en otros paises hispanoparlantes. Algunas palabras
4o les sonaban muy extranas a estos espafioles. For ejemplo,
se decia en Santiago « carro » por tranvia; t barraca » por
tienda; « gondola » por omnibus; « pajiso » por sombrero
de paja. Un novio se llamaba « pololo » y en lenguaje
popular se decia « cabrita » por senorita.
45 Hizo la familia Gomez una excursion por tren a Con-
cepci6n y alii se informaron de que en esa ciudad, asf
como en Valdivia, mis al sur, habia numerosos alemanes
que durante muchos anos habian poblado la region. Tam-
bi6n vieron alii algunos araucanos, indios cuyos anteceso-
50 res habian resistido de una manera feroz a los primeros
invasores espafioles. Los ej^rcitos de Diego de Almagro
y, mds tarde, los de Pedro de Valdivia fueron vencidos
con frecuencia por los araucanos. Valdivia, uno de los
ayudantes de Pizarro, fu6 el conquistador de Chile en
55 los anos de 1540 a 1550. Fu£ el que fund6 las ciudades
de Santiago, Valparaiso, Concepci6n y Valdivia. En una
batalla con los araucanos fu6 capturado y muerto por ellos.
FOR TIERRAS CHILENAS 403
Para ir de Santiago a Buenos Aires, los viajeros podrian
viajar por automovil en ese mes de enero, que es mes de
verano, cruzando la cordillera por el paso de Uspallata, 60
o podrfan salir en aeroplano para Mendoza, ciudad ar-
gentina situada al lado oriental de las altas montanas.
Decidieron ir por avion.
Despu6s de visitar por unas horas a Valparaiso, so-
berbia ciudad y puerto principal de Chile, fueron a Vina 65
del Mar, alii cerca, que es el lugar de veraneo favorito de
los chilenos. En las magnificas playas de alii los hijos
de la familia Gomez gozaron de nadar en las aguas del
Pacifico. Luego todos volvieron a Santiago.
Una bella manana de sol despego el gran avion ficil 70
y perfectamente y subio mis y mas alto en el aire, volando
en direccion a la maravillosa cordillera que se extendia
del norte al sur. Cuando empezaban a cruzar por encima
de la cordillera, cerca del paso de Uspallata, Pepe exclamo:
— j Mirad al monte Aconcagua, el mas elevado del 75
continente ! j Cu&nta nieve hay en la cima ! j Mirad
la pluma de nieve que sale del pico y va volando por el
aire!
Pero dona Ana se habla desmayado y ya no oy6 ni vio
nada. Asustados, sus hijos le dieron a respirar un poco 80
de oxigeno con el aparato que se encontraba en el avion.
Cuando aterrizaron en Mendoza la buena senora ya habia
vuelto en si. Al llegar al hotel, se sentia mucho mejor.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a media tarde in the middle of the volvcr en si to regain conscious-
afternoon ness, "come to"
confer con to have, have at disposal ya que now that, since
404 QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
abonar to fertilize novio m. sweetheart, "boyfriend"
aparato m. apparatus oxigeno m. oxygen
arido, -a arid, dry p6lvora f . gunpowder
cereal m. cereal respirar to breathe
desmayarse to faint salitre m. nitrate, saltpeter
equivocado, -a mistaken uva f . grape
mineral m. mineral veraneo m. summer vacation;
monte m. mountain lugar de — , summer resort
nitrdgeno m. nitrogen vino m. wine
NOTE: The adverb menos, less, is used in this chapter as a
preposition, except.
WORDS OF SPECIAL MEANING IN CHILE
barraca = tienda. The word means hut or cabin in Spain.
cabrita = kid, young she-goat.
carro = tranvia. Carro usually means cart or wagon.
gdndola = dmnibus. It indicates in Spain an old-fashioned stage-
coach.
pajiso = sombrero de paja. It is based on paja, straw.
pololo — novio. It is a corruption of polio, chicken, and polio in
Spain is slang for young dandy.
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Arica, city and port on the Chilean coast; population 20,000.
Bolivia has no seaports of her own. Arica and Antofagasta, further
to the south, are the principal Pacific Coast ports for Bolivian exports
and imports. They are connected by rail with the Bolivian interior.
Overland transportation to Argentina is effected by railway from
La Paz to Buenos Aires.
The salitre or nitrate mines of northern Chile provide the greatest
and most easily obtainable supply of this mineral in the world.
These surface mines are worked with steam shovels which load the
mineral as they would dirt on railway cars. As stated in the text,
FOR TIERRAS CHILENAS 405
recently developed chemical processes by which nitrogen is taken
from the air, have greatly reduced the mining and exportation of
salitre and thus lessened what was once a source of great profit to
the nitrate miners and to the government of Chile. Salitre is, how-
ever, still exported and used in the making of fertilizers.
The Cerro de Santa Lucia Park, occupies, as its name implies, a
high point of the city, from which one commands marvellous views,
especially of the great Cordillera to the east, which is so lofty that
it seems to overhang the city.
Pedro de Valdivia (1498-1554) was one of Pizarro's lieutenants.
After Almagro's failure to conquer Chile and his death on his return
to Peru (see page 367), Pedro Sanchez de Haz and Valdivia were
sent from Cuzco to attempt the conquest. The former was in-
competent, so the latter took command. On February 12, 1541 he
founded Santiago, and in 1544, Valparaiso (Vale of Paradise).
Pushing southward, he founded other towns, in the face of the fierce
opposition of the Araucanian Indians, who, under the leadership
of the chieftain Lautaro, proved to be the most stubborn and re-
sourceful fighters the Spaniards had met in South America. Valdivia
was finally captured by them and put to death (1554).
Mes de enero, mes de verano. Remember that the seasons in
southern South America are just the reverse of those in North
America.
Vina del Mar (Vineyard of the Sea) on the coast near Valparaiso,
is a beautiful beach resort. This city, Valparaiso and Santiago are
connected by excellent railway service, and with the capital the
southern cities mentioned have also rapid railway connections.
Valparaiso is the most important Pacific seaport south of the Panama
Canal.
There existed for years good railway service from Chile to Argen-
tina through Uspallata Pass, at a great height and through several
tunnels. This line was interrupted a few years ago by heavy land-
slides, but it is now being restored. Through this same pass a fairly
good mountain highway leads and is much used. Fine airplane
service over the same section is maintained by the Panagra Lines
(part of the Pan American Airways system).
406 QUINITO EN AMERICA
One may enter Chile also by the southern route through the Lake
District, by railway, bus and steamer. The great lakes of southern
Chile and Argentina provide, in their high mountain setting, some
of the most sensationally beautiful scenery in the world.
Aconcagua, elevation 22,834 feet, is the highest peak in all the
Americas.
El logo Poopo is a large lake about 100 miles south of La Paz.
It receives, through the Desaguadero River, the overflow of Lake
Titicaca.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. No llueve casi nunca en el norte de Chile. 2. Alii se
encuentran grandes cantidades de salitre. 3. El salitre es
util en la manufactura de aeroplanes. 4. El principal ele-
mento del salitre es el oxigeno. 5. Hoy dia el nitrogeno se
consigue del aire. 6. Chile tiene la forma de un gran cua-
drado. 7. En la zona central de Chile se producen cereales,
frutas y legumbres. 8. Las insuperables uvas chilenas se usan
para hacer tortillas. 9. El cobre se emplea en la construction
de automoviles, casas y barcos. 10. Los Gomez no recorrieron
la ciudad, sino que pasaron el tiempo descansando. n. « Ba-
rraca* significa en Santiago de Chile «palacio.» 12. Y un
sombrero de paja es un «pajiso. » 13. Un novio se llama
« pololo » en Santiago. 14. Hay muchos alemanes en el norte
de Chile.
II. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. Chile cuenta con grandes recur- i. Chile — great nat-
sos naturales. ural resources.
2. Yo no voy a desmayarme. 2. I am not — .
3. Despu6s de desmayarse, la sefiora 3. After — , the lady — .
volvio en sf.
FOR TIERRAS CHILENAS 407
4. No te desmayes en estas alturas. 4. Don't — .
5. Cuando no volviste en ti, quede 5. When — , I was
asustado. frightened.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1 . No volvio en si. She did not regain consciousness.
Se, the reflexive pronoun, direct and indirect object, has
the terminal (or prepositional) form si. (See page 29.) It is
singular or plural and means: himself, herself, yourself; them-
selves, yourselves. Consigo is the form that si has after con.
2. Facil y perfectamente, easily and perfectly.
When two or more adjectives ending in -mente (see page
135) are used in close sequence, it is usual to omit this ending
from all but the last adverb.
3. Fue el. It was he. Soy yo or yo soy. It is I. Somos
nosotros. It is we. Eran ellas. It was they.
The verb ser agrees in person and number with its predicate
pronoun, whereas in English the 3rd pers. singular of to be,
preceded by it, is employed, no matter what may be the
person and number of the predicate pronoun.
4. Fue Valdivia el que (or quien) conquistd a Chile. Val-
divia was the one who (he who) conquered Chile. Fuimos nos-
otros los que (or quienes) construyeron la casa. We were
the ones who (those who) built the house.
When an adjective clause modifies a predicate pronoun, the
verb of that clause is in the 3rd person singular or plural,
because the antecedent of the relative pronoun (el, los, quien,
quienes) is in the 3rd person.
However, if the pronoun (predicate or object or terminal)
is of the ist or 2nd person, and this pronoun as antecedent
is closely connected with the relative (usually with que)9 then
the dependent verb is in the ist or 2nd person, according to
408 QUINITO EN AMERICA
the person of the pronoun: me lo dicen a ml, que lo creo
todo, they tell it to me, who believe everything.
5. Todos menos yo. All except me. Entre id y yo lo ha-
remos. We shall do it between us (mutually helping each other).
The subject or nominative pronouns of the ist and 2nd
persons singular are used after menos, except, and entre, be-
tween. In all other cases the terminal forms of pronouns
must follow prepositions or words used as prepositions.
I. Replace the English with the proper Spanish words:
i. <i Quien es? It is I. 2. <i Quien fue? // was she.
3. <: Quien sera? (Who can it be?) Seran they (m.). 4. //
was I quien lo hizo. 5. // will be we los que lo veran. 6. Nos
lo dieron a nosotros, who were much surprised. 7. Todos
estaban bien menos nosotros, who felt ill.
II. Say and write in Spanish:
i. All except me regained consciousness. 2. She will come
to. 3. Has he recovered consciousness? 4. Don't talk (Vd.)
to yourself. 5. Talk to me (emphatic), not to her.
III. Recall the following adjectives: sencillo, simple; va-
liente, brave; cdmodo, comfortable; feroz, fierce; claro, clear;
rapido, rapid; lento, slow. Say and write in Spanish:
i. They live simply and comfortably. 2. They fought
(pelearon) fiercely and bravely. 3. She spoke clearly and
simply. 4. They walk slowly and then rapidly.
IV. Say and write in Spanish:
i. See them (Vd.). 2. Make it (Yds.). 3. See them (ffi).
4. Make it (vosotros). 5. If I made them, you would see
them. 6. If I had made them, you would have seen them.
7. I have it already made. 8. It was she who made it. 9. It
was I who saw them. 10. I want you to make it for yourself.
Courtesy . Grace Lt
Congress Building in La Paz, Bolivia.
Courtesy Grace Line
Valparaiso, the Principal Port of Chile and the Second Largest
Port on the Pacific Ocean.
Courtesy : Grace I
A Scene in the Beautiful Lake District of Chile.
Arica, Near the Important Nitrate Fields of Chile.
Courtesy Grace Line
CAPlTULO L
MENDOZA Y SUS RECUERDOS
DE SAN MARTlN
Desde Mendoza enviaron los Gomez un telegrama a
don Tomas Segre y Loja, hermano de dona Ana, que
vivia cerca de la ciudad de Chascomus, no muy lejos de
Buenos Aires. Le pidieron que fuera a su encuentro en
la capital, adonde llegarian dos dias mas tarde. 5
— No me voy a mover de aqui — declaro dona Ana —
hasta que haya descansado bien. Y nunca jamas volvere
a entrar en un avion que vaya a cruzar los Andes. Esas
enormes alturas no me convienen. Yo no soy dguila ni
condor; tampoco quiero imitar a esos pajaros. 10
— Pero, madrecita, consientes en continuar nuestro via-
jecito por aeroplano, <j verdad ? — pregunto Quinito.
— Si, pero no hasta pasado maiiana — dijo la seiiora.
Mendoza, por su interesante sitio al pie de la cordillera,
por ser el centro de una rica region agricola, y por sus 15
recuerdos del historico pasado, les atrajo mucho a los
espanoles. Los hermanos Pepe y Quinito recorrieron la
ciudad mientras Rosa cumplia con su deber y se quedaba
al lado de su madre.
Los muchachos se hicieron conducir al Cerro de la 20
Gloria, donde est& el soberbio monumento erigido al
Ej&rcito de los Andes. Ante la estatua de San Martin,
montado a caballo a la cabeza de sus tropas, quedaron los
jovenes callados y emocionados. El verla ks impresion6
grandemente. 25
409
410 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
— Fu6 uno de los generates m£s hdbiles que jamds ban
existido — dijo Quinito.
— Y un hombre humilde y bueno — anadio Pepe.
— AquI cerca de Mendoza estableci6 San Martfn su
30 cuartel general en 1815, y durante dos anos se dedicaba
a la organizaci6n de un ej6rcito para ir a atacar a los
espanoles que seguian dominando a Chile. El 17 de
enero de 1817 todo estaba preparado.
— Si — contest6 Quinito. — Con 4.000 soldados, de
35 quienes 700 eran de caballeria y 250 de artillerla, empezo
San Martin la marcha hacia Chile. Por los pasos de
Uspallata y Los Patos condujo el general, con extraor-
dinaria habilidad, sus tropas en 24 dias. Uno de sus
ayudantes fue Bernardo O'Higgins, general chileno.
40 — Y en Chacabuco — continue Pepe, — en el lado
chileno de los Andes, cayeron los republicanos sobre los
espanoles, el 12 de febrero, y los derrotaron. Dos dias
m£s tarde tomaron a Santiago, y el 5 de abril de 1818
ocurrio la batalla de Maip6, en que los patriotas derro-
45 taron a los espanoles. San Martin fu6 proclamado direc-
tor supremo de Chile, pero 61 no acept6 este honor, sino
que insisti6 en que se le honrase a O'Higgins con este
tftulo.
— Luego — aiiadi6 Quinito — organiz6 una expedici6n
50 para ir al Peru a prestar ayuda a los peruanos en su lucha
contra los espanoles. Con una pequena flotilla y 4.500
hombres Ileg6 San Martin a las costas del Pert y tom6
a Lima el 9 de julio de 1 82 1 . Los peruanos le proclamaron
director supremo. Despu£s de realizar en Guayaquil una
55 reuni6n con Bolivar, San Martfn se retir6 del poder y
dej6 a Bolivar el trabajo de completar la Iiberaci6n del
MENDOZA 411
Peril. Hasta el dfa de hoy se sabe muy poco de lo que
paso en la conferencia de Guayaquil.
— Pero se sabe — dijo Pepe — que San Martin volvio
a Buenos Aires y que de alii se fu6 para Francia con su 60
hija, y en Francia murio el 17 de agosto de 1850. En
1880 sus restos fueron trasladados a Buenos Aires, donde
est&n enterrados en la catedral.
De Mendoza, centro de uvas y vino, volaron los G6mez
a Cordoba, ciudad de muchos encantos, que no tuvieron 65
el tiempo de ver, y luego, unas seis horas despu6s de salir
de Mendoza bajaron en el aeropuerto de Buenos Aires.
Alii les esperaba don Tomds, quien, como le habian
pedido, habia venido a su encuentro.
VOCABULARIO
artillena f . artillery liberaddn f . liberation, freeing
cabatteria f . cavalry organizacidn f . organization
cdndorm. condor pasadom. past
cuartel m. barracks; cuartel patriota m. and f. patriot
general headquarters supremo, -a supreme
derrotar to rottt, defeat tampoco neither, either
encuentro m. encounter, meeting titulo m. title
hdbil skillful tropa f . troop
jamds ever, never
NOTE: deber is used in this chapter as a noun meaning duty;
flotilla = pequefia flota.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
IT al encuentro de uno to go to nunca jamds never again
meet one pasado manana day after tomorrow
NOTAS
Mendoza, founded in 1559 by Pedro de Castillo, has 80,000 in-
habitants and lies some fifty miles east of the towering Andes and a
412 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
few miles north of a straight line drawn between Santiago de Chile
and Buenos Aires. It is the center of a rich agricultural and wine-
producing region. Mendoza is called el Jardin de los Andes. Near
here San Martin prepared the army which performed the deeds
related in the text.
El Monumento al Ejercito de los Andes, recently inaugurated, is
one of the finest of the many monuments in which Spanish America
abounds. It is situated on the Cerro de la Gloria just outside the
city of Mendoza.
San Martin's military skill, shown in conducting an army over
the exceedingly difficult moutainous terrain, through the Pasos de
Uspallata (12,500 feet) andLos Patos (The Ducks), excelled even that
of Napoleon when the latter in May, 1800, led an army through the
St. Bernard Pass (8,108 feet high) of the Alps into Italy.
The cdndor is a large bird of prey, a kind of vulture. It is often
seen at great heights hi the Andean region as well as at lower
altitudes.
Bernardo O'Higgins (1778-1842) was, as his name reveals, of
Irish descent, though born in Chile. He joined San Martin at
Mendoza and was at the head of the troops which routed the Spanish
at Chacabuco. The independence of Chile was proclaimed Feb-
ruary 12, 1818, and it was confirmed by the defeat of the Spanish
at Maipo two months later. Despite the excellent government
O'Higgins dispensed in Chile, a revolution took place and this great
patriot fled to Peru in 1823, and later died there.
The motley naval expedition that left Valparaiso in August, 1820,
to go to the aid of the revolutionists in Peru, was under the command
of a colorful Scotsman, Thomas Lord Cochrane (1775-1860), once
a vice-admiral of Great Britain and a member of the British Parlia-
ment. His skill in handling this small and poorly equipped fleet
contributed to the success of the attack on Lima. Lord Cochrane
was later a commander in the Portuguese and Greek navies.
Cdrdoba (260,000 population) lies east and north of Mendoza in
one of the richest sections of the Argentine Republic. Like Cordoba
in Spain, it is famous for its tanning of hides and is a busy industrial
city. The Sierra de Cdrdoba is a favorite resort region.
MENDOZA 413
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. £ A quien enviaron los Gomez un telegrama? 2. <i Qu6
le pidieron a don Tomas en este telegrama? 3. <; For qu6
queria dona Ana quedarse en Mendoza ? 4. <[ A que pajaros
no queria imitar la senora ? 5. £ For que es interesante Men-
doza ? 6. £ Con que deber cumplio Rosa ? 7. i Adonde se
hicieron conducir Pepe y Quinito ? 8. ^ Como quedaron los
muchachos ante la estatua de San Martin ? 9. <[ For que
organize San Martin el Ejercito de los Andes ? 10. <i For
donde lo condujo? n. <j Que hizo San Martin al ser nom-
brado director supremo de Chile? 12. <J Adonde fue San
Martin con su flotilla ? 13. Despues de la reunion con Bolivar,
^ que hizo San Martin ? 14. d Donde quedan hoy los restos
mortales del gran « zorro » ?
II. From the second column select Spanish cognates of the
English words of the first column :
convenient sitio
altitude envidiar
site trasladar
lateral convenir
translate polvo
sally verde
envy lado
culpable paso
pace altura
pulverize culpa
verdant salir
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. El verla les impresion6. Seeing it (to see it) impressed
them. Cumplia con su deber. She fulfilled her duty. Se re-
tir6 del poder. He retired from power.
414 QUINITO EN AMERICA
In the examples on page 413 we find infinitives (ver, deber,
poder) used as nouns.
Almost any infinitive may be used as a verbal noun. If
it is used as the subject of a sentence, it is frequently pre-
ceded by the definite article.
When used as object of a verb, or of a preposition, or as a
predicate noun, the definite article does not precede the in-
finitive: siento verla, I regret seeing it; se fue sin ver la, he
left without seeing it; mi preferencia es no verla, my preference
is not to see it.
A few infinitives may be used as ordinary nouns (no longer
verbal nouns). The most common are deber, duty; poder,
power; and ser, being: soy un ser humano, / am a human
being.
2. Review the use of negatives in Spanish (page 49) and
note the following:
No volver6 jamis a volar, or, Jamas volvere a volar. /
shall never fly again. <J Volveri Vd. a volar ? Jamas. Shall
you fly again ? Never.
In the above sentences nunca could be used instead of
jamas.
I Volveri Vd. jamis a volar ? Shall you ever fly again ?
I Lo ha visto Vd. jamis ? Have you ever seen it ? Fue uno
de los generates m£s h&biles que jamis han existido. He was
one of the most able generals that have ever lived.
In these sentences jamis means ever. We conclude that
jam&s means ever, when unaccompanied by no, if it is used
in asking a question, or is found in a clause containing a
superlative.
Note that nunca jamis is a strong negative expression about
equivalent to never again.
Tampoco quiero imitar, or, no quiero tampoco imitar.
Neither do I wish to imitate. I do not wish either to imitate.
MENDOZA 415
£No quiere Vd. ir a pie? Tampoco, or, ni eso tampoco.
Don't you wish to go afoot? That neither. Not that either.
3. Viajecito, little trip. Madrecita, little mother, dear mother.
Flotilla, little fleet.
The above words are respectively diminutives of viaje,
madre and flota.
Diminutives abound in Spanish. They have different forms
and meanings. The most common endings are:
-ito (-cito, -ecito, -ececito) denoting not only small size,
but also affection, niceness, prettiness, and the like.
-illo (-cillo, -ecillo), usually denoting small size.
-uelo (-zuelo, -ezuelo, -ecezuelo), sometimes, but not al-
ways, conveying an idea of contempt.
-ito and -illo (and their longer forms) may be applied to
nouns, adjectives, past participles and adverbs: ninito, little
child; pobrecita, poor little girl; ahorita, right now; mismito,
the very same; apuradillo, slightly troubled (apurado, troubled).
-uelo is used almost entirely with nouns: rey ezuelo, a poor
specimen of a king; plazuela, small plaza; playuela, small beach.
The longest forms are added to monosyllables ending in a
vowel: pie, piececito or piececillo or piecezuelo, small foot.
The next longest endings are applied to monosyllables end-
ing in a consonant or y, or to bisyllables ending in 10 or con-
taining a diphthong, or to words of two or more syllables
ending in e: flor, florecita, little flower; frio, friecillo, a bit
cold; patio, patiecito, small court; reina, reinecita, little queen;
madre, madrecita, little mother; rey, reyezuelo, cheap little
king; viaje, viaj ecito, little trip.
The next to the shortest forms are added to words of two
or more syllables ending in n or r; jardfn, jardincito, little
garden; escritor, escritorcitto, insignificant writer.
The shortest forms of the endings are used in cases not
included in the above groups; hi jo, hijito, sonny y little son.
416 QUINITO EN AMERICA
A final unaccented vowel is removed before a diminutive
suffix is applied. When suffixes beginning with e or i are
added to stems ending in c, g, gu or z, the latter become
respectively qu, gu, gii or c: rico, riquito, a bit rich; largo,
larguito, rather long; lengua, lenguecita, small tongue; voz,
vocecita, small voice. (Compare what happens in the case of
consonant-changing verbs, page 68, and absolute superlative
of adjectives, page 282.)
There are many special cases and exceptions to the above
stated general principles followed in forming diminutives.
There are also cases of double or triple diminutives: poco,
poquitito, tiny bit; poquitiquito, very tiny bit.
I. Form diminutives of the following words. Give meaning
in English of each diminutive.
hotel; espanola; pobre; mujer; pie; dama; senor; libro;
lugar; hombre; nacion; iglesia; lago; voz; grande; amado;
perro; ahora; cansado; estancia; poco; institucion; muralla.
II. Say and write in Spanish:
i. Has he never gone there ? 2. No; nor I either. 3. Have
you ever swum in the lake ? 4. Never. 5. Never again will
he see us. 6. This peak is the highest I have ever seen. 7. I
am not going to write or read, but rest. 8. He is not here,
nor she either.
III. Use the Spanish impersonal reflexive passive and ex-
press the following sentences:
i. This gentleman is respected in Mendoza. 2. He was
regarded as very cruel. 3. He was also hated. 4. The chil-
dren are much loved. 5. The conquistador was feared.
IV. Express the same sentences as having an agent for the
action, preceded by por. To do this use the real passive voice.
CAPlTULO LI
EN LA SEGUNDA CIUDAD
DE LAS AMERICAS
Don Tomas, el menor de los hermanos de dona Ana,
era un caballero muy simpatico, que dio a sus parientes
la bienvenida mas calurosa.
— Vamonos primero a un hotel de la capital, si os
parece bien — dijo. — Alii podreis descansar despufe 5
de su largo viaje de M£jico al Rio de la Plata. Mas
tarde, si quereis, podremos ver algunos aspectos de la
vida porteiia, antes de partir para Chascomus, donde
teneis vuestra casa.
Subieron todos al soberbio coche norteamericano de 10
don Tomas y luego exclamo Pepe:
— Tio Tomas, quisieramos dar primero un paseito por
algunas de las calles para formarnos una idea de como
es Buenos Aires. £ Sera posible eso ?
— Si, hombre; ya lo ver&s — dijo el tio. — Conviene, 15
antes de nada, que recorramos algunas calles. Primero
iremos al puerto y luego por las calles del centro.
El extenso puerto, en que se veian barcos venidos de
todos los rincones del mundo, impresion6 grandemente a
los G6mez. Dijo dona Ana: 20
— De aqui saldremos nosotros algiin dia en nuestro
viaje de regreso a Espana. — Y la buena senora suspir6
como si tuviera m&s nostalgia que nunca por su patria.
Se cal!6 y quedo sin decir nada mds durante el paseo.
417
418 QUINITO EN AMERICA
25 — Pero no hasta que haySis estado por mucho tiempo
con nosotros en la estancia de « Los Ties Ombues » —
contest6 don Tomis. — Todo lo nuestro est£ a la dis-
posici6n de nuestros queridos parientes venidos de tan
lejos.
30 La Casa de Gobierno, llamada la Casa Rosada, la
Plaza de Mayo, la ancha Avenida de Mayo, la Plaza del
Congreso y el Palacio del Congreso despertaron la ad-
miracion de los viajeros aunque bastante cansados esta-
ban. Pasaron hacia el oeste por la espl&idida Avenida
35 de Mayo hasta la calle Parand, y luego por la calle Riva-
davia.
— I Mirad ese rascacielos ! — exclam6 Quinito. — Me
recuerda los que vimos ya en Nueva York.
— No he estado jam£s en la metr6poli norteamericana
40 — le respondio su tio, — pero es verdad que ya existe en
Buenos Aires un verdadero afdn de construir edificios
altos, avenidas anchas, grandes estadios y puentes.
Ahora hay m£s actividad que nunca en la construction
de casas. La ciudad crece y se mejora r&pidamente.
45 Ahora no s61o es la ciudad hispanoparlante m£s grande
del mundo, sino tambi&i es, por el numero de habitantes,
la segunda ciudad del Hemisferio Occidental, siendo su-
perada s61o por Nueva York. Es claro que se comprenden
entre los habitantes los que residen en los suburbios del
50 distrito federal. Buenos Aires es la ciudad numero nueve
entre todas las del globo y el ntimero veinte de los cin-
cuenta puertos m&s importantes que existen.
— Por ser Buenos Aires el puerto principal de Sud
America los ciudadanos se llainan portefios, <i verdad ?
55 — pregunt6 Pepe.
SEGUNDA CIUDAD DE LAS AMERICAS 419
— Si; se dice « porteiios » con mis frecuencia que
« bonaerenses » al nombrar a los habitantes de la capital
— respondi6 don Tom£s.
Una vez m£s la familia Gomez se encontraba en una
gran ciudad cosmopolita, donde circulaban incontables 60
automoviles y multitudes de gentes que parecfan todas
tener mucha prisa. Observo Quinito:
— A mi no me gustaria conducir un coche aqui porque
se lleva la izquierda y no la derecha, como se hace en
Espaiia, tambi&i en M£jico y Norte America. Creo que 65
olvidaria eso y mataria a varies de los millares de peatones
que hay por todas partes. Aqui hay mds peatones de
los que vimos en Los Angeles.
— Buenos Aires es m£s hermoso de lo que yo creia —
dijo Rosa. 70
Hacia mucho calor. Era uno de esos dias de verano que
en el mes de diciembre traen a veces a Buenos Aires poco
aire y mucho sol.
— i Pensar que en el mes de diciembre hace tanto calor !
— exclamo Pepe. — Me parece que estamos en pleno 75
verano.
— Si que estamos. Tenemos que recordar que aqui las
estaciones del ano van precisamente al rev6s de las que
prevalecen en Norte America y en Espana — dijo Quinito.
— Buenos Aires ocupa casi el mismo sitio al sur del ecua- 80
dor que Los Angeles al norte de esa linea imaginaria.
En eso se detuvo el coche delante del Hotel Savoy en
la calle Callao. Todos bajaron y entraron.
420
QUINITO EN AMERICA
VOCABULARIO
admiracidn f . admiration
afdn m. eagerness, anxiety
bonaerense m. and f . one from
Buenos Aires
circular to circulate
cosmopolite cosmopolitan
derecho right, right-hand
distrito m. district
estadio m. stadium
federal federal
imaginario, -a imaginary
NOTE: estacidn is used
mejorar to improve
metrdpolif. metropolis
millar m. (group of a) thousand
ombu m. ombu (tree)
peatdn m. pedestrian
pleno, -a full, complete
porteno = bonaerense
prevalecer (zco) to prevail
reves m. reverse
superar to excel, exceed
in this chapter as season.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
al reves de the reverse of, contrary
to
en pleno verano in midsummer
donde ten&s vuestra casa where
you are welcome
llevar la izquierda (derecha) to
keep to the left (right)
paseito short drive
tener nostalgia de to be homesick
for
tener prisa to be in a hurry
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Buenos Aires, founded first in 1536 by Pedro de Mendoza, had a
population in 1938 of 3,822,000, there being included in this number
the inhabitants of "Greater Buenos Aires," that is, of all suburban
sections of the Federal District. It is slightly larger than Chicago
and, hence, the second city of the New World. The city proper has
2,317,755 inhabitants, and it and its suburban districts are growing
rapidly.
Buenos Aires is on the western shore of the Rio de la Plata, some
170 miles from the Atlantic, at a point where the Plata is about
30 miles wide. The Rio de la Plata is not a river so much as a great
estuary formed by the junction of the huge Parand and Uruguay
rivers at a point 60 miles to the north.
SEGUNDA CIUDAD DE LAS AMERICAS 421
The puerto, made and kept clear by dredging, is a vast shipping
center for the tremendous amount of agricultural products which the
country produces — wheat, corn, fruit, linseed, wood products and
especially meat of various kinds. Argentina is primarily an agricul-
tural country, and cattle, horses, sheep and hogs of the best breed
are raised in great numbers in the estancias located on the extensive
pampas or plains. Great meat-packing plants, called frigorificos,
some of them operated by North American companies, prepare and
chill beef, mutton and pork for shipment to all corners of the world.
Through the port of Buenos Aires pass annually many millions of
dollars' worth of imported machinery, automobiles, typewriters and
hundreds of varieties of manufactured goods originating in the
United States and Europe, for until recently little manufacturing
was done in the country. In the last few years, however, factories
have been established in many lines and an effort is being made to
attain self-sufficiency and a reduction of imported goods.
The inhabitants of the city are called bonaerenses or, more com-
monly, portenos f because they reside in the great port city. Similarly,
the people of Valparaiso, Chile are called portenos.
The Argentine Republic has an area of 1,078,278 square miles,
about the same area as that of the eleven Mountain States of the
United States, and its total population of 13 million reveals that it is
still a sparsely settled country; also that a very high percentage of
the people reside in the capital. The Republic extends from about
22 degrees to 56 degrees south latitude and from 54 to 68 degrees
west longitude. Buenos Aires is at 35^ degrees south latitude and
Los Angeles is at 33 degrees north latitude.
Buenos Aires is a city, for the most part, of wide straight streets
laid out in checkerboard fashion. Constantly the city is being im-
proved, high buildings are taking the place of old ones, new suburbs
are being built and all portenos take great pride, as well they may,
in their beautiful and progressive city. There exist more than a
hundred parks, having great lawns, semi-tropical and tropical trees,
shrubs and flowers, and countless monuments. Some of the finest
shops in the world are found here and the wealth of many families
supports a great luxury trade, especially in North American auto-
422 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
mobiles and mechanical devices, and Parisian fashions for the women.
The city has innumerable wealthy homes which might well be called
palaces. And at the same time the middle class and the working
class live well, and unemployment is usually at a minimum.
The Casa Rosada, or Rose-Colored House, is the presidential
palace. It is near the harbor, as is also the Plaza de Mayo. The
Avenida de Mayo is one of the oldest and finest streets. The Palacio
del Congreso, the seat of the national legislature, looks out over the
fine Plaza del Congreso.
The ombu is a tree frequently seen on the pampas. Its wood is
not valuable, but it grows large with dense branches and affords
fine shade.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. Don Tom£s era el mayor de los hermanos de dona Ana.
2. Los G6mez no querian tardar en llegar a un hotel. 3. Dona
Ana, al ver los barcos en el puerto, tenia nostalgia de su patria.
4. Don Tomas queria que sus parientes pasasen mucho tiempo
en su estancia. 5. Se ven rascacielos en Buenos Aires.
6. Buenos Aires es la ciudad nfimero veinte entre las grandes
ciudades del mundo. 7. Un porteno es habitante de una
region montanosa. 8. Las calles de la capital estaban aba-
rrotadas de gente. 9. En las calles los coches llevan la de-
recha. 10. En Espaiia y en M6jico se lleva la izquierda.
ii. Quinito crey6 que al conducir un automovil en Buenos
Aires hubiera matado algunos peatones. 12. En el mes de
diciembre los portenos est&n en pleno verano. 13. Las es-
taci6nes del afto en Buenos Aires van al rev6s de las que pre-
valecen en Nueva York. 14. Buenos Aires est& situado al
norte del ecuador.
SEGUNDA CIUDAD DE LAS AMfiRICAS 423
II. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. The boys must be in a i. Los muchachos — prisa.
hurry.
2. We are going to take a 2. Vamos a — .
little drive.
3. It is hot in midsummer. 3. — calor — .
4. You are welcome here. 4. Aqui Vd. — .
5. In Mexico one keeps to the 5. En Mejico — .
right.
6. Are you homesick for Bue- 6. <i — Buenos Aires ?
nos Aires ?
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Antes de nada. First of all, before anything else. Tenia
mis nostalgia que nunca. She was more homesick than ever.
Sin decir nada, without saying anything.
We have already learned that in a comparison or after the
negative preposition sin (see pages 49 and 153), a negative
adverb, adjective or pronoun is used in Spanish instead of the
affirmative used in English. Above we see that the same prac-
tice applies after antes de. More examples: Estoy m&s encan-
tado que nadie. I am more delighted than anyone. Llegue antes
de nadie. I arrived before anyone else. Sin contestarnos nada.
WithotU giving us any answer.
2. Ya existe. There now exists. Ya verds. Soon you will
see. Vimos ya. We have already seen. Ya hemos hablado.
We have already spoken.
Ya changes in shades of meaning according to the tense
of the verb with which it is used. With the present tense,
it may mean now or already. With the future, it may mean
soon, by and by. With the preterite (usually then equivalent
to the present perfect) or with the present perfect it may mean
424 QUINITO EN AMERICA
already, some time ago. Ya no means no longer: Ya no vive
su padre.
3. Todo lo nuestro, all that is ours, all we have. Lo mio.
What is mine. Lo tuyo. What is thine. Lo suyo. What is
his (yours, hers, theirs).
The neuter article lo used before a possessive pronoun (see
page 386) forms an abstract noun denoting what is possessed,
one's property and the like.
4. Buenos Aires tiene mas de dos millones de habitantes.
Buenos Aires has more than two million inhabitants. Buenos
Aires es mas hermoso de lo que creia. Buenos Aires is more
beautiful than I thought. Hay mas peatones de los que vimos
en Los Angeles. There are more pedestrians than we saw in
Los Angeles.
In the above sentences we see different ways of expressing
than in comparisons in Spanish. Before numbers, than is
usually de. See the first sentence in paragraph 4 above.
In the second sentence, than is de lo que. When an ad-
jective (or an adverb) is the point of comparison (here, her-
moso), and the verbs of both clauses are expressed and
different, than is equivalent to de + the neuter relative pro-
noun lo que (than that which).
In the third sentence than is de los que (than those which).
When a noun is the point of comparison (here, peatones)
and the verbs of both clauses are either different or identical,
than is expressed by de plus the masculine or feminine rela-
tive pronoun, el que, la que, los que, las que.
When words or phrases are compared instead of clauses,
than is expressed by que: tiene mds vacas que caballos, he
has more cows than horses; also when the verb of the second
dause is omitted: ella es mis hermosa que Maria, she is more
beautiful than Mary.
SEGUNDA CIUDAD DE LAS AMfiRICAS 425
I. Read and translate into English:
i. Hay que hacer esto antes de nada. 2. Es mas rico que
ningun otro porteno. 3. Salio sin ofrecerme nada. 4. Tiene
ella mas nostalgia que nadie. 5. Tiene mas nostalgia de la
que tiene su hija. 6. Aqui hacia mas calor del que hacia en
Santiago. 7. Estas flores son mas bonitas que las que compre
en Xochimilco. 8. El puerto era mas grande de lo que ha-
biamos creido. 9. Vd. canta mejor que yo. 10. Mas de
cinco pesos seria un precio ridiculo.
II. Replace the English words with the proper Spanish
words:
i . El no sabe distinguir entre what is mine and what is his.
2. What is thine parece valer mas que what is ours. 3. Estan
contentos con what is theirs. 4. No les ofrezca Vd. what is
mine. 5. Vendran by and by.
III. Say and write in Spanish:
i. He is sadder than ever. 2. She is richer than anyone.
3. She is richer than you say. 4. There are more shops here
than I saw in Santiago. 5. It was already late. 6. Now he
is coming. 7. We shall soon leave. 8. He gave me more
money than I asked him for. 9. We have already begun to
learn it. 10. He no longer recognizes us.
IV. Express the following sentence in the different simple
tenses of the main verb. Make any changes then necessary
in the dependent verb. Remember the rules for the sequence
of tenses.
Temo que 61 est6 enfermo.
V. Do the same with the following:
Dudamos que ella haya venido.
CAPlTULO LII
FOR LAS TIENDAS PORTESTAS
Para el transporte de sus numerosos ciudadanos Buenos
Aires posee una extensa red de tranvias, ferrocarriles sub-
terr&neos, incontables Ifneas de omnibus y microbiis, y
« colectivos » numerosos. Pepe y Quinito, queriendo pro-
5 bar todos los medios de transporte, dedicaron todo un dia
a viajar por ellos de una extremidad a otra de la capital.
De norte a sur y de este a oeste siguieron viajando. A
veces se creyeron perdidos, sobre todo en algunas de las
estaciones de cruce o trasbordo entre dos Ifneas sub-
10 terrdneas. Pero s61o con pedir orientaci6n a algun por-
teno hospitalario, podian seguir sin dificultad su viaje.
Los microbus y los colectivos les encantaron y los
grandes 6mnibus les gustaron muchisimo. Siendo la
ciudad el centro de ferrocarriles mis grande de todas las
15 ciudades hispanas del mundo, no les sorprendio ver in-
mensas y bellas estaciones urbanas por donde pasaban
millares de pasajeros todos los dlas.
Lo que mis les gust6 a dona Ana y a Rosa fueron las
magnificas y lujosas tiendas portenas. La seiiora y su
20 hija iban con frecuencia a la calle Florida, donde se
encuentran algunos de los establecimientos mis perfectos
del mundo. Esta calle estrecha y bastante corta esti
cerrada al trinsito de vehiculos de las 16 a las 20 de la
tarde. Las damas visitaban varios negocios en que se
25 vendfan vestidos y sombreros de mujer, joyas, objetos de
arte y todo lo que puedan desear los que (o las que)
426
FOR LAS TIENDAS PORTEftAS 427
tienen dinero en abundancia para gastar. Los negocios
de Goth y Chaves, y de Harrod's (sucursal de la casa
londinense de este nombre) les llenaron de entusiasmo.
Las dos espanolas se ponian muy contentas solo con 30
mirar las cosas esp!6ndidas que estaban en venta en
estos negocios. A veces compraban algunas. Tambi&i
admiraban ambas a las porteiias bien vestidas que entra-
ban y salian. Cada una era muy elegante. De vez en
cuando Rosa exclamaba: 35
— i Mira, mira ! j Qu6 senorita mas encantadora ! j Y
qu6 bien le vienen su traje y su sombrero! Son de la
ultima moda de Paris.
— Claro — contestaba la madre. — <; No sabes que
las modas femeninas de Buenos Aires son la ultima pala- 40
bra ? j Por lo elegante, no hay quien supere a una
portefia !
En el barrio norte recorrieron las damas las calles Santa
Fe y Cabildo, donde se encuentran grandes casas de
modas, de muebles, de radio y de todos los articulos 45
imaginables. Todo cuanto veian las damas, les interesaba
muchlsimo. Por aqui y por all£ habia establecimientos de
automoviles norteamericanos, ingleses, franceses e italia-
nos, que costaban cada uno una friolera de varios miles
de pesos. Parecia que los argentinos podian comprar 50
cualquier cosa que se fabrique en el mundo.
Cansadas de tanto andar, dona Ana y Rosa tomaban
a veces refrescos en la terraza de algun cafe o restaurante.
Luego iban a uno de los palacios de cine que abundan en
la ciudad: al Gran Rex, Gran Teatro Opera, Ambassador, 55
Gran Teatro Broadway, Gran Cine Florida, Rose Marie,
Select Lavalle, u otro de tantos. En estos cines se diver-
428 QUINITO EN AMERICA
tian viendo las mejores pelfculas norteamericanas asi como
argentinas, alemanas, inglesas y francesas.
60 Aunque estas sefioras habian conocido la vida de Nueva
York, Los Angeles y otras grandes metropolis de Norte,
Centro, y Sud America, Buenos Aires les resultaba encan-
tador, maravilloso y sin igual en muchos aspectos.
VOCABULARIO
abundancia f . abundance moda f . fashion, mode, style
colectivo m. bus (with seats for muebles m. pi. furniture
ten) orientacidn f. guidance, direction
cor/o, -a short perder (ie) to lose
cuanto, -os all that radio f . radio
elegante elegant refresco m. refreshment
establecimiento m. establishment sucursal f . branch (of a business)
femenino, -a feminine trdnsito m. traffic
londinense of London trasbordo m. transfer
lujoso, -a luxurious urbano, -a urban
microbus m. diminutive bus vehiculo m. vehicle
NOTES: In this chapter medio is used as means, and negocio as
business house or shop.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
asi como as well as por lo elegante in elegance
en venta on sale sin igual unequalled
estacidn de cruce junction, trans- venir bien a uno to fit one well,
fer station become one
ponerse + adjective to become
+ adjective
NOTAS
The transportation systems of Buenos Aires are well organized
and well equipped. Besides electric surface streetcar lines, there are
three large underground railway companies and many bus lines which
are served by large buses (dmnibus; unchanged in plural), colectivos,
FOR LAS TIENDAS PORTEftAS 429
which accommodate ten passengers only, and quite small buses
(one is called a microbus, plural unchanged). These microbus pro-
vide service to outlying suburbs and even to distant towns. The
dmnibus, colectivos and microbus all follow regular or fixed routes.
There are transfer privileges (combinaciones) between different types
of service at certain junction points (con trasbordo).
The railway lines of Argentina nearly all radiate from Buenos
Aires; hence the city has several fine stations, through some of which,
for instance, the Retire Station, as many as 200,000 people pass daily.
Suburban service is frequent and rapid and some towns in the out-
skirts of the capital are served by 200 or more trains a day.
The best railway lines have passenger service unexcelled in any
country. For instance the train called "El Cordobes," running be-
tween Buenos Aires and Cordoba (450 miles northwest of the capital),
is drawn by a stream-lined locomotive, has beautifully equipped
dining cars, sleeping cars and lounge cars. Air conditioning is found
in all through passenger trains. The tracks of most of the lines
are wider than those in the United States, hence cars are wider and
heavier, and more comfortable.
The railways (most of them built with British and French capital,
invested to the amount of three and a half billion pesos) have con-
tributed greatly to the development of the nation, from the time
they were first built up to the present. Some of them maintain
great experimental grain and fruit farms for the benefit of the farm-
ers in their respective regions. The government (Estado) owns and
administers a few of the railway companies.
The principal railroads are the Ferrocarril Central Argentina
(F.C.C.A.), the Ferrocarril Oeste (F.C.O.), the Ferrocarril Midland
(F.C.M.), the Ferrocarril Central de Cdrdoba (F.C.C.C.), the Ferro-
carriles de Entre ffios y Nordeste Argentino (F.F.C.C.E.R. y N.E.A.)
and the Ferrocarriles del Estado (F.F.C.C.E.).
La calle Florida, only ten blocks long, and narrow, runs north and
south between Rivadavia and the Plaza de San Martin. It corre-
sponds in many respects, except as to length, to Fifth Avenue in
New York, or Bond Street in London. The Avenida de Mayo, a
mile and a half long and running east and west, is similar to Regent
430 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Street in London. On la calle Florida is situated the large Goth y
Chaves department store and near its northern end is Harrod's, a
branch of the London house of that name.
De las 16 a las 20, from 4 to 8 P.M. In nearly all Spanish-American
countries, from Mexico to Argentina (especially in the cities and on
the railways), the 24-hour system of indicating the time of day is in
use.
The moving-picture houses of Buenos Aires seem countless. In
the downtown region (el centra) are found those mentioned in the
text and many others. The Gran Rex and the Gran Teatro Gpera
(which does not present opera, but pictures) are as sumptuous as any
that can be found in North American cities.
In 1940 the Argentine peso was worth around 26 United States
cents.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. Nombre Vd. algunos de los varies medios de transporte
que existen en Buenos Aires. 2. <J Que hicieron Quinito y
Pepe para probar estas lineas de transporte? 3. <i Que hi-
cieron cuando se creyeron perdidos ? 4. i Como son las es-
taciones de ferrocarril portefias ? 5. <i Como son las tiendas
de la calle Florida ? 6. <; Entre que horas del dia se cierra la
calle Florida al trdnsito de vehiculos ? 7. i Que se vende en
los negocios de esta calle ? 8. £ A quien admiraban dona Ana
y su hija ? 9. £ Como son las modas femeninas de la capital
argentina ? 10. <[ D6nde se fabrican los autom6viles que com-
pran los bonaerenses y los argentinos en general ? 1 1 . Cuando
las damas estaban cansadas, i que hacian? 12. i Que pe-
liculas se exhibian en los palacios de cine a que asistian?
13. <; C6mo se divertian estas espanolas durante su visita a
Buenos Aires ?
II. Give in Spanish the adjective that corresponds to each
of the following place names:
FOR LAS TIENDAS PORTEftAS 431
Londres (London), Nueva York, Buenos Aires, Mejico,
Nuevo Mejico, Ecuador, Chile, Peru, Panami, Bolivia, Vene-
zuela.
III. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. Much merchandise is on i. Aquiestan — muchasmer-
sale here. cancias.
2. Buenos Aires fashions for 2. Las modas femeninas de
women are unequalled. Buenos Aires — .
3. That hat becomes you. 3. Ese sombrero le — a Vd.
4. Her dress did not fit her 4. Su vestido no — .
well.
5. I like luxurious furniture. 5. — los muebles lujosos.
6. She became sad. 6. Ella — triste.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. Ambas. Both. Cada una era elegante. Each one was
elegant.
Ambos, -as and cada uno (cada una) are indefinite pro-
nouns.
The more common indefinite pronouns (some of which can
also be used as adjectives) are:
alguien, someone; alguno (algun), some, someone; ambos,
both; cada, each (adjective) ; cada uno, each (pronoun) ; cual-
quier(d), any (adjective) ; cualquiera, anyone (pronoun) (the
plural is cualesquierd) ; cuanto or cuantos, all that; losdemis,
the others, the rest; los dos, both; mismo, same, self; mucho,
much; machos, many; nada, nothing; nadie, no one; ninguno
(ningtiri), no, no one, none; otro, other, another; poco, little;
pocos,few; tal, sitch, such a; tanto, so much, as much; tantos,
so many, as many; todo, all, every, everything; unos, some,
a few, about; unos cuantos, some several; unos poco s, a few.
432 QUINITO EN AMERICA
When certain of these pronouns are used as antecedents
of a clause which implies indefiniteness or uncertainty, the
verb of the dependent adjective clause is in the subjunctive:
Cualquiera que Vd. escoja, me gustara. / shall like whatever
(one) you choose. Le dare a Vd. todo lo que (or cuanto) tenga.
I shall give you all I have. Le darla a Vd. todo lo que (or
cuanto) tuviese. I would give you all I had. No hay nada que
me guste mas. There is nothing I like better.
Alguno and ninguno are used as pronouns in referring to
someone (or something) previously mentioned. Alguien and
nadie are more indefinite than alguno and ninguno.
Cualquiera becomes cualquier when used as adjective before
a noun: cualquier libro, any book.
2. No hay quien super e. There is no one who excels. Todo
cuanto veian les gustaba. All that they saw they liked.
In the above sentences quien and todo cuanto (or simply
cuanto) are relative pronouns which "include their anteced-
ents," that is, the antecedent is unexpressed but understood;
quien, in the sentence shown, is equivalent to nadie que, and
cuanto to todo lo que.
More examples: Quien (= el que) cantaf sus males es-
panta. He who sings drives away his worries. Cuanto ( = todo
lo que) hay es para Vds. All there is is for you. A cuantos
( = todos los que) vengan, digales Vd. que queden. Tell all
who come to stay.
3. Ways of expressing in Spanish to become:
a. When in English a noun follows to become, use hacerse
or llegar a ser: se hizo sold ado, he became (made him-
self) a soldier; llegd a ser capitan, he became (came to be) a
captain.
b. When in English an adjective folldws to become, use fta-
cerse, ponerse or valuer se: se ponlan contentas, they be-
FOR LAS TIENDAS PORTEftAS 433
came contented; el pobrecito se volvid loco, the poor fellow
became mad (insane); se hizo rico, he became rich.
I. Replace the English words with suitable Spanish words:
i. Any day me convendra. 2. Any de estos libros servira.
3. Each me escribio. 4. De todos estos vehiculos none me
gusta. 5. Someone nos vera. 6. De estos muchachos some
son espanoles. 7. Both vinieron a verme. 8. A few creen
eso. 9. No hay anything que lo supere. 10. Deme Vd. all
that tiene en la mano.
II. Read and translate into English:
i. Quien todo lo quiere, todo lo pierde. 2. i Hay quien
le conozca? 3. Yo quisiera poseer cuantos muebles hay en
ese negocio. 4. Hablare a cuantos se me acerquen. 5. No
habia quien supiera mas que el. 6. Ellos nos darian cuanto
les pidieramos.
III. Say and write in Spanish:
i. They are becoming contented. 2. He became chief.
3. He will become a teacher. 4. We became happy. 5. You
have become the best student in the class. 6. Who would
want to become poor ?
IV. Make a synopsis of the following sentences. Use the
main verb in the five simple tenses of the indicative, and
follow the rules for sequences of tenses for the dependent
verbs.
1. Ella teme que nos perdamos.
2. Ella se alegra de que no nos hayamos perdido.
CAPlTULO LIII
LA FUNDACI6N DE BUENOS AIRES
— <: Sab6is vosotros la historia de la fundaci6n de
Buenos Aires ? — pregunt6 don Tom&s una noche mien-
tras comian 61 y sus parientes en el hotel.
— Un poco — respondi6 Rosa. — La primera pobla-
5 ci6n fu6 fundada por Pedro de Mendoza, el 2 de febrero
de 1536. La llamo « Puerto de Nuestra Sefiora Maria
del Buen Aire, » en honor de la Virgen de este nombre,
muy venerada por los marineros espaiioles.
— Tienes razon — dijo el tfo. — Don Pedro de Men-
10 doza era un gran capit£n que habia nacido en Guadix,
Espana, se cree que en el ano 1487. Era rico y gentil-
hombre de la corte de Carlos V. Sabiendo de la conquista
del Perti por Pizarro y de la de M6jico por Cort6s, don
Pedro busc6 y consigui6 del rey permiso para organizar
15 una expedici6n, a sus propias expensas, para ir a explorar
y poblar la region del Rio de la Plata.
— Segiin lo que he leido — observ6 Quinito, — esa ex-
pedici6n era la mds grande y la mejor preparada que
hasta entonces habia salido de Espana con rumbo a
20 America. Hubo 2.200 hombres en los 14 barcos que
partieron de SanWcar de Barrameda el 24 de agosto de
1535. Tambi6n vino con ellos un buen numero de mu-
jeres.
— Construyeron los exploradores una poblaci6n de
25 canas y barro — continu6 don Tom£s, — con una « casa
fuerte » para don Pedro. Pero pronto empezaron a morir
434
LA FUNDAClON DE BUENOS AIRES 435
de hambre y a manos de los indigenas que los atacaban.
Iban varias expediciones en busca de provisiones. Juan
de Ayolas se marcho con algunos soldados a explorar la
region norte y conquist6 lo que es hoy el Paraguay. 30
DespuSs de fundar a Asunci6n, fu6 muerto por los
indios. Mendoza, que estaba enfermo al partir de Es-
paiia, se encontro peor de salud. Los demis le pusieron
a bordo de un barco y en abril de 1537, 61 y la mayoria
de los habitantes de la colonia salieron para Esparia. 35
Mendoza murio en el viaje.
Pero habia dejado en la pequefia poblacion unos 200
hombres. Algunos se fueron al norte a buscar a Ayolas.
Los recibi6 el nuevo gobernador de Asuncion, don Do-
mingo Martinez de Irala, quien decidio trasladar a Asun- 40
cion los pocos sobrevivientes de Santa Maria del Buen
Aire, lo cual se hizo. Quedo abandonada entonces la
primera poblaci6n fundada por Mendoza.
— Luego fu6 restablecida, £ verdad ? — dijo Pepe.
— Si; por Juan de Garay, teniente gobernador de 45
Asunci6n — contest6 don Tom&s. — £l crey6 que era
necesario « abrir puertas a la tierra » y el n de junio de
1580, volvi6 a fundar la colonia de Mendoza, con familias
traidas de Asunci6n. Desde aquel dia hasta terminar el
siglo XVIII, Buenos Aires (como entonces se llamaba 50
la ciudad) vivi6 tranquilamente y creci6 poco a poco.
— Pedro de Mendoza me parece una figura rom&ntica
a quien deben los argentinos grandes honores — dijo
Rosa. — A pesar del fracaso de su colonia, realiz6 mila-
gros y prepar6 el camino para una naci6n que hoy es 55
grande y fuerte.
— Es verdad — contest6 don Tom&s. — Los argen-
436 QUINITO EN AMERICA
tinos no cesan de recordarle y dieron su nombre a la rica
ciudad de Mendoza, el « Jardin de los Andes », que vos-
60 otros acabdis de visitar, una ciudad fundada en 1559 por
el capit£n Pedro de Castillo.
— Tampoco se le olvida a Juan de Garay — observo
Pepe. — Mendoza y Garay son dos de las mayores
glorias de la larga historia de las provincias rioplatenses.
65 — El patriotismo de los argen tinos es cosa notable —
anadio don Tomas. — Por ejemplo, el dia 25 de mayo,
fecha en que, el ano de 1810, los habitantes de las t Provin-
cias Unidas del Rio de la Plata » se rebelaron contra el
virrey y el gobierno colonial de Espana, es un dia observado
70 con el mayor entusiasmo y devotion en todas partes de
la Republica. El elemento mas entusiasta son, muchas
veces, los extranjeros que se ban hecho ciudadanos ar-
gentinos. Es de notar el patriotismo de estos nuevos ciu-
dadanos.
75 — Y de aquella fecha derivan sus nombres la Plaza de
Mayo y la Avenida de Mayo, £ no es verdad ? — pregunto
dona Ana.
— Si; y la ancha Avenida 9 de Julio, la caile m&s
ancha que existe en el mundo, conmemora esa fecha del
80 ano 1816, cuando el Congreso de Tucum&n declar6 la
independencia de las Provincias. En Tucum&n, situado
en el norte de la Republica, ha sido conservada hasta hoy
la humilde casa en que se celebr6 el famoso Congreso.
Es el t Independence Hall » argentino.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a bordo de on board of es de notar U is worth noting
marchers* - h*e, to leave, go away pear de salud in worse health
LA FUNDAClON DE BUENOS AIRES 437
VOCABULARIO
barro m. clay, mttd mayoria f . majority
bordo m. board ( of ship) patriotismo m. patriotism
conmemorar to commemorate peor worse
devocidn f . devotion permiso m. permission
entusiasta enthusiastic pesar: a pesar de in spite of
gentilhombre m. gentleman in provisidn f. provision
waiting rioplatense of the Rio de la Plata
marinero m. sailor virgen f . virgin
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Nuestra Senora, Our Lady.
Sanlucar de Barrameda, a port near Cadiz on the western coast
of Spain. It was much used during the 15th and i6th centuries.
Columbus sailed from this port on his third voyage.
Juan de Ayolas was one of the lieutenants of Mendoza. He ex-
plored and conquered Paraguay, of which he was appointed governor.
He died in 1537 in a fight with the Indians of Peru. He founded
Asuncidn, present capital of Paraguay, in 1536.
Domingo Martinez de Irala (1487-1557) was likewise a companion
of Mendoza. He was captain of the fleet which bore Ayolas and his
men up the Parana and Paraguay Rivers in 1536. He was later
governor of the colonies on the Plata and the Paraguay. He was
succeeded by Cabeza de Vaca (see page 124) in 1542, and when the
latter was deposed and returned to Spain, Irak again became gov-
ernor. He was the first (o establish communication between the
Rfo de la Plata region and Peru. The Rio de la Plata colonies,
known later as the Prouincias Unidas del Rio de la Plata, consti-
tuted a viceroyship until the Revolution started in 1810.
Juan de Garay (1514-1592) went to Paraguay in 1565. He ex-
plored the Rfo de la Plata and founded Santa Fe, Argentina, in
1 573. He was at one time lieutenant governor of Asunci6n and rees-
tablished the Buenos Aires colony in 1580. In the Calle San Martin,
diagonally between the corner of the Cathedral and the Municipal
Building, is said to lie under the soil the stone placed there by
438 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Garay to mark the center of the restored colony. This Plaza de
Mayo was originally called the Plaza Mayor de Juan de Garay.
Prior to the Mendoza expedition, the Spanish navigator Juan
Diaz de Soils (1470-1516), together with Vicente Ydnez Pinzdn, one
of Columbus's companions, explored the eastern coast of South
America (1508), but they sailed by the mouth of the great estuary
of the Rio de la Plata without exploring it. In 1516, on a voyage
from Spain in quest of a southwestern route to Asia, he entered the
estuary and, in a battle with Indians on its shores, he lost his life. It
is likely that Portuguese sailors had previously ventured up this river.
In 1520 the Portuguese explorer Fernando de Afagallanes
(Magellan, 1470-1521) ascended the river to where Buenos Aires
now stands. In the same year he passed through the strait which
bears his name ; he died in the Philippine Islands before being able to
complete his proposed voyage around the world.
The Tucumdn house in which Argentine independence was de-
clared in July 9, 1816 is preserved within a larger pavilion-like
structure.
The Avenida 9 de Julio has been constructed by tearing down
whole blocks of the older city. The blocks of Buenos Aires are square
and measure 456 feet on each side. This avenue, running north and
south, is approximately 570 feet wide and is hence the widest street
in any city of the world. It is to be extended northward. In the
center of this street was erected in 1936, on the occasion of the
4ooth anniversary of the city's founding, an obelisk about 120 feet
high. Beneath it is a great parking playa, or space in which more
than 1000 cars may be parked at the same time.
While this avenue is the widest in existence, Rivadavia Street,
which runs east and west and bisects the city, is the longest street
in the world. The lot numbers at present reach into n, 800.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by *f or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish:
i. Soils fund6 la primera poblaci6n de Buenos Aires. 2. El
nombre de la ciudad se deriva del nombre « Nuestra Sefiora
LA FUNDAClON DE BUENOS AIRES 439
del Buen Aire. » 3. Pedro de Mendoza queria imitar en la
regi6n rioplatense las hazanas de Cortes y Pizarro. 4. La
expedicion de Mendoza salio del puerto de Sevilla. 5. A bordo
de sus barcos fueron algunas mujeres. 6. Se construyo con
piedras la primera poblaci6n. 7. Sufrieron los fundadores de
hambre. 8. Juan de Ayolas fundo a Santa Fe. 9. Mendoza
murio despues de ser herido por los indios. 10. Martinez de
Irala fue quien decidio trasladar a Asuncion los sobrevivientes
de la colonia que fundo Mendoza. n. Juan de Garay res-
tableci6 esta colonia con familias traidas del Peru. 12. A
pesar de su fracaso, se le venera mucho a Mendoza en la
Repfiblica Argentina. 13. Los dos dias mis celebrados por
los argentinos son el 4 de Julio y el n de noviembre.
II. <i Como se Hainan los habitantes de las siguientes ciu-
dades o paises ?
i. Buenos Aires. 2. Rio de la Plata. 3. Londres. 4. Es-
pana. 5. Portugal. 6. Francia. 7. Estados Unidos de Norte
America. 8. Cuba. 9. Panama. 10. Guatemala, n. Costa
Rica. 12. Nicaragua.
III. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. She is in worse health. i. Ella esti — .
2. They are going to leave now. 2. Ellos van a — ahora.
3. Don't leave now. 3. No — Vd. ahora.
4. In spite of being ill she came. 4. — enferma, ella vino.
5. We put him on board the ship. 5. Le pusimos — barco.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. La mayorta de los habitantes salieron. The majority of
the inhabitants set out.
Collective nouns or noun phrases such as la mayoria, the
majority y and la mayor parte, the larger part, when followed
440 QUINITO EN AMERICA
by d e + a plural noun, usually have in the plural the verb
of which they are the subject, because of the "attraction"
exerted on the verb by the neighboring noun.
Other collective nouns similarly used are: mitad, half;
res to, rest, remainder; multitud, multitude; numero, number.
La mitad de los portenos no lo creen, half of the people of
Buenos Aires do not believe it.
The above is true if the collective noun precedes the verb.
If it follows, the verb is usually in the singular: vino con ellos
un buen numero de mujeres, a goodly number of women came
with them.
2. El elemento mas entusiasta son los extranjeros. The
most enthusiastic element is the foreigners.
The copulative verb ser, being similar to an equal sign,
frequently agrees not with the subject (elemento), but with
the predicate noun (extranjeros). More examples: Lo que me
preocupa son mis deudas. What worries me is my debts.
Este orden fueron nuestras penalidades. This order was
(meant) hardships for us. Son riquezas lo que el desea. What
he wants is riches.
3. Fu& muerto por los indios. He was killed by the Indians.
Muerto, the past participle of morir, to die, is not only
used as an adjective meaning dead (el estd muerto), but when
used as a part of the passive voice of morir, it means killed.
Morir can be used passively only when the subject is a person.
4. Es de notar su patriotismo. Their patriotism is to be
noted, is worth noting.
Ser de + infinitive is often used to denote fittingness of
the action expressed by the infinitive. More examples: Es
de esperar. It is to be hoped, it is to be expected. Fue de ver su
entusiasmo. Their enthusiasm was worth seeing. The active
infinitive is then frequently equivalent to the English passive.
(From a map printed tn
Buenos Aires Four Centuries Ago.
A Modern Skyscraper in
Buenos Aires.
Courtesy Gtvaert
The Avenida de Mayo, One
of the Principal Streets in
Buenos Aires.
"El Rosedal" in Palermo
Park, Buenos Aires.
Courtesy Gevatrt
os Espanoles," A Monument honoring the Hispanic Peoples and donated
LA FUNDACltfN DE BUENOS AIRES 441
I. Replace the English words with proper Spanish words:
i. El elemento mds numeroso is los indios. 2. Lo que el
dice is mentiras (lies). 3. La mayoria de los aeroplanos carry
pasajeros. 4. It is to be hoped que todos asistan a la reunion.
5. // is to be believed que su patriotismo es entusiasta. 6. Du-
dan que quien fue killed fuera su amigo. 7. Sera worth ad-
miring este edificio cuando este terminado. 8. Las mujeres
no fueron killed cuando los indios atacaron la colonia.
II. Change to the polite form the following intimate com-
mands:
i. Dale tfi el permiso que busca. 2. No se lo des tfi.
3. Abridnos vosotros la puerta. 4. No se la abrais a 61.
5. Pideselo tfi a ella. 6. No se lo pidas tu a el. 7. Pedid-
melo a ml 8. No me lo pidais a mi. 9. Trdenoslo. 10. No
nos lo traigas. n. Si6ntate tti. 12. Sentaos vosotros.
III. Make the following exhortations affirmative:
i. No lo conmemoremos. 2. No se lo escribamos. 3. No
se lo pidamos a ellos. 4. No nos acerquemos a la ciudad.
5. No los busquemos. 6. No nos sentemos aqui. 7. No lo
venzamos. 8. No los dirijamos. 9. No nos marchemos para
la ciudad. 10. No se lo ofrezcamos.
IV. Say and write in Spanish:
i. Come what may. 2. Be it as it may. 3. Whether they
wish it or not. 4. However rich he may be. 5. However
rich he might be. 6. He is richer than he used to be. 7. He
is not as rich as he was (so). 8. Stay here until I return.
V. Express the following sentences in the five simple tenses
of the main verb:
i. Deseo que Vd. la conozca. 2. Es probable que yo le
haya conocido.
CAPlTULO LIV
MAS MARAVILLAS DE LA CAPITAL
PORTEtfA
Las maravillas de Buenos Aires siguieron ocupando la
atenci6n de los Gomez, que deseaban verlo todo. Aunque
a veces dona Ana se quedaba en el hotel para descansar,
sus hijos parecian resueltos a no omitir de sus visitas
s ningun rinc6n de la ciudad. Don Tomds se reia un poco
del entusiasmo de sus sobrinos, pero se ofrecia siempre
para acompafiarlos. No estaba ocupado en nada ni tenla
quehaceres algunos en la capital.
La bella Diagonal Rodriguez S&enz Pefia y la anchisima
10 Avenida 9 de Julio, calles cortadas por entre las viejas
casas porteiias, eran magnificas. Debajo de esta Avenida
vieron la gran plaza para estacionar hasta mil automoviles.
En medio de la Avenida admiraron el Obelisco levantado
en 1936 para conmemorar el cuarto centenario de la fun-
is daci6n de Buenos Aires.
El Teatro Colon, el mds grande centro de 6pera del
Nuevo Mundo, era soberbio. Dijo don Tom&s:
— Aqui cantan los m£s famosos artistas de la 6pera,
que vienen de todos los paises del globo.
20 Los museos eran tan numerosos que les era posible a
los viajeros visitar s61o dos de ellos: el Museo de Bellas
Artes, que posee una preciosa colecci6n de cuadros, y el
Museo Municipal, en que se exhiben interesantes objetos
conservados de los tiempos coloniales. La Biblioteca
442
LA CAPITAL PORTEtfA 443
Nacional, con su buena colecci6n de libros, valia una visita 25
mucho mds larga de la que pudieron hacerle.
La Catedral Nacional, situada al lado norte de la vieja
Plaza de Mayo, era el edificio que m£s interesaba a
Quinito, porque alii dentro descansan los restos mortales
del gran general Jos6 de San Martin. El joven espanol se 30
quedo un largo rato mirando la tumba y pensando en
este gran h6roe de la independencia de Sud America.
Por fin exclamo Pepe:
— Me cansan todos estos edificios aunque sean muy
interesantes. Estoy cansado de estar boquiabierto mi- 35
rando cuadros y objetos de arte. Quisiera estar al aire
libre donde se encuentren arboles y flores hermosos. <i Por
qu6 no damos un paseo por algunos de los muchos parques
portenos ?
Todos consintieron en eso y al dia siguiente subieron 40
al coche de don Tom&s. Aquel dia lo dedicaron a recorrer
algunos parques: Palermo, con su Rosedal y su Glorieta
Andaluza, Retiro, Lezama, Chacabuco, Centenario y Ge-
neral Urquiza. Rompieron en exclamaciones de admira-
cion al ver las muy variadas plantas y flores traidas de 45
todas partes del mundo, las bellas estatuas y estanques.
Los Jardines Zoologico y Botdnico les sorprendieron por
su perfecci6n y hermosura.
— Creo que os gustaria ver la Avenida Costanera y el
Balneario Municipal — dijo don Tom&s. — Esa avenida 50
nueva sigue a lo largo de las orillas del Rio de la Plata.
Vamos all&.
El gran balneario estaba abarrotado de gente. Parecia
que todos los portenos habian decidido ir a banarse al
mismo tiempo en la extensa playa. Bajaron los turistas y ss
444 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
fueron a mezclarse con los incontables espectadores. Este
lugar es el sitio preferido durante los dias de calor y con
sus muchos puestos de refrescos y diferentes diversiones,
es muy popular. El vaiv6n de la gente no cesa nunca.
60 Quinito, como siempre, se interesaba profundamente en
la manera de hablar de los portenos. Oyo que decian
palabras nuevas para 61: « pibe » por nino; « vereda »
por acera; « rancho » por sombrero de paja; « mucama »
por criada; « guarango » por estupido, y otras muchas
65 mis. Dijoasutio:
— Veo que aqul, como en M6jico y en Chile, se emplean
palabras y modismos que son distintos de los que usamos
en Espafia.
— Claro — contest6 don Tomds. — Es muy natural
70 que ocurran variaciones de vocabulario y aun de pro-
nunciation, sobre todo cuando uno recuerda que el es-
pafiol se habla en 18 paises americanos muy separados el
uno del otro. Y Espafia, la madre patria, est& aun mis
remota de sus hijas las naciones hispanas del Nuevo
75 Mundo. Pero estas diferencias son, despufe de todo,
poca cosa. Tti y yo, espanoles, aprendemos pronto a
reconocer y emplear los t6rminos que se usan en el idioma
nacional de cada una de esas naciones.
— Es verdad — dijo Quinito. — Casi lo mismo dijo
80 nuestro tlo Felipe cuando est&bamos con 61 en M6jico.
El espanol es uno, dondequiera que se hable.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
at aire libre outdoors, in the open mezclarse con to mingle with
air poca cosa small matter, of little
a/ft dentro there, inside importance
LA CAPITAL PORTE&A 445
VOCABULARIO
anchisimo, -a very wide dpera f . opera
boquiabierto, -a gaping perfeccidn perfection
botdnico, -a botanical quehacer m. duly, work
coleccidn f . collection rato m. while, time
criada f . maid, servant resuelto, -a determined, resolved
estacionar to park romper to break
estanque m. pool separado, -a separated
exclamacidn f . exclamation termino m. term
glorieta i. small square vaiven m. going and coming
hermosura f . beauty variacidn i. variation
municipal municipal zooldgico, -a zoological
obelisco m. obelisk
NOTE: For meaning of the Argentine words of this chapter see
their Spanish equivalents above.
NOMBRES PROPIOS
The Diagonal Rodriguez Sdenz Pena (named after a former presi-
dent of the Republic) is a recently constructed and beautiful street
which runs northwest from Calle San Martin to the Plaza Lavatte.
The Teatro Col6n is the great opera house situated in the Plaza
Lavalle. It is a building of excellent architecture, and has one of the
largest and most beautiful auditoriums to be found in the whole
world. During the opera season nearly all the great singers come to
participate in the performances given here. The house seats 3750.
The Museo de Bellas Aries, in the Avenida Alvear, was inaugu-
rated in 1896 and contains a collection of European and Spanish-
American art which makes it well worth a visit. Goya, Murillo,
Ribera, Sorolla, Zuloaga, Zurbardn and other Spanish masters are
represented, besides others from many different nations.
The Museo Municipal, situated in Corrientes Street, has many
relics, especially coins, of the early days of Argentina. The two most
notable pictures are the reproduction of an old painting of the
"Virgen del Buen Aire," venerated by sailors, from which Virgin
the City of Buenos Aires derived its name, and another canvas by
446 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
Moreno Carbonero which shows the refounding of the city by Juan
de Garay and sixty-three of his men.
There are a number of other museums of importance: the Naval
Museum, the National History Museum, the Agricultural Museum,
the Fernandez Blanco Museum and the Ethnological Museum, to
name no more.
The Biblioteca National, in Mexico Street, was founded in 1810
by the revolutionary Junta, and became the special charge of
Dr. Mariano Moreno, the secretary of the Junta. After him is
named one of the largest and best public secondary schools for boys,
the Colegio Nacional "Mariano Moreno," situated at 3577 Riva-
davia Street. [North American students of Spanish who desire to
correspond (in Spanish or English) with students of that institu-
tion may initiate such a correspondence by writing to Professor
Ofelia A. de Jonghi of that school, requesting that one of her pupils
send a letter to the North American writer. Such requests, or letters
written by North American students to be answered by " Mariano
Moreno " students, should be sent so as to reach Buenos Aires only
during the Argentine school year, that is, between April i and
November 30. Postal rate, three cents an ounce. About two
weeks are necessary for a letter to pass between New York and
Buenos Aires.]
The Catedral National, on the north side of the Plaza de Mayo,
occupies the site on which was built the first church in early colonial
days. The building collapsed in 1752. Its rebuilding was not
finished until 1835. It is low in height, if compared with most
cathedrals. It has twelve Corinthian columns before its facade and
so resembles somewhat the Madeleine of Paris.
Of the several parks named in the text (and there are very many
more in the Greater City, as well as countless tree-lined and land-
scaped avenues), the most outstanding is, perhaps, the Parque de
Palermo. It contains many drives, the principal one being the
Avenida de las Palmeras. At its entrance stands the Monumento de
los Espafioles, presented to the Republic by Spanish residents to
commemorate the first centenary of the revolution of May, 1810.
Along one of the paths bordering the lake is a statue of George
LA CAPITAL PORTEftA 447
Washington, given by North American residents of the city in 1936,
the fourth centenary of Mendoza's first colonization.
The Rosed at, Rosedale, contains probably the finest collection of
roses in the world. They are in the height of bloom in October and
November. There is also found near by the Glorieta Andaluza (An-
dalusian Arbor or Square) which, in the beauty and variety of its
tiles, is similar to the Fuente de don Quijote in Chapultepec Woods,
Mexico, D. F. (see page 295).
At the east of Palermo are the Zoological Gardens, the Rural
Society Show Grounds (where are held great cattle shows), and the
Hipodromo Argentina, where are held in October, before a palatial
club house and grandstand seating 30,000, the best organized horse
races in the world. The Botanical Gardens lie opposite the Zoo.
The Avenida Costanera, Coastal Avenue, reached by passing near
the shipping docks, is a recently rehabilitated driveway running
along the shore of the Rio de la Plata and leading to the Balneario
Municipal (Municipal Bathing Beach) which is highly popular in
warm weather (November through February). Many amusement
devices afford pleasant ways of passing the time.
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <j Que ocupo la atencion de los Gomez? 2. <i Qu6 es-
taban resueltos a hacer los hijos de dona Ana? 3. <J Qu6 se
encuentra debajo de la Avenida 9 de Julio ? 4. i Para que
sirve el Obelisco situado en esta avenida? 5. <J Quien canta
en el Teatro de Colon durante una temporada de opera?
6. <i For que estaba Quinito muy interesado en la Catedral ?
7. <; Que queria hacer Pepe? 8. £ Qu6 vieron los turistas en
el Parque de Palermo ? 9. i Qu6 hay en un jardin zoologico ?
10. i Que se encuentra en un jardin botiinico? n. d Por
d6nde corre la Avenida Costanera ? 12. <i Qu6 hada la gente
en el Balneario Municipal? 13. i Qu6 puestos hay por alii?
14. i Cu£les eran algunas de las palabras portenas que atra-
jeron la atenci6n a Quinito? 15. iQu6 significa mucama?
448 QUINITO EN AMERICA
II. Try hard to give definitions or synonyms in Spanish of
the following words or expressions:
i. balneario. 2. pibe. 3. museo. 4. biblioteca. 5. ave-
nida. 6. espectador. 7. puesto. 8. remoto. 9. incontable.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. No tenia quehaceres algunos. He had no duties (to dis-
charge). El vaiven de la gente no cesa nunca. The coming
and going of the people never stops.
In the above sentences quehaceres (singular, quehacer)
and vaiven are compound nouns. Such nouns are much less
frequent in Spanish than in English. Let us see how such
nouns may be formed.
A. Some end in a singular noun, the first element being a
verb or other part of speech:
el parasol (parar, to stop, ward off, sol, sun), sunshade,
parasol
el sobretodo (sobre, on, over, todo, all), overcoat (not over-
alls)
el ferrocarril (ferro = hierro, iron, carril, rail), railway
la sinrazdn (sin, without, razdn, reason), injustice, wrong
B. Some end in a plural noun, the first element being a
verb. This is the most numerous class.
el rascacielos (rascar, to scratch, cielos, skies), skyscraper
el paraguas (parar, to ward of, aguas, waters), umbrella
elparabrisas (brisas, breezes), windshield
el portamonedas (per tar, to carry, monedas, coins), purse
el cortaplumas (cor tar, to cut, plumas, feathers), penknife
el limpiabotas (limpiar, to clean, betas, boots), bootblack
C. Some are made up chiefly of verbs:
el vaiven (va, goes, y ven, and come), moving about, going
and coming
LA CAPITAL PORTEftA 449
el quehacer (que, what, something, hacer, to do), duty, task,
work
el correvedile (corre, run, ve, go, dile, tell him), gossip, tattler
el hazmerrelr (hazme, make me, reir, to laugh), laughing-
stock, funny person
2. The plural of the compound nouns of class A is formed
according to the usual rules for pluralization : el parasol, los
parasoles.
Those of class B remain unchanged in the plural: el para-
guas, los paraguas.
Those in class C are seldom used in the plural. Excep-
tions are el quehacer, los quehacer es; el vaiven, los vaivenes.
3. Estar boquiabierto. To be open-mouth, gaping.
The word boquiabierto is a compound adjective. The fol-
lowing are a few such adjectives:
boquiabierto (boca, mouth, abierto, opened), gaping
carilargo (cara, face, largo, long) , long-faced
ojinegro (ojo, eye, negro, black), black-eyed
pelirrubio (pelo, hair, rubio, blond), light-haired
Notice that the final vowel of the noun is changed to i;
also that initial r of the adjective is doubled, in order to re-
tain the strongly trilled sound it has when initial in a word.
(Compare hazmerrelr).
4. Arboles y flares hermosos. Beautiful trees and flowers.
When an adjective modifies two or more preceding plural
nouns of different genders it is usually expressed in the mas-
culine plural form, since that form may also include the
feminine. (Remember how masculine plural nouns may in-
clude the feminine, page 385.) Arboles y flares hermosas
would usually mean trees and beautiful flowers.
450 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
La planta y el irbol altos. The tall plant and tree.
When the adjective modifies two or more preceding singular
nouns of different genders, the adjective is usually in the
masculine plural.
El 6rbol y las plantas alias, the tall tree and plants.
When an adjective modifies two or more preceding nouns
of different genders and numbers, the adjective agrees with
the nearest noun if it is plural, but if that noun is singular,
the adjective is masculine plural: los arboles y la planta altos,
the tall trees and plant.
I. Form the plural of the following phrases:
i. el ferrocarril largo. 2. la sinrazon notable. 3. el pa-
raguas y el parasol verdes. 4. el sobretodo y el portamonedas
mio. 5. ningun quehacer.
II. Say and write in Spanish:
i. This cathedral and that garden are magnificent.
2. These gardens and those flowers are charming. 3. The
church and the automobile are white. 4. She was black-eyed
and fair-haired. 5. Don't stay there gaping.
III. Read and translate the following sentences. State why
the subjunctive is used in each case where it occurs. Explain
also why it is necessary to use the tense of the subjunctive that
is employed.
i. Buscan una criada que hable espanol. 2. No haga Vd.
eso. 3. Convenia que la acompaiiasemos. 4. No hay quien
pueda hacerlo. 5* No me marchar6 antes que 61 llegue.
6. Fu6 precise que no lo rompiesen. 7. No digas tfi eso.
8. March6monos de aqui. 9. For bueno que fuera 61, nadie
le queria. 10. Si no nos hubieran escrito, no le hubteramos
dado nada. n. Me alegro de que Vd. haya venido. 12. Me
alegre de que Vd. hubiese venido.
NOVENA LECClCN DE REPASO
VOCABULARIO
I. Give the
el monte
el salitre
la artilleria
el cuartel
el af£n
pleno
el colectivo
el microbus
el trasbordo
boquiabierto
el estanque
II. Give the
to faint
the grape
the meeting
the duty
supreme
federal
to improve
the abundance
luxurious
to lose
the day
the provision
the gunpowder
except
English for
abonar
el novio
el c6ndor
tampoco
el porteno
un millar
prevalecer
londinense
el transito
a pesar de
botanico
the Spanish words:
el nitrogeno el
la liberation el
la flotilla el
la tropa el
el ombu el
el reves la
la radio la
el bordo el
la devocion el
rioplatense el
estacionar el
oxigeno
veraneo
titulo
bonaerense
establecimiento
orientacion
sucursal
gentilhombre
patriotismo
obelisco
estadio
Spanish for the English words:
the patriot the cavalry the past
to circulate ever rout
imaginary the admiration the organiza-
very wide cosmopolitan tion
the pedestrian the metropolis since
the opera to excel the district
feminine elegant the season
zoological the vehicle short
the fashion worse the furniture
urban the permission the means
to commemorate the beauty enthusiastic
the majority determined the sailor
the wine mistaken the virgin
to breathe the mineral right-hand
451
452
QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
I. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. Iremos al encuentro de
nuestro primo.
2. Dijeron que saldrian pa-
sado manana.
3. Nunca jamds volvimos a
verlos.
4. Esta ciudad cuenta con
muchos recursos.
5. Ya que lo ha visto Vd.
i que le parece ?
6. Si 61 se desmaya, pronto
volvera en si.
7. Fuimos a bordo del barco.
8. Ya se marcharon para
Buenos Aires.
9. Es de notar que no viene
nadie.
10. Hoy ella est£ peor de
salud.
11. Los pusieron en venta.
1 2 . Ella se ha puesto bastante
alegre.
13. Eso es poca cosa.
14. Nos gusta vivir al aire
libre.
1. We shall — our cousin.
2. They said they would
leave — .
3. We -.
4. This city — many re-
sources.
5. — you have seen it, what
do you think of it ?
6. If he faints, he will
quickly — .
7. We went — .
8. They — for Buenos Aires.
9. — no one is coming.
10. Today she is — .
11. They put them — .
12. She — .
13. That is — .
14. We like to live — .
II. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. That suit does not become i. Ese traje — .
you.
2. This furniture is luxurious 2. Estos mueblos son lujosos
and unequalled. y — .
LECCI6N DE REPASO
453
3. No one surpasses her in
elegance.
4. Here we keep to the right.
5. The pedestrian was in a
hurry.
6. Let's take a little drive.
7. They are homesick for
their native land.
8. You are welcome here.
9. In midsummer it is very
hot.
10. There the seasons go the
reverse of ours.
11. He is there inside.
12. The actors mingle with
the travelers.
3. Nadie la supera — .
4. Aqui — la derecha.
5. El peaton — .
6. Vamos a dar — .
7. Ellos — su patria.
8. Aqui Vd. — .
9. Hace mucho calor — .
10. Alii las estaciones van —
las nuestras.
11. £l esta — .
12. Los actores — con los
viajeros.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
I. Replace the English words with suitable Spanish words:
i. Visiting (to visit) un parque es siempre agradable. 2. Es
agradable to visit un parque. 3. Seeing is believing. 4. Nues-
tros duties son numerosos. 5. Los beings humanos aman el
power. 6. Yds. no van; neither (is) he. 7. <; Ha visto Vd.
ever tantas flores? 8. Never. 9. Este small garden tiene
muchas little flowers que le gustan a mi dear little mother.
10. Right now vemos a la poor little girl que esti sentada en
una small plaza, n. El niiio lo dijo to (para) himself. 12. En
un momento he will regain consciousness. 13. Ella condujo
el autom6vil skilfully and rapidly. 14. £ Qui6n es ? // is I.
15. £ Qui6n fue? It was they. 16. Somos nosotros los que
arrived late. 17. Todos rieron menos yo, que left en seguida.
18. Before saying anything ellos se acercaron a la puerta.
19. Hoy ella es m&s hermosa than ever.
454 QUINITO EN AMERICA
II. Say and write in Spanish:
i. All came except me. 2. Between you (ffl) and me, we
shall accomplish (realizar) the plan. 3. By and by he will
come. 4. He has already come. 5. Now he is coming. 6. He
has more than a thousand pesos. 7. He has more pesos than I.
8. He has more pesos than he had last year. 9. He has more
pesos than I thought. 10. He does not distinguish mine from
thine, n. Whatever hat she puts on becomes her. 12. Each
does what he likes to do. 13. Give me all you have.
14. Someone is coming. 15. Some of the boys are ill.
1 6. None of them was here today. 17. He who studies
learns. 18. All who come remain. 19. There is no one who
knows me.
III. Supply in the blanks a suitable Spanish word meaning
became:
i. Ellos — pobrisimos. 2. Vd. — un capitan del ejercito.
3. Vds. — muy entusiastas. 4. Ella — muy hermosa. 5. Mi
hermano — riquisimo. 6. La mayoria de nuestros amigos
— soldados. 7. Un buen ntimero de exploradores — desilu-
sionados.
IV. Give the compound Spanish nouns and adjectives
equivalent to the following:
the skyscraper; the tattler; the umbrella; the railway; the
penknife; the duty; the task; the overcoat; gaping; black-
eyed; blue-eyed; light-haired; long-haired; wide-faced.
V. Say and write in Spanish:
i. The most numerous element is the Indians. 2. What I
like is beautiful flowers. 3. They were killed by the soldiers.
4. Her beauty is worth noticing. 5. It is to be believed that
she tells the truth. 6. These flowers and that tree are tall.
7. That tree and these flowers are tall. 8. The house and the
bank are new.
CAPlTULO LV
'LA ARGENTINA, TIERRA DE PROMISI6N
— Hemos visto — dijo Quinito — que Buenos Aires es
una capital extraordinariamente cosmopolita. Don Tomds
respondio que si y luego dijo :
— La Republica Argentina, y naturalmente su capital,
es la tierra de promision para todos los pueblos del 5
mundo. Creo que no hay raza ni naci6n alguna que no
tenga aqui un buen numero de representantes. Es claro
que la mayoria de los habitantes son de origen espanol,
siendo espanoles los primeros conquistadores y pobla-
dores, como lo eran tambi£n los inmigrantes de los aiios 10
siguientes.
A la mitad del siglo XIX empezo a aumentarse la
corriente de inmigrantes europeos que venian a la Argen-
tina en busca de nuevas oportunidades en una tierra
riquisima. Los italianos, sobre todo, llegaron en grandes 15
numeros. Rusos, uruguayos, franceses, turcos, alemanes
e ingleses entraron al pais, todos movidos por el comun
deseo de aprovechar sus vastos recursos naturales. Se
formaron colonias de judlos, hungaros, suecos y griegos.
A todos les dio la Reptiblica la bienvenida porque eran 20
elementos preciosos en un pais nuevo y poco poblado.
Y estos extranjeros (que aun hasta hoy constituyen
la tercera parte de la poblaci6n) aman mucho a su nueva
patria, donde gozan de la libertad y de oportunidades
para vivir bien. La mayoria de los inmigrantes pobres 25
prosperan aqui y se ganan la vida fdcilmente. A veces
455
456 QUINITO EN AMERICA
el pobre extranjero entra tfmido y temeroso al pals, pero
al poco tiempo est& viviendo feliz y contento.
— Ni en Nueva York, donde viven numerosas razas
30 diferentes, oimos hablar tantos idiomas distintos como
aqui — dijo Quinito.
— Es claro que predominan aquf los criollos o gente
nacida en el pais — contesto el tio. — Pero al mismo
tiempo se ven periodicos publicados en ingles, aleman,
35 francos, italiano y otros idiomas. Y conviene recordar
los nombres de algunos de los restaurantes: Bucarest
Bar, Cafe Ingles, Old Vienna, Bar Napoli, Cabaret Far
East, Caf6 Blue Danube y otros. En ellos se reunen los
extranjeros cado uno como si estuviera en su patria. Los
10 clubs extranjeros son numerosos. De vez en cuando se
abre un nuevo club en el centro o en los suburbios.
— Ademds — continuo don Tom£s, — algunos de los
mejores jugadores de futbol, juego en que superan los
argentinos, tienen nombres extranjeros. En la alta socie-
5 dad portena se habla ing!6s y francos casi tanto como
espanol.
Y cuando leo uno de los grandes periodicos argentinos,
como La Prensa o La Nacidn, veo que abundan las noti-
cias de Europa y de Norte America, lo cual indica una
o actitud international bien informada.
— En el Palacio de Correos — anadi6 Pepe — vi que
hay un « Hall de Extranjeros » en que se ofrecen a los
lectores extranjeros revisitas y peri6dicos venidos de
todos los rincones del globo.
5 — Los nombres de varias calles y edificios y de algunos
suburbios tambi&i indican que Buenos Aires es cosmo-
jx)lita — observ6 Rosa. — Por ejemplo : las calles Carlos
LA ARGENTINA 457
Pellegrini, Bouchard y Canning; el hospital Rawson;
City Hotel; Hotel de la Paix; los suburbios de Banfield
y Temperley ... 60
Lo mismo lo veriais en otras ciudades de la Reptiblica,
en Rosario, la segunda ciudad, o en Cordoba o Mendoza
— dijo don Tom£s. — Poco despu6s de establecerse
aqui, la mayoria de los extranjeros se sienten tan argen-
tinos como el que mas y demuestran sin cesar su patrio- 65
tismo. Yo, por ejemplo, que naci en Espana, soy ciuda-
dano argentino y orgulloso de serlo. Para mi la Reptiblica
ha sido, en verdad, la tierra de promision y aqui he pros-
perado. Me cas£ con una criolla y mis hijos casi han
olvidado que su padre es de origen espanol. 70
Al mencionar a su familia don Tom&s estuvo un poco
pensativo. Era claro que le hubiera gustado volver a estar
con su esposa y sus hijos.
VOCABULARIO
actitud f . attitude mencionar to mention
aprovechar to profit from, benefit noticias f . pi. news
by oportunidad f. opportunity
club m. club pensativo, -a pensive
comun common predominar to predominate
constituir (uyo) to constitute promisidn f. promise
criollo, -a native, native born (also representante m. and f. repre-
ssed as noun) sentative
griego, -a Greek revista f . magazine; review
hospital m. hospital ruso, -a Russian
htingaro,-a Hungarian suecom. Swede
inmigrante m. and f . immigrant temeroso, -a fearful
international international turco m. Turk
judtom. Jew urvguayo,-a Uruguayan
lector m. reader
458 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
como el que mds as the best of ganarse la vida to earn one's living
them riquisimo very rich
ni not even tierra de promisidn promised land
NOTAS
Futbol, football (in Argentina the English word, properly spelled,
is most frequently used) is, of course, soccer, not the game known as
football in the United States. Argentina at one time held the world's
championship in this game. There are several football stadia in
Buenos Aires each of which seats several thousand spectators, the
newest and largest being that of the River Plate Club. Games are
broadcast play by play from one or more of the fifteen radio stations
of the city. Soccer is becoming increasingly popular in the United
States, and visiting Latin-American teams have recently made
successful appearances here.
La Prensa (The Press) and La Nation are daily papers which in
size and content rival the best papers in the United States. • Each
of these papers has a social service of many phases for its subscribers.
La Prensa maintains what amounts to a first-class club for its readers.
There are innumerable daily, weekly and monthly publications issued
in Buenos Aires, many of which are published in other languages
than Spanish. Among the better magazines are Coras y Caretas
(Faces and Masks), El Hogar (The Home), Leopldn, Atldntida (which
circulates largely among wealthy society people), Nosotros (a literary
magazine of high level), and many more. Argentine publications
are considered the best in Spanish America and they circulate in all
countries south of the Rio Grande.
The Palacio de Correos y Telegrafos (Post Office and Telegraph
Office) is a huge, very up-to-date building which has many perfectly
appointed public rooms and offices. The postal and telegraph serv-
ices, both in charge of the federal government, have their head-
quarters here. Most interesting is the Hall de Extranjeros (For-
eigners9 Half) which provides reading matter in many languages for
all who care to enjoy this service.
LA ARGENTINA 459
Buenos Aires has many fine club-houses. The Jockey Club, in
Florida Street, was founded in 1892 to promote the breeding and
racing of fine horses. The Club del Progreso, Avenida de Mayo,
founded in 1852, the Centra Naval, and the Automdvil Club Argen-
tina, founded in 1904 (having 5,000 members) are luxuriously
appointed clubs. Among the foreign clubs are those founded and
maintained by Spaniards, Italians, Germans, French and English.
The American Club, 530 Bartolome Mitre Street, is the center of
activities for United States citizens.
The Instituto Cultural Argentina Norte Americano (I.C.A.N.A.),
an institution supported by funds contributed by Argentinians and
North Americans, does much to foster cultural relations between
Argentina and the United States. Among its many activities are
classes in English given in the afternoons and evenings, for both
children and adults. An international correspondence bureau of the
Instituto is active in promoting an interchange of letters between
Argentinian and North American students. The address of the In-
stituto (which is directed by Dr. Cupertino del Campo), is Calle
Maipo 686. Correspondence with portenos (and portenas) may be
initiated by writing the I.C.A.N.A.
At this point should be mentioned another very effective medium
for fomenting international student correspondence, namely, the
Section de Correspondencia Escolar International del Ministerio de
Justicia e Instruction Publica, Avenida de Mayo 1396.
North American teachers of Spanish who desire the cooperation of
these two agencies in promoting understanding between the young
people of the two Republics, will find ready response to any com-
munication sent to them. First-class United States mail for Argen-
tina (for that matter, for all Spanish America and Spain) is accepted
at the same rates as for domestic mail — 3 cents an ounce.
Rosario (Rosario de Sante Fe), with its 500,000 inhabitants, is the
second city in size of Argentina. It is on the voluminous Parand
River, about 190 miles northeast of Buenos Aires. It is the center
of a rich farming region and of an extensive railway network. From
its harbor is shipped more grain than from any other port in the
world, excepting only that of Montreal, Canada.
460 QUINITO EN AMERICA
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. La Republica Argentina es para muchos la — . 2. La
mayoria de los habitantes son — . 3. La corriente de inmi-
grantes se aumento — . 4. Entre los inmigrantes se cuentan
— . 5. Todos estos extranjeros vinieron a la Argentina para
— . 6. La Argentina les dio la bienvenida porque — . 7. En
Buenos Aires se oyen hablar — . 8. Predominan en la po-
blacion los — . 9. En los clubs y restaurantes se reunen — .
10. Las noticias publicadas en los periodicos indican — .
II. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. Ella es tan argentina como i. She is as Argentine as — .
el que mas.
2. Ni en Mejico hay tantos 2. — are there so many
extranjeros. foreigners.
3. Aquella Republica es la 3. That Republic is — .
tierra de promision.
4. Me gusta vivir al aire libre. 4. I like — .
5. Se mezclo con los especta- 5. — the spectators,
dores.
6. No hay nadie alii dentro. 6. There is no one — .
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. Respondid que si. He answered yes. Creo que no. I
think not. Parece que si. It seems so. Dicen que si. They
say so.
The conjunction que is often employed to introduce an
elliptical clause (one in which the verb is omitted). In the
first sentence above si would be equal to: Buenos Aires es
una ciudad cosmopolita.
i Cree Vd. que vendr&? Do you think he will come? Creo
LA ARGENTINA 461
que no. I think not. Here no is equivalent to the clause:
no vendrd.
This elliptical construction is found after verbs of saying,
answering, believing and seeming.
2. Entra temoroso y timido. He enters fearfully and timidly.
Est& viviendo feliz y contento. He is living happily and con-
tentedly.
In the above sentences we see how adjectives are sometimes
used in Spanish as adverbs. Such use occurs most frequently
with verbs of motion or state of being, such as entrar, salir,
ir, venir, vivir and the like.
More examples: el tren anda muy rapido, the train goes
very rapidly; el viaja muy cdmodo, he travels very comfortably.
3. Los inmigr antes pobres prosperan. The poor immigrants
(immigrants having little money) prosper. Elpobre inmigr ante.
The poor immigrant (immigrant to be pitied). Un nuevo club.
A new club (another club). Un club nuevo. A new club (re-
cently established).
A number of adjectives vary in meaning, depending upon
whether they precede or follow the noun. The following
phrases illustrate the use of those adjectives which are most
influenced in their meaning by the position they occupy.
Notice that when they follow the noun they have a decidedly
literal, objective or commonplace meaning; while if they
precede the noun, a figurative, subjective or epithetic mean-
ing is implied.
un hombre pobre, a poor man (one without money) ; un pobre
hombre, a poor man (one to be pitied).
noticias ciertas, reliable news, true news; ciertas noticias,
certain news (rather vaguely denoted).
personas diferentes, different persons (other persons); di-
ferentes personas, different persons (several persons).
462 QUINITO EN AMERICA
una casa nueva, a new house (one newly built); una nueva
casa, a new house (another one) .
una ciudad grande, a large city; una gran ciudad, a great
city.
colores varios, distinctly varied colors; varios colores, sev-
eral colors.
un muchacho bueno, a good boy (in character); un buen
muchacho, a fine boy, a "good fellow" a "likeable chap."
4. Estuvo pensativo. He was thoughtful (at the time). Fue
pensativo. He was thoughtful (by nature) .
Adjectives vary in shades of meaning according as they
are used after ser or estar.
When used with ser, the adjective denotes an inherent,
natural, essential, characteristic or financial condition of the
subject noun or pronoun: Juan es bueno, John is good; el
agua es buena para beber, water is good to drink.
When used with estar, the adjective denotes a non-essential,
momentary or accidental quality of the subject: Juan estd
bueno, John is in good health, is well; el agua est& fria, the
water is cold.
When in doubt as to whether to use ser or estar with a
predicate adjective, it is often correct to use quedar: quedd
pensativo, he was (remained) thoughtful.
Some adjectives are used only with ser, others only with
estar; for example, ser feliz, to be happy; estar contento,
to be conten^ satisfied, pleased.
I. Translate into English the following sentences. Explain,
for each adjective used, either (as the case demands) why it
is employed with ser or estar, or its position in the sentence.
i. Este ruso es orgulloso. 2. Estamos orgullosos de eso.
3. El agua pura (pure) es dara. 4. El agua estaba clara
entonces. 5. Este buen hombre no es rico. 6. Ese gran
LA ARGENTINA 463
hombre es simpitico. 7. Un buen dia comprar6 un nuevo
sombrero. 8. Hoy este nuevo alumno est£ malo. 9. El nino
malo no estaba contento aqui. 10. Ciertos nifios son malos.
ii. Me lo dijeron personas diferentes. 12. Vivimos aqui muy
felices. 13. Un hombre grande no es siempre un gran hombre.
II. By replacing the dependent clause with si or no, make
that clause elliptical :
i. Creemos que no esta aqui. 2. Me contesto que habian
venido. 3. Parecia que no lo sabia. 4. Nos dijeron que los
muchachos estaban buenos. 5. Creyo que no me conocian.
III. Use in the blanks of the following sentences, in the
imperfect tense, the proper form of ser or estar, as the case
demands. If either verb may be used, explain the difference
that exists.
i. Ellos — contentos. 2. El sol — fuerte. 3. La nieve
— blanca. 4. Los heroes — valientes. 5. El senor — rico.
6. Mis parientes — buenos. 7. Yo — viajando por el pais.
8. <i Donde — Vd. ? 9. i No — ellas alegres ? 10. £ Qui6n
— feliz? ii. El sombrero — bonito.
IV. Translate into English the following sentences. Give
reasons for the use of the subjunctive mood and for the use
of the tense of the subjunctive that is found.
i. Me pide que no haga eso para que los dem&s no lo hagan
tampoco. 2. Ella sentia mucho que hubiesemos llegado antes
que ella hubiera podido preparar la comida. 3. Digale que
nos escriba tan pronto como llegue a la ciudad. 4. Ha sido
preciso que Vd. lo arregle de modo que mis primos puedan
salir temprano. 5. Temieron que nosotros llegdsemos sin que
los dem&s nos viesen. 6. Si nos escribieran, les contest&ramos
en seguida. 7. Si nos hubiesen escrito le hubieramos con-
testado en seguida. 8. Entreguemoselas a ellos.
CAPlTULO LVI
CON RUMBO A LA ESTANCIA
Cuando vieron los Gomez que don Tomds estaba de-
seando volver a su casa, le dijo dona Ana:
— Pero Tomas, <J cudndo vas a llevarnos a Chascomiis ?
— Cuando vosotros lo querais — respondio su hermano.
5 Despu6s de vacilar un momento, siguio diciendo :
— He de deciros que me necesitan en la estancia, donde
hay mucho trabajo en esta estacion del ano. No quiero
molestaros en nada, pero si os basta lo que hab6is visto
aqui, podrfamos ponernos en camino mafiana para « Los
10 Ties Ombues. »
Consintieron los demds con gusto en abandonar la ciu-
dad al dia siguiente. Dijo dona Ana:
— Me bastan las ciudades, calles, edificios y multitudes
de gente que he visto y nunca volverg a poner pie en
15 ninguna ciudad. — Luego afiadi6 la seiiora suspirando:
— Si no es en la pequeiia poblaci6n de Astorga all& lejos
en mi querida patria.
A la mafiana siguiente, don Tomds y sus parientes
abandonaron el hotel. Al acercarse al coche de su her-
20 mano, que estaba estacionado cerca de la acera, pregunt6
dona Ana:
— <; Cabemos todos con nuestras cosas incontables ?
— Claro — respondi6 don Tom£s. — Es fdcil que todos
quepamos en este coche, que es grande y bastante c6modo.
25 — Cabemos todos menos yo — dijo el muy bur!6n
464
CON RUMBO A LA ESTANCIA 465
Quinito. — Y yo me compro un par de alas y vuelo
por el aire hasta Chascomtis.
For fin todos se metieron en el coche y partieron. La
carretera era insuperable y el dla hermosisimo. El auto-
m6vil, conducido por don Tom£s, paso rSpidamente por 30
el camino, a los dos lados del cual se extendlan llanuras
de suelo rico.
— Son esplendidas las carreteras argentinas — observ6
Quinito. — No he visto mejores.
— Si — contest6 el tio. — Aunque la red de ferro- 35
carriles de la Repiiblica era, antes de la invenci6n del
automovil, la m&s grande que existia en Sud America (y
todavia lo es), no bastaba para el rapido desarrollo del
pals. Y al venir el autom6vil, se hizo mis necesaria que
nunca la construcci6n de buenas carreteras. El gobierno 40
ha dedicado, en estos ultimos anos, mucha atencion y
enormes cantidades de dinero a su programa vial.
— Parece que hay muchas diferentes compaiiias de
ferrocarriles en el pais — dijo Pepe.
— Hay unas veinte compaiiias, de las cuales algunas son 45
de propiedad inglesa o francesa, otras son del Estado. La
mayoria de los ferrocarriles tienen la via ancha, hay otras
de via estrecha o de via mediana, Estas compaiiias han
hecho mucho para el desarrollo de los recursos naturales
del pais. 50
— No he visto coches algunos hechos en la Argentina
— dijo Rosa. — Todos parecen ser de marcas norte-
americanas. Por ejemplo, 6ste es un Buick, <j verdad ?
— Si; prefiero los autom6viles de Norte America —
respondi6 el tio. — Y la mayoria de nuestros coches son 55
de alii. Pero hay otros muchos que vienen de Alemania,
466 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Francia, Inglaterra e Italia. La Argentina es ante todo
una tierra que produce materias primas: enormes canti-
dades de trigo, maiz y otros cereales, uvas, manzanas,
60 peras, caiia de aziicar, algodon.
— Y sobre todo produce ganado — aiiadio Pepe.
— Y los millones de vacas, ovejas, caballos y cerdos
que se encuentran en las estancias y chacras pueden dar
de comer a una gran parte del mundo. Desde hace aiios
65 y anos el ganado argentine ha sido la principal fuente de
la riqueza nacional. Este ganado es de las mejores razas.
Los frigorificos de Buenos Aires, La Plata, Rosario, Bahia
Blanca y otros puertos exportan carne congelada a todos
los rincones del mundo.
70 — <; Como es que no se fabrican mds articulos en el
pals ? — pregunto Rosa.
— Por dos razones — dijo don Tomds. — Porque ha
sido m£s facil y natural cultivar el rico suelo de las
pampas, exportar sus productos al extranjero y comprar
75 all! cosas fabricadas en grandes centros industriales; tam-
bi&i porque faltan a la Argentina el carbon y el hierro,
tan necesarios en la vida industrial. Pero en estos tilti-
mos anos se han establecido aqui, sobre todo en Buenos
Aires y sus alrededores, un gran mimero de fdbricas en
80 que se hacen zapatos, sombreros, m£quinas de diferentes
clases, tejidos y muebles.
Durante esta conversaci6n los pasajeros se acercaban
a su destino. Pasaron cerca de las orillas de la gran
laguna de Chascomus, despufis por las calles de la pequena
85 ciudad, y luego por un camino que los condujo a la es-
tancia.
CON RUMBO A LA ESTANCIA 467
VOCABULARIO
algoddn m. cotton marca f. brand, make
bastar to suffice, be enough materia f . material; materia
burldn, -ona roguish, jesting prima raw material
carbon m. coal mediano, -a medium
congelado, -a chilled, frozen pampa f . pampa, great plain
cultivar to cultivate pera f . pear
chacra f . (small) farm primo, -a prime, raw, basic
destine m. destination producto m. product
exporter to export programa m. program
frigorifico m. packing house trigo m. wheat
ganado m. livestock, cattle via f . way, track, road
hierro m. iron vial pertaining to roads
invencidn f . invention zapato m. shoe
mdquina f . machine
NOTE: raza, as applied to cattle, means breed.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
al extranjero* abroad hermosisimo most beautiful
ante todo first of all poner pie en to step foot in
alld lejos there far away poner se en camino to set forth
dar de comer a to feed
NOMBRES PROPIOS
La Plata f situated 30 miles southeast of Buenos Aires, is the capital
of the Province of Buenos Aires and has a population of 180,000. It
is a flourishing, up-to-date city. It has many docks, grain elevators
and packing plants.
Bahia Blanco, 400 miles southwest of Buenos Aires, on the Atlantic
coast, has a population of 80,000 and an excellent natural harbor.
The city of Ingeniero White is the port of Bahia Blanca. Through
it pour hi exportation vast quantities of grain, meat, hides, linseed
and linseed oil, wool and other products.
Chascomus is a small city about 100 miles southwest of the capital,
in the heart of a rich farming region.
468 QUINITO EN AMERICA
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by si or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. Don Tom&s deseaba regresar a «Los Tres Ombfies»
porque hacia buen tiempo. 2. Les bastaba a los G6mez lo
que habian visto en Buenos Aires. 3. Dona Ana no queria
volver a poner pie en ciudad alguna. 4. Dona Ana parecia
dudar que cupiesen (from caber) todos ellos con sus cosas en
el coche. 5. Quinito condujo el automovil cuando iban con
rumbo a La Plata. 6. A los dos lados de la carretera se ex-
tendian grandes bosques. 7. Cuando se invento el automovil,
llego a ser necesario construir mas carreteras buenas. 8. La
red de ferrocarriles argentinos es la mas grande que existe
en ningun pais hispanoamericano. 9. La via de la mayoria
de los ferrocarriles es estrecha. 10. Todos los ferrocarriles
son propiedad del Estado. n. Don Tomis preferia coches
de marca inglesa. 1 2 . La Argentina produce ante todo grandes
cantidades de cosas fabricadas. 13. Tiene fabricas de zapatos,
tejidos y muebles. 14. El ganado argentine produce mucha
came que se exporta congelada a todas partes del mundo.
15. Esta carne se prepara en grandes frigorificos despues de
ser exportada.
II. Select from the second column words that are approxi-
mate synonyms of those in the first column:
pampa promisi6n
establecimiento muy rico
lujoso tiempo
urbano llanura
promesa alimentos
provisiones pibe
nino , negocio
rato de la ciudad
CON RUMBO A LA ESTANCIA 469
III. Use in complete sentences the following idioms:
i. ponerse en camino. 2. dar de comer a. 3. all£ lejos.
4. poner pie en. 5. ante todo. 6. al extranjero.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. i Cabemos todos? Is there room for iis all? Es ficil
que todos quepamos en este coche. It is likely that there is
room for us all in this car.
The verb caber is irregular. It means to fit into, to be room
for, be contained. It is derived from the Latin verb "capere,"
to take, contain, and in old Spanish caber meant to contain.
But today the original meaning has been changed from the
transitive to the intransitive significance indicated above.
Caber (page 577 in the Verb Appendix) has the following
irregularities:
Present indicative : quepo, cabes, cabe ; cabemos, cab6is, caben
Present subjunctive : quepa, quepas, que pa; quepamos, que-
pais, quepan
(From what is the present subjunctive derived ?)
Future indicative: cabre, cabras, cabra; cabremos, cabreis,
cabran
Post-preterite: cabria, cabrias, etc.
Preterite indicative: cupe, cupiste, cupo; cupimos, cupisteis,
cupieron
Imperfect subjunctive: cupiese, etc. ; cupiera, etc.
(From what is the imperfect subjunctive derived ?)
Polite imperative: quepa Vd., quepan Yds.
(From what is the polite imperative derived ?)
The intimate or real imperative is regular: cabe, cabed.
Naturally, the imperative forms of this verb are little used, be-
cause it is difficult to think of situations where one would want
to command another to fit into or be contained in a place.
470 QUINITO EN AMERICA
2. Review of verbs irregular in the future and post-preterite.
In five irregular verbs, the e of the infinitive ending -er is
dropped before the future endings are added:
Future Post-Preterite
caber to be contained cabre, etc. cabria, etc.
haber to have habre, etc. habria, etc.
poder to be able podre, etc. podria, etc.
querer to wish guerre, etc. querria, etc.
saber to know sabre, etc. sabria, etc.
In five other verbs whose stem ends in n or /, a d replaces
the e before the r to which the endings are added.
Future Post-Preterite
poner to put pondre, etc. pondria, etc.
salir to go out saldre, etc. saldria, etc.
tener to have tendre, etc. tendrta, etc.
valer to be worth valdre, etc. valdria, etc.
venir to come vendre, etc. vendria, etc.
In two verbs there is found a decided contraction of the
infinitive stem.
Future Post-Preterite
decir to say dire, etc. dirla, etc.
hacer to make, do hare, etc. harta, etc.
Compounds of the above verbs follow the same pattern as
the simple verb: componer, to compose; compondre, etc.,
compondrta, etc.; convenir, to be suitable, convendra, etc. con-
vendria, etc.
3. Dijo el may burldn Quinito. Said very roguish Quinito.
The definite article, unnecessary in English, is used in
Spanish before the name of a person which is preceded by a
modifying adjective: el joven Pepe, young Pepe; la encan-
tadora Rosa, charming Rosa.
CON RUMBO A LA ESTANCIA 471
4. La muchacha burlona. The rougish (or jesting) girl.
Adjectives which end in -6n, -6n, or -or form the feminine
by adding -a and dropping the written accent. (Exception:
the four irregular comparatives, mejor, peor, mayor, and
menor, which remain unchanged in the feminine, just as do
most adjectives ending in a consonant.)
What other adjectives ending in a consonant add -a to
form the feminine ? Compare ingles, inglesa.
More examples: un nino holgazan, a lazy boy; una nina
holgazana, a lazy girl; un hombre encantador, a charming
man; una mujer encantadora, a charming woman.
I. Read and translate into English:
i. Si el pequeno Juan no cabe en el coche, tendrS, que ir a
pie. 2. Si la buena dona Ana no cupiera en el coche, haria
el viaje por aeroplano. 3. Vendriamos mas tarde, si fuera
posible. 4. Querran hacer lo que puedan. 5. Querrian hacer
lo que pudieran. 6. Dijeron que saldrian para Chascomtis.
II. Change to the future the tense of the verbs in the fol-
lowing sentences:
i. Ella no cabe aqui. 2. Vds. salieron pronto. 3. <i Qu6
tiene Vd. ? 4. <; Quien vino ac& ? 5. <i Cuanto vale el coche ?
6. No lo se. 7. Lo ha puesto aqui. 8. Ella sabe nadar.
9. <i Que hizo el ? 10. <i Que ha dicho Vd. ?
III. Reshape the following sentences by making Vd. the
subject of the dependent verb, now in the infinitive:
i. Desean ddrmelo. 2. Deseaban dirmelo. 3. Han de-
seado d&rmelo. 4. Ella duda poder venir. 5. Ella dudo poder
venir. 6. Tememos decirselo. 7. Temimos decirselo. 8. Ser£
posible verlos. 9. No fue posible verlos. 10. Ella sale sin
verla. n. Ella salio sin verla. 12. Me alegro de saludarle.
13. Me alegr6 de saludarle.
CAPlTULO LVII
«LOS TRES OMBtJES*
Al bajar don Tom£s y sus parientes del coche, salieron
a recibirlos dona Margarita, esposa de don Tomas, y
sus tres hijos, Manuel, Ricardo y Carlos.
— j Muy bienvenidos ! — exclamo la senora. — \ Cu£nto
s hab6is tardado en llegar ! Hace dias que os esperamos.
— Es que est&bamos tan interesados en conocer a
Buenos Aires que no pudimos abandonarlo antes — ex-
plic6 dona Ana. — Pero me alegro tanto de estar aqul
con vosotros y lejos de las grandes ciudades.
10 Los hijos, altos y fuertes, saludaron cordialmente a su
tia y a sus primes. Eran muchachos simpdticos. Casi
en seguida ellos y Quinito y Pepe fueron buenos amigos.
Manuel tenia 17 anos, Ricardo, 19, y Carlos, 20.
— Ya comprendemos por qu6 se llama la estancia « Los
15 Tres Ombues » — dijo Quinito sefialando el grupo de
tres grandes Sxboles que se encontraban cerca de la casa.
— i Qu6 irboles m&s bellos ! Y son tan tipicos de la
pampa.
Se extendia la estancia por todos lados y por aqui y
20 por aM se veian rebanos de vacas. Exclamo dona Ana:
— Ya se ve que has prosperado, Tom&s. Poseyendo
tierras tan extensas como 6stas, uno debiera vivir bien.
— Pero no olvides — contest6 don Tom£s — que me
era necesario trabajar como un esclavo por muchos anos
25 antes de poseer una propiedad como 6sta. Ya ves que
para mi la Argentina si que ha sido la tierra de promisi6n.
472
tLOS TRES OMBtJES* 473
La casa de la estancia, con su tejado de azulejos rojos,
era ideal. Era baja, de un solo piso, pero tenia muchas
habitaciones y estaba provista de todas las comodidades
modernas. Estaban muy bien los G6mez en este domicilio 30
de sus parientes, situado en medio de la gran pampa argen-
tina.
En la estancia se encontraba un buen ntimero de edi-
ficios necesarios a los trabajos camperos, todos ellos nueva-
mente pintados. Habla tambi&i molinos de viento, bebe- 35
deros para el ganado y varios corrales. Bullfa el agua
en los bebederos.
Los cinco jovenes dieron un paseo por la propiedad y
los hijos del seiior Segre explicaron a sus primos espaiioles
muchas cosas interesantes. 4o
— Pero si 6sta es una estancia, <; qu6 es una chacra ?
— pregunto Pepe. Y Carlos le respondi6:
— Una estancia es generalmente mucho mds grande
que una chacra y est£ dedicada especialmente a la cria
de ganado. En una chacra se cultivan los cereales, las 45
frutas y las legumbres. Estancia es, creo, lo que se llama
en Espafia ganaderia, y chacra seria casi lo mismo que
quinta.
— Ya lo comprendo — contesto Pepe. — Y parece
que ten6is tambi6n aqui una chacra. 50
— SI; nuestro padre les di6 a Manuel y Ricardo ese
pedazo de tierra para ser su chacra — contest6 Carlos.
— En ella cultivan los muchachos el malz y el trigo.
Tambi&i se ocupan de la cria de gallinas, que les resulta
muy provechosa. Pero yo prefiero trabajar en la estancia. 55
— t Guiles son algunas de las f aenas de la estancia ?
— pregunt6 Quinito.
474 QUINITO EN AMERICA
— Pues, hay la doma de los potros, el rodeo y la hierra
del ganado, y la esquila de las ovejas. A mi me gusta
60 sobre todo la doma.
— Quisteramos ver como se hace la doma — dijo Pepe.
— <j Tendremos la oportunidad de verla ?
— Ya lo creo — respondi6 Carlos. — Mariana mismo
tengo que domar un potro que parece bastante bravo.
65 Ver&s entonces lo divertida que es la doma.
Cuando volvlan a la casa se les acerco un perro bianco
y negro. Al ver a los dos muchachos desconocidos para
61, gruno el perro y luego ladro fuerte. Carlos rino al
perro y le hizo callar. Pero cuando Quinito le hablo
70 con cariiio, el animal, llamado Bali, movio la cola, y
finalmente se echo en brazos del joven espanol.
Quinito le abrazo y con dificultad suprimio su deseo de
llorar. £ For qu6 ?
Porque Bali le recordo a Quinito a su querido Tito,
75 que se le habia muerto hacia algunos anos.
VOCABULARIO
bebedero m. watering trough generalmente generally
bienvenido, -a welcome (as ad- hierra f. branding (also spelled
jective) yerra)
bullir to bubble up ideal ideal
camper o, -a oj 'the fields (campos), pedazo m. piece; plot
outdoor potro m. coU
doma f . breaking, taming provechoso, -a profitable
domar to break, tame provisto, -a provided
domicilio m. domicile, home quinta f . (small) farm
esquila f. shearing rebano m. herd
faena f . task, work refiir (i) to scold; quarrel, fight
gallina L hen, chicken viento m. wind; molino de — ,
ganaderiaf. stock farm windmill
«LOS TRES OMBtJES* 475
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
manana mismo tomorrow at the provisto de provided with
latest
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <J Quienes salieron a recibir a los viajeros ? 2. <i For qu6
no habian llegado antes a la estancia? 3. <; C6mo eran los
hijos de don Tom&s y dona Margarita ? 4. <; Como se lla-
maban estos jovenes? 5. i Que dijo Quinito al seiialar el
grupo de arboles ? 6. £ Por que creyo dona Ana que su her-
mano habia prosperado? 7. <i Como habia trabajado don
Tom&s ? 8. i Como era la casa de la estancia ? 9. <j Que se
veia en la estancia ? 10. <j Para que sirve un bebedero ?
ii. <; Que es una estancia? 12. d Que es una chacra?
13. <i Como les resultaba a Manuel y Ricardo la cria de ga-
llinas ? 14. i Cuales son las faenas camperas de una estancia ?
15. <: Que hizo el perro bianco y negro al ver a los muchachos
espanoles? 16. Cuando Quinito le hablo, ^ como respondio
Bali ? 17. <J Por que sintio Quinito deseos de llorar ?
II. For each of the following words give a Spanish noun
related thereto in derivation and meaning:
ideal; bienvenido; campero; domar; ganaderia; lujoso;
hierra; tipico; beber; establecer; abundar; entusiasta;
mayor; permitir; prometer; rioplatense; perfecto; hermoso;
bello; leer; representar; temeroso; cultivar; inventar; mar-
car; producir.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
i. Build el agua. The water bubbled up. Gruftd el perro.
The dog growled. Carlos le ri/W. Charles scolded him.
Verbs whose stems end in -H or in -fi (all such are -fr
verbs) present certain peculiarities. Before the ending -id
476 QUINITO EN AMERICA
in the 3rd pers. singular of the preterite and before an ending
beginning with -le, the i of such endings is absorbed in pro-
nunciation and does not appear in the written forms: build
(not bulli6), grand (not grunid), bullendo (not bulliendo),
grunendo (not gruniendo), and so forth.
Gerund: bullendo, grunendo, rinendo
Preterite indicative: build, grand, rind; bulleron, gruneron,
rineron
Imperfect subjunctive : bullese, etc.; grunese, etc.; rinese,
etc.
bullera, etc.; grunera, etc.; rinera,
etc.
It is evident that refiir is also a vowel-changing verb of
the type of pedir.
2. Bali le recordo a Quinito a Tito, que se le habia muerto.
Bali reminded Quinito of Tito, who had died to his (Quinito' s)
sorrow.
Le in the above sentence is used as a " dative of interest,"
that is, as an indirect object denoting the person concerned
in the action that occurs. He (Quinito) is the one (le) to
whom Tito's death was of special concern.
More examples of this use of the indirect object of " dative
of interest ": se me van los dias felices, happy days are dis-
appearing for me; el pobrecito se nos volvio loco, the poor
fellow went mad on our hands.
3. Carlos hizo collar al perro. Charles made the dog keep
still. Ordend venir a su hermano. He ordered his brother
to come.
Verbs of causation (especially hacer, see page 248) and of
commanding (especially ordenar and mandar, see page 203)
permit of two constructions when the subject of the second
or dependent verb is a person. The dependent verb may be
«LOS TRES OMBtfES* 477
in (i) the infinitive, as in the preceding sentences, or (2) in
the subjunctive.
Carlos le hizo collar al perro = Carlos hizo que el perro
cellar a (callase).
Ordend venir a su hermano = Ordend que viniera (viniese)
su hermano.
I. Replace the English words with proper Spanish words:
i. El agua estaba bubbling up. 2. El perro no growled
cuando nos acercamos. 3. Pidio que yo no le should scold.
4. Ella pasa todo el dia scolding us. 5. Fue necesario que el
agua should bubble up. 6. Ordenaron al perro not to growl
at us. 7. Temieron que el soldado would quarrel con el ca-
pitin. 8. Ellos se estaban muriendo on our hands.
II. Without changing the meaning of the following sen-
tences, use the second verb in the subjunctive instead of the
infinitive :
i. Me mandan venir. 2. Me mandaron venir. 3. Har6
salir al perro. 4. Hice salir al perro. 5. Ordena hablar a los
ninos. 6. Ordeno hablar a los niiios.
III. Change to the intimate form the following polite com-
mands:
i. No me rinan Vds. 2. Rfnala Vd. a ella. 3. No les
gruna Vd. a las damas. 4. Grunanles Vds. a estos caballeros.
5. SenSleme Vd. el camino. 6. No se lo senale Vd. a ellos.
7. Aprovechen Vds. la oportunidad. 8. No la aprovechen
Vds. 9. Trdiganmelo Vds.
IV. Express the main verb in the five tenses of the indica-
tive mood and make such changes in the dependent verb as
may be necessary.
i. Pido que Vd. no me rifia. 2. Es probable que 61 haya
Uegado.
CAPlTULO LVIII
LOS GAUCHOS DE OTROS TIEMPOS
DespuSs de gozar aquella noche de una sabrosa comida,
las dos familias pasaron un largo rato hablando de la
vida campera, que era todo nueva para los G6mez, Dijo
don Tomds:
s — La cria de animates fu6 durante siglos una de las
principales ocupaciones de los rioplatenses. Los primeros
pobladores espanoles, bajo Martinez de Irala, trajeron a
las orillas del Rio de la Plata las primeras vacas y caballos.
A los pocos afios se habia aumentado enormemente el
10 niimero de estos animales, que se mantenian bien en las
extensas tierras de pasto que se encontraban en el centro
y el sur del pais. Mas tarde, gracias a los esfuerzos de la
Sociedad Rural, fueron traidas de Inglaterra las mejores
razas de vacas y ovejas, que prosperaban bien aqui.
15 En aquellos tiempos y casi hasta los dias de hoy los
que cuidaban del ganado fueron los gauchos, vaqueros
criollos que hacian bien las faenas de las estancias. Casi
todos estos gauchos ya han desaparecido, pero sigue y
seguira para siempre la bella e interesante tradici6n del
20 gaucho en la historia del pais a cuyo desarrollo contribuy6
tanto. La literatura argentina estd llena de esa tradition.
Una de las obras principales es el « Martin Fierro », poema
6pico escrito por Jos6 Maria Hernandez, cuyos bellos
versos los conoce todo argentine.
25 — Cu&itanos m£s acerca de ese famoso gaucho, te lo
pedimos — exclam6 Pepe.
478
LOS GAUCHOS DE OTROS TIEMPOS 479
— Era descendiente de espanoles. A veces era un
verdadero hombr6n. Llevaba la vida de un n6made al
aire libre. Era un hombre de poca cultura, pero de mucho
sentido comiin y de extraordinaria habilidad en el manejo 30
de caballos y vacas. Era valiente y un jinete sin igual.
Sabia domar los caballos, pelear con el facon, y enlazar
los animates con las bolas. Le gustaba tomar parte en
las carreras de caballos. Llevaba grandes espuelas de
plata y bombachas amplias. Era todo un caballero, 35
triste, melancolico, pintoresco.
En aquellos tiempos las faenas camperas — la doma, la
yerra y el rodeo — daban motivo a varias fiestas criollas,
en que era costumbre bailar a la musica de la guitarra que
todo gaucho sabia tocar perfectamente. Esa musica, que 40
es todavia hoy la base de la musica tipica argentina, era,
como su inventor, triste y melancolica. La vidalita
tradicional, por ejemplo, asi como otras composiciones de
aquellos tiempos, se debe al gaucho.
— Entonces el gaucho era mucho m£s que un sencillo 45
vaquero — observo Quinito.
— Si; era una institution, el compendio de la primera
historia rioplatense. Pero han cambiado los tiempos y
nosotros con ellos. Ahora el que hace los trabajos de
una estancia es el paisano criollo. Es un buen vaquero, 50
pero sin ninguno de los aspectos pintorescos del gaucho.
— Excepto en los dias de fiesta — anadi6 Carlos.
— Entonces le gusta al paisano vestirse al modo de los
gauchos. Los numerosos vaqueros de nuestra estancia se
parecen mucho a los antiguos gauchos cuando van atavia- 55
dos asi.
— Vimos en los teatros de Buenos Aires c6mo era
480 QUINITO EN AMERICA
aplaudido siempre el actor que, vestido de gaucho, can-
taba una vidalita — observ6 Rosa. — Pero empleaba
60 palabras y tSrminos que yo no entendia.
— Claro — respondio don Tomds. — El lenguaje de
los gauchos era muy suyo y en 61 abundaban t6rminos que
ya no se emplean, por lo menos en la vida urbana. Y eso
me recuerda que tenemos en la estancia un hombre muy
65 anciano que es gaucho. Llam&nosle, para que nos cante
una de sus canciones. Queda por ver si os gusta.
Llego el anciano con su guitarra. Despu6s de saludar
atentamente a los reunidos, se sent6 y se puso a cantar.
Quedaron todos encantados al oir, una tras otra, varias
70 canciones tradicionales de los gauchos.
Por fin termino el concierto y todos le dieron al artista
las gracias y muchas felicitaciones.
VOCABULARIO
amplio, -a ample hombrdn m. big man
atentamente attentively, politely inventor m. inventor
bola L ball (see " Notas ") manejo m. handling, management
bombachas f . pi. bombachas (see mantener to maintain, support
"Notas") melancdlico, -a gloomy, melan-
carrerai. race choly
compendia m. compendium, epit- ndmade m. nomad
ome paisano m. countryman, rustic
composiridn f. composition (in Argentina)
contribuir (uyo) to contribute pasto m. pasture, grazing land
enlazar (cS) to rope, lasso poema m. poem
tpico, -a epic rural rural
espuelat. spur sentidom. sense
facdn m. knife (large and sharp) vaquero m. cowboy
gaucho m. gaucho (see " Notas") vidalita f. vidalita (an Argentine
guitcna f. guitar gaucho song; see "Notas")
LOS GAUCHOS DE OTROS TIEMPOS 481
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
a los pocos afios in a few years par lo menos at least
los reunidos those assembled queda por ver it remains to be
muy suyo very much their own seen
ponerse a + infinitive to begin, vestido de dressed as
start + infinitive or present vestir($e) (i) to dress, dress oneself
participle
NOTAS
The "Martin Fierro," a long epic poem bearing the name of its
gaucho hero, was written by Jose Maria Hernandez (1834-1886)
and published in 1872. It enjoyed and still enjoys today tremendous
popularity, because of its perfection as the expression of the philos-
ophy, humor, sentimentalism and shrewd common sense of the
gaucho. Almost any Argentinian can repeat from memory many
of its countless stanzas. There is no one work in Argentine literature
that has ever attained such widespread and continued popular
esteem as has this gaucho poem.
A recent novel of excellent quality, having Argentine gaucho life
as its theme, is "Don Segunda Sombra," by Ricardo Giiiraldes.
It appeared in 1917 and has been translated into English by Harriet
de Onis with the title "Shadows on the Pampas," Farrar and
Rinehart, 1935.
The gaucho, who has almost completely disappeared from the
Argentine and Uruguayan pampas, was a highly interesting figure,
one who for years (in the i8th and i9th centuries) was the most
outstanding type in rural life in South America. He possessed many
of the qualities that characterized the cowboy of our western plains —
self-reliance, fairness to friend and foe, ready willingness to fight
for standards of right in which he believed, great skill in handling
horses and cattle and in performing all the tasks involved in caring
for large herds of animals, and in horse racing. Instead of the
"six-shooter," the characteristic weapon of the North American
cowboy, the gaucho carried in his faja or rolled belt, a facdn, or
long sharp-pointed knife that was a formidable instrument.
The gaucho was of white blood, though sometimes he married a
482 QUINITO EN AMERICA
woman of Indian blood. He wore bombachas (wide loose trousers
gathered at the ankles) and heavy silver spurs. His high-pommeled
saddle usually was decorated with silver. On his saddle he carried a
lazo, at the end of which were bolas or boleadoras, consisting of
three branch lines of the lasso, each of which ended in a lead, bone,
stone or wooden ball. Whirling his rope as does one of our cowboys,
the gaucho hurled the boleadoras at the animal's legs. The three
ends wrapped quickly and tightly about the legs and thus brought
the animal down. This kind of lasso was in use among the Indians
of the pampas, who used it in catching birds and small animals,
and the Spanish invaders quickly adopted it. The lazo with bolas
is still used by the Indians of Patagonia. The related verb is bolear
= arrojar (to throw) las boleadoras.
The vidalita is only one of various types of songs developed by the
gauchos. It is sung to the accompaniment of a guitar (guitarra), also
frequently called in Argentina vihuela (or vigiiela). At times in the
past the gaucho singer related in his improvised vidalitas the news
of the day or the deeds of brave men in war; later, and so even today,
this form of traditional composition had love as its theme. The
payador, or wandering gaucho troubadour, was most adept at com-
posing, while he sang, witty and clever songs which aroused the
enthusiasm of his listeners. Competitions between these payadores
resembled in many respects those held by the wandering minstrels
of Europe in the Middle Ages.
The Sociedad Rural was founded in 1866 for the purpose of pro-
moting the improvement in the breeding and care of livestock of all
kinds. It has been a powerful factor in lifting to a very high level
the strains of animals raised in the country. The offices of the
Society are in Florida Street, Buenos Aires, but its work is most
evident in the superb livestock fairs or exhibitions that are held in
its ample show grounds near the Palermo Park. These grounds
extend from the Plaza Italia along Sarmiento Avenue to Alvear
Avenue. In the stock shows held there in May and August, one
may see as many as 1,500 cattle, 600 horses and 700 sheep, all
selected for their excellent pedigrees and perfection of type. Poultry
and dogs are also shown.
LOS GAUCHOS DE OTROS TIEMPOS 483
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Complete in Spanish the following incomplete sentences:
i. Las vacas y los caballos argentinos son descendientes
de — . 2. Mas tarde fueron traidas de Inglaterra — . 3. La
Sociedad Rural Argentina ha logrado mejorar mucho — .
4. Los gauchos cuidaron de — . 5. Aunque han desaparecido
casi todos los gauchos, sigue en la Argentina — . 6. El « Mar-
tin Fierro » es — . 7. El gaucho llevaba la vida — . 8. El
gaucho sabia — . 9. El gaucho llevaba — . 10. Todo gaucho
sabia tocar — . n. La vidalita es una cancion — . 12. Hoy
el que hace las faenas camperas de una estancia es — . 13. Los
dias de fiesta les gusta a los paisanos — . 14. El lenguaje de
los gauchos esta lleno de — . 15. Un gaucho anciano fue
llamado para — . 16. Los reunidos quedaron — .
II. Make the Spanish sentences equivalent to the English:
1. He dresses in the manner i. £l se viste — .
of the gauchos.
2. She begins to sing a vida- 2. Ella — una vidalita.
lita.
3. In a few years he will be- 3. — llegard a ser hombre.
come a man.
4. We shall greet those as- 4. Saludaremos — .
sembled.
5. Their language is very 5. Su lenguaje es — .
much their own.
6. At least he sings well. 6. — canta bien.
7. The lesson remains to be 7. — terminar la Iecci6n.
finished.
III. Give approximate synonyms of the following:
melancolico; guitarra; vestir; ponerse a; chacra; do-
licilio; faena; ganaderia; camino.
meiancoiico; guiiarra; vebtir; j
micilio; faena; ganaderia; camino.
484 QUINITO EN AMERICA
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
1. Los reunidos. Those assembled, those gathered together.
Los ricos y los pobres. The rich and the poor. •£! anciano.
The old man. El pobre. The poor man.
Review. Both adjectives and past participles may be used
as nouns in Spanish, as they may be likewise used in Eng-
lish: the rich and the poor; the tall and the short. In English,
this is done usually only with adjectives in the plural. In
Spanish, just as frequently the adjective is singular.
2. Un hombrdn. A huge man. Un perrazo. An enormous
dog. Un librote. A ponderous book. Una palabrota. A bad
word.
The above nouns are augmentatives. The more common
endings are -6n (-ona), -ote (-ota), -azo (-aza).
These endings not only denote largeness, hugeness and, in
general, large size, but sometimes also denote scorn or mockery.
Such endings are added to both nouns and adjectives:
picaro, scamp; picardn, big rascal; grande, large; grandote,
very big; muchacho, boy; muchachote, big, clumsy boy.
Sometimes diminutives (see page 415) and augmentatives
are found in the same word: grandilldn, biggish; calle, street;
callejuela, small street; callejdn, alley; calle joncitto, narrow
alley; cuchara, spoon; cuchardn, large spoon, ladle; cucha-
roncillo, moderate-sized big spoon.
3. Queda per ver. It remains to be seen.
We are acquainted with por + infinitive, where por means
because of, on account of + present participle (see page 339) :
por estar cansado no fuf al concierto, because of being tired,
I did not go to the concert.
But, as shown above, por + infinitive may also express
unfinished action. More examples: el capltulo est6 por ter-
LOS GAUCHOS DE OTROS TIEMPOS 485
minor, the chapter is unfinished; el cuarto esti por limpiar,
the room is uncleaned.
Por is alsg used before an infinitive as equivalent to para,
in order to: sali con sobretodo por ir mas abrigado, I went
out in my overcoat so as to be better protected.
Por before a noun or pronoun means in exchange for, for
the sake of, or in behalf of: me lo vendio por cinco pesos, he
sold it to me for five pesos; lo hare por Vd., I shall do it for
you, for your sake, in your behalf.
Por likewise means by, along, through, over, around, and so
forth, especially when used with a verb of motion. At times
it is then combined with other prepositions (see page 352) :
andaba por la calle; volo por el aire; se encuentra por aqui;
pasaron por entre los picos; pasaron por delante de mi casa.
Para before an infinitive always indicates purpose; estudia
para aprender, he is staying to (in order to, so as to) learn.
Para before a noun or pronoun denotes destination, pur-
pose, future time, or in consideration of: este dinero es para
mi madre; canto bien para un anciano, he sings well for an
old man; sale para la capital, he is leaving for the capital;
estudia para el concierto, he is studying for the concert; estudia
para profesor, he is studying to be a teacher.
I. Use por or para, as the case demands, in the blanks of
the following sentences.
i. Viajan — ver el mundo. 2. La faena queda — hacer.
3. Lo hago — Vd. 4. Ahora salimos — la fiesta. 5. Lo compre
— poco dinero. 6. Navegan — elagua. 7. Volaron — encima
de la ciudad. 8. Pasamos — debajo del rio.
II. Form augmentatives of the following nouns. Give in
English the meanings of these augmentatives.
i. mujer. 2. cuchara. 3. perro (use -azo). 4. grande.
5. burro. 6. libro. 7. muchacho. 8. camino (use -ote).
486 QUINITO EN AMERICA
III. Say and write in Spanish:
i. The good man and the bad one. 2. The good and the
bad. 3. The loved ones and the hated ones. 4. The white
one and the black one (use feminine forms). 5. The red ones
and the blue ones. 6. The short one and the long one. 7. The
famous one and the unknown one (use feminine). 8. The
young one and the old one. 9. The famous ones and the un-
known ones (use feminine). 10. The young and the old.
IV. Using the impersonal reflexive passive construction (see
page 394), express in Spanish the following sentences:
i. The gentleman is respected. 2. The gaucho was ad-
mired. 3. The inventor will be honored. 4. The cowboy is
regarded as a good horseman. 5. My friends were never
feared.
SPANISH-AMERICAN NOVELS THAT HAVE
BEEN TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH
AZUELA, MARIANO (Mexico): The Under Dogs (Los de Abajo).
Tr. of E. Munguia. Brentano, New York, 1929.
: Marcela, a Mexican Love Story (Mala Yerba). Tr. of Anita
Brenner. Farrar and Rinehart, New York, 1932.
BLANCO FOMBONA, RUFINO (Venezuela): The Man of Gold (El
Hombre de Oro). Tr. of Isaac Goldberg. Brentano, New York,
1920.
BLEST GANA, ALBERTO (Chile): Martin Rivas. Tr. of G. W.
Umphrey. Heath, New York, 1936.
FERNANDEZ GUARDIA, RICARDO (Costa Rica) : Cuentos Ticos; Short
Stories of Costa Rica. Tr. of Gray Casement. The Burrows
Brothers Co., Cleveland, Ohio, 1925.
FRANK, WALDO (Editor): Tales from the Argentine. Tr. of Anita
Brenner. Farrar and Rinehart, New York, 1930.
GALVEZ, MANUEL (Argentina) : Nacha Regules. Tr. of Leo Ongley,
Dutton & Co., New York, 1922.
: Holy Wednesday (Mitrcoles Santo). Tr. of W. B. Wells.
Appleton-Century, New York, 1934.
GALLEGOS, ROMULO (Venezuela): Dona Bdrbara. Tr. of Robert
Malloy. Cape and Smith, New York, 1931.
GUIRALDES, RICARDO (Argentina) : Don Segundo Sombra; Shadows
on the Pampas. Tr. of Harriet de Onis. Farrar and Rinehart,
New York, 1935.
GUZMAN, MART!N Luis (Mexico): The Eagle and the Serpent (El
Aguila y la Serpiente). Tr. of Harriet de Onis. Knopf, New
York, 1930.
ISAACS, JORGE (Colombia): Maria. Harper's, New York, 1925.
LOPEZ Y FUENTES, GREGORY (Mexico): El Indio. Tr. of Anita
Brenner. Bobbs-Merrill, New York, 1937.
MARMOL, Jos£ (Argentina): Amalia. Tr. of W. J. Serrano. Trans-
lation Publishing Co., New York, 1919.
487
488 QUINITO EN AMERICA
MART!NEZ ZuviRfA, GUSTAVO A. (Hugo Wast, pseudonym. Argen-
tina).
: Black Valley (Valle Negro). Tr. of Herman and Miriam
Hespelt. Longmans Green, New York, 1928.
Peach Blossom (Flor de Durazno). Tr. of Herman and
Miriam Hespelt. Longmans Green, New York, 1929.
: The Stone Desert (El Desierto de Piedra). Tr. of Louis
Imbert and Jacques LeClercq. Longmans Green, New York,
1928.
: The Strength of Lovers. Tr. of Louis Imbert and Jacques
LeClercq. Longmans Green, New York, 1930.
PRIETO, JENARO (Chile): Partner (El Socio). Tr. of Blanca de Roig
and Guy Dowler. T. Butterworth, London, 1931.
QUIROGA, HORACIO (Uruguay) : South American Jungle Tales (Cuen-
tos de la Selva). Tr. of Arthur Livingston. Duffield, New York,
1922.
REYLES, CARLOS (Uruguay): Castanets (El Embrujo de Sevilla).
Tr. of Jacques LeClercq. Longmans Green, New York, 1929.
RIVERA, JOSE EUSTACIO (Colombia): The Vortex (La Vordgine).
Tr. of Earle K. James. Putnam, New York, 1935.
— Division of Intellectual Coopera-
tion, Pan American Union,
Washington, D. C.
CAPlTULO LIX
VIDA EN LA ESTANCIA
Al dia siguiente los cinco muchachos fueron al corral
donde Carlos iba a demostrar como se doma a un potro.
Este chico vestia las bombachas y las espuelas de un
gaucho.
Los vaqueros de la estancia tenian ensillado ya al ca- 5
ballo, que se habia puesto furioso cuando le ajustaron la
cincha, y que esperaba temeroso lo que le fuera a pasar.
Un vaquero, montado en un caballo manso, tenia sujeto
al potro por una oreja y por el bozal. Otro, tambi&i a
caballo, estaba preparado a seguir al potro cuando fete 10
echara a correr.
Carlos puso el pie en el estribo y grito:
— i Larguelo ! — y en el mismo momento subi6 a la
silla.
El animal, al sentirse libre, empez6 a arquearse y a 15
meter la cabeza entre las manos. Carlos, tranquilo sobre
el animal, le daba golpes con su litigo, entre los gritos de
los espectadores. El potro ech6 a correr de un lado a
otro, haciendo lo posible para sacudir al jinete, pero en
vano. Por fin el potro quedo tan cansado que no queria 20
resistir mis y se dej6 manejar como si fuera manso.
Baj6 Carlos entre los aplausos de todos. Habfa de-
mostrado con £xito su habilidad en domar caballos.
Luego los j6venes decidieron ir a dar un paseo a caballo
por los campos de la estancia. No sabian Quinito y 25
Pepe montar muy bien, pero, vestidos con bombachas,
489
490 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
montaron en unos caballos mansos que Manuel habia
escogido para ellos.
— Muy diferente es esto de ir montado en Coco, nuestro
30 famoso burro — exclam6 Pepe.
— Ya lo creo — contest6 Carlos. — Lelmos con gusto
el libro de vuestros viajes por Espafia y nos divirti6
muchisimo el papel de Coco el burro.
Corrieron r£pidamente los caballos por los extensos
35 campos de la pampa y Pepe y Quinito demostraron que
no eran malos jinetes. Vieron numerosos toros y vacas,
caballos y yeguas. Se detenian de vez en cuando en un
puesto de la estancia para ver si el molino de viento
funcionaba bien y si habia agua para el ganado en el
40 bebedero.
En uno de los puestos se hacia la hierra de algunos
terneros marcdndolos con un hierro caliente que dejaba
una senal distintiva. En otro se detuvieron para almorzar
con el capataz. Cuando se ponia el sol, el grupo de
45 jovenes volvi6 a casa, y aquella noche Pepe y Quinito se
acostaron temprano por estar bastante cansados despu^s
de tantas actividades al aire libre.
Pasaron los Gomez dias sumamente agradables en la
estancia de « Los Tres Ombues. » Cada dia les trajo algo
50 nuevo e interesante. Pepe y Quinito, sobre todo, estaban
encantados de este modo de vida.
Una vez hicieron las dos familias, en dos autom6viles
Buick, una excursi6n de varios dias visitando a Mar del
Plata y Necochea, dos balnearies muy concurridos en
55 la costa del At&ntico. En Mar del Plata quedaron los
G6mez maravillados al encontrarse en una de las m£s
bellas ciudades costaneras imaginables, con incontables
VIDA EN LA ESTANCIA 491
hoteles modernos y una playa insuperable. Necochea les
parecfa un sitio ideal para pasar el verano bandndose y
nadando en las aguas del oc£ano. Siguieron su camino 60
hasta Bahia Blanca, que es una ciudad de gran impor-
tancia industrial. El puerto cercano de Ingeniero White
es donde se exportan grandes cantidades de cereales y
carne congelada.
— Creo que seria interesante recorrer todas las re- 65
giones de la Reptiblica Argentina — dijo dona Ana.
— Pero no tendremos el tiempo para hacerlo, porque la
semana que viene nos serd necesario empezar nuestro
viaje de regreso a Espaiia.
Quedaron callados Pepe, Quinito y Rosa, porque ellos 70
deseaban pasar m£s tiempo en este pais de maravillas.
VOCABULARIO
ajustar to adjust funcionar to function, work
aplauso m. applause largar (gue) to turn loose, set free
arquearse to arch oneself ', hump Idtigo m. whip
up, buck manso, -a tame, tamed
bozal m. headstall, halter oreja f . (external) ear
caliente hot, warm sacudir to shake of
capataz m. foreman, overseer serial f . mark, sign, brand
cincha f . girth, cinch silla f . saddle
concur rido, -a attended, frequented sujeto, -a fastened, held
distintivo, -a distinctive ternero m. calf
ensillar to saddle yegua f . mare
NOTE: In this chapter mano means forefoot of a horse; papel,
rdle, part; puesto, station, post, one of the outlying huts on an estancia.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
hacer lo posible to do what is el sol se pone the sun is setting
possible
492 QUINITO EN AMERICA
NOMBRES PROPIOS
Mar del Plata (not to be confused with La Plata, page 467) is a
very fine beach resort city situated on the Atlantic 250 miles south
of Buenos Aires. From December to March it is the favorite resort
of wealthy portefios, the cream of Buenos Aires society. Its Rambla
or seaside walk reminds one of the boardwalks of Atlantic City or
Long Beach, California. On this Rambla face many fine shops,
restaurants and moving-picture houses. North of the Rambla are
land-locked artificial pools preferred for bathing by some to the
beach, where the incoming breakers are often turbulent and danger-
ous. On the beach are rows of tents for bathers. These are usually
rented for the season by their daily occupants.
Necochea, further south and west on the coast, is about 320 miles
from Buenos Aires. It is smaller and quieter than Mar del Plata, and
the sand is whiter and finer than at the latter resort. Near here is
being built a harbor that will some day be as important as those of
Bahia Blanca and Ingeniero White (see page 467).
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Indicate by st or no whether the following statements
are true or false. If false, give a correct statement in Spanish.
i. Cuando Carlos fue a domar un potro, llevaba los vestidos
de un joven porteno. 2. El potro se puso muy tranquilo
cuando le ajustaban la cincha. 3. Un vaquero tenia sujeto
al potro por una pierna. 4. Otro iba a seguir al potro cuando
6ste se pusiera a correr. 5. Cuando largaron al potro, Carlos
subi6 a la silla. 6. El potro metio la cabeza entre las manos
y se arqueo. 7. Carlos le ofreci6 al animal mucho azficar.
8. El caballo hizo lo posible para sacudir al jinete. 9. Por
fin logro sacudirle. 10. El potro se dej6 manejar como si
fuera un caballo manso. n. Quinito y Pepe se pusieron
bombachas y espuelas. 12. Montaron a unos caballos bravos.
13. Era tan ficil montar asi como dar un paseo montado en
VIDA EN LA ESTANCIA 493
Coco el burro. 14. Visitaron los muchachos varios puestos
de la hacienda. 15. Querian ver si habia ganado cerca de
estos puestos.
II. What words do not belong in the lines in which they
are found ?
1. ropa, lazo, vestido, bombachas, zapatos, calcetines
2. silla, bozal, cincha, espuela, oreja
3. ternero, toro, yegua, Idtigo, potro, cerdo, oveja
4. oreja, boca, muebles, brazo, pierna, cabeza
5. gallina, condor, pSjaro, dguila, molino
6. criollo, grande, mediano, pequeiio, extenso, estrecho
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
The Feminine of Certain Nouns Denoting
Persons and Animals
i. Toro, bull; vaca, cow. Caballo, horse; yegua, mare.
The feminine corresponding to masculine nouns denoting
persons and animals have often, as they do in English, forms
quite different from the masculine.
PERSONS
Many simply change the masculine ending -o to -a: m'no,
boy, nifia, girl; abuelo, grandfather, abuela, grandmother.
Or they add -a to the masculine: profesor, man teacher,
profesora, woman teacher; conductor, man driver, conductora,
woman driver.
Or both genders have the same form, especially when the
masculine ends in -a or -e (but not in -ante or -ente): el
artista, man artist, la artista, woman artist; el guia, la guia,
guide; el patriota, la patriota, patriot; el inter prete, la in-
terprete, interpreter; el joven, young man, la joven, young
woman; el juez, la juez, judge; el testigo, la testigo, witness.
494 QUINITO EN AMERICA
Or they change -e to -a when the ending is -ante or -ente:
el presidente, the man president, la presidenta, the woman
president or the president's wife; el r eg ente, the man regent,
la regente, the woman regent, la regenta, the regent's wife; el
gig ante, the man giant, la giganta, the giantess; el infante,
the royal prince, la infanta, the royal princess; el pariente,
man relative, la parienta, woman relative.
Or the feminine differs in having some notably irregular
ending or in being an entirely different word: actor, actor,
actriz, actress; emperador, emperor, emperatriz, empress;
principe, prince, princesa, princess; hombre, mujer; padre,
madre; el poeta, poet, la poetisa, poetess; el rey, king, la
reina, queen; el yerno, son-in-law, la nuera, daughter-in-law.
Var6n, male, may be used after nouns to make clear that
the gender is masculine: los ninos varones, the boys; los
estudiantes varones, the male students.
ANIMALS
Nouns denoting animals follow much the same patterns.
By changing -o to -a, -e to -a, or by adding -a: el ternero,
la ternera, calf; el mulo, la mula, mule; el elefante, la ele-
fanta, elephant; el Ie6n, lion, la leona, lioness.
Or by using an entirely different word: toro, vaca; caballo,
yegua; el carnero, ram, la oveja, ewe; el gallo, rooster, la
gallina, hen.
Then there are "epicene" nouns, that is, those that have
only one gender to indicate animals of either sex: la liebre,
hare; el tigre, tiger; elpez,fish; el ratdn, mouse; larata,rat.
To distinguish sex of animals designated by epicene nouns,
macho, male, and hembra, female, are used after the noun:
la liebre macho, the male rabbit; el tigre hembra, the tigress;
el pez hembra, the female fish; el ratdn hembra, the female
mouse; la rata macho, the male rat.
VIDA EN LA ESTANCIA 495
The feminine form of names of animals is sometimes pre-
ferred, especially in the plural, in indicating a species: las
ovejas, sheep; las gallinas, chickens, poultry; las mulas, mules.
2. Yo me compro un par de alas y vuelo por el aire. 7
shall buy me a pair of wings and fly through the air. (Chapter
LVI and page 465.)
In this sentence we see how the present tense of a verb
(compro, vuelo) may be used in Spanish where in English
the future tense is employed. This usage of present for future
is frequent in conversation.
I. Give the feminine form, with the definite article, of the
following nouns:
el jugador; el interprete; el sobrino; el joven; el presi-
dente; el emperador; el pariente; el padre; el principe; el
gallo; el caballo; el ternero; el pez; el raton.
II. Give the masculine form, with the definite article, of
the following nouns:
la actriz; la reina; la profesora; la mujer; la artista; la
regenta; la giganta; la poetisa; laliebre; la rata; la nuera.
III. Give in Spanish, with the definite article, the whole
class or species indicated by the following English nouns:
sheep; children; parents; poultry; mules; horses; cattle;
teachers; judges; relatives; sovereigns.
IV. Replace the infinitives found in the following sentences
with the proper form of the verb.
i. Siente que Vd. no estar aqui. 2. Sintio que Vd. no estar
aqul. 3. Serd precise que el domar al potro. 4. Me pareda
bueno que ella nos reconocer. 5. No creo que lo haber hecho.
6. Por rico que 61 sery no lo comprard. 7. Antes de que Vd.
empezar el viaje de regreso, venga a verme.
CAPlTULO LX
TERMINA LA ODISEA AMERICANA
DE LOS GOMEZ
En la estancia de « Los Tres Ombues » se hacian los
preparatives para la partida de los G6mez. Todos menos
dona Ana y Rosa, estaban bastante tristes pensando en
la separation de las dos familias que iba a tener lugar.
5 Una noche, estando todos reunidos en la sala, dijo
dona Margarita a sus parientes:
— Ya que vais a abandonarnos, yo quisiera saber cu&les
son las principales impresiones que hab6is sacado de
vuestro largo viaje por las Americas. <; Cudles son las
10 cosas que vais a recordar m£s tiempo ?
— Por mi parte — respondio dona Ana, — estoy to-
davia un poco aturdida por lo mucho que he visto y hecho.
Pero recordarS para siempre ciertas cosas: los rascacielos
gigantes de Nueva York, las enormes multitudes de gente
15 y las bellas tiendas de aquella ciudad y de Buenos Aires,
el estupendo can6n del Colorado, los aspectos espanoles
de algunas poblaciones de la Florida y del sur de Cali-
fornia, el canal de Panami, la Ciudad de los Reyes y
Cuzco en el Perti, y el vuelo de Santiago a Mendoza, en
20 que me desmay6 y cal enferma.
— j Pobre mam& ! — exclam6 Rosa. — Es una gran
l&stima que no pudieras gozar de esa soberbia vista que
cogimos del monte Aconcagua . . . Para ml, las pird-
mides de San Juan de Teotihuacdn de M6jico y nuestro
496
TERMINA LA ODISEA AMERICANA 497
paselto por los canales de Xochimilco, la bella ciudad de 25
San Jos6 de Costa Rica, las maravillas de Cuzco, La Paz
en su cuenca rodeada de picos nevados, los cines portenos
y las bien vestidas y muy elegantes damas de Buenos
Aires — £stas son las cosas que voy a recordar con sumo
placer. 30
— Pues, creo que lo que a mi me ha gustado mds —
dijo Quinito — fu6 poder visitar en poco tiempo tantos
sitios que hablan descubierto y poblado en el Nuevo
Mundo los primeros exploradores espaiioles y ver las
huellas que habian dejado en Norte, Centro y Sud 35
America. Me llenan de admiraci6n y de orgullo las
hazanas de mis antecesores. La historia y la geografla
que he aprendido en estos viajes me ser&n siempre muy
utiles. Creo que el mayor placer que he experimentado
me lo han dado estos ultimos dias pasados en esta estancia 40
al lado de mis tios y mis primos. Casi persuadido estoy
de que yo deba quedarme en la Argentina y hacenne
estanciero como mi tio.
— i Qu6date, hombre, qu6date aqui entonces ! — grit6
don Tomds. — Te ayudar6 todo lo posible para que te 45
hagas estanciero.
— No, Tomds — exclam6 dona Ana un poco temerosa.
— Quinito ha de volver a Espaiia a estudiar para in-
geniero, como lo tenemos proyectado desde hace afios.
Y Pepe tambi&i debe volver con Rosa y conmigo, porque 50
su abuelo le va a establecer en una buena casa de nego-
cios de Madrid. No quiero que mis hijos imiten a mis
tres hermanos separindose de mi y viviendo muy lejos
en Amfirica. No, seiior. Han de vivir cerca de mi en
estos tiltimos afios de mi vida. ss
498 QUINITO EN AMERICA
— Claro, claro — respondi6 su hermano. — Tienes
razon. Eso es lo que deben hacer tus hijos. Pero Pepe,
dinos lo que vas a recordar de tus viajes.
— Pues, por mi parte — dijo el hijo menor de dona
60 Ana, — no olvidare nunca el placer que he experimentado
en conocer a mis queridos tios, don Ramon, don Felipe
y don Tom£s, y a mis tias y mis primes. Ademds que-
dar6 siempre muy impresionado por la maravillosa riqueza
de los paises del Nuevo Mundo. Me parece que las
65 Americas anglosajona e hispana seran, si no lo son ya,
las naciones de mayor importancia en el mundo, porque
en ellas hay enormes recursos naturales, paz internacional
y libertad para todos.
— Muy bien dicho — observo don Tomas. — Creo
70 que tienes mucha razon.
Tres dias mas tarde los Segre condujeron a Buenos
Aires a sus parientes y los acompanaron a bordo del
gran vapor trasatlantico en que iban a cruzar el oceano.
Entre lagrimas y risas los Gomez se despidieron de sus
75 queridos parientes y el barco salio rio abajo en direccion
al mar.
Y asi es, queridos lectores, que nosotros tambien tene-
mos que despedirnos de dona Ana, de Rosa, de Quinito
y de Pepe, deseandoles « j Buen viaje ! » y vida feliz al
80 regresar a su casa en Astorga, provincia de Leon, Espana.
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
mis tiempo longer, longest todo lo posible as much as pos-
por mi parte for my part sible
tener lugar to take place ya que since
TERMINA LA ODISEA AMERICANA 499
VOCABULARIO
aturdido, -a bewildered, confused orgullo m. pride
estanciero m. cattleman, stock- placer m. pleasure
man, rancher proyectar to plan
gigante gigantic risa f . laughter
impresidn f . impression separacidn f . separation
ingeniero m. engineer separar(se) to separate
Idgrima f . tear
EJERCICIOS DE LECTURA
I. Answer in Spanish the following questions:
i. <i For que estaban tristes todos menos Rosa y dona Ana ?
2. <J For que no estaban tristes estas damas ? 3. £ Que queria
saber dona Margarita ? 4. £ For que estaba aturdida to-
davia dona Ana ? 5 . <i Que iba a recordar la senora de Gomez ?
6. <; For que no vio la senora el monte Aconcagua ? 7. <j Qu6
cosas habian impresionado mas a Rosa ? 8. <J De quienes iba
Quinito a acordarse ? 9. <i Cual fue el mayor placer que
Quinito habia experimentado ? 10. <J De que estaba casi per-
suadido Quinito? n. £ Que prometio hacer don Tom£s si
Quinito se quedaba en la Argentina? 12. ^ Que queria dona
Ana que sus hijos hicieran? 13. ^ Para que iba a estudiar
Quinito ? 14. <J Que iba a hacer el padre de dona Ana para
Pepe ? 15. £ Que queria ella que Pepe y Quinito no hiciesen ?
1 6. i Que placer no olvidaria Pepe nunca? 17. £ Que dijo
Pepe de las Americas anglosajona e hispana? 18. En el
vapor, £ como se despidieron las dos f amilias una de otra ?
19. i Que le deseamos nosotros a la familia Gomez ?
II. From the second column select words which are ap-
proximate antonyms of those in the first column:
risa guerra
reir estrecho
separarse mayor
500 QUINITO EN AMERICA
separation coger
llegar a lagrimas
menor alegre
paz frio
despedirse de reunirse
lector largo
caliente dar la bienvenida a
largar llorar
manso campero
sacudir escritor
amplio abandonar
melanc61ico mejor
peor bravo
corto reunion
urbano poner
III. Use in complete Spanish sentences:
yaque; pormiparte; m£s tiempo; todo lo posible; tener
lugar; hacer lo posible; ponerse el sol.
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
REVIEW OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
The subjunctive mood is necessary:
A. In main clauses:
1. In polite imperatives, affirmative or negative, singular
or plural: demelo Vd., no me lo de Vd.
2. In intimate imperatives, negative, singular or plural: no
me lo des tu; no me lo deis vosotros.
3. In exhortations, affirmative or negative: demoselo; no
se lo demos.
4. In optative or desiderative sentences, affirmative or
negative:
TERMINA LA ODISEA AMERICANA 501
que Juan me lo de or demelo Juan, let John give it to me
que Juan no me lo de, let John not give it to me
j ojal& que Juan me lo de! I hope John will give it to me!
I ojala que Juan me lo dierat would that John would give it to
me!
5. In sentences of indifferent alternative: venga lo que
venga, come what may. (The first verb may be considered
an optative and the second as a dependent verb in an ad-
jective clause having an indefinite antecedent.)
6. In the apodosis or conclusion of a conditional sentence
contrary to fact or "future less vivid/' when it may be re-
placed by the post-preterite: si el tuviese el tiempo, viniera,
if he had time, he would come; si viniese el, yo viniera tam-
bien, if he came, I would come too.
7. Before a main clause introduced by tal vez, perhaps: tal
vez no vengan, perhaps they are not coming.
B. In dependent or subordinate noun clauses, used as ob-
ject:
1. When the clause is dependent upon a verb of volition
(desire, wish, request, command, persuasion, permission, pro-
hibition, and the like) : deseo que Vd. venga, I wish you to
come; yo querla que Vd. viniera, I wanted you to come; dlgale
Vd. que venga, tell him to come; mandaron que yo viniese,
they ordered me to come; pidid que yo viniera, he asked me to
come.
2. When the clause is dependent upon verbs of emotion,
doubt or denial : temo que no venga, I fear he won't come;
dude que viniese, I doubted he would come; niego que ella haya
venido, I deny that she has come.
3. When the clause is dependent upon impersonal verbs
or expressions denoting opinion: es preciso que venga, it is
necessary for him to come; conventa que viniera, it was fitting
that he should come.
502 QUINITO EN AMERICA
4. When the clause is dependent upon verbs of believing,
knowing and saying, used negatively or interrogatively, and
when uncertainty then exists as to the action expressed by
the dependent verb: no se que venga, I don't know that he
is coming; i cree Vd. que venga ? do you think he will come ?
no dije que hubiera venido, I didn't say that he had come.
5. When the clause is dependent upon verbs of causation:
hare que el venga, I will have (make) him come.
C. In dependent noun clauses used as subject and standing
first in the sentence (the clause is usually preceded by el):
el que Vd. no venga me parece extraordinario, (the fact) that
you are not coming seems unusual to me.
D. In dependent adjective clauses, the antecedent being
indefinite or non-existent: quiero una criada que venga todos
los dfas, I want a maid who comes (may come, will come) every
day; cualquier criada que venga debe trabajar mucho, any
servant girl who comes ought to work hard; no hay criada alguna
que venga todos los dias, there is no servant who comes every
day; no hay nada que les guste, there is nothing which they
like; quienquiera que venga, invitele a entrar, whoever comes,
ask him in; no habia quien lo creyera, there was no one who
believed it.
E. In dependent adjective clauses containing the construc-
tion por + adjective + que: por rico que sea no lo comprara,
no matter how rich he may be he will not buy it.
F. In dependent adverbial clauses of time, purpose, con-
cession, proviso, manner and supposition, when the action of
the dependent verb is regarded as future, uncertain, contin-
gent, unfinished, unfulfilled or doubtful. The more common
conjunctions used to introduce such clauses are : antes (de) que,
before, despues que, after, tan pronto como, as soon as, luego
que, as soon as, hasta que, until, para que, in order that, a fin
TERMINA LA ODISEA AMERICANA 503
de que, in order that, aunque, although, aun cuando, even if,
con tal que or siempre que, provided that, de modo que or
de manera que, in stick a way that; sin que, without; en caso
que, in case that, a menos que or a no ser que, unless; and
others.
Partire antes que el venga. I shall leave before he comes.
Partid temprano para que yo no le viera. He left early so that
I wouldn't see him. Lo hara de manera que no me guste. He
will do it in such a way that I shall not like it.
G. In conditional sentences contrary to fact or "future less
vivid," the imperfect subjunctive, s-form or r-form, is used in
the hypothesis: si el tuviera (tuviese) el tiempo, vendria, if he
had time, he would come. This is true when present time is
denoted. When past time is denoted the pluperfect subjunc-
tive (either form) is used in the hypothesis: si hubiese (hu-
bierd) tenido el tiempo, habria venido, if he had had time, he
would have come.
SEQUENCE OF TENSES
1. If the main verb is in the present, future or present per-
fect, and the time of the dependent verb is coincident with or
subsequent to that of the main verb, then the dependent
verb is in the present subjunctive: temo (temere, he temido)
que no venga, I fear (shall fear, have feared) that he is not
coming, will not come.
2. But if the time of the dependent verb is prior to that of
the main verb, then the present perfect subjunctive is used:
temo (temer&, he temido) que no haya venido, I fear (shall
fear, have feared) that he has not come.
3. If the main verb is in the imperfect, preterite or post-
preterite, and the time of the dependent verb is coincident
with or subsequent to that of the main verb, then the de-
pendent verb is in the imperfect subjunctive: temia (temt,
504 QUINITO EN AMfiRICA
temeria) que no viniese, I feared (would fear) that he was not
coming, would not come.
4. But if the time of the dependent verb is prior to that
of the main verb, then the pluperfect subjunctive is used:
temia (temi, temeria) que no hubiera venido, I feared (would
fear) that he had not come.
5. If the thought to be expressed so demands, the present,
future or present perfect may be followed by any tense that
is necessary: e$ lastima que no pudieras gozar de eso, it is
a pity that you could not enjoy that.
In all discussion of the subjunctive in dependent clauses
it should be remembered that the subjunctive is used in such
clauses only if the subject is different from that of the main
verb, or when the main verb is impersonal and the second
verb has a subject. Otherwise, the dependent verb is in the
infinitive.
Deseo venir. I wish to come. Deseo que Vd. venga. I wish
you to come. Conviene salir. It is fitting to leave. Conviene
que Vd. saiga. It is fitting for you to leave.
I. Change the tense of the main verb to either the imper-
fect, preterite or post-preterite and then make such other
changes as are necessary:
i. Se lo doy a Vd. para que lo vea. 2. Hacen el trabajo
antes que lleguemos. 3. No creemos que el haya llegado.
4. No veo ningun libro que est6 escrito en espanol. 5. Quien-
quiera que Vd. sea, no le conozco. 6. No consiento en eso
aunque Vd. me lo pida. 7. Por malo que sea este nino, es
mi hermano. 8. Dudan que Vds. lo sepan. 9. Dudan que
Vds. lo hayan sabido. 10. Pedir6 que ellos me lo envien.
II. Change the following negative commands and exhorta-
tions to the affirmative:
TERMINA LA ODISEA AMERICANA 505
i. No lo niegue Vd. 2. No lo niegues tu. 3. Nolonieguen
Yds. 4. No lo negueis vosotros. 5. No se lo escriban Vds.
6. No se lo escribais vosotros. 7. No lo coja Vd. 8. No lo
cojais vosotros. 9. No nos sentemos.
III. Replace with pronouns every noun in the following
sentences:
i. Yo dare la flor a la dama. 2. Deseo que Vd. ponga el
sombrero en el coche. 3. No sigue escribiendo la carta a la
madre. 4. Demos los libros a los lectores. 5. No me envien
Vds. el dinero. 6. Pidieron la comida a la cocinera. 7. Com-
pre los zapatos al vendedor. 8. Me arreglaron la cama.
IV. Say and write in Spanish:
i. Here they (people) study much. 2. In Argentina one
dines well. 3. In Cuba there is much dancing. 4. People
travel much in America. 5. There is much swimming in
these waters.
V. Express in Spanish the following sentences, using the
reflexive for the passive (the subjects denote things) :
i. The river was discovered. 2. The city was founded.
3. The car will be driven. 4. The concert is given. 5. The
building has been built. 6. The letter was read.
VI. Express in Spanish the following sentences, using the
impersonal reflexive passive (the subjects here denote persons) :
i. The lady is respected. 2. The heroes were honored.
3. The emperor was loved. 4. The captain will be hated.
5. The king has been revered. 6. The queen was received.
VII. (a) Reshape the sentences of V indicating in each
case an agent of the action, preceded by por.
(b) Reshape the sentences of VI indicating in each case
an agent of the action, preceded by de or por.
DECIMA LECCI6N DE REPASO
VOCABULARIO
I. Give the Spanish for the following English words:
Greek
to constitute
common
the dub
the reader
the hospital
Hungarian
international
to mention
the news
the opportunity
the representa-
Swedish
Russian
the magazine
tive
the cotton
to suffice
the livestock
the coal
the product
the machine
the invention
to cultivate
the program
the wheat
the pear
the iron
generally
welcome
the breed
the shoe
the piece
the domicile
the hen
to break, train
the wind
ideal
the colt
the stock farm
ample
the spur
the windmill
to scold
to maintain
gloomy
to contribute
the race
rural
to adjust
the guitar
the composition
the cowboy
hot
the poem
the gaucho
function
the saddle
the applause
the girth
the forefoot
to saddle
the whip
frequented
the pleasure
the tear
to shake off
the ear
to separate
the laughter
gigantic
the calf
II. Give the English for the Spanish words:
la actitud
criollo
temeroso
el destino
exportar
vial
aprovechar
la promision
el turco
congelado
el f rigorifico
primo (adjective)
506
el inmigrante
predominar
uruguayo
la chacra
la marca
la pampa
el judio
pensativo
burlon
la materia
mediano
la via
LECClON DE REPASO
507
bullir
la esquila
el bebedero
campero
la f aena
la quinta
la doma
la hierra
provisto
las bombachas
la bola
el compendio
enlazar
6pico
el facon
el inventor
el manejo
el nomade
el hombr6n
el pasto
el capataz
el bozal
el paisano
arquearse
largar
la senal
distintivo
manso
el puesto
el papel
sujeto
la yegua
el orgullo
el ingeniero
aturdido
la separation
MODISMOS Y EXPRESIONES
I. Replace the English words with suitable Spanish words:
i. No me quedo aqui longer. 2. Ellos hardn as much as
possible. 3. For my part yo no lo creo. 4. Since Vd. est£
aqui lo haremos. 5. La batalla took place alii. 6. El sol set
a las siete. 7. Yo hare what is possible para conseguirlo.
8. Those assembled began to aplaudir. 9. At least prometieron
venir. 10. It remains to be seen quien vendrd. u. He dressed
de prisa. 12. Estaban dressed as gauchos. 13. In a few
years volvio a su patria. 14. Este lenguaje de los gauchos
es very much their own.
II. Make the English sentences equivalent to the Spanish:
1. Iremos all£ manana mis- i. We shall go there — .
mo.
2. Los corrales estaban pro- 2. The corrals were — .
visto de bebederos.
3. El proximo ano irdn al ex- 3. Next year they will go — .
tranjero.
4. Nunca voy a poner pie en 4. I am never going to — .
esa casa.
5. Dieron de comer a los 5. They — the oxen,
bueyes.
508 QUINITO EN AMERICA
6. Alia lejos se vieron las 6. — the mountains were
montafias. seen.
7. Se pondr&n en camino 7. They — tomorrow,
manana.
8. Ante todo hay que sal- 8. — it is necessary to save
varlos. them.
9. Este valle es hermosisimo. 9. This valley is — .
10. No es facil ganarse la vida 10. It isn't easy — .
aqui.
11. Ni una oveja se ve en el n. — a sheep was seen in the
corral. corral.
12. Este pais es una verda- 12. This country is a real — .
dera tierra de promision.
13. £l canta tan bien como el 13. He sings as well — .
que mas.
14. Esta tierra es riquisima. 14. This land is — .
EJERCICIOS DE GRAMATICA
I. Translate into English the following sentences in which
the dependent clause is elliptical.
i. Creyeron que no. 2. Digo que si. 3. Parecia que no.
4. Contestan que si. 5. Respondio que no.
II. Expand into fully formed clauses the elliptical clauses
of I.
III. Replace the English adverbs with suitable Spanish
adjectives:
i. Siempre viajabamos muy comfortably. 2. El potro corrio
rapidly por la pampa. 3. Los inmigrantes vivieron alii quietly
and joyfully. 4. Ellos entraron muy sadly.
IV. Say and write in Spanish:
i. A bad child. 2. The child is bad. 3. The child is ill.
4. The good fellow. 5. The good man (literal). 6. Reliable
LECClON DE REPASO 509
news. 7. Certain news. 8. The new palace (newly built).
9. A new palace (another one). 10. A great man. n. A big
man (say in two ways). 12. A big dog (say in two ways).
13. Little John. 14. Beautiful Anna.
V. Give the 3rd person singular of the future of the follow-
ing verbs:
caber, salir, hacer, haber, poner, querer, decir, saber, venir,
poder, valer, tener.
VI. Give the ist person singular of the post-preterite of
the verbs in V.
VII. Say and write in Spanish:
i. The water bubbled up. 2. The dog growled. 3. The
dogs growled. 4. The waters bubbled up. 5. Bubbling up.
VIII. Give five illustrations of the use of por; five of the
use of para.
IX. Give the feminine of the following nouns:
el actor; el presidente; el hombre; el primo; el joven;
el poeta; el elefante; el Icon; el caballo; el gallo; el tigre;
el raton.
X. Give the masculine of the following nouns:
lamadre; lajuez; la rata; la reina; lanuera; laprincesa;
la infanta; la giganta; la oveja; la vaca; la liebre; la pro-
fesora.
XI. Outline, giving illustrations, the use of the subjunctive
in (a) main clauses; (b) object noun clauses, (c) subject noun
clauses, (d) adjective clauses, (e) adverbial clauses, (f) con-
ditional sentences contrary to fact.
XII. Give, with illustrations, the rules that govern the se-
quences of tenses in sentences where the subjunctive mood
is used in dependent clauses.
SURVEY OF GRAMMAR*
A. PUNCTUATION
B. PRONUNCIATION
C. WORD ORDER
D. SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
I. VERBS
II. SUBSTANTIVES
III. ADJECTIVES
IV. ADVERBS
V. PREPOSITIONS
E. IDIOMATIC USAGE
F. LIST OF GIVEN NAMES
G. CLASSROOM EXPRESSIONS
VERB APPENDIX
* See the Index for all the grammar topics treated in this book.
A. PUNCTUATION
1. Questions begin with an inverted question mark (&) and close
with a question mark (?):
i Quien es Quinito ? Who is Quinito ?
2. Exclamations begin with an inverted exclamation point (;) and
close with an exclamation point (1):
I Quinito esta aqui ! Quinito is here!
3. Questions or exclamations may appear within the sentence:
Pero, 4 donde esta Quinito ? Bui, where is Quinito ?
Pero, hijo mio, ; que perezoso eres I But, my boy, how lazy you are!
4. A dash ( — ) is generally used to introduce the words of a speaker:
(Quinito and Pepe are talking.)
— Pepe, tu eres muy malo. "Pepe, you are very bad."
5. One accent mark (') is used:
A. to indicate syllabic stress:
Iecci6n lesson
B. to distinguish words, otherwise alike in spelling:
si if si yes
6. The tilde (~) is written over the letter n, to form the character
efie, which is a separate letter of the Spanish alphabet:
nifia girl cabafia cabin
7. Small letters are used (except, naturally, at the beginning of a
sentence) in writing:
A. the pronoun yo, 7:
Quinito y yo podemos hacerlo. Quinito and I can do U.
513
514 PUNCTUATION
B. names of the days of the week and the months of the year:
El primer lunes del mes de enero
The first Monday of the month of January
C. proper adjectives, even when used as nouns:
Quinito es espafiol. Quinito is a Spaniard.
8. The commonest abbreviations are the following:
D. don Sra. sefiora
Da. dona Srta. senorita
Sr. seftor Vd., Ud., V., U. usted
Vds., Uds., W., UU. ustedes
B. PRONUNCIATION
The Alphabet
The Spanish alphabet consists of the same letters that are used
in English and of four additional characters — ch, fi, 11 and rr.
Read the following and pronounce after your teacher the Spanish
words. Then pronounce them by yourself.
Letra Nombre Sonido
(letter) (name) (sound)
a a Closely resembles a of father: malo (barf), cama (bed).
b be B and v are pronounced alike, and with the lips only.
At the beginning of a word or breath group b or v
resembles English b in sound; elsewhere the lips touch
very lightly: va (goes), hablar (to speak), bueno
(good).
c ce (i) Before a, o, u or consonant is like k: cara (face),
como (as), clase (class).
(2) Before e or i is like th of thin: cinco (five), veces
(times).
ch che Like ch of church: mucho (much), muchacho (boy).
d de Resembles th in that. Tongue touches the back of the
upper front teeth. When between vowels or final in
a word it is rather slighted in pronunciation: de (of),
donde (where), nada (nothing), sed (thirst).
e e Resembles i of caft; but do not prolong it into a glide
into two sounds. At times is more like e of set: es
(is), el (the), pero (but), entra (enters).
f efe Like English /: fin (end), diferente (different). This
sound is never spelled ph.
g ge (i) Like g of go when before a, o, u or consonant: largo
(long), gusto (pleasure), grande (large). Gu before
e or i has this same sound: pagu£ (/ paid), seguimos
(we follow).
(2) Like a strongly pronounced or aspirated h, when
before e or i: gente (people), gigante (giant).
h hache Nearly always silent: hablo (7 speak), hace (does).
i i Like i of machine: si (if), libro (book).
515
516 PRONUNCIATION
Letra Nombre Sonldo
(letter) (name) (sound)
j jota Like the second sound of g: jardin (garden), julio
(July), ojo (eye).
k ka Like English k. Seldom occurs in Spanish: kilo
(kilogram).
I ele Resembles closely the English /, but with tongue pressed
against back of upper front teeth: lee (reads) , libro
(book), alto (tall).
II elle Resembles tti of million: calle (street), llamo (7 call).
m erne Like English m: malo (bad), mucho (much).
n ene Resembles English n, but with tongue touching above
the back of the upper front teeth: ni (nor), uno (one).
fi ene Resembles ni of union: nino (child), afio (year).
o o Resembles o of obey. At times is like o of order: son
(are), con (wi//0, dos (/w0). Do not prolong it into
a glide into two sounds.
p pe Like English p: pero (£w/), papel (paper).
q cu Occurs only before u to form a k sound before e or i :
que (which), quiso (fo wanted).
T ere Is distinctly trilled on the tip of the tongue: pero (but),
ladra (barks), came (meat). At the beginning of a
word it is like Spanish rr.
rr erre Is trilled much more than r: perro (dog), corre (he runs).
s ese (i) Usually like s of sister: Rosa (Rose), son (are),
clase (class). A hissing sound.
(2) Is like ^ in those, when before b, v, d, g, 1, m, n:
mismo (same), desde (from). A buzzing sound.
t te Resembles English /, but the tongue touches the back
of the lower front teeth as well as the back of the
upper teeth: tengo (7 have), tanto (so much).
u u Like oo of moon, never like u of use: mucho (much),
juntos (together).
v uve See the letter b.
w doble uve Never occurs in a pure Spanish word. Sometimes
pronounced like Spanish v.
x equis (i) Usually like ks when between vowels: ezisto (7
exist), ezamen (examination).
(2) Like hissing s when before a consonant: ezpreso
(7 express), ezplico (7 explain).
APPENDIX 517
Letra Nombre Sonido
(letter) (name) (sound)
y igriega (i) Like Spanish i when standing alone or after a
vowel: y (and), muy (very), hay (there is).
(2) Otherwise like y of yes: ya (already), cuyo (whose).
z zeta Like the second sound of Spanish c: hizo (he did), luz
(light), diez (ten).
Note: In Spanish America and in parts of Spain z, or c before e or i,
is pronounced like a hissing s; and 11 is usually pronounced like y (2).
SILENT LETTERS
Except h, and u in the combinations gue, gui, que and qui, every
letter in Spanish is sounded or pronounced. (In giie and giii the ii is
pronounced like English w.)
COMBINATIONS OF LETTERS
The only vowels that are "doubled" in Spanish are a, e and o
(Aardn, Aaron; leer, to read; roo, I gnaw). These are called strong
vowels. They are pronounced with the jaws well apart. Any two
of them occurring in immediate succession must be placed in separate
syllables. The weak vowels are i and u. They are pronounced with
the jaws rather close together.
The only consonants that are ever (and rarely) "doubled" are
c and n, as in Iecci6n, lesson, and innoble, ignoble. But they, like
"doubled" vowels, stand in separate syllables.
Combinations of two vowels in the same syllable consist of a strong
vowel (a, e, o) plus a weak vowel (i, u or y at the end of a word), or
a weak vowel plus a strong vowel, or two weak vowels. Such com-
binations are called diphthongs. Read the following and pronounce
after your teacher the Spanish words. Then pronounce them by
yourself.
Diptonffo Sonido
(diphthong) (sound)
ai or final ay Resembles y of rye: aire (air), hay (there is), baila
(dances).
ei or final ey Resembles ey of they: rey (king), seis (six), veintc
(twenty).
dor final oy Resembles oy of boy: oigo (/ hear), doy (7 give), soy
(7 am).
518 PRONUNCIATION
Diptongo Sonido
(diphthong) (sound)
au Resembles ow of caw: aunque (although), autom6vil
(automobile).
eu Spanish e + u: Europa (Europe), reuxna (rheumatism).
ou (rare) Spanish o + u: bou (fishing), Couto (a proper name).
ua Resembles English wa in swap: cuanto (how much),
cual (which), guardo (/ guard).
ue Resembles English we in wet: puerta (door), cuento (/
count). The ue of gue or que is not a diphthong.
uo Resembles English wo in woe: cuota (fee).
ia Resembles English ya of yard: hacia (toward), rabia
(rages).
ie Resembles English ye of yearn: pierna (kg), hierba
(grass).
io Resembles English yo of ?0<fe/: palacio (palace), Iecci6n
(lesson).
iu Spanish i + u: triunfo (triumph).
ui Spanish u + i: ruido (noise). The ui of gui and qui is
not a diphthong.
In all the above diphthongs (except iu and ui) the stress of voice
falls on the strong vowel when the syllable is stressed. In the case
of iu or ui, the stress falls on the second of the two weak vowels when
the syllable is stressed.
Note that in all diphthongs containing a strong vowel, if a written
accent is used over the weak vowel, the diphthong is broken up and
two separate syllables are formed; that is, an accented weak vowel
is then equivalent to a strong vowel. Examples: tra-f-do (brought),
re-fi-ne (he gets together), xi-o (7 laugh), con-ti-nu-o (/ continue),
ha-cf-a (/ was doing).
Combinations of three vowels, called triphthongs, occasionally
occur, especially in the second person plural of verb endings. Triph-
thongs are composed of a weak vowel + strong vowel + weak vowel.
The stress of voice falls on the strong vowel, which must usually bear
an accent mark.
iai es-tu-dUis (you study), pro-nun-tiAis (you pronounce).
id es-tu-ditis (you may study), pro-nun-ci6is (you may pro-
nounce).
APPENDIX 519
uai or uay a-ve-ri-gu&is (you ascertain), U-ru-guay (in South America),
uei or uey a-ve-ri-gii£is * (you may ascertain), buey (ox).
* The dieresis (-) is placed over the u in the syllables giie and giii to
show that the u is pronounced like English w.
SUMMARY
In pronouncing combinations of vowels in the same syllable, re-
member:
1. The stress invariably falls upon the strong vowel (e, a, o).
2. If an i is the first vowel in the combination, the i is always
pronounced as y in English (yet).
3. If a u is the first vowel in the combination, the u is always pro-
nounced as w in English (wet).
SYLLABICATION
The vowel (or diphthong) is the basis of the syllable. Every syllable
should, as far as possible, end in a vowel or diphthong. A simple
consonant is, therefore, joined to the following vowel.
Yo quie-ro co-mer mu-cho y be-ber po-co. 7 wish to eat much and
drink little.
The characters ch, 11 and rr, which are considered as single con-
sonants, are likewise joined to the following vowel.
Mu-chos ni-fios co-rrf-an y llo-ra-ban. Many children were running
and weeping.
The consonants 1 and r, when preceded by another consonant, form
inseparable combinations (except in the combinations rl, si, sr and tl).
El pe-rro la-dra y quie-re ha-blar con no-so-tros. The dog barks
and wants to talk with us.
All other combinations of two consonants are divided by throwing
the first one with the preceding vowel and the second with the follow-
ing vowel.
Es-toy con-ten-to de es-tu-diar la Iec-ci6n. 7 am pleased to study
the lesson.
More than two consonants are divided by throwing the last two
with the following vowel, if and when these consonants form an
inseparable combination. Otherwise only one consonant goes with
the following vowel.
Cons-tru-ye tram-pas y cons-pi-ra con-tra no-so-tros. He devises
520 PRONUNCIATION
traps and conspires against us. Lo que us-ted ez-pli-ca nos sor-pren-de.
What you explain surprises me.
Two successive strong vowels (a, e, o) or a strong vowel and a fol-
lowing accented weak vowel (i or u) are thrown into separate syllables.
Ve-o que 61 le-e el li-bro que ha tra-i-do en su ba-ul. / see that he is
reading the book he has brought in his trunk.
Two successive weak vowels are placed in the same syllable, whether
that syllable is stressed or not. If the syllable is stressed, the stress
falls on the second of the weak vowels.
Gran-de es el mi-do del triun-fo en la al-de-a. Great is the noise
of the triumph in the village.
STRESS
1. Words ending in a vowel, a diphthong, or n or s are stressed on
the next to the last syllable and need no written accent.
Ri-cos y po-bres sa-len a re-ci-bir-los. Rich and poor go forth to
receive them.
2. Words ending in a consonant, except n or s, are stressed on the
last syllable and need no written accent.
De-cid la ver-dad al pro-fe-sor. Tell the teacher the truth.
El au-tor es-cri-be en es-pa-fiol con ra-pi-dez. The author writes
Spanish rapidly.
3. Words stressed hi a manner not in keeping with rules i or 2 bear
a written accent over the vowel of the syllable stressed.
La Iec-ci6n de in-gl&s es f6-cil. The English lesson is easy.
£1 £r-bol es-t& a-qui de-tris de la ffi-bri-ca. The tree is here behind
the factory.
4. Sometimes the written accent is used to distinguish words
spelled and pronounced alike but different in meaning.
el, the, 61, he; si, if, si, yes; como, as, £c6mo? how? que, who,
which (relative pronoun), £qu£? which? what? (interrogative pro-
noun); mi, my, mi, me; de, of} d£, give.
C. WORD ORDER
The order of the arrangement of words in a sentence is much freer
in Spanish than in English. Until you have made yourself familiar
with the language, it is sometimes difficult to grasp immediately the
meaning of a sentence, unless you aim directly at discovering the
principal verb and its subject. With these identified, the order of
the words in the sentence will offer very little difficulty.
1. Frequently the word order is the same as in English:
SUBJECT VERB OBJECT SUBJECT VERB OBJECT
Quinito tiene un perro. Quinito has a dog.
2. In questions, the verb usually precedes the subject:
VERB SUBJECT OBJECT SUBJECT VERB OBJECT
£ Tiene Quinito un perro? Does Quinito have a dog?
3. Even in simple statements the verb may precede the subject:
VERB SUBJECT SUBJECT VERB
Llega el gran dia. The great day arrives.
4. Adjectives and other modifying words often follow the words
that they modify:
VERB FRED. NOUN MODIFIERS
Era un muchacho inteligente y bueno.
SUBJECT MODIFIERS PRED. NOUN
He was a good and intelligent boy.
521
D. SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
I. VERBS III. ADJECTIVES
II. SUBSTANTIVES IV. ADVERBS
V. PREPOSITIONS
I. VERBS
A verb is the part of speech which states something of a person or
thing. It is almost invariably the most important word in the sen-
tence, for without it there is no complete expression of thought.
Verbs which follow a fixed pattern in their conjugation are called
regular verbs; those which have a pattern all their own, and which
must be memorized separately, are called irregular verbs. We have
hundreds of irregular verbs in English, and a good number of them
in Spanish.
Verbs are referred to in the infinitive form. The sign of the in-
finitive in English is the word to, before the verb: to study, to work, etc.
The endings ar, er and ir are the signs of the infinitive in Spanish.
Those verbs which end in ar are said to belong to the first conjugation,
those which end in er to the second and those in ir to the third.
All verbs have five properties: voice, mode, tense, person and number.
Voice shows whether the subject of the verb is the actor, or whether
the subject is being acted upon by the verb. The verb is in the active
voice when the subject is the actor (Quinito hit the ball). The verb is
in the passive voice when the subject is acted upon by the verb
(Quinito was hit by the ball).
Mode. There are three modes hi English and Spanish: the indica-
tive, which expresses a fact; the subjunctive, which is used in this book
only in polite commands; and the imperative, which is used for familiar
commands in the affirmative.
Tense shows the time of the verb (present, past, future, etc.). With
few exceptions, the tenses in English correspond closely to those in
Spanish.
Person refers to the subject of the verb form. There are, as in
English, three persons of the singular, and three of the plural. For
an outline of the subject pronouns used with the different persons,
see p. 30.
522
APPENDIX 523
NOTE: It is absolutely essential to recognize the personal endings
of the verb forms of the different persons, since very frequently the
subject pronouns are not used with the verb. Here are four pointers,
which should be memorized:
1. Any verb ending in s (not -is, or -mos)
has as subject YOU (familiar sing.)
2. mos (not -s, or -is) WE
3. is (not -s, or -mos) YOU (familiar pi.)
4. n THEY, or YOU (polite pi.)
Formation of the Tenses — Their Use
The tenses covered in this book are the following
SPANISH TENSES ENGLISH EQUIVALENTS
Indicative Mode
SIMPLE TENSES
1. PRESENT: hablo, etc. A. PRESENT: I speak, I am speak-
ing, I do speak
2. IMPERFECT: hablaba, etc. 1 B. PAST: I spoke, I was speaking,
3. PRETERITE: habl£, etc. J I did speak
4. FUTURE: hablarS, etc. C. FUTURE: 7 shall speak (you
will speak), etc.
5. POST-PRETERITE: hablarfa, D. POST-PRETERITE: 7 should,
etc. would speak
COMPOUND TENSES
6. PRESENT PERFECT: he ha- E. PERFECT: 7 have spoken, etc.
blado, etc.
7. PLUPERFECT: habfa hablado, F. PLUPERFECT: 7 had spoken,
etc. etc.
Subjunctive Mode
8. PRESENT: (3rd. sing, and pi. G. POLITE COMMAND: (Please)
for polite commands) hable speak!
Vd., hablen Yds.
Imperative Mode
9. (TWO FORMS) habla (tti); ha- H. IMPERATIVE: Speak I
blad (vosotros)
524 SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
i. THE PRESENT TENSE.
FORMATION: Drop the ending ar, er or ir from the infinitive of the
verb, and add the personal endings of the present tense:
FOR AR VERBS FOR ER VERBS FOR IR VERBS
. _ 0
as - es -
a - e
amos emos imos
ais £is is
an - en
There are many verbs which show irregularities in the present tense.
If the verb is irregular in any way whatsoever, an irregularity is
shown in the first person.
USE: (a) Normally, the present tense is the equivalent of the same
English tense. However, since one Spanish form may be equal to
several translations in English, great care should be taken in choosing
the correct English meaning. (Canto = I sing, I am singing, I do
sing.) (b) The present tense may also be used in Spanish with some-
thing of the meaning of a future (<i Que nago ? What shall I do?
Lo hago manana. Pll do it tomorrow.)
2. THE IMPERFECT TENSE.
FORMATION: Drop the ending ar, er or ir from the infinitive and
add the personal endings of the imperfect tense:
FOR AR VERBS FOR ER AND IR VERBS
aba fibamos fa famos
abas abais fas iais
aba aban fa fan
Only three verbs are irregular in the imperfect tense:
ser, to be ir, to go ver, to see
era iba veia
eras ibas veias
era iba veia
£ramos fbamos veiamos
erais ibais veiais
eran iban veian
APPENDIX 525
USE: There are four principal uses of the imperfect tense:
A. The imperfect describes an action which was habitual or cus-
tomary in the past:
Ellos venian a verme todos los dias.
They used to come to see me every day.
B. The imperfect describes an action as going on when some other
act (expressed in the preterite) interrupted it:
Los viajeros andaban por el camino cuando un seiior les hablo.
The travelers were going along the road when a gentleman spoke
to them.
C. The imperfect describes how two or more actions were going
along simultaneously:
El burro rebuznaba mientras Paco cantaba.
The donkey was braying while Paco was singing.
D. The imperfect provides a background against which another
act (expressed in the preterite) took place:
Hacia buen tiempo cuando salieron (preterite) de casa.
The weather was good when they left home.
NOTE: In giving the time of day, in the past, the imperfect tense
is always used: Eran las seis. // was six o'clock, etc.
3. THE PRETERITE TENSE.
FORMATION: Drop the ending ar, er or ir of the infinitive and add
the personal endings of the preterite tense:
FOR AR VERBS FOR ER AND IR VERBS
6 amos f imos
aste asteis iste isteis
6 aron 16 ieron
There are many verbs which show irregularities in the preterite
tense. The key person to the construction of the verb in that tense,
however, is the third person plural. If the verb is irregular in any way,
it is most often shown in that person.
USE: There are two principal uses of the preterite tense:
526 SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
A. The preterite expresses an action or state that is definitely
completed:
Quinito viaj6 por Espafta. Quinito traveled through Spain.
B. The preterite expresses an action which occurred, or a state
that existed, at a definite time:
El afio pasado, Quinito compr6 un burro.
Last year Quinito bought a donkey.
4. THE FUTURE TENSE.
FORMATION: Add to the entire form of the infinitive, the personal
endings of the future tense:
FOR ALL VERBS
6 emos
fis 6is
fi fin
Only twelve verbs used in this book are irregular in the future tense.
They are:
A. Those which drop the e from the infinitive ending:
haber to have habr6, etc. querer to wish querr£, etc.
poder to be able podr6, etc. saber to know sabr£, etc.
B. Those which change the ending e or i of the infinitive ending
tod:
detener to detain detendr£, etc. tener to have tendr£, etc.
poner to put pondr£, etc. valer to be worth valdr£, etc.
salir to go out saldrS, etc. venir to come vendr6, etc.
C. Those which have shortened forms:
decir to say dir£, etc. hacer to make, do har£, etc.
USE: The future tense is used much the same as in English.
5. THE POST-PRETERITE TENSE.
FORMATION: Add to the entire form of the infinitive, the personal
endings of the post-preterite tense:
FOR ALL VERBS
fa famos
fas fais
fa fan
APPENDIX 527
Those verbs which are irregular in the future tense show the same
irregularities in the post-preterite tense.
USE: The post-preterite has the same use as the post-preterite (also
called the conditional) tense in English.
6. THE PERFECT TENSE.
FORMATION: Combine the present tense of the auxiliary verb,
haber, to have, with the past participle of the verb to be conjugated.
THE AUXILIARY VERB Haber is conjugated as follows in the pres-
ent tense:
he, has, ha; hemos, hab£is, ban
THE PAST PARTICIPLE: The past participle is formed by dropping
the ar, er or ir from the infinitive of the verb, and adding: ado, for
first conj. verbs, ido for verbs of the second and third conjs.
There are nine past participles used in this book whose stems end
in a vowel, and which bear a written accent on the participial ending:
atraer to attract atrafdo attracted
caer to fall cafdo fallen
construir to construct construfdo constructed
creer to believe creido believed
leer to read lefdo read
ofr to hear oldo heard
reir to laugh reido laughed
sonreir to smile sonrefdo smiled
traer to bring traido brought
There are only eight verbs used in this book which have irregular
past participles:
abrir to open abierto opened
decir to say dicho said
descubrir to discover descubierto discovered
escribir
hacer
poner
ver
volver
to write
escrito
written
to make, do
hecho
made, done
to place , put
puesto
placed, put
to see
visto
seen
to return
vuelto
returned
528 SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
7. THE PLUPERFECT TENSE.
FORMATION: Combine the imperfect tense of the auxiliary verb
haber, to have, with the past participle of the verb to be conjugated.
THE AUXILIARY VERB Haber is conjugated as follows in the im-
perfect tense:
habia, habias, habfa; habfamos, habiais, habfan
THE PAST PARTICIPLE: For the formation of the past participle, see
P- 395-
USE: The pluperfect tense in Spanish is equivalent to the same tense
in English.
8. POLITE COMMANDS.
FORMATION: Drop the o of the first person singular of the present
indicative, and add the personal endings of the polite commands:
FOR AR VERBS FOR ER AND IR VERBS
e en a an
Polite commands are usually followed by the subject pronouns
usted and ustedes. They are made with the third persons (singular
and plural) of the present subjunctive.
There are only six verbs which have irregular polite command
forms:
dar to give
doy I give
dSVd.
d£n Vds.
estar to be
estoy / am
est€ Vd.
est£n Vds.
haber to have
he / have
haya Vd.
hayan Vds.
ir to go
voy / go
vaya Vd.
vayan Vds.
saber to know
s£ / know
sepa Vd.
sepan Vds.
ser to be
soy I am
sea Vd.
scan Vds,
USE: As has been said above, these command forms are used with
the pronouns usted and ustedes. If there are any pronoun objects
of polite command forms they are attached to the verb if the com-
mand is affirmative; they are placed immediately before the verb
if the command is negative:
LfeloVd. Read it. NololeaVd. Don't read it.
APPENDIX 529
9. IMPERATIVE.
Affirmative commands, employing or implying the pronouns tti
and vosotros, are made with the imperative. There are only two
forms of the imperative, a singular form and a plural form.
FORMATION: The singular of the imperative is identical with the
third person singular of the present indicative. The plural is formed
by dropping the r of the infinitive and adding d.
There are no irregular forms in the plural.
There are only nine verbs which have irregular singular impera-
tives:
decir to say
dice he says
di (tu) say
detener to stop
detiene he stops
detSn (tu) stop
hacer to do
hace he does
haz (tu) do
ir to go
va he goes
ve (tu) go
poner to put
pone he puts
pon (tu) put
salir to go out
sale he goes out
sal (tu) go out
ser to be
es he is
s6 (tu) be
tener to have
tiene he has
ten (tu) have
venir to come
viene he comes
ven (tu) come
USE: As has been said, the two forms of the imperative are used
with the pronouns id and vosotros only in affirmative commands. If
they have pronoun objects, these objects are attached to the verb:
H&blame. Speak to me.
IL SUBSTANTIVES: NOUNS AND PRONOUNS
A substantive is a noun, a pronoun, a verbal noun, or any part of
speech used as a noun.
A. NOUNS
Nouns themselves are of two types, common and proper. A proper
noun, naturally, is a name distinguishing some individual person or
thing.
PROPER NOUNS
Proper nouns which are the objects of verbs are preceded by the
preposition a:
No veo a Quinito. / do not see Quinito.
COMMON NOUNS
All common nouns have two qualities: gender and number. In
gender they are masculine or feminine; in number they are singular
or plural.
GENDER:
1. Nouns denoting male beings are masculine:
el hermano the brother el maestro the teacher
2. Nouns denoting female beings are feminine:
la hermana the sister la maestra the teacher
3. The gender of nouns that do not refer to human beings may be
either masculine or feminine. There are a few rules which will aid
you to classify them correctly, but in the main their gender should be
memorized when the noun is encountered:
A. Most nouns that end in o are masculine:
el libro the book el perro the dog el burro the donkey
EXCEPTION: la mano the hand
B. Most nouns that end in a are feminine:
la casa the house la escuela the school la puerta the door
530
APPENDIX 531
EXCEPTION i. el dia, the day.
EXCEPTION 2. those nouns ending in ma, ta, and pa:
el telefonema the telephone message el mapa the map
el poeta the poet el planeta the planet el poema the poem
C. Most nouns ending in -d, -i6n, -z are feminine:
la sed the thirst la conversaci6n the conversation
la vez the time la Iecci6n the lesson la ciudad the city
NUMBER:
1. The letter s at the end of the noun is usually the sign of the
plural:
casas houses hermanos brothers perros dogs
2. Nouns which end in a vowel usually add s to form the plural:
burro donkey burros donkeys perro dog perros dogs
pie foot pies feet dia day dias days
3. Nouns which end in a consonant almost always add es to form
the plural:
leccion lesson lecciones lessons
ciudad city ciudades cities
NOTE: If the noun ends in z, the z is changed to c before adding es:
vez time veces times coz kick coces kicks
B. PRONOUNS
A pronoun may be broadly defined as a word used as a noun, that
is, as a substitute for a noun. There are six types of pronouns which
we have studied: i. Personal Pronouns; 2. Demonstrative Pronouns;
3. Interrogative Pronouns; 4. Relative Pronouns; 5. Indefinite
Pronouns.
1. Personal Pronouns
AS SUBJECT OF VERB
The personal pronouns are stressed when subject of the sentence,
and when used as objects of the prepositions. The subject pronouns
are as follows:
532
SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
IST I sing
2ND (thou singest)
3RD
I he sings
she sings
it sings
SINGULAR
yo canto
tu cantos
61 canta
ella canta
[el canta
ella canta
usted canta
PLURAL
YO
Tfl
ftL
ELLA
USTED
f nosotros
cantamos
NOSOTROS
\ nosotras
can tamos
NOSOTRAS
1 vosotros
cantais
VOSOTROS
\ vosotras
cantais
VOSOTRAS
Jellos
can tan
ELLOS
\ellas
can tan
ELLAS
ustedes
can tan
USTEDES
IST we sing
f (ye sing)
{ you sing
3RD they sing
A. The forms thou singest and ye sing are the familiar forms in
English. We have, today, almost discarded them for the polite form
you sing which we use for both singular and plural. The Spaniard,
however, has conserved the familiar forms tti and vosotros (-as) which
he uses with the second persons of the verb, when speaking to intimate
friends, members of his family and inferiors.
The pronouns usted and ustedes are used in polite speech. They
derive from the words vuestra merced and vuestras mercedes (your
grace, and your graces). Just as we would use the expression Your
Grace with the third person of the verb, so does the Spaniard. ( Has
Your Grace dined ?) Likewise, since the words usted and ustedes have
a particular meaning, they are usually repeated with the verb, whereas
other subject pronouns are frequently omitted, except when emphasis
is desired.
B. Since all nouns are either masculine or feminine, our pronoun
it, as subject, is the equivalent in Spanish of either 61 or elk.
AS OBJECT OF PREPOSITION
The pronouns which are used as objects of the preposition are
exactly like the subject forms with two exceptions:
APPENDIX 533
SUBJECT OBJECT OF PREPOSITION
yo mi
tu ti
contra 61 against him contra usted against you
con ella with her con nosotros with us
NOTE: The forms mi and ti combine with the preposition con, with
to give: conxnigo, contigo.
contra mi against me BUT conmigo with me
contra ti against you BUT contigo with you
contra el against him AND con 61 with him, etc.
AS DIRECT AND INDIRECT OBJECT OF VERB
The direct object receives the full force of the verb. It represents
the person or thing to whom or to which something was done. For
example: He struck me. Me is the direct object of the verb. The
indirect object often represents the person or thing who is indirectly
concerned with the action of the verb. For example: He gave me
the book. Me is the indirect object of the verb, which has as its
direct object, book. The indirect object pronoun + the definite
article often takes the place of a possessive adjective. For example:
Le corte el dedo. I cut his finger.
Me corte el dedo. / cut my finger.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
The reflexive pronouns show the action of the verb as returning on
its subject. For example: He shaved himself. Himself is the reflexive
pronoun. (For particular uses of the reflexive pronouns with specific
verbs, see pages 123 and 245.)
INDIRECT OBJECT DIRECT OBJECT REFLEXIVE
SINGULAR
^, . .,
le
f lo or le for m.
t to/or/. 8C
PLURAL
f los or les form.
168 lias forf.
534 SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
THE INDIRECT OBJECT
The indirect object precedes the direct object.
THE DIRECT OBJECT
Representing a masculine noun, lo or los is normally used; repre-
senting a feminine noun, la or las is normally used. Referring to usted
or ustedes, le or les is normally used for the masculine; la or las is
used for the feminine.
CLARIFICATION OF REFERENCE IN THE THIRD PERSON
It can easily be seen that the pronouns le, les may refer to a number
of subjects: to him, to her, to you, etc. If it is felt that the reference
should be made clear, or if it is felt that emphasis is necessary, the
correct reference can easily be made by putting in after the verb, as
identification, the forms a usted, a ella, a 61, etc. For example:
le hable a 61
Le hable
le hable a ella
le hable a usted
I les habl£ a ellos
les hable a ellas
les hable a ustedes
POSITION OF PRONOUN OBJECTS
Indirect and direct objects and reflexive pronouns precede the verb,
except:
A. After an infinitive
Quiere estudiarlo. He wishes to study it.
B. After a present participle
Estd estud&ndolo. He is studying it.
C. After an affirmative command
Estudielo Vd. Study it.
(BUT: No lo estudie Vd. Don't study it.)
2. Demonstrative Pronouns
Esto and eso are demonstrative pronouns which are used only in
reference to an idea or statement. Consequently, they have no plural
forms, and are neuter in gender.
APPENDIX 535
Esto parece imposible. This seems impossible.
Todas las pelfculas vienen de Madrid; por eso ella debe vivir allf.
All the pictures come from Madrid; for that reason, she must live
there.
3. Interrogative Pronouns
The commonest interrogative pronouns are the following:
£ qui£n? who? £ a qui€n? to whom? whom?
4 qu£ ? what ? which ? i cu61 ? which (one) ?
4. Relative Pronouns
Relative pronouns introduce a clause. The principal relative pro-
nouns are:
que who, what quien who, whom
la que, el que, los que, las que who, which
Pepe es el muchacho que responde.
Pepe is the boy who answers.
El hombre a quien vieron los muchachos era el embajador.
The man whom the boys saw was the ambassador.
5. Indefinite Pronouns
The commonest indefinite pronouns (a number of which are also
used as adjectives) are the following:
*todo all, everything *mucho much, a great deal
algo something nada nothing
alguien someone nadie no one, nobody
*uno one *cualquier(a) whatever one, anyone
*alguno someone *ninguno no one
A. "Double negatives" are common in Spanish. These "double
negatives" do not make an affirmative as they do in English. On
the contrary, they intensify the negation. No, not, no is the negative
that usually precedes the verb. After the verb is found nada, nunca,
nadie, or ninguno. But, if any one of these last named negatives is
placed before the verb, then no disappears.
* The starred forms are also used as adjectives.
536 SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
No veo nada, or Nada veo. / see nothing.
No viene nunca, or Nunca viene. He never comes.
No viene nadie, or Nadie viene. No one is coming.
No tengo ningun libro, or Ningun libro tengo. I have no book.
After the negative preposition sin, without (just as after no) these
negative words are used:
Sin decir nada. Without saying anything.
Sin hablar nunca. Without ever speaking.
When nadie is the object of the verb it is preceded by a:
No veo a nadie. / see no one.
In an expression of comparison (after m6s que, more than and
menos que, less than) these negatives are employed:
Habla mis que nadie. He speaks more than anyone.
Es ma's rico que ningun otro hombre.
He is richer than any other man.
Rie menos que nunca. He laughs less than ever (before).
B. Alguno and ninguno are used as pronouns only when the noun
for which they stand has been expressed in the same or in an imme-
diately preceding sentence or statement.
Los alumnos no ban llegado todavia. Alguno vendra pronto.
The students have not yet arrived. Some one (of them) will come soon.
m. ADJECTIVES
Adjectives are used to modify nouns and pronouns. They agree
with the noun or pronoun which they modify in gender and number,
GENDER
1. Adjectives which end in o in the masculine singular form the
feminine by changing o to a:
mucho mucha bueno buena
2. Adjectives which do not end in o usually have the same form
for the feminine and for the masculine:
una muchacha inteligente un muchacho inteligente
3. Note that adjectives of nationality (not ending in o, masculine
singular) always add a to the masculine singular to form the feminine:
un libro francos una casa francesa
a French book a French house
un muchacho espafiol una muchacha espafiola
a Spanish boy a Spanish girl
NUMBER
1. Adjectives ending in a vowel add s to form the plural:
un muchacho inteligente unos muchachos inteligentes
an intelligent boy some intelligent boys
una muchacha buena tres muchachas buenas
a good girl three good girls
2. Adjectives which end in a consonant add es to form the plural:
un libro diffcil dos libros difkiles
POSITION
i. Descriptive adjectives usually follow the noun they modify:
muchacha hennoM una casa pequefia
a pretty girl a small house
537
53& SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
2. Adjectives which show number, quantity, possession or owner-
ship, usually precede the noun they modify:
estas tres casas mi sombrero grande
these three houses my large hat
SHORTENED FORMS
i. A number of adjectives drop the final o in the masculine singular
before a masculine singular noun:
bueno
buen hombre
good man
malo
mal nifto
bad boy
uno
tin ladron
a thief
alguno
algdn libro
some book
ninguno
ningun libro
no book
primero
primer libro
first book
tercero
tercer libro
third book
2. The adjective grande may be shortened to gran before either a
masculine or a feminine singular noun:
una gran obra a great work un gran libro a great book
COMPARISON
The comparative degree is formed by using m&s before the positive
degree:
POSITIVE COMPARATIVE
cansado tired mfts cansado more tired
fresco cool m6s fresco cooler
fuerte strong m£s fuerte stronger
THE ARTICLES
THE DEFINITE ARTICLES
The forms of the definite articles, corresponding to the, in English,
are:
SINGULAR PLURAL
MASCULINE el lOS
FEMININE la US
The articles, which are adjectives, agree in gender and number with
the word which they modify. They immediately precede the noun:
APPENDIX 539
el hombre y la mujer the man and the woman
los hombres y las mujeres the men and the women
NOTE: Before a feminine noun beginning with stressed a or ha, the
article is written el:
el agua the water el alma the soul el hambre the hunger
Naturally, since the noun used in such a case is feminine, any adjec-
tive modifying it will of necessity have a feminine form:
Beben el agua fresca. They drink fresh water.
Pepe tiene mucha hambre. Pepe is very hungry.
THE USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE
1 . Nouns used in a general or generic sense to indicate a whole class
of objects require the use of the definite article before them:
Me gusta el pan. 7 like bread.
£1 dinero tiene gran importancia. Money has great importance.
2 . Proper names, especially those of persons modified by adjectives,
are preceded by the definite article:
el buen Luisito good old Louis
3. The definite article takes the place of a possessive adjective in
referring to parts of the body or articles of clothing, when no mis-
understanding of the owner of the articles in question is possible:
Meti la mano en el bolsillo. 7 put my hand in my pocket.
Tiene los pies grandes. His feet are large, or He has big feet.
THE INDEFINITE ARTICLES
The indefinite articles a and an in English are rendered in Spanish
by un before a masculine singular noun, and by una before a feminine
singular noun:
un hombre a man un anuncio an announcement
una mujer a woman
NUMERALS
There are two types of numerals in Spanish and English: cardinal
numerals (one, two, three, etc.) and ordinal numerals (first, second,
third, etc.).
540
SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
CARDINAL NUMERALS
uno (una), I
dos, 2
tres, 3
cuatro, 4
cinco, 5
seis, 6
siete, 7
ocho, 8
nueve, p
diez, 10
once, 77
doce, 12
trcce, 73
catorce, 74
quince, 75
diez y seis (diecis&s), 16
diez y siete (diecisiete), 77
diez y ocho (dieciocho), 18
diez y nueve (diecinueve), ip
veinte, 20
veinte y uno (veintiuno), 21
veinte y dos (veintid6s), 22
veinte y tres (veintitr£s), 23
veinte y cuatro (veinticuatro), 24
veinte y cinco (veinticinco), 25
veinte y seis (veintis£is), 26
veinte y siete (veintisiete), 27
veinte y ocho (veintiocho), 28
veinte y nueve (veintinueve), 29
treinta, 30
treinta y uno, 31
treinta y dos, 32
cuarenta, 40
cuarenta y uno, 41
cincuenta, 50
sesenta, 60
setenta, 70
ochenta, 80
noventa, go
ciento (cien), 700
doscientos (-as), 200
trescientos (-as), 300
cuatrocientos (-as), 400
quinientos (-as), 500
seiscientos (-as), 600
setecientos (-as), 700
ochocientos (-as), 800
novecientos (-as), poo
mil, 7000
dos mil, 2000
diez mil, 70,000
cincuenta mil, 50,000
cien mil, 100,000
doscientos mil, 200,000
novecientos mil, 900,000
un mil!6n (de), 7,000,000
dos millones (de), 2,000,000
mil millones, 1,000,000,000
ORDINAL NUMERALS
primcro (primer), first
segundo, second
tercero (tcrcer), third
cnarto, fourth
quinto, fifth
sexto, sixth
stptimo, seventh
octavo, eighth
noveno (nono), ninth
dteimo, tenth
undtdmo, eleventh
duodftdmo, twelfth
APPENDIX 541
dltimo tertio, thirteenth d£cimo s£ptimo, seventeenth
dtcixno cuarto, fourteenth d£cimo octavo, eighteenth
d£cimo quinto, fifteenth d6cimo nono, nineteenth
d£cimo sexto, sixteenth vig6simo, twentieth
SHORTENED FORMS OF NUMERALS
1. The cardinal numeral uno (un, una) is the only cardinal number
below 200 which shows any change for gender. Before a masculine
noun uno becomes un; before a feminine noun uno becomes una.
ciento uno one hundred and one
treinta y un hombres thirty-one men
treinta y una mujeres thirty-one women
doscienta casas two hundred houses
2. Ciento becomes cien when not followed by a number smaller
than itself.
cien hombres one hundred men
cien mujeres one hundred women
cien mil one hundred thousand
cien millones one hundred million
BUT: ciento una mujeres one hundred and one women
ciento un mil one hundred and one thousand
3. The ordinal numerals primero and tercero become primer and
tercer before a masculine singular noun:
el primer libro the first book la primera Iecci6n the first lesson
USE OF THE NUMERALS
i. In giving the day of the month in Spanish, the ordinal numeral
primero is used for "the first," the cardinal numerals dos, tres, etc. for
the remaining.
el primero de mayo the first of May
el dos de mayo the second of May
el treinta y uno de mayo the thirty-first of May
THE DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES
A demonstrative adjective is one that points out. The English
demonstratives ate Ms and that. There are three forms in Spanish:
542 SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
the first referring to an object which is close to the speaker, the second
to one which is close to the person spoken to, and the third to one
which is distant from both speaker and person spoken to.
M. F.
CLOSE TO THE SPEAKER this S. CSte 6Sta
these PL. estos estas
CLOSE TO THE PERSON
SPOKEN TO that s. ese esa
those PL. esos esas
DISTANT FROM SPEAKER
AND PERSON SPOKEN TO thai s. aquel aquella
those PL. aquellos aquellas
USE OF DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES
i. Demonstrative adjectives usually precede the nouns which they
modify:
En aquel momento algunos jovenes se acercaron.
At that moment some young people drew near.
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
The possessive adjectives (my, your, his, etc.) naturally show posses-
sion. Spanish uses the following forms:
s. PL.
my (de mi) mi mis
your (de ti) tu tus
his (de fl) |
her (de ella) i su sus
your (de usted) J
our (de nosotros) nuestro nuestros
your (de vosotros) vuestro vuestros
their (deellos) ]
their (de ellas) [• su sus
your (de ustedes) j
USE OF THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
i. The possessive adjective agrees in gender and number with the
thing possessed.
sus casas his (her, your, their) houses mis lecciones my lessons
APPENDIX 543
2. The possessive adjectives su, sus do not give a clear clue to the
exact possessor. When such a clue is necessary, the explanation de
61, de ella, de usted, de ustedes, etc. may be used after the thing
possessed:
sus casas
or las casas
SU C«1££L I
de 61 his houses , > de Yd. your house
or la casa J
IV. ADVERBS
An adverb is a word which modifies a verb, an adjective, or another
adverb.
FORMATION:
1. Many adverbs are formed by adding the ending mente (English
ly) to the feminine singular of the adjective. Of course, if the
masculine and feminine singular forms of the adjective are alike,
this form is used in making the adverb:
furioso, -a furious furiosamente furiously
final, final find finalmente finally
2. Often a prepositional phrase with the preposition con H- a noun
is the equivalent of an English adverb in ly:
con cuidado (with care) carefully
con frecuencia (with frequency) frequently
3. A number of adverbs are similar in form to the adjectives:
El perro es fuerte (adj.). The dog is strong.
El perro ladra muy fuerte (adv.). The dog barks very loudly.
THE MOST FREQUENTLY USED ADVERBS IN THIS BOOK
adonde where
mucho
much
ahora now
muy
very
alia* there (with verb of motion)
ni
neither
all! there (with verb of rest)
no
no
anoche last night
nunca
much
antes formerly
pcor
worse
aqul here
poco
little
asf thus, so
porque
because
bastante enough, rather
pronto
quickly
bien well, rather
pues
well, since
casi 0/w0tf
sf
yes
como as
s61o
only
despuls afterward
tambifo
also
mal to<%, poorly
tan
so, as
mejor (etifer
tarde
late
menos few
t^t^m-jinn
i early
mientrai while
ya
already, now
544
V. PREPOSITIONS
A preposition cannot be used without an object. It may have as
its object a substantive, an infinitive, or a clause used as a substan-
tive and introduced by que.
A verb which is governed by a preposition is always in the infinitive:
Penso en viajar por Espafia. He thought about traveling through Spain.
Se acordo de decirlo. He remembered to say it.
Se fue sin vernos. He went away without seeing us.
There are twenty prepositions of importance which are used in
this book. Those which are of greatest importance are starred in this
list:
*i. a: to, for, fr om, in, on, with, etc., and often not translated.
A. Required before any object of the verb representing a definite
person or persons, an intelligent animal, a name of a city or
country:
Los animales ven a sus amos. The animals see their masters.
£1 sobrino sigue a su tlo. The nephew follows his uncle.
B. A + el = al. Al + an infinitive = on + -ing in English.
al ofr on hearing al verlo on seeing him
C. Required before any infinitive dependent upon a verb of
motion, beginning, learning and teaching:
Voy a estudiar. / am going to study.
Aprendemos a leer el espanol. We learn to read Spanish.
Empezamos a estudiar. We begin to study.
D. Required before the objects of many verbs such as responder,
to reply, and preguntar, to ask (a question):
Respondi6 a su carta. He replied to his letter.
Le preguntd a su amigo ... He asked his friend . . .
545
546 SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
Many prepositions, like these,
are compound, being made up
of an adverb and a preposi-
2. acerca de: about, in regard to
3. antes de : before
4. cerca de: near
*S. con: with
A. con plus a noun is often the equivalent of an English adverb:
con frecuencia frequently con cuidado carefully
B. Among the verbs which require the preposition con before
their objects are:
casarse con to marry
Se cas6 con Pepita. He married Pepita.
6. contra: against.
*y. de: of, from, with, and often without translation.
A. Possession is expressed by using the preposition de before
the noun indicating the possessor:
el perro de Quinito Quinito's dog
los hijos de dofia Ana Dona Ana's sons
B. Many verbs require de before an object, and before a de-
pendent infinitive. Such verbs are:
enamorarse de to fall in Se enamor6 de ella.
love with He fell in love with her.
estar contento de to be Bst£ contento del perro.
glad of, satisfied with He is satisfied with the dog.
8. delantede: in front of (but not facing)
9. desde: from, since
10. despuls de: after
n. detr&sde: behind
*i2. en: on, in, etc.
A. The preposition en is used with many nouns in an idiomatic
sense, without the article:
en casa at home
en camino on the road
en medio de in the midst of
APPENDIX 547
B. The preposition en is used with a number of verbs before a
following object or dependent infinitive. Such verbs are:
pensar en to think about
Pensaba en hacerlo. He was thinking about doing it.
13. entre: between, among
14. ezcepto: except
15. hacia: toward
1 6. menos: less, minus
*iy. para: for, at, in order to, and often without translation.
A. Denotes use or purpose:
agua para la comida water for the meal
B. Designates the recipient of an action, favor, etc.:
Esto es para Vd. This is for you.
C. Designates destination:
Sale para Madrid. He leaves for Madrid.
D. Designates a definite future time:
Se prepara para la fiesta. He gets ready for the holiday.
E. Before an infinitive, it denotes purpose:
Estoy aquf para estudiar. / am here to study.
*i8. por: for, by, through, along, because of, etc.
A. With the sense of "for the sake of," "on behalf of," etc.:
Hablan por mf . They speak for me.
B. To express time "during which":
Por dos boras habia estudiado sin hablar.
For two hours he had studied without. speaking.
C. With the meaning of "in exchange for":
Lo compri por dos pesetas. He bought it for two pesetas.
548 SURVEY OF GRAMMAR
D. Meaning "place in which" or "along which":
por aqui this way
Pas6 por la calle. He went along the street.
E. With an infinitive, usually to indicate reason for action ex-
pressed by the main verb:
Por estar cansado, el perro se detuvo.
Because of being tired, the dog stopped.
19. sin: without. Remember that the only form of the verb which
may follow a preposition is the infinitive.
sin decir nada without saying anything
20. sobre: over, upon
E. IDIOMATIC USAGE
I. To be — the use of ser and estar.
A. estar is used:
1. to express location or position of the subject:
Quinito estfi en Espafia. Quinito is in Spain.
2. in general, with predicate adjectives denoting non-essential,
accidental qualities of the subject:
El agua estfi fresca. The water is cool.
Pepe est£ triste. Pepe is sad.
Quinito estfi enfermo. Quinito is ill.
B. ser is used:
1. to join a noun or pronoun to another noun or pronoun:
Quinito es un muchacho espanol.
Quinito is a Spanish boy.
2. with predicate adjectives expressing age and financial con-
dition:
La familia no es rica, pero no es pobre.
The family is not rich, but it is not poor.
Quinito no es viejo, pero es mas viejo que Pepe.
Quinito is not old, but he is older than Pepe.
3. with predicate adjectives denoting fundamental, essential,
characteristic qualities of the subject:
Quinito es bueno. Quinito is good.
Coco, el burro, es muy inteligente.
Coco, the burro, is very intelligent.
II. To be — the use of tener.
Physical characteristics are frequently expressed with the verb
tener, rather than with estar or ser:
549
550 IDIOMATIC USAGE
A. description of one's person:
Her hands are small. } _. ,
She has small hands. \ Tiene *» manos
NOTE: When using tcner with parts of the body, the definite article
is substituted for the possessive adjective.
B. description of one's condition:
The boys are very cold. Los muchachos tienen mucho frfo.
We are hot. Tenemos calor.
She is thirsty. Ella tiene sed.
Are you hungry ? ± Tiene Vd. hambre ?
I am very sleepy. Tengo mucho sueno.
Tener frfo, calor, sed, hambre and suefio are then equivalent to
to be cold, hot, thirsty, hungry and sleepy when referring to a subject
which is a person or animal.
NOTE: The words frfo, calor, etc. are nouns, and if modified must be
modified by adjectives: Tienen mucha sed. They are very thirsty.
III. To be — the use of hacer and haber.
Descriptions of natural phenomena are frequently made in Spanish
with the verbs hacer and haber:
A. invisible phenomena employ the verb hacer:
hacer buen (mal) tiempo to be good (bad) weather
hacer calor to be hot
hacer frfo to be cold
hacer fresco to be cool
Hace buen tiempo. The weather is good.
Hace mal tiempo. The weather is bad.
Hace calor. It is hot.
Hace bastante fresco. // is quite cool.
B. visible phenomena employ the verb haber:
haber luna to shine (the moon)
haber sol to shine (the sun)
haber nieve for there to be snow
APPENDIX 551
Hay soL The sun is shining.
Hay luna. The moon is shining.
Hoy, hay nieve. There is snow today.
NOTE: Tiempo, calor, frio, etc. used in the above expressions are
nouns. Therefore their modifiers must be adjectives: Hace mucho
calor. It is very hot.
IV. Obligation, duty, necessity — the use of hay que, deber and
tener que.
A. impersonal obligation — obligation that does not rest upon a
specific person — is expressed by the impersonal verb haber
+ que + the infinitive of the verb:
Hay que ir. One (we, people) must go.
Hay que estudiar para aprender.
One must study in order to learn.
B. personal obligation — obligation resting upon a specific per-
son — is expressed with the verb deber:
Debo estudiar la leccion. / ought to study the lesson.
Debemos hacerlo. We ought to do it.
C. forceful obligation — compulsion — is expressed by the verb
tener + que + the infinitive of the verb:
Tengo que estudiar. 7 have to study.
Tuvimos que ir. We had to go.
V. To like — the use of gustar.
The English sentence, 7 like it, would be rendered in Spanish in
inverted form: "It is pleasing to me." Once this point is clear, the
use of the verb gustar offers little difficulty. In the above example,
the English direct object (it) becomes in Spanish the subject (un-
expressed) of the verb. The English subject (7) becomes the indirect
object. This indirect object noun is, in Spanish, almost always
repeated in the form of an indirect object pronoun before the verb.
Me gusta la ciudad de Valladolid. 7 like the city of VaUadolid.
I No le gusta a Juan la ciudad ? Doesn't John like the city ?
Si, le gustan todas las ciudades. Yes, he likes all the cities.
Y i no te gusta VaUadolid ? And, don't you like VaUadolid ?
Si, me gusta mucho. Yes, I like it very much.
552 IDIOMATIC USAGE
VI. To look for, at — the use of buscar and mirar.
A. buscar is the equivalent of to look for, search for:
Busco el libro de Vd. 7 am looking for your book.
Bdsquelo Vd. Look for it.
B. mirar is the equivalent of to look, look at, give one's attention to:
No me miraba. He was not looking at me.
jMireVd.! Look (here)!
VII. To know — the uses of saber, conocer and poder.
A. to know in the sense of be acquainted with is expressed by conocer.
In the preterite, it has the additional meaning of met, became
acquainted with:
Conozco a su hermano de Vd. 7 know your brother.
Conoce bien la literatura espanola.
He is well acquainted with Spanish literature.
La conoci en la Habana el afio pasado.
7 met her in Havana last year.
B. to know, as a result of study, thought or reflection is expressed by
saber.
It may take as its object only a fact or a thing (never a person).
In the preterite tense it has the additional meaning of learned (found
out about).
Lo s£. 7 know it.
Sabe de memoria la lection entera.
He knows the entire lesson by heart.
Lo supe el lunes pasado. 7 learned about it last Monday.
C. to know how to — is expressed by saber + an infinitive:
Sabe hacerlo. He knows how to do it.
Sabe conducir un autom6vil. He knows how to drive a car.
D. to be able — when equivalent to to know how to is translated by
saber; when expressive of physical ability, is translated by
poder.
In English we often use the verb to be able (can) with the meaning
i know how to. For example:
APPENDIX 553
[ He is physically unable to swim.
He cannot swim really means | OR
[ He does not know how to swim.
He can cook well really means He knows how to cook well.
In Spanish, saber represents mental ability; poder represents
physical ability.
Pedro sabe nadar muy bien, pero hoy no puede nadar porque esta
enfermo.
Pedro can swim very well, but he can't swim today because he is ill.
VIII. Time — la hora, el dia, la semana, el mes, el afio.
A. la hora is composed of sesenta minutos — each minuto of se-
senta segundos. Half an hour is media hora; a quarter of an
hour is un cuarto de hora.
1. In asking the time, the correct phraseology is: t Qu6 hora es ?
2. The hour is expressed by the use of the cardinal numerals
from one to twelve. Before each numeral appears the fem-
inine article (la before una; las thereafter) which takes the
place of the nouns hora, horas:
la una one o'clock, las dos two o'clock, etc.
3. Time before the hour is expressed by naming the coming
hour and adding the expression menos, with the amount
of time:
las cinco menos diez ten minutes to (of) five
la una menos cuarto fifteen minutes of one o'clock
4. Time after the hour is expressed by adding, after the hour,
the word y with the amount of time:
las cinco y seis (minutos) six minutes past five o'clock
las siete y cuarto seven fifteen
las dos y media two thirty
•
B. el dfa is divided into two periods of twelve hours each, ter-
minated by mediodfa, noon, and medianoche, midnight. The
day is roughly divided into three parts: la mafiana, the morning;
la tarde, the afternoon; la noche, the night.
554 IDIOMATIC USAGE
1. A specific hour of the morning, afternoon or night is ex-
pressed by the use of the preposition a before the hour, and
the preposition de before the period of time:
a las cinco de la mafia^a at five o'clock in the morning
a las cuatro de la tarde at four o'clock in the afternoon
2. The day — past, present and future — is referred to as
follows:
ayer yesterday hoy today mafiana tomorrow
ayer por la mafiana yesterday morning
esta mafiana this morning
tnaflana por la ma^a^a tomorrow morning
anoche last night
esta noche tonight
mafiana por la noche tomorrow night
C. la semana embraces the seven days of the week:
lunes, martes, mi£rcoles, jueves, viernes, s&bado, domingo
1. In mentioning a day of the week on which an action occurred,
occurs or is to occur, the definite article takes the place of
the preposition on:
La vi el lunes. I saw her on Monday.
Estudiamos los jueves We study on Thursdays.
2. The week — past, present and future — may be outlined as
follows:
la semana pasada last week
esta semana this week
la semana que viene next week
D. el mes embraces the weeks of the month.
1. In giving the date of the month, primero is used for the first,
but cardinal numerals are used thereafter:
•
el primero de enero the first of January
el seis de junio the sixth of June
2. The month — past, present and future — may be outlined as
for the week.
APPENDIX 555
3. In asking the date (fecha), the correct phraseology is:
i A ctULntos (del mes) estamos ?
£. el aflo embraces: (i) the four estaciones del afio and (2) the
twelve months.
1. The estaciones are:
la primavera spring el otofio autumn
el verano summer el invierno winter
2. The months of the year are:
enero January mayo May septiembre September
febrero February junio June octubre October
marzo March Julio July noviembre November
abril April agosto August diciembre December
IX. Elapsed time; "ago" — the use of hacer in expressions of time.
A. An action which began in the past and continues up into the
present is expressed in English with the perfect tense: I have
studied Spanish for two years. A similar action is expressed in
Spanish by using hacer + the amount of time (+ que) + the
present tense of the verb (It makes + two years + that + I am
studying Spanish).
Hace dos anos que estudio el espanol.
I have been studying Spanish for two years.
Hace cinco meses que vivimos en Astorga.
We have been living in Astorga for five months.
B. The placement of an action at a definite time in the past with
the word ago in English corresponds to the use in Spanish of
hace + the amount of time (+ que) + the preterite tense:
Hace dos meses que le conocf a fl.
/ met him two months ago.
Hace diez minutos que Ileg6 Quinito.
Quiniio arrived ten minutes ago.
F. LIST OF GIVEN NAMES
MEN
Abrah&n, Abraham
Adolfo, Adolphus
Alberto, Albert
Alejandro, Alexander
Alfonso, Alphonse, Alphonso
Andres, Andrew
Antonio, Anthony
Arturo, Arthur
Augusto, Augustus
Bartolom£, Bartholomew
Bernardo, Bernard
Carlos, Charles
Cipriano, Cyprian
Claudio, Claude
Crist6bal, Christopher
Edmundo, Edmund
Eduardo, Edward
Emilio, Emilius
Enrique, Henry
Ernesto, Ernest
Eugenio, Eugene
Esteban, Stephen
Federico, Frederick
Felipe, Philip
Fernando, Ferdinand
Francisco, Francis
Gualterio, Walter
Guillenno, William
Gustavo, Gustavus
Heriberto, Herbert
Horacio, Horace
Hugo, Hugh
Isidoro, Isidor
Jacobo, Jaime, Jacob, James
Jer6nixno, Jerome
Joaquin, Joachim
Jorge, George
Jos£, Joseph
Juan, John
Le6n, Leo, Leon
Leonardo, Leonard
Lorenzo, Lawrence
Luis, Lewis, Louis
Manuel, Emmanuel
Marcos, Mark
Mateo, Matthew
Mauricio, Maurice
Miguel, Michael
Nicholas, Nicholas
Pablo, Paul
Patricio, Patrick
Pedro, Peter
Ram6n, Raymond
Ricardo, Richard
Roberto, Robert
Salom6n, Solomon
Samuel, Samuel
Teodoro, Theodore
Vicente, Vincent
Virgilio, Virgil
556
APPENDIX
557
WOMEN
Adela, Adele
Adelaida, Adelaide
Beatriz, Beatrice
Berta, Bertha
Carlota, Charlotte
Carolina, Caroline
Catalina, Catharine
Cristina, Christine
Dorotea, Dorothy
Elena, Helen
Emilia, Emily
Engracia, Grace
Ester, Esther
Eva, Eve
Felipa, Philippa
Florencia, Florence
Francisca, Frances
Gertrudis, Gertrude
In6s, Inez, Agnes
Isabel, Elizabeth, Isabella
Alicia, Alice
Ana, Anna
Jos£fa, Josephine
Juana, Jane
Julia, Julia
Leonor, Eleanor
Lucfa, Lucy
Luisa, Louise
Manuela, Emma
Margarita, Margaret
Maria, Mary
Marta, Martha
Paula, Paulina, Pauline
Raquel, Rachel
Rosa, Rose
Rosalia, Rosalie
Sara, Sarah
Sofia, Sophia
Susana, Susan
Teresa, Theresa
6. CLASSROOM EXPRESSIONS
GREETINGS AND FAREWELLS
Buenos dfas, sefior profesor, sefiorita profesora. Good morning,
teacher.
Buenos dfas, nifios. Good morning, children.
Buenas tardes. Good afternoon.
Buenas noches. Good evening.
I C6mo est& Vd. ? 4 C6mo le va ? i Qu£ tal sigue Vd. ? How are
you?
Muy bien, gracias. i Y Vd. ? Very well, thank you. And how are
you?
Adi6s; hasta la vista. Good-by; till we meet again.
Hasta mafiana. See you tomorrow.
Hasta m£s tarde. See you later.
I Que lo pase Vd. bien ! Good luck to you! So long!
IN THE CLASSROOM
Voy a pasar lista a la clase. / am going to call the roll.
Tomfts Smith. Presente (or Servidor). Thomas Smith. Present.
Teresa Valera. Bst£ ausente. Theresa Valera. She is absent.
Juanita Cooper. Servidora. Jenny Cooper. Present.
I C6mo se llama Vd. ? What is your name?
Me llamo Carlos Cornwall. My name is Charles Cornwall.
i D6nde esti su hennana ? Where is your sister ?
Bstft en casa, muy enf erma. She is at home very HI.
Lo siento mucho. / am very sorry.
Preste(n) Vd(s). atenci6n. Pay attention.
Bscuche(n) Vd(s). bien. Listen carefully.
Levinte(n)se Vd(s). Stand up.
Si6nte(n)se Vd(s). Be seated.
558
CLASSROOM EXPRESSIONS 559
DURING THE LESSON
Abra(n) Vd(s). su(s) libro(s). Open your book(s).
Carlos, i cu&l es la leccidn de hoy? Charles, what is the lesson for
today?
La Iecci6n de hoy es la Lecci6n Vm (ocho). The lesson for today is
Lesson VIII.
i De qu£ trata la Iecci6n? What is the lesson about ?
Trata de las f6rmulas de cortesia. // is about polite expressions.
i Qu£ significa « cortesia » ? What does " cortesia " mean ? « Cortesfa »
significa « tirbanidad. » "Cortesfa" means "urbanidad."
i Cdmo se dice ... en espafiol? How does one say . . . in Spanish?
Se dice . . . One says . . .
Empiece Yd. a leer en la p&gina veinte y una, reng!6n dos. Begin
reading on page twenty-one, line two.
Lea Yd. en voz alta. Read in a loud voice.
Basta. i Comprende Yd. lo que ha leido? That is enough. Do you
understand what you have read ?
Sf, sefior; lo comprendo. Yes, sir; I understand it.
Muy bien. Repita Yd. a la clase lo que se dice aquf. Very well.
Repeat to the class what is said here.
Traduzca Yd. al ingl£s el p&rrafo. Translate into English the para-
graph.
Deletree Yd. la palabra. Spell the word.
Escriba Yd. en la pizarra lo que acaba de decir. Write on the board
what you have just said.
Conjugue Yd. el presente de indicative de « escribir la palabra. »
Conjugate the present indicative of "escribir la palabra."
El presente de indicative de « escribir la palabra » es: c Escribo la
palabra, escribes la palabra, » etc. The present indicative of
"escribir la palabra" is, etc.
Yaya Yd. a la puerta. Go to the door.
AbralaVd. Open it.
Ci6rrelaVd. Close it.
Yuelva Yd. a su asiento y dlganos lo que hizo. Return to your seat
and tell us what you did.
560 CLASSROOM EXPRESSIONS
Ful a la puerta, la abrl, y despu$s la cerr6 . I went to the door, opened
it, and afterwards closed it.
Siga (continue) Vd. leyendo. Go on reading.
P6ngase Vd. delante de la clase. Stand in front of the class.
Pronuncie Vd. con cuidado las palabras. Pronounce the words care-
fully.
Dfgalo Vd. en espafiol. Say it in Spanish.
Repitalo Vd. despu£s de mi. Repeat it after me.
No liable Vd. tan de prisa. Don't speak so fast.
Escriban Vds. lo que les dicto. Write what I dictate to you.
Tomas, recoja Vd. los ejercicios. Thomas, collect the exercises.
Vayan Vds. a la pizarra. Go to the blackboard.
Tomen Vds. el borrador y borren lo escrito. Take the eraser and erase
what is written there.
Tomen Vds.' la tiza y escriban sus nombres, el dfa, la fecha, y el
ndmero de su clase. Take chalk and write your names, the day,
date, and the number of your class.
Eduardo Jones. Clase de espafiol ntimero 116. Hoy es limes, dia
siete de diciembre de mil novecientos cuarenta. Edward Jones.
Spanish class number 116. Today is Monday, the seventh of
December, 1940.
Ahora escriban Vds. al dictado. Now write at dictation.
Primero leo la frase. First I shall read the sentence.
Despu£s escribanla Vds. Afterwards write it.
Jaime, lea Vd. lo que ha escrito. James, read what you have written.
I Hay faltas ? Are there any mistakes ?
Maria, corrija Vd. la frase. Mary, correct the sentence.
I Est& bien ahora ? Is it correct now?
Se debe decir (escribir) . . . One should say (write) . . .
Vuehran Vds. a sentarse. Take your seats again.
Cambien Vds. sus cuadernos y conijan los errores. Exchange note-
books and correct errors.
I Quito quiere hacer una pregunta? Nadie. Who wishes to ask a
question? No one.
CLASSROOM EXPRESSIONS 561
POLITE EXPRESSIONS
Haga Vd. el favor de leer, escribir, sentarse, etc. Please read, write,
sit down, etc.
Tenga Vd. la bondad de hablar m&s alto. Please speak louder.
No se moleste Vd. Don't bother.
No es molestia. // is no trouble.
Muchas gracias. Gracias. Mil gracias. Thank you.
No hay de que. De nada. No las xnerece. Don't mention it.
Dispense Vd. Excuse (me).
Vd. est& dispensado. You are excused.
Aqui tiene Vd. su casa* Make yourself at home.
Memorias a su sefior padre. My regards to your father.
Recuerdos a toda su familia. Remember me to all your family.
P6ngame Vd. a los pies de su sefiora. My regards to your wife.
Pase Vd. por nuestra casa algtin dia. Come and see us some day.
Gracias. Lo harf con gusto. Thanks. I shall do so with pleasure.
VERB APPENDIX
REGULAR VERBS
Primera conjugaci6n
INFINITIVO GERUNDIO PARTICIPIO PASIVO
hablar, to speak hablando, speaking hablado, spoken
TTEMPOS SIMPLES
Modo indicative
PRESENTE
yo habl o I speak, am speaking, do speak
tu habl as \ you (familiar) 1 ,
ustedhabla J you (polite) J Spea*> etc>
el, ella habl a he, she speaks, etc.
nosotros, -as habl amos we speak, etc.
vosotros, -as habl ais 1 you (familiar) \ ,
ustedes habl an J you (polite) / Speak> etc'
ellos, ellas habl an they speak, etc.
IMPERPECTO
yo habl aba / was speaking, used to speak,
spoke
tu habl abasl you (familiar) 1 were speaking,
usted habl aba J you (polite) J etc.
&., ella habl aba he, she was speaking, etc.
nosotros, -as habl ibamos we were speaking, etc.
vosotros, -as habl abais 1 you (familiar) 1 were speaking,
ustedes habl aban J you (polite) J etc.
ellos, ellas habl aban they were speaking, etc.
PRET£RITO
yo habl 6 / spoke, did speak
tu habl astc 1 you (familiar) 1 ,
usted habl 6 J you (polite) J Sf0**' eic'
61, ella habl 6 he, she spoke, etc.
563
564 VERB APPENDIX
nosotros, -as habl amos we spoke, etc.
vosotros, -as habl asteis 1 you (familiar) 1 ,
ustedes habl aron J you (polite) J spoKe> erc'
ellos, ellas habl aron they spoke, etc.
FUTTOO
yo hablar 6 I shall speak, be speaking
61, ella hablar & he, she will speak, etc.
nosotros, -as hablar emos we shall speak, etc.
vosotros, -as hablar £is 1 .„ ,, , ,
*. j i_ i_i - f you will speak, etc.
ustedes hablar an J * * '
ellos, ellas hablar an they will speak, etc.
POSPRETERITO
yo hablar fa / should or would speak, be speak-
ing
tu hablar las 1 , , . , .
usted hablar (a J you woM speak> etc'
61, ella hablar fa he, she would speak, etc.
nosotros, -as hablar faxnos we should or would speak, etc.
vosotros, -as hablar fais \
)
ellos, ellas hablar fan they would speak, etc.
, .
ustedes hablar ton ' etc'
Modo subjuntivo
PRESENTE
yo habl e 7 may speak, be speaking l
tuhablcs) . , .
usted habl e) you may speak, «t.
61, ella habl e he, she may speak, etc.
1 This is only one of several possible ways to translate the subjunctive.
Its meaning can be interpreted exactly only in connection with the context.
VERB APPENDIX 565
nosotros, -as habl emos we may speak, etc.
vosotros, -as habl 6is \ . , .
ustedeshablen) yo* may ,p*k, ttc.
ellos, ellas habl en they may speak, etc.
IMPERFECTO, FORMA EN s
yo habl ase / might speak, be speaking l
tu habl ases \ • 7 , t » .
usted habl ase ) V™ mtght speak, etc.
61, ella habl ase he, she might speak, etc.
nosotros, -as habl fisemos we might speak, etc.
vosotros, -as habl aseis \ . ,
/jiii > you might speak, etc.
ustedes habl asen J -^ 6 ^ '
ellos, ellas habl asen they might speak, etc.
IMPERFECTO, FORMA EN r
yo habl ara 7 wigA/ ^coi, be speaking l
tu habl aras 1 . ? ^ L , x
..,,,, > you might speak, etc.
usted habl ara J J s r >
el, ella habl ara fo, 5/re might speak, etc.
nosotros, -as habl frames we might speak, etc.
vosotros -as habl arais 1 .
ustedes habl aran J ^ & f >
ellos, ellas habl aran they might speak, etc.
Modo imperative
habla (tu), speak (thou) hablad (vosotros), speak (ye)
TIEMPOS COMPUESTOS
INFINITIVO GERUNDIO
laber habUdo, to hone spoken habiendo hablado, having spoken
1 See footnote on page 564.
566 VERB APPENDIX
Modo indicative
PERFECTO
yo he hablado I have spoken, have been speaking
tu has hablado 1 , ^ ,
usted ha hablado ) *» *"" ^*m' etc"
61, ella ha hablado he, she has spoken, etc.
nosotros, -as hemos hablado we have spoken, etc.
vosotros, -as habfis hablado 1 , . ,
^ j i_ i_ LI j i you have spoken, etc.
ustedes han hablado j J r
ellos, ellas han hablado they have spoken, etc.
PLUSCUAMPERFECTO
yo habia hablado / had spoken, had been speaking
tu habias hablado 1 , , . ,
usted habia hablado } you ** ***** etc"
61, ella habia hablado he, she had spoken, etc.
nosotros, -as habiamos hablado we had spoken, etc.
vosotros, -as habiais hablado 1 , , . , .
ustedes habian hablado ) *" M stoken' etc
ellos, ellas habian hablado they had spoken, etc.
PRET^RITO PERPECTO
yo hube hablado 7 had spoken, etc.
tu hubiste hablado 1 , , . ,
usted hubo hablado ) ^ M stokm> etc'
61, ella hubo hablado he, she had spoken, etc.
nosotros, --as hubimos hablado we had spoken, etc.
vosotros. -as hubisteis hablado 1 , , ^ ,
ustedes hubieron hablado ) you ** stoken' etc'
ellos, ellas hubieron hablado they had spoken, etc.
FUTUKO PERPECTO
yo habr6 hablado 7 shall have spoken, been speaking
tti habris hablado ) .... ,
usted habra hablado } >«•«»*« *M«», etc.
el, ella habri hablado he, she will have spoken, etc.
VERB APPENDIX 567
nosotros, -as habremos hablado we shall have spoken, etc.
vosotros, -as habrfis hablado 1 .„ , . ,
ustedes habran hablado / *» mtt ^ s*>oken> etc"
ellos, ellas habrdn hablado they will have spoken, etc.
POSPRET£RITO PERFECTO
yo habria hablado / should or would have spoken,
been speaking
tu habrias hablado 1 7 , , . ,
usted habria hablado ) you woM *«* s*">ken' etc"
61, ella habria hablado he, she would have spoken, etc.
nosotros, -as habriamos hablado we should or would have spoken,
etc.
vosotros, -as habrias hablado 1
, , , , ,
ustedes habrian hablado ** woldd *"" J^OT ' etc"
ellos, ellas habrian hablado /^ would have spoken, etc.
Modo subjuntivo
PERFECTO
yo haya hablado / may have spoken, been speaking l
tu hayas hablado \ L . L
Ajl_ iiij } you may have spoken, tic.
usted haya hablado } ^ ' r '
61, ella haya hablado he, she may fiave spoken, etc.
nosotros, -as hayamos hablado we may have spoken, etc.
vosotros, -as hayiis hablado \ , . ,
' , , J , , , , > you may have spoken, etc.
ustedes hayan hablado J * * r >
ellos, ellas hayan hablado they may have spoken, etc.
PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, FORMA EN s
yo hubiese hablado 7 might have spoken, been speak-
ing >
t& hubtas hablado 1 . ^ ^ ^ etc
usted hubiese hablado J J 6 r
fl, ella hubiese hablado fe, sfe mfg*/ have spoken, etc.
1 See footnote on page 564.
nosotros, -as hubiesemos hablado we might have spoken, etc.
vosotros, -as hubieseis hablado 1 . 1A1 L ,
ustedes hubiesenhabkdo) V™ ™S>* ^e spoken, etc.
ellos, ellas hubiesen hablado JAey wig/tf Aairc spoken, etc.
PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, FORMA EN r
yo hubiera hablado / might have spoken, been speak-
ing*
tuhubieras hablado) ^ ^ ^
usted hubiera hablado J
fl, ella hubiera hablado Ae, 5A0 might have spoken, etc.
nosotros, -as hubie*ramos hablado we might have spoken, etc.
vosotros, -as hubierais hablado 1 . , . , ^ ,
' , , , . , i , , } you might have spoken, etc.
ustedes hubieran hablado J J 6 ^ »
ellos, ellas hubieran hablado they might have spoken, etc.
Segunda conjugacidn
INFINITIVO GERUNDIO PARTICIPIO PASIVO
comer, to eat comiendo, eating comido, eaten
TIEMPOS SIMPLES
Modo indicative
PRESENTE
yo com o 7 eat, am eating, do eat
tu com esl you (familiar) \
usted come j you (polite) J eat> etc'
il, ella com e he, she eats, etc.
nosotros, -as com emos we eat, etc.
vosotros, -as com 6is 1 you (familiar) 1 .
ustedes com en J you (polite) J '
ellos, ellas com en they cat, etc.
1 See footnote on page 564.
VERB APPENDIX 569
IMPERFECTO
yo com fa 7 was eating, used to eat, ate
tu com fas 1 you (familiar) \ were eating,
usted com fa J you (polite) J etc.
a, ella com fa he, she was eating, etc.
nosotros, -as com famos we were eating, etc.
vosotros, -as com fais 1 you (familiar) ) were eating,
ustedes com fan J you (polite) / etc.
ellos, ellas com fan they were eating, etc.
PRETERITO
yo com f I ate, did eat
tu com istc 1 you (familiar) 1 .
usted com 16 J you (polite) J '
a, ella com 16 he, she ate, etc.
nosotros, -as com imos we ate, etc.
vosotros, -as com isteis 1 you (familiar) 1 . .
ustedes com ieron J you (polite) J '
ellos, ellas com ieron they ate, etc.
FUTURO
yo comer 6 7 shall eat, be eating
tu comer Jsj ^
usted comer 4 J '
a, ella comer ft A^, 5A€ mU eat, etc.
nosotros, -as comer emos we shall eat, etc.
vosotros -as comer 6is 1 ^ etc
ustedes comer fin J
ellos, ellas comer fin /Aiy z^f// eat, etc.
POSPRET£RITO
yo comer fa 7 should or w0o&2 eo/,
td comer Jasl ^^^ ^
usted comer fa J
, ella comer fa he, she would eat, etc.
570 VERB APPENDIX
nosotros, -as comer famos we should or would eat, etc.
vosotros, -as comer (ais \ woM ^
ustedes comer Ian J '
ellos, ellas comer fan they would eat, etc.
Modo subjuntivo
PRESENTE
yo com a 7 may eat, be eating l
tucomasj you may eat, etc.
usted com a J ^
61, ella com a he, she may eat, etc.
nosotros, -as com amos we may eat, etc.
vosotros. -as com ais j etc
ustedes com an J
ellos, ellas com an they may eat, etc.
IMPERFECTO, FORMA EN s
yo com iese / might eat, be eating l
tucomiesesj ^ ^ etc
usted com iese J ' °
61, ella com iese he, she might eat, etc.
nosotros, -as com i£semos we might eat, etc.
vosotros, -as com ieseis 1 m . ^ ^
ustedes com lesen J ^ °
ellos, ellas com iesen l/n;y fnfg/t/ eat, etc.
IMPERFECTO, FORMA EN r
yo com iera 7 might eat, be eating 1
tucomierasj ^ . ^
usted com icra J ^ 6 '
61, ella com iera he, she might eat, etc.
nosotros, -as com itramos we might eat, etc.
vosotros -as com ierais 1 m . ^ ^
ustedes com ieran J ^ *
ellos, ellas com ieran they might eat, etc.
1 See footnote on page 564.
VERB APPENDIX
571
Modo imperative
come (tu), eat (thou) corned (vosotros), eat (ye)
TIEMPOS COMPUESTOS
INFINITIVO GERUNDIO
haber comido, to have eaten habiendo comido, having eaten
yo he comido
tu has comido 1
usted ha comido J
fl, ella ha comido
nosotros, -as hemos comido
vosotros, -as habeis comido 1
ustedes han comido J
ellos, ellas han comido
Modo indicative
PERTECTO
I have eaten, have been eating
you have eaten, etc.
he, she has eaten, etc.
we have eaten, etc.
you have eaten, etc.
they have eaten, etc.
PLUSCUAMPERFECTO
yo habia comido
tu habias comido 1
usted habia comido J
61, ella habia comido
nosotros, -as habiamos comido
vosotros, -as habiais comido 1
ustedes habian comido J
ellos, ellas habian comido
7 had eaten, had been eating
you had eaten, etc.
he, she had eaten, etc.
we had eaten, etc.
you had eaten, etc.
they had eaten, etc.
PRET£RITO PERFECTO
yo hube comido 7 had eaten, etc.
t* bubble comido) Beaten , etc.
usted hubo comido J
£1, ella hubo comido he, she had eaten, etc.
572
VERB APPENDIX
nosotros, -as hubimos comido we had eaten, etc.
vosotros, -as hubisteis comido 1 ^ ^
iie+AsiAC! nurviAWMi /»/>*vii/H/i I ^
y &od eaten, etc.
FUTURO PERFECTO
7 shall have eaten, been eating
you will have eaten, etc.
he, she wiU have eaten, etc.
we shall have eaten, etc.
you will have eaten, etc.
they will have eaten, etc.
POSPRET£RITO PERFECTO
yo habria comido 7 should or would have eaten
been eating
tu habrias comido 1
usted habria comido J
£1, ella habria comido
ustedes hubieron comido /
ellos, ellas hubieron comido
yo habre comido
tu habras comido 1
usted habra comido J
fl, ella habra comido
nosotros, -as habremos comido
vosotros, -as habreis comido )
ustedes habran comido j
ellos, ellas habran comido
nosotros, -as habriamos comido
vosotros, -as habriais comido 1
ustedes habrian comido /
ellos, ellas habrian comido
you would have eaten, etc.
he, she would have eaten, etc.
we should or would have eaten, etc.
you would have eaten, etc.
they would have eaten, etc.
Modo subjuntivo
PERTECTO
yo haya comido 7 may have eaten, been eating 1
you may have eaten, etc.
he, she may have eaten, etc.
we may have eaten, etc.
you may have eaten, etc.
they may have eaten, etc.
tu hayas comido 1
usted haya comido /
61, ella haya comido
nosotros, -as hayamos comido
vosotros, -as hayais comido 1
ustedes hayan comido j
ellos, ellas hayan comido
1 See footnote on page 564.
VERB APPENDIX 573
PLUSCTTAMPERFECTO, FORMA EN 5
yo hubiese comido / might have eaten, been eating l
tuhubiesescomidoj ^ ^
usted hubiese comido J
el, ella hubiese comido he, she might have eaten, etc.
nosotros, -as hubiesemos comido we might have eaten, etc.
vosotros -as hubieseis comido 1
^ u ^ ^
ustedes hubiesen comido J
ellos, ellas hubiesen comido they might have eaten, etc.
PLUSCUAMPERFECTO, FORMA EN r
yo hubiera comido I might have eaten, been eating l
!V^-raSCOm^°l you might kave eaten, etc.
usted hubiera comido J
fl, ella hubiera comido he, she might have eaten, etc.
nosotros, -as hubteramos comido we might have eaten, etc.
vosotros -as hubierais comido
^ ^ ^
ustedes hubieran comido J
ellos, ellas hubieran comido they might have eaten, etc.
Tercera conjugation
INFINITIVO GERUNDIO PARTICIPIO PASIVO
vivir, to live viviendo, living vivido, lived
With the exception of the infinitive, vivir, the first and second per-
sons plural of the present indicative, vivimos, vivis, and the impera-
tive plural, vivid, the forms of a verb of the third conjugation are
identical with those of the second conjugation.
A VERB IN THE PASSIVE VOICE
Sinopsis en k primera persona singular
INFINITIVO GERUNDIO
ser amado, -a, -os, -as, to be loved siendo amado, -a, -os, -as, being
loved
1 See footnote on page 564,
574 VERB APPENDIX
TTEMPOS SIMPLES
Modo indicative
PRESENTE: soy amado, -a, etc., I am loved, etc.
IMPERFECTO: era amado, -a, etc., 7 was loved, etc.
PRET&RITO: fui amado, -a, etc., / was loved, etc.
FUTURO: serf amado, -a, etc., 7 shall be loved, etc.
POSPRET£RITO: seria amado, -a, etc., 7 would be loved, etc.
Modo subjuntivo
PRESENTE: sea amado, -a, etc., 7 way 6e fared, etc.
IMPERFECTO: fuese amado, -a, etc., 7 tftt'g/tf Je /(werf, etc.
fuera amado, -a, etc., 7 wwg/tf ie foverf, etc.
Modo imperative
s£ amado, -a, be (thou) loved sed amados, -as, be (ye) loved
Imperative cort£s
sea Vd. amado, -a, be loved sean Yds. amados, -as, be loved
TIEMPOS COMPUESTOS
INFINITIVO COMPUESTO GERUNDIO COMPUESTO
haber sido amado, -a, -os, -as, habiendo sido amado, -a, -os,
to have been loved -as, having been loved
Modo indicative
PERFECTO: he sido amado, -a, etc., 7 have been loved,
etc.
PLUSCUAMPERPECTO: habia sido amado, -a, etc., 7 had been
loved, etc.
PRErfRixo PERPECTO: hube sido amado,-a, etc., 7 had been loved,
etc.
FUTURO PERPECTO: habr€ sido amado, -a, etc., 7 shall have
been loved, etc.
POSPRET£RITO PERPECTO: habria sido amado, -a, etc., 7 would have
been loved, etc.
VERB APPENDIX S7S
Modo subjuntivo
PERFECTO: haya sido amado, -a, etc., I may have been
loved, etc.
PLUSCUAMPERFECTO: hubiera sido amado, -a, etc., I might have been
loved, etc.
hubiese sido amado, -a, etc., 7 might have been
loved, etc.
A REFLEXIVE VERB
Sinopsis en la primera persona singular
INFINITIVO GERTJNDIO
levantarse, to rise, get up levant&ndose, rising, getting up
TIEMPOS SIMPLES
Modo indicative
PRESENTE: me levanto, etc., 7 rise, get up, etc.
IMPERFECTO: me levantaba, etc., 7 was rising, used to rise, etc.
PRETERITO: me Ievant6, etc., 7 rose, etc.
FUTURO: me levantare, etc., 7 shall rise, etc.
POSPRETERITO: me levantaria, etc., 7 should or would rise, etc.
Modo subjuntivo
PRESENTE: me levante, etc., 7 may rise, etc.
IMPERFECTO: me levantase, etc., 7 might rise, etc.
me levantara, etc., 7 might rise, etc.
Modo imperative
levdntate (tti), rise (thou) levantaos (vosotros), rise (ye)
Imperative cort£s
levintese Vd., rise levdntense Vds., rise
TIEMPOS COMPUESTOS
INFINITIVO COMPUESTO GERUNDIO COMPUESTO
haberse levantado, to have risen habilndose levantado, having risen
576 VERB APPENDIX
Mode indicative
PERFECTO: me he levantado, etc., I have risen, etc.
PLUSCUAMPERFECTO: me habfa levantado, etc., / had risen, etc.
PRET£RITO PERFECTO: me hube levantado, etc., I had risen, etc.
FUTURO PERFECTO : me habre levantado, etc., / shall have risen,
etc.
POSPRET£RITO PERFECTO: me habria levantado, etc., / would have
risen, etc.
Modo subjuntivo
PERFECTO: me haya levantado, etc., / may have risen,
etc.
PLUSCUAMPERFECTO: me hubiese levantado, etc., / might have
risen, etc.
me hubiera levantado, etc., / might have
risen, etc.
IRREGULAR VERBS1
INFINITIVO GERUNDIO
j. andar, to walk, go andando andado
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: ando, andas, anda, etc.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: ande, andes, ande, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: andaba, andabas, andaba, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: anduve, anduviste, anduvo; anduvimos,
anduvisteis, anduvieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: anduviese, anduvieses, anduviese, etc.
anduviera, anduvierag, anduviera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: andar£, etc. POSPKET&UTO: andarfa, etc.
IMPERATIVO: anda(tu); andad (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORT£S: andeVd.; andenVds.
1 The infinitive, gerund, and past participle are printed in bold-face type.
So also are all irregular forms. Remember that the progressive tenses ait
based on the gerund, and the compound tenses on the past participle.
VERB APPENDIX 577
2. caber, to be room for, fit into cabiendo cabido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: quepo, cabes, cabe, etc.
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTIVO: quepa, quepas, quepa, etc.
IMPERPECTO DE INDICATIVO: cabia, cabias, cabia, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: cupe, cupiste, cupo; cupimos, cupisteis,
cupieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: cupiese, cupieses, cupiese, etc.
cupiera, cupieras, cupiera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: cabr£, etc. POSPRETERITO: cabrfa, etc.
IMPERATIVO: cabe (tu); cabed (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORT£S: quepa Vd.; quepanVds.
j. caer, to fall cayendo cafdo
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: caigo, caes, cae, etc.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: caiga, caigas, caiga, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: caia, caias, caia, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: cai, caiste, cay6; cafmos, caisteis, cayeron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: cayese, cayeses, cayese, etc.
cayera, cayeras, cayera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: caer£, etc. POSPRETERITO: caeria, etc.
IMPERATIVO: cae(tu); caed (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: caiga Vd.; caigan Vds.
4. dar, to give dando dado
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: doy, das, da, etc.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: d£, des, d6; demos, dels, den.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: daba, dabas, daba, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: dl, diste, di6; dimos, disteis, dieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: diese, dieses, diese, etc.
diera, dieras, diera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: dar6, etc. POSPRET£RITO: daria, etc.
IMPERATIVO: da (tu); dad (vosotros)
IMPERATIVO CORTES: d6Vd.; den Vds.
5. decir, to say, tell diciendo dicho
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: digo, dices, dice; decimos, deds, dicen.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: diga, digas, diga, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: decfa, dedas, decia, etc.
578 VERB APPENDIX
PRET£RITO DE INDICATIVO: dije, dijiste, dijo; dijimos, dijisteis,
dijeron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: dijese, dijeses, dijese, etc.
dijera, dijeras, dijera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: dir6, etc. PospREiiRixo: diria, etc.
IMPERATIVO: di (tu); decid (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORT£S: digaVd.; diganVds.
6. estar, to be estando estado
PRESENTS DE INDICATIVO: estoy, estfis, esta; estamos, estais, estan.
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTIVO: estl, est£s, est6, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: estaba, estabas, estaba, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: estuve, estuviste, estuvo; estuvimos,
estuvisteis, estuvieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: estuviese, estuvieses, estuviese, etc.
estuviera, estuvieras, estuviera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: estare, etc. POSPRETERITO: estarfa.
IMPERATIVO: estt(tu); estad (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: est^Vd.; estSnVds.
7. haber, to have (as auxiliary) habiendo habido
PRESENTS DE INDICATIVO: he, has, ha (hay1); hemos, habfis, han.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: haya, hayas, haya, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: habia, habias, habia, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: hube, hubiste, hubo; hubimos, hubisteis,
hubieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: hubiese, hubieses, hubiese, etc.
hubiera, hubieras, hubiera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: habr£, etc. POSPRET^RITO: habria, etc.
IMPERATIVO: h6 (tu); habed (vosotros).
8. hacer, to make, do haciendo hecho
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: hago, haces, hace, etc.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: haga, hagas, haga, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: hacia, hacias, hacfa, etc.
PRET&RITO DE INDICATIVO: hice, hiciste, hizo; hicimos, hicisteis,
hideron.
1 Used impersonally.
VERB APPENDIX 579
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: hiciese, hitieses, hicesc, etc.
hiciera, hicieras, hiciera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: har6, etc. POSPRET£RITO: haria, etc.
IMPERATIVE: haz (tu); haced (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: hagaVd.; haganVds.
p. ir, to go yendo ido
PRESENTS DE INDICATIVO: voy, vas, va; vamos, vais, van.
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTIVO: vaya, vayas, vaya, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: iba, ibas, iba; fbamos, ibais, iban.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: ful, fuiste, fu6; fuimos, fuisteis, fueron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: fuese, fueses, fuese, etc.
fuera, fueras, fuera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: ire, etc. POSPRET£RITO: iria, etc.
IMPERATIVO: ve (tu); vamos (nosotros), id (vosotros).
SUBJUNTIVO-IMPERATIVO: vayaVd.; vayanVds.
jo. ofr, to hear oyendo ofdo
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: oigo, oyes, oye; oimos, ois, oyen.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: oiga, oigas, oigas, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: oia, oias, oia, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: oi, oiste, oy6; oimos, oisteis, oyeron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: oyese, oyeses, oyese, etc.
oyera, oyeras, oyera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: oire, etc. POSPRET£RITO: oiria, etc.
IMPERATIVO: oye (tu); oid (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: oiga Yd.; oigan Yds.
ii. poder, to be able pudiendo podido
PRESENTS DE INDICATIVO: puedo, puedes, puede; podemos, podeis,
pueden.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: pueda, puedas, pueda; podamos, podais,
puedan.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: podia, podias, podfa, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: pude, pudiste, pudo; pudimos, pudisteis,
pudieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: pudiese, pudieses, pudiese, etc.
pudiera, pudieras, pudiera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: podr£, etc. POSPRET^RTTO: podrfa, etc.
580 VERB APPENDIX
12. poner, to put, place, set poniendo puesto
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: pongo, pones, pone, etc.
PRESUNTE DE suBjUNTivo: ponga, pongas, ponga, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: ponia, ponias, ponla, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: puse, pusiste, puso; pusimos, pusisteis,
pusieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: pusiese, pusieses, pusiese, etc.
pusiera, pusieras, pusiera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: pondr£, etc. POSPRET£RITO: pondria, etc.
IMPERATIVO: pon(tti); poned (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: ponga Vd.; ponganVds.
jj. querer, to wish, want queriendo querido
PRESENTS DE INDICATIVO: quiero, quieres, quiere; queremos, quereis,
quieren.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: quiera, quieras, quiera; queramos,
querais, quieran.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: queria, querias, queria, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: quise, quisiste, quiso; quisimos, quisis-
teis, quisieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: quisiese, quisieses, quisiese, etc.
quisiera, quisieras, quisiera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: querrl, etc. POSPRETERITO: querrfa, etc.
IMPERATIVO: quiere (tu); quered (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: quiera Yd.; quieran Yds.
14. saber, to know, know how to sabiendo sabido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: s6, sabes, sabe, etc.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: sepa, sepas, sepa, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: sabia, sabias, sabia, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: supe, supiste, supo; supimos, supisteis,
supieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: supiese, supieses, supicse, etc.
supiera, supieras, supiera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: sabrft, etc. POSPRETERITO: sabda, etc.
IMPERATIVO: sabe(tti); sabed (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: sepa Yd.; sepanYds.
VERB APPENDIX 581
15. salir, to go out, leave saliendo salido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: salgo, sales, sale, etc.
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTIVO: saiga, saigas, saiga, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: salia, salias, salfa, etc.
PRET£RITO DE INDICATIVO: sali, saliste, saUo; salimos, salisteis,
salieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: saliese, salieses, saliese, etc.
saliera, salieras, saliera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: saldr£, etc. POSPRETERITO: saldrla, etc.
IMPERATIVO: sal(tu); salid (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: saiga Vd.; salganVds.
16. ser, to be siendo sido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: soy, eres, es; somos, sois, son.
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTIVO: sea, seas, sea; seamos, sefiis, sean.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: era, eras, era; £ramos, erais, eran.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: fui, fuiste, fu£; fuimos, fuisteis, fueron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: fuese, fueses, fuese, etc.
fuera, fueras, fuera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: sere, etc. POSPRETERITO: seria, etc.
IMPERATIVO: s6 (tu); sed (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: seaVd.; scan Yds.
17. tener, to have, possess teniendo tenido
PRESENTS DE INDICATIVO: tengo, tienes, tiene; tenemos, teneis,
tienen.
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTIVO: tenga, tongas, tenga, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: tenia, tenias, tenia, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: tuve, tuviste, tuvo; tuvimos, tuvisteis,
tuvieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: tuviese, tuvieses, tuviese, etc.
tuviera, tuvieras, tuviera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: tendrl, etc. POSPRET^RITO: tendrfa, etc.
IMPERATIVO: ten (tu); tened (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: tenga Vd.; tengan Vds.
18. traducir, to translate traduciendo traducido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: traduzco, traduces, traduce, etc.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: traduzca, traduzcas, traduzca, etc.
582 VERB APPENDIX
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: traduda, traducias, traducia, etc.
PRET£RITO DE INDICATIVO: traduje, tradujiste, tradujo; tradujimos,
tradujisteis, tradujeron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: tradujese, tradujeses, tradujese, etc.
tradujera, tradujeras, tradujera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: traducirS, etc. POSPRET£RITO: traduciria,
etc.
IMPERATIVO: traduce (tu); traducid (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: traduzcaVd.; traduzcan Yds.
ig. traer, to bring trayendo traldo
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: traigo, traes, trae, etc.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: traiga, traigas, traiga, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: traia, traias, traia, etc.
PRET£RITO DE INDICATIVO: traje, trajiste, trajo; trajimos, trajisteis,
trajeron.
IMPERJECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: trajese, trajeses, trajese, etc.
trajera, trajeras, trajera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: traer6, etc. POSPRETERITO: traeria, etc.
IMPERATIVO: trae (tu); traed (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: traiga Vd.; traiganVds.
20. valer, to be worth valiendo valido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: valgo, vales, vale; etc.
PRESENTE DE SUBJTJNTTVO: valga, valgas, valga, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: valia, valias, valia, etc.
PRET&UTO DE INDICATIVO: vali, valiste, valid; valimos, valisteis,
valieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: valiese, valieses, valiese, etc.
valiera, valieras, valiera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: valdrl, etc. POSPRET^RITO: valdrfa, etc.
IMPERATIVO: val(tu); valed (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO coRiis: valga Vd.; valganVds.
21. venir, to come viniendo venido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: vengo, vienes, viene; venimos, venls,
vieneiL
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: venga, vengas, venga, etc.
VERB APPENDIX 583
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: venia, venias, venia, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: vine, viniste, vino; vinimos, vinisteis,
vinieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: viniese, vinieses, viniese, etc.
viniera, vinieras, viniera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: vendre", etc. POSPRETERITO: vendrfa, etc.
IMPERATIVO: ven(tti); venid (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: vengaVd.; venganVds.
22. ver, to see viendo visto
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: veo, ves, ve; vemos, veis, ven.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: vea, veas, vea, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: vela, vefas, vefa; vefamos, vefais, vefan.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: vi, viste, vio; vimos, visteis, vieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: viese, vieses, viese, etc.
viera, vieras, viera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: vere, etc. POSPRETERITO: veria, etc.
IMPERATIVO: ve (tu); ved (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: vea Yd.; vean Yds.
22a. proveer, to provide proveyendo provisto,
proveido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: proveo, provees, provee, etc.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: provea, proveas, provea, etc.
IMPERFECTO DE INDICATIVO: proveia, proveias, proveia, etc.
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: provef, proveiste, proveyo; proveimos,
proveisteis, proveyeron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: proveyese, proveyeses, proveyese, etc.
proveyera, proveyeras, proveyera, etc.
FUTURO DE INDICATIVO: proveere, etc. POSPRETERITO: proveeria, etc.
IMPERATIVO: provee (tii); proveed (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: provea Vd.; provean Yds.
VOWEL-CHANGING VERBS1
PRIMERA CLASE
23. cerrar, to close cerrando cerrado
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: cierro, cierras, cierra; cerramos, cerrais,
cierran.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: cierre, cierres, cierre; cerremos, cerreis,
cierren.
IMPERATIVO: cierra (tu); cerrad (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: cierre Vd.; cierrenVds.
2ja. errar, to err errando errado
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: yerro, yerras, yerra; erramos, errais,
yerran.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: yerre, yerres, yerre; erremos, erreis,
yerren.
IMPERATIVO: yerra (tu); errad (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: yerre Vd.; yerren Vds.
24. contar, to count contando contado
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: cuento, cuentas, cuenta; con tamos, con-
tais, cuentan.
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTIVO: cuente, cuentes, cuente; contemos,
cont^is, cuenten.
IMPERATIVO: cuenta (tu); con tad (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: cuente Vd.; cuentan Vds.
240. jugar, to play jugando jugado
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: juego, juegas, juega; jugamos, jugais,
juegan.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: jucguc, juegues, juegue; juguemos, ju-
gu&s, jucgucn.
IMPERATIVO: juega (tu); jugad (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: juegue Vd.; jueguenVds.
1 Only those tenses or moods are given in which some of the forms con-
tain a change of vowels. Such forms are printed in bold-face type.
584
VERB APPENDIX 585
25. perder, to lose perdiendo perdido
PRESENTS DE INDICATING: pierdo, pierdes, pierde; perdemos, perdfis,
pierden.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: pierda, pierdas, pierda; perdamos, per-
dais, pierdan.
IMPERATIVO: pierde (tu); perded (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: pierda Vd.; pierdan Yds.
254. adquirir, to acquire adquiriendo adquirido
PRESENTS DE INDICATIVO: adquiero, adquieres, adquiere; adquiri-
mos, adquiris, adquieren.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: adquiera, adquieras, adquiera; adquira-
mos, adquira*is, adquieran.
IMPERATIVO: adquiere (tu) ; adquirid (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: adquiera Vd.; adquieran Vds.
26. volver, to return, go back volviendo vuelto
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: vuelvo, vuelves,vuelve; volvemos, volveis,
vuelven.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: vuelva, vuelvas, vuelva; volvamos,
volviis, vuelvan.
IMPERATIVO: vuelve (tu); volved (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: vuelva Vd.; vuelvan Vds.
26a. oler, to smell oliendo olido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: huelo, hueles, huele; olemos, oleis, huelen.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: huela, huelas, huela; olamos, olais,
huelan.
IMPERATIVO: huele (tu); oled (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORT£S : huela Vd.; huelan Vds.
SEGUNDA CLASE
27. sentir, to feel, regret sintiendo sentido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: siento, sientes, siente; sentimos, sends,
sienten.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: sienta, sientas, sienta; sintamos, sintftis,
sientan.
686 VERB APPENDIX
PRET£RITO DE INDICATIVO: senti, sentiste, sinti6; sentimos, sentisteis,
sintieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: sinticse, etc.; sintiera, etc.
IMPERATIVO: siente (tu); sentid (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORT£S: sientaVd.; sientan Yds.
28. dormir, to sleep durmiendo dormido
PRESENTE DE INDICATTVO: duermo, duermes, duerme; dormimos,
dormis, duermen.
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTIVO: duenna, duennas, duenna; durmamos,
durm&is, duerman.
PRETERITODE INDICATIVO: dormi, dormiste, durmi6; dormimos, dor-
misteis, dunnieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: durmiese, etc. ; durmiera, etc.
IMPERATIVO: duerme (tu); dormid (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: duenna Vd.; duerman Yds.
TERCERA CLASE
29. pedir, to ask for, demand pidiendo pedido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: pido, pides, pide; pedimos, pedis, piden.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: pida, pidas, pida; pidamos, pidais, pidan.
PRET&UTO DE INDICATIVO: pedi, pediste, pidi6; pedimos, pedisteis,
pidieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: pidiese, etc.; pidiera, etc.
IMPERATIVO: pide (tu); pedid (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: pida Yd.; pidan Yds.
2$a. reir, to laugh riendo reldo
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: rfo, rles, rie; reimos, reis, rien.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: ria, rfas, rla; riamos, riais, rian.
PRET&UTO DE INDICATIVO: ref, reiste, ri6; refmos, reisteis, rieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: riese, etc.; riera, etc.
IMPERATIVO: lie (tu); reid (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: ria Yd.; rian Yds.
CONSONANT-CHANGING VERBS
30. buscar, to look for, seek buscando buscado
PRET£RITO DE INDICATIVO: busqu6, buscaste, busco; buscamos,
buscasteis, buscaron.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: busque, busques, busque; busquemos,
busqu£is, busquen.
IMPERATIVO CORTES: busque Vd.; busquen Yds.
31. delinquir, to transgress delinquiendo delinquido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: delinco, delinques, delinque; delinquimos,
delinquis, delinquen.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: delinca, delincas, delinca; delincamos,
delinc&is, delincan.
IMPERATIVO CORTES: delinca Vd.; delincan Vds.
32. pagar, to pay, pay for pagando pagado
PRET£RITODE INDICATIVO: pagu6,pagaste,pago; pagamos, pagasteis,
pagaron.
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTIVO: pague, pagues, pague; paguemos, pagu£is,
paguen.
IMPERATIVO CORTES: pague Vd.; paguen Vds.
33. distinguir, to distinguish distinguiendo distinguido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: distingo, distingues, distingue; distingui-
mos, distinguis, distinguen.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: distinga, distingas, distinga; distingamos,
distingAis, distingan.
IMPERATIVO CORT£S: distinga Vd.; distingan Vds.
34. alcanzar, to attain alcanzando alcanzado
PR ET^RITO DE INDICATIVO: alcanc6, alcanzaste, alcanzo; alcanzamos,
alcanzasteis, alcanzaron.
1 Only those tenses or moods are given in which some of the forms con-
tain a change of consonant spelling. Such forms are printed in bold-face
type.
587
588 VERB APPENDIX
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTTVO: alcance, alcances, alcance; alcancemos,
alcanctis, alcancen.
IMPERATIVO CORTES: alcance Vd.; alcancen Yds.
35. veneer, to conquer venciendo vencido
PRESENTE DE INDICATTVO: venzo, vences, vence; vencemos, venc£is,
vencen.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: venza, venzas, venza; venzamos, venz&is,
venzan.
IMPERATIVO CORTES: venza Vd.; venzan Vds.
36. averiguar, to ascertain, find out
averiguando averiguado
PRETERITODEINDICATTVO: averigiie*, averiguaste, averiguo; averigua-
mos, averiguasteis, averiguaron.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: averigiie, averigties, averigtie; averigiie-
mos, averigii£is, averigiien.
IMPERATIVO CORTES: averigtie Vd.; averigiien Vds.
37. coger, to take (hold of), seize
cogiendo cogido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: cojo, coges, coge; cogemos, cog^is, cogen.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: coja, cojas, coja; cojamos, cojais, cojan.
IMPERATIVO CORTES: cojaVd.; cojan Vds.
MISCELLANEOUS VERBS
38. conocer, to know, be acquainted with
conociendo conocido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: conozco, conoces, conoce; conocemos,
conocSs, conocen.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: conozca, conozcas, conozca; conozcamos,
conozcais, conozcan.
IMPERATIVO CORTES: conozca Yd.; conozcan Yds.
jp. enviar, to send enviando enviado
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: envfo, envfas, en via; enviamos, enviais,
envian.
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTIVO: envie, envies, envie; enviemos, envieis,
envfen.
IMPERATIVO: envia (tu); enviad (vosotros).
IMPERATIVO CORTES: envfe Yd.; envien Yds.
40. continual, to continue continuando continuado
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: contintio, contintias, continda; continua-
mos, continuais, contintian.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: continue, continues, continue; continue-
mos, continueis, continuen.
IMPERATIVO CORTES: continue Yd. ; continuen Yds.
41. bullir, to boil, bubble up, bustle
bullendo bullido
PRETERITO DE INDICATIVO: bulli, bulliste, bul!6; bullimos, bullisteis,
bulleron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: bullese, etc.; buUera, etc.
42. gniftir, to growl, grunt grufiendo grufiido
PRET£RITO DE INDICATIVO: grufif, grufiiste, gmfi6; grunimos, gruftis-
teis, grufieron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: gnifiese, etc.; grufiera, etc.
589
590 VERB APPENDIX
43. leer, to read leyendo leido
PRET£RITO DE INDICATTVO: lei, leiste, ley 6; leimos, lefsteis, leyeron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: leyese, etc.; leyera, etc.
44. construir, to construct construyendo construido
PRESENTE DE INDICATIVO: construyo, construyes, construye; cons-
truimos, construis, construyen.
PRESENTE DE SUBJUNTIVO: construya, construyas, construya; cons-
truyamos, construyais, construyan.
PRET£RITO DE INDICATIVO: construi, construiste, construy6; cons-
truimos, construisteis, construyeron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: construyese, etc. ; construyera, etc.
IMPERATIVO: construye (tu); construid (vosotros).
IMPERATTVO CORTES: construya Vd. ; construyan Yds.
44a. argiiir, to argue arguyendo argiiido
PRESENTE: arguyo, arguyes, arguye; argliimos, argiiis, arguyen.
PRESENTS DE SUBJUNTIVO: arguya, arguyas, arguya; arguyamos,
arguyais, arguyan.
PRETERITODE INDICATIVO: argiii, argiiiste, arguy6; argiiimos, argiiis-
teis, arguyeron.
IMPERFECTO DE SUBJUNTIVO: arguyese, etc. ; arguyera, etc.
IMPERATIVO: arguye (tu); argiiid (vosotros).
IMPERATTVO CORTES: arguya Vd.; arguyan Vds.
SOME REGULAR VERBS HAVING IRREGULAR
PAST PARTICIPLES
45-
PARTICIPIO PARTTCIPIO
INFINITTVO PASIVO PASIVO
IRREGULAR REGULAR
abrir, to open abierto
cubrir, to cover cubierto
elegir, to choose, elect electo elegido
escribir, to write escrito
frefr, to fry *frito freido
bendecir, to bless bendito bendecido
imprimir, to print impreso imprimido
morir, to die muerto
prender, to seize, take *preso prendido
provcer, to provide *provisto proveido
resolver, to resolve resuelto
romper, to break, tear *roto rompido
volver, to return vuelto
Compounds of the above verbs have similar irregularities in their
past participles.
In general, in the case of verbs having two forms of the past parti-
ciple, one regular and the other irregular, the regular form is that
used in forming the compound tenses: nemos elegido un presidente;
while the irregular forms are used chiefly as adjectives, especially
after the verb estar: el libro estA impreso. But in the case of the
irregular forms which are starred above, these are used more frequently
than the regular forms in the compound tenses: el ha roto la pagina,
he has torn the page.
The above list contains only a few of the many verbs that have two
forms for the past participle. Consult a good Spanish dictionary
when in doubt as to the past participle of a given verb.
591
COMPOSITION EXERCISES
CHAPTER I
I. Translate the following expressions: i. At the left. 2. The statue
is seen. 3. He sees it again. 4. By name. 5. The cities. 6. The
lights. 7. The lessons. 8. They exclaimed. 9. I shall visit. 10. Has
he entered ?
II. Translate: i. On an afternoon in the month of October a large
boat entered the bay of New York. 2. On the deck of the boat is
seen a small group of travelers. 3. They are looking at the large
city to which they have drawn near. 4. In this group is the Gomez
family. 5. We knew them many years ago in Spain. 6. The years
have passed and the boys are now almost men. 7. They have trav-
eled a great deal through every part of Spain. 8. Now they have
come to visit the United States and other countries of the New World.
9. One of the brothers used to live in California. 10. "What a mar-
vellous city I" Pepe exclaimed.
CHAPTER II
I. Translate the following expressions: i. On seeing the boat.
2. Up the street. 3. Finally. 4. Don't say that (familiar). 5. Mean-
while. 6. The beautiful young lady. 7. This wonderful hotel.
8. So much noise. 9. We used to know this gentleman. 10. Let's
visit our uncle.
II. Translate: i. Dona Ana was looking for her brother on the
dock. 2. He promised to come from California to see her. 3. Finally
she saw him and cried: "Here we are, Ramon ! " 4. The brother saw
his sister and began to wave his hand. 5. The family got on the boat
in Vigo to cross the Atlantic. 6. Don Ramon and his family left
Spain many years ago. 7. The family had to go through the customs-
louse. 8. Ram6n knew what there was to do and he arranged every-
Jiing. 9. Rosa liked her uncle. 10. She liked his manner of speaking
and of smiling.
593
594 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
CHAPTER III
I. Translate the following expressions: i. In truth. 2. They learned
that she was there. 3. You are right. 4. It is said. 5. There were
many people on the dock. 6. They came from everywhere. 7. We
shall not write it (/.). 8. She goes on writing them (the letters). 9. I
lived there three years ago. 10. The ones (m. pi.) that work.
II. Translate: i. The G6mez family was not well acquainted with
North American life. 2. They enjoyed everything that they saw and
did. 3. They went through the city by (en) bus and by taxi. 4. Their
uncle explained how North American football is different from
Spanish football. 5. They were quite surprised at being able to buy
and to read newspapers in Spanish. 6. The film which they saw
came from Mexico or from Argentina. 7. There were many people
there who spoke Spanish. 8. There are more than two hundred
thousand Hispanic families in New York. 9. These people come from
all parts of Spanish America. 10. Indeed an Hispanic person can
live in New York many years without knowing much English.
CHAPTER IV
I. Translate the following expressions: i. He has just arrived.
2. Indeed she is beautiful. 3. He takes pleasure in visiting her. 4. No
sooner said than done. 5. Two days ago she spoke to me. 6. You
have known me for a long time. 7. I have been here for a month.
8. We like this building. 9. She did not like that young man.
10. Give us the money.
II. Translate: i. Quinito saw a young fellow, who drew near a
newsstand and asked the salesman: "Do you have La Prcnsa?"
— "Of course! We sell it every day." 3. Do you speak Spanish?
You were asking for a newspaper in Spanish. 4. We have been study-
ing Spanish in school for two years. 5. We should like to know how
to speak it perfectly. 6. My brother and I have just come to New
York. 7. We should be pleased to be friends of yours. 8. The boys
visited each other every day and went everywhere together. 9. They
spoke Spanish almost always with Robert, which pleased him very
much. 10. That day was memorable both for Quinito and for his
new friend Robert.
CHAPTER V
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Madrid does not resemble
New York. 2. The whole blessed day. 3. Above all. 4. .In the same
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 595
way. 5. We like vegetables. 6. We have written them (/. pi.).
7. They made it (the house). 8. We haven't done it. 9. What is he
saying? 10. Do it (Uds.).
II. Translate: i. Do you like North American dishes ? 2. Indeed I
like them. 3. They know how to prepare meat and vegetables well
here. 4. Above all we like the fruits. 5. " We prefer North American
ice creams," said Rosa and her mother. 6. "Apple pie is the most
marvellous dish that I know," said Quinito. 7. These Spaniards had
a good time in New York. 8. The word pie, which means "pas-
try" in English, means "foot" in Spanish. 9. There are many
words which are written in the same way in English and in Spanish.
10. These words are pronounced in a different manner and mean very
different things.
CHAPTER VI
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Spanish style chicken.
2. French style soup. 3. I want to make myself understood. 4. Each
one. 5. My name is Peter. 6. He sits down. 7. They are at home.
8. Do you understand it ? 9. Don't you want to sit down ? 10. He
and I approached the city.
II. Translate: i. They used to go to eat in one of the Spanish
restaurants of the city. 2. They offer us every thing that any Spaniard
can desire. 3. There is chicken with rice, codfish, lamb chops, roast
chicken, and beef. 4. I think I'd like chicken with rice. 5. "I used
to like lamb chops," said Pepe. 6. We shall take codfish with vege-
tables. 7. Then came fruits and a cheese, and black coffee. 8. Words
are heard which are used in Chile and in Argentina. 9. Some Spanish
Americans pronounce Spanish with a different rhythm from that
which is heard in Spain. 10. But if you learn Spanish you will be
able to make yourself understood through all the Hispanic world.
CHAPTER VII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Sight-seeing bus. 2. He
took a drive. 3. Rush hour (the hour when traffic is heaviest). 4. Say
nothing. 5. It may be. 6. There is no one here. 7. He didn't feel
well. 8. Do you (pi.) feel well ? 9. I never feel well. 10. Sit down
and tell me the truth.
II. Translate: i. The G6mez family visited the Statue of Liberty.
2. From the top of a skyscraper they had a magnificent view of the
596 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
enormous city, 3. They went to West Point on a sight-seeing boat.
4. They took a drive in a taxi through the Holland Tunnel under the
Hudson. 5. They took long walks through Central Park. 6. Spanish
is heard everywhere: in the streets, in the buses and in the subway.
7. "Don't say anything about those subway! "said the uncle. 8. "I
don't like them with their thousands of people." 9. Life in Los
Angeles and in Hollywood is almost as intense as that in New York.
10. The rhythm of North American life is, doubtless, much more
rapid than that of Spanish America.
CHAPTER VIII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. They take leave of their
uncle. 2. I said good-bye to my mother. 3. He has discovered.
4. We have written. 5. You have said. 6. I have brought. 7. My
friends have returned. 8. We cannot bring it. 9. I serve. 10. We
served.
II. Translate: i. Our friends began their trip toward the west.
2. They were sorry to have to leave New York. 3. Above all they
were sorry to say good-bye to their many friends. 4. Don Ramon
thought that it would be better to make the trip through the south.
5. His relatives would be able to visit the regions which the Spaniards
had discovered and explored. 6. They decided to go first to Florida,
then to Louisiana, Texas, New Mexico and California. 7. The taxi
carried them to the huge railroad station. 8. I am glad to begin our
explorations of other parts of this great country. 9. Large cities can
give to the traveler very little idea of what the life of a country is.
10. The United States are one of the richest countries of the world.
CHAPTER DC
I. Translate the following expressions: i. In the sunlight. 2. Some
money. 3. Not any book. 4. I shall not cease to admire it. 5. I
can see it. 6. They know how to study. 7. He learns to study.
8. They try to see him. 9. No soldiers. 10. Some days.
n. Translate: i. The travelers were delighted with the capital of
the nation. 2. They visited the White House, where the President
lives. 3. They decided to spend several days in the city. 4. This
government is a government of the people, by the people and for the
people. 5. Congress was not in session, and they did not attend one
of its sessions. 6. They were received by the Mexican Ambassador.
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 597
7. He led them through the gardens of the Embassy. 8. They spent
many hours in the beautiful building of the Pan American Union.
9. There, one can learn many things about our neighbors. 10. I shall
never forget these days spent in the capital of this great nation.
CHAPTER X
I. Translate the following expressions: i. She made up the bed.
2. Bound for Washington. 3. I should say so. 4. It was cool (the
weather). 5. It is hot today. 6. Look for it. 7. Don't arrive late.
8. I took out the money. 9. I resemble him. 10. They kept on
running.
II. Translate: i. For the first time he had to spend the night on a
North American train. 2. He slept well on the sleeping car. 3. It
seems that it will be very difficult to make up the beds. 4. On the
following morning they ate breakfast in the diner. 5. When they
returned to their sleeping car, the porter had just made up the beds.
6. Who was the first governor of the island of Puerto Rico ? 7. Ponce
de Leon was looking for the Fountain of Youth. 8. He did not find
the famous fountain, but he gave the name of Florida to the country.
9. In a battle with the Indians he was wounded, and died a short
while afterwards. 10. The first European city established in the New
World was St. Augustine (San Agustin).
CHAPTER XI
I. Translate the following expressions: i. This hat becomes Mary.
2. He fell down again. 3. Perhaps he is sick. 4. A friend of mine.
5. This book is mine. 6. Go on! 7. Remember what I said.
8. Don't go out with him. 9. Begin it now. 10. Come with me.
II. Translate: i. The tourist season begins in the first days of
December. 2. In January and in February all the hotels are full.
3. They wish to escape from the cold weather and the snows of the
north. 4. But don't forget that I am from California ! 5. My state
is the great rival of Florida as a land that produces oranges and
lemons. 6. Florida, like California, owes a great deal to the first
Spanish settlers. 7. The orange was brought from Valencia to the
New World by them. 8. How do you like the style of architecture
which is found here and also in California? 9. In St. Augustine
they visited the oldest house in the United States. 10. It was built
in 1599 by the Spaniards.
598 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
CHAPTER XII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. What a pity! 2. They
can fly in six hours. 3. The food is good here. 4. One doesn't enter
here. 5. They met him in Miami. 6. I found out that he had come.
7. I went with him. 8. I know his uncle. 9. Be good. 10. What a
wonderful view.
II. Translate: i. From Miami the enormous planes of the Pan
American Airways leave for all the Latin American countries. 2. One
can fly to Buenos Aires in three days and a half. 3. You can fly also
by the Panagra line to Central America. 4. You can go from San-
tiago de Chile to Buenos Aires in six hours. 5. "What marvellous
airplanes ! " said Rosa. 6. Today the New World is very small thanks
to aviation. 7. Although different languages are spoken in Hispanic
and in Anglo-Saxon America, we know each other much better to-
day. 8. There are rapid means of transport and communication.
9. The tourists went in automobile to Tampa, which is on the west
coast of Florida. 10. Since the War of 1898, Puerto Rico has been a
possession of the United States.
CHAPTER XIII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. From day to day. 2. He
used to study every day. 3. It was cold when I left home. 4. He
studied while I wrote. 5. Is she rich ? She is so. 6. Don't I seem
happy ? You don't seem so. 7. He kept on drawing closer. 8. Who
was he ? 9. I was going through the streets. 10. It was six o'clock.
II. Translate: i. Friendship between the Americas is increasing
from day to day. 2. We Americans are beginning to know each other
much better. 3. The American nations have dedicated themselves to
peace and liberty. 4. All of them want to be good neighbors, and
they are. 5. But don't they fear "the Colossus (coloso) of the
North ?" 6. Not now, because Uncle Sam has changed a great deal.
7. The construction of the Panama Canal (el canal de Panaml)
brought great benefits to all the Americas. 8. Our neighbors have a
rich culture which is worth a great deal. 9. The base of friendship is
to know well the language of our neighbors. 10. Don't forget that
English is studied a great deal in the schools of Cuba, Puerto Rico,
Mexico, and other Latin American countries.
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 599
CHAPTER XIV
I. Translate the following expressions: i. The next year. 2. It
injured our friendship. 3. Please study this lesson. 4. Here and
there. 5. Downstream. 6. They fell. 7. I led him to the water.
8. They put the boat in the water. 9. It is I. 10. Water is good to
drink.
II. Translate: i. Please tell me the story of Hernando De Soto's
trip. 2. Soto had gained fame and wealth with Pizarro, the con-
queror of Peru. 3. Soto left Spain with four boats and six hundred
and twenty men. 4. The expedition arrived in the bay at Tampa on
the twenty-fifth of the month. 5. For three years they marched here
and there through the southern states. 6. Many fell ill and others
died. 7. Finally in 1541 Soto saw the Mississippi river. 8. Near
the Red river he fell ill and died. 9. They put his body in a coffin
made from the trunk of a tree and threw it into the river. 10. In
truth, Soto did not discover the Mississippi river, for Alonso de
Pineda had seen the place where it empties (desembocar) into the
Gulf (Golfo) of Mexico in 1519.
CHAPTER XV
I. Translate the following expressions: i. I think so. 2. He became
(got to be) a general. 3. There were several hundred, soldiers on the
boat. 4. One must see this film. 5. That table (near you). 6. That
mountain (yonder). 7. Some rivers. 8. That is not true. 9. Who
believes this ? 10. The moon is shining.
II. Translate: i. Quinito left Tampa for the west. 2. It seems
that when Soto reached Tampa there were three pigs on the boat
brought from Havana. 3. During the travels of the soldiers these
animals followed them. 4. The number of animals increased so that
when Soto died there were more than 700. 5. The soldiers lived from
the meat of these animals while they were looking for the coast of
Mexico. 6. Pigs saved the expedition of Hernando de Soto. 7. In-
deed, pigs have had a great deal to do with the history of America.
8. Pizarro was a swineherd when he was [a] boy. 9. He became one
of the greatest of all of the conquerors of the New World. 10. The
Spaniards brought to the New World many other domestic animals
which did not exist there before: the horse, the cow, the donkey, the
mule and the sheep.
600 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
CHAPTER XVI
I. Translate the following expressions: i. In the middle of the boat.
2. Under the empire of the Incas. 3. The greater part. 4. A meal
was served. 5. La Salle, who had discovered. 6. The boy whose
parents. 7. The house which I liked. 8. Liberty was proclaimed.
9. The money has been found. 10. The professor whom I had seen.
II. Translate: i. In New Orleans are found traces of the Spanish
and French civilizations. 2. La Salle came to New Orleans from
Canada in the year 1666. 3. La Salle died after 1684, [having been]
killed by one of his men. 4. A town was established by the French.
5. In 1718 New Orleans was founded on the site where it stands to-
day. 6. What were the Spaniards doing during that century and a
half? 7. Didn't they try to populate the territory which they had
explored ? 8. In the eighteenth century, Louisiana represented what
would be today the third part of the United States. 9. In 1804, the
United States bought from France, for $15,000,000, this immense ter-
ritory. 10. The travelers liked the old French quarter very much.
CHAPTER XVII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. He had a house built.
2. He became the leader. 3. What an odd name! 4. He sold it
again. 5. Seventy-seven. 6. Nine hundred and seventy-six. 7. One
hundred and thirty-four. 8. One thousand three hundred and
ninety-five. 9. He constructed the building. 10. In Havana.
II. Translate: i. Cabeza de Vaca was one of the lieutenants of
Panfilo de Narvaez. 2. In a storm Narvaez perished, and all of his
men, except Cabeza de Vaca and three others, died. 3. The four men
began to march toward the west. 4. Finally, after eight years of
travel, they reached the city of Mexico. 5. What a strange name is
Cabeza de Vaca ! 6. One of his ancestors was a shepherd in Spain
some three centuries before the birth of this conqueror. 7. This
ancestor put the skull (el crfneo) of a cow at the entrance to a pass in
the mountains. 8. He did it to indicate that the Spanish army could
pass through there and surprise the enemy. 9. Afterwards, Cabeza
de Vaca spent many years in South America. 10. On returning to
Spain he wrote a book, which is called "Shipwrecks, Wanderings, and
Miracles" (Naufragios, peregrinaciones y milagros}.
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 601
CHAPTER XVIII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. On the banks of the river.
2. We avenged ourselves for his death. 3. He runs rapidly. 4. He is
a captain. 5. We are not going to remain here. 6. We shall avenge
ourselves. 7. I shall know it. 8. What do you know? 9. San
Antonio was occupied by the Mexicans. 10. Why did you leave ?
II. Translate,: i. When San Antonio was founded by Martin de
Alarcon, it was called "San Antonio de Bejar" 2. Tourists like the
Spanish and Mexican atmosphere of the city. 3. Quinito heard
Spanish spoken in the streets and in certain sections of the city; it
was the only language that was heard. 4. Near the hotel is the
Alamo, which is venerated by the Texans. 5. It is a symbol of liberty.
6. The Mexican government of [el] General Santa Ana did not wish
to permit the foundation of more North American colonies. 7. The
Alamo was defended by only 180 Texans. 8. In a battle which lasted
a short while the Mexicans killed all the defenders. 9. After the
battle on the banks of the river San Jacinto, Texas remained a free
and independent republic. 10. The flag of the Republic of Texas was
a single white star on a blue field.
CHAPTER XIX
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Cruel to me. 2. On the
contrary. 3. It is good for nothing. 4. Some books. 5. What a
beautiful girl ! 6. I can (7 know how to) build a house. 7. They drove
us to the station. 8. Cross the river with me. 9. Translate it
rapidly. 10. They had a good time in San Antonio.
II. Translate: i. They liked the Mexican dishes of tamales and
tortillas. 2. They heard ancient songs sung which had come from
Spain centuries ago. 3. Of what use were the missions? 4. They
were centers of religion and civilization. 5. The brothers taught the
Indians not only religion but also the cultivation of their fields.
6. The cross went by the side of the flag and the sword. 7. In many
Hispanic American countries, there exist today millions of Indians.
8. And where are the millions of Indians who used to live in North
America ? 9. On seeing the Mission of San Jose de Aguayo, Quinito
exclaimed: "What a beautiful church!" 10. The mission of San
Francisco is still used today.
602 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
CHAPTER XX
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Let's go to Buenos Aires !
2. Backwards. 3. Let us not forget. 4. He is richer than anyone.
5. Who sees him? 6. What is the longest day of the year? 7. Be-
cause he was tired he went to bed. 8. I am more tired than ever.
9. What is the name of the city ? 10. We left without seeing him.
II. Translate: i. The traveler stopped for two days in El Paso.
2. Many years ago it was a great center of Spanish missionaries.
3. In the valleys of the Rio Grande and the (del) Pecos, there were
twenty-five missions. 4. Quinito enjoyed a walk through the streets.
5. How many names of Spanish origin are found here in the south-
west ! 6. On looking at a map of Texas and other states of the south-
west, these names and others are found: El Paso, Rio Grande,
Colorado, etc. 7. Let's not forget that there are many Spanish
words that have passed into (al) North American English. 8. I am
more interested than ever in these things. 9. The word "hoosegow"
for example, comes from the Spanish word "juzgado." 10. I heard
a Mexican once say that he was going to "baquear el troque" — that
is to say — "to move the truck back wards. "
CHAPTER XXI
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Give it to me. 2. Show
it to us. 3. Will you show them to us ? 4. They write it (the letter)
to us. 5. He is giving it to me. 6. He continues to speak. 7, You
do not wish to give it (the book) to them. 8. Offer (Yds.) it to him.
9. They don't wish to see me. 10. Who showed her the documents ?
II. Translate: i. Quinito and his friends finally arrived at Santa
Fe. 2. At one time it was the capital of an immense region of the
southwest. 3. The name reminded Pepe of Santa Fe in Spain, a
small village which is near Granada. 4. There the last King of
Granada surrendered to Ferdinand and Isabel in the year 1492.
5. In 1539 one of the Spanish friars organized an exposition to dis-
cover the "Seven Cities of Cibola." 6. The poor brother discovered
the famous cities, which were no more than poor villages with houses
of adobe. 7. Other expeditions were organized to try to find the riches
which the Spaniards thought were found there. 8. They encountered
only poor Indians and mountains. 9. The Franciscan fathers
founded many missions in the territory and everything was going
along well. 10. Santa Fe continues to be very Spanish, it seems to me.
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 603
CHAPTER XXII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. In the manner of . 2. Per
cent. 3. The same as. 4. The meeting took place. 5. He engaged
in explorations. 6. An adobe house. 7. A gold ring. 8. A wooden
ship. 9. Who said it? 10. Don't offer it to them.
II. Translate: i. The village of Taos is very ancient, having
been founded before the arrival of the Spaniards. 2. They are en-
gaged in the manufacture of objects of silver and of pottery. 3. The
Indians of this region have conserved the language of the conquerors.
4. Quinito and his friends bought blankets, jars, rings and bracelets
from the Indians. 5. In the first days of the month of September of
each year a festival is held. 6. The people dress in the manner of the
conquerors of the year 1693. 7. Old Spanish songs are sung, and
dances of Spanish origin are seen. 8. Fifty per cent of the inhabitants
have Spanish names. 9. The "Palace of the Governors," which was
built in 1610, is the oldest official building in (de) the United States.
10. The famous North American general, Lew Wallace, wrote the
novel "Ben Hur" in this building.
CHAPTER XXIII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. He did not realize that.
2. He leads a good life. 3. In the moonlight. 4. The fourth house
on the left. 5. The ninth lesson. 6. The first book. 7. Isabel the
Second. 8. Pepe asked his uncle for a dollar. 9. We asked the
traveler for the money. 10. Buy the donkeys from that man.
II. Translate: i. Pepe liked to hear the Spanish songs which a
young lady was singing. 2. The language which is used is an interest-
ing mixture of the old Spanish language and of modern English.
3. What happened to the colony of Santa Fe? 4. It continued
being a Spanish possession for more than a century. 5. When
Mexico obtained its independence in 1821, Santa Fe continued
flourishing. 6. Mexico ceded an immense territory to the United
States in 1848. 7. St. Louis, Missouri, was at tha* time the center of
Yankee commerce. 8. The Santa Fe trail (El camino de Santa Fe),
which ended in that city, increased in importance. 9. The princi-
pal line of the railway does not go through Santa Fe. 10. A line
was constructed to the city, but today this line is almost aban-
doned.
604 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
CHAPTER XXIV
I. Translate the following expressions: i. He acted as guide.
2. They consented to remain in Santa Fe. 3. He is sending me a
document. 4. These (pencils) are mine; those (near you) are yours;
and those (yonder) are his. 5. He was carrying his hat in his hand.
6. She takes off her gloves. 7. They did not send them (the books) to
us. 8. This seems to be the truth. 9. Send us those flowers (yonder).
10. These (flowers) are beautiful.
II. Translate: i. Bound for Arizona, our travelers passed through
the city of Albuquerque. 2. The city was founded in 1706, and its
name honors one of the viceroys of Mexico. 3. Don't you want to
tell us more about Fray Marcos de Niza ? 4. The Franciscan friars
organized this exposition. 5. Estebanico went with them as guide.
6. He knew how to speak several Indian languages. 7. He pretended
to be able to cure them. 8. The savages thought that he was a god.
9. The Zufii Indians killed Estebanico and all [of] the Indian friends
who accompanied him. 10. The good friar decided to return to
Mexico.
CHAPTER XXV
I. Translate the following expressions: i. They thought they had
seen a man. 2. To have given it to us. 3. One of the most beautiful
girls. 4. The richer of the two. 5. He is better than his brother.
6. The best man in the world. 7. Without offering the boy anything.
8. This is the largest building in the world. 9. This house is larger
than that one. 10. This village is nearer than the other.
II. Translate: i. We ought to visit Colorado. 2. A Spanish ex-
plorer discovered it many years ago. 3. All that occurred many
years before the arrival of the English Pilgrims (peregrines) in 1620
at Plymouth. 4. Quinito and his brother got down from the train.
5. The grandeur of the view left them without words. 6. All of them
except the mother came to the banks of the river. 7. The first city
of America was founded in Santo Domingo in 1496. 8. Havana was
not founded until 1519. 9. Vera Cruz was founded by Cortes in 1519.
10. Cortes took a great Aztec city in 1521 and called it Mexico.
CHAPTER XXVI
I. Translate the following expressions: i. From now on. 2. He
came upon his friend. 3. He was about to leave. 4. It occurs to me.
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 60S
5. You went away. 6. He laughed. 7. They are dying. 8. I want
you to stay here. 9. We want you to tell it to us. 10. I want him to
speak.
II. Translate: i. Thanks to Spain, a large part of America was
discovered, explored and populated. 2. In California, Quinito will
see more interesting traces of the Spanish occupation. 3. One day
a good Father was taking a walk when a bull drew near him. 4. The
Father shouted to the bull: "Peace, evil spirit! Go away!" 5. I
don't want you to stay here. 6. I order you to go away. 7. The bull
looked at the friar for several moments then turned around and disap-
peared. 8. Another friar asked for a parasol, underwear and a sleep-
ing cap from Mexico. 9. One of his Indians opened the package and
decided to take it. 10. He put the sleeping cap on his head, opened
the parasol and went away to visit some friends of his.
CHAPTER XXVII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. When the travelers got
down at the station in Los Angeles, Ramon's wife came to greet them.
2. She was accompanied by her only son, Pedro, a boy of fifteen
years of age. 3. Dolores was a North American but she could ex-
press herself very well in Spanish. 4. How glad I am to see you!
5. Pedro and I have been expecting you for many days. 6. I am sorry
that you do not like our large cities. 7. What a magnificent house !
8. They found a large swimming pool. 9. Do you allow us to swim
in the pool ? 10. The three boys knew how to swim very well and
they had a good time in the water.
CHAPTER XXVIII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. At sunset. 2. They ar-
rived on time. 3. He worked unceasingly. 4. Let's take a trip.
5. A week having passed. 6. The day having arrived. 7. It's
necessary that he dress well. 8. I'm sorry that he is here. 9. I
want her to accompany me. 10. It is possible that I may see him.
II. Translate: i. That night the boys learned for the first time
what was (cuil era) Ram6n's occupation. 2. He was a movie director
in Hollywood. 3. It is fitting that a movie director should not die of
hunger. 4. It is necessary for him to dress well and to live in a pretty
house. 5. Will you take us to see a film shot ? 6. Later it will be
possible for me to accompany you. 7. They visited the beaches on
606 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
the coast. 8. Afterwards they went to see the mission of San Gabriel.
9. It is one of the twenty-one missions which the Franciscan fathers
founded in California. 10. Friar Junipero Serra was the leader of the
Franciscan missionaries, who arrived in June of 1769.
CHAPTER XXIX
I. Translate the following expressions: i. He plays a part. 2. He
serves as guide. 3. He ordered that they be sent. 4. It was probable
that she enjoyed it. 5. I asked that he give it. 6. He ordered that
we learn it. 7. I feared that someone would follow me. 8. He
doubted that I could do it. 9. I wanted him to speak to me. 10. I
wanted her to read it.
II. Translate: i. A Mexican law put the missions under the
dominion of the government, and the latter took their property away
from them. 2. Much later some were aided by those interested in
conserving them. 3. Finally Uncle Ramon asked Quinito to ac-
company him on a visit. 4. To think that we are going to become
acquainted with some actors and actresses ! 5. Quinito remained by
the side of the beautiful actress. 6. Uncle Ramon explained that
it would be necessary for the company to go on working. 7. On
finishing the scene the tourists applauded loudly. 8. On bidding
good-bye Quinito did not appear. 9. " Come at once, Quinito, for we
are waiting for you," said his uncle. 10. In New York we saw some
good Mexican films.
CHAPTER XXX
I. Translate the following expressions: i. About fifty dollars.
2. He looked up. 3. It died of old age. 4. There isn't any (money).
5. What has become of him ? 6. We didn't know which was the best.
7. We don't know which is the best. 8. I know which is the best.
9. I don't think that there is any money. 10. I didn't think that
there was any.
II. Translate: i. The Gomez family went over almost all the city.
2. They spent a week in San Francisco. 3. In the bay they saw many
ships and the two immense bridges which cross the waters of one of
the largest ports in the world. 4. The city was built around the
mission of San Francisco. 5. In the park there is a monument to
Junipero Serra, who founded so many California missions. 6. They
finally returned to Beverly Hills to spend some time with their rela-
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 607
tives before leaving for Mexico. 7. They enjoyed chatting in Spanish
with the inhabitants of the Mexican quarter in Los Angeles. 8. The
mother thought that it would be better for them to travel by airplane.
9. Do you think that there is any danger in traveling by airplane ?
10. Their relatives carried them to the airport.
CHAPTER XXXI
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Along the road. 2. Down-
ward. 3. From time to time. 4. The same thing. 5. I shall have
arrived at eight o'clock. 6. He had a house built. 7. There is nothing
which I like better. 8. No one knows me here. 9. There is no one
who hears us. 10. They are looking for a cook who can prepare rice
well.
II. Translate: i. It was the first time that Quinito's mother had
flown in an airplane. 2. When the plane took off dona Ana was
afraid. 3. Quinito was not afraid, but he was very much excited.
4. They saw Los Angeles in the distance. 5. They could speak to
each other and hear each other without any difficulty. 6. The plane
landed first in Mexicali in Lower California. 7. Many Mexicans had
come to see the arrival and departure of the plane. 8. For me there's
no language which is as beautiful as Spanish. 9. They continued
flying along the west coast of Mexico. 10. The Gomez family was
very sorry not to be able to stop in Guadalajara.
CHAPTER XXXII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. At one time (i.e. at the
same time). 2. I being [the] leader (while I am the leader). 3. Who-
ever comes. 4. He wished me to bring it. 5. Whatever thing he
brought me. 6. He prefers tamales. 7. Whoever he is. 8. He was
sorry that I was leading the soldiers. 9. He wanted me to ask him
for it. 10. She becomes tired easily.
II. Translate: i. Mexico was at one time the center of a very
advanced civilization; in that city was the court. 2. This city de-
lights me so much that I shall never forget it. 3. The problems of the
industrial and agricultural life are many. 4. The Mexican govern-
ment has done a great deal for the poor people. 5. From 1877 to
1910 Diaz gdVerned the country with a strong hand. 6. Afterwards
there followed years of revolution and of civil war. 7. Whoever
conies to live in Mexico, as I, wishes to remain here. 8. It is a
608 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
country of enormous mineral wealth. 9. There are petroleum wells,
silver, copper, lead and gold mines. 10. With time they will develop
their natural and human resources.
CHAPTER XXXIII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. He delays in sending it
to me. 2. He refuses to give it to us. 3. Have Mary come. 4. Let's
remember. 5. Let's sit down. 6. Let's not put them (the hats) on.
7. Let's ask him, not her, for it. 8. Let no one say it to me. 9. Let
Anna give it to Mary. 10. Let's not sit down.
II. Translate: i. Cortes left Cuba in 1519 with four hundred
soldiers and many horses. 2. Near Vera Cruz he disembarked and
founded there the city which was the first of European origin on the
continent. 3. There Cortes burned his boats, making it impossible
for his soldiers to retire. 4 Let no one say that it was easy to travel
in that country. 5. Let's not forget that he had only a small army.
6. He finally came to a large city of 300,000 inhabitants. 7. The
Spaniards were astonished on seeing the beautiful city. 8. The
Indians were afraid of the Spaniards' firearms and of their horses.
9. Moctezuma permitted the Spaniards to enter the city, and the
conqueror to appear before him. 10. Moctezuma thought that
Cortes might be a great god.
CHAPTER XXXIV
I. Translate the following expressions: i. It fits into his pocket.
2. The best part of the picture (film). 3. Until the soldiers come.
4. When we get home. 5. He did it in order that all the world might
see; he does it so that all the world may see. 6. As soon as they
draw near the village. 7. When they reached home. 8. Let's take
him to the hotel. 9. Provided that he does it. 10. In order that he
might live.
II. Translate: i. It is said that not one statue of Cortes exists in
Mexico. 2. One day Cortes drew near the coach of the Emperor
Charles [the] Fifth. 3. He wanted to ask a favor of the Emperor.
4. I am the man who gave you (os) more provinces than your grand-
parents left you. 5. There is in Mexico a famous tree called the
"Noche Triste" 6. Under it Cortfe sat and wept on seeing the few
men who had escaped the treachery of the Indians. 7. Years ago,
the large stone called the "Aztec Calendar" was discovered where
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 609
the cathedral was being built. 8. Before the Spaniards arrived, the
Indians used to worship certain gods which represented the sun, the
moon and the stars. 9. For two pesos the ladies bought so many
flowers that the boat could scarcely hold them. 10. It looks like you
have bought one of the gardens of Xochimilco.
CHAPTER XXXV
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Nowadays. 2. He insists
on coining. 3. Most tired. 4. Most beautiful. 5. Come here!
6. He studied there. 7. They traveled there. 8. I hope that they
have a good time. 9. Don't go there. 10. They ordered us to come.
II. Translate: i. The village is on the banks of a lake. 2. On
Sundays and holidays, canoes full of people pass through the canals.
3. Tomorrow is Sunday, and, if you wish, we shall go there. 4. On
the lake vendors insisted upon selling them fruits and flowers. 5. The
mother had promised not to buy anything and she refused to buy the
fruits and flowers. 6. They chose one of the canoes which was named
"Rosa." 7. I wish that I were able to come here every day ! 8. Can
you tell me the origin of the name "Mexico" ? 9. The god of war of
the Indians was named Mexihco. 10. Very few of the Spanish set-
tlers learned the language of the Indians.
CHAPTER XXXVI
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Instead of singing.
2. Even so. 3. Wherever he may be. 4. He probably is your enemy.
5. They must have seen him. 6. Who can have it ? 7. It is probably
six o'clock. 8. Whoever comes. 9. He educated himself. 10. To
whatever place he goes.
II. Translate: i. We noticed that they used many words which
we had never heard before. 2. There are many words which are dif-
ferent from those which are used in Spain. 3. In Mexico you say
tren for streetcar (tramway), chamaco for boy, camidn for bus, and
nieve for ice cream. 4. There are many Mexican words which have
been taken from North American English. 5. Many people believe
that Mexican pronunciation is very much like the pronunciation in
southern Spain. 6. It is very easy to learn to use the Mexican pro-
nunciation instead of the Castilian. 7. But the Mexicans speak
Spanish, and they write it perfectly. 8. Wherever an Englishman
may travel through the United States, he understands what is said.
610 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
9. A person who speaks Spanish understands the Spanish of Mexico
or of Argentina as easily as the Spanish of Spain. 10. The first [print-
ing] press in the New World was established in Mexico in 1534, more
than a century before (antes de que) a press was established in
Cambridge.
CHAPTER XXXVII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. He started (set out)
running. 2. She was riding a horse. 3. I am somewhat tired.
4. Is he sick? Yes, very. 5. Frequently. 6. She was not at all
tired. 7. Open it for me. 8. We saw it (the house) built. 9. We hear
the song sung. 10. He is closing it (the door) on us (dative of interest).
II. Translate: i. What pretty dresses they are wearing ! 2. They
know how to ride very well. 3. They like to take walks through the
city on Sunday. 4. There are many typical Mexican dances. 5. The
jarabe tapatio may be called the national dance of Mexico. 6. I wish
that you would show us how it is danced. 7. We shall see it danced
some day. 8. Being somewhat tired, the travelers sat down on one
of the benches in Chapultepec Wood. 9. Quinito wanted the family
to return to the hotel. 10. Pepe wanted his brother to remain with
him.
CHAPTER XXXVIII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. I am at your command.
2. Soon after entering the hotel. 3. His father is a businessman.
4. On the return trip. 5. Perhaps they saw him. 6. Let's go there.
7. Write (familiar) him at once. 8. Sit (familiar) down here.
9. Close it (the door). 10. Give it (the letter) to us (familiar pi.).
II. Translate: i. There were so many interesting things that it
was impossible for the boys to see all of them. 2. They finally de-
cided to take a trip to Puebla in their Uncle Arthur's car. 3. They
had a magnificent view of the two mountains, Popocatepetl and
Ixtaccihuatl. 4. The latter means "Sleeping Woman"; the former
means "Mountain of Smoke." 5. In Cholula they say that there is
a church for every day of the year. 6. The industry was established
by Franciscan friars, who came from Spain. 7. Look at this pretty
jar, mama ! Look at it carefully. 8. It is said that the first mass in
Mexico was celebrated in the church of San Francisco. 9. Quinito
did not want to stay hi Puebla. 10. He wished his family to con-
tinue their journey.
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 611
CHAPTER XXXIX
I. Translate the following expressions: i. About thirty minutes.
2. Meanwhile. 3. The family went on its way. 4. He was careful.
5. Be careful ! 6. I should like to see her. 7. Please (familiar) do it.
8. Put (familiar) it on the table. 9. Come here ! (Express four ways,
singular and pl.y familiar and formal.) 10. Let's not sit down here.
II. Translate: i. Arthur asked his relatives if they would like
to accompany him to Acapulco. 2. The women did not want to go,
but they told Pepe and Quinito to go with their uncle. 3. Cortes
liked Cuernavaca so much that he had a palace built there. 4. Today,
in this palace are many of the paintings of Diego Rivera. 5. [El]
Emperor Maximilian and his wife Carlota also liked Cuernavaca very
much. 6. They lived in the Borda palace, which is a hotel today.
7. Please drive carefully on this mountainous highway. 8. In Taxco
is the oldest mine on the continent. 9. In the eighteenth century it
cost Borda six million pesos to build this church. 10. His uncle per-
suaded Quinito to leave the church.
CHAPTER XL
I. Translate the following expressions: i. The life in Mexico de-
lights the tourists. 2. There are many interesting types of Indians
who sell toys, objects of silver and many other things. 3. By the
side of modern trucks are oxen and donkeys. 4. Twenty per cent of
the population of Mexico is of the white race. 5. The rest are Indians
or descendants of the two races, the white race and the Indian.
6. The enormous pyramids of Teotihuacan were dedicated to the
Sun and to the Moon by the Indians. 7. In the ninth and tenth
centuries the Indians constructed pyramids and temples in Yucatan
and Guatemala. 8. Sometimes I am sorry that we came to Mexico
by airplane and not by car. 9. They say that the new Pan American
Highway is going to bring many tourists to Mexico. 10. Some day
it will unite all the Americas, from Alaska to Argentina.
CHAPTER XLI
I. Translate the following expressions: i. We remember what our
uncle told us. 2. In view of the circumstances. 3. He succeeded in
doing it. 4. Come what may. 5. I am sorry that he is ill. 6. We
asked that he write. 7. We had asked that he should write. 8. We
612 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
order him to return. 9. We ordered that he return. 10. We had
ordered that he should return.
II. Translate: i. The bullfights which are held in Mexico are
equal to those which used to be held in Madrid. 2. Many famous
bullfighters from Spain have achieved great success in Mexico.
3. The boys were glad that the women had not accompanied them.
4. Come what may, I shall never go back to a bullfight again. 5. I
am sorry that that black bull had to die this afternoon. 6. Pro-
vided the players are good, we prefer a game of football. 7. Rosa
asked her uncle to tell her something more about Jose de la Borda,
who built the church at Taxco. 8. He took from the mines a great
fortune which he dedicated to the construction of the Cathedral of
Taxco. 9. I doubt that you have read much about the Emperors of
Mexico. 10. Do you want me to tell you something about them ?
CHAPTER XLII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. He tried in vain to study.
2. No matter how tired he is. 3. No matter how bad they were.
4. I brought them yesterday. 5. I bring them. 6. He wanted me
to bring them. 7. Bring them to him (familiar). 8. Don't bring
(polite) them to us. 9. No matter how pretty they are. 10. No
matter how much he denies it.
II. Translate: i. Cortes commanded that Moctezuma should be
killed. 2. Who wanted to be Emperor of Mexico ? 3. Ferdinand the
Seventh refused to consent to the plan of Iturbide. 4. After promis-
ing never to return, Iturbide landed in Mexico, was seized and con-
demned to death. 5. Maximilian was the kst Emperor of Mexico,
and the most unfortunate of all. 6. Maximilian ordered that all
soldiers caught with firearms should be shot. 7. The United States
refused to recognize the government of Maximilian. 8. They asked
Napoleon to withdraw, the French soldiers from Mexico. 9. Maxi-
milian could have 'escaped from the country, 'but he preferred to
remain. 10. Carlota asked Napoleon to continue aiding her husband.
CHAPTER XLIH
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Fifteen feet in width.
2. Between them. 3. At night. 4. During the morning. 5. The
best part. 6. Six feet in length. 7. Behind the house. 8. In order
that he do it. 9. After him. 10. Draw near (polite) I
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 613
II. Translate: i. Wherever they would look, the travelers saw
soldiers. 2. When they got on the plane they wished that they had
had more time to see the many interesting things in Mexico. 3. From
Mexico the travelers flew to Antigua, capital of Guatemala. 4. They
continued their journey to San Salvador, capital of the only country
of Central America which has no exit to the Atlantic Ocean. 5. In
the countries of Central America coffee, tobacco, rice, bananas and
sugar cane are produced. 6. One of the most important products of
Guatemala is mahogany. 7. The capital of Costa Rica being at an
elevation of five thousand feet, the climate is very agreeable. 8. In
Costa Rica the inhabitants have conserved the best which their
Spanish ancestors left to them. 9. Between the years 1823 and 1839
the Central American countries were a confederation of republics.
10. Several days later the tourists continued their aerial trip, and
landed in Panama.
CHAPTER XLIV
I. Translate the following expressions: i. It is very difficult to cross
the country of Nicaragua. 2. If I have the time I shall go. 3. If I
had the time I would go. 4. If he comes I shall go. 5. If he should
come I would go. 6. If he has money he spends it. 7. If he had
money he would spend it. 8. I would buy it if she wanted it. 9. I
shall buy it if she wants it. 10. Buy it for me if the price is low.
II. Translate: i. The city of Panama, although it is situated in the
center of a zone of land which belongs to the United States, continues
to be the territory of Panama. 2. Panama is the crossroads of all the
countries of the world. 3. If you are looking for anything, no matter
what it is, you will find it there. 4. The isthmus is very narrow here,
only fifty miles wide. 5. If we had the time I would like to pass
through the canal on a boat. 6. Balboa saw the Pacific Ocean for the
first time in September of the year 1523. 7. He made the journey
from one ocean to the other in twenty-six days. 8. You can fly from
Cristobal to Panama in twenty minutes today. 9. Pedrarias was an
enemy of Balboa, whom he captured and killed. 10. It was (fue-
ron) the English who destroyed the city when the pirate (pirata),
Henry Morgan, attacked it.
CHAPTER XLV
I. Translate the following expressions: i. The fact is he is here now.
2. He is opposed to our project. 3. It seems so. 4. He was seen by
614 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
the soldiers. 5. She was killed by her husband. 6. The women were
respected by their children. 7. The door will be opened by the presi-
dent. 8. If he had seen me he would not have come. 9. If we had
had the time we would have visited her. 10. If you do not pay me I
will tell your father.
II. Translate: i. If Quinito had had the time he would have
stopped in Quito. 2. He was sorry that his mother was not able to
visit the city. 3. They were to spend the night in Guayaquil.
4. "Panama" hats are not made in Panama but (sino) in the villages
of Ecuador. 5. After six hours the plane landed near Lima, where
they were going to remain two days. 6. In the great cathedral of the
city they looked at the mummy of the conqueror Pizarro. 7. On one
of his expeditions Pizarro remained with sixteen men on a small
island near the coast. 8. He was finally able to return to Panama
and afterwards he returned to Spain. 9. When Pizarro captured the
Inca he promised him his (la) liberty provided that he would fill the
room in which he was with gold. 10. The Indians brought gold and
silver that was worth $15,000,000.00, but Pizarro ordered the death
of the chief.
CHAPTER XLVI
I. Translate the following expressions: i. He retraced his steps.
2. They arrived at the same time. 3. If the road were good we would
go. 4. We ought to be good citizens. 5. He must be ill. 6. You
ought to work. 7. You must (you have to) work. 8. One must study.
9. You ought to know that. 10. If I had known him well I would
have spoken to him.
II. Translate: i. All this interests me so much that I should like to
see the capital of the empire of the Incas. 2. If it were possible I would
like to go to Cuzco. 3. They did not go by airplane but (sino) by
automobile and train. 4. At a height of 16,000 feet the road forked
and one branch continued in a northeastern direction. 5. Our friends
followed the other branch, which turned back toward the south, pass-
ing between some of the highest mountains of the Andes. 6. "How
could the Indians bring such large stones here ?" asked Quinito, when
they visited Sacsahuaman. 7. They built these walls without any
mortar. 8. If the road were good we would go to Machupicchu to
see the ruins of the temple dedicated to the Sun God. 9. In Lake
Titicaca there are several small steamers. 10. They were brought
there many years ago.
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 615
CHAPTER XLVII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. In his turn. 2. Around
here. 3. Together with his brother. 4. The father and mother.
5. His aunt and uncle. 6. Mine (my dog) is here. 7. The Indians
we saw. 8. The students we met. 9. Your friends (/. pi.) and mine.
10. He ordered a suit made.
II. Translate: i. Lake Titicaca forms part of the border between
Peru and Bolivia. 2. It occupies an area of more than 3,000 square
miles. 3. The Indian boats are called balsas. 4. These balsas are
constructed from the trunks of certain trees which grow on the banks
of the lake. 5. What a great empire was that of the Incas ! 6. After
the death of the Emperor the Indians hid beneath the ground a great
deal of gold. 7. Do you know the story of the 11,000 llamas?
8. These llamas were traveling in the direction of the capital when
their masters learned of the death of the Emperor. 9. The Indians
put the gold and the animals which were carrying it in a place which
is still not known. 10. All Peru and parts of Bolivia and Ecuador
contain gold and silver.
CHAPTER XLVIII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. What is old (that which).
2. What is beautiful. 3. The best (the best thing). 4. I didn't know
how beautiful she was. 5. Washington was the first president of the
United States. 6. Washington and Bolivar are respected. 7. I re-
member that. 8. They sing (there is singing) in the class. 9. The
name Obregdn comes from O'Brien. 10. People dance here all night
[long].
II. Translate: i. "What a magnificent view!" said Rosa. 2. I
did not know how beautiful La Paz was. 3. There were llamas in the
street by the side of modern automobiles and trucks. 4. On Six-
teenth of July Avenue there is a statue to Simon Bolivar, the great
liberator. 5. Sucre was the first president of Bolivia. 6. Although
Bolfvar was a Venezuelan he is considered the hero of Spanish Ameri-
can independence. 7. Venezuela declared itself independent [on] the
fifteenth of July, 1811. 8. Bolivar has been called "the eagle" and
San Martin "the fox" of the revolution. 9. The two are respected
in all parts of the world. 10. The tourists could go by air to Arica
on the Chilean coast and from there to Santiago.
616 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
CHAPTER XLIX
I. Translate the following expressions: i. In the middle of the
afternoon. 2. He has fifty men at his disposal. 3. She regained con-
sciousness. 4. Now that he is here. 5. Easily and perfectly. 6. It
was he. 7. It is I. 8. All except me. 9. Between you and me.
10. Quickly and easily.
II. Translate: i. They spent the night in Arica, and on the fol-
lowing morning the airplane carried them rapidly toward Santiago.
2. Chile is 2,600 miles long and no miles wide. 3. The northern part
of the country is a dry region in which it almost never rains. 4. In
the southern part of the country it is very cold in the months of July
and August. 5. In the central part is a very rich valley in which are
produced fruits, cereals and vegetables. 6. From the grapes very
good wines are made. 7. The desert in the northern part of Chile has
been the source of enormous wealth. 8. Nitrate (el salitre) used to
be used to make powder (p61vora) and to fertilize (abonar) the fields.
9. The tourists remained a short while in the capital of Chile.
10. Quinito spent several days at Vina de Mar, a favorite city of the
Chileans.
CHAPTER L
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Quinito went to meet
Pepe. 2. Never again. 3. Day after tomorrow at three o'clock.
4. I shall never do it again. 5. Neither do I wish to imitate him.
6. We made a little trip. 7. A little Indian mother. 8. He left with-
out seeing her. 9. He was hated by the Indians. 10. The con-
queror was feared by his men.
II. Translate: i. Another brother lived near the city of Chas-
coimis not far from Buenos Aires. 2. They asked him to come to
meet them in the capital. 3. We are not going to move from here.
4. We are not going to leave until day after tomorrow. 5. Seeing the
statue of San Martin impressed them a great deal. 6. Near Mendoza,
in 1815, San Martin spent two years in organizing an army. 7. One
of his lieutenants was a general from Chile named O'Higgins. 8. The
army fell upon the Spaniards at Chacabuco. 9. Two days later they
took Santiago. 10. San Martin insisted that they honor O'Higgins
with the title of director of Chile.
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 617
CHAPTER LI
I. Translate the following expressions: i. Keep to the right!
2. He is not in a hurry. 3. He wishes to see his family. 4. On the
contrary. 5. First of all. 6. Without saying anything. 7. We have
already seen him. 8. On entering. 9. The one (the apple) that I
have is very good. 10. Buenos Aires is more beautiful than (de lo que)
I thought.
II. Translate: i. Don Tomas was the youngest brother of dona
Ana. 2. First we would like to take a stroll through some of the
streets. 3. The good lady was more homesick than ever for her
native land. 4. She remained without saying anything more during
the ride. 5. You must not leave until you have spent a long while
with us on the farm. 6. Everything we have is at your disposition.
7. That skyscraper recalls to me those that we saw in New York.
8. There is more activity than ever in the construction of houses.
9. Today Buenos Aires is not only the greatest Hispanic city in the
world but it is also the second city of the New World. 10. I would
not like to drive a car here because they keep to the left and not to
the right as is done in Spain, Mexico and North America.
CHAPTER LII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. It is on sale. 2. She
becomes furious. 3. This dress fits her well. 4. Someone is coming.
5. No one knows it. 6. All that they saw they bought. 7. All there
is is for you. 8. He became rich. 9. Any day will suit me. 10. Is
there anyone who knows him ?
II. Translate: i. There are many subways, streetcars and buses
in Buenos Aires. 2. The boys spent an entire day traveling from one
end of the city to the other. 3. Dona Ana and Rosa liked especially
the cities* magnificent stores. 4. Some of the best stores in the world
are on Florida Street. 5. "What a beautiful young lady," Rosa
exclaimed, " and how well her hat and dress fit her ! " 6. The women
of Buenos Aires dress very well. 7. Everything the ladies saw inter-
ested them a great deal. 8. It seems as if the people can buy every-
thing that is made in the world. 9. Tired of so much walking, the
two women used to take refreshments in some caf6 or restaurant.
10. Afterwards they went to one of the pictureshows of which there
are many in the city.
618 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
CHAPTER LIII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. It is worth nothing. 2. He
is in worse health. 3. We went away. 4. The majority of the in-
habitants. 5. He was killed by the bears. 6. Don't give it to him.
7. Let's not look for them now. 8. I want you to know her. 9. It is
probable that you have been acquainted with her. 10. What worries
me is my teeth.
II. Translate: r. Buenos Aires was founded by Pedro de Mendoza
on the second of February, 1536. 2. The explorers constructed a
town for don Pedro. 3. Soon they began to die from hunger, and
at the hands of the Indians. 4. Several expeditions went in search of
provisions. 5. One of these conquered what is today Paraguay.
6. From the year 1580 Buenos Aires has lived in peace and has grown
little by little. 7. The rich city of Mendoza is called the "garden of
the Andes." 8. On the twenty-fifth of May, in the year 1810, they
rebelled against the Government of Spain. 9. Today this day is
celebrated in all parts of the Republic. 10. The " Independence Hall "
of Argentina is located in Tucuman.
CHAPTER LIV
I. Translate the following expressions: i. He sleeps outdoors.
2. They mingle with the people. 3. Inside, it is hot. 4. He carried
his overcoat and his umbrella. 5. Beautiful trees and flowers.
6. The green parasol and umbrella. 7. My overcoat and hat. 8. She
had black eyes. 9. He is the laughingstock of the family. 10. The
going and coming of the people.
II. Translate: i. The travelers did not want to omit any part of
the city. 2. Their uncle was not busy in the capital. 3. In the
theater there are many famous actors. 4. The national library was
worth a much longer visit than that which they were able to make.
5. These buildings tire me, although they may be very interesting.
6. I would like to be to the open air where beautiful trees and flowers
may be found. 7. The mother consented that they take a ride in
their uncle's car. 8. The swimming pool was full of people. 9. The
going and coming of the people never ceases. 10. It is natural that
'many different words should be used in Argentina, Mexico and Spain.
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 619
CHAPTER LV
I. Translate the following expressions: i. He is earning his living.
2. Argentina is a very rich land. 3. It seemed so. 4. Do you think
that he will come ? I think not. 5. She answered yes. 6. They say
so. 7. Water is good to drink. 8. This water is cold. 9. She is very
happy. 10. She is satisfied.
II. Translate: i. I don't think that there is any race or nation
which does not have many settlers here. 2. Thousands of Italians
came here. 3. Frenchmen, Germans and Englishmen entered the
country to take advantage of its natural resources. 4. The Republic
welcomed all of them. 5. The young men of Argentina play football
all the time. 6. In the great newspapers, like La Prensa and La
Nacidn, there is much news from Europe and from North America.
7. A short while after establishing themselves here the settlers become
good citizens. 8. I, for example, was born in Spain, but am a citizen
of Argentina. 9. Their uncle would have liked to return home that
same day. 10. They decided to go on the following day.
CHAPTER LVT
I. Translate the following expressions: i. They went abroad.
2. First of all, do this. 3. He fed the donkey. 4. He wants to go to
Buenos Aires. 5. Is there room for me ? 6. There is room for him
and for you. 7. Young Pepe is very tired. 8. A lazy boy likes a
lazy girl. 9. We would come later if it were possible. 10. He has
put it here.
II. Translate: i. When are you going to take us to the farm?
2. Whenever you wish [lo]. 3. There is a great deal of work on the
farm at this season of the year. 4. I'll never visit this city again.
5. On the following morning don Tomas and his relatives left the
hotel. 6. Is there room for us with all our things? 7. Finally they
got into the car and left. 8. When the automobile came, the con-
struction of good roads became more necessary than ever. 9. There
are some twenty railroads in the country, of which many are English
or French. 10. The majority of the automobiles in Argentina come
from the United States.
CHAPTER LVII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. I scolded her. 2. The
water was boiling. 3. Pepe sold the dog. 4. They ordered me to
620 COMPOSITION EXERCISES
come (Express in two ways). 5. They made the man leave (Express in
two ways). 6. Scold him. 7. The dogs were growling. 8. Show me
the road. 9. Bring it to them. 10. She is scolding us.
II. Translate: i. Their aunt and her three children came out to
greet them. 2. I am glad that you were able to see Buenos Aires.
3. The farm was named "The Three OnM Trees." 4. "What beau-
tiful trees !" said Quinito. 5. One can see that you have had a good
time. 6. But don't forget that it was necessary to work for many
years. 7. The farmhouse was low, of a single story, but it was pro-
vided with all modern conveniences. 8. The five young people took
a walk through the farm. 9. This is an estancia, not a chaera, ex-
plained their new friends. 10. On a chacra cereals are cultivated; an
estancia is much larger and is a stock farm.
CHAPTER LVIII
I. Translate the following expressions: i. In a few years. 2. They
begin to work. 3. At least fifty horses. 4. That remains to be seen.
5. The poor man and the rich man. 6. A large spoon. 7. A small
spoon. 8. I shall do it for you. 9. He is leaving for the capital.
10. Much remains to be done.
II. Translate: i. The first Spanish settlers brought the first cows
and horses to the New World. 2. Within a few years the number of
these animals had increased so much that there were thousands and
thousands of wild horses on the pampas. 3. Later there were brought
from England the best cows and sheep. 4. The ones who used to care
for the cattle were the gauchos. 5. Almost all these gauchos have dis-
appeared. 6. The condition of the gaucho contributed a great deal to
the literature of Argentina. 7. One of the principal works is Martin
Fierro. 8. Martin led the life of a nomad (n6made m.) in the open SLIT.
9. He had a great deal of common sense (sentido comtin) and ex-
traordinary ability. 10. The music of the gaucho was sad and mel-
ancholy.
CHAPTER LK
I. Translate the following expressions: i. I shall do everything pos-
sible. 2. The sun is setting. 3. The horse and the mare (ycgua).
4. The bull and the cow. 5. The rooster (gallo) and the hen (gallina).
6. The actor and the actress. 7. The poet and the poetess. 8. I am
sorry that he is not here. 9. They were sorry that you were not here.
10. The cattle.
COMPOSITION EXERCISES 621
II. Translate: i. Carlos was going to show the boys how a colt
(potro) is tamed (domarse). 2. The horse had become furious. 3. On
feeling himself free he put his head between his front legs (patas).
4. The colt began to run from one side to the other doing everything
possible to get rid of the rider (jinete). 5. Finally he fell to the
ground. 6. We enjoyed very much the r61e that Coco, the donkey,
played. 7. The boys stopped from time to time to see if a windmill
was working (funcionar) well and if there was water for the cattle.
8. Every day brought them something new and interesting. 9. Next
week it will be necessary to begin our return trip to Spain. 10. Their
relatives were very sorry that Quinito and his brother had to go.
CHAPTER LX
I. Translate the following expressions: i. For my part. 2. It takes
place tomorrow. 3. I hope John will give it to me. 4. Would that
John would give it to me. 5. I wish you to come. 6. Whoever comes,
ask him to enter. 7. As soon as he arrives. 8. It is fitting (con-
venir) for you to leave. 9. They asked the cook for bread. 10. Don't
deny it.
II. Translate: i. Preparations were being made. 2. They were
very sorry that their relatives could not accompany them to Buenos
Aires. 3. What are the things that you are going to remember?
4. I shall always remember the skyscrapers of New York. 5. The
mother will always remember the trip from Santiago to Mendoza.
6. Poor mama ! It is a pity that you were not able to enjoy that
view. 7. That is the thing that I am going to remember with pleasure.
8. I think that I ought to stay in Argentina. 9. Quinito has to go
back to Spain to study. 10. They are going to live near me.
GENERAL VOCABULARY
HOW TO USE THIS VOCABULARY
Remember that the Spanish alphabet has four characters not found
in the English alphabet, namely, ch (after c), 11 (after 1), fi (after n),
and rr (after r). Hence, words beginning with ch and 11 (none in this
book begins with fi, and none ever begins with rr) are, of course, listed
in separate groups. Similarly, lecho is found, for example, after lec-
tura; calle after color; and nifla after ninguno.
The parts of speech are not indicated except where necessary to
prevent obscurity or confusion. Nouns, however, bear after them
m. for masculine and /. for feminine.
The number given after a Spanish verb is that of the paragraph or
paragraphs of the Verb Appendix in which is found that verb or a
type verb to which it is similar. In the case of vowel-changing (or
radical-changing) verbs, the vowel change or changes of the last syl-
lable of the stem are given in parentheses; thus, dormir (ue, u), 28.
Likewise, changes in consonant-changing (or orthographical-changing)
verbs are indicated in parentheses by showing the change that occurs
either in the first person singular of the preterite or the first person
singular of the present; thus, alcanzar (c6), j^; coger (jo), 37. A
verb that undergoes both vowel and consonant changes is shown
thus: empezar (ie, c6), 23, 34.
All adjectives are given in the masculine singular form, and the
feminine ending is not indicated unless it is formed in a manner not
mentioned in the following two rules: (i) Adjectives ending in -o in
the masculine singular change -o to -a to form the feminine. (2) Ad-
jectives ending in the masculine singular in any other vowel than -o,
or in a consonant, remain unchanged in the feminine.
In many cases there is given in parentheses the preposition that is
generally used after a verb or adjective.
Words bearing the indication (•) before them were used in Quinito
en Espana, the first book of this series.
Note carefully, on the next page, the abbreviations used.
ABBREVIATIONS USED
adj., adjective
abbr., abbreviation
adv., adverb
conj., conjunction
def.9 definite
dem., demonstrative
dir., direct
/., feminine
Jam., familiar or intimate form
fut.j future
ger., gerund, present participle
imperf., imperfect
ind., indicative
indef., indefinite
indir., indirect
inf., infinitive
interr., interrogative
intr., intransitive
m., masculine
mi., mile(s)
«., north, northern
neg.y negative
neut., neuter
obj., object
p., participle
pers., person, personal
pi., plural
pluperf., pluperfect
pol., polite
poss., possessive
post-pret., post-preterite
pp., past participle
prep., preposition
pres., present
pret., preterite
pron., pronoun
refl., reflexive
rel., relative
sing., singular
subj., subject
term., terminal
tr.y transitive
— , word repeated
+ , followed by
= , is equal to
ist, first
2nd, second
3rd, third
VOCABULARIO
•a prep, to, at, for, from; sign of
the personal accusative
aba jo adv. down, downwards;
hacia — , downwards; rfo — ,
downstream
•abandonar to leave, abandon
abarrotado crowded, packed
abierto open, opened; adj. and
pp. of abrir 45
abonar to fertilize
abrazar (c6) 34 to embrace
•abrir 45 to open
•abuela/. grandmother
•abuelo m. grandfather; pi. grand-
parents
abundancia/. abundance
abundar to abound, be plentiful
aca* adv. there (usually with verb
of rest)
acabar to finish, end; — de +
inf. to have just + pp>; — de
llegar to have just arrived
acento m. accent
•aceptar to accept
acera/. sidewalk
•acerca de prep, about, concern-
ing
•acercar (qu£) 30 to place near;
• — se (a) to approach
acierto m. skill, success
•acompafiar to accompany;
•acompafiado de accompanied
by
iii
acordarse (ue) (de) 24 to remem-
ber
acostar (ue) 24 to put to bed;
• — se to lie down, go to bed
acostumbrado adj. and pp. ac-
customed
actitud/. attitude
actividad/. activity
actor m. actor
•actriz /. actress; • — de cine
movie actress
actuaci6n/. acting, performance
actual present, present-day
actuar (do) 40 to act
acuerd — , see acordar 24
acuest — , see acostar 24
adelante adv. ahead, forward; de
aqui en — , henceforth; hacia
— , on ahead
adema*s adv. moreover, besides
adentro adv. inside, within; tierra
— , inland
•adi6s good-bye
admiraci6n/. admiration
•admirar to admire
adobe m. adobe, unburnt brick
•adonde adv. where (to);
•i ad6nde ? where (to) ?
adornar to adorn
adorno m. ornament
aduana/. customs house
a£reo aerial, by air
aeroplane m. airplane
aeropuerto m. airport
af£n m. eagerness
Afi-Ani
VOCABULARIO
IV
aficionado m. enthusiast, "fan";
— a devoted to, fond of
agilidad/. agility
agitar to wave, agitate
aglomeraci6n /. crowding; hora
de la — , rush hour
•agradable pleasant, agreeable
agrfcola agricultural
•agua/. water
6guila/. eagle
•ahora adv. now; — mismo right
now; *hasta — , up to now
aimai&m.andf. Aimara (Indian)
•aire m. air
ajustai to adjust
•al to the (contraction of a + el) ;
al ver on seeing; al detenerse
on stopping; »al + inf. on +
pres. p.
ala/. wing
•alcanzar (c6) 54 to overtake,
reach, attain
alcoh61ico alcoholic
•aldea/. village
alegrar to make glad; — se de
to be glad of
•alegre merry, joyous, joyful, gay
•alegrfa/. joy, gaiety, merriment
•alemftn, -a German; noun m.
German (man or language)
•algo indef. pron. something; adv.
somewhat, rather
algod6n m. cotton
•alguien indef. pron. someone,
somebody, anyone
•algfin short form of alguno
•algtdno indef. adj. and pron. some,
any; pi. some, several
aliado allied
alimento m. food; pi. provisions
•almorzar (ue, c£) 24, 34 to lunch
alrededor de prep, around; alre-
dedores noun m. pi. surround-
ings, suburbs
altiplano m. high plateau
•alto tall, high, lofty; loud; de
— , in height; »lo mis — , the
top
altura/. height
•alumno m. pupil, student
•alU adv. there (usually with verb
of motion) ; — lejos there far
away; — por back in; m&s — ,
farther on; por aqul y por — ,
here and there
•allf adv. there (usually with a
verb of rest)
ama/. housekeeper
amar to love
amarillo yellow
ambiente m. atmosphere
•amiga/. friend
•amigo m. friend
amistad/. friendship
•amo m. master
amplio ample, wide
anciano elderly; noun m. elderly
man
anchlsimo very wide
ancho wide
andaluz, -uza Andalusian
•andar / to walk, go
andino Andean
Angel m. angel
anglosaj6n, -ona Anglo-Saxon
anillo m. ring
animaci6n/. animation
•animal m. animal
VOCABULARIO
Ano-Asu
•anoche adv. last night
ante prep, before, in the presence
of; — todo first of all
antecesor m. ancestor
•antes adv. formerly, first, before,
previously; • — de prep, before;
— (de) que conj. before
•antiguo ancient, old; lo — , what
is old
anual annual
afiadir to add
•afio m. year; al — siguiente the
next year; a los pocos — s in
a few years; «el — pasado last
year; «tener . . . — s (de edad)
to be ... years old
aparato m. apparatus
aparecer (zco) 38 to appear
apenas adv. scarcely
•aplaudir to applaud
aplauso m. applause
•aprender (a) to learn
apropiarse to appropriate to one-
self
aprovechar to profit from, bene-
fit by
•aquel (aquella, aquellos, aque-
llas) dem. adj. that; those (re-
mote)
aqu61 (aqu611a, aquSUos, aqu£llas)
dem. pron. that; those; former
(remote)
aquello dem. pron. neut. that
(idea or statement)
•aqul adv. here (usually with verb
ofrest)'y — cerca near here; de
— en adelante henceforth;
•por — , around here; por — y
por alU here and there
araucano m. Araucanian (Indian)
•ftrbol m. tree
archiduque m. archduke
argamasa/. mortar
argentine adj. and noun m. Ar-
gentine, Argentinian
ftrido arid, dry
anna /. weapon; — de fuego
firearm
armadura/. armor
arquearse to arch oneself, hump
up, buck
arquitectura/. architecture
•arreglar to arrange, settle, pre-
pare, put in order; — unacama
to make up a bed
arriba adv. up, upwards; calle — ,
up the street; hacia — , up,
upwards
arrodillado adj. and pp. kneeling
arroyo m. brook, rivulet, bed of
rivulet
arroz m. rice
•arte m. and f. art; — s y oficios
arts and crafts
artfculo m. article
artilleria/. artillery
•artista m. and f. artist
artistico artistic
asado adj. and pp. roast, roasted
•ascensor m. elevator, lift
asesinar to murder, assassinate
•asf adv. thus, so, this way, that
way; asf . . . como as well as
asiento m. seat
asistir (a) to attend
asombrar to astonish, amaze
aspecto m. aspect
asunto m. matter, affair
Asu-Beb
VOCABULARIO
VI
•asustar to frighten; — se to be-
come frightened
•atacar (qu£) 30 to attack
atatid m. coffin
ataviar to dress up, deck out,
adorn
atenci6n /. attention; llamar k
— a uno to attract one's atten-
tion
atentamente attentively
atento attentive
aterrizar (c£) 34 to land (a plane)
atleta m. andf. athlete
•atraer 19 to attract
atraj — , see atraer ig
atrfis adv. behind, back; hacia — ,
backwards
atravesar (ie) 23 to cross
atravies— , see atravesar 23
atropellar to trample, knock
down; — se to trample on each
other
aturdido adj. and pp. bewildered,
confused
aumentar(se) to increase, grow
aim or aun adv. still, yet, even
•aunque conj. though, although
•autobus m. motor bus
•autom6vil m. automobile
avenida/. avenue
aventurarse (a) to venture, dare
aventurero m. adventurer
aviaci6n/. aviation
aviadorw. aviator
avi6n m. airplane
ayer adv. yesterday
ayuda/. help, assistance
ayudante m. assistant, aide
ayudar to help, aid
azteca adj. and noun m. and f.
Aztec
•azucar m. sugar; cafia de — ,
sugar cane
azul blue
azulejo m. tile
B
bacalao m. codfish
bahla/. bay
•bailor to dance
baile m. dance
•bajar to go down, descend, get
out, get off
•bajoadj. low, short; prep, under
balc6n m. balcony
balsa/, raft, boat
banco m. bench; bank
bandera/. flag, banner
bafiar(se) to bathe
bafio m. bath; traje de — , bath-
ing suit
barato cheap, low (price)
barba/. beard
•barco m. ship, boat; — de tu-
rismo sight-seeing boat
barrio m. ward, district, section
barro m. clay, mud
base/, base, basis
•bastante adv. and adj. enough, a
good bit, rather, quite, fairly;
lo — bien well enough
bastar to suffice, be enough
batalla/. battle
bebedero m. watering trough,
tank
•beber to drink; *dar de — a to
give a drink to, to water
vu
VOCABULARIO
Beb-Cal
bebida/. drink
belleza/. beauty
belllsimo very beautiful
•bello beautiful
beneficio m. benefit
benevolo kind, kindly
bestia /. beast, animal; — de
carga beast of burden
•biblioteca /. library
•bien adv. well; lo bastante — ,
well enough; noun m. welfare,
good, benefit
•bienvenida/. welcome; dar la —
a to welcome
bienvenido adj. welcome
bifurcarse (qu€) jo to bifurcate,
fork
•bianco white
blusa /. blouse, waist
•boca/. mouth
bola/. ball
boleto m. ticket
boliviano adj. and noun m. andf.
Bolivian
•bolsillo m. pocket
bombachas /. pi. bombachas,
trousers (wide and fastened at
the ankles)
bonaerense adj. and noun m. and
f. person or thing of Buenos
Aires
bonito pretty
boquiabierto open-mouthed, gap-
ing
bordado m. embroidery
bordar to embroider
bordc m. edge, verge
bordo m. board (of ship) ; a — de
on board (of)
•bosque m. forest, wood
botfinico botanical
botero m. boatman
bozal m. headstall, halter
bravo wild, fierce, untamed
•brazo m. arm
bronce m. bronze
•buen short form of bueno
•bueno good; all right; lo — ,
what is good
bueyw. ox
bullir 41 to bubble up
bur!6n, -ona roguish, jesting
•burro m. donkey, burro
•busca /. search; «en — de in
search of
•buscar (qu6) 30 to seek, look for;
get
caballerfa/. cavalry
•caballero m. gentleman; knight
•caballo m. horse; montar a — ,
to ride a horse
caber (en) 2 to be contained (in),
be room for (in)
•cabeza/. head
cable m. cable
cacao m. cacao
cacaotal m. cacao plantation
cada invariable adj. each; — uno
(una) indef. pron. each, each
one
•caer j to fall; • — se to fall off,
tumble down
•caf£ m. cafe, restaurant; coffee
caig — , see caer j
calabaza/. gourd, squash
Cal-Cas
VOCABULARIO
vui
calabozo m. calaboose, jail
calcetfn m. sock
calendario m. calendar
caliente hot, warm
californiano Californian
•color m. heat; •hace — , it is hot
(weather)
caluroso warm, hot
callado adj. and pp. silent, quiet
callar(se) to keep still, be silent
•calle /. street; — arriba up the
street
calle jero of the street; perro — ,
street dog, mongrel, "mut"
•cama/. bed
cAmara/. camera, room
camarera/. chambermaid
•cambiar to change, exchange
cambio m. change
•camino m. road; »el — de the
road to; »en — , on the road;
ponerse en — , to set forth;
•seguir su — , to keep on one's
way
•cami6n m. motor truck
campamento m. camp
campana/. bell
campero adj. of the fields, out-
door, country
•campoft*. field; country
canal m. canal
canasto m. basket
•canci6n/. song
canoa/. canoe
•cansado adj. and pp. tired, weary
cansar to tire; — se to become
tired, tire oneself
•cantar to sing
cantidad/. quantity, amount
cafia/. cane; — de azftcar sugar
cane
cafi6n m. canyon; cannon
capataz m. foreman, overseer
capilla/. chapel
•capital/, capital (of a country)
•capitfin m. captain
capitolio m. capitol
•capftulo m. chapter
capturar to capture
•cara/. face
caravana/. caravan
carb6n m. coal
cArcel/. prison
carga /. load, burden, cargo;
bestia de — , beast of burden
cargado adj. and pp. loaded
caribe adj. and noun m. Carib-
bean
carifio m. affection; con — , af-
fectionately
•came/, meat, flesh; — de vaca
beef
carrera/. race
carretera/. highway
•carta/. letter (communkation)
•casa/. house, home; • — de co-
rreos post office; «a — , home
(used adverbially with verb of
motion)] «en — , home, at
home (with verb of rest) ; «donde
ten&s vosotros (tienen Yds.)
vuestra (su) casa where you
will be welcome
•casar to marry; • — se con to
marry (oneself to)
•casi adv. almost
•castellano adj. Castilian; noun
m. Castilian (man or language)
IX
VOCABULARIO
Cas-Com
•castillo m. castle
casucha/. hut, hovel
•catedral/. cathedral
•cat61ico Catholic
cay — , see caer 3
ceder to cede, yield
•celebrar to celebrate; • — se to
take place, be held
celebre celebrated
cementerio m. cemetery
centavo m. cent
centenario m. centenary
central central
centre m. center, headquarters;
downtown
cer&mica/. ceramics, pottery
•cerca adv. near, near by; aqui — ,
near here; • — de prep, near
cercano adj. near, near-by
cerdo m. pig, hog
cereal m. cereal
•cero m. zero
•cerrar (ie) 23 to close
cerro m. hill
cesar (de) to cease, stop; sin — ,
unceasingly
c£sped m. lawn, turf
•ciego blind
•cielo m. sky, heaven
•cien short form of ciento
•ciento (one, a) hundred; por — ,
per cent
cicrr— , see cerrar 23
cierto certain, a certain; true, re-
liable
cima/. summit, top
cincha /. girth, cinch
•cine m. moving pictures, moving-
picture theater (short form of
cinemat6graf o) ; •actriz de — ,
movie actress
cinematogrifico cinematographic,
of the moving pictures
cipr£s m. cypress
circular to circulate
circunstancia/. circumstance
•ciudad/. city
ciudadano m. citizen
•civil civil
civilizaci6n/. civilization
claro clear; adv. of course
•clase/. class, classroom; kind
clima m. climate
club m. club
cobre m. copper
cocina/. kitchen; cooking, cuisine
cocinera/. cook
•coche m. coach; automobile
•coger (jo) 37 to take hold of,
seize, catch
coj — , see coger 37
•cola/, tail
colecci6n/. collection
colectivo m. bus (seating ten pas-
sengers)
colocar (qu6) 30 to place, put
colombiano adj. and noun m.
Colombian
colonia/. colony
coloq — , see colocar 30
color m. color
coloso m. colossus
comedia /. play, comedy, drama
•comedor m. dining room; coche
— , dining car
•comer to eat, dine; »dar de — a
to feed
comercio m. commerce
Corn-Con
VOCABULARIO
comestible m. eatable; pi. pro-
visions, food
•comida /. meal, dinner, food
•como adv. and conj. as, since,
like, as if; • — para as if to;
asf . . . como as well as; •tanto
. . . como as much as; both
. . . and
•I cdmo ? how ? •£ c6mo es . . . ?
what is ... like ?
comodidad /. comfort, conven-
ience
c6modo comfortable
•compafiero m. companion
compafifa/. company
comparar to compare
compatriota m. and f. fellow, fel-
low-countryman, compatriot
compendio m. compendium, epit-
ome
composici6n/. composition
•comprar to buy
comfin common
comunicaci6n /. communication
•con prep, with; •conmigo with
me; consigo with oneself; •con-
tigowiththee; para— , toward
concierto m. concert
concurrido adj. and pp. attended,
frequented
condenar to condemn
c6ndorw. condor
conducir (zco) 18 to conduct, lead,
drive
conductor m. conductor, driver
conduj — , see conducir 18
conduzc— , see conducir 18
confederaci6n/. confederation
conferencia/. conference
congelado adj. and pp. chilled,
frozen
congreso m. congress
conmemorar to commemorate
•conmigo with me
•conocer (zco) 38 to know, be or
become acquainted with; to
meet (a person)
conozc — , see conocer 38
conquista/. conquest
conquistador m. conqueror; adj.
conquering
conquistar to conquer
conseguir (i, go) 29, jj to obtain,
get; h inf. to succeed in
+ pres. p.
consentir (ie, i) (en) 27 to con-
sent (to)
conservar to preserve
consient — , see consentir 2?
consig — , see conseguir 29, jj
consigo with oneself
consint— , see consentir 27
conspirar to conspire
constituci6n/. constitution
constituir (uyo) 44 to constitute
constituy — , see constituir 44
•construir (uyo) 44 to construct,
build; hacer — , to have built
construy — , see construir 44
•contar (ue) 24 to tell, relate,
count
contemporftneo contemporary
•contento glad, satisfied, content;
de — , with satisfaction
•contestar (a) to answer, reply;
• — que no to answer no
•contigo with thee, you
continente m. continent
VOCABULARIO
Con-Cue
continual (uo) 40 to continue
•contra prep, against
contrario contrary; al — , on the
contrary
contribuir (uyo) 44 to contribute
contribuy — , see contribuir 44
conveniente fitting, suitable
convenir 21 to be suitable, fitting
•conversaci6n /. conversation
copia/. copy
cordero m. lamb
cordialmente cordially
cordillera /. mountain range
corona/, crown, garland
•corral m. corral, enclosure
correcto correct
•correo m. mail, post; palacio
(or casa) de — s post office
•correr to run
•corrida (de toros) /. bull-fight
corriente /. current, stream
cortar to cut, cut off, hew
corte /. court (of a rider)
cortina/. curtain
corto short
•cosa /. thing, matter, affair; —
de about, a matter of
cosmopolita cosmopolitan
costar (ue) 24 to cost; — trabajo
to cost effort, be difficult
costumbre/. custom; tenerla — ,
to be accustomed
coyote m. coyote
craneo m. skull, cranium
creador m. creator
crecer (zco) 38 to grow
•creer 43 to believe, think; ya lo
creo I should say so, indeed I
believe it
ciey — , see creer 43
crezc — , see crecer j#
cria/. raising, breeding
criollo adj. and noun m. native,
native-born
cristiano adj. and noun m. Chris-
tian
cruc — , see cruzar 34
cruce m. crossroads, junction; es-
tacion de — , junction, transfer
station
cruel cruel; — con cruel to
cruz/. cross
cruzada/. crusade
•cruzar (ce) 34 to cross
cuadrado adj. and noun m. square
cuadro m. picture
cual: el cual (la cual, los cuales,
las cuales) rel. pron. which,
who
•t cual, cuales? which? what?
•cualquier(a) indef. pron. and adj.
any, any whatsoever, whatever
cuan how; \ cu&n ! how !
•cuando adv. when; — nifio when
a boy
•I cuando ? when ?
cuanto, cuantos indef. pron. and
rel. pron. all that
•£ cuanto? how much? •£ cuan-
tos ? how many ?
cuartel m. barracks; — general
general headquarters
cuarto m. room
cubierta/. deck (of a ship)
cubierto pp. of cubrir 45
cubrir 45 to cover
cuenca/. bowl, basin
cuent— , see contar 24
Cue-Dec
VOCABULARIO
xu
cuenta /. account; darse — de
to realize, take into account
cuento m. story, tale
cuerda /. cord, rope
cuero m. leather
cuerpo m. body
cuest, see costar 24
•cuidado m. care; »J — ! watch
out ! be careful ! »j — con ! be
careful about! »con — , care-
fully; •con mucho — , very
carefully; tener — , to be care-
ful
•cuidar (de) to care for, take care
of; sin — , uncared for
culpa/. fault, blame
cultivar to cultivate
cultivo m. cultivation
culto m. worship; rendir — a to
worship
cultura/. culture
cuna/. cradle
cup — , see caber 2
curar to cure
•cuyo rel. pron. whose
CH
chacra/. (small) farm (in Argen-
tina)
charlar to chat, talk
•chaqueta/. jacket
chico m. boy
chileno adj. and noun m. Chilean
chinampa /. flower bed (on an
island in Lake Xochimilco)
chocolate m. chocolate
ch6ferw. chauffeur, driver
chuleta/. chop
dama/. lady
•dafio m. damage, harm, injury;
•hacer — a to harm, injure,
hurt
•dar 4 to give; strike; — con to
come upon; • — de beber a to
give a drink to, to water; • —
de comer a to feed; • — la
bienvenida a to welcome; • —
la mano a to shake hands with;
•— las gracias a to thank; — -
muerte a to put to death, kill;
• — un paseo to take a walk,
ride; — se cuenta de to realize,
take into account; dad give;
dame give me; damelo give it
tome
•de prep, of, from, by, as, than,
in, concerning
d£ see dar 4
debajo adv. under, underneath;
— de prep, under; por — de
under
•deber to be obliged to, ought;
noun m. duty
decaer j to decline, decay
decapitar to behead, decapitate
•decidir to decide
•decir 5 to say, tell; • — para sf to
say to oneself; es — , that is
(to say); •sin — nada, with-
out saying anything; dfgannos
Yds. tell us; dime tell me;
dinos tell us; no digas eso
don't say that; no digas nada
don't say anything; se dice it
is said
xm
VOCABULARIO
Dec-Det
declarar to declare
decreto m. decree
dedicar (qu6) 30 to devote, dedi-
cate
dediq — , see dedicar 30
•dedo m. finger
defender (ie) 25 to defend
def ensor m. defender
•dejar to leave; let; — de to
cease
•del of the (contraction 0/de + el)
delante adv. in front; • — de prep.
before, in front of
delegado m. delegate
delirio m. delirium, frenzy
dem&s: los — , las — , the others
demostrar (ue) 24 to show,
demonstrate
dentro adv. inside, within; — de
prep, inside of
departamento m. department
•deporte m. sport
derecho right; right-hand; a la
— a to the right; llevar la — a
to keep to the right
derivar to derive
derrotar to rout, defeat
desagradable disagreeable, un-
pleasant
•desaparecer (zco) 38 to disappear
desaparezc — , see desaparecer 38
desarrollar to develop
desarrollo m. development
desastre m. disaster
•desayunarse to breakfast
descansar to rest
descendiente m. descendant
desconocido adj. and pp. un-
known
•descubierto pp. of descubrir 45
descubridor m. discoverer
•descubrir 45 to discover
•desde prep, from; since
•desear to desire, wish
desembarcar (qu£) 30 to disem-
bark
desembocadura /. mouth (of a
river)
desembocar (qu£) 30 to empty,
debouch
deseo m. desire
desfavorable unfavorable
desgraciado unfortunate
desierto m. desert
desilusionado adj. and pp. disap-
pointed, disillusioned
deslizarse (c6) 34 to glide, slide
desmayarse to faint
•despacio adv. slowly
despedida/. farewell, leave-taking
despedir (i) 29 to send out, away;
— se de to take leave of, say
good-bye to
despegar (gu£) 32 to take off,
take flight
•despertar (ie) 23 to waken; •— se
to wake up, awaken
despid— , see despedir 29
despotismo m. despotism
•despu6s adv. afterwards; • — de
prep, after; — (de) que conj.
after
destine m. destination
destruir (uyo) 44 to destroy
destruy — , see destruir 44
•detener 17 to detain, stop (/r.);
• — se to stop, halt (intr.)
deteng— , see detener 17
Det-Dur
VOCABULARIO
xiv
detien — , see detener 17
detr&s adv. behind; • — de prep.
behind, back of
detuv — , see detener 17
deuda/. debt
devocidn/. devotion
di — , see dar 4
•dia m. day; «al — siguiente the
next day; a los pocos — s after
a few days; •buenos — s good
morning, good day; de — en
— , from day to day; hoy — ,
nowadays; •todo el — , all day;
todo el santo — , the whole
blessed day; •todos los — s
every day
diagonal adj. and noun m. di-
agonal
dialecto m. dialect
die — , see decir 5
•dicho pp. of decir 5; — y hecho
no sooner said than done
die — , see dar 4
diferencia/. difference
•diferente different
•dificil difficult
dificultad/. difficulty
dig — , see decir 5
dij — , see decir 5
•dinero m. money
dios m. god; Dies God
direcci6n/. direction; en — a in
the direction of, towards
director m. director
dirigir (jo) yj to direct
dirij — , see dirigir yj
disposici6n /. disposal, disposi-
tion; a la — de at the disposal
of
distancia/. distance
distinguir (go) jj to distinguish
distintivo distinctive
distinto different; distinct
distrito m. district
diversi6n/. diversion, amusement
•divertido adj. and pp. amusing
•divertir (ie, i) 27 to amuse; • — se
to amuse oneself, have a good
time
diviert — , see divertir 27
divirt — , see divertir 27
documento m. document
d61ar m. dollar
doma/. breaking, taming
domar to break, train, tame
domestico domestic
dominar to dominate
dominio m. dominion
•don title of respect used before a
man's given name
•donde adv. and conj. where;
•£ d6nde ? where ?
dondequiera (que) wherever
•dofia title of respect used before a
woman's given name
•dormido adj. and pp. asleep
•dormir (ue, u) 28 to sleep; • — se
to fall asleep
dormitorio m. bedroom; coche — ,
sleeping car
•doy see dar 4
ducado m. ducat (a coin)
•duda/. doubt; *sin — , doubtless
dudar to doubt
•duefio m. owner, master
duerm — , see dormir 28
duque m. duke
•durante prep, during
XV
VOCABULARIO
Dur-Ene
durar to last
durm — , see dormir 28
£
•e and (used instead of y before a
word beginning with i or hi)
ecuador m. equator
ecuatoriano adj. and noun m.
Ecuadorean
•echar to throw, cast; — a andar
to set out walking; — a + inf.
to begin, start, set out +
pres. p.
•edad/. age
•edificio m. building
educaci6n/. education
educar (que*) 30 to educate
ejemplo m. example; por — , for
example
•ejercicio m. exercise
ejercito m. army
•el def. art. m. sing, the; the one,
he (before de or que); that,
who; • — de the one of; • — que
the one who; he who; «de +
— = del
•41 pers. pron. he, it; him, it (after
a prep.)
elefante m. elephant
elegante elegant; por lo — -, in
elegance
elemento m. element
elevaci6n/. elevation
elevado high, lofty
•ella pers. pron. subj. and term.
she, it; her, it
•ellos, -as pers. pron. subj. and
term, they; them
embajada/. embassy
•embajador m. ambassador
embellecer (zco) 38 to beautify,
embellish
emoci6n/. emotion
emocionado adj. and pp. thrilled,
moved, touched
emocionante thrilling, moving
emperador m. emperor
emperatriz/. empress
•empezar (ie, ce") (a) 28, 34 to be-
gin
empiez — , see empezar 28, 34
empleado m. employee
emplear to use, employ
emprendedor, -ora enterprising
empresa /. enterprise, organiza-
tion, firm, business
empujar to push
•en prep, in, on, into, at
•enamorado adj. and pp. in love;
• — de in love with
encantador, -ora charming, de-
lightful
encantar to delight, charm, en-
chant
encanto m. charm, enchantment,
delight
encerrar (ie) 23 to shut up, lock
up, enclose
encierr — , see encerrar 23
encima adv. above; — de prep.
over, above; por — de over
•encontrar (ue) 24 to find; • — se
to find oneself, be; — se con to
come upon
encuentr — , see encontrar 24
encuentro m. encounter, meeting
•enemigo m. enemy
Enf-Est
VOCABULARIO
xvi
enfermedad/. illness
•enfermo ill, sick
enlazar (c€) 34 to rope, lasso
•enorme enormous
•enonnemente enormously
•ensefiar to teach; show
ensillar to saddle
•entender (ie) 25 to understand;
hacerse — , to make oneself
understood
enterrar (ie) 23 to bury, inter
entiend — , see entender 25
entierr — , see enterrar 23
•entonces adv. then, at that
time
entrada/. entrance
•entrar to enter; • — en + noun to
enter + noun
•entre prep, between, among; •por
— , between, through
entregar (gu6) 32 to deliver,
hand over
entusiasmo m. enthusiasm
entusiasta enthusiastic
•enviar (fo) 39 to send
envidiar to envy
6pico epic
equis/. x (the letter)
equivocado adj. and pp. mistaken
•era see ser 16
erigir (jo) 37 to erect
erij— , see crigir 37
iesa see ese
§sa see 6se
»escaparse to escape, run away
escena/. scene
Bsclavo m. slave
escoger (jo) 37 to choose, select
•scoj— , see escoger 37
esconder to hide
•escribir 45 to write
•escrito pp. of escribir 45
escritor m. writer
•escuela /. school; — superior
high school
escultura/. sculpture
•ese (esa, esos, esas) dem. adj.
that; those (near the person
addressed)
£se (£sa, £sos, £sas) dem. pron.
that one; those (near the per-
son addressed)
esfuerzo m. effort
eslab6n m. link
•eso demon, pron. neut. that (idea
or statement)] por — , there-
fore, for that reason
•espada/. sword
esparcir (zo) 35 to scatter
esparz — , see esparcir 35
•espafiol, -ola adj. and noun
Spanish; Spanish (language) ;
Spaniard, Spanish woman; a
la espafiola (in) Spanish style
•especialmente especially
especie /. species, kind
espectfculo m. spectacle, sight
•espectador m. spectator
•esperar to wait for, hope, expect
esplritu m. spirit
•esposa/. wife
espuela/. spur
esquila/. shearing
•esta see este
6sta see 6ste
establecer (zco) 38 to establish
establecimiento m. establishment
establezc— , see establecer 38
XV11
VOCABULARIO
Est-Ext
estaci6n/. station; season (of the
year)
estacionar to park (an automobile)
estadio m. stadium
•estado m. state; •Estados Uni-
dos United States
estancia/. stock farm (in Argen-
tina)
estanciero m. cattleman, stock-
man, rancher
estafio m. tin
•estar 6 to be; — a punto de to
be about to; • — bien to be
well, be comfortable; to be
good (as an actor) ; • — bien de
salud to be in good health,
well; — peor de salud to be
in worse health
estatua/. statue
este m. east
•este (esta, estos, estas) dem. adj.
this; these
£ste (£sta, £stos, £stas) dem. pron.
this one; these; the latter
estilo m. style
•esto dem. pron. neut. this (idea or
statement)] con — , hereupon
•estoy see estar 6
•estrecho narrow
estrella/. star
estudiante m. student
•estudiar to study
estudio m. studio, study
estupendo stupendous
•esttipido stupid
estuv — , see estar 6
europeo European
excavaci6n/. excavation
•excepto prep, except
•excitado adj. and pp. excited
exclamaci6n/. exclamation
•exclamar to exclaim
excursi6n/. excursion
excursionista m. and f. excursion-
ist
excusar to excuse
exhibir to exhibit
•existir to exist
Ixito m. success; lograr — , to
succeed
expedici6n/. expedition
expensas/. pi. expenses; a — de
at the expense of
experimentar to experience
experto expert
•explicar (qu6) 30 to explain
expliq — , see explicar 30
•exploraci6n/. exploration
•explorador m. explorer; adj. — ,
-ora exploring
•explorar to explore
explotar to exploit, develop,
work
exportar to export
•expresar to express
expulsar to expel
•extender (ie) 25 to extend
extensi6n/. extent, extension
extenso extensive
extiend — 9 see extender 25
extranjero adj. and noun m.
foreign; foreigner; al — ,
abroad
extrafio strange
•extraordinario extraordinary
extremefio Estremenian, from Es-
tremadura
•extremidad/. extremity, end
Fab-Fro
VOCABULARIO
XVUl
F
•f&brica/. factory
fabricar (qu4) 30 to make, manu-
facture
fabriq — , see fabricar 30
fabuloso fabulous
•facil easy
•facilmente easily
f ac6n m. knife (large, broad, sharp-
pointed)
fachada /. fagade, front
faena/. task, work
falda/. skirt
f altar to be lacking; — a uno to
be lacking to one, for one to be
without; to need
fama/. fame, reputation
•famitia/. family
•famoso famous
faro m. lighthouse
•favor m. favor; «hacer el — de
+ inf. to please + inf.; •ha-
ga(n) Vd(s). el — de + inf.
please + inf.
•favorite favorite
faz/. face (poetic)
fecha/. date
federal federal
felicidad/. happiness
•felicitaciones/.^.congratulations
feliz happy, fortunate
•felizmente happily, fortunately
femenino feminine
feo ugly
•feroz fierce, ferocious
•ferrocarril m. railway; •— sub-
terraneo subway, underground
railway
•fiesta/, fiesta, festival
•figura/. figure
film m. film
•fin m. end; purpose; por — , at
last, finally
•finalmente finally
fingir (jo) 37 to feign, pretend
finj— , see fingir 37
finnar to sign
•flor/. flower
florecer (zco) 38 to flourish
florezc — , see florecer 3$
florido flowery, in flower
flota/. fleet
flotilla/, small fleet, flotilla
fonda/. inn
fondo m. bottom
forma/, form, manner
formar to form
fortaleza/. fortress
fortuna/. fortune
fracasar to fail
fracaso m. failure
fraile m. friar
•francos, -esa French; noun m.
Frenchman; French (language)
franciscano m. Franciscan, mem-
ber of the Order of St.
Francis
•frecuencia/. frequency; •con — ,
frequently
•fresco cool; •hace — f it is cool
(weather)
frigorifico m. packing house, meat
plant
frio adj. and noun m. cold; hace
— , it is cold (weather)
friolera/. trifle
front era/, f render, border
XIX
VOCABULARIO
Fro-Gui
front&n m. front6n (where jai-alai
is played)
•fruta/. fruit
•fu£ (he) was or went; yd sing,
pret. of ser 16 or ir p; se — ,
(he) went away
fuego m. fire
•fuente/. fountain; source
•fuerte adj. and adv. strong, ro-
bust; hard; loudly
funci6n/. performance, function
funcionar to function, work
fundaci6n/. founding
fundador m. founder
fundar to found, establish
•furiosamente furiously
fusilar to shoot
•futbol m. football
future future
gallina/. hen, chicken
ganaderia/. stock farm
ganado m. stock, cattle
•ganar to earn, gain, win; — se
la vida to earn one's living
gardenia/, gardenia
•gastar to spend
gaucho m. gaucho, (Argentine)
cowboy
general adj. and noun m. general;
cuartel — , general headquar-
ters
generalmente generally
•gente/. people
gentilhombre m. gentleman in
waiting
•geografla/. geography
geografico geographical
gerente m. manager
•gigante adj. and noun m. giant,
gigantic
globo m. globe
gloria/, glory
glorieta/. small square, arbor
gobernador m. governor
•gobernar (ie) 23 to govern, con-
trol
gobierno m. government
goc — , see gozar 34
golfo m. gulf
•golpe m. blow
•gordo fat, stout
gorro m. cap; — de dormir night-
cap
gozar (ce) (de) 34 to enjoy
grabar to engrave, cut, carve
•gracias/. pi. thanks, thank you;
•dar las — a to thank
grada/. step (of stairs)
•gramatica/. grammar
•gran short form of grande
•grande large, big; great
grandeza /. greatness, grandeur
gratitud/. gratitude
gravemente seriously, gravely
griego adj. and noun m. Greek
•gritar to cry, shout
•grito m. cry, shout
•grunir 42 to growl
•grupo m. group
guante m. glove
guerra/. war
guerrero m. warrior
gula m. andf. guide
guitarra/. guitar
guitarrista m. andf. guitar player
Gus-He
VOCABULARIO
xx
•gustar to please, be pleasing;
•me gusta(n) I like
•gusto m. pleasure; -con — ,
gladly, with pleasure; tener
— en to take pleasure in
•ha has; have (as auxiliary)] yd
sing. pres. of haber 7; — de ir
(he) has to go, is to go; no —
de perecer shall not perish
•haber 7 to have (as auxiliary)]
for there to be (impersonal)]
— de + inf. to be to, be obliged
to, shall, must + inf.
Mbil skillful, able
habilidad/. skill, ability
•habitacidn/. room
•habitante m. andf. inhabitant
•hablar to speak, talk; «se hablan
(uno a otro) they speak to each
other
habr — , see haber 7
•hace makes, does; yd sing. pres.
0/hacer 8; • — afios for years;
years ago; — afios que son
they have been for years;
• — buen tiempo it is good
weather; • — calor it is warm
(weather)] • — fresco it is cool
(weather)] — frlo it is cold
(weather)] •— muchos siglos
many centuries ago; — que
me quede aquf causes me to
stay here
•hacer 8 to make, do, cause; • —
buen tiempo to be good weather ;
• — calor to be warm (weather)]
— constmir to have built; • —
daflo a to harm, hurt, injure;
— de to act as; • — fresco to be
cool (weather)] — frfo to be
cold (weather)] — lo posible
to do what is possible; • — pre-
guntas to ask questions; — un
papel to play a part; — se to
become; — se entender to
make oneself understood
•hacia prep, towards; — abajo
downwards; — arriba up, up-
wards; — atr£s backward
•hacienda/, farm, estate
hag — , see hacer 8
hallar to find
•hambre /. hunger; »tener — , to
be hungry
har — , see hacer 8
•hasta prep, and adv. until, up to,
as far as; even; — que conj.
until
•hay there is, there are; yd sing,
pres. of haber 7 used imper-
sonally; •£ hay ? is there ? are
there? »hay luna the moon is
shining; »hay que + inf. one
must + inf.; hay que hacer
one must do; it must be done;
•hay que ir one must go, it is
necessary to go;'«^qu6 hay?
what's up ? «hay sol the sun is
shining; no lo hay there isn't
any
hay — , see haber 7
•haz see hacer 8
hazafia /. deed, exploit, prowess
•he I have (as auxiliary) ; ist sing,
pres. of haber 7
XXI
VOCABULARIO
Hec-Imp
•hecho made, done; pp. o/ hacer
8; dicho y — , no sooner said
than done; noun m. fact, deed
helado m. ice cream
hemisferio m. hemisphere
henequSn m. sisal
herir (ie, i) 27 to wound
•hermana/. sister
•hermano m. brother; pi. broth-
er(s) and sister(s)
hermosisimo most beautiful
•hermoso beautiful
hermosura/. beauty
•h£roe m. hero
hie — , see hacer 8
hier — , see herir 27
hierra /. branding (also spelled
yerra)
hierro m. iron
•hija/. daughter
•hijo m. son; pi. children
hilo m. thread
hir — , see herir 27
hisp&nico Hispanic
hispano adj. and noun m. His-
panic; Hispanic person or
thing
hispanoamericano adj. and noun
m. Spanish-American
hispanoparlante Spanish-speak-
ing
historia/. history; la misma — ,
the same old story
hist6rico historical, historic
hiz — , see hacer 8
•hombre m. man; — de negocios
businessman
hombrfn m. big man, huge fellow
honor m. honor
honrar to honor
•hora/. hour; — de la aglomera-
ci6n rush hour
hospital m. hospital
hospitalario hospitable
hospitalidad /. hospitality
hostil hostile
•hotel m. hotel
•hoy today; — df a nowadays; as
adj. of today, present-day; la
— Uni6n the present-day Union
huarache m. sandal (of open
leather work)
hub — , see haber 7
huella/. trace, vestige
huir (huyo) 44 to flee
humane human
humilde humble
humo m. smoke
htingaro adj. and noun m. Hun-
garian
huy — , see huir 44
•iba see ir g
idea/, idea
ideal ideal
idioma m. language
idolo m. idol
•iglesia/. church
igual equal, alike, same; sin — ,
unequalled
igualmente likewise, equally
imaginable imaginable
imaginario imaginary
imitaci6n/. imitation
imitar to imitate
imperio m. empire
Imp- Jin
VOCABULARIO
xxii
•importancia/. importance; tener
— , to be important
importante important
importar to be important; im-
port
•imposible impossible
impresi6n/. impression
impresionar to impress
Inca m. Inca (rider of Andean
Indians)
incaico Incan
indecible inexpressible
independencia/. independence
independiente independent
indicar (qul) 30 to indicate
indfgena m. and f. native; pi.
aborigines
indio adj. and noun m. Indian
industria/. industry
industrial industrial
inevitable inevitable
infinite infinite, countless
influencia/. influence
•informar to inform; — se de to
learn about
ingeniero m. engineer
•ingles, -esa English; noun m.
Englishman; English (lan-
inmenso immense
inmigrante w. immigrant
inmortal immortal
insistir (en) to insist (upon)
instituci6n/. institution
insuperable unsurpassable
•inteligente intelligent
intense intense
interns m. interest
•interesante interesting
interesantfsimo most interesting
interior adj. and noun m. interior
interminable interminable
international international
int£rprete m. andf. interpreter
intervenir 21 to intervene
invasor m. invader
invenci6n/. invention
inventar to invent
inventor m. inventor
invierno m. winter
invitation/, invitation
•invitar to invite
•ir $ to go; • — a pie to go afoot;
— bien a to be suitable to,
become, befit; • — montado en
to ride (an animal) ; • 1- ger.
to continue, keep on 4- pres. p.;
• — se to go away; v&yase Vd.
go away; vete go away
isla/. island
istmo m. isthmus
•italiano Italian; noun m. Italian
(man or language)
izquierdo left, left-hand; a la — a
at the left; llevar la —a to
keep to the left
jai-alai m. name of Basque ball
game
jarabe tapatf o m. a Mexican dance
•jardfn m. garden
jarro m. vase, jar
jamas adv. ever; never (after a
verb preceded by no)
jefe m. chief, chieftain, leader
jinete m. horseman, rider
XX111
VOCABULARIO
Jot-Lim
jota/. j (the letter)
•joven young; noun m. young
man; /. young woman; pi.
j6venes young folks
judfo m. Jew
jueg— , see jugar 240,, 32
juego m. game
•jugador m. player
•jugar 2</a, 32 to play; • — a + def.
art. to play (at) ; • — al futbol
to play football
junco m. reed
•junto together; — con together
with
juventud/. youth
juzgado m. court (of justice)
•la def. art. f. sing, the; that, the
one (before de or que)
•la dir. obj. pers. pron.f. sing, her,
it; you (pol. sing.)
labio m. lip
ladera /. side, slope
•lado m. side, direction
•ladrar to bark
ladrillo m. brick
lago m. lake
l&grima/. tear
laguna/. lagoon
lana/. wool
largar (gue") 32 to turn loose, let
go, set free
•largo long; a lo — de along; de
— , in length; larguisimo very
long
•las def. art.f. pi. the; those (be-
fore de or que)
•las dir. obj.f. pi. them; you (pol.
PI.)
l&stima/. pity; i qu6 — ! what a
pity!
l&tigo m. whip
latin m. Latin
latinoamericano adj. and noun m.
Latin-American
lazo m. lasso, noose, lariat
•le dir. obj. pron. m. sing, him, it;
you (pol. sing.)', indir. obj.
pron. m. and f. to or for him,
her, it, you (pol. sing.)
•Iecci6n/. lesson
lector m. reader
lectura/. reading
lecho m. couch, bed
•leer 43 to read
legumbre/. vegetable
•lejano distant, remote
•lejos adv. far, far away; a lo — , in
the distance ; •— de prepli&r from
•lengua/. language; tongue
•lentamente slowly
•les indir. obj. pron. m. andf. to or
for them, you (pol. pi.)] dir.
obj. them, you
letra/. letter (of the alphabet)
•levantar to lift, raise; • — se to
rise, get up, stand up
ley/, law
ley — , see leer 43
Iiberaci6n/. liberation
•libertad /. liberty, freedom
libertador m. liberator
libre free
•libro m. book
limite m. limit
Iim6nm. lemon
Lin-Man
VOCABULARIO
XXIV
linea/. line
lirio m. lily
lista/. list
•literatura/. literature
•lo def. art. neut. the; •— que
what, which, that which
•lo dir. obj. pron. m. and neut.
sing, him, it; you (pol. sing.)}
•— es it is (so)
•locamente madly
•loco mad, crazy; nounm. madman
lograr to attain, obtain; — 6xito
to succeed; h inf. to suc-
ceed in + pres. p.
loma/. (small) hill
lomo m. back (of animal)
londinense of London
•los def. art. m. pi. the; those (be-
fore de or que)
•los dir. obj. pron. m. pi. them;
you (pol. pi.)
loteria/. lottery
•luego adv. then, next, afterwards;
— que as soon as
•lugar m. place; — de veraneo
summer resort; tener — , to
take place
lujo m. luxury; de — , de luxe
iujoso luxurious
•luna/. moon; »hay — , the moon
is shining
•luz /. light; a la — de la luna
in the moonlight; a la — del
sol in the sunlight
LL
llama/, llama
•llamar to call; — la atend6n a
uno to attract one's attention;
• — se to call oneself, be called;
•se llama he is called, his name
is; llamado so-called
•llanura/. plain
•llegada/. arrival
•llegar (gu6) 32 to arrive; — a
to reach; — a ser to become,
get to be
llenar to fill
•Ueno full, filled; de — , fully
•llevar to carry; take, lead, con-
duct; wear; — la izquierda
(la derecha) to keep to the left
(to the right) ; — una vida to
lead a life
•llorar to weep
•llover (ue) 26 to rain
lluev — , see llover 26
M
xnadera/. wood
•madre /. mother; — patria na-
tive land
•magnifico magnificent
maguey m. maguey (plant)
mafz m. corn, maize
majestad/. majesty
majestuoso majestic
•mal adv. badly; noun m. evil
•mal short form of malo
•malo bad, poor; nada de — ,
nothing unfortunate
•maml/. mamma, mother
mandar to order, command
mando m. command
manejar to manage, handle
manejow. handling, management
XXV
VOCABULARIO
Man-Mer
•manera/. manner, way; *de esta
— , in this way, thus; de la
misma — , in the same way;
•de — que so that, in such a
way that; »la — como the way
in which
•mano /. hand; forefoot of a
horse; «dar la — a to shake
hands with
manso tame, tamed, mild
•manta/. blanket; rug
mantener 17 to maintain, sup-
port
manufacture/, manufacture
manzana/. apple
•mafiana adv. tomorrow; —
mismo tomorrow at the latest;
pasado — , day after tomorrow
•mafiana /. morning; a la —
siguiente the next morning
mapa m. map
m&quina/. machine
mar m. sea
maravilla /. wonder, marvel
maravillado adj. and pp. amazed,
astonished
•maravilloso wonderful, marvel-
lous
marca /. brand, make
marcar (qu6) 30 to mark, mark
out
marcha/. march
marchar to march, go; — setogo
away
marinero m. sailor
mas conj. but
•ma's adv. more; most; plus; -—
alia" farther, farther on; • — de
more than; como el que — , as
the best of them; «el — , the
most; • — grande que larger
than; «nada — que nothing
but
masa/. mass, body
•matador m. matador (the chief
bull-fighter, who kills the bull)
matanza/. killing
•matar to kill
materia/. matter; — prima raw
material
material material
maya adj. and noun m. and f.
Maya, Mayan
•mayor older, elder; larger, larg-
est; greater, greatest; la —
parte the greater part, majority
mayoria/. majority
•me dir. and indir. obj. pron. me;
to or for me; refl. pron. myself
mec&nico mechanical
mediano medium
•medio m. middle, midst; means;
en — de in the middle of, in
the midst of
mejicano adj. and noun m. Mexi-
can
•me jor better; best; lo — , the
best, the best part
mejorar to improve
melanc61ico gloomy, melancholy
memorable memorable
mencionar to mention
•menor younger; youngest;
smaller; smallest
menos adv. less, least; except;
por lo — , at least
mensajero m. messenger
mercado m. market, market place
Mer-Mot
VOCABULARIO
XXVI
mercancfa/. merchandise
merecer (zco) 38 to deserve, merit
merendero w. lunchroom
•mes m. month
•mesa/, table
mestizo m. half-breed (white and
Indian)
meter to put
metrdpoli/. metropolis
metropolitano metropolitan
mezcla/. mixture
mezclar to mix, mingle; — se con
to mingle with
•mi pass. adj. my
•mi term. pers. pron. me
microbtis m. small bus
miedo m. fear
•mientras adv. and conj. while, as
long as; — tanto meanwhile
•mil (one, a) thousand
milagro m. miracle
milla/. mile
millar m. (group of a) thousand
•mill6n m. million
millonario m. millionaire
mina/. mine
mineral m. mineral
minero mining
•minuto m. minute
mlo poss. adj. mine; el mio (la
mia, los mios, las mias) poss.
pron. mine; lo mio what is mine
•mirar to look at, behold; •— se
(uno a otro) to look at each
other
misa/. (religious) Mass
misi6n/. mission
j«i§l«iero m. missionary
•xnismo same; very; lo — , the
same thing; lo — que the
same as, just as; mafiana — ,
tomorrow at the latest
misterioso mysterious
mi tad/, half; middle; a la — de
in the middle of
moda/. fashion, style, mode
•moderno modern, up-to-date;
lo — , what is modern
•modismo m. idiom
modo m. manner, mode; al — de
in the manner of; de — que so
that, in such a way that
•molestar to disturb, bother, mo-
lest
•molino m. mill; — de viento
windmill
•momento m. moment
momia/. mummy
monarquia/. monarchy
•monasterio m. monastery
monolito m. monolith (stone in
one piece)
•montado adj. and pp. mounted;
•ir — en to ride (an animal)
•montafia/. mountain
montafioso mountainous
•montar to mount, ride; set up;
— a caballo to ride a horse
monte m. mountain
•monumento m. monument
•morir (ue, u) 28, 45 (or — se) to
die; — de vie jo to die of old age
•moro adj. and noun m. Moorish,
Moor
mortal mortal
mosaico m. mosaic
mostrar (ue) 24 to show
motivo m. motive
xxvn
VOCABULARIO
Mov-Nie
•mover (ue) 26 to move; • — la
cola to wag the tail; • — se to
move (oneself)
mozo m. porter
•muchacha/. girl
•muchacho m. boy
muchisimo very much; — s very
many
•mucho adj., pron. and adv. much,
a great deal; • — que ver much
to see; lo — , how much; »no
— , not very; •muchos, -as
many
muebles m. pi. furniture
muelle m. dock, pier
muer — , see morir 28, 45
muerte /. death; dar — a to put
to death, kill
•muerto adj. and pp. of morir 28,
45 dead; killed; los—s the dead
muev — , see mover 26
•mujer/. woman
mula/. mule
multitud /. multitude, crowd
•mundo m. world; «todo el — ,
everybody
municipal municipal
mur — , see morir 2#, 45
mural mural
•mur alia/, wall
•museo m. museum
•musica/. music
•muy adv. very
N
•nacer (zco) 38 to be born; antes
de -— los niflos before the chil-
dren were born
•naci6n/. nation
•nacional national
•nada indef. pron. nothing; any-
thing, something (when after a
verb preceded by no); — de
malo nothing unfortunate; —
de riquezas no riches; • — m&s
que nothing (else) but; adv.
not at all
nadar to swim
•nadie indef. pron. no one, no-
body; anyone, somebody (when
after a verb preceded by no);
•a — , no one, etc. (as object)
nahuatle m. Nahuatl (an Indian
language of Mexico)
naranja/. orange
natural natural
naturalmente naturally
naufragio m. shipwreck
•navegar (gu6) 32 to sail, navi-
gate
•necesario necessary
•necesitar to need
negar (ie, gu6) 23, 32 to deny;
refuse; — se a to refuse to
negocio m. business; business
house, store, shop; hombre de
— s businessman
•negro black
neoyorquino adj. and noun m. of
New York; New Yorker
nevado adj. and pp. snowy, snow-
clad
•ni conj. nor; neither; not even;
•ni . . . ni neither . . . nor; ni
uno not a single one
nieg — , see negar 2 j, 32
•nieto m. grandson
Nie-Oir
VOCABULARIO
XXVUl
nieve/. snow
•ningtin short form of ninguno
•ninguno indef. adj. and pron. no;
none; any (when after a verb
preceded by no)
•nifia/. girl
•nifio m. boy; pi. children
nitr6geno m. nitrogen
nivel m. level
•no adv. no; not; •contestar que
— , to answer no
•noche/. night, evening; •esta — ,
tonight; «por la — , at night,
in the evening; •buenas — s,
good evening, good night
n6made m. nomad
nombrar to name, appoint
•nombre m. name; dc — , by
name; j qu6 — m£s raro ! what
an odd name !
nordeste m. northeast
noroeste m. northwest
•norte m. north
•norteamericano adj. and noun
m. North American
•nos dir. and indir. obj. pron. us;
to or for us; reft. pron. our-
selves
•nosotros, -as subj. pron. we;
term. pron. us
nostalgia /. homesickness; tener
— dc to be homesick for
notable notable, noteworthy
notar to notice, note; es de — , it
is worth noting
notidas/. pi. news
no vela/, novel
novio m. sweetheart, " boy friend "
nube/. cloud
•nuestro poss. adj. our; el — ,
POSS. pron. ours
•nuevo new
nuevomejicano adj. and noun m.
New Mexican
ntimero m. number
•numeroso numerous
•nunca adv. never; ever (when
after a verb preceded by no);
mejor que — , better than ever
•o conj. or
obelisco m. obelisk
objeto m. object
•obra /. work (usually of art)
•obscure dark
observar to observe
occidental western
oc£ano m. ocean
ocupaci6n/. occupation
•ocupado adj. and pp. busy, oc-
cupied
ocupar to occupy; — se de (or en)
to engage in, be busy at
•octinir to happen, occur; se me
ocurre it occurs to me
odiar to hate
odisea /. odyssey, wandering
journey
•oeste m. west
ofitial official
oficialmente officially
oficio m. craft, occupation; artes
y —s arts and crafts
•ofrecer (zco) 38 to offer
oig— , see ofr 10
•ofr 10 to hear; — dedr to hear
XXIX
VOCABULARIO
Ojo-Par
say, said; — hablar to hear
speak, spoken; — hablar a
los mejicanos to hear the Mexi-
cans speak; old hear
•ojo m. eye
oleada/. wave, surge
olvidar to forget; no olvid£is
don't forget; no olvidemos let
us not forget
ombti m. ombu (a tree)
6pera/. opera
oponer 12 to oppose; — se a to
oppose
opondr — , see oponer 12
opong — , see oponer 12
oportunidad /. opportunity
opus — , see oponer 12
oraci6n/. sentence
orden m. order, command; /.
order, brotherhood
ordenar to order, command
oreja/. (external) ear
organizaci6n/. organization
organizar (c6) 34 to organize
orgullo m. pride
orgulloso proud
orientaci6n/. guidance, direction
origen m. origin
orilla/. shore, bank; a — s de on
the shores of
ornado ornate
•oro m. gold ; — en poivo gold dust
orquesta/. orchestra
•os dir. and indir. obj. pron. you;
to or for you; reft. pron. your-
selves
otofio m. autumn, fall
•otro other, another; — a vez
again
oveja/. sheep, ewe
oxfgeno m. oxygen
oy — , see olr 10
•padre m. father; pi. parents
•pagar (gufc) 32 to pay, pay for
pAgina/. page
•pals m. country (political di-
vision)
paisaje m. landscape
paisano m. countryman, rustic
paja /. straw; — toquilla hat
straw; sombrero de — , straw
hat
pdjaro m. bird
•palabra/. word
•palacio m. palace
palmera/. palm tree
palo m. pole, stick; — santo
lignum vitae (a hard cabinet
wood)
pampa/. pampa, great plain
•pan m. bread
panamericanismo m. Pan Ameri-
canism
panamericano Pan American
panorama m. panorama, view
pantalones m. pi. trousers
pantano m. swamp, marsh
papa/, potato
•papelw. paper; r61e, part; hacer
un — , to play a part
paquete m. package
•par**, pair; couple
•para prep, for, to; in order to
parafso m. paradise
parasol m. sunshade, parasol
Par-Per
VOCABULARIO
XXX
parcialmente partially, partly
•parecer (zco) 38 to seem, appear,
look like; parece que sf it seems
so; •me parece I think, it seems
to me; £ qu£ os parece? what
do you think of ? — se a to re-
semble
pareja/. pair, couple .
parienta/. (woman) relative
•pariente m. (man) relative
•parque m. park
•parte/. part; direction; «a otra
— , elsewhere; de todas — s
from everywhere; la mayor — ,
the greater part, majority; por
mi — , for my part; »por todas
— s everywhere
partida/. departure
•partido m. game
•partii to leave, depart
pasado m. past; — mafiana day
after tomorrow
pasajero m. passenger
•pasar to pass; happen, occur;
•i qu6 pasa? what's going on?
•£qu£ te (or le) pasa? what's
the matter with you ?
pasearse to walk, stroll, take a
walk, drive
•paseo m. walk, stroll, drive; *dar
un — f to take a walk, drive
paso m. pass; step
pastel m. pastry; pie
paste m. pasture, grazing land
pastor m. shepherd
patata/. potato
•patio m. patio, courtyard
patria/. native land
patriota m. andf. patriot
pavo m. turkey
paz/. peace
peat6n m. pedestrian
•pedazo m. piece; plot
•pedir (i) 29 to ask for, request,
beg; • — a to ask from
pelear to fight, combat
•pelfcula/. film
•peligro m. danger
peligroso dangerous
pelota/. ball
penalidad/. hardship
penetrar (en) to penetrate
penitencia/. penitence
•pensar (ie) 23 to think; intend;
• — en to think of
pensativo pensive, thoughtful
peer worse; — de salud in worse
health
•pequefio small (in size)
pera/. pear
perder (ie) 25 to lose
•perdonar to forgive, pardon
perecer (zco) 38 to perish; no ha
de — , shall not perish
peregrinaci6n/. pilgrimage
peregrine m. pilgrim
perfecci6n/. perfection
•perfectamente perfectly
perfecto perfect
peri6dico m. newspaper
permanente permanent
permiso m. permission
•permitir to permit, allow
•pero conj. but
•perro m. dog; — callejero street
dog, mongrel, "mut"
persona/, person
personal personal
XXXI
VOCABULARIO
Per-Pot
persuadir to persuade
peruano adj. and noun m. Peru-
vian
pesar: a — de in spite of
pescar (qu6) 30 to fish
peso m. peso (standard coin in
various Spanish- American coun-
tries)
petr61eo m. petroleum
pez m. fish
pico m. peak
pid — , see pedir 29
•pie m. foot; «a — , on foot, afoot;
poner — en to step foot in
•piedra/. stone
piens — , see pensar 2 3
pierd — , see perder 25
•pierna/. leg
pintar to paint
pintor m. painter
pintoresco picturesque
•pintura/. painting
pirftmide/. pyramid
piscina /. swimming pool
•piso m. floor, story
placer m. pleasure
planta/. plant
plata/. silver
platanal m. banana plantation
pl&tano m. banana
plato m. dish
play a/, beach; parking place (in
Argentina)
•plaza/, plaza, square; — de toros
bull-ring
pleno full; en — verano in mid-
summer
plomo m. lead
pluma/. feather, plume
poblacidn/. town; population
poblador m. settler
poblar (ue) 24 to settle, populate
•pobre poor; noun m. poor man
pobrecito m. dim. poor fellow
•poco adj., adv. and pron. little (in
amount)', a — de salir soon
after leaving; al — tiempo in
a short time; •pocos, -as few
•poder 1 1 to be able, can; puede
ser it may be, it is possible;
se puede one can; noun m.
power
•poderoso powerful
podr — , see poder 1 1
poema m. poem
politico political
polvo m. dust; oro en — , gold
dust
p&lvora/. gunpowder
polio m. chicken
pondr — , see poner 12
•poner 12 to put, place; — pie en
to step foot in; • — se to put
oneself; — se a + adj. to be-
come + adj.; — se a + inf. to
begin, start 4- pres. p.; • — se
en camino to set forth, out;
•— se el sol (of the sun) to set;
• — se + article of dress to put
on, don; • — se el sombrero to
put on one's hat
popular popular
populoso populous
•por prep, for, by, for the sake
of, in exchange for; through,
along, in, because of, on ac-
count of; • — aqui around here;
— tiento per cent; •— entre be-
Por-Pro
VOCABULARIO
xxxii
tween, through; • — eso there-
fore, for that reason; — la
noche at night; — lo elegante
in elegance; — no estar be-
cause of not being; 4 — qu6?
why?
•I por qu£ ? why ?
•porque because
porquero m. swine herd
portefio adj. and noun m. of
Buenos Aires (person or thing)
= bonaerense
portorriquefio adj. and noun m.
Puerto Rican
portuguSs, -esa Portuguese; noun
m. Portuguese (man or lan-
guage)
poseer 43 to possess
posesi6n/. possession
posey— , see poseer 43
•posible possible; hacer lo — , to
do what is possible; todo lo — f
as much as possible
potro m. colt
pozo m. well
•prado m. meadow
precio m. price
pretioso precious, valuable, fine
precisamente exactly, precisely
preciso necessary
predominar to predominate
preferencia/. preference
tpreferir (ie, i) 27 to prefer
prcfier— -, or prefir— , see pre-
•pregunta/. question; •hacer — B
to ask questions
•preguntar to ask, inquire; • — a
to ask of
prehistfirico prehistoric
preincaico pre-Incan
prensa/. press
•preocupado adj. and pp. worried
preocuparse (de) to worry
(about)
•preparar to prepare
•preparativo m. preparation
presentar to present; — se to
present oneself, appear
•presidente m. president
•prestar to lend
prevalecer (zco) 38 to prevail
prima/. (woman) cousin
primavera/. spring (of year)
•primer short form of primero
•primero first; lo — , the first
thing
primitive primitive
primo m. (man) cousin; adj.
prime, basic, raw; materia — a
raw material
•principal chief, principal
prfncipe m. prince
•prisa /. speed, haste; »de — , in
haste; tener — , to be in a
hurry
probable probable
probar (ue) 24 to sample, test,
try out, taste
problema m. problem
•procesi6n/. procession
proclamar to proclaim
producir (zco) 18 to produce
producto m. product
produj— , see producir 18
produzc— , see producir 18
•profesor m. (man) teacher, pro-
XXXU1
VOLABULAR1O
Pro-Que
•profesora/. (woman) teacher
profundamente deeply, pro-
foundly
profundo deep, profound
programa m. program
progresista progressive
progreso m. progress
promesa/. promise
•prometer to promise
promisi6n /. promise; tierra de
— , promised land
•pronto adv. soon, promptly; «de
— , suddenly
pronunciaci6n /. pronunciation
pronunciar to pronounce
propiedad /. property; owner-
ship
propietario m. proprietor
propio own; proper
proponer 12 to propose
propus — , see proponer 12
prosperar to prosper
pr6spero prosperous
•proteger (jo) 37 to protect
protej — , see proteger 37
provechoso profitable
provincia/. province
provisi6n/. provision
provisto adj. and pp. provided;
— de provided with
provocar (qu£) 30 to provoke
•prfximo next, nearest
proyectar to plan
proyecto m. plan, project
publicar (qu6) jo to publish
pfiblico public
pud — 9 see poder n
•pueblo m. people; town; pueblo
pued— , see poder i /
•puente m. bridge
•puerta/. door; gate
puerto m. port, harbor
•pues adv. and conj. well, well
now; for
puesta /. setting (of the sun)\ a
la — del sol at sunset
•puesto pp. of poner if; noun m.
stand; post, station
pulque m. pulque (a Mexican al-
coholic beverage, made from the
maguey plant)
pulsera/. bracelet
punto m. point; estar a — de to
be about to
pus — , see poner ra /a.
•que rel. pron. who, which, that;
•el — (la — , los — , las — )
rel. pron. who, which, that, the
one who, he who, she who, they
who; »lo — , that which, what
•que c0n/. that; than; for; *es — ,
the fact is that
•£qu£? what? »ipor — ? why?;
i — os parece? what do you
think of ?
•I qu£ ! how ! what ! what a !
•quedar to remain; • — se to re-
main (intentionally); to be;
— por ver to remain to be seen
quehacer m. duty, work, task
quemar to burn
quep— , see caber 2
•querer (ie) 13 to wish, want, de-
sire, love; quisi6ramos we
should like
Que-Rel
VOCABULARIO
XXXIV
•querido adj. and pp. dear,beloved
•queso m. cheese
quichua (or quechua) m. and f.
Quichua (Indian)
quien, -es rel. pron. who, he who;
they who; a — , to whom,
whom
•I qui£n, -es? interr. pron. who ?
•i a — ? to whom ? whom ? •£ de
— ? whose ?
quienquiera (que) indef. pron.
whoever
quier — , see querer 13
quinta/. (small) farm
quis — , see querer 1 3
•quitar (a) to take away, take off,
remove; • — se el sombrero to
take off one's (own) hat
R
radio/, radio
ramal m. branch line, road
ramiUete m. bouquet
ranchero m. rancher
rancho m. ranch
•rfipidamente rapidly, quickly
rftpido rapid, fast
raro odd, queer, rare
rascacielos m. skyscraper
rato m. while, time
raza/. race (of people)] breed (of
cattle)
•raz6n/. reason; «tener — , to be
right
•real royal
realizar (c6) 34 to effect, execute,
carry out, accomplish
reata/. rope (tying horses together)
rebaflo m. herd
rebelarse to rebel
rebelde m. rebel
rebocillo m. headdress (covering
back of head and neck) ; shawl
•rebuznar to bray
•recibir to receive
recoger (jo) 37 to gather, harv-
est, pick up
reconocer (zco) 38 to recognize;
reconnoitre
reconquista /. reconquest
recordar (ue) 24 to remember, re-
call, remind
•recorrer to traverse, travel
through, go through
recuerd — , see recordar 24
recuerdo m. reminder, remem-
brance
recurso m. resource
red/, net, network
reemplazar (c6) 34 to replace
refresco m. refreshment
refuerzo m. reinforcement
refugio m. refuge
regalo m. gift, present
regi6n/. region
regional regional
regresar to return
regreso m. return; viaje de — ,
return journey
•reina/. queen
•reinar to reign
•refr 2Qa to laugh; — se de to
laugh at
•reja/. grating, grill
relaci6n/. relation
relatar to relate
religi6n/. religion
XXXV
VOCABULARIO
Rem-Rus
remote remote, distant
rendir (i) 29 to surrender; ren-
der; — culto a to worship
refiir (i) 29, 42 to scold; quarrel,
fight
•repaso m. review
representante m. representative
representar to represent
reproducer (zco) 18 to repro-
duce
•reptiblica /. republic
republicano m. republican
residencia/. residence
residir to reside
resistir to endure, resist
respective respective
respetar to respect
respirar to breathe
•responder (a) to answer, reply
restablecer (zco) j# to re-estab-
lish
restaurante m. restaurant
restaurar to restore
•resto m. rest, remainder; pi. re-
mains
resuelto adj. and pp. resolved,
determined
resultar to result, prove to be
retirada/. retreat, withdrawal
retirar(se) to retire, withdraw,
retreat
reunidn/. meeting, reunion
reunir(se) to assemble, meet; los
reunidos those assembled; se
refine meets
revfts m. reverse; al — de the
reverse of, contrary to
revitta/. magazine; review
revolud6n/. revolution
•rey m. king; pi. king and
queen
ri — , see refr 2ga
•rico rich, fine
ridiculo ridiculous
riego m. irrigation
rinc6n m. corner
rind — , see rendir 29
rifi — , see refiir 29, 42
•rio m. river; — abajo down-
stream
rioplatense adj. and noun m. of
the Rio de la Plata
riqueza/. riches, wealth
riquisimo very rich
risa/. laughter
rival m. andf. rival
roca/. rock
rocalloso rocky
rodar (ue) 24 to roll; run off;
make a film, "shoot" a film
rodear to surround
rodeo m. round-up, rodeo
rojo red
•romftntico romantic
romper 45 to break
ropa /. clothing, clothes; — in-
terior underclothes
rosa/. rose
rosado rose, rose-colored, pink
rubio blond, fair
rued—, see rodar 24
•ruido m. noise
ruina/. ruin
rumbo m. direction, course; con
— a bound for, in the direction
of
rural rural
ruso adj. and noun m. Russian
Sab-Sep
VOCABULARIO
XXXVI
S
•saber 14 to know; • h inf. to
know how to + inf.; supieron
they learned, found out
sabr — , see saber 14
sabroso tasty, delicious
•sacar (qu6) 30 to take out, pull out
sacerdote m. priest
sacrificio m. sacrifice
sacudir to shake off
sala/. living room
salg — , see salir 15
salida/. departure; outlet
•salir 15 to go out, come out,
leave; a poco de — , soon after
leaving
salitre m. nitrate, saltpeter
sa!6n m. hall, salon
•salud/. health; estar peor de — ,
to be in worse health
•saludar to greet
•salvaje wild, untamed, savage;
noun m. savage
salvar to save
san short form of santo
•sangre/. blood
santo blessed, holy; noun m.
saint; todo el — dfa the whole
blessed day
saq — , see sacar 30
sarape m. serape; blanket used
as a shawl or cloak
satisfacti6n/. satisfaction
*e reft. pron. yd sing, and pi.
oneself, itself, himself, herself,
yourself; themselves, your-
selves; each other; to or for
oneself, etc.
se indir. obj. pron. (= le or les)
to him, to her, to it, to you;
to them, to you
•s& I know, know how; ist sing,
pres. of saber 14
sea see ser 16
secci6n/. section
•sed/. thirst; — de oro thirst for
gold; «tener — , to be thirsty
seda/. silk
sede/. seat; center
seguida: en — , at once
•seguir (i, go) 29, 33 to follow,
continue, keep on, go on; • —
+ ger. to keep on, continue +
pres. p.; — deseando to keep
on wishing; — siendo to con-
tinue to be; • — su camino to
continue on one's way
segtin prep, according to
•segundo second
seguro sure, secure, safe
•semana/. week
semilla/. seed
sendero m. trail, path
•sentado adj. and pp. seated
•sentar (ie) 23 to seat; •— se to
seat oneself, sit down
sentido m. sense
•sentir (ie, i) 27 to feel, feel sorry,
regret; — se to feel oneself
sefial/. mark, sign, brand
sefialar to point out, point at
•sefior m. gentleman, sir, Mr.
•sefiora/. lady, madam, Mrs.
•Mftorita/. young lady, Miss
septrtci6n/. separation
separmdo adj. and pp. separated
separar(se) to separate
XXXV11
VOCABULARIO
Sep-Sub
•sepulcro m. sepulchre
•ser 1 6 to be, exist; • — dc to be-
come of; que seamos that we
be; ser& it must be; noun m.
being
serie/. series
•servir 29 to serve; — de to
serve as; • — para to be good
for, useful for, at; para — a
Vd. at your service
sesi6n/. session
sezo m. sex
•si conj. if, whether
•sf adv. yes; — que indeed; yes
indeed
•st refl. term. pron. oneself, itself,
himself, herself, yourself;
themselves, yourselves; •decir
para — , to say to oneself
•siempre adv. always, ever
sient — , see sentar 23 or sentir 27
•sierra /. mountain range, moun-
tain
sig— , see seguir 29, 33
•siglo m. century
significar (qu6) 30 to mean,
signify
•siguiente following
•silencio m. silence
silla/. saddle; chair
simbolo m. symbol
simpltico congenial, likeable,
nice, sympathetic
•sin prep, without; — que conj.
without
sino conj. but; no s61o ... — tam-
biin not only . . . but also; —
que conj. but
sint— , see sentir 27
BUT — , see servir 29
sitio m. place, site, spot
•situado adj. and pp. situated
soberbio fine, superb
•sobre prep, on, upon, over,
above; — todo above all,
especially
sobreviviente m. survivor
sobrina/. niece
•sobrino m. nephew; pi. neph-
ew(s) and niece(s)
sociedad/. society
•sol m. sun; •hay — , it is sunny,
the sun is shining; »el — sale
the sun rises; *el — se pone
the sun sets
soldado m. soldier
solicitud/. petition
•solo adj. alone
•s61o adv. only; no — ... sino
tambi£n not only . . . but also
soltero m. bachelor
•sombrero m. hat; — de paja
straw hat; — de paja toquilla
"Panama "hat
•somos, •son see ser 16
son m. sound, noise
•sonar (ue) 24 to sound, ring
•sonrefr (i) 2ga to smile
sonrisa/. smile
sopa/. soup
•sordo deaf
sorprender to surprise
sorpresa/. surprise
•soy see ser 16
•su poss.adj. his, her, its, your, their
sdbdito m. subject (of a rider)
•subir to go up, mount, climb;
— a to get into, climb, mount
Sub-Ten
VOCABULARIO
xxxvm
•subterrfineo subterranean ; «f erro-
carril — , subway, underground
railway
•suburbio m. suburb
subyugar (gu6) 32 to subjugate
suceso m. event, happening
sucesor m. successor
sucursal /. branch (of a busi-
ness)
sudeste m. southeast
sudoeste m. southwest
sueco adj. and noun m. Swedish,
Swede
•suelo m. ground, soil
suerte/. fate, lot
sufrir to suffer
sujeto fastened, held, secured
sumamente highly
sumo highest, greatest
sup — , see saber 14
superar to surpass, excel
superior superior; escuela — ,
high school
suponer 12 to suppose
supremo supreme
suprimir to suppress
•suim. south
suspirai to sigh
suyo poss. adj. his, her, its, your,
their; muy — , very much their
own; el — (la suya, los suyos,
las suyas) poss. pron. his, hers,
its, yours, theirs
tabacoiff. tobacco
ttjo m. gorge; cut
*ttl indef. adj. such, such a; con
— que conj. provided that; —
vez perhaps
tamal m. tamale (see page 144)
tambi£n adv. also, too; no s61o
. . . sino — , not only . . . but
also
tampoco adv. neither; either
(when after a verb preceded by
no)
•tan adv. so, as; • — ... como as
(so) ... as; • — ... que so ...
that
•tanto indef. adj. and pron. so
much, as much; • — como as
much as; both . . . and
tardar to be slow, delay, be late;
— en + inf. to delay in +
pres. p.
•tarde adv. late; »mAs — , later
•tarde /. afternoon; «por la — ,
in the afternoon; «buenas — s
good afternoon; «toda la — t
all afternoon
taxi (tazimetro) m. taxicab, taxi
•te dir. and indir. obj. pron. you,
thee; to or for you, thee; refl.
pron. thyself, yourself
•teatro m. theater
tejado m. roof
tejano adj. and noun m. Texan
tejuana/. woman of Tehuan tepee
•telegrama m. telegram
temer to fear
temeroso fearful
tempested/, tempest, storm
templo m. temple
temporada/. season
•temprano adv. early
tendr— , see tener 17
xxxix
VOCABULARIO
Ten-Tra
•tener 77 to have, possess; • —
. . . ados (de edad) to be ...
years old; — cuidado to be
careful; — gusto en to take
pleasure in, be pleased to; • —
hambre to be hungry; — la
costumbre to be accustomed;
— lugar to take place; — nos-
talgia de to be homesick for;
— prisa to be in a hurry; —
por to regard as, consider as;
• — que + inf. to have to +
inf.; • — raz6n to be right; • —
sed to be thirsty
teng — , see tener 77
teniente m. lieutenant
tequila/, tequila (a Mexican alco-
holic drink made from distilled
juice of the maguey plant)
•terminal to end, finish
tSrmino m. term
ternero m. calf
terraza/. terrace
terremoto m. earthquake
terreno m. land, terrain
•terrible terrible
territorio m. territory
tesoro m. treasure
•ti pers. term. pron. thee, you
tfa/. aunt
•tiempo m. time; weather; a — ,
on time, in time; al poco — ,
in a short time; en todo — ,
constantly; »en un — , at one
time, formerly; «hace buen
(nud) — f it is good (bad)
weather; m^s—, longer, longest
tien— , see tener ij
•tienda/. shop, store
tierra/. earth, land; — adentro
inland; — de promision prom-
ised land
•timido timid
•tio m. uncle; pi. uncle(s) and
aunt(s)
tipico typical
tipo m. type
titulo m. title
•tocar (qu6) 30 to touch; play (a
musical instrument)
•todavia adv. still, yet
•todo indef. adj. and pron. all,
whole, entire, every; every-
thing; • — el dia all day; • —
el mundo everybody; • — s los
dfas every day; ante — , first
of all; sobre — , above all,
especially
tolteca m. and f. Toltec (Indian)
•tomar to take
toquilla /. bonnet, hat; paja — ,
hat straw
•torero m. bull-fighter
•toro m. bull
•tone/, tower
tortilla /. pancake (of cornmeal)
tortuoso winding, tortuous
•trabajar to work
•trabajo m. work; costar — , to
cost effort, be difficult
tradici6n/. tradition
tradicional traditional
•traer 19 to bring
trftgico tragic
traig — , see traer 19
traj— , see traer ip
traje m. suit, dress, garb, attire;
— de bafio bathing suit
Tra-Val
VOCABULARIO
•tranquilamente calmly, peace-
fully
tranquilidad /. tranquility, calm
•tranquilo calm, peaceful, tran-
quil
tr&nsito m. traffic
transportar to transport, carry
transporte m. transportation
tranvia m. street car, tramway
tras adv. and prep, behind
trasatl&ntico transatlantic
trasbordo m. transfer
trasladar to transfer, move
tratado m. treaty
•tratar to treat; •— de + inf. to
try to + inf.
tray—, see traer ig
trecho m. section, stretch
tren m. train
tribu/. tribe
tribunal m. court, tribunal
trigo m. wheat
•triste sad
tristemente sadly
tronco m. trunk (of tree)
tropa/. troop
•tu poss. adj. thy, your
•tti pers. pron. thou, you
tumba/. tomb
tfinelm. tunnel
turco adj. and noun m. Turkish,
Turk
turismo m. touring, tourism;
barco de — , sight-seeing boat
turista m. andf. tourist
turquesa/. turquoise
tuv— , see tener 17
tuyo poss. adj. thy, thine; your,
yours; el — (la tuya, los tuyos,
las tuyas) poss. pron. thine;
yours
•u conj. or (used instead of o be-
fore a word beginning with o
or ho)
•Ultimo last, latest
•un, una indef. art. a, an, one
•tinico only
uni6n/. union
•unir to unite, join
•universidad/. university
•uno numeral and indef. pron. one,
someone; pi. some, a few,
several, a pair of; about
urbano urban
uruguayo adj. and noun m. Uru-
guayan
usar to use
•usted pers. pron. pol. sing, you;
abbr. Vd.; *ustedes you pi.;
abbr. Vds. ; »de — , your
fitil useful
uva/. grape
•va goes; yd sing. pres. of ir Q;
se — , (he) goes away; one
goes
vaca/. cow; came de — , beef
•vacaciones/. pi. vacation
vagar (gu$) 32 to wander
vaivtn m. going and coming
•valer 20 to be worth; be valid
valg — , see valer 20
•valiente brave, valiant
xli
VOCABULARIO
Val-Vid
valor m. value
valle m. valley
•vamos we go, are going; ist pi.
pres. of ir p; • — a ver let's see;
vamos hortatory subjunctive let
us go; vfimonos let us go
(away)
•van see ir p
vano vain; en — , in vain
vapor m. steamer
vaquero m. cowboy
variaci6n/. variation
variado adj. and pp. varied
•varies, -as various, several
vasco adj. and noun m. Basque
vasija/. vessel
vasto vast
vay — , see ir p
•Yd., Yds. abbr.for usted, ustedes
ve go; imper. of ir p; vete go
away
•veces pi. of vez
vecino m. neighbor
vehlculo m. vehicle
ven come; imper. 0/ venir 21
veneer (zo) 35 to vanquish, over-
come
vendedor m. seller, vendor
•vender to sell
vendr — , see venir 21
venerar to revere, venerate
venezolano adj. and noun m.
Venezuelan
veng — , see venir 21
vengar (gu6) 32 to avenge; — se
de to avenge oneself for
•venir (ie) 21 to come; — bien a
uno to fit one well, become one
venta/. sale; en — , on i
•ventana/. window
ventura/. luck, fortune
•ver 22, 45 to see; »se ve it is
seen; it is clear; quedarpor — ,
to remain to be seen
veraneo m. summer vacation;
lugar de — , summer resort
•verano m. summer
•verdad /. truth; a la — , in
truth; »en — , in truth; »es — ,
it is true; that's so; ^no es
— ? or i — ? isn't it true? etc.
verdadero real, true
verde green
vestido m. dress, garb, clothing
vestir(se) (i) 2p to dress, clothe,
clothe oneself; vestido de
dressed as
•vez /. time (in recurrence) ; a la
— , at the same time; alguna
— , ever; «a su — , in one's
turn; «a veces at times, some-
times; cada — m&s rnore and
more; de — en cuando from
time to time; en — de instead
of; »otra — , again; porprimera
— , for the first time; tal — ,
perhaps; »una — m&s once more
via/, way, track, road
•viajar to travel
•viaje m. trip, journey; — de re-
greso return trip; •hacerun — ,
to take a trip, make a journey
viajecito m. dim. little trip
•viajerofft. traveller
vial pertaining to roads
victorioso victorious
•vida /. life; llevar una — , to
lead a life
Vid-Zor
VOCABULARIO
xlii
vidalita /. vidalita (a type of
gaucho song)
vidrio m. glass
•vie jo old; noun m. old man;
morir de — , to die of old age
vien — , see venir 21
viento m. wind; molino de — ,
windmill
vin — , see venir 21
vino m. wine
violeta/. violet
virgen/. virgin
virrey m. viceroy
•visita/. visit
visitante m. andf. visitor
•visitar to visit
vist — , see vestir 29
vista/, view, sight; en — de in
view of
•visto seen; pp. of ver 22, 45
•vivir to live
vivo bright, lively, gay
vizcafno Biscayan; a la — a in
Biscayan style
•voces pi. of voz
volar (ue) 24 to fly
volcan m. volcano
voluntad/. will
•volver (ue) 26, 45 to return, go
back; turn; • — a + inf. to do
again the act of the inf. ; — a
caer to fall again; — a ver to
see again; — en si to regain
consciousness, "come to"; —
sobre sus pasos to retrace one's
step; • — se to turn, turn
around
•vosotros, -as pers. pron. subj.
and term, you
•voy I go, am going; istsing.pres.
oflTQ
•voz/. voice; »en — alta in a loud
tone, loudly; »en — baja in a
low tone
•vuelto returned; pp. of volver
26,45
vuelv — , see volver 26, 45
•vuestro poss. adj. your; el —
(la vuestra, los vuestros, las
vuestras) poss. pron. yours
•y conj. and
•ya adv. indeed, already, now, by
and by; • — no no longer; —
que since, now that
yanqui adj. and noun m. Yankee
yegua/. mare
•yo pers. pron. I
zapato m. shoe
zona/. zone
zoo!6gico zoological
zorro m. fox
VOCABULARY
a, an un, uno, una
abandoned abandonado, -a
ability abilidad/.
able: to be — , poder (ue)
about (in regard to) acerca de, de;
(approximately) cosa de; to be
— to estar a punto de
above encima de; — all sobre
todo
abroad al extranjero
accompany acompanar
achieve lograr; to — success
lograr exito
acquainted : to be — with conocer
a
acqueduct acueducto
act: to — as servir (i) de
activity actividad/.
actor actor m.
actress actriz/.
admire admirar
adobe adobe m.
advanced avanzado, -a
advantage: to take — of apro-
vecharse de
adventure aventura
aerial aereo, -a
afoot a pie; to go — (on foot) ir a
pie
afraid: to be — , tener miedo de
(que)
after despu6s (if followed by an
zliii
object, the object is preceded by
de) ; soon — (entering) a poco
de (entrar); day — tomorrow
pasado mafiana
afterwards despue"s
again otra vez; to do (something)
— , volver a (4- infinitive);
never — , nunca jamas
against contra
age edad /. ; of old — , de viejo
ago: (ten years) — , hace (diez
anos)
agreeable agradable
agricultural agricola
aid ayudar
air aire m.; by — , por aire;
open — , al aire libre
airplane aeroplane, avion m.
airport aeropuerto
all todo, -a; — day [long] todo
el dia; — the time todo el
tiempo; — right (muy) bien;
not at — , adv. nada; first of — ,
antes de todo
allow permitir
almost casi
alone solo, -a
along por
also tambien
although aunque
always siempre
am: I — , soy, estoy; such a form
as "/ am studying, etc." is
rendered either by the simple
Amb-Bat
VOCABULARY
xliv
present tense of the verb: estudio,
or by the present progressive:
estoy estudiando
ambassador embajador m.
America America: North — , la
Am6rica del Norte, Norte-
am£rica; South — , la America
del Sur, Sudamerica; Central
— , la America Central, Centro-
am£rica
ancient antiguo, -a
and y
Andes los Andes
Anglo-Saxon anglosaj6n, -ona
animal animal m.
Anna Ana
another otro, -a
answer responder, contestar
any (whatsoever) cualquier, -a;
not — one see no one ; not — ,
ningun, ninguno, -a
anything: not — , see nothing;
not — but nada mds que
appear aparecer
applaud aplaudir
apple manzana; — pie pastel de
manzana
arch arco
architecture arquitectura
are son, estdn; see also am;
there — (impersonal) hay
area £rea
Argentina la Argentina
arm braze; (weapon) anna
army ej&rcito
around: to turn — , volverse;
— here por aqui
arrange arreglar
arrival llegada
arrive llegar
as como; — if (to) como para;
— if como si; (in the capacity
of) de; — guide de gufa
ascend ascender
ask (a question) preguntar, hacer
una pregunta; (for something)
pedir
assembled: to be — , estar reu-
nido, -a
astonished: to be — , sorpren-
derse
at a; — home en casa; — night
de noche, por la noche (in the
sense of "during")
Atlantic atlantico, -a; the —
Ocean el oc6ano atldntico
atmosphere ambiente m.
attend asistir a
August agosto
Augustine: St. — , San Agustin
auto (mobile) autom6vil m.;
coche m.
avenge vengar; — oneself (for)
vengarse (de)
aviation aviation/.
away: to take — , quitar (de)
Aztec azteca
B
backwards adv. hacia atras
bad malo, -a
badly mal
ball pelota; (football) balompig m.
banana platano
bank banco; (of a stream) orilla;
on the — s a las orillas
bark ladrar
base base/.
battle batalla
xlv
VOCABULARY
Bay-Cal
bay bahia
be ser, estar; — (ten years) old
tener (diez aiios); get to — ,
llegar a ser; to — to haber de
+ inf.
beach playa
bear oso
beautiful hermoso, -a; bello, -a
because porque
become (of) ser (de) in the sense
of " happen to"\ (be suitable to)
ir bien a; llegar a ser (get to
be)] ponerse
bed cama; to go to — , acostarse
(ue); to make up the — , ar-
reglar la cama
beef carne (/.) de vaca
before antes (de)
begin empezar (ie) (use a before a
following infinitive)
behind detras de
belong pertenecer
bench banco
beneath debajo de
benefit beneficio
beside al lado de; por el lado de
best (el) mejor
better mejor
between entre; de entre
bid : to — good-bye despedirse (i)
big grande
birth nacimiento
bit: a little — , un poco
black negro, -a
blanket manta
blessed santo, -a; all the — day
todo el santo dia
blind ciego, -a; the — man el
ciego
blue azul
boat barco; steamboat vapor m.
body cuerpo
boil bullir
book libro
border frontera (of a country)
born: to be — , nacer
both los dos, ambos, -as; — ...
and tanto . . . como
bother molestar
bound: — for con rumbo a
boy muchacho; nino (a very young
boy)\ — s and girls muchachos
bracelet pulsera
branch (of a tree) rama; (of a
road) ramal m.
bray rebuznar
bread pan m.
breakfast desayuno; to (eat) — ,
desayunarse
bridge puente m.
bring traer; llevar
brother hermano; Rosa's — , el
hermano de Rosa
building edincio
bull toro
bullfight corrida (de toros)
bullfighter torero
burn quemar
bus autobus m.
businessman hombre de negocios
busy ocupado, -a
but pero; after a previous nega-
tive sino
buy comprar
by por; — name de nombre
cafe1 cafe m.
calendar calendario
Cal-Com
VOCABULARY
xlvi
California California; Lower — ,
Baja California
call llamar; to be called llamarse
can poder; I — , puedo; in the
sense of ability based upon train-
ing saber
canal canal m.
cane cana
canoe canoa
cap gorro; sleeping — , gorro de
dormir
capital capital/.
captain capitan m.
capture capturar
car automovil m.\ coche m.\
sleeping — , coche dormitorio;
dining — , coche comedor
care : to take — of (for) cuidar de
careful: to be — , tener cuidado
carefully con cuidado
carry llevar; traer
Castile Cast ilia; old — , Castilla
la Vieja
Castilian castellano, -a
cathedral catedral/.
cattle ganado
cease dejar (de) + infinitive; ce-
sar
cede ceder
celebrate celebrar; to be cele-
brated celebrarse
center centre
central central; — Park el
Parque Central; — America
la America Central, Centro-
am6rica
Central American centroameri-
cano, -a
century siglo; for many centuries
por muchos siglos
cereal cereal m.
certain cierto, -a
change cambiar
chapter capitulo
chat charlar
cheese queso
chicken polio; — and rice arroz
con polio
chief jefe m.
children los ninos; in the sense of
"sons and daughters" los hijos
choose escoger
chop : lamb — , chuleta de cordero
church iglesia
circumstances circunstancias
circus circo
citizen ciudadano
city ciudad/.
civil civil
civilization civilization/.
class clase/.
clear claro, -a; it is — that claro
que
climate clima m.
climb subir a
close cerrar (ie)
coast costa
codfish bacalao
coffee cafe m.
coffin ataud m.
cold frio m. ; to be — (of weather)
hacer frio; to be — (of a person)
tener frio; adj. frio, -a
colony colonia
collar collar m.
comb peineta
come venir; to — out salir; to
— upon encontrarse (ue) con;
coming along the road viniendo
por el camino
xlvii
VOCABULARY
Corn-Die
comfortable comodo, -a
coming: going and — , vaiv6n m.
command mandar, ordenar; to
be at (your) — , estar a la dis-
position de (listed)
commerce comercio
communication comunicacion /.
companion compafiero
condemn condenar
confederation conf ederaci6n /.
congress congreso
conquer conquistar
conqueror conquistador m.
consciousness: to regain — ,
volver en si
consent consentir (ie, i) en
conserve conservar
consider considerar; he is con-
sidered se le considera
construct construir
construction construction /.
contain contener
continent continente m.
continue continual ; to — on
one's way seguir su camino
contrary: on the — , al contrario
contribute contribuir
cook cocinera; to — , cocinar
cool fresco w.; to be — (of
weather) hacer fresco; adj.
fresco, -a
copper cobre m.
corral corral m.
could see can
country pais m.
course: of — 1 jdaro! j claro
que si I
court corte/.
cow vaca
crazy loco, -a
cream: ice — , helado
cross cruzar; cruz/.
crossroads cruce m.
cultivate cultivar
cultivation cultivo
culture cultura
cure curar
customs-house aduana
dance bailar; baile m.
danger peligro
daughter hija
day dia m. ; all — [long] todo el
dia; from — to — , de dia en
dia; — after tomorrow pasado
manana
dead muerto, -a
deaf sordo, -a; the — man el
sordo; — mute sordomudo
deal: a great — , mucho
death muerte/.
decide decidir
deck cubierta (of a boat)
declare declarar
dedicated: to be — to dedicarse
a
defend defender
defender defensor m.
delay: to — in tardar en
delight encantar; to be delighted
with estar encantado, -a de
deny negar (ie)
departure salida
descendant descendiente m.
desert desierto
desire desear
develop desarrollar
die morir (ue, u)
Dif-Enj
VOCABULARY
xlviii
different diferente; distinto, -a;
in a — manner de una manera
diferente
difficult dificil
difficulty dificultad/.
diner (dining car) coche comedor
direction: in the — ofconrumbo
a
disappear desaparecer
discover descubrir; discovered
descubierto, -a
disembark desembarcar
dish plato
disposal disposition/.
distance: in the — , a lo lejos
distant lejano, -a
do hacer; I — , hago; as the
helping verb in such forms as
"I do not study, etc.", "he
does not sing" the forms "do",
"does", etc. are simply trans-
lated with the present tense of the
verb (sing, study)
dock muelle m.
document documento
dog perro
dollar dolar m.
domestic dom6stico, -a
dominion imperio
dominoes: to play — , jugar al
domin6
done: no sooner said than — ,
dicho y hecho
donkey burro
door puerta; out of — s al aire
libre
doubt dudar
doubtless sin duda
down: to lie — , acostarse (ue)
downstream rio abajo
downwards hacia abajo
draw: to — near acercarse
dress vestirse (i); vestido
drink beber, tomar; to give a —
to dar de beber a
drive (a car) conducir
dry seco, -a
dumb mudo, -a
during durante; por
£
each cada; — other usually re-
quires the refleocive construction
in Spanish: to talk to — other
hablarse
eagle aguila m.
early temprano, -a
earn: to — one's living ganarse
la vida
easily facilmente
easy facil
eat comer; to — lunch almorzar
(ue) ; — breakfast desayunarse
eight ocho
elevation elevation/.
elevator ascensor m.
embark embarcar
embassy embajada
emperor emperador m.
empire imperio
encounter encontrar (ue)
end terminar(se) ; extremidad /.
enemigo enemy
engage: to — in ocuparse de
(or en)
England Inglaterra/.
English ingl£s, -esa
Englishman ing!6s
enjoy gozar de
xlix
VOCABULARY
Eno-Fil
enormous enorme
enough bastante
enter entrar (if an object follows,
use en before the object)
entire entero, -a
entrance entrada
equal igual
escape (from) escapar (de)
especially especialmente
establish establecer; to be es-
tablished establecerse
established establecido, -a
Europe Europa
European europeo, -a
even: — so aun asi
ever: not — , see never; louder
than — , mds fuerte que nunca
every: — day todos los dias;
(through) — part por todas
partes
everybody todo el mundo
everything todo; — that todo
lo que; thanks for — , gracias
por todo; — possible todo lo
posible
everywhere por todas partes;
from — , de todas partes
evil malo, -a
example ejemplo; for — , por
ejemplo
except menos; — me menos yo
excited excitado, -a
exclaim exclamar
exist existir
exit 6xito
expect esperar
expedition expedici6n/.
explain explicar
exploration exploraci6n/.
explore explorar
express expresar; to — oneself
expresarse
extraordinary extraordinario, -a
eye ojo; to have black — s tener
los ojos negros
face cara
fact: the — is es que
fall caer; to — down caerse; to
— upon caer sobre
fame fama
family familia; the G6mez — , la
familia G6mez
famous famoso, -a
far lejos; — from here lejos de
aqui
farm estancia (stock farm)
fat gordo, -a; the — man el
gordo
father padre m.
favor favor m.
favorite favorito, -a
fear miedo; to — , tener miedo de
(que), temer
February febrero
feed dar de comer a
feel sentir (ie, i)
fellow: young — , jovenw.
festival fiesta
few pocos, -as
field campo; the football — , el
campo de futbol
fifteen quince; at two — , a las
dos y cuarto
fifth quinto, -a
fifty cincuenta
figure figura
fill llenar
film (moving-picture) pelicula
Fin-Ger
VOCABULARY
1
finally al fin; finalmente
find hallar (the result of searching) ;
encontrar (ue) (to run across) ;
to — oneself encontrarse; to —
out averiguar
fine (good) bueno, -a
firearm arma de fuego
first primer, primero, -a; (for)
the — time (por) la primera
vez; — of all antes de todo
fit (of a dress, etc.) venir bien a
uno; to — into (be contained
in) caber en
fitting: to be — , convenir (ie, i)
five cinco
flag bandera
floor suelo
Florida la Florida
flourish florecer
flower flor/.
fly volar (ue)
follow seguir
following siguiente; on the —
morning a la manana siguiente;
on the — day al dia siguiente
food comida
fool tonto, -a; what — s men are I
i que tontos son los hombres !
foot pie m.y to go on — , ir a pie;
at the — of al pie de
football futbol m. ; (the ball itself)
balompie* m.
for para; por (in exchange for);
— many years hace muchos
aftos (+ present tense of verb);
frequently the meaning is con-
veyed by the so-catted "dative of
interest": "Open it for me!"
I Abramelo !
forget olvidar
forgive perdonar
fork: to — (of a road) bifurcar
form formar
former: the — , aquel (see that)
fortune fortuna
forty cuarenta; — five cuarenta
y cinco; at ten — five a las
once menos cuarto
found fundar; to be — (to be)
hallarse, encontrarse
foundation fundacion/.
fountain fuente/.
four cuatro
fourteenth (el, la) catorce
fourth cuarto, -a
fox zorro
France Francia
Franciscan franciscano, -a
free libre; to set — , poner en
libertad
French frances, -esa
frequently con frecuencia
friar fraile m.
friend amigo, -a
friendship amistad/.
frightened asustado, -a
from de
fruit fruta
full lleno, -a
furious furioso, -a
furiously furiosamente
gain ganar
game juego; (match) partido
garden jardin m.
general general m.
gentleman seftorw.
German aleman, -ana
li
VOCABULARY
Get-Hav
get: to — back (to go back)
volver (ue); to — down ba-
jarse; to — on (into) (a train,
boat, plane, car) subir a; to —
up levantarse; — to be llegar
a ser
giant gigante m.
girl muchacha ; (a very young girl)
nina; boys and — s los mucha-
chos, los niiios
give dar; I — , doy
glad contento, -a; to be — , estar
contento, -a (use de before a
following verb, which must be
in the infinitive), alegrarse de
glove guante m.
go ir; — to school ir a la escuela;
— home ir a casa; let's — ,
vamos; to — through pasar
por; to — over (through)
recorrer; to — with acom-
pafiar; to — to meet ir al en-
cuentro de; to — back volver
(ue); to — to bed acostarse
(ue); to — on one's way
seguir su camino; to — out
salir; what's going on? (what's
happening?) <; que* pasa? to —
away irse
god dios m.
going: — and coming vaiv6n m.
gold oro
good bueno, -a; — morning!
i buenos dias I — afternoon !
I buenas tardes ! — night !
i buenas noches ! — to me
bueno para mi, bueno para
conmigo; to have a — time
divertirse (ie, i); to be — for
(useful as) servir para, valer
good-bye ! j adios ! to say — f
despedirse (i) de
govern gobernar
government gobierno
governor gobernador m.
grand gran(de)
grandeur grandeza
grandfather abuelo
grandmother abuela
grandparents abuelos
grape uva
grass hierba
great gran(de) ; a — deal mucho
greater mayor; the — part la
mayor parte
greet saludar; dar la bienvenida a
group grupo
grow crecer
growl grunir
guide guia m. ; as (a) — , de guia;
(book) guia/.
half medio, -a; three days and a
— , tres dias y medio
hall sala
hand mano /. ; to shake — s with
dar la mano a; to wave one's
— , agitar la mano
happen ocurrir, pasar
happy contento, -a; to be — to
estar contento, -a de
has see have
hat sombrero
hate odiar
haughty presumido, -a
Havana la Habana
have (have in one's possession)
tener; I — , tengo; he has
He-Hur
VOCABULARY
lii
tiene; they — , tienen; (as the
auxiliary, or helping verb: "I
have bought") haber; to — to
(do something) tener que
(+ inf.)] — to do with tener
que ver con; to — (something)
done hacer + inf. (algo); in
such constructions as "Have him
doit!" the phrase usually begins
with que followed by the sub-
junctive mood, present tense,
as: i Que lo haga el !
he el; subject pronouns, except
Usted, Ustedes, are usually not
expressed if the reference to the
subject is clear
head cabeza
health salud /. ; to be in good — ,
estar bien de salud; to be in
better (worse) — , estar mejor
(peor) de salud
hear oir; to be heard oirse
height altura
held: to be — , celebrarse
help I i socorro !
her (to her) le; direct object le, la;
see also his
here aqui; ac£ (with verbs of mo-
tion)
hero h£roe m.
hide esconder
high alto, -a; (of price) caro, -a
highway carretera
him (to him) a 61, le; (direct ob-
ject) le, lo
himself, se, si (as object of a prepo-
sition)
his, su, sus; as for the other posses-
sive adjectives, the definite article
is frequently used before parts of
the body and articles of clothing:
tiene los ojos negros, his eyes
are black; pronoun suyo, -a
Hispanic hispdnico, -a
history historia
holiday dia de fiesta
home: at — , en casa; to go — ,
ir a casa
homesick: to be — , tener nos-
talgia de
honor: to — , honrar
hope esperar
horse caballo
hot caliente ; to be — (of a person)
tener calor (m.), (of the weather)
hacer calor (m.)
hotel hotel m.
hour hora
house casa
how como; j que . . . ! (in ex-
clamations such as " How
good!" j Que bueno!); — are
you? <J c6mo esta Usted?
(etc.)-, for — long? £ por
cuanto tiempo? note also its
use in such a construction as:
"/ didn't know how difficult it
was," No sabfa lo dificil que
era
howl aullar
huge tremendo, -a; enorme
human humano, -a
hundred ciento, cien (when used
immediately before the word it
modifies)', one — and five
ciento cinco
hungry: to be — , tener hambre
(/•)
hurry : in a — , de prisa; to be in a
— , tener prisa
liii
VOCABULARY
Hur-Kno
hurt (someone) hacer dano (a
alguien)
husband esposo
I
I yo; see also he
ice hielo; — cream helado
if si; as — to como para
ill enfermo, -a
imitate imitar
immense inmenso, -a
importance importancia
impossible imposible
impress impresionar
in en; por; — order to para;
(in the sense of "during") por;
at eight o'clock — the morning
a las ocho de la manana ; — the
meantime mientras tanto; —
the same way de la misma
manera
Inca Inca m.
increase aumentar(se)
indeed si que, a la verdad
independence independencia
independent independiente
Indian indio, -a
indicate indicar
industrial industrial
industry industria
inhabitant habitante m.
injure hacer dafio a
inn posada
innkeeper posadero
inside alii dentro
insist (on, upon) insistir (en)
intelligent inteligente
intense intense, -a
interest interns m.\ to — , inte-
resar
interested: to be — (in) tener
interns (en); to be more —
than ever in tener mas interns
que nunca en
interesting interesante
into en
invite invitar
is es; esta; see also am
island isla
isthmus istmo
it as the subject, 61 or ella; as the
object lo or la; see also he
Italy Italia
jacket chaqueta
January enero
jar jarro
journey viaje m.
July julio
June junio
just justo, -a; to have — , present
tense of acabar + de + infini-
tive of verb
K
keep: to — on seguir + present
participle (sigue trabajando);
to — to the right (left) llevar
la derecha (izquierda)
kick coz/. (of an animal)', (given
to a ball) puntapie* m.
kill matar
king rey m.
knock (at the door) llamar (a la
puerta)
know saber; I — , (yo) s6; in
the sense of 'be acquainted
Lad-Lit
VOCABULARY
liv
with" conocer; to — how sa-
ber; not to — what to do no
saber que hacer
lady dama, sefiora; young — ,
joven /.
lake lago
lamb cordero; — chop chuleta de
cordero
land tierra; native — , patria;
(of a plane) aterrizar; (from a
boat) desembarcar
language idioma m. ; lengua
large grande; larger mas grande
(que) ; the larger part la mayor
parte
last ultimo, -a; — night anoche;
— week (month, year) la se-
mana pasada (el mes, el ano
pasado); to — , durar
late tarde
Latin American latinoamericano,
-a
latter: the — , 6ste, etc.; see also
this
laugh reir; to — at reirse de
laughingstock hazmerreir m.
law ley/.
lazy perezoso, -a
lead conducir; I — , conduzco;
he — (past) condujo; to — (a,
the) life (of) llevar (una, la)
vida (de)
leader jefe m.
learn aprender (takes the preposi-
tion a before a following infini-
tive)
least: at — , al menos
leave (to go away) partir, salir;
(to leave behind) dejar; to take
— of despedirse (i) de
left izquierdo, -a; at (on) the — ,
a la izquierda
leg pierna
lemon limon m.
lend prestar
length: in — , de largo
lesson leccion/.
let permit ir; she lets him go le
permite ir; let's go vamos;
let's (study) vamos a (es-
tudiar); as an exhortation, the
force of the word is often con-
veyed by the use of the present
subjunctive after que: j que lo
haga 61 ! let him do it !
letter (correspondence) carta; (of
the alphabet) letra
liberator libertador m.
liberty libertad/.
library biblioteca
lie down acostarse (ue)
lieutenant teniente m.
life vida; to lead a — , llevar una
vida
lift: to — up levantar
light luz/. (pi. luces)
like (to be pleasing to) gustarle a
(me gusta la comida, I like the
meal) ; to be (very much) — ,
parecerse (mucho) a; como
line linea
literature literatura
little (size) pequeno, -a; (quantity)
poco, -a; a — bit un poco; for
such forms as "little Louis,
little mother" use tlte diminu-
tives; — by — , poco a poco
Iv
VOCABULARY
Liv-Min
live vivir
living: to earn one's — , ganarse
la vida
llama llama/.
long largo, -a; for a — time por
mucho tiempo
longer: no — , ya no
look: to — at mirar; to — for
(search) buscar; to — like
parecerse (a); to — after
(take care of) cuidar
loud fuerte; louder than ever
mds fuerte que nunca; in a —
voice en voz alta
loudly fuertemente
love querer; amar (poetic)] to
be in — with enamorado, -a
de
low bajo, -a
lump terron m.
lunch almuerzo; to — , almorzar
lying down acostado, -a
M
magnificent magnifico, -a
mahogany caoba
majority la mayor parte, mayoria
makehacer; to — atriphacerun
viaje; to — oneself under-
stood hacerse entender; to —
up (a bed) arreglar (una cama)
Tnnmfl mama
man hombre m.} a good — , un
buen hombre
manner manera, modo; in a
different — , de una manera
diferente; in the — , al modo de
mantilla (shawl) mantilla
manufacture manufactura
many muchos, -as; so — , tantos,
-as
map mapa m.
march marchar
marry casarse con
marvellous maravilloso, -a
Mary Maria
Mass misa (religious service)
master amo
matter: what's the — withPepe?
£ que tiene Pepe ? there's
nothing the — with him no
tiene nada; no — , no importa;
no — how -4- adjective por
mds + adjective que
me (direct and indirect object)
me; (object of preposition) mi
meal (lunch, dinner, etc.) comida
mean significar, querer decir; — s
medios m. pi.
meanwhile mientras tanto
meat carne/.
meet: to go to — , ir al encuentro
de
meeting reunion/.
melancholy melancolico, -a
Mexican mexicano, -a
Mexico Mexico (The official
Mexican spelling. See page 247,
"Quinito en America79)
middle: in the — , en medio de
midnight medianoche/.
midst: in the — of en medio de
mile milla
mill molino; windmill molino de
viento
million un mill6n
mine adj. mio, mia, etc.; noun
mina
mineral mineral
Min-Nex
VOCABULARY
Ivi
mingle mezclarse con
mission mision; missionary
misionero
Mississippi Misisipi m.
mixture mezcla
modern moderno, -a
moment momento
money dinero
month mes m.
moon luna; the — is shining hay
luna
moonlight luz de la luna; in the
— , a la luz de la luna
Moor moro
more mas; once — , una vez m&s,
otra vez; — than (him) mas
que (el) ; — than (ten) mas de
(diez)
morning manana; good — !
; buenos dias ! on the follow-
ing — , a la manana siguiente
mortar argamasa
most the sign of the absolute super-
lative when used before an ad-
jective: -isimo, -a (most tired
cansadisimo)
mother madre /.; Quinito's — ,
la madre de Quinito
motorcycle motocicleta /.
mountain montana; — range
sierra
mountainous montafioso, -a
mouth boca
move mover (ue)
movie (film) pelicula; — director
director de cine
mule mula
museum museo
music miisica
must in such expressions as "one
must study" simply use an im-
personal expression such as
hay que (estudiar); deber;
(to have to) tener que
mute mudo, -a
my mi, mis; see also his
name nombre m.\ my — is me
llamo; to be named llamarse;
what is the — of . . . ? £ c6mo
se llama . . . ? by — , de nombre
narrow estrecho, -a
nation nation/.
national nacional
native : — land patria
natural natural
near cerca (de); to draw — ,
acercarse
necessary necesario, -a
neednecesitar; hacerfaltaauno;
f altar a uno; I — the book, me
hace falta el libro
neighbor vecino, -a
neither ni; — ... nor ni . . . ni
. . .; tampoco
never nunca (if used after the verb
some negative word such as no,
sin, nadie, etc. must precede
the verb)\ — again nunca ja-
mas
new nuevo, -a
New Orleans la Nueva Orleans
New York Nueva York/.
news noticias /. pi.
newspaper peri6dico
newsstand puesto de peri<5dicos
next pr6ximo, -a; que viene
Ivii
VOCABULARY
Nig-Ori
night noche /.; at — , de noche,
por la noche
nine nueve; ninety noventa; —
hundred novecientos, -as; nine-
teen diez y nueve
ninth noveno, -a
no no; — one nadie (see also
never)
nobody nadie (see also never)
noise ruido
nor ni; neither ... — , ni . . .
ni
north norte w.; — American
norteamericano, -a
northeastern nordeste
northern del norte
not no (before the verb)
nothing nada (see never); —
but . . . nada mds que . . .
notice notar, fijarse en
now ahora; from — on de aqul
en adelante; — that ya que
nowadays hoy en dia
number numero
object objeto
obtain obtener, conseguir
occupy ocupar
ocean oceano
o'clock: at four — , a las cuatro;
it is one — , es la una; it is
six — , son las seis
October octubre
occupation ocupacion/.
occupy ocupar
occur ocurrir; it — s to me se
me ocurre
odd (strange) extrafio, -a
of de
offer ofrecer
official oficial
old viejo, -a; to be (ten years) — ,
tener (diez aiios); of — age de
viejo
older mayor; — than mayor que
ombu ombu (pi. ombues)
omit omitir
on en; — top of sobre; in suck
expressions as "on entering"
use al + the infinitive of the
verb (al entrar) ; — the follow-
ing morning a la mafiana
siguiente; — the road por el
camino; from now — , de aqui
en adelante
once una vez; — more otra vez,
una vez mas
one un, uno, una; for impersonal
one ("one learns by studying")
use the third person singular
reflexive form; the — , el que,
etc.
oneself usually denotes the use of
the reflexive in Spanish
only (in the sense of " sole ") unico,
-a; adv. solo, solamente; to be
— (fifteen) no tener mis de
(quince) anos; not — ... but
also no s61o . . . pero tambien
open abrir
opposed: to be — to oponerse a
or o
orange naranja
order: in — to para; to — ,
mandar, ordenar
organize organizar; to be organ-
ized organizarse
origin origen m.
Oth-Poo
VOCABULARY
Iviii
other otro; each — , usually de-
notes the use of the reflexive
construction in Spanish
ought use the proper form of the
verb deber
our nuestro, -a, -os, -as
out: to come — , salir; to take — ,
sacar; — doors al aire libre
over sobre; to go — , recorrer
overcoat sobretodo
overtake alcanzar
owe deber
ox buey m.
package paquete m.
painting cuadro
palace palacio
pampa pampa
Pan American panamericano, -a
Panama Panama m.
parasol parasol m.
parents padres (in Spanish pa-
rientes means "relatives")
park parque; Central — , el
Parque Central
part parte /.; the greater — , la
mayor parte; the third — , la
tercera parte; to play a — ,
hacer un papel; for my — ,
por mi parte
pass pasar; paso m.
patio patio
pay pagar
peace paz/.
people gente (used with the third
person singular of the verb)]
many — , mucha gente
per cent por ciento
perfectly perfectamente
perhaps tal vez
perish perecer
person persona
persuade persuadir
Peru el Peru
pet animal f avorito
petroleum petroleo; — wellpozo
de petroleo
Philip Felipe
picture (moving-picture film) peli-
cula
pictureshow cine m.
pie : apple — , pastel (m.) de man-
zana
pig cerdo, puerco
pity lastima; what a — ! j que*
lastima !
place lugar m., sitio; to whatever
— , adondequiera; to take — ,
celebrarse, verificarse, tener
lugar
plane aeroplano, avion m.
play (a game) jugar; (an instru-
ment) tocar; to be played (of a
show, a game) celebrarse; to —
a part hacer un papel
player jugador m.
please haga (Ud.) el favor de
pleased: to be — to tener gusto
en
pleasure gusto; with — , con
gusto; to take — in tener
gusto en
pocket bolsillo
poem poemaw.; poesia/.
poet poeta m.
poetess poetisa/.
pool (swimming pool) piscina
poor pobre
lix
VOCABULARY
Pop-Rel
populate poblar
population poblacion/.
port puerto
porter mozo
possession posesion/.
possible posible
post office casa de correos
pottery cerdmica
powerful poderoso, -a
prefer preferir (ie)
preparation preparative
prepare preparar
president presidente m.
press: printing — , prensa
pretend fingir
pretty bonito, -a; hermoso, -a
principal principal
printing: — press prensa
probable probable
probably probablemente, es pro-
bable que; note that the future
tense is frequently used to express
probability in present time
(seran las dos it is probably
two o'clock)
problem problema m.
proclaim proclamar
produce producir
product producto
project proyecto
promise prometer
promptly pronto
pronounce pronunciar; to be pro-
nounced pronunciarse
pronunciation pronunciation/.
protect proteger
provided (with) provisto de; —
that con tal que
province provincia
provision provisi6n/.
put poner; to — oneself ponerse
pyramid pirdmide/.
quarter (one-fourth) cuarto; (dis-
trict) barrio
question pregunta; to — , pre-
guntar; to ask — s hacer
preguntas
R
race (of people) raza
railroad ferrocarril m. ; — station
estacion del ferrocarril
rain lluvia; to — , llover (ue)
rapid rapido, -a
rapidly rapidamente
rather adv. has tan te; mas bien
reach llegar a (in the sense of
"travel")-, alcanzar (to get
within grasp of)
read leer
realize darse cuenta de
reason razon/.; for that — , por
eso
rebel rebelarse
recall recordar (ue)
receive recibir
recognize reconocer
red rojo, -a
refreshment refresco
refuse negarse (ie) a
regain: to — consciousness voL
ver en si
region region/.
reign reinar
relatives parientes m. pi.
religion religi6n/.
Rem-Sch
VOCABULARY
remain quedarse; —-to be (seen,
done) quedar por (ver, hacer)
remember recordar (ue), acor-
darse (ue) de
remind : to — one of recordarle a
uno
reply responder, contestar
represent representar
republic republica
resemble parecerse a
resource recurso
respect respeto; respetar; re-
spected respetado, -a
rest (remainder) resto
restaurant restaurante m.
return volver (ue); — trip viaje
de regreso
retire retirar
retrace: — one's steps volver
sobre sus pasos
revolution revoluci6n/.
rhythm ritmo
rice arroz m.\ chicken and — ,
arroz con polio
rich rico, -a
riches las riquezas
ride paseo; to take a — , dar un
paseo (en coche, a caballo, etc.);
to — a horse montar a caballo;
to — on (the donkey) montar
en (el burro)
right derecho, -a; on the — , a la
derecha; to be — , tener raz6n;
to be all — , estar bien
ring anillo (jewel)
rise levantarse; (of the sun) sa-
lir
rival rival m.
river rio
road camino; on the — , en el
camino, along the — , por el
camino
roast asado, -a
Robert Roberto
rftle papel m.\ to play a — , hacer
un papel
Roman romano, -a
room cuarto; to be — for caber
(Is there room for this in the
suitcase? <rCabe esto en la
maleta?)
ruin ruina
run correr
rush: — hour la bora de la aglo-
meracion
S
sad triste
said: no sooner — than done
dicho y hecho
sail navegar
saint santo, san
sale venta; on — , en venta
salesman vendedor m.
same mismo, -a; in the — way
de la misma manera; the —
as lo mismo que
savage salvaje
save salvar
say decir; I — , digo; he said
dijo; I shall — , dir6; they(tm-
persond) — , se dice; to be said
decir se; to — good-bye des-
pedirse (i); I should — so!
I ya lo creo ! that is to — f eso
es
scarcely casi
scene escena
school escuela; to go to — , ir a la
escuela
Ixi
VOCABULARY
Sco-So
scold refiir
search busca; in — of en busca
de; to — for buscar
season estaci6n /. ; tourist — , la
estacidn de los turistas
second segundo, -a
see ver; to — them verlos; to
remain to be seen quedar por
ver
seem parecer; it seems (to them)
(les) parece; it seems so parece
que si; it seems to me me
parece
seize coger; I — , cojo
sell vender; to be sold venderse
send enviar
September septiembre
serve servir (i)
session sesion /.; to be in — ,
estar reunido, -a
set (of the sun) ponerse; to — out
ponerse en camino
settler poblador m.
seven siete; — hundred sete-
cientos, -as; seventy-five
thousand setenta y cinco mil
several varies, -as; algunos, -as;
unos, -as
shade sombra; in the — , a la
sombra
shake: to — hands with dar la
mano a
she ella; see also he
sheep oveja
shepherd pastor m.
shine : the sun is shining hace sol;
the moon is shining hay luna
shoot fusilar; (of a moving-picture
film) rodar (ue)
short (of stature) bajo, -a; (of
time) poco, -a; a — time ago
hace poco tiempo
shout grito; to — , gritar
show mostrar (ue); (point out)
ensenar
side lado ; on the other — , al otro
lado; at one — , a un lado;
by the — of al lado de
sight-seeing de turismo; — bus
autobus de turismo
sign (signal) sena
significance significado
silver plata
since desde
sing cantar
single solo, -a
sister hermana
sit: to — down sentarse (ie)
site sitio
situated situado, -a
six seis
skyscraper rascacielos m.
sleep dormir (ue, u); to go to — ,
dormirse
sleeping dormido, -a; — car
coche dormitorio; — cap gorro
de dormir
slowly despacio
small pequefio, -a
smile sonreir
smoke humo
snow nieve/.
so tan (comparison)] I think — ,
creo que si; I don't think — ,
no lo creo; — much tanto, -a;
— many tantos, -as; often
translated by lo when standing
for a statement (I told him
so, se lo dije); — that
(in such a way that) de tal
boi-bur
VOCABULARY
Ixii
modo que; (meaning "thus")
asi
soldier soldado
some algun, alguno, -a; un
poco de; — (seven men) unos
(siete hombres)
someone alguien
something algo; — elseotracosa
sometimes a veces
somewhat adv. algo
son hijo
song canci6n/.
soon pronto; as — as tan pronto
como; — after (entering) a
poco de (entrar)
sooner: no — said than done
dicho y hecho
sorry: to be — , sentir (ie, i)
soup sopa
source fuente/.
south sur m.y southern del sur
southwest sudoeste m.
Spain Espana
Spanish espanol, -a; — America
la America espanola; — style
a la espanola
speak hablar
spectator espectador m.
spend gastar (of money); pasar
(of time)
spirit espiritu m.
spoon: large — , cuchara; small
— , cucharita
square plaza; adj. cuadrado, -a
stand: where it — s donde se
halla, donde estd
star estrella
start: to — to (set out to)
echarse a + inf.
state estado
station estacion/.
statue estatua
steamboat vapor m.
step paso; to retrace one's — s
volver sobre sus pasos
still todavia
stock: — farm ganaderia
stone piedra
stop (intransitive) detenerse;
(transitive) cesar de
store tienda
story (of a house) piso; (tale)
historia, cuento
street calle /.; up the — , calle
arriba
strike: to — (twelve) dar las
(doce)
strong fuerte
student estudiante, alumno
study estudiar
style estilo; in — , a la moda;
Spanish (French) — , a la
espanola (francesa)
subway ferrocarril subterraneo;
also known as "el Metro "from
"Metropolitano"
succeed: to — in lograr + inf.
success exito; to achieve — ,
lograr exito
such (a) tal; tan
suddenly de pronto
sugar azucar m.
sun sol w.; the — is shining hace
sol; the — is setting se pone el
sol
Sunday domingo
sunlight: in the — , a la luz del sol
sunset: at — , a la puesta del sol
surprise sorprender
surprised sorprendido, -a
bdii
VOCABULARY
Sur-Tim
surrender rendirse (i)
suspend suspender
sweetheart novia
swim nadar
swimming pool piscina
swineherd porquero
sword espada
symbol simbolo
table mesa
tail cola; to wag its — , mover la
cola
take llevar (carry) ; coger (seize) ;
tomar; to — out (from) sacar;
to — off quitarse (remove),
despegar (to leave the earth) ;
to — a trip hacer un viaje; to
— a walk (ride) dar un paseo;
to — pleasure in tener gusto en ;
to — leave of despedirse de; to
— away from quitar de; to —
advantage of aprovecharse de
talk hablar; to — to each other
hablarse
tall alto, -a; the — man el alto
tamale tamal m.
taxi taximetro, taxi
teach ensenar
teacher profesor m., profesora/.
telegram telegrama m.
tell decir, contar, relatar
temple templo
ten diez
terrible terrible
territory territorio
Texan tejano, -a
Texas Tejas
than que; older — , mayor que;
more — ten (eleven) m£s de
diez (once)
thank dar las gracias a; — s!
i gracias !
that (close to the person spoken to)
ese, etc.; (distant, in the sense
of that "yonder") aquel, etc.;
— which lo que; all forms,
except neuter, are accented, as
pronouns
the el, los; la, las
theater teatro
their su, sus; see also his
them (direct object) los, las; (in-
direct object) les
themselves reflexive with se
then luego; entonces; (after-
wards) despues
there alii; (with a verb of motion)
alia; — are hay
these see this
they ellos, ellas; see also he;
— who los que
thing cosa
think pensar (ie); — of pensar
en; (in the sense of "believe")
creer
third tercer(o), -a
thirsty: to be — , tener sed (/.)
thirty treinta
this este, etc.; (an idea or state-
ment) esto; all forms, except
the neuter, are accented when
used as pronouns
those see that
thousand mil; seventy- five — ,
setenta y cinco mil
through por; to go — , recorrer
throw echar; — oneself echarse
time (in the sense of "occasion")
Tir-Upo
VOCABULARY
Ixiv
vez/.; (for) the first — , (por)
la primera vez; several — s
varias veces; at the same — ,
a la vez; from — to — , de vez
en cuando; (hours, days, etc.)
tiempo; on — , a tiempo; at
one — , en un tiempo; what
time is it? <j qu6 hora es?
to have a good — , divertirse
(ie, i)
tire cansar
tired cansado, -a
title titulo
to a; (in the sense of "in order
to") para; cruel — me cruel
para conmigo
tobacco tabaco
today hoy
together junto, -a
tomorrow mafiana; day after — ,
pasado manana
too demasiado; (also) tambi&i
tooth diente m.
top: from the — of de lo mas alto
de
tourist turista m.
toward(s) hacia
tower torre/.
toy juguete m.
trace huella
train tren m.
tram(way) tranvia m.
translate traducir
transport trasporte m.
travel viajar; hacer un viaje; — s
viajes m. pi.
traveler viajero
treachery traici6n/.
tree irbolm.
tremendous tremendo, -a
trip viaje m.\ to take a — , hacer
un viaje, viajar; return — ,
viaje de regreso
truck camion m.
true: to be — , ser (la) verdad
trunk tronco (of a tree)
truth verdad/.; in — , a la verdad
try tratar (de)
tunnel tiinel m.] Holland — , el
tunel de Holland
turn: in (his) — , a su vez; to —
back volverse; — around vol-
verse
twenty veinte
two dos
type tipo
typical tipico, -a
umbrella paraguas m.
unceasingly sin cesar
uncle tio; — and aunt lostfos; —
Sam el tio Sam
under bajo, debajo de
understand en tender (ie), com-
prender; to make oneself
understood hacerse entender
underwear ropa interior
unfortunate desafortunado, -a
unite unir
United States los Estados Unidos
university univer sidad /.
until hasta (que)
up: — to now hasta ahora; to
wake — , despertarse (ie); —
the street calle arriba; (up-
wards) hacia arriba
upon sobre; to come — , en-
contrarse (ue) con
Ixv
VOCABULARY
Upw-Who
upwards hacia arriba
us nos; (object of preposition)
nosotros
use usar; to be used usarse; to
be of — as servir para
used the sign of the imperfect tense,
denoting an action repeated in
the past: "he used to study''
"/ used to see him frequently''
vacation vacaciones /. pi.; to be
on — , estar de vacaciones
vain vano; in — , en vano
valley valle m.
vegetable legumbre/.
vendor vendedor m.
venerate venerar
very muy; (when used alone)
mucho, -a
viceroy virrey m.
view vista; in — of en vista de
village aldea
visit visitar; visita
voice voz /. ; in a low — , en voz
baja; in a loud — , en voz alta
W
wag: to — its tail mover (ue) la
cola
wait: to — for esperar
wake: to — up despertarse (ie)
walk paseo; to — , andar, ca-
minar, ir a pie; to take a—,
dar un paseo
wall muralla
want querer (ie, i) ; desear
war guerra
water agua (el agua but el agua
fresca) /.
wave agitar; to — one's hand
agitar la mano
way: to go on one's — , seguir
su camino; in this — , de esta
manera; in the same — , de la
misma manera
we nosotros
wealth riqueza
wear llevar (of clothes, etc.)
weather tiempo; to be good — ,
hacer buen tiempo
weep llorar
welcome saludar; dar la bienve-
nida a
well adv. bien; noun pozo
west adj. del oeste, occidental;
noun oeste m.
what que; — ? £ que? — is the
name of . . . ? £ como se llama
. . . ? in exclamations such as
"what a beautiful girl!" the
construction follows this example
in Spanish: \ que muchacha
mas hermosa !
whatever cualquier(a)
when cuando; — ? <icu£ndo?
where donde; — ? <i donde?
wherever dondequiera; por
dondequiera
which el cual, etc.; that — , lo
que; in — , (en) donde
while mientras (que); for a long
— , por mucho tiempo
white bianco, -a
who quien; — ? <j qui&i?
whoever quienquiera
whole entero, -a; todo, -a
whom quien
Who-Zon
VOCABULARY
Ixvi
whose de quien; cuyo; — ?
«i de qui6n ?
why? <J por qu6?
width: in — , de ancho
wild salvaje
win ganar
wind viento; — mill molino de
viento
wine vino
wish querer (ie, i)
with con; — me conmigo; to
have to do — , tener que ver con
withdraw retirarse
within dentro de
without sin
woman mujer/.
wonderful maravilloso, -a
wood madera; (in the sense of
"forest") bosque
word palabra
work trabajo; (literary or artis-
tic composition) obra; to — ,
trabajar
world mundo
worried preocupado, -a
worry preocuparse
worse peor
worship rendir culto a
worth: to be — , valer
Would that (in exhortations)
\ Ojald (que) . . . !
wound herir (ie, i)
write escribir; to be written
escribirse
yankee yanqui
year ano; see also have
yes si; he answered — , res-
pondio que si
yesterday ayer
yet todavia
you tu (familiar sing.)', Usted
(polite sing.)] vosotros (famil-
iar pi.) Ustedes (polite pi.)
young joven; — man joven m.\
— woman joven /.
younger menor; — than menor
que
yours suyo, etc.
youth juventud/.
zone zona
INDEX
(This index covers the grammatical points treated in the text and in the verb
appendix).
Abbreviations 514
Abstract nouns 393, 394
ac& and alii 282, 283
Accentuation 513
Adjectives 53 7-543 ; agreement of
u, 449, 450; comparison of
196,282; compound forms 449;
demonstrative 109, no; femi-
nine forms of adjectives of na-
tionality and of those ending in
-6n, -&n and -or 471 ; interroga-
tive 152; negative 153; plural
forms u ; position n, 461, 462;
possessive forms 76, 77; short-
ened forms 61; superlative de-
gree 196; absolute superlative
281, 282; use as adverbs 461;
use with ser and estar 462
Adverbial conjunctions 273, 274, 288
Adverbs 153, 544; accentuation of
adverbs 135; algo and nada as
adverbs 299; con + noun =
adverb 299; adverbs ending in
-mente 135, 407; mucho as an
adverb 299; negatives in com-
parisons 153; adverbs similar
to adjectives 407
algo as an adjective 299
all& see aca
Alphabet 515-517
antes de 423
Apocopation of forms 61, 176, 265,
266, 306, 307
Articles: definite articles used with
names of cities and countries
1 28 ; used as demonstratives be-
fore de and que 17; used as
substitutes for possessive ad-
jectives 183; used before mod-
ified names of persons 470;
neuter definite articles used
with adjectives to form ab-
stract nouns 393, 394; used
with variable adjectives to ex-
press "how" 393, 394; used
with possessive pronouns 424;
indefinite articles 135; omis-
sion before certain unmodified
predicate nouns 135; use in
plural 146
Become: "to become" how ex-
pressed 423, 433
Capitalization 513, 514
Causation: verbs of 476
Collective nouns 439, 440
Commands 18, 24, 77, 78, 201
Comparison: of adjectives 196, 197;
negative adverbs and pronouns
in comparison 153
Compound adjectives 449; nouns
448,449
Conditional sentences 322, 361, 362,
370
Conjunctions: adverbial 273, 274;
the conjunction "but" 353, 354
conocer 84
kvii
Ixviii
INDEX
Dative of interest 476
deber (de) 377, 378
Demonstrative see Adjectives, Pro-
nouns
entre 408
estar 407, 408
Exclamations 146, 152, 513
Gender 5, 6, 493, 494, 495
Gerund: use with pronoun objects
18, 24, 201 ; use in a phrase 257,
377; compound forms 257
gustar 24
haber 61, 109; impersonal use 109,
236; use with de + infinitive 66
hacer: use in expressions of time 23
Idiomatic usage 549-555
Imperative mood: familiar affirma-
tive 202,306,313,314; negative
323, 324; polite 77, 78, 202;
position of object pronouns 18,
24, 201
Impersonal verbs 109, 236
Indicative mood 202
Infinitive : preceded by certain prep-
ositions 61, 62, 176, 195; not
preceded by a preposition 61;
used with object pronouns 18,
24, 201 ; used in a phrase 195,
377; compound forms 195;
used as a noun 413, 414
Interrogatives 152; see Adjectives,
Pronouns
Know: "to know how,11 "to be
able" 146
lake: "to like" 24
lo 95, 393, 394, 4*4
mis 146, 153
menos 408
Negation 49; alguno 216; no 49;
no...nada 49; no...nadie
49; no ... ni 49; ni . . . ni 49;
no ... ninguno 49; no ... nunca
49; sin que 235; tampoco 49;
use of negative adverb, adjec-
tive or pronoun after antes de
423
Nouns 530-531; adjectives used as
nouns 484; collective nouns
439,440; compound nouns 448,
449; nouns denoting a whole
class 109; gender of nouns 5, 6,
493, 495 » infinitives used as
nouns 413, 414; plural of nouns,
6, 385; nouns used in adjectival
phrases 168
Numerals: cardinals 126; ordinals
J75, Jy6; cien 126; xnill6n de
126; shortened forms 126, 176
ojala 283, 484
para 484, 485
"Passage of time" expressions 23
Passive voice 117, 175, 440, 574, 575;
reflexive used for passive 38,
"7, 394, 395
Past participle: used as an adjec-
tive 175; as a noun 484; in
absolute phrases 218; with
tener 322, 323
poder 146
por and para 484, 485; por + in-
finitive 62
Possession 76, 183, 385, 386
Prepositions 545-548; antes de 423;
compound prepositions 352,
353; con 299, 300; entre 408;
infinitive after prepositions 61,
62, 176; menos 408; no prepo-
sition after certain verbs 61;
personal a 62; por and para
INDEX
Ixix
484, 485; por + (mas) adjec-
tive que 339
Probability: the expression of 288,
360, 361, 377, 378
Pronouns 531-536; demonstrative
pronouns 17, 182; indefinite
pronouns 431, 432; interroga-
tive pronouns 152; negative
pronouns 153; personal pro-
nouns 17, 18; direct object 17,
18, 161; clarification of direct
object pronoun 168; duplicat-
ing a noun or pronoun object
385; indirect object 24, 161;
clarification of indirect object
pronoun 168; the dative of in-
terest 476; duplicating a noun
or pronoun object 30; position
of object pronouns 17, 161, 162,
201; prepositional or terminal
object pronouns 29; reflexive
pronouns 37, 48, 135, 407; sub-
ject pronouns 18; possessive
pronouns 385, 386; relative pro-
nouns 118, 119, 153, 432
Pronunciation 515-520
Punctuation 513
que: in the sense of "for" 201; to
introduce an elliptical clause
460, 461
querer 161
Questions 513
Quotations 513
Reflexive see Verb
Relative see Pronouns, Adjectives
saber 84; saber and poder 146
se for lc, les 168
Sequence of tenses 220, 225, 226,
33°, 503, 504
•er 407, 408
Stress 520
Subjunctive mood 202, 203, 227;
formation 203, 204, 211, 212,
219, 220, 226, 227; use in noun
clauses dependent upon verbs
of volition 203, upon verbs of
emotion, doubt or denial 210,
upon impersonal verbs express-
ing opinion 219, upon negative
or interrogative verbs of know-
ing and believing 235, upon
verbs of causation 248, upon
such verbs as interesar and pre-
ocupar 257; use in dependent
adjectival clauses referring to
indefinite or non-existent ante-
cedents 249, employing the
forms quienquiera or cualquier
257, introduced by por + (mas)
+ adjective + que 339; use in
dependent adverbial clauses im-
plying indefiniteness or uncer-
tainty, future time or contin-
gency with respect to the action
of the main verb 273, introduced
by dondequiera, como quiera,
etc. 288, introduced by tal vez
305, introduced by por + (mis)
+ adverb + que 339; use in in-
dependent clauses expressing
desire or hope (optative) 264,
265, 283, exhorting others and
oneself to perform an action in
present time (hortatory) 265,
266, 305, 306, as a polite sub-
stitute for the post-preterite
313; use in conditional sen-
tences 322, 361, 362, 370; use
in expressions o! "indifferent
alternative" 329; use in inti-
mate negative commands 323,
324; review of the subjunctive
mood 500-503
Ixx
INDEX
Substantives 530-53$
Syllabication 519, 520
tener as auxiliary 322, 323; tener
+ que infinitive 378
Tenses 523-529; future 288, 377,
470; future perfect 248, 288;
future subjunctive 339; imper-
fect 95, 96; pluperfect subjunc-
tive 331; post-preterite 360,
361, 377, 47o; post-preterite
perfect 235; present perfect
subjunctive 330; preterite 95,
96, 102, 103; preterite perfect
234, 235; progressive forms 70
Tilde: the use of 513
Time: "passage of time" expres-
sions 23
unos, -as 146
Verbs
abrir 55, 591
adquirir 585
alcanzar 587-588
andar 102, 576
argiiir 590
averiguar 588
bendecir 591
buscar 587
caber 102, 469, 577
caer, 103, 577
cerrar 584
coger 588
conducir 102
conocer 84, 589
construir 590
contar 584
continual 589
creer 103
cubrir 55, 591
dar 25, 84, 103, 212, 577
decir 30, 55, 78, 103, 313, 577, 578
delinquir 587
descubrir 55
distinguir 587
dormir 586
elegir 591
enviar 589
errar 584
escribir 591
estar 102, 103, 104, 212, 578
freir 591
grufiir 589
haber 102, 109, 313, 377, 378, 578
hacer 30, 55, 103, 313, 578-579
huir 168
imprimir 591
ir 84, 96, 204, 212, 305, 306, 313,
579
jugar 584
leer 55, 103, 500
morir 55, 440, 591
oir 103, 579
oler 585
pagar 587
pedir 586
perder 585
poder 102, 579
poner 55, 102, 313, 580
prender 591
proveer 583, 591
querer 103, 161, 580
relr 586
resolver 591
romper 55, 591
saber 84, 102, 212, 580
salir 78, 314, 58i
sentir 585, 586
ser 84, 96, 103, 204, 212, 314, 440,
58i
tener 102, 314, 322, 323, 581
traducir 581, 582
traer 55, 582
valer3i4, 582
veneer 588
INDEX
tori
vcnir 78, 103, 314, 582-583
vcr 55, 96, 583
volver 55, 585, 591
Accent-changing verbs 162, 182;
consonant-changing verbs 68,
69, 70, 147, 176, 211, 212;
gerund, see Gerund; infinitive,
see Infinitive ; intransitive verbs
used reflexively 201 ; mood, see
Imperative, Indicative, Sub-
junctive; past participle, see
Past Participle; passive voice
117, 574-575; reciprocal verbs
48, 49; reflexive verbs 37, 48,
83, 135, 201, 266, 267, 394, 3955
regular verbs 6, 12, 18, 5^3-573;
synopses of verbs 6, 12, 18, 25,
30, 266, 267, 340; tenses, see
Tenses; vowel-changing verbs
38,47,48,54,55, 211, 212, 219,
220; verbs whose stems end in
a strong vowel 55; whose stems
end in -uir 127, 128; whose
stem ends in -11 or -ft 589
Voice: passive voice 369, 370, 394,
395
Word order 521
ya 423, 424
137 380
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11